《Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe》 Prologue Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C In the vast expanse of the universe, countless beings exist. Once, there was a race that arrogantly believed they were the only intelligent life forms in the cosmos, calling themselves ¡®humans¡¯ and referring to other species as ¡®aliens¡¯¡ªthe proud ¡®Terra race.¡¯ The ¡®Lubaran race¡¯ possessed an ultra-advanced civilization that pioneered space trade and the beginning of a space society with their exceptional scientific technology. The ¡®Meias race¡¯ utilized abilities powered by a special energy that the Terra race referred to as ¡®fantasy¡¯ or ¡®magic¡¯¡­ In addition to these, there were many diverse beings living within the space society that connected numerous stars and planets. Among them, there occasionally appeared beings so incomprehensible that mortal minds could not fathom them. Intellectual life forms of the space society called them by various names: ¡®Great Beings,¡¯ ¡®Gods,¡¯ ¡®Cthulhu,¡¯ ¡®Cosmic Gods,¡¯ and so on. However, these beings did not identify themselves by race or name. They simply existed, incomprehensible and unreachable by anyone. People began to collectively refer to these entities as ¡®Outer Gods,¡¯ beings from beyond the cosmos. [ ¡­No, damn it, so you¡¯re saying I¡¯ve become one of those things now. ] [ It¡¯s already absurd enough that I¡¯ve reincarnated into a sci-fi world like something out of StarXraft, but this¡­ ] [ Oh, look at this. Even the language is coming out like some fantasy world system. ] ¡­It seems I have reincarnated as a cosmic horror entity in a sci-fi universe. s?a??h th? N?v?lFire.n?t website on G??gl? to access chapters of n?vels early and in the highest quality. Chapter 1: Outer God Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C Suddenly, I died. I was an ordinary man in my late twenties living in South Korea, and in a rather classic manner, I was hit by an 8-ton truck with a broken handle and died. Just when I thought it was the end, surprisingly, I opened my eyes again. What is this? Did I come back to life? Or did I perhaps come to the afterlife after dying? Everything around me is incredibly dark, and I can¡¯t move my body at will. Judging by that, it seems like it could be the afterlife. While I was thinking that, ¡®Universe, Universal Treaty, Space Society¡¯s beginning, foreign news, absolute being, my identity¡­¡¯ Suddenly, an enormous amount of information started pouring into my mind. An amount so vast that if I were still human, my brain would have exploded instantly. But I was able to accept that information without any pain or change, as if it were nothing. No, what is this? I can¡¯t understand what is happening right now. Information about the galaxies of the universe, their locations¡­ and even ways to get there are flooding in¡­ Universe? Galaxies? What is all this? The information entering my mind is something I¡¯ve never seen before. Obviously, this is not the world I lived in, and I have not been reincarnated as a human. This place is a world set in a space opera like ¡°Star Wars¡± or ¡°StarCraft.¡± And I¡­ seem to have been reincarnated as something called an ¡®Outer God.¡¯ An absolute being close to a god¡­ commonly referred to as a ¡®Cosmic Horror¡¯ or ¡®Cthulhu.¡¯ With a body as massive as a decent-sized planet, writhing tentacles, and an indiscernible form, I had become something indescribably horrific. [Shit¡­] A curse slipped out of my mouth without me realizing it. Hmm, at least I have a mouth to speak with. No, wait. It¡¯s a strange feeling of being able to speak without having a mouth? Moreover, the words feel like they are being directly transmitted into my mind, like some kind of system language or world language from a novel. ¡­I don¡¯t even know what I¡¯m saying, damn it. Anyway, I could tell that I was in a seriously messed-up situation. To put it simply, I am now an Outer God like Cthulhu, right? Hahaha, this is insane. The information about what I can do now is flooding into my mind, and just skimming through it makes me feel like I¡¯m going insane. Is this the mental collapse attack of an Outer God¡­? Yeah, just being near me makes most life forms dizzy and mentally unstable. The moment they see, hear, or perceive ¡®me¡¯ in any way, they either die or become insane unless they have mental defense measures in place. It¡¯s an ability truly worthy of being called an Outer God. But is that all? Of course not. There¡¯s all sorts of stuff. Creating life, destroying planets, creating planets, creating stars, creating black holes, tearing dimensions, crossing dimensions¡­ it¡¯s almost omnipotent, isn¡¯t it? In fact, among the information that just entered my mind, there was information about the entire universe. But if crossing dimensions is possible, does that mean I can return to the Earth where I originally died? [¡­¡­] Hmm¡­ no, let¡¯s not do that. Even if I were to return, what would I do in this form? It would be the end of Earth in an instant¡­ What can I do? Since I¡¯ve been reincarnated like this, I might as well live this way. ¡­But what do these Outer Gods do with their lives? They don¡¯t die or disappear forever anyway. It seems like it would be incredibly boring. Just floating around in the universe like this would be too dull. Is this why gods create worlds, create life forms¡­ and go around threatening and tormenting them? Because they have nothing else to do. Isn¡¯t there something fun to do? It¡¯s been less than 10 minutes since I reincarnated, and I¡¯m already bored. [Oh.] At that moment, I sensed the presence of some life form nearby, and I inadvertently made a sound. ¡­I need to be careful. Just hearing my voice would drive most life forms insane. I should try to keep my thoughts to myself and avoid speaking as much as possible. Anyway, about 200,000 km away, something like a spaceship suddenly appeared. Did it warp here through a wormhole? It seems to be one of the intelligent life forms living in this universe¡¯s space society. Hmm¡­ it looks like a tourist ship of the Terra race? The Terra race is the most similar to humans from my previous life. To shake off this boredom, I want to meet them. Anyway, whatever they do, they can¡¯t threaten me, so there¡¯s no worry about being attacked or hurt. Hmm, but just by getting close to them, their minds might collapse and all¡­ Oh, I found a useful ability. ¡®Clone Creation¡¯ It allows me to create a clone that shares my senses. The clone can hardly use any of the abilities my main body possesses and instead has the appropriate abilities of the species it mimics, so it won¡¯t be much of a threat to those fragile beings. Srrrk©¤ S~?a??h the ??v?lF?re.?et website on G??gl? to access chapters of n?vels early and in the highest quality. As I created the clone, something that would be smaller than a speck of dust from my perspective was formed. After all, my main body is about the size of a decent-sized planet. Anyway, I completed the clone by recalling my previous appearance. Hmm, this is a bit lacking. It didn¡¯t perfectly replicate my appearance. Let¡¯s just tweak the body to be a bit more muscular, enlarge the eyes a bit¡­ Oh, and maybe raise the nose bridge just a tad? Hehe, it¡¯s done. Terra Race Clone! Alright, then I¡¯ll use material creation to make a suitable personal spaceship and put my clone in it. Now! Let¡¯s go! # Pzzzt©¤ Using the wormhole, a massive spaceship appeared in the middle of space in an instant. ¡°Thank you for visiting Galaxy B-02345, commonly known as the ¡®Skull Nebula.¡¯ We at ¡®Lacstol Tours¡¯ sincerely appreciate your patronage¡­¡± ¡°Wow~ Dad, look over there.¡± ¡°That¡¯s the Skull Nebula. It really does look like a skull up close, doesn¡¯t it?¡± ¡°We¡¯re going inside, right?¡± ¡°Yeah. There¡¯s a development-prohibited planet managed by the Lubaran race, and they¡¯ve turned it into a space safari for tourism purposes. You can see some very rare creatures there.¡± ¡°Oh¡­ is that the guidebook? I want to read it too.¡± The tourism company ¡®Lacstol Tours,¡¯ created by the Terra businessman ¡®Hank Yu,¡¯ is a colossal enterprise that owns a staggering 500 tourist ships, each capable of carrying 1,000 passengers by Terra standards. Today, they are transporting hundreds of tourists from various species to a place known as the ¡®Skull Nebula,¡¯ a massive nebula named for its skull-like shape formed by interstellar matter when viewed from afar. Within this nebula are several development-prohibited planets managed by the ¡®Lubaran Race,¡¯ one of the highest-ranking nations in space society. These planets remain in their pristine, undeveloped state, making them extremely popular as tourist destinations. The tourist ship was heading smoothly towards this destination without any issues. Although space pirates occasionally attack tourist ships, Lacstol Tours is a very large company, so their ships are well-armed. Additionally, this area is under the surveillance of the Lubaran Race, with their patrol ships frequently flying around. In other words, it¡¯s generally a safe journey. Everyone, both crew and passengers, was at ease until that moment. [Oh.] A very short and concise phrase suddenly entered their minds. ¡°?!¡± ¡°Ugh!! Argh!!¡± ¡°Aaaah!¡± ¡°Kyah! Aah!¡± And at that moment, Terra race members and several other species with low mental immunity began to suffer from severe headaches due to that single word etched into their minds. Some even vomited or collapsed with nosebleeds. ¡°Ugh¡­! What is this?¡± ¡°What¡¯s going on here¡­!¡± Even the species with high mental immunity were barely holding on, clutching their throbbing heads to avoid collapsing. Just one word. The scene was caused by a single word, ¡°Oh.¡± ¡°What are you doing! Quickly deploy the Mind Barrier!¡± A young man from the Meias race, who was relatively unscathed, shouted at the crew. However, most of the crew were Terra race members, who had low mental immunity and were in chaos. ¡°Damn it¡­ Where¡¯s the emergency control panel! I¡¯ll do it myself.¡± The Meias man stood up. Although he looked almost identical to the Terra race, the amount of energy he possessed was on a different level. He belonged to a race that used energy technology commonly referred to as ¡®magic.¡¯ But then, an elderly Meias man next to him stopped him. ¡°Stop¡­ This isn¡¯t something that can be handled with a Mind Barrier¡­¡± The old man seemed to understand what was happening. He was trembling and sweating profusely. ¡°Master, do you know what¡¯s going on right now?¡± The young Meias man asked his master with a serious expression. The old man, who was called master, nodded with a resigned look. ¡°¡­A god, a god has come. Something that should never be encountered in this universe. Something we should live without even knowing it exists¡­ that has come¡­!¡± He then started muttering that they were all going to die. There was no way to survive. Running away was futile; they would all meet their end here. If he had known this would happen, he would never have ventured into space¡­ ¡°Damn it¡­¡± The young Meias man began to gather the energy, or ¡®mana,¡¯ within his body, intending to cast a protective spell. But at that moment. ¡°¡­What the hell, this is crazy. What¡¯s going on?¡± Suddenly, a young Terra man in casual clothes appeared out of nowhere. Chapter 2: Encounter with the Unknown Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 2 Since it was a bit too far to travel by spaceship, I used my main body¡¯s ability to teleport the spaceship close to the tourist ship. To avoid startling them, I teleported it just outside their detection range and then flew towards the tourist ship. ¡°¡­Ah! Good. I can speak normally with the clone.¡± The clone was an exact replica of my former self, so there was no discomfort in moving or speaking. Moreover, it didn¡¯t seem to destroy anyone¡¯s mind just by encountering or talking to them. Living like this, almost as a form of amusement, might be enjoyable. I could keep my main body hidden far away in space to prevent any potential victims and send out clones to observe and directly experience their lives. Hmm, but would I need an identity for that? I could create one if necessary, but I would need to register my clone¡¯s information in the Terra race database¡­ Alternatively, altering the perception of the entire universe might be quicker. ¡­But that¡¯s such an absurdly omnipotent ability that I don¡¯t really want to use it. It¡¯s like a game. Using cheats makes progress and growth fast and fun at first, but it quickly becomes boring. Since I have become an eternal being that must live even if the universe disappears, I can¡¯t afford to make the game boring too quickly. I should enjoy it leisurely and slowly. ¡°Oh, I¡¯ve arrived.¡± While I was thinking that, I reached a distance close enough to touch the tourist ship. ¡­But how do I get in there? Will they let an outsider in? What if they suddenly attack, thinking I¡¯m an enemy? Damn¡­ I came here without any plan, thinking I wouldn¡¯t be a threat. Being overwhelmingly powerful can be quite inconvenient. Even if they attack, it would only result in the clone disappearing, but it would be a waste not to take advantage of this unexpected opportunity. ¡°Huh?¡± Something seemed off. The inside of the tourist ship appeared to be in utter chaos. Even though it was just a clone, it was still created by a god-level being, so when I got close to the ship, I could sense the internal situation as clearly as if I were seeing it with my own eyes. People were in pain. Oh, aliens. There were also some with strong energy. No, no. Why am I just admiring at this? People inside are in complete turmoil. They are suffering immensely. Alright, I¡¯ll use this opportunity to get inside. And then I¡¯ll help them. Saving people in distress by chance and starting a new life in another world. It¡¯s a common clich¨¦, right? I teleported the clone inside the tourist ship. Even at this distance, teleportation is possible. As expected of an Outer God¡­ anything is possible with just a thought. ¡°¡­What the hell, this is crazy. What¡¯s going on?¡± The internal situation was even more chaotic than I sensed from outside. People were fainting, vomiting, and some were even bleeding from their eyes, nose, and mouth. ¡°Ugh¡­!¡± Even the species that were holding on were clutching their heads and staggering. This is¡­ a symptom of mental contamination. Something is directly interfering with their minds, affecting their brains. What could it be? I didn¡¯t sense anything around here capable of such a mental attack. The Meias youth gathering energy over there or the elderly man next to him might be capable of this level of mental attack. They look like Terra race¡­ humans, but the amount of energy inside them is different, making it easy to distinguish. Ah, they call it ¡®mana,¡¯ right? Anyway, since the Meias are also suffering, they don¡¯t seem to be the source of this mental contamination¡­ ¡°Ah.¡± I realized it in an instant. ¡®The moment they see, hear, or perceive ¡®me¡¯ in any way, their minds collapse and they either die or become insane unless they have mental defense measures in place.¡¯ It¡¯s me? I¡¯m the culprit. It must have been because of that moment when I unconsciously said ¡°Oh.¡± Isn¡¯t this too much? Even at a distance of 200,000 km, just me saying ¡°Oh¡± caused this much devastation. This turns the clich¨¦ of saving people in distress into me being the villain who put them in danger! ¡°¡­¡­¡± No, this is not the time to be thinking about that. Mental Purification. Swaaah©¤ I removed the mental contamination from the people. Even though I can collapse minds just by being perceived, surprisingly, I also have the ability to purify and clear minds. However, if I use it on someone who has directly seen me and had their mind collapse, it causes a rapid cycle of mental collapse and recovery, turning them into complete idiots. So, in reality, it¡¯s a largely meaningless ability. But in this case, it¡¯s different. They didn¡¯t fully perceive me; they only heard my voice briefly from a great distance. If I perform mental purification now, there won¡¯t be any further confusion. ¡°Ugh, what was that?¡± ¡°My head suddenly felt like it was going to explode¡­¡± ¡°Hey! Raymond! Snap out of it!¡± ¡°Ugh¡­ Hoo, everyone, please calm down and remain in your seats. We will assess the situation immediately.¡± Fortunately, everyone seemed to regain their senses, and the chaos subsided quickly. Phew¡­ I almost shattered the minds of hundreds of intelligent beings within 30 minutes of my reincarnation. That would have been quite the achievement for an Outer God known for bringing only pain and despair¡­ Haha. But then, the young Meias man approached me. ¡°¡­You. What did you do?¡± ¡°Huh?¡± Oh no! What, what is this? Did he figure it out? That I shattered their minds¡­?! Is he going to realize I¡¯m an Outer God?! ¡°When you arrived, everyone¡¯s minds recovered. You didn¡¯t seem to use any special energy¡­ How did you do it?¡± Ah, I see¡­ that¡¯s what he¡¯s curious about. Well, it¡¯s not like the clone needs to use energy. I just used the main body¡¯s abilities. An Outer God, a transcendent being, doesn¡¯t use energy. It simply causes phenomena. There¡¯s no energy interference in a natural phenomenon akin to a law of nature. But I can¡¯t just say that outright¡­ ¡°I have some unique abilities that allow me to help in situations like this. It¡¯s a bit complicated to explain, but I¡¯m glad I could assist.¡± ¡°Ha, haha. I¡¯m an adventurer who travels through space, and I¡¯ve encountered mental attacks quite often. So, I developed this myself. It sends electromagnetic waves to the brain to adjust the mind, which is probably why you didn¡¯t see any energy flow.¡± I said this while pulling out a rod-like device made of mechanical parts from my pocket. Of course, it¡¯s a lie. I just created this fake invention using material creation. But it¡¯s not entirely a lie. I actually made it have the ability I just described while creating it. With a single button press, it emits waves that remove mental contamination within a 100-meter radius. Of course, it can¡¯t handle the mental contamination caused by me, but it can cure most mental attacks. As expected of a creator god-level ability¡­ anything can be made just by thinking about it. ¡°¡­I see. That¡¯s impressive. To invent something like that. You could make a fortune if you patent it with the Galactic Union.¡± ¡°Hahaha. I¡¯m considering that too.¡± The Galactic Union. It was established by the ¡®Lubaran Race,¡¯ who first proposed and built the space society, and is composed of representatives from numerous intelligent beings across the universe. It¡¯s the highest institution in the current universe. ¡­Or so my knowledge tells me. In simple terms, it¡¯s like a global summit or the United Nations. Most intelligent beings currently active in space are under the management of this Galactic Union. Even newly discovered wild planets, like some of the planets in the Skull Nebula right in front of us, are isolated and managed as soon as they are found. If intelligent beings appear, they are sometimes inducted into the Union, or if they are hostile, they are exterminated. It¡¯s an organization with immense power across the entire universe. Wow¡­ it¡¯s nice to start with all this information. I can just search my mind for anything I¡¯m curious about or don¡¯t know. ¡­But why is this Meias guy speaking so informally to someone he¡¯s just met? It¡¯s a bit annoying. I should have left his mind unpurified. ¡°¡­Wait! This isn¡¯t the time for this. Master¡­ according to your words, we¡¯re about to encounter a being we should never meet¡­!¡± At that moment, the rude Meias man hurriedly returned to his seat. He started talking to the elderly man of the same race. ¡°Master, let¡¯s at least get out of here. Those foolish Terra race members won¡¯t listen even if we tell them to leave quickly!¡± ¡°¡­It¡¯s alright, Lowie.¡± The old man calmed him down and then suddenly stared intently at me. ¡°¡­?¡± His eyes seemed to pierce through me. Ah, that old man¡­ he seems to have figured something out. ¡°It seems it¡¯s not yet time for us to die. We¡¯ve encountered a benevolent and gentle god.¡± ¡°What? What do you mean¡­¡± Ah, as I thought¡­ that old man has somewhat grasped my true nature. But is it okay? s?a??h th? N?v?l(F)ire.n?t website on G??gl? to access chapters of n?vels early and in the highest quality. If he starts to perceive me, his mind might collapse¡­ Ah, it¡¯s probably fine since he hasn¡¯t directly seen or heard me. The form he sees now is the Terra race clone, after all. ¡­Still, just in case, I should talk to him later. I¡¯ll assess his mental state and warn him not to reveal my identity. It wouldn¡¯t be fun if my identity is exposed right from the start. ¡­Hmm, but maybe I could just erase his memory? No, let¡¯s save the main body¡¯s abilities for truly dire situations. Like how I created the mental purification device earlier. As I mentioned before, using cheats in a game makes it boring quickly. Chapter 3: Omnipotence Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 3EP.3 Omnipotence In this universe, vast and infinite, there exist a myriad of beings. Intelligent life forms, microorganisms, gigantic monsters, special entities¡­ And among them, there are some whose existence is beyond the comprehension of mortal minds. Absurd beings occasionally exist. Intelligent beings have called them by various names: ¡®Great Beings,¡¯ ¡®Gods,¡¯ ¡®Cthulhu,¡¯ ¡®Cosmic Gods,¡¯ and so on. Yet, these beings do not identify themselves by any race or name. They simply appear and exist. Where they come from, how they arrive, and why they exist are all beyond understanding. They are beings that no one can approach or comprehend. People collectively refer to these beings as Outer Gods, or ¡®??(ÍâÉñ),¡¯ meaning beings from beyond the universe. The term ¡®beings¡¯ indicates that there are more than one of them. Of course, not all Outer Gods possess the same abilities or wield the same level of power. But from the perspective of mortals, they are incomprehensible, god-like entities with absurd abilities from an outside world. Some planets even worship them as gods, leading to numerous problems. However, regardless of how the worshippers are dealt with, there is almost no way to handle the Outer Gods themselves, making them one of the Galactic Union¡¯s major headaches. No, they are more than just a headache. They are akin to natural disasters. Just as people in the past, without scientific technology, could not stop typhoons or earthquakes, Outer Gods are unstoppable natural disasters. Avoiding them is considered the best strategy. However, the Galactic Union does not always plan to avoid them. With the advancement of scientific technology, most intelligent beings belonging to the Galactic Union can now prevent natural disasters on their planets in advance. Even if a disaster occurs, they can minimize the damage by applying physical force to eliminate it. In other words, the cosmic natural disaster known as the Outer God is merely beyond current technological capabilities. They firmly believed that one day, it would become a controllable domain. In fact, the Lubaran race once managed to deal with an Outer God the size of a planet using a supermassive warship equipped with the latest scientific technology. Of course, that supermassive warship, which was practically the ultimate weapon created by combining the scientific prowess of the Lubaran race and all other intelligent beings in the universe, was shattered to pieces. Nevertheless, the fact that they managed to defeat an unknown entity that seemed unbeatable was significant. Of course, some argued, ¡°That wasn¡¯t truly an Outer God.¡± ¡°Actually, it was just a gigantic monster the size of a planet.¡± A terrifying being that caused mental contamination just by being looked at and started molecular decomposition upon contact. S?a??h the n0v?l(?)ire.?et website on G??gl? to access chapters of n?vels early and in the highest quality. Moreover, it had a body as massive as a planet. ¡°That¡¯s not all.¡± Jupiter, a Meias elder who had been reprimanded by the Lubaran race for making such claims, thought as he looked at the well-dressed, handsome Terra race youth in front of him. ¡°Mental contamination and decomposition abilities alone don¡¯t define it. Not everything that comes from an external dimension is an Outer God.¡± Beings from other realms. They also have ranks. The lowest rank, which only engages in destruction without any reason. The mid-lower rank, which has reason but cannot suppress latent instincts. The upper rank, which explores the world with calm reason and curiosity. And¡­ the highest, strongest rank, which has mastered everything and shows no interest in anything, merely observing. As Jupiter, who had lived for hundreds of years as a Meias elder, thought, At least the upper rank should be considered worthy of being called an ¡®Outer God.¡¯ The lower-ranked beings are hardly deserving of the title of gods. They are more akin to dimensional monsters. So, what about the Terra race youth in front of him? He had already realized that this young man was an Outer God. He had seen him create a mental purification device using the latest scientific technology out of an empty pocket in an instant. Moreover, the mass mental contamination that occurred on the tourist ship was purified not by the device but by his mere authority. It made sense that his disciple, Lowie Hendrick, couldn¡¯t sense any energy movement. It was simply an act of authority, unrelated to the laws of the universe. ¡®He is of the highest rank.¡¯ Seeing this, Jupiter was convinced. A supreme outer entity. Among the beings from beyond the universe, he was the most overwhelming and absolute. The reason for this certainty was that he felt no sense of purpose from him. If he were of a lower rank, the tourist ship and everyone inside would have already been decomposed to atomic levels and become part of the universe. Their sole purpose is to endlessly destroy whatever they encounter. If he were a mid-level being, he would have come here out of curiosity to explore something. But there would be no reason to fix the mental collapse of insignificant lower beings for that purpose. He simply came, as if to apologize, and restored the mental contamination caused by his presence. And he even lied to hide his true identity. Pretending to be an ordinary person. There was no way to understand the reason behind such behavior. There was no visible purpose. That¡¯s why he judged that this being was of the highest rank. A being that knows everything and can do anything, omnipotent and omniscient. Thus, it has no purpose, and lower beings cannot comprehend it. It could truly be called a ¡®real Outer God.¡¯ ¡®There must be a reason he¡¯s hiding his identity. I should stay quiet.¡¯ He probably already knew that I had figured out his identity, but there was no need to bring it up. The fact that my consciousness remained intact even after realizing it showed that he was being considerate. If he didn¡¯t want me to know, he could have erased my memory, or he could have made his presence fully known, causing my mind to collapse. He was likely being considerate, expecting me to pretend not to know. ¡°A young man of the Terra race, is it? Thanks to you, the people on this tourist ship, including myself, were able to survive. Thank you.¡± ¡°Oh, uh, it¡¯s nothing. Really¡­¡± Pretending not to know and speaking to him, the young man¡¯s eyes widened slightly, seemingly surprised. Seeing this, Jupiter thought his judgment was correct and introduced themselves. # ¡°Nice to meet you. I am Jupiter, one of the elders of the Meias race. This is my disciple, Lowie Hendrick.¡± ¡°Nice to meet you.¡± Well¡­ after encountering them for a bit, I immediately recalled their names, positions, physical specs, and even the extent of their energy, so there was no need for an introduction. That old man, as I suspected when I first saw him¡­ he¡¯s quite remarkable. The Meias race, one of the upper races in the Galactic Union, which is composed of various planets with a fantasy world view similar to those in novels from my previous life. Jupiter was one of the five elders, selected from the most capable individuals of the Meias race. And the young man beside him was Jupiter¡¯s only disciple, considered a rising genius and a potential future elder. Hmm, to know so much in detail. It even eliminates the need for small talk topics. Being an Outer God is more inconvenient than I thought. It takes away the joy of getting to know new connections. Don¡¯t reveal too much depth! Still, since we¡¯ve met like this, we should get along well. I want to see the magic of the Meias race in action. I mean, I already know everything about it theoretically. I can use it whenever I want¡­ But come on, as a person who¡¯s come to another world, don¡¯t I have a romantic notion about magic? There¡¯s a big difference between just knowing something in your head and actually seeing it! I want to see it with my own eyes and be amazed. ¡°Passengers, we apologize. The maintenance is complete, but¡­ is there anyone who still feels unwell?¡± At that moment, one of the crew members came running and asked the passengers. It seemed that the crew and pilots, who had been mentally affected, had fully recovered. Even though the mental contamination was purified, it must have taken some time to sort things out. Well¡­ it looks like everyone is in a similar situation. No one seems to be in pain, just a bit confused. And that confusion seems to be settling down. ¡°My child is having a hard time¡­¡± One of the Terra families raised their hand. ¡°Sniff, sob¡­¡± A young girl, around ten years old, was still crying. Even though her mind was purified, experiencing such an event suddenly¡­ it would be fortunate if it doesn¡¯t become a trauma. I¡¯m a bit worried. Srrr¡ª Since she¡¯s a child, maybe I should go the extra mile and treat her trauma too. By slightly altering her memory¡­ just removing the keywords related to fear. She¡¯ll still remember the event, but the fear will be gone. ¡°Sniff¡­ Huh? Why was I crying? Mom! When are we entering the Skull Nebula?¡± ¡°Huh? Are you okay¡­?¡± Good, this way, she won¡¯t have any lingering trauma. Hehe, am I¡­ too kind for a terrifying, mysterious Outer God? Chapter 4: Wormhole Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 4EP.4 Wormhole Beep beep beep¡ª ¡°?!¡± ¡°What¡¯s going on now?¡± The Galactic Union Headquarters¡¯ Space Environment Management Department, responsible for detecting energy fluctuations across the observable universe, was thrown into chaos by the sudden alarm. Leus, a member of the ¡®Lubaran Race,¡¯ the great race known for their superior technology and for creating the Galactic Union by uniting intelligent beings, rushed to the area where the alarm had sounded. He had the characteristic blue skin, gray eyes without pupils, and elongated head typical of the Lubaran race. The Lubaran race generally had little external variation since they identified each other by their unique energy wavelengths. The only noticeable difference was usually hair color. For reference, Leus had dark teal hair. He pushed aside the staff in the alarmed area and checked the screen. The screen kept flickering, turning black and then back on repeatedly. ¡°I¡¯ve never seen anything like this¡­ What is it? A machine malfunction¡­?¡± The staff member spoke in a flustered voice. Given the repeated black screens, it wasn¡¯t unreasonable to think so. However, the alarm had clearly sounded, and it wasn¡¯t just a malfunction causing the black screen. Alarms typically went off when there was an anomaly in the energy flow. Or when the energy was excessively large. Events like a cosmic storm, someone intentionally gathering energy explosively, supernova explosions beyond regulations, or the emergence of a supermassive black hole. In the vast universe, these alarms usually went off for frequent events that occurred about once every few days. Most alarms are assigned color codes. A cosmic storm is code blue, a supernova explosion beyond regulations is code red¡­ and so on. The corresponding color flashes on the screen repeatedly. For instance, if a cosmic storm occurs, the screen flashes blue. So, if the screen is flashing black¡­ ¡°¡­It¡¯s code black.¡± Leus felt a chill run down his spine as he checked the screen. In his 50 years of service, he had never seen this alarm. But it was the most dangerous alarm, one he always kept in mind. Code black is fundamentally different from other alarms. Generally, alarms are triggered by excessive or anomalous energy. But code black signifies that, for a moment, the energy in that space completely disappears as if the universe¡¯s energy is utterly void. A situation that defies the law of energy conservation and completely contradicts the laws of the universe. ¡­What it signifies in this universe is only one thing. ¡°An Outer God¡­ a new Outer God has appeared.¡± The emergence of a new Outer God. ¡°The location is Galaxy B-02345. Specifically, about 300,000 km away from the Skull Nebula.¡± ¡°¡­The Skull Nebula. A famous tourist spot.¡± Receiving the briefing from Leus, the head of the Space Environment Management Department, were ¡®Celeste,¡¯ the department head, and ¡®Allegros,¡¯ the head of the Space Safety Measures Headquarters. Both were also from the Lubaran race. Their appearances were almost identical, differing only slightly in height. Additionally, Celeste, being female, had a slightly more curvaceous figure. Their hair colors varied; Celeste had red hair, and Allegros had brown hair. ¡°Yes. Tourists were visiting today as well. The company is Lacstol Tours, officially registered with the Galactic Union and quite a large company.¡± They were traveling through a wormhole and viewing the Skull Nebula from about 150,000 km away. The new Outer God, the subject of the code black, appeared approximately 200,000 km away. ¡°Sure enough, we received reports from the tourist ship in that area. The passengers and crew suddenly complained of severe headaches and dizziness.¡± ¡°¡­Mental contamination?¡± The fact that it caused mental contamination from 200,000 km away indicated it was an immensely powerful being. If it could affect beings at that distance, it must have a clear purpose. According to the classification of Outer Gods, this indicated at least a high-level entity. ¡°Fortunately, it seems to have stopped moving.¡± ¡°Then we should send a rescue ship. If it hasn¡¯t moved from its spot, a rescue ship with a mind barrier should be able to approach safely. There might be survivors among the species with strong mental resilience.¡± As Allegros, the head of the Space Safety Measures Headquarters, said this and was about to call his subordinates, Leus shook his head to stop him. ¡°Ah, that won¡¯t be necessary. Some space adventurer appeared and performed mental purification on everyone, and we received the report afterward. They are currently returning to the Union base through a wormhole, deeming the area too dangerous.¡± ¡°¡­?¡± ¡°Performed purification¡­? On mental contamination caused by a presumed high-level Outer God?¡± Celeste and Allegros looked at Leus in disbelief. Leus sighed deeply and explained. ¡°I don¡¯t understand it either. It seems to be a young man from the Terra race. He claimed to have created a mental purification device using brain waves.¡± ¡°¡­Huh.¡± The two department heads let out a short, incredulous sigh. Using brain waves to match the frequency of contaminated minds and restore them to normal. Such technology indeed exists. However, it¡¯s a relatively recent development, even for the Lubaran race, who lead the universe in scientific technology. Moreover, it was designed as a treatment for general mental attacks, and even if it worked on an Outer God, it would likely only be effective against low-level mental contamination. But a mere space adventurer from the Terra race creating such a device on his own? And even purifying mental contamination caused by a presumed high-level Outer God? It was absurd. ¡®There¡¯s something more to this.¡¯ The three Lubaran race members concluded that they should head to the Union base where Lacstol Tours was located and investigate the Terra race man. They couldn¡¯t even think of approaching the coordinates near Galaxy B-02345 where the Outer God had appeared. So, they decided to capture and investigate at least one suspicious individual. Oh, so this is what it feels like to travel through a wormhole. It¡¯s kind of queasy. Just like in the movies, a hole opened up in front of the tourist ship, and we moved to an entirely different space. When I use teleportation, it feels like I just disappear and reappear, but this definitely has a more sci-fi vibe. In an instant, we seemed to have traveled about 15 light-years from where we were. S?a??h the N?v?lFir?(.)n?t website on G??gl? to access chapters of n?vels early and in the highest quality. Considering the vastness of the universe, it¡¯s a relatively short distance, but even with sub-light speed spacecraft, it would take quite a while without a wormhole or teleportation. So, it¡¯s quite a significant distance. Still, my connection with my main body remains intact. My abilities¡­ well, even though the output is slightly reduced when relayed through my avatar, I can still use most of them. 15 light-years is roughly 140 trillion kilometers¡­ seeing that the connection and my powers are functioning well, it really hits me that I¡¯m a cosmic being. ¡°Still, it¡¯s fortunate that we could come together.¡± ¡°Haha, indeed.¡± Jupiter, the old man beside me, smiled warmly. The reason I could board this tourist ship and use the wormhole to reach the Union base was all thanks to this old man. Technically, I¡¯m a space adventurer, but I don¡¯t have any official status. Creating an identity would be very easy if I wanted to, but I prefer not to use cheats unless necessary, so I deliberately didn¡¯t create one. However, because of that, I was at risk of being kicked off the tourist ship despite saving everyone. ¡­They were grateful for the rescue, but they said they couldn¡¯t allow someone without an identity to stay on board due to regulations. I understand. There are many space pirates in the universe, and space monsters that mimic humans to hijack ships. ¡­It feels a bit ironic coming from me. Anyway, I was about to be kicked off when Jupiter, the old man, vouched for my identity. Naturally, when someone as esteemed as an elder of the Meias race guarantees your identity, no one can argue. So, I was allowed to board the tourist ship as part of his entourage. For reference, I stored the spaceship I created in the cargo hold. It¡¯s a small personal one, so it fit well. I wonder if this old man is treating me well because he knows my true identity? Or is he just grateful for the rescue? Whatever the reason, it¡¯s a good thing. Thanks to him, my identity is guaranteed, and he even said he¡¯d help me get a new ID card under his name when we reach the Union base. I¡¯ll just accept the help and move on. Even if he has some ulterior motive, I¡¯ll find out eventually. And if he manages to proceed without my main body noticing, a simple memory wipe will solve it. ¡­If all else fails, I can just wipe everything out and escape to another place. ¡°¡­Huh.¡± ¡°M-Master! What¡¯s wrong?!¡± ¡°I-I don¡¯t know. Suddenly, I felt a chill all over my body¡­¡± ¡°¡­¡­¡± Hmm, this old man has a good sense. To vaguely sense the profound presence of an Outer God. Hahaha! Chapter 5: Union Base B-45 Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 5 This is Union Base B-45. Currently, the Galactic Union manages the universe by dividing it into various sectors under their control. Sector B includes about ten superclusters. The diameter of this sector is roughly 3 billion light-years. An unimaginably vast area, but within this sector, only 45,897 galaxies are under the Galactic Union¡¯s administration. They are continuously exploring and developing the universe, so the number is gradually increasing. Considering there are about 400,000 galaxies in the ten superclusters combined, they manage about one-tenth of them. The five-digit designation of Galaxy B-02345, where the Skull Nebula is located, seems to be for this reason. ¡­Wow, I have all these exact numbers in my head. Outer Gods really do know everything. If an ordinary human tried to comprehend such universal information¡­ ugh. Just thinking about it is terrifying. Anyway, to manage these 45,897 galaxies, the Galactic Union has established multiple bases in each sector. There are about 1,000 bases in Sector B. One of them is this place, Union Base B-45. Simply put, it¡¯s the 45th base in Sector B. It¡¯s not a planet but a massive space fortress built by modifying a drifting asteroid. Buildings are erected on the asteroid¡¯s surface, and a huge sphere encloses them. They seem to use energy from massive stars scattered across the universe and convert cosmic radiation energy for use. For them, the universe is almost an infinite domain, so resources are virtually limitless. The fortress is kept stable with gravitational field technology, maintaining its position with galactic coordinates and moving with the universe. The basic structure is provided by the asteroid, but the sphere that almost completely covers the massive asteroid and the technology to modify the interior and exterior into a base are impressive. Gravity and oxygen inside the sphere are adequately provided. It¡¯s truly a high-tech civilization that couldn¡¯t even be imagined in the previous world. ¡°This way, please.¡± I wanted to explore the space base of this sci-fi world to my heart¡¯s content, but to move around freely, I needed an identity. So, I followed the old man Jupiter to the base headquarters. Even though all the details about the interior and the technology used are in my main body¡¯s mind¡­ seeing it in person is a different kind of awe. Just like how people revisit masterpieces even when they know the story and ending. ¡°Who are you? This area is off-limits to unauthorized personnel¡­ Huh?! Elder Jupiter, welcome.¡± As Jupiter, Lowie Hendrick, and I approached the base headquarters, the guards stopped us. But upon checking Jupiter¡¯s registered information, they were startled and opened the door for us. ¡°And the people behind you are¡­?¡± ¡°My disciple, Lowie Hendrick. This is my important guest.¡± ¡°Ah, yes. Understood.¡± The guards let us in without checking my identity, just because I was called an important guest. ¡­It seems that having connections with high-ranking people is powerful in this world too. They let someone in without proper identity verification just because they were called a guest. Well, thanks to that, I can easily get a confirmed identity. ¡°Ah, come to think of it, I don¡¯t know your name yet. We need a name to register your identity.¡± Jupiter suddenly realized and spoke. That¡¯s right. I haven¡¯t mentioned my name yet. A name, huh¡­ what should I do? Honestly, I haven¡¯t thought of one yet. A human¡­ a Terra race name that sounds fitting? Should I just use my real name? But then again, I don¡¯t know if there¡¯s a country called Korea among the Terra race here¡­ Maybe I should go for a cool, game-character-like name? ¡°Eugene. My name is Eugene.¡± It was the most plausible name that came to mind. A name that has both an Eastern and Western feel to it. ¡°Eugene, is it? That¡¯s a great name.¡± ¡°Thank you.¡± Eugene of the Terra race. This was the moment my first identity in this world was created. # ¡°Oh¡­¡± After completing the identity registration, I received an electronic panel ID card. It was similar to the resident registration card from my previous life, but the card itself was an electronic device with a touch panel that allowed detailed information to be viewed by swiping. The race was listed as Terra, and the name was Eugene. There was even a photo similar to an ID photo, and swiping the screen revealed details like the address. Due to the adventurer concept, the address field was left blank. The special notes section indicated that I was currently active as an adventurer. The Galactic Union creates detailed IDs like this to manage people¡¯s information. This is to respond quickly in case of crimes or issues. Since there was a similar system in Korea, it didn¡¯t feel too uncomfortable. From what I recall in my mental history category, there were quite a few races that opposed the Galactic Union¡¯s method of registering personal information and requiring identity verification. Of course, they were all either completely crushed or severely beaten into submission. The Lubaran race must be incredibly powerful. Well, considering they possess incredible scientific technologies like the gravitational field technology used to create this base and the Dyson sphere-like structure that harnesses the energy of entire stars, it makes sense. They could probably wipe out most races with a single standard-issue weapon. ¡°Do you like it?¡± Jupiter, the old man beside me, smiled warmly as he watched me examining my ID card. Oh, I love it. This means I can roam around freely now. Hehehe, a space base created by a highly advanced civilization in an SF setting! I¡¯m itching to explore every nook and cranny. ¡°¡­We have some business to attend to at the base headquarters, so why don¡¯t you take a look around the base in the meantime?¡± Wow! This perceptive old man beat me to it. I was just about to ask. ¡°Sure, I¡¯ll do that.¡± ¡°Yes, please register my ID card on yours. The ID card has a unique code, so it functions as a contact method as well.¡± Beep¡ª As Jupiter said this, he brought his ID card to mine, and with a mechanical sound, his code was registered on my ID card. Oh¡­ I knew about this feature, but seeing it in action is fascinating. It feels like exchanging contact information via Bluetooth. ¡°I¡¯ll get in touch later.¡± After exchanging contact codes, I parted ways with them. Hehe, finally free. Where should I start my exploration? # ¡°¡­Master.¡± After Eugene left to explore the Union base, Lowie Hendrick turned to his master Jupiter, looking puzzled. ¡°Why are you treating him so well? Sure, he purified the mental contamination, but to go so far as to use your elder status to create an identity for an unknown entity?¡± Lowie Hendrick had kept quiet because Jupiter was treating Eugene with such respect, but he couldn¡¯t understand it. S~?a??h the N0??F?re.n?t website on G??gl? to access chapters of n?vels early and in the highest quality. Even though Eugene had helped by purifying their minds, he was still a man without any identity. He could be a space pirate, a heinous criminal whose identity had been erased, or even a member of an anti-Union group still fighting against the Galactic Union. Creating a guaranteed identity for someone without one is a very difficult and complicated task. There are many things to prove, and it naturally takes a considerable amount of time. Yet, Jupiter used his authority as an elder to pressure the head of the Union headquarters to create an identity for him. If the Galactic Union¡¯s council found out about this, he could face severe disciplinary action and possibly be stripped of his position for several years. Despite this, he went through with it just because Eugene helped with the mental purification. Lowie Hendrick couldn¡¯t understand his master¡¯s actions. ¡°Is it because of that talk about gods or whatever? Sure, it wasn¡¯t an ordinary mental attack, but still¡­¡± If they had made it back to the Union headquarters, they could have used more precise machines or treatment methods to normalize the situation. Lowie didn¡¯t think they had received such significant help. ¡°Enough.¡± At that moment, Jupiter stopped him. ¡°Lowie, you may not understand, but we should be grateful just to be existing right now.¡± ¡°¡­??¡± Lowie Hendrick frowned even more, not understanding what Jupiter meant. What on earth was he talking about? But he knew one thing. His master was a great elder of the Meias race and one of the greatest wizards. As a great wizard who had lived for a long time, he was very wise and never spoke in vain. In other words, all his words had meaning. He wouldn¡¯t act without a reason. ¡®If he¡¯s not giving me the answer directly, it means he wants me to think and come to a conclusion on my own.¡¯ His master, Jupiter, had always been like that. He taught his disciples to realize and act on their own. A sudden mental attack, the presence of a god that made his master tremble in fear, and Eugene¡­ ¡°¡­!!¡± After thinking deeply, Lowie Hendrick quickly reached a conclusion. And he understood what his master had done, feeling chills all over his body. Outer God. Beings whose mere presence could collapse the minds of those around them and plunge the world into fear. Eugene might be one of them¡­ or perhaps an avatar of one. Chapter 6: Visitor Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 6 ¡°So, Master, you¡¯ve given an identity to a being presumed to be an avatar of an Outer God?¡± ¡°You¡¯ve understood correctly.¡± It was madness. Foreign Gods, or Outer Gods. Beings whose mere existence could plunge the living creatures of the universe into despair and suffering. Granting an identity within the Galactic Union to an avatar of such a being. Understanding it made it even clearer how insane it was. No, what was even more incomprehensible was: ¡®An Outer God helping us? And acting like an ordinary human¡­ Is that even possible?¡¯ Outer Gods were literally symbols of destruction and despair. A prime example is the Outer God codenamed ¡®Zakura Mog.¡¯ As a mid-tier god among the Outer Gods, it had a grotesque appearance resembling a fusion of a scorpion and a centipede from the planet Earth, where the Terra race lived. A monster the size of an asteroid, hundreds of kilometers in diameter, combining the features of a scorpion and a centipede. Just looking at it would cause one to recoil in disgust. In reality, it possessed abilities as repulsive as its appearance, spreading deadly venom and plagues around it. Known as ¡®The Bringer of Plagues,¡¯ Zakura Mog commanded billions of giant insects, ranging from a minimum of 1 meter to a maximum of 2 kilometers in size. Its mere passage would turn a planet into a wasteland of venom and disease, leading to its destruction. Decades ago, there was an incident where Zakura Mog annihilated a planet in the Galactic Union¡¯s Sector F in an instant. s?a??h th? N?v?lFir?(.)n?t website on G??gl? to access chapters of n?vels early and in the highest quality. The inhabitants of that planet were a reputable race, diligently advancing their scientific technology with the support of the Lubaran race. Yet, they were wiped out in just three days. Simply because Zakura Mog passed by. To prevent further damage, the Galactic Union somehow lured Zakura Mog into a void with few galaxies nearby, eliminating future threats. Since then, it seems Zakura Mog has been wandering in that void, as there have been no reports of damage caused by it for over 30 years. Such is the nature of Outer Gods. Beings so overwhelming that mere mortals cannot possibly oppose them. Even the Galactic Union, which currently dominates the universe, can only drive them into voids to avoid further harm. They are truly ¡®gods¡¯ in every sense. If Eugene is such a being, then why? Not only this Union base but also the planets of the Meias race, including Jupiter and Lowie himself, could be at risk if he remembers their presence. Why did his master help such a terrifying being? ¡°Lowie, the galaxy is under a misconception.¡± ¡°What do you mean?¡± At Lowie Hendrick¡¯s question, Jupiter smiled gently. ¡°Not all Outer Gods are hostile to people. In fact, we can¡¯t even be sure if they are hostile to us at all. They are simply beings whose mere existence poses a threat to us.¡± Fundamentally, Outer Gods do not antagonize the life forms of the universe. Of course, some are filled with boundless hatred towards cosmic life forms, but generally, they are indifferent to life. Why would they care about insignificant life forms that collapse and die just by being near them? The life forms of the universe deem them enemies and fear them simply because being close to them is dangerous. ¡°But just as some of us take an interest in insignificant insects or microorganisms, some of them are researchers who take an interest in us.¡± And sometimes, they help the life forms of the universe. They might even create new life forms and civilizations or endow primitive races with power and wisdom, transforming them anew. ¡°Of course, they act out of mere curiosity and boredom. But for us, those actions undoubtedly serve as ¡®good.¡¯¡± If we define the typical Outer Gods, who are not particularly hostile but pose a threat by their mere existence, as ¡®evil,¡¯ then those who help the universe out of simple curiosity can be considered ¡®good.¡¯ And if they are such benevolent Outer Gods, shouldn¡¯t we reciprocate as much as we can? Though these beings defy common sense, and we can¡¯t be sure if our actions will be perceived as helpful, it¡¯s worth trying. ¡°Just the fact that he spared us indicates that he can be considered ¡®good¡¯ to us.¡± ¡°¡­So, because he¡¯s a benevolent god, we should treat him well?¡± ¡°Isn¡¯t it better than offending him and making him angry?¡± ¡°¡­¡­¡± Indeed, that made sense. There was no need to unnecessarily anger an Outer God who could be considered friendly towards us. If he spared us, we should do our best not to offend him and express our gratitude. The moment he becomes even slightly displeased, insignificant mortals like us could be obliterated without a trace. ¡°¡­Understood. I will be careful as well.¡± Lowie Hendrick decided to follow his master¡¯s lead and express his gratitude to him from now on. ¡°He can see through our conversations and everything else. There¡¯s no need to hide it.¡± Suddenly, Jupiter seemed to remember something and looked at Lowie Hendrick. ¡°However, he doesn¡¯t seem to want his identity revealed. So, be careful with your words.¡± ¡°¡­Yes, understood.¡± As they concluded their conversation and were about to head back into the headquarters. ¡°Elder Jupiter. There you are.¡± ¡°¡­?¡± Someone spotted them and called out. ¡°Who are you¡­¡± Turning their heads, they saw two people standing there. Blue skin and gray eyes without pupils. And an elongated head extending backward. One had dark teal hair. The other had brown hair. These were characteristics of the highest-ranking species in the Galactic Union, the Lubaran race. ¡°My name is Reus. I am the team leader of the Galactic Union¡¯s Space Environment Management Department. And this is¡­¡± ¡°Allegros. Deputy Director of the Space Safety Measures Headquarters.¡± Reus and Allegros had come from the headquarters of the Galactic Union. ¡°Why have two esteemed members of the Union¡¯s headquarters come to see this old man?¡± Jupiter asked. Reus narrowed his eyes and handed over a photograph. It looked like an identification photo of a young man from the Terra race, with black hair and black eyes. ¡°Do you know this person in the photo?¡± ¡°¡­!!¡± ¡°This, this is¡­¡± Jupiter and Lowie couldn¡¯t help but be shocked when they saw the photo Reus was holding. Because it was an identification photo of Eugene, who had just been with them. ¡°You guaranteed his identity and created an ID under your name. Where is this man now?¡± Reus asked sharply. The look in Allegros¡¯s eyes was also serious. It was clear that they were looking for him for reasons that were not good. ¡°¡­I don¡¯t know the reason, but if it¡¯s for something unfavorable, I would recommend not looking for him,¡± Jupiter tried to dissuade them, fearing what might happen if they angered Eugene. Allegros pushed Reus aside and lunged at Jupiter, shouting angrily. ¡°Hey, old man! Do you not understand how serious this situation is? There¡¯s no leniency just because you¡¯re a Union elder! This is a severe threat to space safety!¡± He then pointed to Eugene in the photo and continued. ¡°The tourist ship you were just on in the Skull Nebula. You were mentally attacked there, right? That¡¯s because an Outer God appeared a bit farther away. Just suddenly, out of nowhere.¡± Moreover, after estimating the size and power of that Outer God, it was concluded to be at least a high-tier one. ¡°A mental attack from 200,000 km away as soon as it appeared. It might be a crazy one like Nyarlathotep!¡± Nyarlathotep. One of the terrifying high-tier Outer Gods, known for paralyzing dozens of nearby planets and space stations with its mere 10-minute appearance centuries ago. It¡¯s known to deliver an overwhelming mental attack that can collapse the minds of life forms even 1,000,000 km away. Though it stayed for only about 10 minutes before suddenly tearing through dimensions and disappearing, it caused immense chaos. Despite its brief appearance, it earned the nickname ¡®Crawling Chaos.¡¯ ¡°This Terra race guy seems to be connected to that Outer God, so we need to investigate.¡± ¡°So, hurry up and tell us. What¡¯s your relationship with this guy? Who is he? Where is he now?¡± Jupiter remained silent and shook his head quietly. It meant not to look for him. Even if he didn¡¯t cooperate here, the worst that could happen was an extended suspension or permanent expulsion from his elder position. But if he sold out Eugene¡¯s information to these clearly hostile individuals, he couldn¡¯t even imagine the repercussions. ¡°Hmph, fine. He¡¯s probably somewhere in this base anyway. Let¡¯s go, Team Leader Reus.¡± ¡°Yes, Deputy Director Allegros.¡± With that, they tried to push past Jupiter and Lowie. Swoosh©¤ At that moment, Jupiter summoned his staff and blocked their path. ¡°I told you, it¡¯s not allowed. If you don¡¯t want to die, you¡¯d better back off now.¡± ¡°¡­Ha! Has this old man gone mad?¡± And at that moment, veins bulged on the long hair of Reus and Allegros. Chapter 7: Touring the Base Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 7 Jupiter, the old man, greeted Lowie and stepped outside the headquarters building. ¡°Oh¡­¡± A transparent, gigantic dome showcasing the view of space above, and buildings erected on asteroids. Inside, the air was kept clean and at optimal oxygen levels thanks to the air maintenance system. The gravity was slightly heavier than what the Terra race¡¯s Earth standard was, but it seemed manageable for most Terra people without much discomfort. Despite being in a completely different world, I couldn¡¯t help but compare everything to Earth, given my origins. ¡°Hmm¡­ but it¡¯s a bit noisy.¡± Countless materials, buildings, and various objects surrounded me. Information about them continuously flooded my mind. Additionally, the thoughts and emotions of the people around me, along with detailed internal information, all flowed in. While it was certainly convenient and my main body could easily process this amount of information, it was somewhat annoying. It felt like constant background noise that I couldn¡¯t shut off. Could I change it so that I only received information when I wanted it? The moment I thought that. ¡°Huh.¡± Suddenly, all the information pouring in from all directions abruptly stopped. It was like working on a computer with multiple windows open, only for the computer to crash, leaving my face reflected on the black screen. Though the analogy was a bit grim, it became incredibly quiet. All the overwhelming information and the incessant, inaudible noises vanished. Only what I could see with my eyes, hear with my ears, smell with my nose, and feel with my skin remained. Right, just like an ordinary person. I couldn¡¯t see infrared or electromagnetic waves with my eyes anymore. I couldn¡¯t feel the gravity of the red giant star about 20 light-years away! For someone like me, who hasn¡¯t even been reincarnated for a day, this was a much more familiar sight. Wow, this is great! I can have whatever I want. This is what being a true god feels like. It really makes me feel like a protagonist in an isekai story, living a normal life after being reincarnated into another world! Moreover, if I use my main body to grant myself some abilities, it¡¯s like having an overpowered cheat in an isekai story. ¡°But staying like this all the time might be inconvenient.¡± Going back to the previous state was not appealing, but could I have a skill like those emotion-based abilities in fantasy novels, where I only get the information I want? ¡­Hmm, it seems possible. It seems that as soon as I think about wanting something, it becomes possible. Let¡¯s try to get information about a nearby pebble. ¡°Oh, it works.¡± As I focused on a nearby pebble, information about it flowed into my mind. Its composition, weight, where it originally came from, and how it ended up here. Well, I don¡¯t really need such detailed information about a random pebble. But anyway, it¡¯s good that I can control my abilities now. ¡°Wow! That means I can block information and explore this unknown sci-fi world without knowing anything beforehand.¡± Exactly! Even if I had information before, experiencing it firsthand is different from just knowing it in my head. Sure, it¡¯s true, but experiencing something without prior knowledge is the real thrill! ¡°Wow, I can block information at will. Outer Gods are awesome.¡± Then, let¡¯s explore this asteroid base built by a highly advanced civilization without any prior information, shall we? ¡­Hmm, it might be a bit inconvenient to have absolutely no information about this world. I¡¯ll filter it to the level of general knowledge that a space adventurer would have¡­ Okay, that should do it. It¡¯s nice to have this self-filtering ability. I can choose to receive information selectively based on the situation. Now that I¡¯m ready, it¡¯s time to finally step out into the base¡¯s streets. As I ventured out, I saw a wide variety of space species walking between the buildings. Even though it was an asteroid, its diameter was at least 100 km. It looked like the top had been flattened to build the base, and the area was large enough to accommodate a city-sized base. Naturally, there were many people, including some who looked like space adventurers and others who seemed to be permanent residents. They were probably employees of the Galactic Union or workers from corporations based here. As I moved from the central headquarters through the large, modern buildings and into what seemed like an alley, I found a commercial district lined with relatively low-rise buildings. ¡°Wow, this is amazing.¡± Long rows of low-rise commercial buildings on both sides. Merchants busy with their trade outside. And countless species walking by. Wow, there are all sorts of species here. I saw Terra race members, a species with green skin and an extra joint in their limbs. There was even a species that looked like an octopus with numerous tentacles, reminiscent of the stereotypical alien image. But from the outside, it just seemed like a diverse range of species. Hmm, it feels like a well-developed market? Although it¡¯s supposed to be sci-fi, it doesn¡¯t seem that extraordinary. However, seeing what¡¯s being bought and sold in the market changes that perception drastically. ¡°Come, come! These are the teeth of ¡®Lowmen¡¯ from the planet Phuros! Perfect for reinforcing armor with alloy! Now available for just 500,000 SP each!¡± ¡°Get your skewers! Made with Terek meat, they¡¯re chewy and delicious!¡± ¡°This is made from the bones of a giant monster I got when I was at Base B388¡­¡± ¡°Oh, I know this. Is this from the Kartush species?¡± Lowmen, Terek, Kartush¡­ Names I had never heard of in my previous life. But here, they are common. Lowmen are wild creatures from a planet called Phuros, which belongs to a galaxy quite a distance from here. S~?a??h the N?velF?re.?et website on G??gl? to access chapters of n?vels early and in the highest quality. Imagine a two-legged elephant with long arms, a long trunk, sharp teeth, and claws, walking bipedally, about 10 meters in size. Their teeth and claws are made of very hard metallic materials, making them valuable for use in spaceships and weapons. They were nearly hunted to extinction due to overhunting, but the Galactic Union designated them as a protected species, allowing only a certain number to be hunted, making them rarer nowadays. Terek is essentially a large chicken, and its meat tastes like chewy chicken. As for Kartush¡­ I¡¯m not sure. I only know they are giant monsters, and they seem to be quite rare since they are not part of the general knowledge of space adventurers. So, this is a sci-fi market where such things are bought and sold. ¡­But the smell of those Terek skewers is incredibly appetizing. Sizzle©¤ Wow, look at that color. The yellowing as it cooks and the aroma of roasted chicken are seriously tempting. ¡­But then I remember, I don¡¯t have any money. [ 1 for 200SP / 3 for 500SP ] The SP written on the price tag is the currency unit created by the Galactic Union. I can make electronic transactions with the identity card I created earlier, and they also issue banknotes made of metal fibers that are hard to tear for physical transactions. It used to be confusing when each species had its own currency, but since the Galactic Union officially made it, it seems to have settled in well and is widely used. Comparing it to the cost of living in Korea where I used to live¡­ it feels like 100 SP is equivalent to 1,000 won. ¡°¡­¡­¡± Sizzle©¤ Wow, this is insane. It looks incredibly delicious. I swallowed my saliva involuntarily. 200 SP is equivalent to 2000 won. 2000 won¡­ Maybe I could subtly create it with my ability without anyone noticing? I wouldn¡¯t get caught for counterfeiting or anything, right? If not that, I could just replicate the Terek skewer directly¡­ No, no. Even so, I have the pride of an Outer God. I can¡¯t resort to counterfeiting or making replicas just for a 200 SP Terek skewer. Damn¡­ I should have asked Jupiter for some money¡­ I can¡¯t start working to earn it now. Of course, I don¡¯t actually need to eat food. My avatar, like my main body, doesn¡¯t require nutrients. But the taste is different. Eating isn¡¯t just about replenishing nutrients; it¡¯s a noble act for obtaining pleasure. Look at the texture of that chewy meat. And it even tastes like chewy chicken. Damn it! Knowing the taste makes it even more torturous to imagine! ¡°¡­Hey, if you¡¯re not buying, move along.¡± At that moment, the shop owner, annoyed by my lingering presence, waved me away. Sigh¡­ I can change the laws of the universe, but I can¡¯t buy a 2000 won skewer. How pathetic. Just as I was thinking that. Boom! ¡°¡­?!¡± A sudden explosion-like sound came from the direction of the headquarters. What¡¯s going on? An attack? Or maybe a gas explosion? ¡°What¡¯s happening all of a sudden?¡± ¡°Is it space pirates?¡± ¡°But there are no invasion ships around¡­¡± The people in the market were startled and began to murmur. And I felt a massive energy wave. To understand the situation, I slightly lifted the information filter and checked the headquarters. ¡°¡­Jupiter?¡± And there, I sensed Jupiter confronting two Lubaran race members. Chapter 8: A Minor Dispute Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 8 In the Galactic Union, each species elects a representative known as an ¡°Elder¡± to form the ¡°Galactic Union Elder Council,¡± the highest decision-making body. As representatives of their species and, by extension, the Galactic Union, these individuals are chosen for their exceptional abilities. This position is not distributed equally. Differences in lifespan, civilization, and abilities among species mean that those with higher civilization levels and greater abilities receive more positions. Some species have no Elder positions at all, or are given only a nominal one. While there were those who were dissatisfied with this, the Elder Council is not just a place to wield power. It involves handling numerous tasks for the entire Galactic Union and gathering the most capable individuals to face threats to the Union, so there weren¡¯t many major complaints. Species with fewer or no Elder positions understood that they lacked the necessary capabilities. Thus, the total number of Elder positions is 500. Considering that there are currently 480 intelligent species in the Galactic Union, it might seem fair to allocate one position per species, but unfortunately, that was not the case. The highest-ranking species, the Lubaran race, holds 10 positions. Other species hold 5, 3, and so on. Some species have multiple positions. Of course, this is not a fixed number. If a species strengthens its capabilities, it can claim more of the 500 positions. After the Galactic Union opened up interstellar society, the Terra race, with a civilization level just high enough to glimpse into space, received a nominal one position. However, with their unique adaptability and absorption capabilities, they rapidly expanded their influence. They now have four planets that they have directly terraformed into colonies, and their population has grown to 15 billion. As a result, they earned an additional position, bringing their total to two, making them a mid-to-upper tier species within the Union. To secure a position in the Galactic Union Elder Council, one must have the requisite abilities and make significant efforts. The Meias race, which holds five of these coveted positions, exemplifies this. The fact that Jupiter is one of the Elders of the Meias race speaks volumes about his extraordinary abilities. ¡°Hey, do you think being an Elder means you can do whatever you want? Arrogant old man¡­¡± But Reus and Allegros showed no fear of him. This was because, while they were not Elders, they belonged to the Lubaran race, the highest-ranking species in the Union. They believed their scientific technology far surpassed the magical energy technology of the Meias race. No matter how powerful or advanced magic was, they thought it could never defeat them. Moreover, they held significant positions within the Galactic Union, even if they were not Elders. Being high-ranking officials of the Lubaran race made them arrogant. Thus, they disregarded Jupiter and acted recklessly. ¡°This matter has been approved by the Lubaran Elders. This is insubordination.¡± ¡°I am also an Elder of the Union. I believe I have the authority to issue orders to you.¡± ¡°Hah! You¡¯re just a Meias. You and your so-called magic, pretending you have superior abilities¡­¡± ¡°What¡­?!¡± At Reus¡¯s sneer, Lowie couldn¡¯t hold back and lunged at him. ¡°Gravitational Field.¡± Thud©¤! ¡°¡­?!¡± A gravitational field controller manipulated gravity, applying several times the normal gravity only to the area where Lowie stood. Unable to withstand the immense weight, Lowie¡¯s body was crushed, and he collapsed to the ground. The only reason Lowie wasn¡¯t crushed into a pulp was because he had reinforced his body with mana, a trait of the Meias race. Without it, the gravity would have already turned him into a dried fish. Seeing how such intense gravity could be manipulated with just a controller, it was clear that the Lubaran race¡¯s scientific technology was formidable. ¡®Reverse Gravity¡­!¡¯ However, the Meias race had similar techniques in their magic. He reversed the crushing gravity, making himself lighter and propelling himself away, waiting for an opportunity while lying prone. His internal organs were severely damaged by the gravity, so he circulated mana to quickly heal his body and prepared an attack spell. ¡°Kahahaha! Go ahead, use your so-called magic!¡± ¡°It¡¯s nothing special. It¡¯s more suited for a circus, really.¡± The two Lubaran members laughed, mocking Lowie as he struggled under the gravitational field. They were completely unaware that Lowie Hendrick was preparing to counterattack. ¡°Stop, Lowie.¡± ¡°M-Master.¡± At that moment, Jupiter stepped in front of Lowie. Seeing Lowie withdraw the mana he had gathered for his attack spell, Jupiter addressed the two Lubaran members. ¡°Can this be considered an act of aggression? Should I interpret this as Lubaran wanting a war with Meias?¡± ¡°What are you talking about? This is a sanction. He dared to defy the will of the Lubaran Elders and challenged us.¡± At the word ¡°sanction,¡± Jupiter let out a small laugh. ¡°Sanction, you say. Then consider my actions a sanction as well. A sanction against you for poking a beehive that was minding its own business.¡± Wooong©¤ In an instant, Jupiter gathered mana. Mana surged from his hand, and then¡ª ¡°Shock Wave.¡± A spell that generated a massive shockwave to incapacitate the enemy was activated. S?a??h th? N?v?l(F)ire.n?t website on G??gl? to access chapters of n?vels early and in the highest quality. With a tremendous roar, part of the headquarters building was destroyed by the shockwave, and the two Lubaran members were exposed to the magic, feeling as if their bodies would burst from the impact. ¡°Kuhuk?!¡± ¡°Kehuk¡­¡± Thanks to the defense of their nanosuits, created with Lubaran scientific technology, most of the shockwave was absorbed. However, the impact that did penetrate was enough to shake a person¡¯s brain. Even with bodies enhanced by Lubaran biotechnology, the force was too much to withstand. They collapsed to the ground. Reus was knocked unconscious, while Allegros, who had received higher-grade body enhancements, managed to stay conscious. ¡°Kuh, kuhuk¡­ You crazy old man¡­ Do you think you¡¯ll get away with this¡­?¡± Although he was conscious, he was in no shape to get up anytime soon, as he was retching and in disarray. ¡°You should be thankful that I¡¯m ending it here.¡± With those words, Jupiter sent another small shockwave to finish off Allegros, causing him to lose consciousness as well. ¡®It can¡¯t be helped. I¡¯ll have to block them now and then go explain the situation to the Galactic Union Elders myself.¡¯ They would only bother Eugene if they were allowed to proceed. Explaining Eugene¡¯s identity here and now would be futile; they wouldn¡¯t listen. In fact, if he told the truth, they would likely cause an even bigger commotion, questioning why such a dangerous being was allowed to roam free. So, his plan was to stop them first and then slowly explain the situation and reasons to the Galactic Union Elders. That Eugene appeared to be an avatar of an Outer God and seemed relatively friendly. And that provoking him could endanger the entire Galactic Union. ¡®There might be sanctions for the excessive measures against the officials and for registering the avatar of an Outer God, but¡­ the Elders are reasonable. They will surely understand my intentions and make choices to protect the Galactic Union.¡¯ He was prepared to take the punishment alone and bear the grudge of the two Lubaran officials. That way, everything could be resolved without significant harm to all involved. That was his thought process. Anyway, with the situation temporarily resolved, ¡°Wow, what happened here?¡± ¡°Eugene¡­!¡± Hearing the sound of the shockwave, Eugene returned. # ¡°I was wondering if something was wrong¡­¡± He approached Jupiter and Lowie with an awkward smile. In truth, he already understood what had happened. He knew that the ones lying on the ground had come looking for him. And that Jupiter had intervened to prevent them from bothering him. That¡¯s why he had come. They had become aware of the emergence of a new Outer God. To investigate, they sought out someone who seemed to have some connection to it¡ªEugene. It was too risky to go directly to the location of the main body. Well¡­ I can certainly undergo the investigation. Even though this is my avatar, they won¡¯t find any connection to the main body. If I hide it, they have no way of knowing. No matter how advanced the Lubaran race is, their technology is still within the bounds of what can be understood. But they know I appeared without an identity, showed up nearby, and even cured mental contamination. Even if no results come from the investigation, they¡¯ll find me suspicious and keep me detained. Jupiter probably attacked the Galactic Union members to prevent that. ¡­Because if I get annoyed and cause trouble for the Galactic Union, it would be a hassle. It seems they¡¯re more afraid of me than I thought. Honestly, if they bothered me too much, I was considering manipulating a few memories¡­ ¡°Haha, it¡¯s nothing. Just a minor dispute,¡± Jupiter said, laughing it off as if it were nothing. In this world, even minor disputes can result in a base being destroyed. This is definitely sci-fi¡­ or maybe not. Jupiter seemed determined to bear the responsibility alone. He might even be expelled from his Elder position¡­ Did I really seem that dangerous? Well, I am an Outer God. Even though I¡¯ve shown a friendly demeanor, his reaction might be normal. ¡°¡­¡­¡± Sigh, if I hadn¡¯t been blocking information, I would have noticed those guys immediately and manipulated their memories to send them back. Was this my mistake? Well, it can¡¯t be helped. I¡¯ll just manipulate the memories of those two and send them back, and as for the shockwave¡­ I can just say there was an explosion accident without needing to go as far as memory manipulation. Jupiter is the benefactor who first helped me when I arrived in this world. And this time, he took the blame alone to prevent them from bothering me. I can¡¯t just leave him be. ¡­Ah, damn! Now that I think about it, I didn¡¯t get to see him use magic directly! What a waste¡­ Chapter 9: The Fragile Mortals Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 9 ¡°Ugh, ughh¡­¡± ¡°Euaaah¡­¡± Regaining consciousness, Reus and Allegros clutched their throbbing heads as they got up. Pshh©¤ The treatment incubators they were lying in opened up. ¡°What? Why am I¡­¡± ¡°What¡¯s this.¡± Still groggy, they couldn¡¯t remember why they were in the treatment incubators. They looked around with dazed expressions. A typical treatment room in a standard Galactic Union base. It was quiet, seemingly with no other patients besides the two of them. ¡°Oh, you¡¯re awake.¡± Then, Jupiter entered the treatment room and noticed the two who had gotten up. ¡°Elder Jupiter¡­?¡± ¡°Ugh, my head¡­¡± Seeing Elder Jupiter, their heads began to throb again. Memories started to come back to them. ¡°That¡¯s right, we were here to investigate a Terran named Eugene¡­¡± ¡°And then there was an explosion due to a mechanical failure in the base¡­¡± They had identified that Elder Jupiter was with someone named Eugene and had detained him for questioning. However, they ultimately found nothing suspicious about him. It was determined that Eugene had no connection to the massive object presumed to be an Outer God that suddenly appeared in galaxy B-02345. He was simply a Terran whose identity had been erased because he was presumed dead, which explained his lack of official status. There were no other issues. Just as they were about to leave without any significant findings, an explosion occurred in the base, causing them to lose consciousness from the shock. ¡°It seems there are no significant issues with your bodies. You should be able to return now.¡± ¡°¡­Hmm, I see.¡± Allegros responded, internally clicking his tongue. They had come with such confidence to conduct an investigation, only to leave empty-handed. ¡°Tsk, how does this base manage its equipment to the point where a mechanical failure causes an explosion?¡± Moreover, the explosion was powerful enough to destroy part of the building and knock out two Lubaran members, despite their enhanced bodies and nanosuits. They thought it was fortunate that there were no casualties. Since their bodies were fine, Reus and Allegros left the treatment room to return. As they saw Jupiter following them to see them off, they spoke. ¡°Elder Jupiter, there will be a disciplinary committee convened soon regarding the re-registration of a nullified identity without proper notice.¡± ¡°Well¡­ it¡¯s not a big deal, so I won¡¯t receive a severe punishment. Don¡¯t worry.¡± ¡°¡­Understood.¡± Hearing this, Jupiter¡¯s eyes trembled slightly, as if he felt an inexplicable fear. ¡®Hmph, no matter how much he tries to keep his composure, he¡¯s still just an Elder. Is he worried about losing his position if he gets caught?¡¯ ¡®Pretending not to care, but in the end, he¡¯s tasted power.¡¯ Reus and Allegros thought Jupiter was afraid of the disciplinary action, but that wasn¡¯t the case. ¡®Their memories were manipulated perfectly, without any sense of oddness. As if it really happened that way¡­¡¯ The source of Jupiter¡¯s fear was Eugene¡­ or more precisely, the main body that created Eugene¡¯s avatar. Their memories were altered, but since there were no other staff around, and Jupiter and Lowie were directly involved in the incident, there was no need to manipulate their memories. Thus, it was clear that their memories had been manipulated. Outer Gods possess transcendent abilities that defy the common sense and laws of the universe. They can disintegrate objects at the atomic level with a mere touch, corrupt minds to cause mental collapse, create phenomena that defy natural laws, and even bring entirely new forms of life into existence. Manipulating the memories of cosmic beings is a trivial task for them. However, Jupiter, having never experienced such overwhelming ¡°irrationality¡± firsthand, felt fear from this encounter. He was also terrified by the realization that if his own memories were manipulated, he would have no way of noticing it. Perhaps some of the memories he currently held had already been altered by an Outer God. The idea that his very existence could be distorted by an Outer God, or might be in the future, was pure horror. He couldn¡¯t help but wonder if the favorable feelings he had towards Eugene were also manipulated or fabricated. Such thoughts kept surfacing in his mind. ¡®No, don¡¯t doubt. He helped me. He manipulated their memories to prevent me from receiving severe punishment.¡¯ That fact was happening right before his eyes. There was no choice. As a mere mortal, he could only judge and conclude based on what he saw, heard, and felt. Even if everything he saw, heard, and felt was distorted, there was no way to know or break free from it. # Alright, if left alone, they¡¯ll go back to headquarters and explain everything properly. I¡¯ve adjusted their behavior slightly to ensure that. Still, just in case, I should move the main body to a place where no one is likely to come. There¡¯s a massive void in Sector B of the universe. Yes, there¡¯s a completely empty region between these superclusters. With the nearest galaxy being 5 million light-years away within the void, there shouldn¡¯t be any entities that could be affected. Let¡¯s move the main body there. That way, the Galactic Union will think it moved to an empty space on its own and feel reassured, right? ¡°¡­Wait.¡± Hold on a second. There¡¯s a better way. Looking at beings like Nyarlathotep or Shub-Niggurath, it seems that higher-ranked entities can freely traverse dimensions and move between different realms. Even mid-tier beings can pierce through dimensions, though it takes them longer. For some reason, information about entities above a certain level doesn¡¯t come to mind¡­ but I should be able to use similar abilities, right? In that case, it might be better to move to another realm to avoid causing trouble for my cosmic friends. With that thought, I tore open the space in front of the main body. Riiip©¤ Ah, but what happens to my avatar, Eugene, if I move to another dimension? Since it¡¯s not the same universe, will the connection be severed? Even if not, the change in dimensions might severely limit my abilities. The answer was quickly found in the information in my mind. Crossing dimensions doesn¡¯t completely sever the connection with the avatar, but it does impose several limitations on abilities. I wouldn¡¯t be able to manipulate memories or create desired materials as freely as I have been. ¡­Alright. Here¡¯s what we¡¯ll do. I¡¯ll bestow various abilities upon Eugene now, and then move to the other realm. That way, those abilities will be inherent to Eugene, not reliant on my connection. This approach is akin to life creation, so there are limits to what abilities I can grant without violating the laws of the universe. The avatar, Eugene, must remain within the bounds of a Terran, adhering to the universe¡¯s principles. Alright, let¡¯s enhance the body¡­ Oh, and add mana abilities. I¡¯ll have Jupiter teach him. That sounds good. He can learn and use magic directly. Of course, I could make him a magic prodigy and let him use all the magic knowledge I have, but¡­ that wouldn¡¯t be fun. Alright, let¡¯s not make him too overpowered; that would be boring. Just to be safe, I¡¯ll create a backup personality so he can act independently if our connection is severed. Everything¡¯s ready¡­ Shall we go? To the other dimension. Ssssk©¤ The main body entered the massive rift in the dimension. What appeared inside was an astonishing sight. Oh¡­ this is quite fascinating. The other dimension. To be precise, it¡¯s a kind of ¡°dimensional rift¡± where multiple universes float around. A place where one can travel to other universes if they wish. No physical laws apply here¡ªno light, no sound, nothing. Naturally, there¡¯s no color, and nothing can be felt in this void. The only sensation is the distortion enveloping the entire body. Mortals wouldn¡¯t last a second here. Even the strongest Lubaran, aboard the most advanced spaceship created with all the universe¡¯s technology, would be the same. The concept of ¡°strongest¡± only applies within their universe¡¯s laws, which are meaningless here. Light, matter, and life all cease to exist. Yet, there are things that can be felt in this place where nothing should exist. Well¡­ it¡¯s obvious. S?a??h the N0v?lFir?.?et website on G??gl? to access chapters of n?vels early and in the highest quality. If there are inhabitants of this rift, they must be like me. Like this rift, without any laws and where nothing exists¡­ such beings. They are Outer Gods. It seems they sensed me, and some are approaching out of curiosity. Oh no, what should I do? I expected to meet other Outer Gods, but I wasn¡¯t mentally prepared yet. What if they look too grotesque? As an Outer God myself, just seeing them won¡¯t cause my mind to collapse, but if they¡¯re too horrifying, it might affect my mental state¡­ [Who are you? I¡¯ve never seen you before.] At that moment, someone spoke to me. Of course, it wasn¡¯t a real spoken word. In this place, it¡¯s not about the medium of sound; the concept of sound itself doesn¡¯t exist. It was like a system language, directly speaking into my mind. The being that spoke to me had a grotesquely twisted mass of tentacles. An entity with a form so bizarre it defied any definition. I knew this being. I had no information about it, but I knew what it was called in that universe. The one who, in just ten minutes, destroyed the minds of countless beings on dozens of planets and Galactic Union bases, leaving them completely paralyzed. Known as the ¡®Crawling Chaos,¡¯ it is presumed to be a high-ranking Outer God. The code name given by the Union is¡­ ¡®Nyarlathotep.¡¯ Chapter 10: Nyarlathotep Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 10 ¡°So¡­ you couldn¡¯t find any connection, is that what you¡¯re saying?¡± ¡°Yes, that¡¯s correct.¡± ¡°We apologize for not bringing back any useful information.¡± Having returned to the Galactic Union headquarters, Reus and Allegros were reporting to Edgar, one of the Lubaran Elders in the Galactic Union Elder Council. Though indistinguishable due to the Lubaran¡¯s characteristic blue skin and elongated heads, Edgar had the most noble blue hair among the Lubaran, a slightly darker teal that indicated his high status. ¡°¡­Sigh, well, that¡¯s fine. The Outer God disappeared suddenly anyway.¡± ¡°What?¡± Reus and Allegros looked puzzled at the news of the Outer God¡¯s sudden disappearance. ¡°It tore through space and vanished, just like other Outer Gods do.¡± It wasn¡¯t uncommon for Outer Gods to travel between dimensions. However, it was rare for them to disappear without causing any significant incidents. Usually, whether their stay was brief or extended, they would cause at least one major disaster before leaving. Of course, the passengers on the tourist ship did suffer from mental attacks, but those were resolved more easily than expected. Even if Eugene, the Terran, hadn¡¯t intervened, it wouldn¡¯t have been considered a major incident. Only one tourist ship with a few hundred passengers was affected. It was a bit risky that Elder Jupiter of the Meias, a member of the Elder Council, was among them, but still. In hindsight, the incident seemed more like a minor accident that a giant monster might cause rather than an Outer God. Moreover, the entity didn¡¯t move from its spot and vanished a few hours later. This was unprecedented in the history of the Galactic Union, leaving them extremely puzzled. ¡°¡­Well, it¡¯s fortunate that there was no damage. Plus, thanks to that Terran named Eugene, the passengers on the tourist ship were mostly unharmed.¡± Elder Edgar added that he hoped future encounters with Outer Gods would end similarly. ¡°More importantly, I¡¯d like to investigate this Eugene further. You mentioned his identity was erased by the Terrans, right?¡± Rather than dwelling on the past incident, Elder Edgar¡¯s interest shifted to Eugene, the Terran. The fact that the entity tore through dimensions and vanished confirmed it was a high-ranking Outer God. This meant Eugene had purified the mental collapse caused by a high-ranking Outer God using the latest scientific technology¡ªsome kind of brainwave adjustment device. If true, it indicated Eugene was an extraordinary genius inventor. Such talent should naturally be brought into the Galactic Union. ¡°Contact the Terrans and see if anyone remembers him.¡± Such a talent might be known by name or face among the Terrans. Although names and faces can be changed, it was worth a try. ¡°¡­Shall we go and bring him here if necessary?¡± ¡°Hah, you fool.¡± Elder Edgar sighed in exasperation at Reus¡¯s suggestion. ¡°We investigated him without proper explanation, so he probably holds a grudge. And now you want to bring him here for his scientific knowledge?¡± ¡°¡­¡­¡± It made sense. They had just conducted a thorough investigation, so Eugene¡¯s perception of the Galactic Union was likely negative. ¡°¡­Well, I made a mistake too. I should have asked where he learned about that technology, considering the possibility it wasn¡¯t his.¡± Reflecting on his hasty actions, Elder Edgar acknowledged his lack of caution. ¡°First, we¡¯ll send an official apology and give it some time. He¡¯ll likely stay with Elder Jupiter for a while.¡± ¡°Yes, understood.¡± They decided to apologize formally and give it some time regarding Eugene. Over time, any emotion tends to fade. Especially for Terrans, who have relatively short lifespans and poor memory. # Nyarlathotep¡­ what an imposing presence. Is it on a level similar to mine? It¡¯s comparable to Shub-Niggurath, as seen in the history of the universe. Presumed to be high-ranking. Who decided that? It seems more like a top-tier entity¡­ Wait, if it and Shub-Niggurath are on par with me¡­ does that mean I¡¯m top-tier too? [Answer the question. I asked who you are.] While I was pondering this, Nyarlathotep spoke to me again. [You just came from that universe over there. There was no one like you among those who entered.] Well, of course. I was just born there today. [I was newly born. A few hours ago.] I decided to answer, thinking that if I kept silent, they might consider me rude and swarm to attack. ¡­Well, I¡¯m not sure if Outer Gods have such seniority rules like college seniors and juniors. [¡­What?] Nyarlathotep expressed confusion, as if it didn¡¯t understand what I meant. What, even an Outer God doesn¡¯t know everything? Didn¡¯t it know I was born? Ah, right. I also have little information about higher-ranking Outer Gods. At best, I have data from historical sightings and incident reports in the universe. S~?a??h the N?v?lF?re.?et website on G??gl? to access chapters of n?vels early and in the highest quality. [That¡¯s strange. There¡¯s no such thing as a newly born entity among those like us.] ??? What does that even mean? I clearly just came into existence. So when do Outer Gods come into being? I mean, in Cthulhu Mythos, don¡¯t Outer Gods create other Cthulhu entities? [You are like us. A being close to the Source¡­ surely, you must have originally existed as part of the Source.] Originally part of the Source¡­ that must refer to the true high-ranking Outer Gods. Maybe it thinks I¡¯m the same because I possess similar powers? But I was just an ordinary human who reincarnated as an Outer God. The Galactic Union even captured the moment I popped into existence. I wasn¡¯t created by anyone; I just came into being on my own. Yet, I possess powers akin to those of the original Source. ¡­What exactly am I? [Curious. You are like us, yet different. You have no memories, and your nature is peculiar. Like¡­ yes, like the insignificant beings in the universe.] Well, I was originally just a mere human. I still vividly remember my human memories and emotions. Even though I¡¯ve become an Outer God and gained knowledge of the universe, those memories remain. That is indeed curious. By now, my human ego should have completely dissolved, and I should have become like the other Outer Gods. Listening to this Outer God, I realize I am somewhat different. But so what? No one is criticizing or restraining me. Not that I¡¯m sure they could, but anyway. Since things have turned out this way, I might as well enjoy being an eternal, immortal creator god. Living an eternal life, I don¡¯t know when my personality might erode and disappear, but for now, I¡¯ll enjoy it. That¡¯s what I decided. [Don¡¯t worry about it. I¡¯ll live my life as I see fit. Do other Outer Gods impose sanctions if I do?] [¡­No, they do not. As long as we are not interfered with, we do not interfere.] That¡¯s a relief. If the Outer Gods decided to have a battle of transcendents, it would have been troublesome. I¡¯m a newbie as an Outer God, while they¡¯ve likely existed for eons, making them highly experienced. Our power might be similar, but I¡¯d probably lose due to the experience gap. Well¡­ as top-tier Outer Gods, we are concepts and thus absolutely immortal, so even if I lost, my existence wouldn¡¯t be annihilated. [You are truly fascinating. Your thoughts, speech, and nature. It¡¯s like observing the insignificant beings. I have a great interest in them. And I find you, who resembles them despite being like us, very intriguing.] Suddenly, Nyarlathotep said this, and its writhing tentacles began to thrash violently. Ugh¡­! Could you not move like that? It¡¯s making me nauseous¡­ Having a massive tentacle entity the size of Saturn take an interest in me isn¡¯t exactly pleasant. Honestly, it¡¯s unsettling. It feels like I¡¯m being observed as a test subject. [Would you like to converse with me further? In return, I will share some special knowledge.] [¡­¡­] Special knowledge, huh. I don¡¯t really need to know more¡­ or maybe it means knowledge I don¡¯t have? Perhaps it wants to share some know-how about living as an Outer God? That would be relatively interesting. Even though I¡¯ve done all sorts of things to enjoy the sci-fi universe, creating avatars and all, my essence is still that of an Outer God. ¡­Huh? Come to think of it, I can¡¯t feel the connection with Eugene. Oh no! It must have been severed. I got so distracted by Nyarlathotep¡¯s sudden appearance! Damn¡­ I can¡¯t reconnect from within this rift¡­ Well, it can¡¯t be helped. I prepared a backup personality for situations like this, so Eugene¡¯s personality should be controlling the avatar and acting independently. I copied my personality, so it shouldn¡¯t deviate much from what I would do. I also endowed it with ample abilities, so there shouldn¡¯t be any danger¡­ Alright, let¡¯s not worry about it. For now, I should take this opportunity to converse with Nyarlathotep, this ancient Outer God senior. It¡¯s a bit unsettling that it¡¯s interested in me, but it doesn¡¯t seem to have any intention of harming me. This is a rare chance to talk with a top-tier Outer God. Chapter 11: Special Knowledge Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 11 [Others are coming. I don¡¯t want our conversation to be interrupted.] Nyarlathotep said this and began writhing its grotesque tentacles again. In the next moment, I sensed a new space forming around us, centered on Nyarlathotep and me. I could have avoided entering the space or even disrupted its formation, but it didn¡¯t feel particularly dangerous, so I accepted it. The once empty space transformed into an infinitely expanding, pure white space. At its center was a small tea table and chairs, where an ordinary human could sit and drink tea. ¡°How about this? I changed it to a form that might make you feel more comfortable for our conversation.¡± A human voice reached my ears. Looking down at the source of the voice, I saw a beautiful human woman with long silver hair reaching the floor and red eyes. I realized immediately. Amazingly, this was the same mass of tentacles that had been in front of me moments ago¡­ Nyarlathotep. Wait, it suddenly transformed into a human? ¡°Hm, I changed my body, voice, and even manner of speaking to a form that might make you feel comfortable. Don¡¯t you like it?¡± She looked somewhat dissatisfied. It seemed my reaction wasn¡¯t very positive. Well, that¡¯s understandable. I was caught off guard by the sudden transformation into a human. Still¡­ this is definitely better than having a conversation as gigantic, grotesque monsters in a formless space. ¡­But why a pretty female character¡­? Outer Gods, naturally, have no meaningful concept of gender. So, that form must be a reflection of her personal taste. ¡­Interesting taste you have there. Anyway. I quickly transformed my body into a human form as well. It seemed she wanted us to comfortably enjoy teatime and converse in human forms. I chose the appearance of Eugene, the form I had originally created. ¡°I like it. Very comfortable.¡± I said this as I gently sat down on the chair. ¡°Good, good.¡± She smiled, seemingly pleased. It appeared she had also adjusted her personality and speech to resemble that of a human woman. Wow¡­ facing her like this, she really is stunning. If I were still my former human self, I probably wouldn¡¯t have been able to utter a single word to someone with such a celestial appearance. She sipped what appeared to be black tea and then looked at me. ¡°So, tell me. Who are you? Where did you come from? What do you mean by newly born?¡± A barrage of questions came at once. But I could only provide a precise answer to one of them. ¡°I still don¡¯t fully know who I am. Other than being an ¡®Outer God¡¯ as mortals call us. As for being newly born, it¡¯s literal. I don¡¯t know the exact details either. I possess information about the entire universe¡­ but I lack information about myself and my birth.¡± Where did I come from? This, I could answer with certainty. ¡°I was once a human. By the standards of the universe I was born in, a ¡®Terran.¡¯ I must have been a mere insignificant being born in one of the countless universes within this rift.¡± ¡°I see. So that¡¯s why you retain the ego of a weak life form. Fascinating. It¡¯s not an artificially created ego like mine, but an original one.¡± Though I shared my origins, Nyarlathotep didn¡¯t seem particularly surprised. However, she did find it intriguing. ¡°How can the information entity of a weak life form become a being of the Source? And to be newly born, not created, but naturally¡­¡± An information entity is commonly referred to as a ¡®soul.¡¯ When a life form dies, it becomes a kind of energy entity that retains the memories of its living self. After I died, I transformed into one and somehow drifted into another universe, becoming what I am now. It seemed she was quite confused, as she had never encountered someone like me before. Beings of the Source¡­ meaning high-ranking Outer Gods like Nyarlathotep and myself, create most lower-ranking Outer Gods. Despite being mere creations, they are residents of the rift and possess the abilities of Outer Gods, capable of defying the laws of the universe. Thus, I am a unique anomaly, a primordial being that wasn¡¯t created but was newly born, an impossible trait. An especially peculiar existence among Outer Gods. Fascinating. Whoosh©¤ ¡°¡­?!¡± Suddenly, Nyarlathotep lunged at me, extending her hair like tentacles to bind my entire body and pin me down in a mount position. What the hell is she doing, this crazy woman?! ¡°You are incredibly fascinating! I¡¯d love to capture you and thoroughly investigate and study you¡­ but that¡¯s not what you¡¯d want, is it?¡± This lunatic! Her eyes are gleaming with a desire to dissect me! ¡°¡­I¡¯d appreciate it if you refrained.¡± I said, trying to push her away. Her hair, like tentacles, was tightly wrapped around me, making it quite difficult to free myself. ¡­Thank goodness she transformed into a human form. If I imagine a massive tentacle monster wrapping its tentacles around me¡­ ugh! ¡°Well, I still gained a lot. Just knowing that you were originally a human¡­ a weak mortal, is a significant discovery.¡± Nyarlathotep tidied her writhing hair as she spoke. Once again, I was genuinely relieved that she had taken on the form of a beautiful woman. ¡°Perhaps your information entity is somewhat different from ordinary life forms. It might have been something else from the beginning. That could be why you became like us.¡± Hmm, I doubt that. In my past life, I was an utterly ordinary person. Nothing special about me at all. ¡°Now it¡¯s my turn to give you a gift.¡± Ah, finally. I¡¯m about to receive some amazing know-how from this ancient Outer God senior. ¡°It seems you only possess knowledge from the universe you were born in.¡± Well¡­ I haven¡¯t been to other universes yet. If I go to another universe, I should be able to acquire its laws and knowledge. ¡°I¡¯ll teach you how to obtain knowledge from other universes without having to travel around.¡± Oh, there¡¯s a way to do that? That would indeed be incredibly useful. I could showcase new abilities using knowledge not found in this universe. And if I find something interesting among the acquired information, it might be fun to explore that universe and experiment. ¡°Beings of the Source can connect to ¡®the one who is the ultimate Source, yet has no Source¡¯ and receive knowledge from all universes within this rift. I¡¯ll teach you how to connect to it.¡± The one who is the ultimate Source, yet has no Source¡­ it sounds paradoxical. Connected to all universes within the rift. An absolute being that surpasses even the Outer Gods¡­ could it be something like ¡®Azathoth,¡¯ known as the pinnacle of the Cthulhu Mythos? Now that I think about it, their code names are similar to the Outer Gods in the Cthulhu Mythos. And the term Foreign God is synonymous with Outer Gods¡­ there might be some connection. ¡°I¡¯ve implanted the method in your mind. Try connecting and receiving the information.¡± Nyarlathotep pointed to my head as she spoke. As she said, new knowledge had entered my mind. I drew a bizarre sigil, one I had never seen before, and uttered strange words that couldn¡¯t be pronounced by a human mouth, using a method similar to my original form¡¯s speech. [¡ö¡ö¡ö, ¡ö¡ö¡ö¡ö-¡ö¡ö¡ö, ¡ö¡ö¡ö¡ö¡ö.] And then, in the next moment. S?a??h th? N?v?lFir?.n?t website on G??gl? to access chapters of n?vels early and in the highest quality. ¡°¡­¡­¡± ¡­Huh? What¡¯s going on? Nothing¡¯s happening. According to Nyarlathotep, I should now be accessing a vast archive, with information from countless universes within the rift laid out before me. But nothing of the sort is happening. Yet, I can feel the information pouring into my mind. Instead of an archive appearing, the information is directly being input into my brain. Ugh¡­ even as an Outer God, this amount of information is a bit overwhelming. Just how much data is this? The sheer volume of countless universal laws and diverse knowledge from innumerable universes is staggering, enough to take an eternity just to list. ¡°¡­This is incredible.¡± After it all ended. I realized I had acquired an unfathomable amount of information, incomparable to before. It was so much that it was hard to keep track of what knowledge pertained to what. I thought about asking Nyarlathotep why it seemed different from what she had described, but I decided to chalk it up to me being a somewhat anomalous Outer God¡­ and let it go. Well, thanks to this, I now possess vast knowledge of the multiverse. I¡¯ll have to take some time to organize it all in my mind later. ¡°It seems we¡¯re done here. Let¡¯s have more conversations in the future. Unlike with others, talking with you isn¡¯t boring. I like it.¡± With that, Nyarlathotep began to retract the space. Swoosh©¤ We returned to the twisted void, and both Nyarlathotep and I reverted to our original forms. [It was a useful conversation. Farewell.] Nyarlathotep wriggled her grotesque tentacles and went off to another place. ¡­The gap between her previous beautiful girl form and her current one is dizzying. Chapter 12: The Creator and the Created Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 12 After seeing off the two Lubaran, Reus and Allegros, Jupiter let out a short sigh of relief and returned to the site where the base was being repaired. Although he had claimed the explosion was due to a mechanical failure, the truth was that it was his doing, and he felt compelled to help with the repairs. ¡°Hey, move those materials over here.¡± ¡°No, not that! Bring the anti-gravity transport device!¡± Given the sudden accident, people were bustling around. Most of the work was being done by machines, but it was humans who transported and supervised those machines. There were also personnel investigating the cause of the mechanical failure that led to the explosion. ¡°Elder Jupiter? What brings you here?¡± The facility manager of the base¡¯s headquarters greeted Jupiter upon spotting him. ¡°Hmm, I thought I might lend a hand.¡± ¡°What? You, Elder, personally?¡± The manager looked at Jupiter in astonishment. It was understandable. Elders of the Union, regardless of race, held the highest positions within the Union. Even if it was a nominal position, the title of Elder carried significant weight. And here was an Elder of the Meias, one of the superior races, offering to help with such menial tasks. It was no wonder the manager was surprised. Of course, from Jupiter¡¯s perspective, he felt uneasy unless he personally dealt with the mess he had caused. ¡®Elder Jupiter is such a good person, helping out even with minor accidents.¡¯ His actions led the manager and the surrounding people to think highly of him. ¡°Let¡¯s start by clearing the debris. The machines are efficient but slow.¡± Naturally, robots utilizing advanced technology were far more efficient than human hands. Especially for moving large and heavy building debris that ordinary people couldn¡¯t handle, anti-gravity machines were almost indispensable. However, to Jupiter, even those seemed sluggish. Rumble©¤ And that was only natural. He was someone who could use magic to lift and move several tons of building debris with a single spell. ¡°Wow¡­¡± ¡°Amazing¡­¡± The machine operators and base staff couldn¡¯t help but be amazed. Seeing Jupiter effortlessly handle what would take ten trips with an anti-gravity machine using just one spell was nothing short of astonishing. ¡°That¡¯s incredible. Magic seems very convenient.¡± ¡°Haha, it is a useful ability. But it has a major drawback, unless one is born with mana, the energy within the body, it cannot be learned.¡± It would be wonderful if everyone could learn magic and handle things so easily. But if that were the case, machines like anti-gravity devices wouldn¡¯t have developed. Magic could only be learned by those who, like the Meias, had a special energy within their bodies. Therefore, it couldn¡¯t be taught to just anyone. While some individuals from other races occasionally possessed such power, it was so rare that it was almost never seen. In essence, it was a unique power of the Meias. Anyway, as Jupiter was diligently helping with the base reconstruction, ¡°Master¡­!¡± Suddenly, his disciple, Lowie Hendrick, came running towards him in a panic. ¡°What¡¯s the matter? I told you to stay with Eugene.¡± Jupiter had instructed Lowie Hendrick to stay by Eugene¡¯s side and assist him. He had intended to help with the base reconstruction for a bit before returning, but Lowie had come alone, leaving Eugene behind. Moreover, Lowie looked extremely flustered, indicating that something urgent had happened. ¡°Eugene¡­ suddenly collapsed¡­!¡± ¡°What?!¡± Jupiter was so shocked by Lowie¡¯s words that he inadvertently raised his voice. This drew the attention of everyone around them. ¡°¡­Lead the way.¡± Jupiter, after glancing around to gauge the situation, told the facility manager that he had an urgent matter to attend to and would be stepping away briefly. He then hurriedly followed Lowie to where Eugene was. However, ¡°Huh?¡± ¡°¡­?¡± Contrary to Lowie Hendrick¡¯s words, Eugene was not collapsed. In fact, he was standing and stretching as if nothing had happened. ¡°¡­Lowie.¡± ¡°No, it¡¯s true! He really collapsed just a moment ago¡­ He didn¡¯t respond no matter how much I called, and even healing magic didn¡¯t work¡­¡± Jupiter¡¯s sharp glare made Lowie hastily plead his case. Eugene had indeed collapsed. He had fallen like a puppet with its strings cut. Lowie had tried everything¡ªcalling out to him, using healing magic. But Eugene¡¯s pupils had been dilated, he wasn¡¯t breathing, and he hadn¡¯t moved at all, as if his soul had left his body. Yet now, upon returning, Eugene was perfectly fine and moving around, leaving Lowie utterly bewildered. ¡®He wouldn¡¯t lie about this.¡¯ Of course, Jupiter didn¡¯t think Lowie was lying. He wasn¡¯t that kind of person. So, Eugene must have collapsed for some reason and then gotten back up. Considering that Eugene was an avatar of an Outer God, it was necessary to investigate what had happened. ¡°Oh, you must be Grandpa Jupiter¡­ and this is Mr. Lowie. Right? The two who know my true identity.¡± ¡°¡­??¡± But something even stranger happened. Eugene was acting as if he was meeting Jupiter and Lowie for the first time. It was as if he had the memories but was encountering them in person for the first time. As Jupiter and Lowie stood confused, Eugene smiled and began to explain the situation. ¡°Oh, you must be quite bewildered. I am an independent personality created by the main body of Eugene. I am a separate entity from the main body.¡± He explained that there had been a slight issue with the connection to the main body, so his backup personality had emerged as a precaution. Eugene kindly elaborated. ¡°It seems the initial connection took a bit longer, making it look like I had just dropped dead. Haha.¡± ¡°¡­¡­¡± ¡°¡­¡­¡± While he might have thought he was making a light-hearted joke, it was impossible to take it lightly. Especially for Lowie Hendrick, who had genuinely feared that Eugene had died. In the end, nothing serious had happened; it was just that the personality occupying Eugene¡¯s body had changed. Though it was a bit shocking, this new personality retained most of the previous main body¡¯s character and memories. Since he understood that he was an avatar of an Outer God, there shouldn¡¯t be any major issues in how Jupiter or Lowie interacted with him. ¡®¡­Is his main body alright?¡¯ While it was unclear what had happened to the main body, the calm demeanor of this backup personality suggested that it wasn¡¯t anything too dangerous. Not that it was something Jupiter, a mere mortal in the eyes of an Outer God, should be worrying about. ¡®¡­A backup personality, huh. So it¡¯s possible to create such a thing in an avatar.¡¯ Jupiter was once again astonished by the abilities of the Outer Gods, which defied even the laws of nature. Creating a perfectly functional mortal body and implanting a personality in it was beyond extraordinary. That essentially meant he could create intelligent life forms directly. And not just mere replicas, but beings with fully developed personalities. Of course, with the current scientific technology of the Galactic Union, it was possible to create cloned life forms. Using high-performance AI, they could artificially create personalities almost indistinguishable from ordinary people. But this was on a different level. It wasn¡¯t about cloning or mimicking; it was the birth of a completely new life form, 100% unique. Even the Lubaran could only achieve a 90% similarity at best through cloning. What could only be achieved through the natural process of birth was created effortlessly. S?a?ch* Th? N0??F?re.n?t website on G??gl? to access chapters of n?vels early and in the highest quality. And that wasn¡¯t all. ¡°¡­I can sense incredibly powerful mana.¡± ¡°Oh, yes. It seems the main body thought it might be dangerous if the connection was severed, so it granted me some abilities. I think it intended for me to learn magic from Grandpa Jupiter with this mana.¡± ¡°¡­¡­¡± The mana was overwhelmingly immense. Even among the Meias, who were the base for Eugene, such innate mana was extremely rare. Those who possessed such levels of mana were all chosen as Elders of the Meias. As a precautionary measure, giving such powerful mana to an avatar was overkill. It was like handing a machine gun to someone just because the night streets were dangerous. And Eugene¡¯s nonchalant attitude about it all. ¡®¡­If it desired, it could potentially create a new race and civilization surpassing even the Lubaran.¡¯ Moreover, an Outer God wouldn¡¯t tire or stop after creating just one avatar. Like the creation myths of various races, it could give birth to primordial intelligent life forms that would pioneer new civilizations. ¡®Although no such cases have been discovered or revealed¡­ perhaps some ancient races were indeed created as mere diversions by Outer Gods.¡¯ Not only that. Perhaps every living being in this universe¡­ ¡®Enough. I should stop thinking about this.¡¯ Jupiter shook his head, trying to dismiss the deepening thoughts. Chapter 13: The Watching Constellations Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 13 After Nyarlathotep left, a few other Outer Gods showed interest in me and approached. However, unlike her, they didn¡¯t seem as intrigued and merely glanced at me before moving on. Do they generally have little interest in each other? Or perhaps my power is too overwhelming for them to approach? Those who showed interest were all of a higher rank. Most of them were weaker compared to Nyarlathotep and me. Still, being of a higher rank meant they had acquired knowledge from multiple universes, unlike the lower-ranked Outer Gods. But their knowledge wasn¡¯t extensive. They only had bits and pieces of information, like historical tales of their occasional appearances in the universe. Even that was limited to two or three instances, making it hard to draw any conclusions. Well¡­ considering this space is outside the multiverse, it¡¯s vast, and there aren¡¯t many Outer Gods nearby. Most of them were drifting far away in this endless rift. Still, they must have sensed my presence to some extent¡­ especially the highest-ranking Outer Gods. It seems they don¡¯t show much interest in the emergence of a new Outer God. Nyarlathotep might be somewhat unique in that regard. ¡­But I keep thinking of her as Nyarlathotep. That¡¯s her codename. In other worlds, she¡¯s called by various names. Nithlatotep, Nyarlathotep, Nirlarthotep¡­ she¡¯s known by many names, all with similar pronunciations and meanings. Crawling Chaos, Creeping Chaos, Ascending Chaos¡­ basically, a lot of chaos. However, the highest-ranking Outer Gods generally don¡¯t reveal their true names. Perhaps they don¡¯t even have names to begin with. The lower-tier Outer Gods, created by the higher ones, might have been given names. Or they might have adopted names given by their worshippers or lesser beings. But the highest-ranking Outer Gods didn¡¯t concern themselves with such things. Their very existence was unique and absolute. They weren¡¯t created by anyone; they had existed from the very beginning, so they might not have names at all. ¡­Come to think of it, I don¡¯t have a name either. There¡¯s no real reason to have one. There¡¯s no one to call me by it, and the other Outer Gods either don¡¯t care or can distinguish me without a name. Names are a way for lower life forms to express their identity, so they might not be relevant to Outer Gods. ¡­Still, it would be nice to have a codename, wouldn¡¯t it? [ ¡­¡­ ] ¡­Well, it doesn¡¯t really matter if I don¡¯t get one! Sure, sure. Anyway, being alone is actually nice. I was originally an introverted person, so being alone is comfortable. Plus, I¡¯m busy organizing the knowledge in my head, so there¡¯s no time to be bored. Oh, as I organize, I¡¯ve found a universe almost identical to the one I lived in. It feels very similar to the sci-fi universe I was just in. The only difference might be the existence of the Galactic Union. Of course, I can¡¯t be sure it¡¯s the universe I originally lived in. There are billions of similar universes, even just the ones I can count right now. ¡­Humans on Earth said the observable universe is 90 billion light-years across. Modern humans still have a long way to go to truly understand the universe. Considering the multiverse, it¡¯s like examining a single atom in the entire human body. ¡­Oh! Speaking of Earth, I wonder how my avatar, Eugene, is doing? There¡¯s no concept of time in the rift, so I can¡¯t tell how much time has passed over there. Among the various pieces of knowledge in my mind, there¡¯s information about the rift. While I can¡¯t directly connect with the creations of the universe from the rift, I can observe them if I focus. S?a??h th? N?v?l(F)ire.n?t website on G??gl? to access chapters of n?vels early and in the highest quality. It feels like a constellation watching over an awakened one from the divine realm. Well¡­ except that the constellation is an Outer God and the awakened one is my own creation. Anyway, let¡¯s see what Eugene is up to. As I thought about it, an image of Eugene appeared in my mind, like turning on a TV. [Eugene¡­!! What are you thinking?! This is a blatant attack on the Galactic Union!] [Ask the underground researchers. I¡¯m just doing what I want¡­ Shock Wave!] [You wretched Tera brat©¤!] [Thud©¤!!] ¡­??? What¡¯s this? Something seems off. It feels like I¡¯ve tuned into the wrong channel. This doesn¡¯t seem like the drama I was originally watching. Ah! I see¡­ I set the time wrong. I accidentally set it too far into the future according to their universe¡¯s timeline. The point where I lost connection with Eugene¡­ was about ten years ago from this moment. But what¡¯s happening now? It looked like Eugene was attacking one of the Lubaran Elders. Is Eugene leading a rebellion against the Galactic Union ten years from now¡­? I haven¡¯t organized the information about the future timeline yet, or maybe it¡¯s not in my mind at all, but there doesn¡¯t seem to be any history of such events. Or is it? There are certainly details about general future branches. This must be because the future split into a path where Eugene exists when I created him! Is it that events caused by my avatar aren¡¯t pre-known to me? Oh¡­ so even an Outer God can¡¯t foresee variables they directly create. This is quite fascinating! In that case, it might be more entertaining to watch how Eugene moves and changes the future rather than directly intervening as him. It¡¯s like watching a real sci-fi drama. And if I don¡¯t like the script, I can subtly interfere and change it. ¡­Is this why gods create beings and scatter them into the world? Anyway, this is intriguing. Being able to watch real events unfold in the universe like a drama is quite exciting. [Grandpa. I¡¯ve taken care of things here. Let¡¯s head underground.] [¡­As expected of Lord Eugene. It seems you¡¯ve already surpassed me.] [It¡¯s thanks to your excellent teaching, Grandpa. Let¡¯s go quickly.] Ugh! I¡¯m dying to know what happens next! What¡¯s down there in the underground?! But I¡¯m also curious about what led up to this point! What happened that brought Eugene here? Alright, let¡¯s rewind to ten years ago and watch from the beginning. After all, ten years of story will pass quickly. I have all the time in the world. I am eternal and immortal! ¡­Well, there¡¯s no concept of time or aging here, but still! Alright, setting the time back ten years¡­ Okay. Start! [¡­I can sense incredibly powerful mana.] [Oh, yes. It seems the main body thought it might be dangerous if the connection was severed, so it granted me some abilities. I think it intended for me to learn magic from Grandpa Jupiter with this mana.] [¡­¡­] So, it continues from the point where I lost connection with Eugene. Darn! If I had known, I would have erased the memory of my main body from Eugene¡¯s and the others¡¯ minds. A story about a reincarnated genius Tera would be more interesting than one starting with the knowledge of being an avatar of an Outer God. Well¡­ it¡¯s not worth going back to that universe just to change that one thing. This might be interesting in its own way, so let¡¯s watch and see. # After that, Eugene spent his days learning magic from Jupiter with Lowie. Staying at Union Base B-45, Eugene diligently studied magic. Thanks to the immense mana and innate talent granted by his main body, he quickly surpassed Lowie. ¡°¡­You¡¯re amazing.¡± ¡°Oh, come on. I received my abilities from an Outer God. If I couldn¡¯t do at least this much, it would be a problem.¡± As he said. All of Eugene¡¯s powers were granted by his main body. It was only natural for him to achieve this level. Therefore, Lowie Hendrick didn¡¯t feel much inferiority towards Eugene. From the start, Eugene was a different existence. ¡°You¡¯re truly incredible. Your progress is astounding. Even among the Meias, no magician has grown this quickly.¡± Jupiter genuinely praised him. In just two days, Eugene had mastered all the basics of magic, and within a week, he had already begun practicing intermediate magic. Even a genius would take a month to master the basics and a year to move from beginner to intermediate. But Eugene had accomplished this in just a week. There was no time to feel inferior; it was simply awe-inspiring. ¡°At this rate, you¡¯ll soon finish intermediate magic. Teaching advanced magic alone might be difficult for me¡­¡± Jupiter seemed to ponder for a moment before speaking. ¡°¡­Lord Eugene. Would you be willing to go to the Meias¡¯ planet?¡± ¡°Huh? Planet?¡± Eugene tilted his head at Jupiter¡¯s question. ¡°Yes. Advanced magic requires a teacher of Elder level, and I haven¡¯t mastered all advanced magic myself. You¡¯ll need to learn the remaining advanced spells from other Elders or top-tier magicians.¡± Lowie added an explanation to Jupiter¡¯s proposal. In other words, Jupiter couldn¡¯t teach all the advanced magic alone, so they should go to the Meias¡¯ planet cluster to learn from others. ¡°Oh, I¡¯d love that. But is it okay for an outsider to enter?¡± ¡°I¡¯m an Elder. What¡¯s there to worry about?¡± ¡°Oh, right. And you did create my identity, didn¡¯t you?¡± Thus, Eugene headed to the ¡®Meias Planet Cluster,¡¯ a group of about ten planets inhabited by the Meias. Chapter 14: The Hand of God Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 14 [The Meias Planet Cluster is in Sector C. So, we¡¯ll need to go through several wormholes.] [It¡¯s going to take a while.] [Yes. It will take some time. But you can rest comfortably on the spaceship. It can accommodate a few more passengers.] Oh, finally, they¡¯re heading to the Meias Planet Cluster by spaceship. The Meias Planet Cluster. It¡¯s the homeland and residential area of the Meias, consisting of about ten planets. It¡¯s also the birthplace of magic, occasionally visited by other races with mana energy in their bodies. Or by those simply curious about magic. Most visitors come out of curiosity or to see if they can use magic themselves. The Meias generally don¡¯t welcome such outsiders. They believe magic is a unique ability of the Meias. Hmm¡­ I¡¯m a bit worried. I hope Eugene doesn¡¯t face racial discrimination as a Tera when he arrives. [Then, I¡¯ll teach you more intermediate magic during the journey.] [Thank you.] Grandpa Jupiter seems to be teaching intermediate magic even while traveling on the spaceship. Well, Eugene is still a beginner in intermediate magic. Even with wormholes, traveling to a completely different sector will take a considerable amount of time, so he might master intermediate magic during the journey. Considering he mastered beginner magic and started intermediate magic in just about a week by Earth¡¯s time, intermediate magic might take¡­ about a month? [¡­¡­] Hmm, but magic training scenes aren¡¯t particularly exciting. When Eugene was first learning beginner magic, it was exciting for both of us because everything was new. But now, he¡¯s just learning upgraded versions of those spells, so there¡¯s not much novelty. Of course, it¡¯s still interesting in its own way, but we¡¯ve already spent a lot of time watching him learn beginner magic at the base. Now, even though they¡¯ve moved to a spaceship, it¡¯s still just more magic training. The visuals aren¡¯t particularly engaging. [Maybe I should skip ahead.] As I considered skipping to the Meias Planet Cluster, a piece of information suddenly popped into my mind. [Oh¡­ if they keep going like this, they¡¯ll encounter that.] To reach Sector C, where the Meias Planet Cluster is located, they need to travel through several wormholes. But around the midpoint of their journey, a giant monster is scheduled to appear. Originally, if Eugene weren¡¯t there, no spaceship would be passing through that area, so nothing would happen. But because of Eugene, Grandpa Jupiter¡¯s spaceship is heading to Sector C, and they¡¯ll encounter it. According to the Union¡¯s official ranking, it¡¯s an A-rank giant monster, the second-highest rank. It¡¯s about 4000 km in size, roughly the size of a small planet, and it possesses immense gravitational and magnetic energy. A colossal beast, indeed. To capture it, at least one battalion from the Union and a large warship would be required. It¡¯s so massive that it despises beings that are like ants or mites to it. It¡¯s similar to how humans feel when they see ants or mites¡ªthey want to squash them. As a result, it attacks any humans it encounters indiscriminately. Its power is so overwhelming that even a very strong Elder like Grandpa Jupiter would struggle to handle it alone. Originally, it would pass between Sector B and Sector C and be hunted down by the large warships dispatched by the Galactic Union. But if it encounters the spaceship carrying Grandpa Jupiter, Eugene, and Lowie, it would pose a significant threat to them. They might even die. I can¡¯t let that happen. I can¡¯t let Grandpa Jupiter and Lowie, who are helping my avatar, die. And since this situation arose because of Eugene, it feels like it¡¯s my fault! More importantly, I have no intention of ending Eugene¡¯s exciting space adventure drama prematurely. How could I miss the cathartic scenes where Eugene faces racial discrimination in the Meias¡¯ homeland but uses his innate powerful magic to teach them a lesson? And I need to keep watching to find out what happened with the confrontation against the Lubaran Elder. S?a??h th? N?v?l(F)ire.n?t website on G??gl? to access chapters of n?vels early and in the highest quality. Plus, I¡¯m dying to know what the experiment in the basement is all about. If I die without knowing, I¡¯d be genuinely upset. ¡­Wait, if that¡¯s the case, doesn¡¯t it mean Eugene and Grandpa Jupiter both survive this ordeal? Maybe I don¡¯t need to intervene after all¡­? Or do I? Could it be that the future includes my interference? Since Eugene was born from my intervention, it might be natural for me to help him in seemingly hopeless moments. If the future outcome includes my intervention? Ugh, not knowing is frustrating! What kind of Outer God am I if I can¡¯t figure this out? Forget it. I¡¯m done with complicated thoughts. I¡¯ll just do what I want. Crack©¤ The space splits open. Naturally, it¡¯s a dimensional gate leading to the sci-fi universe, my home and Eugene¡¯s world. I¡¯ll set the location and time roughly¡­ to a point where the A-rank giant monster is slightly behind. Rustle¡­ I step into the opened space. The Galactic Union might detect me and cause a ruckus, but since they¡¯re already monitoring the giant monster, taking it down might improve my image. I might even become known as a benevolent god, opposite to an Outer God, like an Elder God from the Cthulhu Mythos. Thinking that, I reveal myself in the universe again. Since I plan to annihilate the giant monster immediately, I appear right in front of it without any pretense. ¡°¡­?!¡± The giant monster, startled by my sudden appearance as I tore through space, froze in place. It looked like an Overlord with a massive body, a long trunk, and extended tentacles. Despite its seemingly soft appearance, its body was harder than most metals. It was surrounded by immense gravitational waves and magnetic fields, causing physical attacks and even light or other wave-based attacks to refract and miss. This made it difficult to capture the creature with ordinary energy. A neutron cannon, typically used by large warships to destroy planets, would be necessary to inflict damage. Though it was a colossal creature, roughly the size of Mercury, it seemed like a small mouse before me. I was comparable in size to gas giants like Saturn or Jupiter. Now, how should I deal with this creature? ¡°Krreeek¡­!! Just looking at you is corrupting my mind¡­ So, you must be one of those called Outer Gods.¡± Even before I attacked, the giant monster seemed to be suffering from mental corruption just by witnessing my presence. The mental collapse caused by my true form was enough to torment even such a massive and powerful creature. Still, it seemed to be experiencing only a headache. As expected, an A-rank giant monster of planetary size was different. Other beings would have had their brains melted like chocolate by now. The fact that it was speaking indicated it was on a different level from other creatures. In space, sound doesn¡¯t travel due to the lack of a medium, so it was modifying the waves surrounding its body to directly transmit its voice to me. It could manipulate electromagnetic and gravitational waves at will. As a life form in space, its abilities were almost god-like. It was a bundle of special abilities. Well, I could block all electromagnetic waves and not hear it if I wanted to, but there was no need for that. ¡°Ha! Calling yourself an Outer God is laughable! You¡¯re just a big creature using unusual energy. Perfect! I¡¯ll kill you and take the title of Outer God for myself!¡± [¡­?] Haha, it¡¯s amusing to see this tiny mouse spouting nonsense just because I stood still for a moment. Becoming an Outer God isn¡¯t something you achieve by wanting it, my weak mortal friend. Sure, you can survive in the vacuum of space, remain unaffected by electromagnetic storms from various celestial bodies, and live almost eternally without breathing. At a glance, you might seem similar to an Outer God. But¡­ in the end, you¡¯re just a creature bound by the laws of the universe. Huff¡ª I disintegrated a part of its body. No need for any grand gestures. It¡¯s as simple as breaking down and erasing the very molecules that make up a mortal¡¯s body. For me, it¡¯s as easy as breathing. Pffft¡ª! ¡°Arghhh!¡± When about a tenth of its massive head-like body suddenly disintegrated, an enormous amount of blood burst out. Its blue blood spread through space. ¡°What¡­ what did you do¡­?!¡± The giant monster was visibly shocked. Hmm, has it never encountered an Outer God before? It¡¯s so flustered. Well¡­ it¡¯s probably so confident because it¡¯s never met one. Huff¡ª This time, I erased a few of its long tentacles, each about 2000 km in length. ¡°Aaaargh! Ughhh!¡± The creature began to thrash about in agony. Blood started to pour out from the tentacle stumps as well. It would be easier to just annihilate it in one go, but its audacity to claim it would kill me and become an Outer God is quite irritating. Hmm, dragging this out might be dangerous, though. The Galactic Union seems to be moving quite busily, so I should wrap this up quickly and leave. ¡°What¡­ why¡­ why¡­¡± It seemed to be muttering something, but I wasn¡¯t interested. I simply disintegrated its brain. Unable to sustain its life, the creature exploded, scattering its flesh in all directions. Alright, now that my task is done, it¡¯s time to return through the rift. Chapter 15: Yad-Thaddag Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 15 ¡°Did you confirm that? The giant monster reported in the outskirts of Sector C recently.¡± ¡°Yes, we are currently tracking its energy. It seems to be roaming around the border between Sector B and Sector C, and there have been no reports of casualties yet.¡± ¡°Keep monitoring it. If it seems dangerous, we¡¯ll deploy forces to eliminate it immediately.¡± ¡°Understood.¡± The Space Environment Management Department. One of the busiest departments in the Galactic Union. They monitor energy fluctuations in the 24 sectors under the Galactic Union¡¯s jurisdiction, ensuring there are no dangerous elements. Previously, they deployed small satellites across the universe for more detailed monitoring. However, this led to cases where monitoring personnel would directly witness Outer Gods and suffer mental breakdowns. Now, they use infrared and radio wave detection from bases spread throughout each sector. When they detect threats like giant monsters or massive fleets of space pirates, the information is relayed to the Space Safety Management Headquarters, where countermeasures are devised. Currently, they are tracking a giant monster estimated to be A-rank or higher based on its size and radio wave distortion. Deploying one or two large warships is necessary, and even then, significant casualties are expected. The protocol is to avoid provoking it unless its path or behavior poses a threat. The estimated A-rank giant monster they detected is moving from the outskirts of Sector C towards the border between Sector B and Sector C. Its path is skirting the boundary, so it seems unlikely to threaten any protected galaxies or planetary systems. While dedicated personnel continued to monitor it just in case, Beep beep beep¡ª Suddenly, alarms started blaring. ¡°This¡­ this is insane¡­¡± The employee cursed under his breath as he looked at the screen. It was the same special alert they had encountered not long ago¡­ The screen kept flickering between black and normal. ¡°Code Black¡­!!¡± The appearance of an Outer God, Code Black. A special situation where the detected energy in space completely vanished in that area. The size, shape, and the sudden tearing of space indicated the arrival of an Outer God. ¡°Damn it, not again¡­! Quickly, contact the team leader¡­ no, Director Celeste!!¡± The employees urgently contacted Celeste, the head of the Space Environment Management Department. Receiving the call, Celeste rushed to the scene. ¡°Another Outer God appearance? We just had one recently¡­!¡± He hurriedly checked the screen, incredulous. Outer Gods never appeared this frequently. Typically, they appeared once every few years, or at the shortest, every few months by Union time. But it had only been a week since the last appearance. ¡®What, are they not counting the last incident because it wasn¡¯t a big deal?¡¯ Celeste gritted his teeth in frustration as he examined the screen. Something seemed off. ¡°¡­The size and void distortion rate. Isn¡¯t it almost identical to the one we saw before?¡± Since living beings couldn¡¯t directly observe Outer Gods, they identified them by the size, shape, and distortion rate of the empty energy signals. The size, shape, and distortion rate were all very similar to the Outer God that had appeared and disappeared suddenly a week ago. It hadn¡¯t even been given a codename due to the lack of time to analyze it. ¡®Could it be that it¡¯s returned to cause a major incident?¡¯ Celeste thought, but something felt strange. The Outer God had appeared right in front of the estimated A-rank giant monster. As evidence, the giant monster had suddenly stopped moving and seemed to be confronting the Outer God. ¡°¡­What the hell is going on?¡± ¡°What should we do? Should we contact the Safety Management Headquarters?¡± ¡°Yes, we don¡¯t know what might happen. The Outer God could do something, so we need to prepare a response¡­¡± As Celeste was giving instructions, ¡°Huh?!¡± An employee watching the screen suddenly shouted in surprise. ¡°What? What is it?¡± Celeste asked urgently, and the employee pointed at the screen with a trembling voice. ¡°The, the giant monster just¡­ vanished.¡± ¡°What? What do you mean?¡± Celeste pushed aside the employees to check the screen himself. Indeed, the icon representing the giant monster had disappeared from the screen. ¡®Could that Outer God have done this?¡¯ The giant monster? It appeared suddenly and then¡­ S~?a??h the ?ov?l?ir?.n?t website on G??gl? to access chapters of n?vels early and in the highest quality. Why? Questions flooded his mind, but there was no way to answer them. After annihilating the giant monster, the mysterious Outer God seemed to have completed its task and tore through space, disappearing into another dimension. ¡°¡­Both of them are gone.¡± ¡°¡­¡­¡± The sudden situation had passed too quickly. Celeste and the employees were left speechless, staring blankly at the screen. At that moment, ¡°Director Allegros from the Safety Management Headquarters has arrived!¡± ¡°What¡¯s the situation now? Explain it to me again!¡± Allegros rushed in, demanding an explanation. Celeste and the employees could only look at him in silence. The situation had already completely ended. # ¡°So, the creature that had disappeared suddenly reappeared, annihilated the A-rank giant monster we were monitoring, and then vanished again?¡± ¡°Yes, that¡¯s the situation.¡± ¡°¡­Huh.¡± Celeste reported everything he had witnessed to Elder Edgar. After hearing the report, Elder Edgar sighed deeply and shook his head. ¡°This is unprecedented.¡± It almost seemed as if the Outer God had helped the Galactic Union. Previously, it had caused a panic on a single tourist ship and then disappeared without further incident. And now, it had actually helped? ¡®This feels like something out of myth.¡¯ Gods who created the world and aided their creations. It felt like witnessing the gods from the ancient myths of various races. ¡°Is the site where the giant monster died being investigated?¡± ¡°Yes. The Safety Management Headquarters is sending ships and personnel to the site to recover the giant monster¡¯s remains.¡± ¡°Good, the remains of the giant monster will be useful for research, so make sure to secure them properly.¡± ¡°Of course.¡± For now, all they could do was recover the remains of the already dead giant monster. The giant monster¡¯s body, from its skin to its blood and internal organs, was valuable as both material and research data. Honestly, dealing with an A-rank monster would have required several medium-sized combat ships from the Galactic Union, making it a costly endeavor. But now, we had gained a significant advantage without lifting a finger. ¡®A benevolent Outer God¡­ or perhaps we just don¡¯t understand its intentions.¡¯ Regardless of its motives, its actions greatly benefited the Galactic Union. During its first appearance, it caused some damage, but it also led us to discover Eugene, a genius Tera technician. This time, it directly killed the giant monster, providing direct assistance. ¡®Maybe not all Outer Gods are harmful to us.¡¯ It made sense when you thought about it. Higher-tier Outer Gods all possessed their own intelligence and curiosity. While most of the time, their intelligence and curiosity had adverse effects on space-dwelling life forms, there could be instances where they acted beneficially. ¡®We can¡¯t draw conclusions from just this one instance. We need to observe whether this new Outer God is truly friendly towards us.¡¯ It would be wise to monitor it separately. For that, we needed to assign a codename to this new Outer God. ¡°Codename, huh.¡± ¡°I do have a suggestion.¡± When the topic of a codename came up, Celeste proposed an idea he had already thought of. ¡°Yad-Thaddag. It¡¯s the name of a benevolent god from Yorein mythology. The leader of the good gods who opposes evil gods and protects their creations.¡± ¡°¡­I see. So, you hope this Outer God will become a protector and helper for us.¡± Elder Edgar nodded, seemingly pleased with Celeste¡¯s suggestion. Thus, the new Outer God was given the codename ¡®Yad-Thaddag.¡¯ # Yad-Thaddag? Hmm¡­ In that universe, it¡¯s said to be a god from Yorein mythology, but what I know is that Yad-Thaddag is the leader of the Elder Gods in derivative works based on the Cthulhu Mythos. It¡¯s somewhat similar yet different. Or perhaps they¡¯re intentionally giving names that fit well? Well, it doesn¡¯t really matter¡­ but it does feel nice to be given the name of a benevolent god. Not that I¡¯m particularly kind to all the races in the universe¡­ This time, I acted to ensure my avatar and old man Jupiter wouldn¡¯t die. Still, it¡¯s better than other Outer Gods who crush everything like ants or those like Nyarlathotep who destroy and study out of curiosity. I mean, not only did I remove a threat, but from their perspective, they also got valuable research material for free. Thinking about it that way, I must seem like a real angel to them. ¡­A benevolent god protecting its creations. Since I did it to protect my avatar, Eugene, I guess it¡¯s not entirely wrong. Chapter 16: Ubbo-Sathla Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 16 After Eugene and his party safely crossed from Sector B to Sector C and headed towards the Meias planetary system, I felt relieved. Suddenly, someone came to find me. [Was it you who destroyed my creation?] [¡­?] It had a terrifying appearance, like an amoeba enlarged to the size of Jupiter. I could identify it through information from other universes. ¡®Ubbo-Sathla.¡¯ A colossal unicellular organism, referred to as the origin of all life¡­ an Outer God considered a creator deity that literally created life. Naturally, it was a top-tier Outer God like Nyarlathotep. It had countless creations, akin to avatars, spread across various universes, with the number of its creations being the highest among Outer Gods. It was said that nearly quadrillions of its creations were active across the universe. Well¡­ that¡¯s just what the literature from other universes says, so the exact number is probably uncountable. But to say I destroyed one of its creations¡­ What is it talking about? The only life form I recently destroyed was that giant monster¡­ oh. [It was a work I painstakingly created. And you destroyed it. Are you trying to hinder me?] Ubbo-Sathla seemed quite angry. Apparently, it was upset because I had effortlessly killed the giant monster it had meticulously crafted. ¡­I didn¡¯t mean to; that thing threatened my avatar first. Well, it didn¡¯t actually threaten, but it felt like it might. I didn¡¯t know it was something you created. [My apologies. I didn¡¯t know it was your creation.] In situations like this, an apology is the best course of action. No need to escalate into a troublesome conflict. [Don¡¯t think you can get away with such a petty excuse. How dare you destroy my¡­ hmm?] But then, Ubbo-Sathla seemed to notice something and looked behind me. Oh, right. I had materialized Eugene¡¯s perspective into a screen to watch like a drama. But this is something other Outer Gods can easily do, so why would it be interested¡­ [That Tera life form, is that your creation?] Huh? Oh. It¡¯s not the screen but Eugene inside it that¡¯s caught its interest. Well¡­ considering I imbued it with personality, it¡¯s fair to say it¡¯s my creation. [Yes. Is there a problem?] Why is it suddenly interested in this? Surely it¡¯s not going to claim that creating life is its exclusive domain and start some ridiculous territorial dispute¡­ [Very intriguing¡­! Compared to the giant monster I created, this is far more fascinating. Though it¡¯s currently weak, it has the potential to grow and even kill giant monsters.] Saying this, it suddenly moved closer. Ugh¡­! Don¡¯t shove that slimy, sticky body at me¡­!! Of course, I also have a terrifying, wriggly, and sticky appearance, but I still feel a sense of repulsion. Why do Outer Gods all have to look so grotesque and creepy? Trying to avoid contact, I subtly moved away, but it leaned in even more, almost entering the screen as it stared intently. ¡­Is it really that fascinating? It¡¯s just a typical overpowered protagonist from another world, isn¡¯t it¡­? [A creature designed to start as a lowly being and eventually overpower formidable creations¡­ very intriguing. This might help me achieve what I desire.] With that, Ubbo-Sathla turned its gaze back to me. [I will forgive you for ruining my creation. Instead, I would like you to cooperate with my plan.] [Plan?] Hmm¡­ What is this? I have a strong feeling that I¡¯m about to get involved in something extremely troublesome. # Ubbo-Sathla. An Outer God referred to as the origin of all life in the universe. He created countless creatures to the extent that he earned such a title. According to some universe¡¯s scriptures that worship him, his offspring spread across the universe number in the quadrillions. Of course, even that is just an estimate from their scriptures. In reality, the number of his creations spread across the multiverse is uncountable. For reference, in the sci-fi universe I was born in, there are numerous creations of Ubbo-Sathla. Many giant monsters, including the one I destroyed, and even some of the species within the Galactic Union that almost dominate the current universe, are actually his creations, not naturally born. Even the Lubaran race was a civilization directly created by Ubbo-Sathla. The reason Ubbo-Sathla spread so many creations across various universes is simple. It was to absorb the life forms living in those universes as nutrients. [To achieve that, I create avatars that will dominate and destroy the universe, crushing the life forms.] When I asked why he needed to absorb nutrients when Outer Gods didn¡¯t require such sustenance, [Because they taste very good. The nutrients of life forms.] ¡­Just for the taste. Additionally, he said he greatly enjoyed watching his creations dominate and crush other life forms in the universe. It turns out that the demon kings of fantasy worlds, the ultimate cosmic beasts that rule the universe, and other destructive deities in various stories were actually creations of Ubbo-Sathla, made to dominate and destroy the universe to absorb the nutrients of life forms. S?a??h the ??v?lF?re.?et website on G??gl? to access chapters of n?vels early and in the highest quality. This insane being¡­ So, you were the mastermind behind every demon king in all stories¡­!! One might ask why he doesn¡¯t just do it himself instead of taking such a cumbersome approach. Well, it¡¯s because he¡¯s an Outer God. If Ubbo-Sathla were to directly enter the universe, life forms would go insane upon encountering him. Even touching him would cause them to disintegrate at the atomic level. Before he could do anything, all life forms would either die or vanish. This means he wouldn¡¯t be able to absorb a large amount of life energy, and even if he did, his power would contaminate the nutrients. So, he creates avatars to play his universe-destroying games instead of doing it himself. And most importantly, it¡¯s probably more fun for him. Honestly, I can understand that. If I were to do it myself, it would be so overwhelming that calling it overpowered would be an understatement. Naturally, playing a universe domination simulation game with avatars I created would be more entertaining. [But sometimes, things don¡¯t go as planned in certain universes.] Ubbo-Sathla said, giving several examples. For instance, it¡¯s as if the universe itself creates adversaries to thwart his amusement. These adversaries defeat the demon kings or destructive gods he painstakingly created, leading to annoying situations. When that happens, he sometimes gets angry and creates even stronger avatars or steps in himself. Anyway, to avoid such interference from the universe, he researched various methods. One of them was to create a powerful civilization instead of an overwhelming individual. This is how the Lubaran race was created in this universe. However, this plan spectacularly backfired. You can tell by the fact that the Lubaran race formed the Galactic Union and started protecting the universe instead. He thought that if he interfered too much, the universe would eventually push back. So, he created a race with exceptional abilities and left them alone as much as possible. As a result, these beings advanced their science and, instead of dominating the universe, formed a union and became its protectors. ¡­Well, from the universe¡¯s perspective, that¡¯s pretty sweet. From my perspective, a space opera genre is far more entertaining than having a bunch of insane demon king races causing chaos. So, Ubbo-Sathla tried to create giant monsters to attack the Galactic Union, but even that wasn¡¯t easy. He even sent a demon king-level entity, close to an Outer God, but the Galactic Union, despite suffering heavy losses, ultimately triumphed. ¡­Oh, so that was why the Galactic Union was boasting about capturing a lower-tier Outer God. It was his doing¡­ Anyway, Ubbo-Sathla ended up creating an adversary that protects the universe with his own hands. What¡¯s more concerning is that the universe¡¯s will hasn¡¯t created an adversary yet. If he starts interfering more than just creating giant monsters, he¡¯ll have to deal with both the Lubaran race and the universe¡¯s adversary. [It¡¯s tempting to destroy everything out of annoyance, but it¡¯s rare to find a universe that has developed this much.] The entire universe is overflowing with delicious life forms, thanks to the Galactic Union led by the Lubaran race. Although his interference has increased due to the Lubaran race, it has also enhanced the quantity and quality of the universe¡¯s nutrients. [So, I propose this to you.] What Ubbo-Sathla wants is a life form like Eugene. One that starts weak, preventing the universe¡¯s will from creating an adversary. Then, it grows and eventually becomes a demon king-level entity. Whether he¡¯s never created such a life form before or he lacks understanding of the concept of ¡®growth¡¯ because he¡¯s been an Outer God since birth, he¡¯s asking for my help. He wants me to create a cosmic demon king for universe domination and destruction. [¡­¡­] I mean, the story is incredibly interesting and entertaining, so I kept listening. ¡­But why would I help with that¡­? Chapter 17: Let’s Start Right Away. Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 17 [You interfered with me, so you have a responsibility to help.] What kind of absurd logic is that? Just because I destroyed one giant monster that wasn¡¯t even an adversary, I¡¯m responsible? If he¡¯s consuming the nutrients of life forms, why not just use a universe as a farm, grow and absorb, grow and absorb? From what I see, in the universe that named him Ubbo-Sathla, they seem to worship him as a creator god. [Why not just find a universe that will willingly offer you sacrifices? Why dominate and destroy a perfectly fine universe?] Curious, I asked. [Farmed and wild are completely different in taste. I¡¯m a gourmet.] [¡­¡­] Ah, I see¡­ So, he doesn¡¯t like creating life forms to consume endlessly or farming them. He wants to taste life forms that naturally arise in the universe. [If you don¡¯t want to help, then give me your knowledge. How to create a life form that starts weak but has the potential to become a ruler.] ¡­Well, I don¡¯t have any specific knowledge to give. As he just mentioned, it¡¯s about creating a life form with potential. Like how I created Eugene, who has immense mana and talent for magic but hasn¡¯t learned to harness it yet¡­ something like that. Doesn¡¯t it just come naturally to create such a being? Despite being someone who enjoys consuming the nutrients of life forms, he doesn¡¯t seem to have researched much about creating them. He¡¯s interested in the taste of life forms but not in studying them. It seems Outer Gods are born with their inclinations, and they don¡¯t bother with fields they¡¯re not interested in. He has the information but no intention of utilizing or applying it. If he shared his interest in life forms with Nyarlathotep, he wouldn¡¯t need my help. One is overly curious and dissects races, while the other is obsessed with the taste of wild life forms. Aren¡¯t they a perfect match? They could go into business together. If they created a being with the potential to become a ruler without interference from the universe¡¯s will, Nyarlathotep could take some for research, and Ubbo-Sathla could enjoy the rest. ¡­But no, that would mean Eugene¡¯s sci-fi space opera would end prematurely, and we can¡¯t have that. As I was thinking this, I sensed a familiar presence approaching. Speak of the devil. It was Nyarlathotep. [You filthy unicellular creature. Who do you think you¡¯re threatening?] [Isn¡¯t it the worm who¡¯s busy researching delicious snacks?] The moment they met, it was clear why they didn¡¯t work together. [Get lost before I dismantle all your precious creations.] [You get lost. Why are you here?] It seemed they had a very bad relationship. Hmm, they¡¯re snarling at each other like they want to kill. I wish both would just leave. I need to get back to my drama. [That newcomer is mine. Threatening my research subject is the same as attacking me.] [Don¡¯t be ridiculous. That one will help me pursue the ultimate taste. Don¡¯t touch him.] You crazy fools. I belong to no one!! I really wish they would both just leave. # In the end, after arguing for a long time, they couldn¡¯t reach a conclusion and started a full-blown fight. I got a bit curious and decided to watch, and it was truly a spectacle. It was like a clash of concepts. Or just incredibly grotesque¡­ Ubbo-Sathla¡¯s wriggling unicellular body extended something out. Nyarlathotep¡¯s tentacles stretched out to meet it. Smack! Thud! Boom! Every time their bodies collided, something flickered into existence and then vanished in the empty space between them. It was¡­ an enormous cosmic space. As expected from Outer Gods, every clash of their attacks resulted in a Big Bang. A universe was born, and with each subsequent collision, that universe was destroyed again. Big Bangs and universe annihilations occurred hundreds, thousands of times simultaneously. Even the conceptless void began to twist and change. A massive black hole, the size of a universe, formed as the twisted void tore apart and swallowed the surrounding universes. The black hole was so large that even beings the size of planets, like Nyarlathotep, Ubbo-Sathla, and myself, appeared as tiny particles. Of course, we weren¡¯t particularly affected. But the universes floating in the void were a different story. The black hole started sucking in the multiverses floating around like bubbles. Oh no, you crazy fools! At this rate, my sci-fi universe will get sucked in and annihilated too! I hurriedly closed the black hole. Since it was caused by the twisting of the void, I restored the twist to its original state, and the black hole quickly disappeared. It seemed ridiculously large, and I wondered if it would work, but it was easier to handle than I thought. Well, top-tier Outer Gods like me maintain this size for convenience. Considering our abilities, it makes sense that we could match the scale of a universe. If we wanted, we could probably become that large. But¡­ it would be inconvenient and a hassle to maintain, so we don¡¯t. Anyway, if those two keep fighting, these troublesome situations will continue to occur. Even if they fight to the death, neither can annihilate the other. [Stop fighting. Don¡¯t cause any more trouble.] S?a??h the ??v?l_Fir?.?et website on G??gl? to access chapters of n?vels early and in the highest quality. In the end, I stepped in to settle the situation. [I¡¯ll help you, but leave the universes I choose alone. Don¡¯t touch what¡¯s mine.] I told Ubbo-Sathla that I¡¯d help him later, but he must leave the sci-fi universe where Eugene resides and any other universes I take an interest in alone. Honestly, as long as I¡¯m entertained, I don¡¯t need to worry about other universes. This compromise should be sufficient. And to be honest, creating a cosmic demon god¡­ sounds kind of interesting. It could be fun, right? Anyway, that settled things with Ubbo-Sathla. As for Nyarlathotep¡­ [I am not yours. I¡¯m not a research subject. I¡¯ll entertain your curiosity, but only as an equal.] How dare she try to claim me. I¡¯m not her research subject. [¡­I apologize. It was not something I should have said to an equal.] [Well, there are plenty of other universes. I don¡¯t mind cooperating if it¡¯s on equal terms.] Nyarlathotep apologized for her attitude. And it seemed Ubbo-Sathla accepted my proposal as well. Phew¡­ Seriously, these primordial beings, supposedly the origins of everything, fighting like elementary school kids over such trivial matters. Even though they can easily destroy multiple universes if they fight for real, they throw tantrums like children. It¡¯s incredibly annoying. Anyway, the situation calmed down. I agreed to cooperate with Ubbo-Sathla later and sent him away. Nyarlathotep also left after confirming that Ubbo-Sathla was gone. It seems she came because Ubbo-Sathla was threatening me, which sshe didn¡¯t like. ¡­Sigh, finally sorted out. Living as an Outer God isn¡¯t as easy and convenient as it seems. However, my encounter with Ubbo-Sathla sparked some interest in me. Specifically, in the creation of life and civilizations. Not to create a cosmic demon god to dominate the universe like him. But the story about the Lubaran race intrigued me. Seeing the species he created build civilizations and eventually grow into a powerful race that forms a Galactic Union encompassing the entire universe. It¡¯s like a civilization-building strategy simulation game! It¡¯s like a cosmic version of that old game, Civilization. Expanding planets and colonies with the species I nurture, ultimately achieving a scientific victory by unifying galaxies and the universe. That sounds incredibly fun! While Eugene¡¯s sci-fi space opera is great, a civilization-building game also sounds fascinating. ¡­What if the species I nurture achieve such advanced civilization that they surpass the Lubaran race and become the leaders of the Galactic Union? That would be incredibly entertaining. And it would be a two-birds-one-stone goal to mess with Ubbo-Sathla, who annoyed me. Isn¡¯t that right? Of course, even though his species and civilization ended up being a nuisance because they didn¡¯t follow his orders, he did put a lot of effort into creating them to dominate the universe. What if my newly created species eventually push them out? Honestly, that would feel incredibly satisfying. Perfect. I¡¯ve decided on my second source of enjoyment. Anyway, Eugene facing off against the Galactic Union is a decade away¡­ In the meantime, there shouldn¡¯t be any issues with me designing a species. Even if something happens, I¡¯ll keep part of my consciousness monitoring the situation. ¡­But what if creating this species causes the future to get all messed up? Not that it really matters. There¡¯s a chance Eugene and my created species could influence each other. ¡­Oh, a drama and a game sharing the same universe. And they even influence each other? Haha, what a ridiculous idea. Let¡¯s start right away. Chapter 18: Species Design Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 18 Alright, let¡¯s start with the design. A species, huh. It¡¯s my first time creating a species, so I¡¯m a bit worried. I¡¯ll also need to create a star system and planets for them to live on, but let¡¯s decide on the species first. The environment will depend on the nature of the species. If they¡¯re like humans, they¡¯ll need an Earth-like planet. If they¡¯re monstrous like the Zerg, they¡¯ll need a harsh environment. If they¡¯re transforming robots, they¡¯ll need a Cybertron-like world. Each species requires an environment suited to their characteristics. So, let¡¯s start with the concept. Should they be intelligent like the Lubaran race, rapidly advancing in science and achieving a highly advanced civilization? Or should they use special energy like the Meias race¡¯s magic? Or perhaps they could be like the Terra race, with unique adaptability and absorption abilities, expanding their population and civilization? Going for a monster-like feel, like the Aliens or Zerg, would be cool, but it¡¯s not suitable for becoming the head of the Galactic Union. A world of mechs, Cybertronians? It¡¯s romantic, but they might get captured and dissected by the Lubaran race, so let¡¯s pass on that. Ah~ It¡¯s tough because they can¡¯t be too overpowered, but they also can¡¯t be too weak. If they¡¯re weak, they¡¯ll be dominated instantly. If they¡¯re overpowered, they might become the cosmic demon god species dominating the universe. Alright, let¡¯s base their appearance on humans. Why? Because I was originally a human from Earth. Human appearance is the way to go. Right, right. They might end up looking similar to the Terra race, but who cares. After all, the Meias race also looks almost human, and there are many species that look alike. And let¡¯s make them attractive, with handsome men and beautiful women! It¡¯s more pleasing to the eye that way. Mainly, it¡¯s pleasing to me. As for their lifespan¡­ If they die too quickly, they¡¯ll be too busy surviving to build a civilization, so let¡¯s set it reasonably long. But not too long, or they might become too leisurely and slow to develop¡­ Maybe a lifespan similar to humans? According to the Galactic Union¡¯s official time, that¡¯s about 100 years. Same as Earth time. Come to think of it, the flow of time in the Galactic Union is the same as on the Earth I lived on. Just to check, I searched my mind and found that the Terra race¡¯s Terra planet is different from the Earth I lived on. Why was it set that way? It turns out the average lifespan of the species that first formed the Galactic Union was that. ¡­Is this a coincidence? Well, it makes calculations easier for me. Anyway, a lifespan of around 100 years should be appropriate. Or maybe not. If I make them diligent and lucky enough to be born on a planet rich in minerals and energy¡­ They¡¯ll develop on their own regardless of lifespan, right? If I set their intelligence high and increase their curiosity and desire for progress? In that case, a longer lifespan might actually be better. ¡­Hmm, is this favoritism? No, no! Ubbo-Sathla also created a similar environment for the Lubaran race. He poured immense resources and energy into the Lubaran race¡¯s planet to create a species that could dominate and crush the universe. On top of that, he even gave them a basic level of civilization to start with. I can also give my species an easy mode start, right? ¡­Alright, let¡¯s do it this way. Their lifespan will be 400 years, but the orbital period of their planet will be 4 years. So, in planetary terms, their lifespan will be 100 years! Perfect, it matches 100 years. Done and done. For the orbital period to be that long, the central star needs to be quite large. Yes, the light and heat from the star are also energy sources for the civilization. If they¡¯re going the scientific route, they¡¯ll eventually dismantle surrounding planets to build a Dyson Sphere around the star¡­ So I don¡¯t need to worry too much about that. I¡¯ll provide enough coal and oil for early use, and after that, they¡¯ll venture into space to use resources from other planets or stellar energy. Let¡¯s steer them towards developing eco-friendly energy quickly, without letting their planet deteriorate. ¡­Isn¡¯t this just a mix of the Terra and Lubaran races? I want to add something more unique. Something special, whether in appearance or abilities. Long-lived humans¡­ Scientific advancement¡­ Eco-friendly¡­ Handsome men and beautiful women¡­ [Oh, I¡¯ve got a great idea.] A long-lived species that lives in harmony with nature, is eco-friendly, and has many handsome men and beautiful women! Isn¡¯t this exactly like elves? [¡­¡­] Of course, when you think of elves, you imagine them living in forests, shooting arrows, and communing with spirits, not advancing technologically. But we¡¯re aiming for eco-friendly natural energy, right? And if I create the planetary environment that way¡­ And more importantly, if we consider space as part of nature, they could be space-faring elves protecting and preserving the natural universe! Totally possible, right? s?a??h th? N0v?lFir?.?et website on G??gl? to access chapters of n?vels early and in the highest quality. Alright, the species name will be Elf. While they¡¯re a common species in other universes, there don¡¯t seem to be any elf-like species in this sci-fi universe. There are intelligent life forms that love nature and live in forests, but they aren¡¯t beautiful and don¡¯t shoot arrows. In fact, they look like amoeba blobs. Kind of like slimes? After hearing about Ubbo-Sathla, I wondered if he created them too. But it seems they just occurred naturally. Anyway, there¡¯s no species with a similar concept here. Space Elves, guardians of the vast natural universe. Great, let¡¯s go with this concept. I¡¯ve roughly finished designing the species, the star system, their initial planet, and the surrounding planetary environment. Now, I just need to return to the universe and create it. But if I go, the Galactic Union will go into a frenzy, and if their attention shifts towards the star system, they¡¯ll detect and observe everything I¡¯m doing. Creating it near a naturally occurring supernova explosion could help avoid detection, but my presence would still be highly unnatural. Hmm, constantly being detected is annoying. Maybe I should change my form? I¡¯m easily detected because my body is made of void, which can¡¯t be explained by the laws of the universe. When an Outer God appears, the energy in that part of the universe suddenly cuts off and becomes empty. There is a way to avoid detection. By continuously altering my body to mimic the energy flow of the universe. Essentially, creating a body made of cosmic radiation energy. If I match the wavelengths, I won¡¯t be detected by energy sensors. As for my appearance¡­ If someone passes by close enough, they¡¯ll see me, but I can use stealth to hide that too. With this, there¡¯s no chance of detection by the Galactic Union or nearby planets. However, there are side effects. Namely, life forms might approach me without realizing the danger. While nurturing a civilization, it¡¯s best to stay nearby to quickly respond to unexpected situations, but if my creations discover me¡­ Or if a Galactic Union scout, a passing tourist ship, or a space adventurer comes near and notices me¡­ Just being near me or recognizing me would destroy the minds of weaker life forms. [Heh, of course, I¡¯ve prepared for this.] Who am I? I¡¯m an incredibly powerful top-tier Outer God who can do anything. Naturally, I¡¯ve thought of a solution for this. The reason life forms¡¯ minds overload is because the information from my void body and the distorted environment is too vast and complex for their brains to handle. So, I need to change my appearance and the distorted cosmic environment. First, if I change my void body to an energy body aligned with the laws of the universe, that takes care of the void aspect. As for the distorted environment, I can reverse the distortion. In other universes, there are Outer Gods whose true forms don¡¯t cause mental collapse. Most of them are weak, low-tier Outer Gods, but there are some high-tier ones too. The method they use is surprisingly simple. If the distorted cosmic environment overloads with information, reversing the distortion can mitigate it. Of course, my power is so immense that I can¡¯t completely eliminate the effects of the void body and the distorted environment. But I can adjust it so that instead of instantly melting brains, it just causes severe headaches and dizziness. Honestly, even this is a significant improvement. The fact that one can encounter a top-tier Outer God without their brain exploding is almost impossible. Haha, doing all this¡­ I truly deserve the title of the benevolent god, Yad-Thaddag. Honestly, where else would you find a god as considerate as me? ¡­Well, the high-tier Outer God who taught me this method is similar. He¡¯s called ¡®Kthanid¡¯ in various universes. An Outer God who cares for life forms as much as I do. I¡¯d like to meet him and have a conversation. For now, let¡¯s create the Elf species and their planet. Later, when I return to the rift, I¡¯ll try to find him. Chapter 19: The First Elf in Universe Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 19 [Ah.] Just as I was about to proceed after finishing the design, two issues came to mind. The first issue is that the moment I cross back into the universe, the tear in the dimensional rift I emerged from will be detected. This would alert the Galactic Union that something has crossed over. While I can solve the issue of my body by transforming it into an energy body similar to cosmic radiation, I can¡¯t conceal the torn space. Well¡­ it¡¯s not a major problem. I could temporarily disable the Galactic Union¡¯s detection devices at that moment, and if discovered, I could erase the memories of those involved and delete any transmission records. Honestly, even if they detect it, I could just teleport far away, and they wouldn¡¯t be able to do anything about it. But to avoid future complications, I¡¯ll briefly disable the detection devices when I tear through space. It¡¯s not a difficult task. In fact, I wonder why I didn¡¯t do this before. ¡­Maybe I was just too lazy. That¡¯s settled, now the second issue. What to do about Eugene. Currently, Eugene is being controlled by a backup personality I created. Though this personality is essentially a part of me, there¡¯s still a difference between me directly controlling things and the backup personality doing so. Even though it¡¯s a personality split from me, it¡¯s still an independent entity. Moreover, changes in the future caused by my doppelg?nger don¡¯t seem to be included in my knowledge. If I wanted, I could go to the rift, which has no concept of time, and see the future of the universe¡­ but I¡¯m currently enjoying the drama, and I don¡¯t want any more spoilers. Yes, I¡¯m watching Eugene¡¯s life like a drama. Since it¡¯s come to this, let¡¯s consider Eugene not just as my doppelg?nger but as an independent creation. I¡¯ll decide that the backup personality currently controlling the body is the real ¡®Eugene.¡¯ Leaving it like this, I won¡¯t know how his relationship with the Galactic Union will develop in 10 years, or what impact he will have on this universe in the future¡­ but isn¡¯t that more exciting? Time is inherently interesting because it has no predetermined direction or endpoint. If everything ran towards a fixed end in a set direction, what could be more boring? I actually prefer that even an Outer God has things they can¡¯t predict or know. In an unimaginably eternal life, it¡¯s good to have events that can still pique my interest due to my interference. The creation of this species and civilization is the same. How they will change the future. How they will grow and what kind of presence they will become in this universe. There¡¯s no way for me to know. I¡¯m just creating the Elf species as I please and planting them in the garden. How much they will grow and what kind of flowers and fruits they will bear is something to be seen. ¡­Well, just as I knew the information and future of the Lubaran race the moment I was born into this universe. If I asked another top-tier Outer God with similar powers, I might learn their future. But I won¡¯t do that. I¡¯m not a pervert who wants to hear spoilers for a movie or drama I¡¯m looking forward to. Anyway, I¡¯ve decided how to handle the two issues that came to mind just before crossing over. Now it¡¯s truly time to return to my birthplace. This time, I¡¯m not just stopping by like when I got rid of that giant monster. I plan to stay for quite a while. At least until my species, the Elves, are firmly on track. If any problems arise, I¡¯ll be there to take care of them immediately. # Crossing into the universe, I obscure the Galactic Union¡¯s vision. Thanks to that, there¡¯s no reaction from their side. Alright, let¡¯s quickly move to the nearby supernova. It¡¯s best to choose a place without any major civilizations nearby. We don¡¯t want our new civilization to be devoured before it even has a chance to grow. Let¡¯s see¡­ Oh, there¡¯s a suitable spot in Sector G. A recent supernova explosion has created a place where new stars are about to be born. The immense amount of material dispersed by the supernova is clumping together to form stars and planets. In this place, creating a star system out of nowhere wouldn¡¯t seem strange to the Galactic Union. Sector G of the universe. It doesn¡¯t even have a galactic identification number. In other words, it¡¯s not under the jurisdiction of the Galactic Union. s?a??h th? N?v?lFir?(.)n?t website on G??gl? to access chapters of n?vels early and in the highest quality. The Galactic Union¡¯s reach doesn¡¯t extend here, so monitoring and detection are lax. So, hiding behind the supernova explosion and creating a star system in ten seconds won¡¯t be a problem. Even if a star system suddenly appeared in an empty galaxy, it might raise suspicions, but here, stars are already being formed by the supernova explosion. As the saying goes, hide a tree in a forest and a person in a bustling city. So, when creating stars, the best place to hide them is where stars are already being formed. Even if the Galactic Union eventually sends a team to explore this galaxy and investigate intelligent life, by then, our Elves should have grown significantly. If not, I can always hide them from detection. For now, let¡¯s quickly move there. Hmm~ I can feel the effects of the supernova explosion on my body. Being an energy body perfectly attuned to the surrounding energy, I can feel a sudden surge of energy within me. Haha, at this rate, I might end up creating a star inside my own body. But if you¡¯re wondering how I¡¯ll create a livable environment for life forms in such an immense energy-filled space¡­ Of course, I¡¯ll adjust the cosmic environment accordingly. Huh? Wouldn¡¯t the sudden void of neutrinos and light in the middle of the supernova be detected? No need to worry about that. Since this galaxy is beyond their influence, the Galactic Union won¡¯t pay attention until the effects of the supernova dissipate. Even if they do discover it, I¡¯ll cleverly conceal it, so there¡¯s no need for concern. We need to give the civilization time to develop. ¡­It might seem like a cheat, but it¡¯s necessary. Isn¡¯t that right? When playing a civilization-building game, no game suddenly sends a fleet to destroy everything just because an anomaly is detected from the outside. If such a game existed, it would get heavily criticized and disappear right after release. Even if such events occur, they usually happen only after the player¡¯s civilization can somewhat handle them. So, me shielding and concealing everything is like a beginner¡¯s protection period blessed by a goddess. In this case, it¡¯s not a goddess¡¯s blessing but an Outer God¡¯s blessing. Anyway, enough with the digressions. Let¡¯s get down to creating the star system. I¡¯ll make the main sequence star slightly larger than the Sun, and surround it with several planets rich in minerals, enough to build a Dyson Sphere around the star. Lastly, I¡¯ll create the Elves¡¯ planet in the Goldilocks zone, the perfect place for their development. The planet will be slightly larger than Earth. Its surface area will be about twice that of Earth. The larger, the better. Additionally, I¡¯ll create another planet in the Goldilocks zone, positioned for future terraforming when the space age arrives¡­ Okay, that should do it. Ah, a larger star in the Goldilocks zone, and a well-prepared star system to match. I think I¡¯ve done a pretty good job adhering to the laws of the universe without any setting errors. Now, I¡¯ll skip the numerous processes that primitive Earth had to go through and create a planet with a livable temperature, liquid water in oceans and freshwater, and a suitable amount of land¡­ and that¡¯s it. The birth and evolution of life, extinctions, and so on. I¡¯ll skip all those processes. Watching all that might be like enjoying a large terrarium with a mini-ecosystem, but doing that for billions of years is a bit much. Speeding up time on the planet to observe natural evolution is an option, but there¡¯s no guarantee that Elves would be born. It¡¯s best if I create them quickly. I want to nurture a civilization, not play a cell-raising game or Spore. So, I¡¯ll skip everything and create forests with suitable temperatures in various places to match the characteristics of the Elves. And finally, it¡¯s time to create the Elves. Now¡­ how should I do this? Intelligent life forms typically undergo appropriate evolutionary processes, evolving in various locations. Among the evolved species, only those with the highest intelligence and strongest adaptability survive and eventually dominate the world. But what if there¡¯s no such process? I could create Elves in promising areas where civilizations are likely to form. Large rivers, fertile soil, and abundant resources. Since I initially created the environment with abundant resources and conditions suitable for life, there are many such points. With so many points, not just four major civilizations but maybe even ten could emerge. Now, I need to sculpt the Elves directly. As expected, since they are Elves, they should have blond or silver hair and be handsome or beautiful¡­ and the most important feature. Pointy ears! Ears that can droop, perk up, or turn red, allowing the expression of various Elf emotions visually. Yes, yes. This is what makes them truly Elves. Satisfied, I nodded as I looked at the forms of the first male and female Elves I created. Chapter 20: The Beginning of Civilization Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 20 I¡¯ve created their forms, and now it¡¯s time to imbue them with genetic traits and characteristics. As they are, they¡¯re just physical dolls. The rotational period is 36 hours by Galactic Union standards, and the orbital period is 4 years¡­ Time on this planet is about 6 times that of the Galactic Union¡¯s standard. If I set their lifespan to about 100 years by this planet¡¯s standards, that¡¯s a whopping 600 years by the Union¡¯s standards! For reference, the 36-hour day is just an adjustment because I increased the planet¡¯s size. Well¡­ it doesn¡¯t really matter. With the increased size, gravity is also a bit stronger, so I¡¯ll make their bodies out of lightweight materials but ensure they¡¯re highly durable. I¡¯ll increase the strength and elasticity of their bones and the density of their muscles to make them strong enough to withstand several times the current gravity. Just like humans, secondary sexual characteristics will begin at 12-14 years old, and adulthood will be at 20 years old. By Galactic Union standards, that¡¯s 120 years. They¡¯ll be capable of reproduction from the onset of secondary sexual characteristics, and hormones will encourage them to find mates and reproduce around adulthood. They¡¯ll love forests and nature, have relatively peaceful dispositions, but possess the decisiveness to kill enemies without hesitation when in danger. I don¡¯t want them to wage war against each other, so I¡¯ll make their bonds with fellow Elves very strong. In fantasy settings, Elves are often depicted as having strong bonds within their race and being quite exclusionary towards other races. This is a faithful representation of that concept. They¡¯ll have strong concentration and vision, be sensitive to environmental changes like wind speed and humidity, and be genetically specialized for long-range weapons like bows. They¡¯ll have high intelligence and a strong curiosity and desire for progress, enabling them to quickly reach advanced technological levels by utilizing resources. Hmm, what else is needed? What else is characteristic of Elves? Elemental magic? How should I implement that? I¡¯m debating whether to cover it with scientific technology or to imbue them with abilities akin to magic, like the Meias race. Honestly, even without such abilities, if they develop their scientific technology well, they could become incredibly powerful, like the Lubaran race, which creates phenomena on par with magic through science. I could create entities like spirits in the universe. But then, should they be confined to the Elf planet or spread throughout the universe? That¡¯s another issue. There¡¯s also the problem that this power might not remain exclusive to the Elves. If energy beings like spirits spread into the universe, they might grow uncontrollably. Spirits would need to be energy-based life forms without physical bodies, like me, but imagine them spreading into the universe. A supernova spirit absorbing supernova energy, a black hole spirit absorbing gravitational waves from a black hole, or a bizarre entity spirit turning everything it touches into bizarre energy and decomposing it. Just imagining it conjures up cosmic horror-like monstrous entities. A planet-sized giant monster would be preferable since physical attacks would still work on it. ¡­Yeah, let¡¯s not create spirits. It could lead to troublesome situations, and I¡¯d have to create and manage an entire new race of spirits, which would be a hassle. Alright, let¡¯s settle with this. The Elves are complete! Let¡¯s see¡­ Handsome and beautiful beings with alabaster skin. They have the stamina and mental strength to stay active for up to a month without sleep, with a 36-hour day. Extremely strong bones and muscles. A lifespan of 600 years by Galactic Union standards. Strong bonds within their race and the decisiveness to kill enemies without hesitation when in danger. High concentration and vision, sensitive to environmental changes. High intelligence. A strong desire for progress. These are all just the basic options. ¡­Wait, as I was creating them, it seems like I¡¯ve made a superhuman race that can do everything. No, no! That¡¯s how Elves are supposed to be! In fantasy, they are depicted as a very noble and powerful race. In some other universes, they are even one of the strongest races that dominate the cosmos. Yes, yes. Look at the Lubaran race of Ubbo-Sathla. They started with strong vitality, long lifespans, an abundance of resources in their star system, and high intelligence and civilization. In comparison, I¡¯m starting them off in a mere forest, so I¡¯m being more ethical. ¡­Well, it¡¯s a forest overflowing with resources, but still. Ah! I forgot something. There are plenty of edible resources, but I didn¡¯t include any animals. My Elves are omnivorous, so I need to include animals that can be domesticated¡­ and to add some challenge, I¡¯ll also include some strong predatory carnivores. Animals similar to tigers or bears? But since Elves are inherently strong beings, I¡¯ll make these predators somewhat monstrous. Not unbeatable, but at a level where early on, the Elves would need to avoid them or hunt them in groups for survival. However, when they do manage to hunt them, they¡¯ll get useful materials like tough hides or strong claws and teeth as loot. Wow, this feels like I¡¯m creating a game from scratch, and it¡¯s quite fun. I¡¯ll add herbivores, small carnivores, omnivores, and smaller animals and insects accordingly. I¡¯ll also include aquatic life in the seas and freshwater bodies! ¡­¡­ Phew, I got carried away and added quite a bit. By adding a variety of life forms, I¡¯ve created an ecosystem as diverse as ancient Earth¡¯s. Now, it¡¯s a planet teeming with life. S?a?ch* Th? ???el F?re.n?t website on G??gl? to access chapters of n?vels early and in the highest quality. So¡­ should I release about 1,000 Elves at each key point? That should be enough for them to multiply on their own, not too many, not too few. In ancient Earth, humans built villages with only about a hundred people in good locations, so 1,000 is quite a number. Given the strong bonds among Elves, they shouldn¡¯t fight amongst themselves. With abundant food and water resources, there¡¯s no reason for conflict. Instead, they¡¯ll need to band together to protect themselves from the fearsome predators around them. Haha, I haven¡¯t set the difficulty so high that they can¡¯t survive, so let¡¯s see how well they do. Srrr¡ª I distribute 1,000 Elves at each of the 30,000 pre-identified survival points. The initial population of Elves is 30 million. Now¡­ let¡¯s see how quickly they multiply. Or, they might initially decrease in number due to survival competition. But I believe in them. As the strongest race I¡¯ve created, they¡¯ll overcome everything and dominate the entire planet, becoming a great civilization. Not only that. Once they¡¯ve conquered the planet, they¡¯ll expand into space. Go, Elves! To the universe, Elves! # A female Elf slowly opened her eyes. Consciousness returned. She was a living being of this planet. And those who look similar around me are my kin. It¡¯s a comforting forest. I like the forest. But who am I? I¡¯m not sure. I¡¯m not sure, but there¡¯s one thing I know for certain. ¡°¡­¡­¡± There¡¯s something else in the forest besides us. And those things are targeting us. With highly sensitive senses, I could immediately perceive this. It seemed my kin also noticed it. We must survive. A thought that burned intensely in my mind. I must survive with my kin. With that thought, the 1,000 Elves quickly gathered closely together. By staying together, the enemies wouldn¡¯t dare attack easily, and even if they did, this would reduce the chance of being individually targeted, moving instinctively. We must defend against the enemies. Who we are, where we are. Those things can be figured out later. Can we win? Against the unknown entities in the forest? How? We have hands. We can hold things. If we hold something, we can attack farther and stronger than with bare hands. Realizing this, the female Elf hastily picked up a sturdy branch from the ground. A branch as thick as her slender forearm. It looked quite heavy, but she lifted it more easily than expected. Her body was remarkably strong. Seeing her actions, the other Elves began to imitate her. Some picked up branches like the female Elf, while others, finding no branches, picked up nearby stones. And during this time¡­ ¡°Grrr¡­¡± Five large quadrupedal animals, similar in size to the Elves, appeared. They had long snouts and sharp teeth. Drooling as if looking at prey, with fierce eyes. Their bodies were covered in fur, and their paws had tough, sharp claws. These were creatures their creator had envisioned as ¡®wolves.¡¯ But the newly created Elves had no knowledge of their names or characteristics. However, they instinctively knew that these were ¡®enemies¡¯ viewing them as prey. ¡°Ugh! Ugh!¡± The female Elf who had first opened her eyes seemed to have an idea and began gesturing wildly at the Elves holding stones. Since they had no language system, she was explaining with her body. She made a gesture as if to throw the stones by swinging her arm. ¡°¡­!¡± ¡°Ugh!¡± Fortunately, the Elves understood, and those holding stones threw them with all their might at the predators. The explosive strength from their strong bones and muscles, combined with their high concentration, sent the stones hurtling towards the predators at incredible speed. Thwack! ¡°Yelp!!¡± The hundred or so stones that flew struck the wolves on their heads, legs, and bodies. The stone-throwing was stronger than expected, causing some legs and bodies to fracture slightly. ¡°Yelp! Yelp!¡± The five wolves, severely injured, fled, and the Elves cheered in triumph over their victory against the predators. ¡°Woo!!¡± ¡°Oooo!¡± Though they had no language, it was clear they felt joy and satisfaction. They looked at the female Elf who had first picked up a branch and taught them to throw stones. The Elves realized that she was the smartest and most proactive among them. They hoped she would continue to lead them as their leader. Chapter 21: Primitive Tribe Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 21 The Elves, gathered around the seemingly smartest female Elf, quickly began to adapt to the forest. Innately possessing a love for nature, none of them had any complaints about living in the forest. In fact, they enjoyed it. With their bipedal stance and dexterous hands, they began to learn how to use tools. Time passed, and night fell. On the first night, they realized that the temperature dropped significantly compared to the day. Thanks to their eyes that could pierce through the darkness, maintaining visibility at night was easy, but the cold and the activity of nocturnal beasts posed a great threat. In fact, an attack by a massive, 3-meter striped carnivorous beast resulted in the death of 10 Elves, and the cold night prevented them from recovering their strength, leaving them in poor condition the next morning. Although their bodies were inherently strong and immune, preventing illness from just one sleepless night and a bit of cold, the difficulty of conserving and recovering energy in the wild was a significant issue. ¡°Uwaa! Uwo.¡± ¡°Ugh?¡± Then, in the morning, the female Elf noticed insects crawling out of the ground. Seeing this, she seemed to have an idea and gestured vigorously to the others, pointing at the ground. It seemed like she was suggesting they dig into the ground. By digging and entering a pit, they could avoid the cold winds at night and respond more flexibly to animal attacks. She reasoned that if they covered the top with leaves like the insect holes, it would block the wind and allow them to hide from predators. The intelligent Elves quickly understood her intent and began digging. Of course, digging a pit large enough for 990 Elves was no easy task. They knew how to pick up and use things, but they didn¡¯t know about tools designed for efficiency. So, they dug with their hands or with branches and stones they found along the way. Naturally, progress was slow, and night began to fall. Though there were scattered pits everywhere, they were far from sufficient for 990 Elves to live in. Neither the depth nor the width was adequate. Fortunately, the ground was soft near the river in the forest, allowing them to dig this much; otherwise, they wouldn¡¯t have accomplished even half of this. Despite their superior physical abilities, without proper techniques or tools, this was their limit. They would have to spend another night exposed. Although they had the stamina and mental strength to endure without sleep for some time, the problem was¡­ ¡°Ugh¡­¡± The Elves began to feel fear. They feared the return of the giant striped beast once the sun set. The beast was large and much more agile than the predators they had previously driven away with stones. It dodged several stones and killed the Elves one by one. To deal with it, they needed stronger and faster weapons. Or at least some means of protecting themselves¡­ ¡°¡­Geuheuk?!¡± Swoosh©¤! At that moment, an Elf accidentally stepped into one of the hastily dug pits and fell. The pit wasn¡¯t deep enough to cause injury, but the Elf was visibly startled and stumbled. ¡°Ah! Ah?¡± ¡°Ugh¡­¡± With the help of others, the Elf stood up again. Seeing this, the female leader Elf had a brilliant idea. ¡°¡­!!¡± The idea was to lure the beasts into deep pits. If the beasts fell into the pits, they would be disoriented and their movements restricted, making it impossible for them to dodge the stone throws! This was it. They would dig deep enough pits to make it difficult for the beasts to climb out, lure them in, and trap them. Afterward, not only would they have a safer place to sleep, but they could also create a field of pits around them to block the beasts. ¡°Ugh¡­ Ugh?¡± But how could she explain this? There were limits to body language. Dig a pit, lure the beast, let it fall in, and then throw stones to kill it. Realizing that she couldn¡¯t explain this with gestures alone, she hurriedly went to a nearby rock. ¡°¡­¡­¡± There were white marks on the rock from practicing stone-throwing in preparation for the beast¡¯s appearance. Seeing this, she picked up a stone from somewhere and began to draw on the rock. Scritch©¤ A white line appeared on the rock, just like the marks from stone-throwing. ¡°Ugh! Ugh!¡± Confirming this, the female Elf began to gather the others. Recognizing her as their leader, the Elves flocked to her. Some were trembling with fear. Some hoped she had found a solution. Some were ready to fight the fearsome beast with desperate resolve. In front of the many Elves, she became the first Elf to¡­ Scritch©¤ Scritch©¤ ¡­create the beginnings of language through cave paintings. # A drawing of a person with pointed ears, and a large striped beast twice its size. The tree-like drawings surrounding them represented the forest, and the circles drawn among the multiple Elf figures indicated pits. Everyone understood that the circles represented pits. ¡°Ugh! Ugh!¡± The female Elf continued drawing and explaining. A pit drawn in front of the large striped beast. Behind it, a series of Elf figures. In the subsequent drawings, the striped beast was shown half-submerged in the pit. S?a?ch* Th? N???lFire.n?t website on G??gl? to access chapters of n?vels early and in the highest quality. Elves surrounded it, appearing to throw stones. ¡°¡­¡­¡± ¡°¡­¡­¡± The reaction of the Elves to the first cave painting was¡­ ¡°Uwaa! Uwaa!¡± ¡°Oooo!¡± They immediately understood its meaning and cheered with hopeful faces. They began preparing deep pits to trap the striped beast. However, to trap the beast and prevent it from escaping, they needed to dig pits three times their height. Even with their superior physical abilities, making it difficult for an Elf to jump out if they fell in. The female leader Elf had thought of a solution for this too. She had seen a spider climbing a tree using its silk and brought long vines from the forest. By holding onto these vines, their comrades could pull them up. The plan was perfect. ¡°Grrr¡­¡± After finishing their preparations, the awaited night arrived. As expected, the striped beast appeared again tonight. One beast. A majestic monster that roamed alone. Yet, its overwhelming power was enough even by itself. But tonight would be different. ¡°Uwaa!¡± ¡°Aaah!¡± ¡°Roar!¡± As an Elf drew its attention, the striped beast charged swiftly towards them. And at that moment¡­ Crack!! ¡°Grr?!¡± Suddenly, the leaves under its feet gave way, and the striped beast fell straight down. Thud! It was caught perfectly. ¡°Woohoo!¡± ¡°Uwaa!¡± The Elves rejoiced at the success of their trap and quickly approached the pit with stones in hand. ¡°Roar!¡± The striped beast struggled to climb out of the pit, but it was deep and narrow, making it difficult for it to move. It also seemed unable to adapt quickly to the sudden situation. In that state, the Elves began to throw stones relentlessly. If they hit, despite the beast¡¯s attempts to dodge¡­ Crunch! Crack! Thud! ¡°Yelp! Screech! Roar!¡± The Elves¡¯ powerful bodies hurled stones like cannonballs, and no matter how tough the striped beast¡¯s hide and sturdy its body, it couldn¡¯t withstand the barrage. If it were just one or two stones, it might have been different, but with dozens of stones flying at it simultaneously, there was no way it could survive. Crunch! Crack! The pit filled with dozens of stones, and then it went silent. ¡°Huff, huff¡­¡± ¡°Phew¡­¡± The Elves panted heavily as they cautiously peered inside. Was it over? The striped beast, buried under the stones, didn¡¯t move at all. It was completely dead. ¡°Woohoo!¡± ¡°Yay!¡± The Elves cheered, overjoyed that they had managed to capture the fearsome striped beast with their own hands, without a single sacrifice. They jumped around in admiration of the female leader Elf who had devised and led the entire operation. Unable to express their emotions through words or gestures, they showed it with their whole bodies. Having captured the seemingly invincible monster, the Elves continued to diligently establish their home under the leadership of the female Elf. # Wow¡­ This is impressive. The Elves had settled well in their respective areas and begun to survive. It had been about a month since they were released, and the survival rate was around 70%. Out of 30 million, about 9 million had died, leaving 21 million. Some groups had lost more than half, dropping to as few as 400 members. Given the circumstances, this was a good outcome. Honestly, I had expected the overall survival rate to be less than half. In some areas, there was an exceptionally intelligent Elf who boasted a survival rate of over 90%. These groups had already built decent shelters and laid the foundations of civilization. As they lived as individual tribes and expanded their territories, they would eventually encounter each other. War or harmony¡­ When creating them, I made it easier for them to unite by strengthening their bonds as kin, but how it would actually turn out was uncertain. Perhaps I should have given them a language. Seeing such beautiful and handsome beings grunting like primitives was a bit unsettling. Well, they are primitives, but still. Considering they managed to communicate through cave paintings within just two days, establishing a language system shouldn¡¯t take long. Ah¡­ But it¡¯s unfortunate for the group that dwindled to 400 members. The environment was similar, but the timing wasn¡¯t favorable. The surrounding ecosystem was a bit tricky. I thought it was a good spot, but it turned out to be quite challenging. Honestly, it breaks my heart a little. Both the thriving and struggling ones are like my own creations. Seeing them die off so easily isn¡¯t comforting. It feels like they might all die out before achieving anything. ¡­Maybe I should help them a bit. Just a little. The others who are doing well wouldn¡¯t mind a bit of help. Yes, that¡¯s it! Chapter 22: Development of Civilization Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 22 ¡°Grrr¡­.¡± ¡°Ugh¡­¡± A giant bear, about 4 meters tall, attacked. The Elf group, which had dwindled to around 400 members after losing more than half of their number, trembled in fear, unable to think of a proper response. They threw stones and swung branches like the other Elves, but the giant bear didn¡¯t budge. While the giant tiger in a similar category was a formidable opponent due to its high agility, the bear was a type with high strength and defense. Because it was sluggish, it could be hunted easily by wearing it down slowly over time. However, these Elves had been facing continuous hardships from the start, losing over 500 members in a short period. They seemed to have no intention of fighting back seriously or even thinking of running away. At this rate, this group would be the first to face extinction. I had no choice. Should I help them just this once? But simply making the giant bear disappear wouldn¡¯t help them understand anything. If possible, I wanted to teach them how to catch fish rather than just giving them fish. Should I possess one of the Elves and create weapons for them? No¡­ Suddenly advancing their civilization alone wouldn¡¯t be fair. Perhaps striking the bear with lightning and turning it into a well-cooked meal might be better. After all, giving them a fishing rod when they don¡¯t even know what fish are would be meaningless. Rumble©¤ I created a massive cloud near them. A lightning strike from a clear sky would be unnatural. ¡°Roar!¡± ¡°Aaah!¡± ¡°Ugh¡­!¡± At the moment the giant bear charged at the Elves, a flash of lightning struck from the sky, hitting the bear directly. Sizzle¡­ The bear collapsed, instantly turned into a well-cooked meal by the lightning. ¡°¡­¡­¡± ¡°¡­¡­¡± Crackle, crackle©¤ Moreover, the trees around the spot where the lightning struck caught fire. Well, I helped them, but at this rate, the whole forest might burn down. Some groups had already discovered fire naturally through lightning strikes. The intention behind using lightning here was to introduce fire to them. So, I decided to let it rain just enough to extinguish the spreading fire, leaving a small blaze to inform them of fire¡¯s existence. ¡°¡­Ugh.¡± ¡°??¡± The Elf group that discovered the fire didn¡¯t know what it was, but they seemed to understand that it originated from the lightning that had killed the giant bear in one strike. They were very afraid to approach the fire. Well¡­ It is hot and dangerous. It¡¯s better than them getting curious and touching it, risking burns. Given their high intelligence, they quickly became accustomed to the presence of fire and started pondering how to utilize it. Since the fire originated from the lightning strike, the Elves seemed to believe it held the same power as the lightning and intended to use it against beasts. How to start a fire was something they would figure out later on their own. Oh, it looks like they are digging a hole to store the precious embers. They must have noticed that water extinguishes fire, so they are trying to protect it from getting wet. They also saw how the fire spread to the trees, so they are feeding it with dry wood to keep it burning. Wow¡­ As expected of a highly intelligent species, they learn quickly from observation. Sure, their spawn point was terrible, but these Elves have great potential for development. ¡­But that wasn¡¯t the end of their troubles. Attacks from poisonous insects, other beasts, and diseases spreading from decaying corpses continued to plague this unfortunate Elf group. Damn, I really gave them a horrible spawn point. It¡¯s like the difficulty was set to make them go extinct. As I kept helping them fend off all these threats, they seemed to notice something strange. ¡°Ooo¡­¡± ¡°Ooo¡­¡± These guys suddenly started bowing down at the place where they stored the first embers, as if in worship! They even placed the carcasses of the poisonous insects, the claws of the beasts, and the new plants that helped prevent disease next to the fire storage, almost like an altar. ¡­Could it be that they discovered the concept of worship before developing a language? Did I help them too much? Once I started helping, it became easier to keep doing it¡­ But if I hadn¡¯t, they would have all died! Well, yes. I am indeed your creator god, and I did help you, but being worshipped as an actual deity feels quite strange. Nevertheless, the 400¡ªno, now reduced to about 300¡ªElves who had lost all will to live and even the desire to flee seemed to regain their will to live by starting to worship me. Suddenly awakened, they began hunting beasts and diligently gathering edible fruits and plants. Even though they intended to offer these to me, their newfound motivation to survive was a relief. Now that most of the major threats seemed to have disappeared, I didn¡¯t need to worry too much about this group anymore. They might become a religious group that worships me, so occasionally providing them with help to affirm my existence could be a good idea. The emergence of exceptionally talented Elves. I helped them out of pity to prevent their downfall, and now they constantly worship me, forming a nascent religious group¡­ This is getting interesting. The Elf tribes are growing in fascinating ways. Watching the diverse development of the tribes will be enjoyable. # According to the Galactic Union¡¯s standard, about two years had passed. On the Elf planet, it had been half a year. Eugene was currently staying in the planet cluster of the Meias tribe, experiencing various events. He had almost mastered advanced magic and had been summoned to mage tournaments and by the elders of the Meias tribe. There were many events, but let¡¯s talk about those later. For now, let¡¯s discuss the Elf planet. Half a year on the Elf planet. A lot had happened. Though it was half a year, over 700 days had passed based on a 24-hour standard. During that time, the Elves made tremendous progress. With their inherently high intelligence and the abundance of various resources around them, they grew rapidly. Among them, the tribes with exceptionally intelligent Elves had already established a language system. They began to establish their own rules and started to properly manage their village. ¡°Here are the new rules. Please familiarize yourselves and follow them.¡± S~?a??h the N???lFire.n?t website on G??gl? to access chapters of n?vels early and in the highest quality. ¡°Another set of rules.¡± ¡°Hmm, but the rules set by the leader are important.¡± For the record, I could understand their self-made language systems perfectly. Even though each tribe had different languages, I could interpret all of them. I had acquired them all at a glance. I needed to understand what they were saying, after all. Anyway, the area now looked like a proper village, with a moat dug around it and a fence erected. They had built numerous huts using wood, stone, and straw. Since they were all created as 20-year-old adults, some had started engaging in reproductive activities, resulting in pregnancies. In other words, they had established a stable village and were ready to begin increasing their population. Although they hadn¡¯t started farming or raising livestock yet, there was plenty of food around, so their hunting lifestyle didn¡¯t hinder their daily lives. Some focused on hunting, others on defending the village, and others on preparing meals and handling various chores. They divided roles and rotated tasks. To professionalize certain jobs, skilled individuals were assigned to perform specific tasks without rotation. They even had names now. The female Elf leader who had previously led the tribe to trap and kill the giant tiger with stone-throwing, her name was ¡®Lasi.¡¯ In their language, it meant ¡®wisdom.¡¯ A very fitting name. She had beautiful golden hair that sparkled in the sunlight and emerald-green eyes. She was exceptionally beautiful, even among Elves. Her eyes had a depth that exuded the aura of a very wise person. Around her, 900 Elf tribe members gathered and diligently built their village. Lasi was exceptionally intelligent. She anticipated that concentrating all authority in herself could lead to dissatisfaction and accusations of dictatorship. To mitigate this, she established a council to decide on major village matters. It was akin to a parliament. It reminded me of the Galactic Union¡¯s Elder Council. Anyway, they fairly elected a total of 10 elders through a voting system to handle the village¡¯s rules and major decisions. To prevent dictatorship, they decided to re-elect these elders every 500 nights. Although the concepts of time and dates were still a bit vague, that would eventually sort itself out. So, they had language, a stable village, and a council. They even had general elections where all tribe members participated. Achieving all this in just over 700 days was an incredibly rapid pace of development. ¡­As for the nascent religious group that worshipped me: ¡°Ooo! Oh great deity, we offer this sacrifice to you!¡± ¡°Oh deity, save us.¡± ¡°Oh deity, save us.¡± ¡­They were performing rituals, offering animal sacrifices. Sigh¡­ Well, at least they developed a language. To worship me, apparently. They even crafted a well-carved idol, imagining me as an Elf with six arms. ¡­At least they used their imagination. Since I never showed myself. They built an altar around the idol, lit a fire, and offered a freshly killed boar. While frantically shouting for salvation. Damn, they looked like a crazed cult! If they were going to form a religion, they could have made it a bit more refined! Chapter 23: Magic Tournament Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 23 Sector C, Meias Planetary Cluster. The third planet, ¡®Lucheri.¡¯ This place was a tourist area within the Meias Planetary Cluster, hosting various events like magic tournaments and magic festivals to attract visitors. Recently, the magic tournament was in full swing, and the area was bustling with people. Among them, a male Terran was sitting in a caf¨¦, sipping tea. ¡°Ah, the Poru black tea of the Meias tribe is indeed the best in the universe.¡± He said this while diligently typing something into an electronic notepad. A middle-aged man with unkempt long brown hair and a bushy beard. He was none other than Kon Arche, the most renowned adventurer among the Terrans and a famous space explorer. He had published a book titled ¡®Kon Arche¡¯s Adventure Journal,¡¯ which had sold hundreds of millions of copies across the galaxy. He was a true galactic celebrity. Even if people didn¡¯t recognize his face, everyone in the Union knew his name. The reason he was here was simple. He was gathering material for his new book, ¡®Encounters in the Universe.¡¯ The book was about his observations of life forms, places, and objects that ordinary people living on their home planets could never encounter. But why had he come to a place populated only by the Meias tribe? ¡®The Magic Tournament! It¡¯s a place where not only the Meias tribe but all beings in the universe who use magic gather.¡¯ He was here to see other magicians, not just those from the Meias tribe. More precisely, he hoped to witness a magician who might rival or even surpass the Meias tribe¡¯s magic prowess. ¡®Such a person wouldn¡¯t be someone you could easily encounter in the universe.¡¯ If he could find such a person, he would interview them and include it in ¡®Encounters in the Universe.¡¯ ¡®My ordinary space adventure journal sold 40 billion copies both online and offline. If I write about things that people could never experience in their lifetime, it might sell twice¡­ no, three times as much.¡¯ He wasn¡¯t satisfied with just finding an exceptional magician who wasn¡¯t from the Meias tribe. He planned to venture into uncharted territories, meet life forms he had never seen before, encounter planet-sized giant monsters, experience what happens near a black hole, observe the phenomena near a neutron star, and even enter the nebula formed by a supernova explosion to see its structure firsthand. Each of these endeavors could cost him his life ten times over, but he intended to experience them all and write about them. The reason he could do this was simple: he was Kon Arche, the world¡¯s greatest space adventurer. He possessed a state-of-the-art personal spaceship capable of withstanding the immense gravitational forces near neutron stars and black holes. He also had the knowledge and skills to handle any crisis that might arise in space. His physical capabilities were extraordinary as well. He had undergone physical enhancement with the serum of the Lubaran tribe and, though at a basic level, had learned magic from the Meias tribe, allowing him to wield magic. Though he was a Terran by name, he was essentially a super soldier specialized for space activities. Even so, if asked why he would risk his life for such endeavors, he would answer: ¡®Of course. That¡¯s what being an adventurer is all about.¡¯ He was an adventurer to his very core. ¡®After this, I should head to the supernova that occurred in Sector G. I might be able to witness the interstellar material slowly beginning to coalesce.¡¯ It takes an incredibly long time for these materials to form a protostar. Even in a place overflowing with energy and interstellar material due to a supernova explosion, it would take a considerable amount of time to see the formation of a star. Of course, he would also visit places where protostars had formed millions of years after a supernova explosion. The reason he wanted to see the supernova in Sector G first was not only because it was relatively close to Sector C. The supernova was large enough to potentially create multiple stars. By going there, he might also witness the massive black hole formed from the remaining core after the explosion. Experiencing both a supermassive black hole and a supermassive supernova simultaneously was an incredibly rare opportunity. Moreover, since it was in uncharted territory and not within a galaxy managed by the Galactic Union, it was left unattended. An abandoned supernova and a supermassive black hole. How could any space adventurer pass up the chance to witness this firsthand? ¡°Hey, let¡¯s go! The preliminaries are about to start!¡± ¡°Oh, really?¡± ¡°Let¡¯s go, let¡¯s go!¡± ¡°Is it starting already?¡± People excitedly ran towards the gigantic colosseum. It seemed the tournament was finally beginning. ¡°Guess I should head over too.¡± Having already reserved his seat, Kon Arche leisurely finished his tea, paid the bill, and walked calmly towards the colosseum. The colossal colosseum could accommodate a million spectators. S~?a??h the N???lFire.n?t website on G??gl? to access chapters of n?vels early and in the highest quality. Regularly, magic tournaments were held there. The winner of the tournament would receive the opportunity to learn magic directly from the top-tier magicians, the elders of the Meias tribe, along with a substantial prize. As a result, most of the renowned magicians from across the galaxy participated in this tournament. Due to the sheer number of participants, they first conducted a ¡®preliminary interview¡¯ to filter out contestants. Those with significantly poor magical abilities, criminal records, or severely flawed personalities were eliminated during the interview process. More than half of the applicants were disqualified without even getting a chance to compete. ¡®I would probably get eliminated here.¡¯ Kon Arche was an exceptional adventurer, but he was terrible at magic. For a Terran like him to have learned magic at all was a testament to his extraordinary talent, but that was his limit. He had only mastered a few basic spells. So, even if he wished to participate in the tournament, he believed he would likely be eliminated in the preliminary interview. ¡®It would be great if an exceptional magician from another race were a Terran, but¡­ that¡¯s something that will never happen.¡¯ Given that he, one of the most talented Terrans, could only achieve so much, he believed that a Terran magician would never be seen in the magic tournament. Even after the preliminary interview, which filtered out many, tens of thousands of participants remained. They were further narrowed down to just 1,000 through practical duels with the regular army magicians of the Meias tribe. These remaining 1,000 would finally get to participate in the official tournament preliminaries. Only the most outstanding magicians from across the galaxy would make it through this rigorous selection process. Most of the participants were from the Meias tribe, with a few from other races, but these were not well-received. The winner was almost always a magician from the Meias tribe, with a 99% certainty. There were complaints about why they accepted entries from the entire Galactic Union if the winner was almost always from the Meias tribe, but spectators were mainly interested in seeing spectacular and impressive magic battles. Issues of racial discrimination were largely ignored, as people were more interested in the spectacle. Moreover, since it was a tournament hosted by the Meias tribe, many felt it was their prerogative. Given that the Meias tribe was the birthplace of magic, it was almost impossible for a magician from another race to surpass them. Even Kon Arche, who had come to see if there were any exceptional magicians from other races, didn¡¯t really expect to find any. ¡®Honestly, I just came to watch the magic tournament for fun before diving into more dangerous adventures.¡¯ Finding an exceptional magician from another race would be a bonus. With that thought, he sat down and watched the preliminaries. The preliminary format was simple. Fifty participants were placed in a massive arena at once, and they had to use magic to knock each other out or force them out of the ring. Only the last four standing would advance to the main tournament. ¡®As expected, most of them are from the Meias tribe this year too.¡¯ Watching the first group of fifty participants enter the arena, Kon Arche sighed briefly in disappointment. While there were a few from other races, they all looked weaker compared to the surrounding Meias tribe members. ¡°¡­Huh?¡± In the midst of the crowd, a man caught Kon Arche¡¯s eye. At first glance, he looked just like a member of the Meias tribe, but with black hair and black eyes. There was also a distinct sense of familiarity. That man was not from the Meias tribe. ¡®Could he be¡­ a Terran?¡¯ He was undoubtedly a Terran, just like Kon Arche. ¡®How did a Terran get here?¡¯ Naturally, not just anyone could make it to the preliminaries. The 1,000 magicians who made it through the preliminary interview and the practical duels with the Meias tribe¡¯s regular army magicians were of a considerably high standard, even by Meias tribe standards. Most participants were adventurers or freelance magicians, as regular army members were not allowed to compete for fairness, but they were all on par with or superior to the regular army in skill. Yet, among them was a Terran? A race inherently devoid of magical talent? Kon Arche wondered if he was mistaken, but his instincts confirmed it. The man was indeed a fellow Terran. ¡®¡­Eugene? Eugene, huh.¡¯ Seeing the name tag on his chest, Kon Arche decided to remember his name. Just making it to the preliminaries was enough to warrant an interview. However, moments after the preliminaries began, Kon Arche was soon left in shock by an unbelievable sight. Chapter 24: Unexpected Results Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 24 The first 50 participants in the preliminaries. Given that the 1,000 participants had been meticulously selected, even among the first 50, there were quite a few well-known magicians. ¡°Oh, isn¡¯t that Serna of the Gale?¡± ¡°Look over there! It¡¯s Russo the Rock Fist!¡± ¡°Arana the Sculptor is here too!¡± Serna of the Gale, the fourth disciple of Organ, one of the five elders of the Meias tribe known as the Magician of the Breeze. Russo the Rock Fist, who specialized in close combat by enveloping his body in rock as hard as steel. Arana the Sculptor, who controlled beautiful golems made from her own sculptures. All were already renowned high-level magicians, active as troubleshooters or freelance magicians, and promising talents of the Meias tribe. Though there were many other skilled magicians, these three were particularly famous and strong. Everyone expected these three to undoubtedly pass the preliminaries. However, as soon as the preliminaries began, a major upheaval occurred. ¡°You, you¡¯re the second disciple of Elder Jupiter, aren¡¯t you? I¡¯ve seen you before.¡± ¡°¡­?¡± Serna of the Gale. Before the preliminaries started, he noticed a man and approached him. That man was Eugene. A Terran brought by Jupiter. While Terrans and Meias tribe members didn¡¯t differ much in appearance, Eugene¡¯s black hair and black eyes, which were extremely rare among the Meias tribe, stood out. And he could be distinguished by his unique energy wavelength. ¡°¡­A Terran, huh.¡± Serna didn¡¯t like Eugene. The fact that a Terran had become the disciple of Elder Jupiter, who had never taken another disciple in his lifetime, was infuriating. It was also infuriating that he had made it to the preliminaries of the magic tournament. Most of all, he couldn¡¯t stand that Elder Jupiter had personally requested Elder Organ to teach Eugene magic. ¡®How dare he ask Elder Organ to teach him magic? Especially a mere Terran?¡¯ It was absurd. In the end, Elder Organ had refused, stating that he only taught his own disciples. However, rumors had it that Elder Jupiter had approached not just Elder Organ but all the current elders and magicians of similar caliber, seeking their teachings for Eugene. ¡®Why is Elder Jupiter going to such lengths for that guy?¡¯ Why for a mere Terran? Eugene didn¡¯t seem to have a lot of mana or any noticeable abilities. And now, he was tainting the sacred tournament by suddenly participating. ¡°What kind of connections do you have? Did the elder pull some strings for you?¡± Serna sneered at Eugene with a mocking tone. He couldn¡¯t stand the thought of a Terran, who likely had neither skill nor mana, being here. ¡°Did an elder pull strings for you too? Is that why you think that way?¡± ¡°What, what did you say?!¡± Eugene retorted dismissively, causing Serna¡¯s face to turn crimson with anger. But then Serna shook his head, thinking. ¡®No, no. There¡¯s no need to get worked up. That guy will be eliminated here anyway. Elder Jupiter must be blind. Even Lowie Hendrick could aim for victory. Sending someone like him to the tournament is just asking for embarrassment.¡¯ And he thought he would be the one to eliminate Eugene. ¡°Now¡­ let the match begin!¡± Beep! As soon as the whistle signaling the start of the preliminaries sounded, Serna immediately turned his attention to Eugene, ignoring the other participants. True to his name, Serna of the Gale conjured a wind that pulled Eugene towards him rather than pushing him away. Using this reverse wind to draw his opponent in, Serna would then immobilize his target with a powerful gust, rendering them unable to move freely. He would then strike with his nano blade, made of nano particles, which could penetrate defenses. This was Serna¡¯s primary combat strategy. Whoooosh! An intense wind. If one wasn¡¯t prepared, they would be swept away towards Serna by the sheer force of the gale. Even if one were prepared, the wind was so strong that all they could do was try to withstand it. Confident in his strategy, Serna drew his sword and charged at Eugene. ¡°¡­¡­¡± As expected, Eugene stood still, seemingly unable to move against the oncoming wind. ¡®Heh, how do you like that! Such incredible magical abilities that you could never even imagine!¡¯ Just as Serna was about to slash Eugene¡¯s arm with his nano blade¡­ Crunch! ¡°¡­?¡± A sudden sound of something piercing through flesh. His body froze. Looking down at his own body, he saw¡­ ¡°¡­What?¡± Sharp, blood-red ice had grown from within him, piercing through his stomach and clothes. ¡°Argh! What is this?!¡± ¡°Your defense is lacking. You should have protected the inside of your body, not just the outside with a shield.¡± As the cold ice grew from within him, piercing his flesh, Serna screamed in agony, experiencing an unprecedented level of pain. Eugene looked at Serna with a hint of pity, then kicked him out of the arena, disqualifying him. ¡°I didn¡¯t do it to kill you. You¡¯ll be fine after some treatment.¡± ¡°Argh! Damn it!¡± In just 20 seconds, the unexpected happened: Serna, whom everyone was certain would advance to the main tournament, was eliminated. # ¡°What¡­ just happened?¡± ¡°Serna got eliminated? Right after it started?¡± Something had suddenly pierced through Serna¡¯s body, and then, writhing in pain, he was kicked out of the arena by a man. The crowd was in chaos. A talent everyone thought would surely advance to the main tournament had been eliminated in an instant. Simultaneously, all attention turned to the black-haired magician who had disqualified Serna. ¡®Who is he?¡¯ ¡®Who¡¯s that? Never seen him before.¡¯ ¡®He doesn¡¯t even look like he¡¯s from the Meias tribe.¡¯ Murmurs filled the air. Among them, Kon Arche was equally astonished. ¡°What¡­ he¡¯s incredibly strong¡­¡± Eugene, a Terran. Kon Arche had honestly thought he would be eliminated immediately. But he had just disqualified Serna of the Gale, a candidate for the main tournament, in an instant. And it didn¡¯t stop there. Eugene began to overwhelm and eliminate all the renowned Meias tribe magicians around him with his superior skills. Finally, at the end of the round: ¡°The qualifiers for the first round are Eugene, Russo, Arana, and Janie!¡± Eugene proudly made it onto the list of qualifiers. ¡°Wow! Who is that newcomer?¡± ¡°Amazing! I¡¯m rooting for him!¡± ¡°But he doesn¡¯t look like he¡¯s from the Meias tribe¡­¡± While the crowd cheered and expressed their doubts, Kon Arche watched in disbelief. ¡®Isn¡¯t he a Terran? Am I mistaken? No¡­ he¡¯s definitely a Terran¡­¡¯ S?a??h the N?v?lFir?(.)n?t website on G??gl? to access chapters of n?vels early and in the highest quality. He was confused. Despite being a Terran, Eugene had overwhelming mana and exceptional magical skills. He could easily be mistaken for a promising candidate for the next elder of the Meias tribe. ¡®At this level, he could be a contender for the championship.¡¯ A magician of such caliber. Thinking he needed to interview Eugene immediately, Kon Arche went to find him. ¡°With skills like that, you could win the tournament. Well¡­ it¡¯s only natural.¡± ¡°Is that so?¡± ¡°Yes. Winning here would give you a strong case to ask the elders who refused to teach you to reconsider.¡± ¡°Ah, so that¡¯s why he told me to participate.¡± Rushing to the waiting room, Kon Arche saw Eugene deep in conversation with Elder Jupiter. ¡®So he was Elder Jupiter¡¯s disciple.¡¯ Kon Arche thought as he approached Eugene. ¡°Excuse me, Mr. Eugene?¡± ¡°??¡± Eugene tilted his head in curiosity at Kon Arche¡¯s call. Recognizing him immediately, Eugene broke into a bright smile. ¡°Oh! Kon Arche! It¡¯s really you, Kon Arche, right?!¡± ¡°Oh, you know me?¡± While his books and name were well-known, not many people recognized his face. He was quite surprised that Eugene recognized him immediately. But after hearing Eugene¡¯s explanation, it made sense. ¡°Of course. You¡¯re practically a legend among space adventurers. Anyone who doesn¡¯t know you must be crazy.¡± ¡°Oh, so you¡¯re a space adventurer.¡± It was shocking to learn that Eugene was a space adventurer. Was he just a space adventurer with exceptional potential who became Elder Jupiter¡¯s disciple? ¡°¡­I wanted to ask you a few things for my new book.¡± ¡°Oh, absolutely. Is a new book coming out?¡± ¡°Yes, indeed.¡± When Kon Arche nodded, Eugene tilted his head in curiosity. ¡°Am I going to be featured in it?¡± ¡°Well¡­ you¡¯re a Terran with incredible mana, a disciple of Elder Jupiter, and a skilled magician who advanced to the main tournament. That¡¯s rare and impressive enough to be in a book, don¡¯t you think?¡± ¡°Haha, is that so?¡± Eugene scratched the back of his head, looking a bit embarrassed. From this reaction, Kon Arche was certain. ¡®So he is a Terran.¡¯ If he wasn¡¯t, he would have corrected him. Now it was confirmed that Eugene was a Terran. A Terran with incredible magical skills and mana¡­ Kon Arche had traveled across the galaxy but had never encountered such a rare case. After successfully completing the interview with Eugene, Kon Arche said, ¡°Win the tournament. I¡¯ll be rooting for you.¡± ¡°Haha, thank you.¡± They parted ways with a polite farewell. Of course, Kon Arche didn¡¯t actually believe Eugene would win the tournament. Despite Eugene¡¯s incredible mana and skills, Kon Arche believed there were too many powerful contenders among the Meias tribe for him to win. ¡­Or so he thought. As the tournament progressed over several days, to everyone¡¯s astonishment, Eugene ended up winning, just as Kon Arche had predicted. ¡°The winner is Eugene! Breaking through all the top contenders, he becomes the first Terran magician in the universe to win the tournament!!¡± ¡°¡­What?¡± ¡°Huh¡­?¡± ¡°W-What¡­¡± The crowd¡¯s reaction mirrored Kon Arche¡¯s, with everyone wearing the same stunned expression. Chapter 25: Contact Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 25 As if binge-watching a slightly delayed drama, a year had passed while following Yujin¡¯s training and victory story. Wow, he really grew well. He could now handle advanced magic quite adeptly¡­ In fact, it seemed like his persona was even better than mine. Meanwhile, it had been three years since the creation of the elf race. On the elves¡¯ planet, less than a year had passed. By slightly tilting the planet, four seasons were established. Currently, the northern hemisphere was transitioning from late autumn to winter preparation, while the southern hemisphere was moving from spring into summer. The female elf leader Lasi¡¯s group, which had originally numbered 1,000, had now grown to about 1,050. Initially, their numbers had decreased to around 900 due to various events, but the birth of 150 newborns from pregnant elves had increased their population. Since they were set to have a 10-month pregnancy period similar to the Terrans, the children were born relatively quickly. Hmm¡­ Considering the planet¡¯s orbital period, perhaps the pregnancy duration should have been longer, but¡­ In any case, the faster the population grows, the better. Even if the planet¡¯s population reached saturation quickly, it wouldn¡¯t matter once they ventured into space. The village was already well-protected with moats and fences. They had developed spears from sharply cut stones and slings to throw stones more forcefully, making them formidable against nearby beasts. Hit by slings and spears, the beasts were no match. Moreover, the village was surrounded by a moat, making it difficult to approach. Consequently, the beasts turned their attention away from the elves¡¯ village and started targeting elves who ventured out for food. However, even those elves were well-equipped with spears, throwing weapons, and wooden armor and shields, making them tough targets. Of course, not everyone could venture outside the village, so the number of people who could fight was limited. This led to ongoing concerns about developing better weapons and armor. At least the village¡¯s internal safety was guaranteed. Now was the time to focus on breeding within a stable society to increase their numbers. With safety ensured and the population starting to grow through reproduction, the next critical need was food to support the increasing population. ¡°For now, we have enough, but it¡¯s risky. The ¡®Merow¡¯ has passed, and the weather is getting colder again. It would be great if Merow returned, but if it doesn¡¯t, we¡¯ll have to live through continuous cold weather. This could lead to serious food shortages.¡± Lasi referred to ¡®Merow¡¯ as the warm days in their village language, essentially meaning the summer that had lasted until a year ago. Although the winters on this planet weren¡¯t extremely cold, it was still a concern. Each season lasted a standard year, and enduring sub-zero temperatures for an entire year would be harsh. Thus, even during ¡®Arow,¡¯ their term for the cold days or winter, temperatures didn¡¯t drop below freezing. The lowest temperature was around 3 degrees Celsius, and on warm days, it could reach up to 10 degrees Celsius. By the standards of the Korea I lived in during my previous life, this weather was akin to ¡®late autumn.¡¯ However, for primitive elves without proper heating facilities, insulated buildings, or food production technology, even this degree of cold was quite deadly. Their bodies were naturally strong, so the cold itself wasn¡¯t a problem. Considering that the elves were born during winter, the planet¡¯s winter wasn¡¯t a big deal for adult elves. But it was a different story for babies. The elves caring for the babies had to stay inside their huts all day, doing nothing but keeping warm by the fire. Even if those caring for babies were excluded from the labor force, other members would still be less active than during warmer weather. More importantly, food would be relatively scarce in winter. There would be many mouths to feed, but less food available. This situation would last for an entire year by Galactic Union standard time. As a result, Lasi, the leader, had many concerns. The elves in other regions faced the same dilemma. They were worried about how to endure the approaching winter. If they could farm, raise livestock, or produce food in various ways, they might manage. But since they hadn¡¯t developed to that point yet, the best they could do was gather and store as much food as possible. Perhaps I should teach them farming techniques or how to raise livestock? Growing something like potatoes in winter could help them survive. Livestock might not be a viable solution within a year, but still. Even without my help, they would find a way to endure. The elves in the southern hemisphere were in the middle of summer, so they had plenty of food even if babies were born. ¡­Honestly, my biggest concern was something else. ¡°Oh, great deity! Thank you for providing us with food even in this cold weather!¡± ¡°We offer this sacrifice to you, our mighty god!¡± ¡­¡­ What the hell, you crazy idiots, why are you offering the food you¡¯ve worked so hard to gather to me? And then, instead of eating the food after the ritual, they just leave it, saying it¡¯s an offering to the god. They barely eat what¡¯s left after the offering. No wonder their population isn¡¯t increasing; it¡¯s actually decreasing despite my help. How do I deal with this crazy cult? The only silver lining was that dangerous beasts no longer approached. These fanatics had become so deranged that they didn¡¯t fear the beasts. Instead, they crazily charged at them to offer them as sacrifices, scaring the beasts away. And another thing. Since their population was small and they hadn¡¯t had many babies yet, they could survive even with less food. There was a clear cause-and-effect relationship. But these crazy people¡­ ¡°The beasts aren¡¯t attacking us! The god has blessed us!¡± ¡°Oh, it must be the Hand of Protection among the six hands!¡± You crazy fools! The beasts are scared off because you¡¯re charging at them like maniacs, trying to offer them as sacrifices, no matter how many you kill! And what¡¯s this about the Hand of Protection among the six hands? Did you guys just randomly decide I have six arms, each with different abilities? What even is the Hand of Protection? ¡°Even in this cold, we have food to eat!¡± ¡°Not starving is all thanks to the god¡¯s grace.¡± ¡°It must be the Hand of Abundance among the six hands!¡± That¡¯s because your population is so small that even a little food is enough to keep you from starving. What god¡¯s grace? Hand of Abundance, my foot. Which hand is that, anyway? ¡°Thank you, oh great god!¡± ¡°We pray to you, mighty god.¡± Sigh¡­ Just thinking about that fanatical group makes me sigh. It¡¯s endearing that they worship and pray to me so fervently, but can they even survive like this? While I was pondering this, something happened. ¡°¡­Oh!¡± ¡°Hm?!¡± An event occurred in the southern hemisphere of the planet. One of the intelligent elves I had been keeping an eye on, Muwan, led a group of elves. A scout from Muwan¡¯s group encountered an elf from another group gathering food at a nearby point. Oh, finally! After approximately three years by Galactic Union standard time, elves from different groups finally encountered each other. Until now, they had been too busy organizing their villages and dealing with beasts to expand their range of activities. However, the southern hemisphere had entered a bountiful summer, allowing them to extend their exploration range. What would happen next? Would they fight? Engage in a territorial war? Or, given their strong sense of kinship, would they cooperate to expand their territories? Although food supplies were still a bit uncertain, the southern hemisphere¡¯s summer allowed for ample hunting to sustain them. ¡°¡­Bagu. Abonsu. Warandu?¡± ¡°Segrinu, Lata.¡± ¡°¡­?¡± ¡°???¡± Hmm, it seemed like the language barrier was quite significant. Well, these elves were so intelligent that they developed their language systems too early. Each village likely had different languages or meanings. But they had body language and drawings to communicate! Realizing they couldn¡¯t understand each other despite being the same species, they started using gestures and drawings to communicate. It was fortunate that they didn¡¯t attack each other upon meeting but instead tried to communicate. Apparently, body language worked, and some of Muwan¡¯s scouts decided to visit the village of the elves who were gathering food. Others returned to their village to inform Muwan, their leader, about the existence of another elf village and that some scouts were heading there. The fact that they were willing to visit an unknown elf village suggested an instinctive understanding that they wouldn¡¯t harm each other as the same species. I was glad I had fostered strong kinship among them. Thus, the first contact led to a visit to a new village. I was starting to look forward to seeing how interactions with external elves would unfold from here. S?a??h the N?v?lF?re.?et website on G??gl? to access chapters of n?vels early and in the highest quality. Translator Note: I changed the name from Eugene to Yujin, since it will fit the story better. I will update the previous chapter and the following accordingly. Chapter 26: Visitor Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 26 ¡°What? Another elf village?¡± Muwan was shocked and widened his eyes as he asked again after hearing the returning scouts¡¯ report. The scouts nodded and continued. ¡°Yes, Muwan. During our patrol, we discovered other elves who explained through gestures that they were from another elf village.¡± ¡°Since we couldn¡¯t understand their language, we communicated through gestures, so it¡¯s not entirely clear¡­¡± ¡°To get a better understanding, Yeonhu and Jigang headed to their village.¡± ¡°¡­!!¡± Hearing that the scouts named Yeonhu and Jigang had gone to an unknown elf village, Muwan frowned deeply. ¡°You fools! What if something happens to them?¡± Oh, Muwan seemed to be a cautious one. It appeared that even among elves, there were those who were more wary. Well, different races have different traits and personalities. There¡¯s no rule saying elves can¡¯t be cautious. ¡°¡­? They¡¯re fellow elves. What danger could there be?¡± ¡°It was a friendly atmosphere.¡± Most of the elves seemed to wonder what Muwan was so worried about. Due to their strong sense of kinship, they were confident that other elves wouldn¡¯t harm them. Well, it seemed that the other elves were right in this case rather than the cautious Muwan. The other village seemed to be welcoming them warmly. Still, Muwan wasn¡¯t entirely wrong. Such caution and prudence were necessary traits for a leader to protect the village. There was always the possibility that these elves might be the kind who would kill even their own kind. Muwan was indeed one of the particularly intelligent elves I had been observing. His thinking was different from the other elves who strictly adhered to their racial traits. ¡°Raise the alert level. We don¡¯t know what might happen.¡± ¡°¡­Understood.¡± If Lasi was a friendly leader who encouraged cooperation and camaraderie, Muwan was a competent superior who issued somewhat forceful commands. Because of this, even when Muwan gave orders that the elves didn¡¯t understand, they followed, believing there was a reason behind them. It seemed that different types of leaders had their own pros and cons. If Lasi had given such an order in this situation, the elves might have questioned why or suggested it wasn¡¯t necessary. Unlike the tense atmosphere in Muwan¡¯s village, the other village was quite cheerful. ¡°Oh ho! So there are other elves!¡± ¡°Judging by their gestures, it seems they have a sizable community, similar to or even larger than ours.¡± S?a?ch* Th? N?v?lFire.n?t website on G??gl? to access chapters of n?vels early and in the highest quality. Unlike Muwan, they seemed to warmly welcome the outsiders. It wasn¡¯t that they particularly liked other elves; their overall atmosphere was more relaxed and joyful. This was likely because they were located in a higher, more secure area, which, despite having slightly less food, faced fewer external threats. With fewer crises, the elves¡¯ atmosphere became more relaxed. Because they had more leisure time, they began to lay the groundwork for farming earlier than other elves. They started by planting fruit seeds and plant roots in the village soil. Living in a slightly elevated area led to food scarcity, which in turn accelerated the development of farming. However, since they were still at the very basics, the fruit seeds and plants didn¡¯t grow well. At best, they sprouted and then withered. It was still too early to say they had truly begun farming. However, what if this event led to an exchange between Muwan¡¯s village, located downstream with much more fertile and soft soil, and the other village? Muwan¡¯s sharp mind would quickly grasp the concept of planting seeds and growing crops. The fertile soil would help the seeds grow well, potentially ushering in the first agricultural era in the southern hemisphere. Wow¡­ This feels like watching a documentary on human development while playing a simulation game. It¡¯s really fascinating. ¡°Hm? What¡¯s this here?¡± Oh! Scout Yeonhu had just discovered an elf planting seeds. Although they couldn¡¯t communicate verbally, Yeonhu used gestures to ask what the elf was doing. ¡°Ah, we¡¯ve started having babies, but food is scarce. We thought it would be better if we grew our own food.¡± The elf used body language to show fruits from trees and edible plants. ¡°¡­Oh.¡± Yeonhu and Jigang immediately understood their actions. If they returned and reported this to Muwan¡­ Hm? While engrossed in watching the elves¡¯ development documentary, I suddenly sensed something approaching. A personal spaceship? No, it wasn¡¯t just any personal spaceship. It was the famous space adventurer, Kon Arche¡¯s ship, who had interviewed Yujin. He had won the Mage Tournament and had another interview to commemorate his victory. It seemed he had come here to write a book, as he had planned. I had known about his plans since I started focusing on Yujin. I hadn¡¯t kept up with other information to concentrate on the elf civilization simulation, so I didn¡¯t know he had already arrived, but I knew he would come eventually. Well, there¡¯s no risk of being discovered. The massive and bright nebula created by the supernova explosion emitted immense energy and radiation, making it impossible for most life forms to approach. Kon Arche would likely just come close enough to observe. He could never imagine that within that nebula, a star system had already formed, and a new race had emerged, creating a civilization. ¡­Hmm, just in case, should I scare him away so he doesn¡¯t come closer? If he suddenly risked his life to enter the supernova and discovered the star system, reporting it to the Galactic Union would be problematic. But Kon Arche, the famous space adventurer, was intriguing. A Terran who had enhanced his body with Lubaran serum, learned Meias magic, and incorporated various technologies he acquired during his adventures¡­ truly a super soldier. Even if he discovered and reported me, I could just erase his memory or the information itself. Since it had come to this, I might as well take a look at him in person. I knew his face and features, but it¡¯s like going to a zoo to see a tiger even if you already know what it looks like. The elf planet¡­ It should be fine without me for a while. The supernova¡¯s energy and radiation defenses were solid, and everything was running smoothly without my interference, except for that cult. Swoosh¡ª # I moved towards the direction where Kon Arche was approaching to examine the remnants of the supernova explosion. I had reduced the distortion effects that caused mental collapse, so his brain wouldn¡¯t suddenly melt from getting too close. ¡°¡­Wow, a freshly exploded supernova. What an incredibly bright nebula. If I get any closer, I¡¯ll be roasted by the gamma rays.¡± Kon Arche leisurely observed the massive nebula, jotting down notes in his memo pad. I watched him quietly from the side. I had camouflaged my body by blending with the surrounding energy and visible light, making it almost invisible. Even with a body as large as Jupiter, it would be hard to spot me. ¡°Ugh¡­ my head¡­¡± However, it seemed I had gotten too close, as Kon Arche started to complain of a headache. Although I had minimized the distortion effects, I couldn¡¯t eliminate them entirely, so they still had an impact even from a considerable distance. Well¡­ 30,000 km is practically next to each other in space. Moreover, I¡¯m the size of a planet. That means my influence is vast. Due to the distortion effects causing a headache and possibly altering his optic nerves, he suddenly spotted me. ¡°¡­Huh?¡± Ah. Damn, I¡¯ve been seen. I thought I had blended with the light wavelengths. Something strange must have happened to his optic nerves, as he looked directly at me. This was unexpected. There was no future information about changes caused by myself, so I had to observe in real-time. It seems that even if I camouflage myself with light, I shouldn¡¯t reveal myself in front of living beings. Who would have thought that just by getting close, I could alter his optic nerves to see me through something other than light wavelengths? I hadn¡¯t tested this by approaching living beings before. But I had taken precautions to prevent mental collapse, following the method of my friend, Cthanyd. So, his brain wouldn¡¯t explode just from making eye contact with me. ¡°Huff, huff¡­ Huff¡­!!¡± Oh no, this is strange. He looks like he¡¯s about to die from hyperventilation. Damn, he¡¯s just terrified. This won¡¯t do. I¡¯ve achieved my goal of seeing Kon Arche¡¯s face, so I¡¯d better leave quickly! Swoosh¡ª I retreated far back into the supernova. Geez¡­ I still seem to lack the self-awareness of being an outer god. Almost causing someone to die from hyperventilation just because of curiosity? Or maybe, as a true outer god, it¡¯s right to satisfy my curiosity regardless of whether someone dies from hyperventilation? No, no! I decided to be a benevolent outer god. One who enjoys space adventures with an avatar and secretly observes the elves¡¯ ecosystem in secluded places. Yes, yes. Retreating quickly was the right thing to do. Let¡¯s see if Kon Arche is okay. If he plans to report the presence of an outer god near the G-Sector supernova to the Galactic Union, I¡¯ll have to erase his memory. ¡°Huff¡­ Huff¡­¡± He seemed to be feeling a bit better after I disappeared, still clutching his throbbing head and catching his breath. ¡°What was that just now? A giant monster¡­? Or¡­ was it the ¡®outer god¡¯ I¡¯ve only heard rumors about¡­?¡± Fortunately, he didn¡¯t seem to have a clear grasp of my existence. Knowing it was dangerous, he should just quietly back off. ¡°This¡­ This is it. I have to write about this in my book¡­!¡± ¡­?? ¡®The moment I met its enormous eye, an unbearable headache struck me. Just by facing it, the amount of information exceeded what my brain could handle.¡¯ Wow, this guy is something else. A super soldier who almost died from hyperventilation, and the first thing he does afterward is take notes for his book? And what¡¯s with that content? Is this the prologue to a Cthulhu mythos story? Unbelievable¡­ Chapter 27: Agrarian Society Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 27 The fact that Kon Arche had already arrived here meant that quite some time had passed since Yujin¡¯s victory. Oh, man¡­ I got so engrossed in the civilization-building simulation that I forgot to keep up with the drama. I could watch both simultaneously, but doing both at once might be a waste¡­ Besides, being eternal and immortal, I should savor each one slowly. But then again, since both are happening in real-time, there¡¯s no point in saving them for later, is there? Hmm¡­ Since the elves are on the verge of ushering in the agricultural era, I¡¯ll focus on this for now. Later, when things stabilize and I get bored, I can binge-watch Yujin¡¯s story. Yeah, I still have seven years before the confrontation with the Galactic Union I saw earlier. The Meias planetary system doesn¡¯t seem to be expanding the story further for now, so I¡¯ll let it sit for a bit longer. I¡¯ve watched up to the part where Yujin was summoned by the Meias elders, recognized by them, and started learning magic. From now on, it¡¯s mostly about learning advanced and ultimate magic, which can be a bit dull. ¡°Just in case, let¡¯s get out of here. We can go to another place with a giant black hole.¡± Kon Arche, still shaken from our encounter, hurriedly left the area. Fortunately, he seemed to only plan on writing about it in his book and not reporting it to the Galactic Union. The book wouldn¡¯t be published for a while, so I didn¡¯t have to worry about sudden visits from the Galactic Union or others for the time being. Now, I could continue observing the elves without concern. ¡°Their armaments look quite formidable.¡± Unaskula, the leader of the highland village, showed interest in the weapons carried by Muwan¡¯s scouts. Like Lasi¡¯s village and other intelligent communities, they were armed with sharp stone spears, slings, and primitive bows, advantageous for combat. Living in a vast forested plain, they had faced frequent beast attacks, which accelerated the development of their weapons. In contrast, the highland village faced fewer external threats, so their weapons were still limited to stone-throwing and roughly made blunt spears. Although weapons were less of a priority, they were still important to them. However, since the food issue was more pressing, they focused on solving that rather than developing weapons. From this, Unaskula came up with a good idea. ¡°Let¡¯s befriend them. We can learn their weapons and techniques.¡± By ¡°befriend,¡± he meant establishing an exchange between the villages, as they didn¡¯t have a specific word for it. In return, they would send plants that could only be found in the highlands or teach them how to grow food in their village. Even though their methods were primitive, they believed it would be helpful. Hmm, I¡¯m not sure if this is a good idea. Looking at it now, in terms of geographical features, weapon technology, and village size, Muwan¡¯s village held a much higher position. From Muwan¡¯s perspective, there was no reason to exchange or cooperate with them. In fact, they could easily come and gather plants or herbs from the highlands themselves, given the relatively short distance. If Muwan¡¯s village decided, they could push out the highland village and monopolize the highland resources. And the method of growing plants was just a primitive way of planting seeds in the ground. There wasn¡¯t much to teach. In Muwan¡¯s village, located downstream with fertile soil, seeds would grow well just by planting them. Knowing this, the existence of the highland village would become unnecessary. Hmm¡­ They might end up being devoured instead. Although elves have a strong sense of kinship, Muwan¡¯s sharp and deep thinking made him wary even of this instinctive bond. Given his personality, he might aim to absorb the highland village to expand his territory rather than cooperate. Wow, expanding the village¡¯s scale through territorial expansion at the start of the agricultural era. Knowing that there were other elf groups around, Muwan wouldn¡¯t stop here. He would aim to dominate a larger territory and expand his influence. The elves I created have a high sense of curiosity and a strong desire for development, just as much as their sense of kinship. I¡¯m really curious to see how things will unfold. Perhaps the first large group that could be called a ¡°nation¡± might start with Muwan in the southern hemisphere. # While significant changes were about to occur in the southern hemisphere, Lasi¡¯s village in the northern hemisphere was also on the verge of a major transformation. ¡°Isn¡¯t the problem that we lack labor to go outside during the cold days, resulting in fewer resources?¡± ¡°That¡¯s correct.¡± ¡°Then why don¡¯t we obtain food within the village itself?¡± ¡°Food within the village?¡± Oh, they¡¯ve finally come up with the idea of farming here as well. But will it work? It¡¯s late autumn now, and winter is approaching. If we divide the year into 12 parts, it¡¯s around mid-October. The things they can grow now to eat during winter are limited. But these elves, who were born just three years ago¡­ no, less than a year by their standards, wouldn¡¯t have that knowledge. They might consider this winter as a trial and error period. ¡­Or so I thought, but Lasi turned out to be a remarkably wise elf. ¡°Store as much as you can of what we can gather now. When the Arow comes, we can store it outside without it spoiling, so keep it in a cool place where sunlight doesn¡¯t reach. And let¡¯s focus on the foods that helped us survive the previous Arow. Let¡¯s try growing those.¡± Exactly. They had already experienced one winter. They were born in the winter, after all. They remembered the foods that sustained them then. Root vegetables like potatoes and bellflowers, which fed 990 elves, were among those foods. And leafy greens that are resistant to cold, like lettuce. If they had a way to control temperature and humidity with a greenhouse, it would be even easier, but cold-resistant plants generally have strong vitality and can grow well even in tough, hard soil. Moreover, the elf planet maintains an average temperature of around 5 degrees Celsius, even in the coldest winter. The nearby river keeps the ground soft and moist. In fact, it¡¯s an environment not much different from a winter greenhouse. I thought they would fail when winter came after planting various things. I underestimated the natural conditions and Lasi¡¯s memory and adaptability. Wow¡­ They are indeed elves. The race I created is truly exceptional. Isn¡¯t this faster than the Lubaran race¡¯s history? I remember it took them about five years to reach an agrarian society. Following this, Lasi and the village elves gathered roots and seeds of plants similar to potatoes and lettuce and began planting them in the empty spaces of their village. Lasi named the potato-like plant ¡°Lumoru,¡± meaning ¡°blessing of the earth.¡± She named the lettuce-like plant ¡°Arimoru,¡± meaning ¡°blessing of the forest.¡± Originally thriving in the forest, Lumoru and Arimoru grew even faster and larger when planted in the more fertile soil near the river in the village. About a month later, as winter set in, Lasi¡¯s village had its first harvest. Long, slightly dry potatoes and somewhat wilted lettuce. They didn¡¯t look great, but they were proper ¡°crops.¡± Though called potato-like, these were wild plants with large, swollen roots and a somewhat earthy taste. I could have made them delicious from the start, but I wanted to leave room for scientific development through selective breeding. ¡°Success.¡± ¡°Ha ha! They grew well even in the Arow. Now, we won¡¯t need to go outside except to hunt for meat.¡± ¡°Indeed. Ha ha ha!¡± The winter food problem was resolved much more easily than expected. But it seemed that Lasi wasn¡¯t done thinking. ¡°Hmm, when it comes to getting meat¡­¡± It was clear what she was contemplating. They had discovered farming. For now, their methods were primitive¡ªno plowing, no fertilizing, just digging and planting. But knowing that they could grow their own food meant they no longer had to worry about food shortages. So, what¡¯s next? Livestock. Meat, labor, and some animals could even be trained for hunting. This would be a significant advancement in their industry. Raising dogs improved hunting efficiency, raising cattle improved agricultural efficiency, and raising chickens and pigs made meat supply much smoother. Of course, bringing other living creatures into the village wasn¡¯t easy. Taming them was one issue, but it also meant they needed surplus food. Lasi understood this well. That¡¯s why she started thinking about livestock. ¡®After the Arow passes and it gets warmer, we can try growing other plants besides Lumoru and Arimoru. If that succeeds, we¡¯ll have more than enough food. We won¡¯t need to go outside.¡¯ But to get meat, they still needed to venture out. Hunting and fishing were necessary. But what if they could solve that within the village? If they captured edible animals and kept them in the village, feeding them surplus crops? ¡®We could get meat without hunting. If we can breed them, we could have an endless supply of meat.¡¯ With this in mind, Lasi set her next goal: capturing animals and confining them in the village. Of course, this was only in her mind for now. Since it¡¯s winter now, Lasi must have thought it would be difficult to start immediately. She would likely begin after spring, once they¡¯ve tried growing various crops and have an abundance of food. Wow, Lasi is the first to think of and implement both agriculture and livestock farming. I thought Muwan would take the lead, but it seems the agrarian society will start here first. It seems necessity sharpens the mind. S?a??h th? N?v?lFire.n?t website on G??gl? to access chapters of n?vels early and in the highest quality. The difference between the abundant summer and the scarce, desperate winter. Chapter 28: Village Merger Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 28 ¡°Greetings. I am Muwan.¡± Oh, they¡¯ve finally met! A few days after the scouts from Muwan¡¯s village returned with a warm reception, Muwan and Unaskula finally met. Muwan led a group of armed elves up to the highlands, arriving at Unaskula¡¯s village. From my perspective, their armament was rudimentary¡ªcrude wooden shields, primitive bows with limited range, and spears made from sharpened stones. But from the viewpoint of Unaskula¡¯s highland village, these were advanced weapons they didn¡¯t possess. It was like bringing machine guns and mortars to an old army that had just developed gunpowder. Imagine the excitement of those who had just discovered gunpowder seeing such advanced weaponry. If they didn¡¯t know what it was, it wouldn¡¯t be scary, but they had developed enough to understand how terrifying it was. As a result, Unaskula and the villagers were quite overwhelmed. This was exactly what Muwan intended. He wanted to show who held the higher ground and apply psychological pressure to naturally make the highland village a vassal state. His greeting was also part of this strategy. Even though his scouts had learned the highland village¡¯s language, he confidently greeted them in his own language, implying that Unaskula should also use his language. Wow¡­ This is pure dominance. If Muwan continues to develop rapidly and starts absorbing other elf groups around the highland village, he could become the king of the southern hemisphere. ¡°Ah, um¡­ Greetings¡­¡± Unaskula also sensed Muwan¡¯s intentions. It would be foolish not to notice such an overt attempt to seize control. However, he felt overwhelmed. The advanced weapons made from sharpened stone and wood, which they did not possess, and the warriors of Muwan¡¯s village, hardened by constant battles with external threats, were intimidating. Instinctively, Unaskula knew that elves attacking elves was unthinkable. But a deeper, primal instinct as a living being warned him of the danger. If they resisted, it would be perilous. An elf who openly displayed such weapons to assert dominance could easily subdue them by force if displeased. If I were in the same position, I would have felt the same. We are weak, so we have no choice but to submit. At least, we have value in our agricultural skills and labor, so they wouldn¡¯t kill or persecute us, he hoped. Thus, for the sake of his village and his own life, Unaskula decided to relinquish control. He responded in Muwan¡¯s language. Muwan, pleased, smiled and said to Unaskula, ¡°Shall we discuss the future of our villages?¡± ¡°¡­Let¡¯s do that.¡± The future of the village. Unaskula could only hope that they wouldn¡¯t be treated too poorly. After all, they were fellow elves; surely, they wouldn¡¯t be treated as slaves. Not that they even knew what slavery was. Did they even have a concept of social status? Muwan might be seen as a leader, with others as subordinates, but perhaps this could be the birth of the first social hierarchy. Even so, it would likely be a simple distinction between the elves of Muwan¡¯s village and those of the highland village, akin to higher and lower commoners. Because of the strong bond between the races, they wouldn¡¯t be treated as slaves. ¡°This place is quite small, and there aren¡¯t many people.¡± ¡°Well¡­ it¡¯s the highlands, and food has been scarce¡­ but that will soon be resolved.¡± During their conversation, Unaskula mentioned agriculture. Muwan, who had already heard about it from Yeonhu and Jigang, nodded knowingly. ¡°Planting seeds, is it? But that won¡¯t be easy in the mountains.¡± ¡°Ha ha¡­ We¡¯re considering various methods. We can at least feed those within this village.¡± Then Muwan drove the point home. ¡°Our land is blessed by the river and very fertile, unlike these mountains.¡± ¡°¡­¡­¡± A declaration that even in agriculture, they could surpass the highland village. Wow¡­ he¡¯s coming on really strong. In terms of military strength, population, and even agriculture, the highland village couldn¡¯t compete. ¡°Moving the village to the downstream area, like ours, could be a good solution.¡± But of course, Unaskula couldn¡¯t respond to that. Naturally. The downstream area was filled with dangerous beasts. While the highlands had some intrusions, it wasn¡¯t as bad as the fertile plains downstream. With their current armament and numbers, they couldn¡¯t establish and defend a village there from the start. Muwan knew this as well. They were better off staying here, at least until they could somehow replicate the weapons Muwan had shown them to improve their defenses. Primitive as the weapons were, they could be replicated. But that wasn¡¯t what Muwan wanted. Muwan was essentially telling them to abandon their village and join his. He planned to rapidly increase his population and expand his village¡¯s territory. Since agriculture made food plentiful, there was enough to go around. Muwan was coming on very strong. His boldness exuded the scent of a powerful ruler. It seemed the southern hemisphere was about to become quite intense. ¡°¡­We don¡¯t have the strength for that.¡± ¡°Ha ha, shall we help you? Or perhaps some of you could come to our village! Planting seeds requires more land and labor than you might think. If you join us and help, we could expand our village land and make planting and growing easier. You have the experience, after all.¡± Wow, he was being very direct. He was telling them to come under his rule. He planned to leave some people in the highland village, sending a few soldiers under the guise of protection to keep watch. Later, he would expand his territory using their labor, naturally absorbing their land into his own. Unaskula understood Muwan¡¯s intentions, but once their village was visible to Muwan, they had no options. Muwan was an elf who would crush anyone he deemed necessary, regardless of elven kinship. ¡°¡­We will help with the planting.¡± ¡°Ha ha ha, we would be grateful for that.¡± In the end, Unaskula submitted, and Muwan smiled with satisfaction. Thus, the first ¡®merger¡¯ among the elves took place. # Meanwhile, something seemed to be brewing on Yujin¡¯s side as well. Having won the tournament, Yujin had become the most famous figure in the Meias planetary army. It was partly due to his outstanding magical skills, but even more so because of the rumor that he was not of the Meias race, but of the Terra race. ¡°How can a Terra race member be so skilled in magic?¡± ¡°They say he¡¯s Elder Jupiter¡¯s second disciple. Maybe he was given some incredible power?¡± ¡°Come on¡­ there¡¯s such a thing as innate mana.¡± Despite being the center of controversy, Yujin sought out the elders who hadn¡¯t taught him magic and learned from them. Winning the Mage Tournament granted him the opportunity to learn from the elders or top-tier mages equivalent to them, so they had no reason to refuse him now. Hmm¡­ Did I make him too strong? I never imagined he¡¯d win the magic tournament after only three years of learning magic. He¡¯s stronger than most elder disciples with just three years of training. He¡¯s absorbing advanced magic at an alarming rate; in a few more years, he might reach the level of the elders. I thought I shouldn¡¯t make him too overpowered, but he¡¯s already become excessively so. Moreover, considering the timeline ten years from now, he could overpower a Lubaran elder armed with top-tier serum and nano equipment. A Lubaran elder is nearly the strongest among intelligent beings, barring some giant monsters and a few powerful creatures¡­ No wonder Ubbo-Sathla is interested. Meanwhile, something interesting is happening to Yujin, who is diligently training. ¡°You arrogant Terra brat.¡± ¡°We don¡¯t know what trick you used, but it won¡¯t work this time.¡± A group of disciples of the Meias elders surrounded Yujin. Of course, Lowie Hendrick wasn¡¯t among them. Knowing Yujin¡¯s true identity as a fragment of an external god, he treated him with utmost respect. Among the group were many who had been thoroughly defeated by Yujin during the magic tournament. These fools, having been bested by magic, were now claiming he used tricks. They couldn¡¯t accept that a lowly Terra could defeat them with magic, so they concocted a ridiculous theory about trickery. ¡°The elders are only teaching you because of the tournament rules. They don¡¯t care about a lowly Terra like you.¡± ¡°Yeah, they¡¯ll probably teach you some basic magic and then kill you when the time comes.¡± Hmm¡­ I can¡¯t really deny this part. There are indeed elders who look down on Yujin because he¡¯s from the Terra race. About three of them. S?a??h the N?v?lFir?.n?t website on G??gl? to access chapters of n?vels early and in the highest quality. ¡­Three out of five is a majority. If you exclude Elder Jupiter, it¡¯s not just some; it¡¯s most of them. Anyway, these elders intended to teach Yujin some basic magic and then discard him. Some even thought about killing him to prevent the great magic of the Meias race from leaking. But who is Yujin? He¡¯s my fragment. Of course, he¡¯s aware of all this. He seemed to have already prepared countermeasures. Chapter 29: Dalos Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 29 Yujin¡¯s mana had already surpassed that of most elders. He originally had a large amount of mana, but learning magic had taught him how to accumulate even more within his body. Moreover, he had now learned advanced magic to a certain level, making his magic skills comparable to those of high-ranking mages. No, he was continuously growing, absorbing various types of magic like a dry sponge. He could use more types of magic than most high-ranking mages. In addition, his mana reserves were overwhelming, even surpassing those of the elders. If an elder attacked Yujin with the intent to kill, he could easily hold his own. Even if more than one elder attacked, Elder Jupiter could assist him. ¡®He has reached a level where he can fight back sufficiently.¡¯ Furthermore, Yujin was still growing. Not only in magic but also in physical abilities, thanks to the serum from the Lubaran race, making him as strong as a warrior. Even without my help, Yujin was becoming strong enough to survive on the Meias planet on his own. This meant that the elder disciples, who were nothing more than novices, coming in groups to provoke him, were not scary but merely annoying. S~?a??h the N?v?l(F)ire.n?t website on G??gl? to access chapters of n?vels early and in the highest quality. ¡°¡­Ha, is that all you have to say? Stop yapping and come at me all at once.¡± ¡°What, what?!¡± ¡°You filthy Terra brat!¡± The elder disciples charged at his provocation. ¡°Ice Lance!¡± ¡°Earth Drill!¡± ¡°Lightning Vortex!¡± Boom! Crash! Crackle! Despite being young disciples, their magic was on par with that of high-ranking Meias mages. However, to Yujin, who had abilities rivaling those of the elders, it was nothing. ¡°What, what?! It didn¡¯t even penetrate the shield¡­?¡± ¡°This is impossible! You, you bastard, are you using Lubaran nanomachines or electromagnetic field technology¡­?¡± Were they really attributing it to Lubaran technology? It was a shield created using mana energy. Well, it didn¡¯t really matter what they thought. With or without the shield, Yujin¡¯s body, enhanced by his basic specs and mana, would have suffered little damage from their attacks. ¡°Mass Gravity.¡± Boom!! ¡°Gah?!¡± ¡°Ugh¡­!!¡± Yujin used the advanced gravity magic he had learned from Elder Jupiter to subdue the disciples in one go. And that was the end of it. The situation was resolved in an instant. Yujin, having completely flattened the disciples, looked at them with disdain and left the scene. # ¡°It¡¯s about time to pass on the advanced magic.¡± This meant that Yujin was about to shed the label of a high-ranking mage and become an archmage. Those who learned the pinnacle of magic and explored its extremes. It was the highest position among the Meias race. The five elders, as well as other archmages, were all considered elder-level figures and received the highest respect within the Meias race. Yujin was about to become one of them. ¡°Already?¡± ¡°Indeed. It¡¯s only been a little over three years, and he¡¯s becoming an archmage. Ha ha ha.¡± Elder Jupiter chuckled, clearly impressed. Hmm¡­ Maybe I made him too overpowered. No, actually, these days, overpowered characters in refreshing stories are quite entertaining. While the elf planet offers the enjoyment of watching a civilization grow gradually, it doesn¡¯t provide the same exhilarating satisfaction as Yujin¡¯s story. They are different types of content that fulfill different kinds of enjoyment. While I was enjoying both types of content, something unusual was detected in space. Approximately 2 billion light-years away in Sector M. This is the sector where the Terra race¡¯s home planet, Earth, is located in this universe. There didn¡¯t seem to be any planets with life nearby, and it wasn¡¯t particularly dangerous. Although it was quite far away, this was a serious issue. Because something resembling an Outer God had appeared there. Given its location within the Galactic Union¡¯s territory, it would be detected immediately. It didn¡¯t seem to be making any effort to hide its presence, unlike me. Oh, damn¡­ If an Outer God suddenly appears in the neighboring sector, they might expand their investigation range to include this area. Its identity couldn¡¯t be determined immediately. In other words, it was an Outer God of a higher rank. Time to dig through the information I¡¯ve gathered from the multiverse. Hmm¡­ In other universes, it¡¯s known as Dalos or Daolos. It has a body made of an unknown metallic substance. Indeed, it has a metallic appearance. Of course, that can¡¯t actually be metal. An Outer God wouldn¡¯t have a physical body made of material substances in the first place. They are all entities that emerged from the ¡®void,¡¯ attaching concepts and existence to themselves. They just appear that way. Just as I made my body appear as an energy form, that thing made its body appear metallic. Anyway, the light reflected off the metal is distorted by the power of the void, driving those exposed to it insane. The loud noise and vibrations from the metal clashing are transmitted even in the vacuum of space, causing the heads of those who hear it to explode. As expected of an Outer God, it¡¯s a crazy entity that devastates its surroundings just by existing. But what¡¯s going on all of a sudden? It seems to be an Outer God with considerable power, even among the higher ranks. Why has it come to this universe? ¡°Damn it, what is it this time?!¡± ¡°Code Black near Galaxy M-093851 in Sector M!¡± ¡°What, what did you say?! Again?!¡± As expected¡­ the Galactic Union is in chaos again. If it were in a sector 10 billion light-years away, it would be one thing, but if it¡¯s in Sector M, which is almost adjacent to Sector G, this area might also become a target for investigation. Maybe it¡¯s okay since it¡¯s 2 billion light-years away. While I was thinking that, this crazy entity started moving closer to this area. It was creating a giant wormhole, making its approach very obvious. Could it be¡­ is it coming for me? This won¡¯t do. Before it crosses from Sector M into Sector G, I¡¯d better go to it. Otherwise, the Galactic Union might discover the existence of the elf planet. Well, even if they do, I can just erase their memories¡­ but still, there¡¯s that feeling. It¡¯s like a mischievous desire to keep something hidden, even if it doesn¡¯t matter if it¡¯s discovered. Anyway. I quickly moved to Sector M to confront the entity. Screeeech¡ªCrack! Ugh, it¡¯s so loud! Getting closer, the noise was overwhelming. I could understand why it was said to make people¡¯s heads explode. Moreover, its appearance was a complex geometric pattern that defied explanation by conventional astrophysics. It felt like it came from a higher dimension¡­ like the fourth dimension. Well, technically, that¡¯s correct. The void between multiverses is a higher dimension of the universe. Anyway, I confronted it and asked. [Who are you? Why are you coming here?] There was a warning implied in my question. It meant, don¡¯t come any closer. [So you were in this direction. I heard about you from ¡ö¡ö-¡ö¡ö¡ö¡ö.] So, it came looking for me after all. ¡ö¡ö-¡ö¡ö¡ö¡ö is a moniker that Outer Gods use to refer to Ubbo-Sathla. Well¡­ even if I say it, it¡¯s in an unintelligible language. But what did Ubbo-Sathla say about me that made this being, which had never been to this universe, come looking for me? [Let¡¯s move to the void. It¡¯s not good to stay here for long.] [Hmm? Why bother?] Of course, it¡¯s because your presence affects the surrounding universe! Do you have any idea how many dangerous creatures were exposed to the light and noise reflected off your body while you were traveling here? I managed to mitigate the damage, but if you stay here, it will have more severe consequences. Cleaning up after you is a hassle. [As he said, you are indeed curious. Caring about insignificant creatures.] From my perspective, it¡¯s you who are curious, not caring whether they live or die. Typical of an Outer God. [Be Quiet, follow me.] Too tired to explain further, I just grabbed it and escaped into the void. Since I had already temporarily disabled the Galactic Union¡¯s sensors when I met it, opening the void didn¡¯t matter. To the Galactic Union, it would seem as if the entity had suddenly disappeared. Quickly, I erased any records and memories to prevent them from discovering the elf planet during their patrols. In an instant, the Galactic Union returned to its peaceful, uneventful days. [So, what¡¯s the reason you came looking for me?] I asked the entity known as Dalos. What business did it have with me? If it¡¯s nothing important, I¡¯ll just turn it into a piece of metal art. [He boasted that you were a master at creating creatures and that you helped him. So, I came to seek your assistance as well.] [¡­¡­] Ubbo-Sathla, that bastard, spreading stories about me everywhere? He¡¯s making me lose any desire to help. So, this metallic entity wants to create its own creatures and came to me for advice? Why doesn¡¯t it just create them however it wants¡­ [Sigh¡­ Fine, let¡¯s hear it.] Annoying as it is, the idea of another Outer God creating creatures piqued my interest. So, I decided to at least listen to what it had to say. Chapter 30: Mechanical Lifeforms Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 30 [Why do you want to create lifeforms?] Considering it had heard stories from Ubbo-Sathla, I wondered if its goal was similar¡ªperhaps universal domination. If that were the case, I¡¯d have to ensure it didn¡¯t meddle with my universe. [It¡¯s purely out of interest. I want to observe how my creations live and thrive.] Ah, that¡¯s a relief. It seemed it wasn¡¯t aiming for universal domination. It appeared to view the universe as a giant terrarium, much like I did. Could it be lying? Outer gods don¡¯t have the concept of lying. They get whatever they want, so there¡¯s no reason for them to lie. As a human reincarnate, I might lie, but true Outer gods don¡¯t. So, that¡¯s how it is. If it¡¯s just observing leisurely, it might be okay to let it into my universe. Unlike Ubbo-Sathla, it wouldn¡¯t create monstrous creatures for domination, and being a high-rank, its powers might be slightly inferior to mine or Ubbo-Sathla¡¯s. [What kind of lifeform do you want to create?] This was crucial. It might suddenly want to create a monstrous species that could wreck the terrarium. Observing could mean watching the universe¡¯s destruction, after all. [I love metal. The existence of metal in the universe is incredibly beautiful. Especially iron and titanium¡­ strong and resilient metals. They are resistant to heat and, when alloyed¡­] [I see. So you want to create lifeforms made of metal, like yourself.] I quickly interrupted before it could launch into a full lecture on materials science. Well, I had somewhat expected it from its appearance¡ªlifeforms made of metal. When it comes to that, one thing immediately comes to mind. Cybertronians from TransforX! They were originally among the candidates for lifeforms I wanted to create. The thrill of metal clanking and transforming¡­ Ah~ Honestly, no man can resist that. It fits well with the sci-fi genre and setting of our universe. However, I dismissed the idea because I thought the Galactic Union would capture and dissect them. The Galactic Union appears cooperative and friendly towards intelligent lifeforms, integrating them into the Union and treating them well, but it¡¯s not as it seems. If they find something they deem necessary, they will capture, dissect, and study it. S?a??h the N0??F?re.n?t website on G??gl? to access chapters of n?vels early and in the highest quality. Especially the Lubaran race, created by Ubbo-Sathla for the purpose of universal domination, are quite selfish. If a new concept like Cybertronians, or mechanical lifeforms, were to emerge, they would definitely capture and dissect them. They would somehow procure a corpse in a somewhat humane way and dissect it. Then, they would try to understand the principles of mechanical lifeforms and mimic them. I suspect that the ¡®research lab¡¯ Yujin mentioned might be related to this. Anyway, I gave up on that idea because I didn¡¯t want to feel bad about having my technology stolen. ¡­But if someone else is creating them, it shouldn¡¯t matter, right? Honestly, I want to see it. Real, moving TransforX. Moreover, if they are placed near the elf planet, it could lead to a good storyline. Just like in the TransforX movie, Cybertronians could come to the elf planet and teach them mechanical technologies. Based on that technology, the elves could quickly undergo a mechanical revolution and reach modern civilization at a rapid pace. Yeah, it¡¯s better than me directly intervening. It would be a natural change in the cosmic flow. Moreover, if they maintain a cooperative relationship, it would be a mutually beneficial symbiosis. As the elves advance, even if they can¡¯t create mechanical lifeforms, they could at least repair them when injured. The elves would benefit from rapidly advancing their technology, and the Cybertronians would gain repair technicians and engineers. Dalos would achieve his goal of creating and observing metal lifeforms. I would get to see my dream of TransforX come to life and accelerate the technological progress of the elf planet. This is a true win-win situation. [How about something like this?] I proposed to Dalos, sending an image of TransforX into his mind. [Oh¡­ mechanical lifeforms that transform their bodies. They resemble the cars and spaceships created by the Lubaran or Terra races.] Fortunately, he seemed to understand it correctly. [But why do they need to be vehicles? The characteristic of body transformation doesn¡¯t seem necessary.] No, you idiot! He didn¡¯t understand at all! That¡¯s the essence of the dream! [And I don¡¯t understand the concept of the cube. Using an actual energy source for reproduction is inefficient. If it¡¯s lost or destroyed, the species would face immediate extinction.] No, the cube is the core of the dream! It can turn other machines into Cybertronians. Isn¡¯t that awesome? [That¡¯s what makes it great.] [Is that so? I don¡¯t understand. But if Ubbo-Sathla praised you highly, then your choice must be right.] Phew, it seemed he reluctantly understood the importance of the dream. ¡­But wait, doesn¡¯t this mean I¡¯m practically creating them myself? Maybe it would be faster if I just did it. No, no. There¡¯s a world of difference between creating something myself and having someone else create it. Still, it wouldn¡¯t be right to impose only my ideas¡­ [I just gave you an idea for metal lifeforms. Create them as you see fit.] [Understood. I¡¯ll take that into consideration.] Dalos seemed to ponder for a moment before moving to my sci-fi universe. Wait, what? Is he starting already? Hey, if you do that suddenly, the Galactic Union will detect you. You need to consider that! [Hold on.] [Why?] I stopped Dalos and warned him that if detected by the Galactic Union, they might come and place the newly created lifeforms under their control before they even had a chance to develop. [¡­? Then why not just eliminate them all?] ¡­Wow, that¡¯s a very Outer god-like statement. According to information from other universes, Dalos isn¡¯t particularly malevolent. Maybe that information was wrong. ¡­Or maybe not? Perhaps not capturing, dissecting, and experimenting on beings makes him less malevolent compared to others? [But then there would be no other lifeforms to interact with. Watching them interact with other beings, whether for better or worse, is also interesting.] [That¡¯s a good point. Interesting. Then I¡¯ll try to keep them hidden until they develop.] Fortunately, he seemed to understand my point. He transformed his body to blend with the universe¡¯s energy, then crossed back into the universe. He used his powers to temporarily disable detection or altered his body¡¯s composition to avoid being noticed. As expected of a high-ranking Outer god, he seemed capable of using various powers. However, he couldn¡¯t seem to give up his geometric metallic form. He really loves metal. Oh, but upon entering, it seemed the timeline was slightly off. We arrived in a time slightly ahead of when we disappeared. Approximately¡­ four years had passed. What?! That means¡­! Yujin¡¯s story had progressed by four years, and the civilization simulation had been running automatically without me for three years¡­?! Ugh¡­! I could go back to four years ago, but then I wouldn¡¯t be able to monitor what kind of Cybertronians Dalos was creating. If he created some insane monstrous species, I¡¯d need to intervene. ¡­Sigh, there¡¯s no choice. I¡¯ll just have to catch up on three years of story in one go. First, let¡¯s check if there are any immediate issues. Starting with Yujin. Three years plus four years, that¡¯s a total of seven years. There are still three years left until that incident. So, he should still be learning high-level magic without any major events¡­ [Ugh¡­ Ugh¡­] [Sigh¡­ You shouldn¡¯t have tried to kill me. Well, you almost succeeded, Elder Organ.] ??? Why is he killing an elder? ¡­This side is always surprising. I knew that elder had been plotting to kill Yujin, but I didn¡¯t expect him to actually attack and then get countered. I had anticipated it, but I didn¡¯t think it would actually happen. This isn¡¯t just a simple case of killing because of an assassination attempt. A Terra race outsider had killed one of the five elders of the Meias race. And he did it by overpowering him with magic. This is a serious problem. [¡­Huh. How should we handle this?] Even Grandpa Jupiter seemed extremely flustered. From the perspective of the Galactic Union, it wasn¡¯t that big of a deal. If an elder died, they would simply inform the Elder Council of the Galactic Union and decide on a new elder. As long as the new elder wasn¡¯t significantly weak in power or influence, the council would generally approve. But for the Meias race, especially those who prided themselves on their magical supremacy, this was a catastrophe. A Terra race outsider had absorbed magic like a sponge and, in just seven years, had grown strong enough to kill an elder? It was utter chaos. How this situation would be resolved¡­ was incredibly intriguing! Yujin, you¡¯ve become too powerful in just seven years, haven¡¯t you? To think you actually defeated an elder. As expected of my avatar. Chapter 31: Four Years Later Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 31 A lot had happened to Yujin over the past four years. He had learned the highest-level magic of the Meias race from Jupiter and, recognizing his immense potential, other elders and top-tier magicians had joined forces to teach him magic. ¡°This is unbelievable¡­ He is a once-in-a-millennium talent, even among the Meias.¡± ¡°To think he reached this level in just a few years.¡± ¡°A Terra race member¡­ Would you consider defecting to the Meias?¡± With their full support, Yujin rapidly mastered magic. The highest-level magic was incredibly difficult and complex, on a different level from what he had learned so far. But Yujin had the exceptional magical knowledge I had bestowed upon him. Moreover, his innate, immense mana capacity allowed him to practice extensively. His learning speed was so astonishing that even the elders, who were considered the most talented and skilled in the Meias race, were left speechless. However, there were still those who resented him. ¡°He¡¯s still a Terra race member. He¡¯s not one of us.¡± Elder Organ, known as the Magician of the Gentle Breeze, particularly disliked seeing the highest-level magic, considered the Meias race¡¯s secret, being handed over to Yujin. He had always looked down on Yujin and had even incited his and other elders¡¯ disciples to harass him. Of course, Yujin had always overwhelmed them with his superior skills. Eventually, unable to bear it any longer, Elder Organ took matters into his own hands, leading to a fierce battle where Yujin ultimately killed him. ¡°Tsk, this is troublesome.¡± ¡°Sigh¡­ The only fortunate thing is that we are in a secluded forest, and I am the only one who discovered this.¡± Grandpa Jupiter said, looking at Yujin. Elder Organ, an incredibly skilled magician on par with himself. Known for hiding terrifying mana blades within a gentle breeze that would tear enemies apart, Elder Organ earned the title of the ¡°Magician of the Gentle Breeze.¡± However, seeing Yujin, who had learned various magic from multiple magicians, overwhelmingly defeat Elder Organ, Grandpa Jupiter seemed quite shocked. He knew well that Yujin was a monster. After all, Yujin was my avatar, and in the beginning, I had moved directly through him. To Jupiter, Yujin would appear as an entity on par with me, an Outer God. But aside from that, Yujin had always shown himself as a Terra youth with a genius talent for absorbing magic like a sponge. Jupiter had just started getting used to that image, but witnessing such overwhelming power firsthand seemed to revive the awe he felt when he first encountered Yujin. No, back then, it was more of a fearful feeling, but now¡­ respect? It felt like he was seeing a great magician on a higher level than himself. ¡°If word gets out that Yujin dealt with him, it will be dangerous. Since everyone knows that Elder Organ was targeting Yujin, let¡¯s announce it and say that I killed him.¡± Grandpa Jupiter was planning to take the blame again. He intended to frame it as Elder Organ, driven by jealousy over Yujin¡¯s immense growth, attacking his disciple, leading to a deadly battle where Jupiter killed him. This way, they could paint Organ as the villain and hide the dangerous fact that a Terra race member killed a Meias elder. Of course, Jupiter would not escape criticism. No matter how talented his disciple was, he would still be criticized for killing a fellow Meias elder to protect a Terra race member. ¡°¡­This is annoying. Should I just wipe them all out?¡± Oh, Yujin¡¯s true nature is showing. That¡¯s the Outer God mindset¡ªif something is troublesome, just clean it all up! As expected of my avatar¡­ or not. Isn¡¯t that a bit too dangerous? It could turn the entire Meias race against him. Well, maybe not the entire race. Regardless, there would be those who support him, like Grandpa Jupiter or Lowie. And some elders who favored Yujin might also take his side. However, this was a significant issue that could potentially split the Meias race and even lead to a civil war. Even if it was self-defense, killing an elder was a serious matter. Following Grandpa Jupiter¡¯s suggestion seemed like the best course of action this time. ¡°¡­Tch. Let¡¯s do as Grandpa Jupiter says.¡± At that moment, my will was conveyed to Yujin through our connection. Yujin clicked his tongue in annoyance and said so. Oh, he¡¯s showing dissatisfaction. This guy, getting rebellious just because he¡¯s grown a bit stronger. Is this his rebellious phase? Anyway, we decided to handle it as Grandpa Jupiter suggested, and now it was time to check on the much-anticipated elf civilization simulation. Four years had passed. That equated to one year on the elf planet. I¡¯m excited to see how much they¡¯ve progressed. Did Lasi and Muwan successfully develop agriculture and transition into an agrarian society? What about the other elves? ¡­I¡¯m also curious about the cult group. With no answers or help from me for four years, the religious boom might have died down by now. Let¡¯s see what¡¯s happened. # ¡°Now then¡­ Let¡¯s begin the regular meeting of Lumolasi Village.¡± Lumolasi Village, huh. So that¡¯s the name they settled on for Lasi¡¯s village. In Lasi¡¯s language, it translates to ¡°Blessed Lasi.¡± Lasi managed to get that cheesy name approved, huh? And they¡¯re even holding regular meetings? The village leaders all had impressive titles. Lasi was the Village Chief. Next to her was Selian, the Harvest Chief, overseeing agriculture. Elma, the Warrior Chief, managed the village¡¯s guards and external scouts. Dro, the Construction Chief, was responsible for buildings and structures. Lastly, Rakus, the Production Chief, handled the creation of clothes, armor, and weapons. There were four key leaders in total. Wow¡­ They had already divided roles among the elves, assigning professions and establishing management positions. Lasi truly excelled at stabilizing the community. ¡°Let¡¯s start with the regular reports. Harvest Chief Selian, you go first.¡± ¡°Yes. I¡¯ll begin by discussing the seeds currently under cultivation and the crops being harvested.¡± Selian spoke while drawing and writing on a large piece of animal hide with a black chalk-like substance made from graphite. Unbelievable¡­ They had already mined graphite from the ground and made chalk from it? s?a??h th? n0v?l(?)ire.?et website on G??gl? to access chapters of n?vels early and in the highest quality. And despite the primitive method, they were essentially doing a presentation. Their vocabulary had also expanded and become more specialized over time. They were evolving in a surprisingly professional manner. ¡°Currently, we have about 200 days¡¯ worth of first-generation crops like Lumoru and Arimoru. Both can be harvested to some extent even during the Arow period, so this should be enough to last until the next Dimero period, considering the new births.¡± Dimero referred to the less hot days, essentially meaning spring. For reference, autumn was called Diero, meaning less cold days. So, they had 200 days¡¯ worth of food. Over the past four years, the population had grown to 1,300 with new births. Even though elves required less food, having enough to feed 1,300 people for 200 days meant their harvest was substantial. It was inevitable that the harvest would increase. Initially, they simply planted seeds. But once they established the role of Harvest Chief and assigned the farming duties to a few talented elves, they began tilling the soil, creating fertilizers from animal and their own waste, and so on. Agriculture was developing at an incredible pace. Naturally, the yield had to increase. And that wasn¡¯t all. ¡°We¡¯re currently experimenting with new seeds. This time, we¡¯re focusing on fruits. The cultivation methods seem a bit different from the first-generation crops, so we¡¯re still researching. We should be ready by next year.¡± They were also experimenting with tree fruits like apples and vine fruits like strawberries. If they could cultivate fruits, their diet, which primarily consisted of potatoes and lettuce, would become much more varied. ¡°Good. And¡­ are you preparing what we discussed earlier?¡± Lasi asked with a sharp gaze. Could it be¡­? ¡°¡­We managed to capture a few animals alive with the help of the warriors, but as you know, there were incidents where they broke through the fences and escaped. Despite providing water and food, they died shortly after. It¡¯s still quite challenging.¡± ¡°I see¡­¡± So it was about domesticating animals. With a surplus of food, it made sense to aim for livestock domestication. Even after four years, they hadn¡¯t succeeded yet. Well, capturing wild animals and raising them doesn¡¯t automatically make them livestock. This part would likely involve a lot of trial and error. But if they succeeded, they would gain a stable source of animal fats and proteins, as well as powerful labor. I hope they succeed in domesticating animals soon. Go, Selian! Let¡¯s upgrade the Agricultural Management Office to the Agricultural, Fisheries, and Livestock Management Office! ¡°Now then, Elma. You have something important to report. Please share it with everyone.¡± ¡°¡­Yes. Understood.¡± Next up was Elma, the Warrior Chief, who managed the guards and external scouts, known as the elf warriors. True to his title, Elma had a robust physique and chiseled features, quite unusual for an elf. Of course, he still had the elven charm, making him look like a muscular, sculpted handsome man with a strong presence. I wonder what the important report is about. I could easily scan the entire planet to find out, but hearing it firsthand would be more interesting, so I¡¯ll block out that information for now. Chapter 32: Discovery of Metal Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 32 ¡°¡­We encountered what appeared to be other elves in the forest, about a four-day journey to the west.¡± ¡°What? Other elves?¡± Elma¡¯s statement caused everyone to murmur in surprise. I see. Until now, they had been so focused on agricultural development that they hadn¡¯t encountered elves from other villages. Even though it had been four years, and many elves, including Muwan, had already started meeting and interacting with each other. Lasi¡¯s village had prioritized internal stability, which meant fewer people were sent out. Also, the geographical distance played a role. Even with elves¡¯ ability to walk through the night and the fact that a day on the elf planet was 36 hours long, it still took six days to reach the nearest village. Considering the distance, it was quite far. They had to traverse an undeveloped forest for several days with only a few warriors. It made sense that they hadn¡¯t found anyone in four years. But now, things had changed. They had encountered other elf villages. It seemed like the timing was perfect, as those elves had also started expanding their range of activities. ¡°We hid and observed them without being noticed¡­ It felt like there was a village nearby.¡± ¡°I see. Other elves.¡± Lasi seemed deep in thought upon hearing this. Naturally, she would be. Instinctively, she might know they could be friendly, but she couldn¡¯t be sure. As the village leader, she needed to make a cautious decision. ¡°Understood. They don¡¯t know our identity, right?¡± ¡°Yes, that¡¯s correct.¡± The other elves had not yet noticed their presence. Given the distance, it would be hard to discover them unless they intentionally went looking. With that in mind, they decided to hold off for now. ¡°Still, just in case, please strengthen the external patrols.¡± ¡°Understood.¡± With that, Elma¡¯s report concluded, and Dro, the Construction Chief, reported that more houses had been built for the elves. Construction techniques had evolved rapidly, moving from simple huts made of wooden poles covered with plants and leaves to proper wooden frames with walls solidified using a mix of mud and dried grass, creating earthen houses. Additionally, they had discovered a plant resin that acted like a glaze, preventing the mud houses from collapsing in the rain. In just four years, their construction technology had advanced significantly. Thanks to this, the elves could now live in homes that were almost impervious to wind and rain, allowing them to keep fires burning inside and live more warmly and safely. Finally, it was Rakus, the Production Chief¡¯s turn. I had a feeling this would be interesting. ¡°Regarding the special stone we discovered earlier, it seems it¡¯s not just an ordinary stone.¡± After discovering fire, the elves had tried all sorts of experiments to see what they could do with it. Recently, while mining graphite for writing, they had found a peculiar stone. A very shiny, greenish-yellow stone. When struck against a rock, it left a blue mark. Moreover, instead of breaking or chipping, the part of the rock it struck seemed to dent inward, like pressing into a fruit. Attracted by its unique beauty, they wondered if they could make tools from this stone. Since they were still using stone tools, they thought they could definitely create something with it. So, they brought the stone back and immediately put it into the furnace. The elves had learned that heating stones in the furnace before splitting them made the process much cleaner and easier. The furnace itself was originally created to maintain fire for long periods and quickly cook meat or crops. They built it using compacted mud, similar to how they constructed their homes. Although they didn¡¯t know the exact temperature, the furnace could reach up to 1400 degrees Celsius. When they placed the stone into the furnace, they were startled to see the greenish-yellow stone melt instead of merely heating up like other stones. Panicked, the elves quickly removed it, and as it cooled, the stone turned a more intense yellow. What could this be? A substance that melts when exposed to fire, loses its blue hue, and turns yellow. While the elves were seeing this for the first time, I knew exactly what it was. Copper. A smooth, yellow metal known for its excellent conductivity, commonly used in electrical wiring and various electronic devices. Its low melting point allowed some regions to enter the metal age earlier by creating bronze, an alloy of copper and tin, even before the iron age. It seemed they had stumbled upon a copper vein while mining for graphite. Actually, calling it a copper vein might be an understatement. I had designed this planet with an abundance of useful metals like copper, tin, iron, silver, and others. Copper veins were so plentiful that they could be found just by digging around a bit. Despite being softer than iron, copper was easier to work with in the early metal age and remained crucial for electronics later on, so I made it readily available. Had they finally discovered it? Finding it while mining for graphite was quite a serendipitous event. Moreover, I had also deposited a significant amount of tin nearby, which was relatively rare on Earth. If they found that, they could easily create bronze, a much stronger alloy, and quickly advance their metalworking capabilities. Well¡­ even without tin, they could still make tools from pure copper, then eventually discover iron and transition to the Iron Age with the help of a blast furnace. But discovering copper already? It took humanity on Earth roughly 4,000 years to move from the Stone Age to the Bronze Age, so this is almost 1,000 times faster? The ease of finding raw materials and the rapid growth of elf civilization must be factors. In any case, entering the metal age quickly would be beneficial. Whoever mastered metal first would essentially become the dominant force on the elf planet. Muwan and the other elves I had been keeping an eye on¡­ not yet, it seems. Considering that Lumolasi Village discovered copper while mining for graphite for writing, it makes sense they were the first. If Muwan had discovered it, he would have immediately crafted weapons from this metal, which is heavier, harder, and easier to work with than stone. ¡°It melted into a malleable state and then hardened again as it cooled, retaining its shape. The blue hue disappeared, and it turned a deeper yellow, becoming even harder.¡± ¡°I see¡­ It becomes easily moldable when heated and hardens again, even stronger?¡± Lasi, always focused on community stability, saw a different use for it. ¡°If it¡¯s harder and easier to work with than stone, we should try making farming tools with it.¡± She looked at Selian, the Harvest Chief. ¡°Stone sickles are hard to make and feel more like tearing than cutting. Plus, stone tools for tilling the soil break easily and are tough to use.¡± Indeed, as Lasi pointed out, stone farming tools were barely functional, just slightly better than using bare hands. But if they had a metal that was harder and easier to shape? They could make much better farming tools, significantly increasing work efficiency. ¡°It could also help in making weapons and shields for the warriors.¡± ¡°A stronger material would be great for making tools like hammers for construction, or sturdy clubs for cutting wood¡­¡± Warrior Chief Elma, not wanting to miss the opportunity, spoke up, and Construction Chief Dro did the same. Of course, copper was softer than iron and heavier, making it less practical in some ways. And since they hadn¡¯t reached the age of electricity yet, its full potential wasn¡¯t realized. But even so, it was far superior to using ground stone. If they could create various tools and arm their warriors with copper, they would gain an unimaginable advantage over other elves. ¡°There seems to be an abundance of this greenish-yellow stone, so we should be able to make everything you¡¯ve mentioned. But¡­ Rakus, do you think it¡¯s feasible?¡± Ultimately, it was up to Rakus, who oversaw the production of various tools, to decide. Fortunately, Rakus responded enthusiastically. ¡°It¡¯s perfect. The soul of a craftsman is burning within me. The fact that it becomes malleable and then hardens even more¡­ We can do so much with this.¡± s?a??h th? N?v?lFir?.n?t website on G??gl? to access chapters of n?vels early and in the highest quality. He was a production enthusiast with the soul of an artisan. Chapter 33: Metalian Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 33 The discovery of metal in Lumolasi Village. The advancement of agriculture and the potential for livestock farming. The seeds of dominion sprouting in the southern hemisphere. And¡­ ¡°Look there! The sun moves across the sky, shining upon us!¡± ¡°The gods are watching over us!¡± ¡°When the sun sets, small lights descend upon the darkened sky!¡± ¡°They are the agents of the gods! They watch over us while the gods rest!¡± ¡°Their positions change constantly! Look, after the cold season, the tree-shaped agent moved from the northeast back to the south.¡± ¡°The agents of the gods patrol the sky, circling around!¡± ¡°They move in cycles, so we can divide the year based on their positions!¡± ¡°Oh! They tell us when the cold and hot days will come! Truly, they are the agents of the gods!¡± ¡­These crazy cultists are developing astronomy based on their faith in me. And their understanding is eerily accurate. Even as a fanatical religious group, the high intelligence of the elves is evident. The elves are rapidly advancing in various fields. At this rate, they might enter the Iron Age and establish a proper nation within the next ten years. Speaking of which, I wonder how Dalos is doing. Shall I take a peek? It seems they are following my advice, creating a metallic planet for the metal-based lifeforms. The planet is quite massive, about twice the size of mine. Dalos¡¯s preferences are evident, with the planet¡¯s metal forming intricate geometric patterns. Since they are machine lifeforms, nearly all the resources making up the land are metal, with a strong magnetic field flowing through it. Using that powerful magnetic field to generate electrical energy and supply it to the machine lifeforms, huh? Interesting¡­ they¡¯ve put some thought into this. [How do you find it? I think I¡¯ve done a pretty good job.] Dalos communicated directly into my mind, aware that I was observing. [Creating the planet is a good start, but it¡¯s just a barren sphere for now.] Of course, as seen with TransforX, they don¡¯t necessarily need a star like the sun. The cube serves as their sun, energy source, and mother. But wasn¡¯t that concept discarded for being too inefficient and risky? [I plan to introduce a substance similar to the cube, something that can directly channel my power.] So, they decided to adopt that idea after all. However, it¡¯s not just a simple cube; it seems to be a materialized form of Dalos¡¯s power, acting as a conduit. Indeed, the cube¡¯s function in TransforX felt like it borrowed the power of a creator god. Perhaps the cube in TransforX was created with that intention? Not the cube¡¯s inherent power, but as a conduit for the creator god¡¯s power¡­ Anyway. If it¡¯s a material that directly channels divine power, there¡¯s no risk of it being stolen or destroyed. It can¡¯t be destroyed in the first place, and even if it were, as long as Dalos exists, it¡¯s directly connected to him and can regenerate. So, the high-risk factor is essentially nullified. A metallic planet and machine lifeforms, huh? It¡¯s certainly a dream come true. [It¡¯s time to create the lifeforms.] Ah, so now that the Cybertron-like planet is ready, it¡¯s time to create the Cybertronians to inhabit it. Let¡¯s see how he goes about creating them. In an instant, Dalos designed and created the lifeforms he had in mind. Their basic form was similar to typical humanoid races, with two arms and two legs, walking bipedally and using their hands to manipulate various tools efficiently. Their exterior was, of course, sleek metal panels. Internally, they were filled with intricate mechanical components befitting their robotic nature. Near the heart, there was an engine powered by electromagnetic fields, which provided energy to hydraulic systems that allowed the body¡¯s joints to move. Their size ranged from approximately 10 to 20 meters. Although quite large, they weren¡¯t excessively so, ensuring they could support their metal bodies. [I¡¯ve also included the transformation feature you mentioned. I thought it would be useful for them to transform into spaceships to navigate the universe.] Their default transformation setting was a spaceship. Depending on the environment and situation, they could transform into various mechanical vehicles such as cars, planes, ships, and submarines. Wow¡­ it¡¯s basically TransforX in all but name. [The name of this lifeform species will be¡­ Metalian.] Metalian! Metal humans, huh. The name itself is incredibly romantic. Given that they are born as robots, they won¡¯t need an industrial or cyber revolution; they¡¯ll inherently surpass all scientific and technological advancements. And their default transformation being a spaceship? While the species itself might not be overwhelmingly powerful, their ability to transform into state-of-the-art mechanical weapons gives them significant combat strength. Being robots, they would be almost god-like in mechanical engineering. However, their bodies, made of very delicate mechanical parts, would be vulnerable to external shocks and electromagnetic storms. But Dalos had already addressed this by equipping them with a magnetic shield that could constantly protect their entire body. Looking at them now, they do seem like a pretty overpowered species, don¡¯t they? Rather than being captured and dissected by the Lubaran, it might end up being the other way around¡­ But since I¡¯ve programmed them to be friendly unless attacked first, that shouldn¡¯t happen. The reason for this programming is, of course, the elves. I want them to naturally form an alliance with the nearby elves. Ideally, they would even visit the elf planet and spark a technological revolution there. With a bit of my help and Dalos¡¯s power, the Metalian planet, Metallica, was created. They¡¯ll need time to get used to their planet and settle in, so they won¡¯t be visiting the elf planet immediately. I wonder how many years it will take for them to stabilize. In the meantime, I¡¯m excited to see how much the elves will progress. Or will Yujin¡¯s attack on the Lubaran elder happen first? There are only about three years left until that scene unfolds. # The Death of Elder Organ This event caused significant controversy among the Meias tribe. Yujin, a Terra with immense magical talent. And Elder Organ, who despised and persecuted Yujin because he was a Terra. Eventually, Organ¡¯s resentment boiled over, leading him to ambush Yujin in a remote location to kill him. This resulted in a major conflict with Elder Jupiter, leading to Organ¡¯s death. It was a major incident. The Meias tribe split into two factions and began fighting fiercely. ¡°How can you justify killing a great Meias elder over a mere Terra?!¡± ¡°This is rebellion and terrorism! Killing an elder, no matter the reason, is unacceptable!¡± ¡°The Union won¡¯t stand idly by!¡± One faction was outraged that a fellow Meias, especially an elder, was killed just to protect a Terra. They vehemently argued that both Elder Jupiter and Yujin should be punished and exiled. The opposing faction had a completely different stance. ¡°We should recognize and accept magical talent and diversity, even from other races. It was Elder Organ¡¯s fault for attacking first out of petty jealousy!¡± ¡°Honestly, regardless of race, what kind of master would stand by while their disciple is attacked?¡± ¡°Elder Jupiter¡¯s actions were justified.¡± They believed that even if Yujin was from another race, his magical prowess and talent, proven by his tournament victory, should be acknowledged. Elder Organ¡¯s jealousy and attack were at fault. They argued that neither Elder Jupiter nor Yujin did anything wrong. Thus, the factions were fiercely clashing. ¡°¡­If only I were to leave, this would all be resolved. It¡¯s getting out of hand,¡± Elder Jupiter sighed deeply as he observed the chaos. The other elders shook their heads and responded. ¡°With Organ gone, there¡¯s already one vacant elder position. If you leave too, we¡¯ll have two vacancies. That¡¯s not ideal¡­¡± ¡°Once we appoint new elders to fill the vacancies, the fighting will die down soon enough. People are just excited by the sensational news, but it¡¯s temporary.¡± They didn¡¯t want Jupiter to leave. With one elder already dead, filling another vacant position would be no easy task. Given that Yujin¡¯s magical abilities were already proven, the consensus was shifting towards exonerating Jupiter, and the situation would likely calm down soon. ¡°I hope so,¡± Jupiter said, sighing deeply. The internal conflict among the Meias was trivial. S?a?ch* Th? N???lFire.n?t website on G??gl? to access chapters of n?vels early and in the highest quality. The real issue was external. This incident not only shook the Meias tribe but also spread news about Yujin throughout the Galactic Union, causing a complete uproar. While the magic tournament was just an event that would have made Yujin famous within the Meias tribe, the death of a Union elder¡ªespecially one from a powerful faction like the Meias¡ªwas significant enough to spread across the entire Galactic Union, bringing Yujin¡¯s story along with it. ¡°A Terra with magical talent?¡± ¡°They say a Union elder took him as a disciple!¡± ¡°He even won the magic tournament!¡± ¡°What?! I thought Terras could only manage low-level magic at best?¡± Thus, Yujin¡¯s existence became known throughout the Galactic Union, stirring up quite a commotion. Chapter 34: Missionary Activities Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 34 ¡°Elder James, have you seen this?¡± James Cobalt, the chief military officer of the Terra and one of the two Terra elders in the Union, was shown something on a tablet by his secretary. It was an article about a man who, despite being a Terra, had won the Meias tribe¡¯s tournament. ¡°Of course, I¡¯ve seen it. He¡¯s the most famous person right now.¡± Although the magic tournament was open to all species of the Galactic Union, it was essentially a Meias event. The Terra who caused an upset and won had completely overturned the perception that Terras could only manage low-level magic at best. Despite this, Terras still couldn¡¯t learn magic or anything of the sort. They lacked the innate ability to handle energy, and they didn¡¯t possess the advanced scientific technology of the Lubaran to create superior weapons or machines. They didn¡¯t have the strong exoskeleton and natural reproductive abilities of the Kapteri. They were a species that could only mimic what others had sown. Terras were seen as weak and insignificant. Despite their relentless efforts to improve their technological prowess and climb to a mid-upper rank within the Union, prejudice and discrimination against Terras persisted. ¡°Even a Meias elder was jealous and tried to kill him. How did we not know about such a person?¡± ¡°Well¡­ the Union did ask us to verify his identity some time ago.¡± ¡°And?¡± ¡°We couldn¡¯t find anything on our end. It was as if his records had been erased.¡± James tilted his head in confusion at his secretary¡¯s words. ¡°If his records were erased due to exile, there should have been a separate record of him as an exile. Could it be that he was considered dead long ago?¡± James tilted his head, puzzled. Yujin¡¯s records had been erased from the Terra¡¯s database, likely classified as deceased. However, such talent should have been known, yet there was no memory of him. ¡°Perhaps he was born secretly elsewhere to avoid being recorded.¡± ¡°Well, that¡¯s irrelevant now. Make contact with him. See if we can bring him over to our side since he¡¯s a fellow Terra.¡± James didn¡¯t care about Yujin¡¯s origins or records. What he wanted was Yujin himself. A formidable talent, envied even by the Meias elders, and a natural-born powerhouse. If they could recruit Yujin as a Terra warrior, it would significantly bolster their strength. Moreover, being the disciple of a Meias elder and the winner of the magic tournament, Yujin¡¯s presence could potentially forge a special relationship between the Terras and the Meias. With this in mind, James quickly instructed his secretary to make contact with Yujin. # Oh¡­ it seems the Terras are starting to move as well. Yujin¡¯s name has indeed become quite well-known due to this incident. Knowing Yujin¡¯s personality, he¡¯s likely to reject any offer to join the Terras. After learning magic from the Meias, he probably plans to travel the universe and become a true space adventurer. He¡¯s bound to stir up quite a commotion within the Galactic Union. Though, it might not be as significant as the upheaval caused by the emergence of the elves and Metalians. Meanwhile, in Lumolasi Village, they began digging for copper, hoping to find it in other locations as well. ¡°We¡¯ve discovered a silver-colored stone.¡± ¡°This one¡­ looks like a slightly reddish stone, but its smell and texture are somewhat unique.¡± In addition to tin ore, they found iron ore. They explored various places, including the village, surrounding forests, hills, and caves, discovering multiple veins of minerals. Thanks to the elves¡¯ keen senses, they quickly noticed that the ores had a distinct smell and appearance compared to ordinary stones. Iron ore, for instance, might just look like a slightly reddish stone at a glance. However, without a furnace to process it, the iron ore would likely remain unused and stashed away. Still, discovering it was a positive step. If they could achieve the necessary temperatures for extraction, they could quickly enter the Iron Age. While copper and bronze alloys are relatively easy to melt, extract, and cast, they are softer and heavier compared to iron, making them less versatile. For weapons and farming tools, iron is essential. Meanwhile, what¡¯s happening with Muwan? It seems they¡¯re focusing more on territorial expansion rather than various discoveries and inventions. ¡°Come on, let¡¯s plow the fields. This is where our food will grow.¡± ¡°Grr¡­¡± As expected, subtle social hierarchies were beginning to emerge. S?a??h th? ??v?lF?re.?et website on G??gl? to access chapters of n?vels early and in the highest quality. Although they hadn¡¯t formally established classes, their actions and speech suggested a division based on their roles. Muwan was akin to a king. Below him were the village overseers, a managerial class. Then there were the warriors, originally from Muwan¡¯s village, who became warriors due to their exceptional physical abilities. Next were the laborers who farmed or provided manual labor. And at the bottom, though not treated as slaves, were the outsiders from the highland village, who even the laborers could command. These outsiders handled almost all menial labor. Tsk tsk, wherever people go, hierarchies form, but to see it at the village level already¡­ Muwan certainly exudes the aura of a ruler and dictator. However, despite this, the people of Muwan¡¯s village lived very well. They enjoyed a prosperous and comfortable life, with abundant food grown in fertile soil. Thanks to the warrior class¡¯s exceptional hunting skills, there was no shortage of meat, ensuring a varied diet for everyone. Even the general laborers could enjoy meat two or three times a week, living in abundance. This was also true for the highland village elves, who were considered outsiders. Despite being treated as menial laborers, they were content with the bountiful meals they could never have imagined back in the highlands. Moreover, Muwan and the warrior class¡¯s aggressive territorial expansion had significantly enlarged the village. With many laborers, the houses were built large and sturdy. Even the outsiders lived in spacious, well-built homes and ate plentifully, so they had little reason to complain about Muwan¡¯s dictatorial rule. As they rapidly expanded their territory, they soon found themselves close to the highland village. If they continued to expand around the highland village, the two villages would eventually merge into one territory. Their territory had grown so large that it could be considered a small city rather than a mere village. With the influx of highland villagers and the birth of new children, their population was quickly approaching 2,000. With a large population, rapid expansion, a radical leader, and exceptional military strength, they had everything they needed. There would likely be no elf in the southern hemisphere capable of stopping Muwan now. ¡­Wait a minute. It seems something is happening with the cultists as well. Switching the perspective quickly to that side. ¡°What, what¡¯s this? Other elves?¡± A scouting party from an elf village near the coast had discovered the cultists. ¡°Oh! Outsiders! The gods have sent us outsiders!¡± ¡°Welcome, welcome the outsiders!¡± They joyfully greeted their fellow elves from afar. ¡­But seriously, if they keep screaming and dancing like that, the newcomers will run away in fear! ¡°These people are strange¡­¡± ¡°Look at that¡­ they even built a bizarre statue¡­ Are they a group of lunatics?¡± See, I knew it. They¡¯re being treated like a bunch of crazies. ¡­Or so I thought. ¡°Oh, great six-handed elf god!¡± ¡°Bless our scouting party and our village!¡± ¡°The outsider is with us! Let us all pray together!¡± ¡°Oh, god¡­¡± ¡­¡­ Damn, they¡¯ve been indoctrinated. The scouting party from the coastal village got indoctrinated by this crazy cult, learning their language, rituals, and prayers to their god. They even became fanatics, joining in their dances. Oh, for crying out loud, this is insane. Did I ever include such fanatical elements when I set up the elves? Or did they develop this on their own¡­ Anyway, this might be a serious issue. Cults are dangerous once they take hold, but I never expected them to spread this easily. If this keeps up, these lunatics might spread across the entire planet, turning all the elves into a crazy cult. Should I pretend to be a god and tell them to tone it down¡­? No, that would only make them crazier. They¡¯d think the god has spoken to them directly and go even more berserk. They¡¯d twist my words to mean that their faith isn¡¯t strong enough! They¡¯d start spreading their fanaticism even more fervently. ¡°Let¡¯s go to your village together! It¡¯s blasphemous that you¡¯ve lived without knowing the god¡¯s existence and blessings!¡± ¡°Yes, let¡¯s go to our village! The villagers will be overjoyed to learn about the god¡¯s existence and will join us in prayer!¡± Oh no! Those lunatics are actually going to evangelize to another village¡­! What should I do? ¡°Oh, great six-handed elf god!¡± ¡°Almighty Creator!!¡± ¡°Guide us on our path!!¡± ¡­Sigh. I give up. If they want to believe in a god, let them. Our elf planet supports freedom of religion¡­ Chapter 35: Space Pests Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 35 ¡°Fire is a gift bestowed by the God! This liveliness, this heat! It is a great gift given with the hand of fire among the six hands!¡± ¡°But, but we lit the fire ourselves¡­¡± ¡°You blasphemous beings! It is because the God bestowed it upon us that we can create fire with our feeble strength!¡± ¡°Is, is that so¡­?¡± No, why are they convinced? Fire is just a natural phenomenon. Well, if you consider the laws of physics in the universe as a God, then it makes sense¡­ Right now, I am witnessing in real-time how a cult expands its influence and increases its followers. They enchant people with seemingly plausible stories, making them believe. Well¡­ the difference is that real cults have leaders who lie to exploit people. These guys genuinely believe in the six-handed elf God. Fire is a sacred thing bestowed by the God. The hand of judgment strikes lightning, and the hand of fire embraces it to create fire. ¡­They seem to attribute every natural phenomenon to the God¡¯s hands. At this rate, they might end up with a hand for storms, a hand for the sea, a hand for water¡­ and eventually, they might have more than six hands, like the thousand-armed Avalokiteshvara. What¡¯s scarier is that these guys¡­ learned the coastal village¡¯s language in an instant, claiming they wanted to spread the God¡¯s greatness. If they couldn¡¯t communicate, they couldn¡¯t proselytize. ¡°Is that the sea? It looks like a very large pond.¡± ¡°We don¡¯t know its end. It is vast and deep.¡± ¡°Moreover, it tastes salty. When it dries up, it creates sea powder, which is very delicious when sprinkled on fish or food.¡± ¡°We can offer a new sacrifice to the great God!¡± They just learned about the existence of the sea and salt, and that¡¯s all they have to say? The potential changes in diet, the advent of trade¡­ The possibilities of what they could do with the sea are endless. Well, these guys would probably take a small boat and sail across the sea just to spread the greatness of their God. Wasn¡¯t the name of that fanatic leader ¡®Rodri¡¯? I had almost forgotten his name, thinking of him as just the leader of these crazy people. Anyway, I have a feeling this guy will go all the way. He doesn¡¯t have the exceptional skills and charisma of someone like Lasi or Muwan, but¡­ somehow, he seems likely to build a similarly large force. It shows that it¡¯s not just the smart and charismatic ones who succeed. Muwan¡¯s tyranny, Lasi¡¯s technology, and Rodri¡¯s religion¡­ It feels like an interesting three-way battle is about to unfold. # Galactic Union The Galactic Union is the largest organization in the universe, managing an area approximately 20 billion light-years in diameter, divided into 24 sectors. Considering that the observable universe¡¯s diameter is roughly 100 billion light-years, it¡¯s relatively small, but still, the Galactic Union is the only entity managing such a vast space in the entire universe. Of course, the Galactic Union does not perfectly control the entire 20 billion light-year diameter area. There are certainly unexplored spaces and several species that they have not brought under their control. Most of the time, they accepted hostile species by either annihilating them or inflicting near-annihilation damage before persuading them. However, there were species they couldn¡¯t subdue. The ¡®Kapteri¡¯ species, led by the Lubaran, is the only blemish on the Galactic Union¡¯s record. The Kapteri use their naturally extremely hard exoskeletons for both defense and offense, and their terrifying reproductive speed means that no matter how many are killed, they always manage to multiply somewhere else. Their exoskeletons are so formidable that unless plasma weapons or nano-particle weapons developed by the Lubaran are used, it¡¯s difficult to inflict significant damage. Even if just one survives, it will escape to another part of the universe, consume the resources of another planet, and reproduce again. They are truly like incredibly tough cockroaches that tear people apart. The Lubaran and the Galactic Union have been striving to annihilate these pest species that only bring harm to the cosmic society. However, they always manage to let a few escape, which then reproduce, and when they are found and killed, they escape and reproduce again¡­ The astonishing part is that these creatures, which seem to act purely on instinct, actually possess a high level of intelligence. Along with their incredibly fast reproduction, another remarkable trait is their rapid evolution. Newly born larvae are mere instinct-driven monsters, but within a few years, their brains develop enough to enable some level of thinking. By the time they are ten years old, these monsters possess intelligence comparable to most other species. From that point, their characteristics and intelligence levels vary depending on their evolutionary paths. Those that evolve focusing on their brains become commanders issuing orders, while those that evolve focusing on their exoskeletons become frontline assault troops. When they were first discovered, nearly fully evolved ones were swarming. There were colossal Kapteri that could devour entire buildings, flying ones, those that ambushed from underground, and even supreme commanders with intelligence surpassing the Lubaran. Although now they have been reduced to being perceived as mere space pests, initially, the Lubaran had to wage a war risking everything. Fortunately, the Galactic Union was already being established, and with the help of other species, they managed to win the war. If it had been just the Lubaran, they would have surely lost to the overwhelming numbers. However, the war with them was not over yet. ¡°Kirik. Kruruk.¡± ¡°Kikikik¡­¡± The Kapteri, now reduced to mere space pests, continued to evolve as they fled. Lifeforms inherently evolve more rapidly when faced with drastic environmental changes and crises. At some point, the Kapteri began to be born with intelligence comparable to most species right from their larval stage. Their evolution accelerated further, and they developed the patience to hide rather than seek resources to grow stronger. The Kapteri, born with an instinct to devour the life and resources of planets, exhibited an astonishing level of patience. Using this patience, they hid and began to increase their numbers. In the uncharted regions where the hateful eyes of the Union did not reach, particularly in the secluded corners of Sector G, they started to expand their forces. ¡°Kikikik¡­ Revenge.¡± ¡°Union scum. We will devour them all.¡± They prepared for the day when they would exact their revenge on the Union. # S?a?ch* Th? N0v?lFire(.)n?t website on G??gl? to access chapters of n?vels early and in the highest quality. Oh, damn. What is this? In the seven years we ignored this area, those pests laid eggs on nearby planets. The Kapteri, with their exoskeletons, incredible reproductive rate, rapid evolution, and high intelligence, are indeed a troublesome species. They are born to wander the universe, consuming all life and resources they find¡ªtrue pests. It seems they are hiding and building their numbers. If they burst out, our Elf planet and Metallica will be in danger. Given their alarming rate of evolution, in 20 to 30 years, they could grow to the scale that once threatened even the Lubaran. At that level, it would be too difficult for the Metalians or Elves to respond. The Metallica might hold out for a while, but the Elves certainly wouldn¡¯t. Some have just entered the metal age, while others are still using stone tools. I don¡¯t think we can defeat creatures that once threatened the Lubaran in just 30 years. The Metalians might endure, but the Elves definitely won¡¯t. Just to be safe, we should consider annihilating the planets entirely. The Galactic Union¡¯s eyes don¡¯t reach this far, so they wouldn¡¯t notice a few missing planets. That¡¯s probably why the Kapteri settled here. Unfortunately for them, the location is a bit¡­ bad. Currently I¡¯m building a civilization right next to them. Just wait a bit, guys. I¡¯ll go over there and burn their nest. There are five planets in total. To be honest, they¡¯re no longer planets, but rather a complete breeding ground for pests. I didn¡¯t want to use my powers when building a civilization, but I just can¡¯t stand having a cockroach nest near my home. It seems they¡¯re determined to take revenge on the Union and are increasing their numbers. I feel a bit sorry for them, living with the determination to take revenge¡­ No, I don¡¯t. Pests must be eradicated! They¡¯re just useless beings in this universe, consuming planetary resources and devouring the life forms that inhabit them. You guys, I¡¯ll teach you what cosmic horror truly is. You¡¯ll feel the overwhelming power of the universe¡¯s Outer Gods, which even a tiny insect like you can¡¯t resist! Haha, finally, I¡¯ll get to do something cosmic horror-like. Since I¡¯m doing it, I¡¯ll make sure to do it in a terrifying way. I didn¡¯t like insects even in my past life. Mosquitoes, cockroaches, flies¡­ Ugh, just hearing about them makes me uncomfortable. The insects in my past life didn¡¯t have intelligence, so they couldn¡¯t feel fear, but these guys, with their high intelligence, will feel the overwhelming threat and fear. Kuhuhu, I¡¯ll add my past anger to make them suffer as much as possible and make them tremble with fear. It¡¯ll be a great stress reliever. Chapter 36: Extermination of Pests Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 36 The current commander of the Kapteri tribe had dispersed his subordinates across five planets, instructing them to remain hidden. This was to increase their numbers and prepare for the future. Here, they wouldn¡¯t be discovered. No dangerous events would occur. Although the area was within the influence of powerful gamma rays and energy storms due to the aftermath of a supernova, this was not an issue for the Kapteri tribe, who were specialized in radiation and space environments. They just needed to endure for several decades. ¡­That was what they thought. s?a??h th? N?v?lFire.n?t website on G??gl? to access chapters of n?vels early and in the highest quality. It appeared on the planet they had hidden on, at some point. A massive shadow emerged, blocking the intense light caused by the supernova¡¯s aftermath. Its size was so immense that it covered the entire planet. Amazingly, it was moving. Its tentacles extended from its gigantic body, writhing here and there, while its enormous, blood-red eyes gazed down at the planet. ¡°Kkik¡­ kkeugeuk.¡± The moment the commander of the Kapteri tribe met those red eyes, he thought, ¡®Ah, the end has come for our species.¡¯ An absolute end that could never be defied. An unimaginably deep abyss. An inevitable death was staring at them. The Kapteri tribe froze in place. Normally, upon sensing a crisis, they would all enter a state of alert and either engage in battle or flee into space to find another safe place to reproduce. But they couldn¡¯t move. The commander couldn¡¯t even issue an order to move. No, it wasn¡¯t that he couldn¡¯t; it was that it would be meaningless. His instincts as a living being told him there was no way to escape from that thing. No matter what they did, it would be futile. The moment they were discovered, their annihilation was certain. The moving end of the world, the eyes of termination. All they could do was wait. It simply stared down at them without a word, but it was merely toying with them. The moment its curiosity ended would be the end of the Kapteri tribe. Just as they were thinking that, Kiieeeeeng©¤ ¡°Geueeek!¡± ¡°Geuek!¡± ¡°Kraaaak!¡± Suddenly, the commander¡¯s head began to ache intensely. It was an extreme pain he had never felt in his life. It felt as if dozens of tiny Kapteri tribe members were madly burrowing and gnawing inside his head. The pain was so severe that he wished he could just die. Not only the commander but also the other Kapteri tribe members seemed to be experiencing the same pain, as they all screamed and rolled on the ground. It wasn¡¯t hard to realize that it was the doing of the massive entity before them. It could kill them instantly but chose to toy with them instead. Out of mere curiosity, it inflicted terrible pain upon them. ¡®Just kill us already¡­!¡¯ The commander of the Kapteri tribe wanted to shout this, but he couldn¡¯t utter a word. It wasn¡¯t just because of the excruciating headache. The despairing realization that speaking would be utterly futile also sealed his lips. They could only hope for a swift and painless death. # Oh, that won¡¯t do. Considering the crimes you might commit in the future, you deserve at least a thousand years of suffering¡­ Hmm, but is it right to punish you for something you haven¡¯t done yet? No! Think about the countless space species and planets you¡¯ve harmed over the centuries. Consider this your punishment! Yes, even when I used to catch mosquitoes or flies, I would torture them alive, channeling the anger from all the pests that had ever bothered me. I¡¯d cut off their wings or snouts, making sure they stayed alive to suffer as much as possible. Well, I don¡¯t know if those creatures felt pain, but honestly, I think pests like mosquitoes and flies deserve such treatment. So do you. You deserve this! Moreover, since you¡¯re an intelligent species, you¡¯ll definitely feel the pain. That¡¯s even better. ¡°Keeek!¡± ¡°Kieeek!¡± Hmm, it seems the fragile larvae are barely hanging on with just a bit of mental collapse. Well, considering the mental contamination caused by directly witnessing my true form, it¡¯s impressive they didn¡¯t die immediately. The resilience of pests, indeed. Since there are so many of them anyway, let¡¯s take this opportunity to eliminate all the ones scattered across the other planets and leave only the ones on this planet where the commander is. There were too many larvae, and they were bothersome, so I decided to let them all die. I would take only a few survivors, including the commander, and imprison and torment them. ¡­Hmm, but am I being too cruel? Honestly, as an Outer God, this level of cruelty is somewhat expected, but I still feel a twinge of guilt due to my human ethics. Even though they are cosmic pests, is it right to torment them this much when they haven¡¯t harmed me directly? ¡­Then again, what ethics do I need to uphold when I¡¯ve already created life? As an Outer God, what could they possibly say to me? It¡¯s not like other Outer Gods would criticize me. If anything, they are worse than me. I once glimpsed some information about Nyarlathotep¡¯s experiments and dissections on living creatures from another universe¡­ If I could vomit in this form, I would have. Anyway, I¡¯m actually being quite kind by dealing with these nasty pests. I¡¯m probably doing a great favor to my cosmic friends by exterminating an entire species of space cockroaches. Crack¡ª Crunch! First, I annihilated the four planets completely overrun by the Kapteri tribe, along with all the Kapteri on them. I then confirmed the death of the larvae, which were bleeding from every orifice. I captured a few surviving evolved forms and the Kapteri tribe commander, imprisoning them in a giant insect collection container. The container was about 10 kilometers in size, large enough to accommodate even the building-sized Kapteri. Now, I would torment them just enough to keep them alive. To prevent any accidental escape that might harm the elves, I placed them in a separate subspace. By slightly distorting the space of the universe¡­ Okay, a perfectly isolated subspace was created, where no external influence could reach except his own. Another source of amusement was added to my collection, along with civilization simulations and space opera dramas. Helping the Galactic Union friends and gaining entertainment¡ªwhat a wise way to live as an Outer God. # It created a vast, transparent space and imprisoned the surviving dozens of Kapteri tribe members, including the commander. ¡°Krugh¡­ Kieek¡­¡± As they were confined within the space, the excruciating headache vanished. However, trapped in the narrow space, they were transported somewhere unknown. They couldn¡¯t tell where they were. It was pitch-black darkness, with no starlight, radiation, or gravity. It felt like an empty void. No, even a void wasn¡¯t devoid of the energy that filled the universe. But here, it was truly ¡¯emptiness¡¯ itself. A space where nothing could be felt. The only things present were the massive transparent case, about 10 kilometers in length, that imprisoned them, and the dozens of Kapteri tribe members inside it. They could do nothing but remain helplessly trapped within. In this void of no energy and no sense of time passing, the Kapteri tribe began to tremble in fear. They had no idea when or where it would return to inflict pain upon them again. They wished it would just kill them quickly. They envied the larvae whose brains had melted and died, and their kin who had perished along with the other planets. As they shivered in terror, thinking this, [Shall we start with some cold torture? I wonder at what temperature you¡¯ll freeze?] A voice directly entered their minds. ¡°Keeek!¡± ¡°Kieeek!!¡± Just hearing that voice made the Kapteri tribe members writhe in agony, their six legs twitching uncontrollably. The voice felt as if it was directly drilling into their brains, pounding them relentlessly. Even though it was merely conveying words, the pain was unbearable. But that was just the beginning. As it had said, the cold torture began, and the surroundings started to grow colder. The Kapteri tribe could survive in the vacuum of space, enduring extreme temperatures. However, the problem was that this place went beyond the absolute zero of space. The temperature dropped even lower. Theoretically, at absolute zero, the entropy of a substance becomes zero, meaning the temperature cannot drop further. But here, such laws did not apply. The motion of molecules came to a complete halt. All physical movement ceased. It was a state of complete freezing. In this absurd phenomenon, defying the physical laws of the universe, the bodies of the Kapteri tribe began to freeze. It wasn¡¯t just freezing; the molecular motion stopped entirely, causing the material to solidify and start to disintegrate. From the edges, everything slowly stopped, and the sensation of everything gradually collapsing was something they couldn¡¯t even feel. They couldn¡¯t comprehend what was happening to them. It was a space where everything had come to a halt. [Oops¡­ Maybe that was a bit too much.] Yet, even in such a state, its voice was heard clearly. And immediately after, ¡°Kehk! Guh¡­ urgh¡­¡± ¡°Ugh¡­ ugh¡­¡± The surrounding temperature returned to normal. At that moment, the molecules began to move again. The biological clock started ticking, and the frozen, disintegrating bodies regained their sensations. The unimaginable, excruciating pain was like having their bodies petrified and shattered into pieces. Even the shattered fragments of their bodies sent signals to their brains, causing an unbearable agony that felt like their brains were burning. More than half of the Kapteri tribe died from shock, unable to withstand the pain. These beings, known for their extraordinary vitality, were killed by the unbearable agony. The surviving Kapteri tribe commander thought to himself, ¡°This is impossible. I can¡¯t endure this. Do I have to repeat this torture until I die?¡± Considering the previous comment, ¡°That was a bit too much,¡± it was clear that the intention was to torment them without killing them. This was unbearable. The Kapteri tribe commander, thinking desperately, forced out a voice that didn¡¯t want to come out and begged, ¡°Oh, great and mighty being¡­! I will be your faithful servant¡­ Please, please release us¡­ Free us from this pain¡­¡± He wept, pleading desperately for their release. Of course, the sight of a massive, grotesque crustacean-like creature begging in a pitiful, whining voice was more likely to evoke disgust than sympathy. Chapter 37: Yujin’s Dilemma Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 37 Oh¡­ You shouldn¡¯t be making such a fuss over just one instance. You¡¯re quite the drama queen. Hmm, I admit I might have gone a bit overboard just now. I nearly killed you. Should I leave you alone for a while as an apology? Anyway, escaping from there on your own is impossible. ¡°Great being, please release us. Or just kill us¡­¡± Seeing a giant arthropod that looks like a mix between a beetle and a king crab crying like that is more disgusting than pitiable, but on the other hand, I do feel a bit sorry for them. Honestly, these guys haven¡¯t caused that much harm, just running away from the Galactic Union all the time. Torturing them this much might be excessive. Ugh, this is why bugs shouldn¡¯t talk. When they do, it creates emotional exchanges. And when there¡¯s emotional exchange, even these grotesque creatures start to seem a bit pitiable and cute. Have I finally gone mad? Has the mental collapse of an Outer God affected me as well? Or maybe, by Outer God standards, they are cute. I¡¯ll think about what to do with them later. Even if releasing them is out of the question, I could at least bind them to me and use them as subordinates. It¡¯s not so much procrastinating as it is taking my time because it doesn¡¯t really matter what I do. This sense of leisure and omnipotence is what being a god is all about. [Hello. Are you Yujin?] [Ah yes, hello.] Oh, an event occurred on Yujin¡¯s side in the meantime. A delegate from the Terra tribe had arrived on the planet of the Meias tribe, where Yujin was staying. I quickly switched the channel to focus there. # James Cobalt, the elder and chief military officer of the Terra tribe, had sent one of his high-ranking officers to Yujin. The officer, named Rigel Dorch, was roughly equivalent to a colonel in his previous life¡¯s military rank. He was a man in his 40s, quite large in stature, and exuded a strong ¡°tough soldier¡± vibe. ¡°To meet the one who flattened the noses of those Meias tribe wizards despite being from the Terra tribe, it¡¯s an honor.¡± ¡°Yes, well¡­¡± Yujin¡¯s response was indifferent compared to the compliment. It was understandable since the meeting had cut into his magic training time. ¡®I need to learn magic as quickly as possible.¡¯ Although Yujin didn¡¯t have a grand goal, he was very interested in magic and had a strong desire to master it. Therefore, he disliked anything that interrupted his magic lessons. The arrival of Rigel from the Terra tribe had reduced that time, which annoyed him. One might think he could have just refused the meeting, but since Rigel was sent directly by the Terra tribe¡¯s elder, it seemed to involve some political implications. If Yujin refused, it might cause trouble for Elder Jupiter. The Meias tribe was already divided because of Yujin, and if the Terra tribe, including Elder Jupiter, started causing problems, it would be like pouring oil on a fire. Given these circumstances, Yujin had no choice but to meet with Rigel to avoid causing trouble for Jupiter. ¡°Well, I don¡¯t like to beat around the bush. Let¡¯s get straight to the point.¡± ¡°¡­ ¡­¡± Yujin¡¯s expression grew even more indifferent, as he could easily predict what the main point would be. ¡°Join the Terra tribe. No, to be precise, join the Terra tribe¡¯s military. We promise you the best treatment.¡± A recruitment attempt. It was so obvious. The Terra tribe wanted to recruit Yujin, the sensational wizard born from their tribe, to garner public support and bolster their military strength with the much-needed special unit of wizards. Additionally, they harbored the vain hope that by uncovering the secret behind Yujin¡¯s strength, they might be able to train wizards within the Terra tribe in the future. Magic, after all, didn¡¯t require particularly expensive equipment and could produce immense power purely through one¡¯s accumulated energy and skill. It was a highly coveted ability in the militaries of various species. Naturally, the Terra tribe was no exception. However, their magical talent as a species was abysmal. The arrival of Yujin, a beacon of hope, was enough to tempt them. Of course, regardless of their intentions, Yujin¡¯s answer was already decided. ¡°No, I¡¯m not joining the military.¡± The military? Even if it was the human military? Ugh, no way. Only bad memories came to mind. Naturally, for Yujin, who shared some of my memories, the military was an instinctively avoidable institution. Sure, that was the Korean military I was in, and it was a conscription system, so the feeling would be entirely different. Moreover, Yujin would likely receive excellent treatment and enter as a high-ranking officer¡­ but still, the military was a no-go. Even without bad memories, Yujin wouldn¡¯t join any specific organization. Yujin¡¯s goal was to travel around the universe, fully enjoying the sci-fi world as a space adventurer. Being part of any organization would inevitably lead to being bound by it. That was something to be avoided as much as possible. Sure, a sci-fi space military drama might be interesting, but ultimately, the choice was Yujin¡¯s. Though he was technically a doppelganger, he was now practically an independent entity. He should be allowed to act according to his own will. ¡°Haha, think it over carefully. The Meias tribe is already in chaos because of you. Even those who support you do so not out of affection but merely to acknowledge diversity. They are more hostile than friendly towards you.¡± Despite Yujin¡¯s refusal, Officer Rigel didn¡¯t give up and began to say various things to persuade him. ¡°No matter how talented you are in magic, you won¡¯t receive proper treatment in a place that discriminates against your race. Elder Jupiter may be looking after you now, but it¡¯s clear that when push comes to shove, their loyalty will lie with their own kind.¡± In simpler terms, he was saying that Yujin wouldn¡¯t have a good time here due to racial discrimination and should come with him to the Terra tribe to become a hero of his species. This persuasion was entirely ineffective on Yujin, who had no interest in being a hero or in racial discrimination. ¡°I¡¯m not particularly interested. Whether it¡¯s the Terra tribe or the Meias tribe¡­ I¡¯ll just go my own way, and you should go yours. Just like it has been so far.¡± Yujin was born with a Terra tribe base, but he wasn¡¯t truly a Terra tribe member. Strictly speaking, he was a creation of an Outer God, a completely new species. A hybrid of the Terra and Meias tribes. Thus, any attempt to appeal to a sense of racial solidarity was futile. ¡°Hahaha, your tone is quite rude.¡± ¡°Well, who was the one being rude by speaking informally right from the start?¡± As the two argued, an aura began to subtly emanate from them. They began a battle of auras, a contest of intimidation. Oh¡­ a pathetic duel. Usually, fights are said to be interesting when it¡¯s a close match, but in this case, it¡¯s clear who is the weaker party, making the outcome predictable and unexciting. ¡°¡­Ugh.¡± As expected, the result of the contest was an overwhelming victory for Yujin. After all, who would be stronger? The one with an immense amount of mana energy stored within or the one who fought on the battlefield with a scientifically inexplicable and clumsy murderous intent? ¡°I shall take my leave for now. Consider my proposal and respond at your convenience. Here¡¯s my contact frequency.¡± ¡°Hmph.¡± Officer Rigel left in a hurry, his face flushed red with embarrassment and anger at being overpowered by a much younger man who seemed to be an incredible magician. ¡®This young brat dares to look down on me? Me, who is directly under Elder James?¡¯ Oh, is he thinking of revenge? This kind of scenario is common in fantasy novels. A noble or knight with a bruised ego goes tattling to someone higher up to put the protagonist in a difficult situation¡­ something like that. Of course, such tactics wouldn¡¯t work on Yujin. ¡°Haah¡­ This is so annoying. I need to learn magic quickly and get out of here.¡± S?a?ch* Th? N0??F?re.n?t website on G??gl? to access chapters of n?vels early and in the highest quality. Yujin sighed deeply and then suddenly shifted his gaze, looking at something in the void as if he could see something beyond the invisible space. ¡­?? What is he doing? It¡¯s as if he¡¯s looking at something that¡¯s not there¡­ ¡°Original being, are you watching? Even if you¡¯re not, you¡¯ll eventually hear about it. You know everything that happens in the universe, after all.¡± What? Is he trying to talk to me all of a sudden? Was he looking at me beyond the void? Hey! What are you doing, breaking the fourth wall like that? There haven¡¯t been any descriptions or foreshadowing of this until now. While breaking the fourth wall isn¡¯t unheard of these days, doing it so abruptly can make viewers uncomfortable. Oh, right, I¡¯m the only viewer here. But why is he suddenly talking to me? Does he need something? ¡°I plan to become a space adventurer and travel to various places in the universe. But¡­ is that truly my will? Or am I just a puppet moving according to the subconscious thoughts implanted by the original being?¡± ¡­Hmm, it seems that through his conversation with Officer Rigel, Yujin realized that he doesn¡¯t belong to either the Terra tribe or the Meias tribe. He feels like a solitary existence. Has he started questioning his own existence and purpose? Indeed, he is a doppelganger I created, and his personality is almost a direct copy of mine. Honestly, it¡¯s hard to say that everything is Yujin¡¯s own voluntary choice. ¡­But there¡¯s nothing I can do for him. I¡¯ve decided to treat Yujin as a completely independent entity. From now on, everything will move according to his will. While some of my tendencies might be reflected in him, it¡¯s similar to a parent watching their child, who was born from them, make their own choices and follow their own path. Yujin, born as my creation, will ultimately make his own decisions while being influenced by me. Yes, that¡¯s how it should be. That way, I can continue to enjoy watching Yujin¡¯s life unfold! Chapter 38: The Iron Age Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 38 Sea?ch* The Novel?ire(.)ne*t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. Time passed quickly. Even during his human days, with a lifespan of less than a hundred years, Yujin would often find that a year or two had slipped by in the blink of an eye. Now, as an immortal Outer God with no concept of lifespan, this sensation was even more pronounced. He began to understand why beings like dragons in fantasy settings viewed time spent with humans as fleeting moments. Two years had passed since Lasi discovered metal, Muwan expanded his territory, and Rodri advanced to the coastal villages. Yujin, who had been contemplating his identity, seemed to have reached a conclusion. Since then, he hadn¡¯t tried to talk to me or shown signs of inner turmoil. Instead, it seemed his vague goal of becoming a space adventurer after learning magic had shifted to something else. From that day on, he began to take different actions. For instance, he started engaging in various volunteer activities to help the Meias tribe, who had previously discriminated against him, in an effort to improve his image among them. He actively showcased his incredible magical abilities along with his good character. ¡°Did you hear? Yujin took care of the monster that appeared on the neighboring planet.¡± ¡°Yes, it was originally something the Meias elders or the magic corps would handle, but he actively helped out.¡± And this approach was quite successful. Whether they had a positive or negative view of Yujin, the Meias tribe generally didn¡¯t like him because he was from the Terra tribe. However, after two years of effort, Yujin managed to significantly change public opinion. Initially, the reactions were dismissive, with comments like ¡°He¡¯ll stop soon,¡± or ¡°He¡¯s just trying to suck up,¡± but¡­ As the saying goes, ¡°Sincerity moves heaven.¡± After two years of diligently using his abilities to help people, public opinion about Yujin began to shift positively. ¡°He¡¯s better than the elders who just sit around looking important.¡± ¡°Hey, someone might hear you.¡± ¡°So what? Honestly, he¡¯s better than the elders.¡± Some even believed he was better than the elders who, despite their high positions, didn¡¯t actively help out like Yujin did. Thanks to his exceptional magical skills and two years of effort, Yujin was successfully integrating into the Meias tribe. Additionally, Yujin began to build a friendly relationship with the Terra tribe, despite having previously ignored their proposal to join the military. ¡°Haha, so you really have no intention of joining our military? With your skills, you could easily become the next elder.¡± ¡°Well, I¡¯ll stay friendly with my kin, but the military isn¡¯t for me.¡± ¡°Hahaha, you¡¯re an unusual one.¡± Yujin now bypassed Officer Rigel and directly conversed with James Cobalt, the elder and chief military officer. He also seemed to be exchanging messages with Kon Arche, a Terra tribe adventurer he had briefly connected with during an interview. (I almost got disintegrated near a black hole last time.) (Take care of yourself. You¡¯re not young anymore. LOL) (You little¡­) It wasn¡¯t hard to understand why Yujin was doing this. He was building his own network of influence. Not just followers or comrades, but allies among the Meias and Terra tribes. By building friendly relationships and connections, Yujin was creating a network of allies who could support him when needed. This kind of network wouldn¡¯t be necessary if he were merely a space adventurer wandering the universe. He wanted to undertake something significant with the backing of a substantial force. ¡®Since it has come to this, let¡¯s just say I¡¯m a cheat wizard reincarnated in this sci-fi universe. And I¡¯ll take over the Galactic Union.¡¯ Oh¡­ that¡¯s a pretty grand goal. Aiming to be the ruler of the universe, huh? That¡¯s quite ambitious. He wanted to seize control of the Galactic Union and become its leader, bringing the regions governed by the Union under his control. It¡¯s a grandiose goal, but honestly, for a doppelganger of a cosmic entity, such an ambition seems fitting. The storyline has shifted from a space travel adventure to a space conquest saga! I support you, Yujin! This means Yujin will likely start moving very proactively from now on. Now I understand why he would eventually clash with the Lubaran tribe elder of the Galactic Union. To take over the Galactic Union, it makes sense to target the de facto leader, the Lubaran elder. Moreover, the secret of that laboratory¡­ if he uses that as leverage, he would have enough justification to oust the elder both militarily and politically. Capturing and dissecting interesting species to understand their traits and use them for their own scientific advancements is definitely not okay. It¡¯s just inhumane experimentation to make themselves stronger. That¡¯s precisely why I hesitated to create something like TransforX. If they were mechanical lifeforms, those creatures would have dissected and studied my creations, whether they killed them themselves or obtained the corpses from somewhere else. Fortunately, elves don¡¯t have any distinctive features apart from their physical prowess and high intelligence, so they likely wouldn¡¯t be dissection targets. If the Lubaran tribe were to dissect the species I created after joining the Union, I might have been so annoyed that I would have just wiped them out. Honestly, the aftermath of eradicating an entire species¡ªfilling the void or calming the chaos among other species¡ªwould be a hassle. That¡¯s why I deliberately kept it hidden and made the species elves. Dalos creating the Metalians, who are essentially TransforX, was acceptable because Dalos would handle the destruction and the cleanup. Or maybe not. These guys might just destroy without cleaning up. Anyway, if Yujin discovers and overturns their plans, it would be beneficial. The Metalians, being neighbors to the elves, would receive various forms of assistance. Capturing and dissecting intelligent lifeforms out of curiosity¡­ it reminds me of the creeping chaos. Perhaps Ubbo-Sathla referenced that when creating the Lubaran tribe. Such madness-driven curiosity is indeed the best trait for scientific advancement. But honestly, isn¡¯t this practically universal domination? Maybe it¡¯s because the life force absorbed from the experimental subjects isn¡¯t significant. Anyway, I don¡¯t like those guys. If Yujin takes over the Union, the elves and Metalians would be able to expand without interference or attacks. Wait! But I was planning to make the elves the leading species of the Union. Does that mean they¡¯ll end up competing with Yujin? A showdown between a doppelganger and a created species¡­ an internal conflict of epic proportions. # As Yujin actively moved to take over the Galactic Union, the elves were also experiencing their own revolutions. ¡°How about this! This is the new furnace. It can reach temperatures high enough to melt red stones.¡± Rakus, the craftsman of Lumolasi village, unveiled a new type of furnace. It was made from specially heat-resistant and well-insulated clay, with the interior coated in graphite, which had been used for writing instruments. The elves, known for their curiosity and strong desire for advancement, quickly figured out how to efficiently utilize the various environments and conditions they were given. While using silicon, ceramics, or synthetic refractory materials capable of withstanding very high temperatures would be more efficient, their chemical engineering hadn¡¯t developed to that point yet. Given their current capabilities, this was the best they could do. With proper oxygen supply, the furnace could reach temperatures up to 1900 degrees Celsius. This was a significant improvement over the previous furnaces, which could barely melt copper. With this, they could melt the red stones they had discovered, which were actually iron, and produce iron ingots. This marked the beginning of their Iron Age revolution. Wow¡­ discovering iron is quite a leap forward. If left unchecked, Lumolasi village could become the most powerful. ¡­Or so one might think, but surprisingly, not yet. Despite entering the Iron Age, they were still limited to making arrows, swords, and spears. Even with improved materials for primitive cold weapons, without the invention of modern firearms, they would still be fighting with bows and engaging in close combat with spears. While having better materials might give them an edge in skirmishes, it wouldn¡¯t make them overwhelmingly dominant. On the other hand, Muwan¡¯s side was also formidable. They had discovered and absorbed two more nearby villages, forming a large force comprising four villages. Naturally, this significantly increased the elf population, and with new births, their numbers exceeded 5,000. Despite Lumolasi village¡¯s rapid development, their population was still around 1,500. Even with some families having three children over the past nine years, this was their limit. While Lumolasi focused on rapid technological advancements, Muwan¡¯s village concentrated on territorial expansion and agriculture, remaining in the Stone Age. However, their large population meant significant collective intelligence and labor force, enabling rapid development if they chose to pursue it. Would it be Lumolasi, the city of rapidly advancing science and technology, or Muwan¡¯s city, which grew its numbers exponentially? Who would first unite the elf forces? ¡­But why am I assuming they would fight? Elves are known for their strong bonds and harmony! It would be better if they all got along and advanced together. So, let¡¯s hope they join hands and progress together in peace. Chapter 39: Technological Power Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 39 In that sense, religion might play a more significant role than expected. Originally, religion was meant to unite people under a single will, fostering moral thinking and helping them become proper members of society. Over time, its meaning faded, and it transformed into something akin to a corporation. ¡°Argh! The sea is angry!¡± ¡°The god is furious!¡± ¡°No, everyone! The god has given us a trial! Only by overcoming this and praying to the god can we surpass it¡­!¡± Well¡­ of course, such insane idol worship is an exception. For some reason, Rodri, the priest of the religious group, had come to the coastal village. Was it for proselytizing? No, more importantly, what are they doing? A typhoon was causing tidal waves, yet they had no intention of fleeing. The waves were crashing into the coastal village, and at this rate, they would be swept away. ¡°Oh god, I will overcome this! I am not afraid of such storms and waves!¡± ¡°Oh! Priest Rodri has started praying to the god!¡± ¡°Let us pray together! If we pray, the god will save us!¡± ¡°Yes, if we leave it like this, the village might disappear. Let us pray together!¡± ¡­¡­ No, they were shifting the responsibility onto me. This was almost like blackmail, wasn¡¯t it? ¡°If you don¡¯t save us, it¡¯s your fault that the village gets destroyed.¡± That was essentially what they were saying. For a moment, I considered just letting them get swept away. But then again, they were my followers, and it felt wrong to abandon them. Moreover, the typhoon was stronger than I had anticipated, and if left unchecked, it could completely wipe out the village. Damn it¡­ I originally intended not to interfere. Instead of fully saving them, I decided to reduce the typhoon¡¯s intensity to a less dangerous level. Whoosh! ¡°Ugh, pfft!¡± ¡°Argh, salty!¡± Originally, a massive wave was supposed to engulf the village and sweep away the elves, but thanks to my intervention, it ended up being just a splash of water. With their basic physical abilities, the elves wouldn¡¯t drown. However, if they stayed like that, they¡¯d be soaked in seawater all day and end up pickled in salt. Whoosh! ¡°Ugh! Cough, cough!¡± ¡°Argh.¡± Their determination was stronger than I had expected. Even as they got drenched and looked like wet rats, they didn¡¯t stop. They continued to pray to me in their own way for hours. Despite their sturdy bodies, even the elves began to shiver from the constant exposure to the waves and rain. It was only natural. ¡­Sigh, fine, I give up. You win. In a way, they were like my children, much like Yujin. They were the only ones who believed in and praised my existence. Even though their devotion seemed somewhat cult-like, I couldn¡¯t help but feel a soft spot for those who believed in and followed me. Flash©¤! ¡°Oh, oh! The sky is clearing up!¡± ¡°The typhoon is starting to recede!¡± ¡°It¡¯s thanks to our prayers! Thanks to Priest Rodri and our prayers!¡± ¡°Oh! The god has saved us!!¡± Seeing them cheer so excitedly made me slightly regret not just leaving them be¡­ but whatever. If a god exists and cares for its creations, shouldn¡¯t it eliminate the injustices they face? If these creatures were merely hoping for luck without any effort, that would be different. But they risked their lives, praying to me not just to save themselves but to protect the coastal village they had worked so hard to build and maintain. Ignoring that would make me a cruel god who saw its creations only as test subjects. While I initially created them out of curiosity, I¡¯m not a psychopath devoid of affection for the beings I created. ¡­Really, what am I saying? A cosmic entity capable of traversing multiverses talking like this? Other cosmic beings would be baffled if they heard me. I guess I¡¯m quite an anomaly. My origin, retaining the personality from my human days¡ªeverything about me is unusual. If I were just a bit weaker, wouldn¡¯t I have been captured and experimented on by Nyarlathotep? # The Iron Age. Iron, when processed in a high-temperature furnace and through an oxygen reduction process, is relatively easy to work with. Moreover, if oxidation is well prevented, it boasts high strength and durability after processing. Most importantly, it is extremely stable, being the final product of nuclear fusion. It is also one of the most commonly available metals. Depending on how it is processed, iron can exhibit a wide range of properties, making it highly versatile. It can be used in construction, agricultural tools, weapons, various tools, and even cooking utensils. Even the Lubaran, the most advanced race in the current universe, predominantly use iron in their daily lives unless something special is required. Naturally, the discovery of iron leads to revolutionary advancements. First, agricultural tools. ¡°My goodness. This is on a different level compared to yellow stone (copper) or blue stone (bronze)! It¡¯s lighter and much harder.¡± ¡°Even though it¡¯s been sharpened so finely, it has incredible durability. Unlike stone or yellow stone (copper), it seems like it can be used in various ways.¡± Attempts were made to create weapons and agricultural tools from bronze alloys made of copper and tin previously discovered. Unfortunately, those attempts failed. The primary reasons were the lack of good processing techniques and the fact that bronze was heavy and soft. During the Bronze Age, most items crafted were ornaments or decorations for high-ranking individuals. This was partly because copper and tin were very rare minerals, but also because, despite being harder to process and more valuable than stone, bronze did not offer significant advantages. However, iron was different. As long as the environment for processing it was available, it was much easier to obtain and far more versatile. Thus, when agricultural tools like sickles and shovels were made from iron, it felt like an enormous upgrade from using stone. The same applied to weapons. Iron could be sharpened to the point where it could cut flesh with a mere touch, making it ideal for crafting swords, spears, and arrowheads. Even if not sharpened, iron was harder than bronze, making it excellent for creating blunt weapons that could strike much harder. Iron was so versatile that it was often referred to as the ¡°rice of industry,¡± being used extensively in various other sectors. For example¡­ ¡°Currently, we support building walls with wood and dried grass¡­ but with this, we can insert much sturdier supports. Yellow stone (copper) and blue stone (bronze) are heavy and scarce, so we only considered it, but this strong stone (iron) is much more common and sturdier¡­¡± As construction chief Dro enthusiastically explained, iron could also be used as a building material. ¡°Depending on the temperature and method of production, its strength, tensile properties, and various characteristics can change drastically. I¡¯m sure there are much better ways to utilize it in manufacturing¡­¡± Hammers, screwdrivers, screws, nails¡­ iron could be used to make all sorts of manufacturing tools. With the creation of highly efficient agricultural tools, harvest chief Selian was excited. The possibility of crafting superior weapons and armor thrilled warrior chief Elma. The ability to build sturdier walls and experiment with more diverse construction methods excited construction chief Dro. And naturally, the most excited was manufacturing chief Rakus, who was directly handling this highly versatile material. ¡°Excellent. We can now achieve so much more. Everyone, please do your best for the village.¡± Their leader, Lasi, also seemed pleased. Watching the technological advancements of the village in real-time was undoubtedly a joy for any leader. ¡°Oh, I have some news to share. It¡¯s about another elf village we discovered two years ago.¡± Sea?ch* The N?velFire(.)net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. ¡°Yes, go ahead.¡± Ah, right, that was a thing. It seemed they had made direct contact this time. Given the village¡¯s significant technological advancements, no one could threaten them unless they were a large group like Muwan¡¯s village, which had over 5,000 people. Not that it seemed like a hostile situation to begin with. ¡°Although we couldn¡¯t fully communicate, we managed to find some common ground and had a conversation.¡± The high intelligence of the elves was beneficial in such situations. Even though each village spoke a different language, they could quickly understand and adapt to the new language by grasping the context. Initially, I was worried when they all created separate languages, but it turned out I had nothing to worry about. ¡°After informing them about our village¡¯s situation, they seemed interested in establishing relations with us.¡± Indeed, Lumolasi village was exceptional. They were the only village in the vicinity that had not only entered the Iron Age but also properly established agriculture. Naturally, other villages, which still struggled with wild beasts and food shortages, would want to befriend Lumolasi, where such worries were nonexistent. In such a case, it was highly likely that they would join Lumolasi to learn the technology. This would naturally increase the size and influence of Lumolasi village. It would be a peaceful victory through scientific advancement, unlike the rough methods of Muwan. Chapter 40: The Fire Spirit God, Cthugha Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 40 In the vast multiverse, there exist eternal beings known as Outer Gods. Among them, some, like Nyarlathotep, take a keen interest in living beings. Others, like Ubbo-Sathla, savor the life energy of the universe as a delicacy. However, most of the countless Outer Gods living in the infinite void have little interest in the universe. Having lived for eons, they had already experienced everything they wished to enjoy. Beings like Nyarlathotep and Ubbo-Sathla, who indulge in their hobbies for eternity, are the exceptions. The rest either exist without any particular thought or, having lost their sanity over the endless ages, follow only their instincts, wandering through the universes and leaving destruction in their wake. Among these beings, there are those whose sole purpose is not gourmet delights or research but pure destruction. In a universe governed by the laws of nature, where natural phenomena possess will and live as beings, there exists a god of flame-enshrouded spirits, known as the ¡°Fire Spirit King from Beyond.¡± This being is also an Outer God, with power rivaling that of Nyarlathotep and Ubbo-Sathla. His name is Cthugha. He had a history of destroying and burning down Nyarlathotep¡¯s laboratory in the void, making them fierce enemies. Although their powers were evenly matched, their battles never reached a conclusion. Each time they clashed, they would snarl and fight, but the outcome would always be the same: the surrounding universes would be left in ruins, while their own conflict remained unresolved. Cthugha. The flames emanating from his body defied physical laws, burning even in the void, and were an eternal fire that could never be extinguished. The temperature and energy of these flames surpassed the combined energy of thousands of supernova explosions. Merely appearing in a universe, his heat and energy could destroy it entirely. He was a terrifying god of destruction, burning everything in his path. [The universe. Most beautiful when it blazes and vanishes.] And so, today, he wandered from universe to universe, burning them for his own amusement. His flames were so powerful that just approaching them caused anomalies in the universe. As soon as he entered a universe, the explosive energy caused its matter to ignite rapidly, leading to the complete annihilation of everything in a short time. His terrifying power seemed overwhelming compared to other Outer Gods. Of course, other top-tier Outer Gods could also erase universes in an instant if they wished. They simply chose not to unleash their full power. Thus, it wasn¡¯t just his nemesis Nyarlathotep who disliked Cthugha. Other supreme Outer Gods also disapproved of him, despite being beings of the highest order themselves. They found Cthugha¡¯s blatant display of power and his habit of destroying universes with brute force to be lacking in dignity. Regardless, Cthugha continued to burn universes, finding joy in watching everything ignite. At that moment, [Behold. A new universe. Beautifully ablaze.] Cthugha had found a new target. In a universe inhabited by various cosmic races, the presence of other Outer Gods was also felt. However, Cthugha, who had once burned down Nyarlathotep¡¯s laboratory, was not one to care about the presence of one or two other Outer Gods. As he approached to burn another universe, [¡­? Strange. No change.] Something was off. Normally, just the proximity of Cthugha would cause the entire universe to experience anomalies due to the intense heat of his flames. Space might twist, or phenomena contrary to physical laws might occur. But nothing happened. Cthugha seemed slightly puzzled by this unusual situation. [Shield. Entire universe.] The reason was not hard to discern. An Outer God within had sensed his approach and enveloped the entire universe in a protective shield, as if to guard it. [Amusing.] Cthugha scoffed at the effort, piercing through the shield and entering the universe. However, the moment he entered, [Hey, didn¡¯t you see the shield? Why would you break through it?] The voice of another Outer God echoed in his mind, and Cthugha found himself not in the targeted universe but in a completely different space. [¡­¡­] He was even more bewildered than before. Without even realizing it, Cthugha had been transported to another space. Before him stood a massive, tentacled giant with a single red eye¡ªan Outer God. Moreover, this space seemed inescapable, as if a higher being had trapped him in an independent dimension. [Annihilation.] Fwoosh! Yet, the thought that he couldn¡¯t escape this space never crossed his mind. He was a supreme Outer God. Even Nyarlathotep couldn¡¯t stop or defeat him. The idea that some unknown red-eyed entity could imprison him was laughable. However, [Hmm¡­ I see. You¡¯re strong. The Fire Spirit God, huh? But escaping from here won¡¯t be easy.] The red-eyed Outer God spoke mockingly. It was indeed this being who had created the space. But how? Universes, even Nyarlathotep¡¯s laboratory, would burn and vanish instantly upon contact with Cthugha¡¯s full power. Yet, this space remained unaffected. Who was this Outer God? Confusion began to swirl in Cthugha¡¯s mind. [What. Identity. You.] Even when fighting Nyarlathotep, he had never experienced anything like this. As a supreme Outer God, he had never felt the oppressive presence of an absolute higher being. Cthugha was greatly bewildered. This had never happened before¡­ no, there was one time. He had felt such overwhelming pressure from a higher being only once. It was when he connected to the ¡°most primordial yet originless entity¡± to receive the knowledge of the multiverse. Cthugha, driven by greed, had caused chaos the moment he connected, attempting to seize more knowledge and power. But nothing worked. The entity¡¯s presence was far stronger than his energy because it was the most primordial being. Simultaneously, it was originless, making it impossible to grasp or feel anything. Yet, its immense presence had undeniably overwhelmed Cthugha. It was something that should never be touched. At that moment, even he, an eternal being, felt an unknown fear. Yes, fear. He, who was meant to bring destruction, annihilation, and fear, was feeling fear himself. It was an impossible occurrence. This was chaos and blasphemy, breaking even the laws that governed beings like the Outer Gods, who had already transcended the laws of existence. [Denial. Denial. Denial.] Cthugha began to recall the emotion of ¡®fear,¡¯ which he had felt for the first and last time in his eternal existence. The being before him was not an Outer God. It was far beyond that. It was the essence, the evil, the taboo, and the creation itself. Recognizing its existence was blasphemous. It was a higher-dimensional entity that made even Outer Gods feel the same fear and reverence that lesser beings felt towards them. Cthugha, having once defied and felt the power of such an entity, understood this. While others might be deceived, he was not. This was no mere Outer God. sea??h th§× ¦ÇovelFire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. [Ah¡­ Ah¡­] Cthugha, forgetting his usual terse speech, bowed his head. To fight? Such an option did not exist. Confronting this being was an inconceivable concept. He wondered why it appeared as a mere Outer God, but even questioning that was taboo. He had no choice but to accept it as it was. After all, even Outer Gods could not fully comprehend its will. [Return. I, go back.] Attempting to burn the universe where this being resided was a grave mistake. Cthugha did not wish to be annihilated. He conveyed his intention to leave without causing any harm. [What?] The being, seemingly unimpressed, opened a part of the space, allowing him to exit. The exit led to a distant part of the void, far from this universe. [¡­¡­] Without uttering a word, Cthugha extinguished his usual blazing flames and energy. He reverted to his original form¡ªa massive, winged, tentacled monstrosity¡ªand trudged away. # Phew¡­ I thought we were in serious trouble with that crazy cosmic arsonist showing up, but he left more quietly than I expected. I was worried we might have to fight, considering he seemed almost as powerful as Nyarlathotep. Thankfully, he was more reasonable than I thought. Wow, he appeared so suddenly. If something like that entered the universe, the elf planet and everything else would have been incinerated. The energy that can burn the very concept of space itself¡­ It wasn¡¯t just the elf planet at risk; the entire SF universe could have been obliterated. Outer Gods are truly terrifying. Just passing through can annihilate the very fabric of the universe. As someone who was once human, with a fragile heart and limited abilities, it¡¯s hard to endure such encounters. So scary. Chapter 41: The Six-Handed Elf God Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 41 Although Cthugha¡¯s sudden appearance had been startling, he had retreated more easily than expected, leaving no significant damage. The elf planet and the entire universe had narrowly avoided annihilation. Even though it could have been restored, it would have felt like realizing that a meticulously nurtured game character was just a bunch of data bits¡ªdisheartening. In any case, life had returned to normal for a few months after that incident. ¡­Wait. Something else was approaching the universe. Unlike Cthugha, it didn¡¯t seem to carry a strong intent of destruction. It felt more like someone was seeking him out. [Hey.] [Huh.] Stepping outside the universe, I saw a familiar face. It was Ubbo-Sathla, a top-tier Outer God. I was the one who had promised to create life forms. Could it be now? [Seeing that fireball coming this way reminded me. Help me now.] [¡­¡­] Ugh, Cthugha. He had to come here and stir things up for no reason. Well, a promise is a promise. Once made, it must be kept. Unlike Cthugha, who came looking for trouble, I didn¡¯t want to create bad relationships with other top-tier Outer Gods. Considering the dynamics between Nyarlathotep, Ubbo-Sathla, and Cthugha, it seemed wise to avoid unnecessary hostility. Fighting them would result in universe bubbles boiling and bursting, creating dark black holes that could swallow universes. Just thinking about it was exhausting. Still, there was a chance that another Outer God like Cthugha might invade while I was away. I decided to reinforce the universe bubble surrounding the universe, making it impenetrable even to most high-tier Outer Gods. While it was possible that a top-tier Outer God might attack, such occurrences were exceedingly rare. Top-tier Outer Gods were not common. Just in case, I set it so that Dalos could enter and exit. After all, Dalos might need to go somewhere, just like me. I was a bit worried about the elves. There could be another disaster like a typhoon or tidal wave, or an invasion while he was gone. I decided to create an avatar to protect and watch over them. However, for the avatar to be powerful enough, it would need at least the strength of a lower-tier Outer God. Creating such a being within the universe could lead to opposition, which would be problematic. It seemed best to enhance an existing life form¡¯s abilities. Ubbo-Sathla had used this method when creating a giant monster with the power of a lower-tier Outer God. Using a life form that already existed within the universe and shared its fate seemed like the best approach. While it might still be risky, it should be acceptable if the purpose was to protect a species rather than destroy the universe. However, I couldn¡¯t just turn an elf into a god. ¡­Turn Rodri into the Six-Handed Elf God? No, that wouldn¡¯t work. I needed a life form resilient enough to withstand divine powers and adaptable enough not to complain about modifications. [¡­Ah!] Ah, of course! There was a perfect candidate. # The commander of the Kapteri tribe couldn¡¯t believe his ears. Well, it wasn¡¯t exactly heard with ears, but still. ¡°Kirik¡­ Are you saying I should become a god?¡± The overwhelming Outer God who had captured them was proposing that the Kapteri commander become a subordinate deity, conveying my will to the Kapteri tribe. The task was to watch over and protect the beings created by the Outer God, defending them from external threats. For the Kapteri tribe, who had only ever caused harm by consuming resources from other species and planets, this was an entirely foreign proposition. ¡®I will grant you power. However, if you misuse it, you will eternally repeat the suffering you have experienced before.¡¯ In return, if the commander performed well, I would be granted freedom and near-immortal power and life as befitting a god. ¡°¡­¡­¡± It was a bewildering offer. However, from the Kapteri tribe¡¯s perspective, there was no reason to refuse. Due to previous torture, more than half of the captured Kapteri tribe had perished. Only 14 members remained. If they could survive and continue their existence, there was no reason to refuse the offer. They weren¡¯t in a position to refuse anyway. Declining would mean nothing but writhing in pain until a slow death. While they couldn¡¯t achieve their goal of spreading their species across the universe and avenging themselves against the Lubaran tribe, they could become a far superior being and live an immortal life until the end of the universe. For the Kapteri tribe, who had been wandering the universe in fear, this was nothing short of a life-changing opportunity. ¡°If you grant me this power, I swear eternal loyalty! I will exceed your expectations!¡± Setting everything else aside, just escaping this place was a blessing. Nothing was more terrifying than being in a place where they could be subjected to the excruciating pain of their bodies being slowly disintegrated at the molecular level. [Very well, I will grant you power. The rest of you, wait here.] The great Outer God spoke, bestowing immense power upon the Kapteri commander. Crunch! Crack! sea??h th§× N?velFire(.)net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. ¡°Ugh, ugh¡­!¡± The Kapteri commander felt an unfamiliar, hollow energy filling his body for the first time in his life. Gradually, his body began to grow, transforming from a grotesque arthropod into something else. His skin turned white, his form shifted to a bipedal humanoid, and his ears became pointed. Strangely, he retained his six arms. In fact, with the addition of legs, he now had two more limbs than before. In an instant, the transformation was complete, and the commander stood as a towering elf with six hands. [Th-this is¡­] The Kapteri commander¡ªnow transformed into the Elf God¡ªtrembled with the overwhelming sense of power coursing through his body. He had traveled across the universe and witnessed countless displays of immense power: the infinite gravity of neutron stars and black holes, the incredible light and energy of supernovae, and even the insane scientific prowess of species that weaponized such forces. But nothing in this universe had ever made him feel so overpowered. This was truly the power of a god. It was the kind of overwhelming presence that marked the end of the line in the universe¡ªthe presence of an ¡°Outer God.¡± Unlike a typical lower-tier Outer God, he had been transformed into a god by receiving power from a great being. This allowed him to retain his intellect and will. His voice didn¡¯t come from a conventional vocal apparatus; it felt as though he was directly conveying his thoughts to others. [Now, you are the god of the elves. Your name¡­ well, you can decide that yourself. Anyway, take good care of the elf planet while I¡¯m gone. Especially keep an eye on those who are performing strange rituals in front of statues that look like you. Watch them closely.] The voice, conveying its will directly to him, was the same as before. The Elf God looked up at the great Outer God who had granted him this power. [¡­¡­] Overwhelming. It was the same as before. Even when he was just a small and insignificant Kapteri, the great Outer God had been an overwhelmingly powerful presence. Now, despite gaining immense power that dwarfed his previous self, the Outer God¡¯s presence remained just as overwhelming, if not more terrifying. As a Kapteri, he had been ignorant. Now, with a glimpse of that power, he understood just how vast, fearsome, and dreadful the Outer God truly was. ¡®Yes, my survival and the power I have gained are merely due to his whims. Even now, my suffering or the loss of this power would be at his whim.¡¯ His existence hinged on mere whims and mood swings. Even with the power to be called a god, this fact remained unchanged. [I pledge my eternal loyalty to you.] The Kapteri commander¡ªnow the Elf God tasked with watching over and protecting the elves¡ªsincerely swore eternal allegiance. He vowed to do everything in his power to avoid being erased on a whim or as a mood swing. He resolved to earn the favor of the great Outer God with all his efforts. ¡®But why do I have six hands?¡¯ The thought crossed his mind. His appearance was very similar to the Terra or Meias species, who naturally had two arms, which seemed the most efficient. He wondered why he had six hands but decided not to question it, believing there must be a reason. # ¡­Damn, now that I¡¯m called the god of the elves, that¡¯s the only image that comes to mind. Originally, I had planned to create a classic World Tree-like deity. But it was all Rodri¡¯s fault. Now, whenever someone mentioned the Elf God, all I could think of was the six-handed elf! The image was so strong that it naturally led to this form. To make matters worse, those creatures, originally based on insects, had six legs, adding to the confusion! Ugh, whatever. I¡¯ve done my part. I decided to leave the remaining Kapteri tribe under the care of the Elf God for now and figure out what to do with them later. The loyalty pledge had been confirmed as genuine. If it had been a lie, I would have already detected it and subjected them to torture. Alright, time to head out. Since I had created the Elf God, there was no need to return at a predetermined time. I decided to move forward in time to see how the universe had progressed in my absence. The routine had become monotonous lately, and I was eager for a change. While helping Ubbo-Sathla, I planned to connect to the timeline and watch the highlights. Chapter 42: While I Was Away Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 42 After making thorough preparations, I followed Ubbo-Sathla to the universe he had set his sights on. It was a bubble located quite far from the one I had inhabited, and it was significantly larger¡ªabout twice the size of my previous universe. The vastness of this universe meant that countless planets and life forms thrived within it. The physical laws were similar yet slightly different from those of my previous universe. For instance, the gravitational acceleration was a bit off, and the constants in the thermodynamic equations varied slightly. These differences resulted in life-sustaining temperatures exceeding 60 degrees Celsius, but that was not his concern. My task was to cultivate a being powerful enough to dominate this universe but won¡¯t create enemies in the universe. Ubbo-Sathla had attempted something similar with the Lubaran tribe, but they had failed to conquer the entire universe. Their focus on conquest rather than destruction had led to their downfall. Despite the terrifying experiments and research conducted in the underground labs of the Union Headquarters, they were insignificant compared to Ubbo-Sathla¡¯s power. This time, I needed to create a being with abilities surpassing those of the Lubaran tribe, capable of both dominating and destroying the entire universe. [If the destructive tendencies are too strong, it will create an enemy. But if it¡¯s too docile, it won¡¯t destroy the universe.] It was a challenging balance to strike. Despite transforming the Kapteri tribe into beings close to lower-tier Outer Gods, there had been no significant reaction. This was likely because they were designed to be gentle and benevolent guardians. Maintaining this delicate balance was crucial. Ubbo-Sathla had sought my help precisely because he concluded that the key to this balance was a being called ¡°Yujin.¡± [A being that moves with my will and possesses great potential. But mere imitation wasn¡¯t enough. The moment my will was involved, adversaries emerged.] It seemed Ubbo-Sathla had tried to replicate my method but failed. Naturally, if the being inherited Ubbo-Sathla¡¯s personality, it would have been all about destruction and chaos. The universe¡¯s will wouldn¡¯t have allowed such unchecked behavior. Honestly, I felt like telling Ubbo-Sathla to use his own power to destroy everything and go home. But I knew Ubbo-Sathla would argue about balance and other such nonsense. Ugh, troublesome creature. This is why you shouldn¡¯t get too close to those who are overly particular about taste. It¡¯s a hassle every time you go out to eat. [The problem is that you created your beings and avatars with the explicit purpose of destroying the universe.] That point needed to be clear. If the purpose was too blatant, it would be detected. [I know. But hiding it led to the failure of the Lubaran tribe.] Ubbo-Sathla was well aware of this. The Lubaran tribe was a failed attempt to conceal destructive instincts. The critical point was that merely hiding the intent wasn¡¯t enough. [Intelligent beings inherently possess desires for domination and destruction. Even if you don¡¯t think about it from the start, with the right guidance, they¡¯ll naturally move in that direction.] If the intent was too obvious, adversaries would emerge to fight. If it was forcibly hidden, it would result in beings like the Lubaran tribe, who concealed their instincts and conducted secret experiments. Therefore, there was no need to interfere directly. Intelligent beings would eventually seek to dominate everything they could, consuming and destroying in the process. The key was to grant them enough power and subtly guide their instincts. Potential for growth, exceptional abilities, and slightly loosened instincts were essential. Simply put: [We need to create a slightly unrestrained version of the Lubaran tribe.] There was no need to interfere directly; just loosen their instincts a bit. However, to prevent them from tearing each other apart before they could develop, they needed strong tribal cohesion, like the elves. Additionally, there should be a compelling reason for rapid technological advancement¡ªsuch as the presence of rival intelligent beings¡ªcreating an environment where they must evolve quickly. [Is that all?] [Yes, that¡¯s it.] Of course, it wasn¡¯t as easy as it sounded. Fine-tuning the balance was crucial, and I would assist with that part, so there was no need to worry. [You seem to understand these creatures very well, almost like Nyarlathotep.] Well, unlike that madwoman, I didn¡¯t abduct and dissect them for experiments. [But unlike that guy, you don¡¯t give off a bad vibe. You¡¯re a good one.] It seemed Ubbo-Sathla had taken a liking to me. Understandable, considering his strained relationship with Nyarlathotep. They had even fought upon their first encounter¡­ though that might have been my fault. [I¡¯ll give it a try. I¡¯ll need some help with the fine-tuning.] [Sure.] S§×ar?h the ¦Çov§×lFire .net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. With that, Ubbo-Sathla ventured into the universe to create the new species. Meanwhile, I used the opportunity to check on the events in my own universe. Let¡¯s see how things have been going. # ¡°Let¡¯s take over the Galactic Union.¡± ¡°¡­What?!¡± At Yujin¡¯s words, Jupiter was more shocked than he had ever been in his life. The Galactic Union was a colossal organization, centered around the Lubaran tribe with their advanced scientific technology, and composed of countless intelligent beings with various abilities. It dominated a region approximately 20 billion light-years in diameter, making it the largest known organization in the current universe. While there might be larger organizations in the unobserved parts of the universe, the Galactic Union was the supreme power within the observable universe. Its influence continued to grow, as it protected newly discovered life forms and integrated intelligent beings into its ranks, expanding its reach even further. For someone to suddenly declare their intention to take over such an organization was nothing short of astonishing. ¡°¡­¡­¡± Jupiter couldn¡¯t bring himself to tell Yujin that it was impossible. Who was Yujin, after all? He was an avatar of a great being with the overwhelming power to erase or reset this vast universe in an instant. Not only was his original form immensely powerful, but Yujin himself possessed extraordinary abilities. In less than ten years, he had surpassed the elders of the Meias tribe in magical prowess. His physical abilities, enhanced by mana, were so exceptional that even the formidable Lubaran tribe couldn¡¯t match him. He was an overwhelming monster, a giant beast in all but size, capable of taking on entire fleets. It seemed there was nothing Yujin couldn¡¯t achieve if he set his mind to it. Jupiter thought that if Yujin wanted to do something, it would simply happen. ¡°Of course, I can¡¯t do it alone. We need to gather forces. And¡­¡± ¡°And?¡± Yujin smiled slyly. ¡°Besides, we don¡¯t need that many forces, nor will it take long. Usually, these things end when you take out the head.¡± ¡°¡­!¡± As he said this, Yujin made a request to Jupiter. ¡°The Lubaran tribe is likely involved in some unsavory activities within the Union. I sensed something like that when I was connected to the main body.¡± ¡°Understood. I¡¯ll investigate.¡± Jupiter immediately grasped the meaning behind Yujin¡¯s words. Nodding in agreement, he headed towards the Union Headquarters to begin his investigation. The plan was to uncover the corruption and darkness within the Lubaran tribe and use it as leverage to stage a coup. Once the Lubaran tribe was ousted and their position seized, dominating the Galactic Union would merely be a matter of time. Jupiter saw the potential in this plan and began preparing to gather allies while investigating the Lubaran tribe¡¯s secrets. Meanwhile, Yujin traveled across the universe to recruit forces for his cause. Thus began his grand adventure to conquer the Galactic Union. # Yujin¡¯s journey to gather allies was about to unfold. While the story of recruiting companions might not be particularly exciting, with tales of meeting new allies and exploring their pasts, it had its own charm. However, the real interest lay in watching the protagonist smash through obstacles and reform the world. For now, I decided to keep an eye on who would join Yujin¡¯s ranks. Next, I turned my attention to the elves. I wondered if the Elf God was fulfilling his role well. Honestly, I was a bit worried. Compared to Yujin, the progress on the elf side seemed slow. Although establishing their own language systems and reaching the Iron Age within a few years was impressive, it still felt sluggish. I decided to leave the elves for later. Checking on them now probably wouldn¡¯t reveal much change. Even if there were dangers, the six-handed Elf God would handle them. I trusted that the Elf God wouldn¡¯t entertain any foolish thoughts. [Hey, I¡¯ve created something. Come take a look.] Ubbo-Sathla returned through the rift, asking for confirmation. It seemed the elf side would have to wait. ¡­I did feel a strange sense of unease about the elves, but it was probably just my imagination. Chapter 43: Excessive Passion Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 43 The commander of the Kapteri tribe, empowered by the great being, was no longer a mere Kapteri. He had become the god of the elves, a species created by the great being. [Are these the ones I must protect?] The Elf God observed the industrious elves. Some were diligently working with mineral resources, others ventured into the sea for fishing, and many were gathering their kin to expand their community. These small, weak beings, with only two arms unlike his own six, were building their society with great effort. [Is it them?] Then he spotted them¡ªthe elves worshipping a statue with six arms, just like him, as the great being had mentioned. ¡°O great god, please accept our offerings.¡± They placed their hunted beasts and carefully cultivated fruits on a long stone table resembling an altar. [I was told to watch them closely due to unease.] While the great being had advised caution, the Elf God couldn¡¯t help but feel a sense of pride and affection for these elves who showed such loyalty and devotion to the god who created them. He felt a desire to take special care of them. [Yes, these are the ones the great being entrusted to me. I will raise them to be the greatest species in the universe.] Partly driven by the resentment from his previous life as a Kapteri, he was determined to surpass the Lubaran tribe and create a species that would dominate the Galactic Union and the entire universe. He made a vow. He would repay the great being who trusted him with this species. [First, I need a name. A god without a name simply won¡¯t do.] Typically, names given to gods are bestowed by the awe-struck beings who worship them, as true gods find names meaningless. However, he wasn¡¯t a true creator god but a symbolic figure who would directly interact with and nurture the elves. Therefore, he needed a fitting name. [A god, huh.] Elves. They were unique to this part of the universe, with no prior information available. Their entire existence was what he could see before him. As their guardian deity, he needed a name that reflected his role. [This is difficult. I can¡¯t just call myself Kapteri. Elvgod? Too simple.] He needed a name that was both meaningful and impressive. [¡­Rios.] The word suddenly came to him. Though it had no special meaning, he instinctively knew it signified ¡°light.¡± [Heh, light.] Once, he had been part of a filthy insect species, hiding in the darkness beneath a planet¡¯s surface. Now, he was a god named Rios, symbolizing the bright light that illuminated the elves. Life was unpredictable, Rios thought. [Now that I have a name, it¡¯s time to get started.] He decided to grant the elf species more power. Although they were in the early stages of development, at their current pace, it would take them a thousand years to catch up to the Lubaran tribe. Considering the Lubaran tribe¡¯s rapid advancement, even that would be an impressive feat, but it would still be too late. [I can bestow more powerful abilities and impart knowledge for faster development. In my current state, I can do this.] Thus, Rios began his journey as the God of Light, aiming to become a bright beacon for the elves. Managing all the elves alone was impossible, so he shared his divine power with his subordinates, who were still Kapteri. They transformed into ¡°Spirits of Light,¡± completely shedding their former Kapteri forms. In this way, the Kapteri tribe was entirely eradicated from the universe, replaced by the new collective of ¡°Spirits of Light and the God of Light.¡± # ¡°Everyone, let us pray to Lord Rios, the great God of Light!¡± ¡°The great God of Light!¡± Flash! ¡­??? What had happened while I wasn¡¯t looking? Why was Rodri, the former fanatic leader, wielding magical powers and proclaiming the name of Rios, the God of Light? And how had the elves, who were just beginning to forge iron tools less than a year ago, suddenly skipped several stages of development and were now preparing to create engines? ¡°This is all thanks to the knowledge of light that Lord Rios has bestowed upon us.¡± ¡°Yes, once we complete this, our development will accelerate tremendously.¡± The elves were now on the verge of creating their first steam-powered engine, and they had begun using spirit magic through the Spirits of Light. Their development had accelerated to an unbelievable pace. Previously, their progress had already been astonishing, but now it seemed like they were skipping entire stages of development. It was as if someone had paid for premium upgrades. Why are they suddenly advancing so rapidly? ¡°O great Rios! Please grant us your revelation!¡± [Rodri, and my children, I bestow upon you the knowledge of light.] ¡­Ah. The culprit was immediately obvious. That six-handed fool, who was supposed to just protect them, had gone overboard. What was this ¡°Rios¡± and ¡°knowledge of light¡± nonsense? I had planned to nurture the elves slowly, but this overly enthusiastic new recruit had gone full throttle, buying all sorts of enhancements and premium items to accelerate their growth. It wasn¡¯t just the steam engine. They planned to use its development as a stepping stone to create countless advanced energy sources and machines. It seemed they intended to achieve in one year what would normally take the elves 50 to 100 years. The rate of development was beyond imagination. ¡­Hmm, maybe this isn¡¯t so bad after all? S§×ar?h the N?vel(F)ire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. I had been getting bored with the slow, predictable progress. This way, it wasn¡¯t me directly intervening but rather Rios, a being within the cosmic laws, using his authority to influence events. It gave a different flavor to the unfolding story. This unexpected turn of events might actually make things more interesting. Despite the rapid advancements, it seemed that Rios hadn¡¯t meddled with the elves¡¯ evolution, direction, or values. He had simply bestowed the same knowledge and power upon them, without directly influencing their actions. The religious faction centered around Rodri continued to offer sacrifices and worship, focusing on developing supernatural powers rather than scientific ones derived from the knowledge of light. In Lumolasi village, they utilized the spirits¡¯ power but also leveraged the knowledge of light to advance their village more quickly, aiming for a more comfortable and prosperous life. Lastly, Muwan, the ruler of the southern hemisphere, was driven by his desire for domination. ¡°Heh, such immense power and knowledge. And it seems the area I control is less than one-thousandth of this planet! I want it all.¡± Muwan was clearly intent on using both the new spirit powers and the knowledge of light to enhance his military might and personal strength. ¡­This was concerning. Given that all received the same knowledge and power, Muwan would naturally have an advantage. However, it seemed Rios had considered this. He only provided Muwan with the ability to use the spirits and the knowledge of light, without actively intervening. The most intervention from Rios and the Spirits of Light occurred within Rodri¡¯s religious faction. Their active sacrifices and rituals supplied energy, allowing Rios to recover his powers. Consequently, Rios intervened more actively with Rodri¡¯s faction, granting them greater strength. Rios also subtly guided more elves towards Lasi¡¯s faction, which aimed for a stable and prosperous life. By making minor adjustments, he ensured that the various factions maintained a balance of power. While there was some concern that the elves, with their similar levels of power, might eventually go to war, it was an inevitable part of their development. As long as it didn¡¯t escalate to a catastrophic nuclear war that could wipe out the entire species, there was no reason to intervene. Historically, scientific and technological advancements often accelerated during times of war. Although it would be tragic to see elves killing each other, it was merely a phase in their growth. After enduring the horrors of internecine war, they could emotionally mature and resolve never to engage in such conflicts again. This could also spur greater technological advancements. ¡­Of course, encouraging war was not the right approach. If they continued to wage war out of greed, they would ultimately face extinction. While I believed that the elves I created wouldn¡¯t fall into such a cycle, it was well-known that intelligent beings rarely followed their intended paths. In any case, if things ever became that dire, our God of Light, Rios, would handle it. That¡¯s why I entrusted him with this responsibility. Since he accelerated their development, he should also manage any resulting chaos. Isn¡¯t that right? Chapter 44: The Demon King Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 44 After assisting Ubbo-Sathla in creating a new species, I returned to my own universe. Fortunately, the massive cosmic bubble that housed my universe remained intact and undisturbed. [Hmm.] Around me, bubbles continued to form and dissipate, constantly moving. Each of these large and small bubbles represented a universe, a space where countless materials, life forms, and energies existed according to their own unique laws. While I had only played with one universe, the sheer number of them was staggering. Of course, not all these universes operated under entirely different laws. Many were similar, and some were even identical. Some universes were essentially the same, often referred to as ¡°parallel worlds.¡± ¡°What if I had made a different choice?¡± ¡°What if A hadn¡¯t died?¡± ¡°What if country B had conquered the world?¡± These ¡°what if¡± scenarios gave rise to alternate realities, parallel universes where different choices or events led to divergent outcomes. However, the universe didn¡¯t split into new bubbles for every trivial decision made by a single insignificant life form. A significant event that could serve as a branching point for the entire universe had to occur for a new bubble to form, dividing the universe into world A, where the event happened, and world B, where it did not. However, significant events that could serve as branching points for the entire universe occur quite frequently on a cosmic scale. Often, the moments we imagine as ¡°what if I had done that¡± coincide with such events, creating branching points in the universe. Because these events are so common, it seems as though parallel universes form every time a choice is made. In reality, the universe is indifferent to the trivial decisions of insignificant beings. If no significant event occurs in the universe at that moment, no parallel universe is created. There are, however, universes that flow along a fixed destiny without creating such branching points. This happens when external entities interfere, causing significant changes in the universe. For example, the universe where I am currently creating and interacting with the elves and Yujin. When Ubbo-Sathla created the Lubaran tribe, that universe became fixed and could no longer generate parallel universes. The interference of an external entity prevents the universe from splitting into separate bubbles. Thus, the universe containing the Lubaran tribe exists as a singular entity. While other universes continuously generate new cosmic bubbles and infinite parallel worlds, the universe with the Lubaran tribe remains unique. With my additional creations of the elf species and the Elf God, this singularity is further reinforced. But there is one way to create a parallel universe from this fixed one. It¡¯s simple. Since the universe was fixed by the interference of an external entity, it can be copied through the interference of another external entity. Easy, right? Now, you might wonder why I¡¯m suddenly discussing this. The reason for this curiosity? It struck me while working with Ubbo-Sathla on various projects. I began to wonder about the concept of ¡°antagonists¡± created by the universe. When a destroyer with overwhelming power appears, the universe¡¯s will creates a countermeasure. This countermeasure could be a living being, a sentient celestial body, or a form of energy. Simply put, if an external entity¡¯s interference creates a ¡°Demon King,¡± the universe¡¯s will creates a ¡°Hero¡± to counterbalance it. I understand the principles behind this system, how antagonists are created, and even ways to circumvent it, thanks to my knowledge of the multiverse. But isn¡¯t it fascinating to see how it would actually unfold? I wanted to see how a hero would emerge to defeat a Demon King I created. To do this, I planned to copy my universe. You might ask, why not just try it in another universe? Well, that¡¯s a valid point, but honestly, I¡¯m curious. In this world with the Lubaran tribe, Yujin, elves, and all sorts of unique elements, where and how would a hero appear? If I meddled with the original universe, I might inadvertently cause the elves¡¯ extinction. So, this is more like a backup. No, not just a backup¡ªit¡¯s like creating an identical universe to run a highly realistic simulation. Even if this copied universe were to be destroyed, the original one I nurtured would remain intact. ¡­Does that make me sound too much like a psychopath? But for an external entity, this is quite a humane approach. Many others would simply destroy the original universe out of boredom, without bothering with copies or backups. # Parallel universes. The beings living within a universe cannot fathom how absurdly common and insignificantly fleeting they are. These insignificant creatures, unable to ever fully comprehend even the single universe they inhabit, crumble away without realizing how ubiquitous their existence is. If they understood how trivial their universe is to the eternal, immortal beings outside, they would go mad. They would realize that their world and their very existence are incomprehensibly small and insignificant. This is especially true for species like the Lubaran tribe, who pride themselves on their supposed understanding of the universe. Do they know that their universe¡¯s fate was fixed by an unimaginably vast and overwhelming being? And that an even greater being shattered that fate and copied their world exactly? They cannot know. They cannot even sense it. They can only continue to live, believing themselves to be the ultimate rulers and understanders of their universe, waiting for the end of days. How tragic it is to be like printer ink, easily replicated and created at will. Their destiny is to be destroyed and disappear for the sake of mere curiosity and amusement. And even that will not stir any emotion in the great beings, for they can always create more. ¡°¡­Oh.¡± And so, the creatures of the replicated world were faced with the arrival of a cosmic Demon King, a destroyer of their existence. ¡°What is that?¡± ¡°A giant monster¡­?¡± A writhing behemoth beyond comprehension. Its size was immeasurable, and all that could be discerned was its ability to completely obscure the star-speckled sky. Typically, a giant monster might span hundreds to thousands of kilometers. An A-rank giant monster, the size of a modest asteroid, could effortlessly obliterate a planet just by its presence. But this entity was different. Its diameter was roughly 100,000 kilometers¡ªa size so vast that it defied the physical limitations of solid matter, let alone a living creature. Its tentacles, each potentially hundreds of kilometers thick, coalesced into an immense monstrosity. The first appearance of this being was on a colonial planet belonging to the Teran species, a member of the Galactic Union. Its emergence, blanketing the sky as if a sun had drawn near, left the people incapable of action. They could neither respond nor flee in terror; they were paralyzed. All they could do was watch with a sense of futility as the colossal tentacles slowly descended upon their planet. Why? There was no understanding why. Why had this being appeared here, and why did such a thing exist at all? Why them? They couldn¡¯t ask why. Even if they did, no answer would come. That colossal being had no interest in such trivialities. ¡°Ah¡­¡± ¡°¡­¡± An absolute judgment descended upon them. There was no escape, no way to even consider a response. The military commander overseeing the Teran species on the colonial planet was equally powerless. Battleships? Space fighters? The neutron cannon currently being developed with the help of the Lubaran tribe? What use would they be? And yet, someone, in a desperate bid to resist the impending doom, pressed the button. ¡°¡­Damn it!!¡± It was the button to fire the neutron cannon, still in its developmental and incomplete stage. Once perfected, this formidable weapon was said to be capable of erasing an entire continent from the planet¡¯s surface. Shiiiiing©¤ The energy of the neutron cannon began to charge. It mimicked the overwhelming gravity, rotation, and terrifying light and radiation emitted by a neutron star. An attack so powerful that it could pierce through and destroy any celestial body, save for a black hole. ¡°Oh no¡­¡± ¡°Gulp.¡± Seeing this, the Teran command harbored a glimmer of hope. Perhaps they could defeat that impossibly gigantic monster? If not defeat, maybe they could at least drive it away? Or at the very least, inflict a minor wound? Hope. It was like a sweet drug. Facing the absolute sentence of death, they had been waiting in vain. But the moment even a sliver of hope appeared, people began to expect. Wooooong©¤ BOOOOM!! With a tremendous roar and searing heat, the neutron cannon fired. Due to its incomplete state, the launch platform couldn¡¯t withstand the energy and melted into a shapeless mass. But it had fired. A super-energetic projectile flew towards the colossal mass of tentacles, the size of a star. Fssss¡­ The moment it touched that enormous body, the tiny neutron cannon, no more significant than a toothpick, fizzled out and vanished. It caused no damage. In fact, it seemed the entity didn¡¯t even notice the impact, showing no reaction at all. It didn¡¯t even bother to block it, as if it posed no threat whatsoever. Despair. The hope that had swelled within them turned into disappointment in an instant. People began to realize the gravity of their situation. They realized they could do nothing. A horrifyingly futile end awaited them. ¡°Ahhhh¡­ AAAAAHHH!!!¡± ¡°Why! Why is this happening?!¡± ¡°Save us, save us, save us, save us¡­.¡± sea??h th§× n?vel_Fire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. And then they understood. They should have never harbored false hope and simply waited. If they had, they might have died without ever knowing such dreadful despair. Why, why did they foolishly cling to hope? But it was too late. In the depths of their horrifying despair, they could only wait for the colossal tentacles to descend upon them. Crunch©¤ The tentacles completely enveloped the planet, and in an instant, the planet was destroyed and absorbed into the monstrous entity¡¯s body. The screams of those dying on the planet were not even heard. Chapter 45: The End of Arrogance Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 45 Hmm, I released some ultra-giant monsters into the test replica universe. They possess power comparable to mid-tier Outer Gods. Previously, I briefly mentioned ¡°Batoth Zakura Mog,¡± classified as a mid-tier Outer God by the Galactic Union. These monsters are slightly weaker than that. Well, Batoth Zakura Mog was drawn into the void and returned to the rift by the Creator¡¯s power. When I copied the universe, Outer Gods weren¡¯t replicated, so there are no Outer Gods in this test replica universe. If they had been copied, even lower-tier Gods like Dalos might have been replicated. I could potentially replicate lower-tier Gods, but Dalos, one of the top-tier Outer Gods, is beyond my capability. For reference, I excluded the Elf God Rios, the elves, and Yujin from the replication. Even though this is a test replica universe, I don¡¯t want to witness my creations being annihilated. Since they were set to never exist in this universe, there won¡¯t be any confusion about their sudden disappearance. Therefore, there are no beings stronger than these ultra-giant monsters in this universe. I created them anew with my authority, ensuring that the universe will produce an adversary to counter them. If the will of the universe operates correctly in the replica, that is. I¡¯m looking forward to it. Previously, Ubbo-Sathla created beings comparable to lower-tier Outer Gods, like the Elf God Rios. The Lubaran tribe managed to kill them, albeit with significant sacrifices. But this time, the ultra-giant monsters possess power equivalent to genuine mid-tier Outer Gods, far stronger than before. Of course, unlike true Outer Gods, these monsters are mortal beings with limited lifespans. They can be killed, though their abilities are comparable to those of Outer Gods. They are formidable enough to be called Demon Kings that could lead a cosmic civilization to ruin. If they were beings beyond top-tier Outer Gods, they could easily control the entire universe, and no adversary could stand against them. But these ultra-giant monsters are not that invincible. Their abilities might be on par with Outer Gods, but they are still killable. Now, let¡¯s see it. Show me the adversary born from the will of the universe. Recently, Yujin has been busy gathering allies, and the elves have been rapidly advancing thanks to Rios and the spirits of light. However, nothing fundamentally different has happened compared to before. The original universe¡¯s storyline is too predictable and lacks excitement. News of the catastrophe on one of the Teran colony planets quickly spread throughout the Galactic Union. ¡°It¡¯s an incredibly massive cosmic lifeform.¡± ¡°Its size defies the limits of physical possibility¡­¡± Reports continued to flood into the headquarters of the Galactic Union. Elder Edgar, one of the elders of the Lubaran tribe, clicked his tongue and spoke. ¡°It was the same when we first discovered A-rank giant monsters. We said their size was physically impossible. We don¡¯t know everything about the universe. Just as there are beings with the gravity of a planet, it¡¯s not surprising to find lifeforms with the characteristics of a star.¡± A monstrous being with a size of 100,000 kilometers. Each of its countless tentacles was hundreds of kilometers thick, an absurd existence. Yet, Elder Edgar did not panic. When observing the universe, one finds countless phenomena that defy common sense. Black holes were once purely theoretical, as were neutron stars and black dwarfs. There was a time when no one believed these Gods existed. Going further back, there was a time when people didn¡¯t understand the relationship between planets and stars, or even the concept of the universe itself. No one has yet to fully comprehend the universe. This means that the appearance of beings beyond common sense is not surprising. And this time, it was just another one of those anomalies, he thought. Of course, he couldn¡¯t imagine that this entity was a Demon King created by a being from outside the universe, meant to drive this universe to ruin. He had no inkling that it was a lifeform that couldn¡¯t exist under the laws of the universe. ¡°Our task is simple. If that thing continues to threaten the Galactic Union, we must either eliminate it or drive it to a place where it can cause no harm.¡± ¡°But the neutron cannon developed by the Teran species couldn¡¯t even scratch it¡­¡± ¡°Though it was still in development and unstable, its destructive power was comparable to our Lubaran neutron cannon.¡± The members of the Union headquarters trembled with anxiety. At that moment, the elders of the Lubaran tribe gathered behind Edgar. There were ten of them in total, the ten strongest elders of the Lubaran tribe. They were essentially the ten strongest beings in the universe. ¡°Do not worry. Even with our assistance, the Teran weapon is still theirs. It is fundamentally different from ours.¡± ¡°We have many weapons besides the neutron cannon.¡± ¡°Its destructive power is unparalleled. Didn¡¯t we personally take down the lower-tier Outer God codenamed ¡®Shoggoth¡¯ with our own strength?¡± The elders of the Lubaran tribe spoke proudly. The lower-tier Outer God, codenamed ¡®Shoggoth,¡¯ was a quasi-Outer God created by Ubbo-Sathla through various experiments to dominate this universe. Though it had the power comparable to a lower-tier Outer God, it had a physical form and life, making it killable. Despite this, its overwhelming power was sufficient to be considered an Outer God, and the Galactic Union had given it a codename and treated it as an official Outer God. They did so because they had personally destroyed it, showcasing their ability to eliminate even beings from outside the universe. Their arrogance from having defeated such an entity led them to believe they could overcome this new threat in the same way. They seemed to forget¡ªor perhaps deliberately ignored¡ªthat they had no means to deal with Batoth Zakura Mog and had to push it into the void. Or maybe they remembered and thought that if they couldn¡¯t win, they could just guide it into the void to prevent it from causing harm for a while. Either way, their arrogance knew no bounds. ¡°Track its movements and keep reporting. In the meantime, we will gather our full strength. No matter how powerful it is, if we combine the forces of the Galactic Union, we will surely achieve victory.¡± ¡°Yes!¡± ¡°Understood!¡± And this arrogance spread to the members of the Union as well. The ultra-giant monster slowly but surely made its way toward the headquarters of the Galactic Union. As if it had a clear destination, it devoured planets and stars along its path, converting them into its energy and evolving in the process. The realization that it was evolving came when it attacked a planet managed by the Lubaran fleet along its route. ¡°Captain, let¡¯s not engage. We¡¯ve received orders from the Union headquarters to gather our forces first.¡± ¡°Hah! The elders are overly cautious! Just because it swallowed a few Teran planets and some insignificant stars, they act like this.¡± S~ea??h the ¦Çov§×lFire .net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. The fleet captain, filled with arrogance, issued his command. ¡°We¡¯ll stop it. If they¡¯re so scared, I¡¯ll capture that thing and earn great merit! Maybe then I¡¯ll be chosen as the next elder!¡± Arrogance. The captain was brimming with it. His arrogance surpassed even that of the Lubaran tribe, who believed they could somehow gather their strength to defeat an Outer God-level monster. He thought a single fleet, capable of taking down giant monsters, could defeat this absurd creature that devoured planets and stars indiscriminately. His judgment was clouded by his ambition for promotion. And the result was inevitable. The fleet suffered a crushing defeat. The astonishing part was that the monster, at the tip of its tentacle, condensed energy and mimicked the neutron cannon seen on the Teran colony planet. ¡°¡­What?¡± It happened in an instant. One of the ships was hit by a neutron cannon and shattered into pieces. The monster had been consuming planets and stars, accumulating energy within itself, and evolving to use that energy in various ways. The energy it amassed made the single Teran neutron cannon seem insignificant. Hundreds of neutron cannons fired from the tips of its hundreds of tentacles. Boom! Boom! Boom! In an instant, the entire fleet was obliterated, and the end of arrogance was utter destruction. ¡°¡­This can¡¯t be happening. How could it¡­?¡± The captain shook his head in disbelief, but reality did not change. The monster effortlessly mimicked the powerful neutron cannon, a weapon created through immense effort, and fired hundreds of cosmic-scale strategic weapons. There was no way to win. The captain¡¯s arrogance vanished, replaced by an overwhelming sense of despair. ¡°Damn it.¡± No matter what they did, the impending doom could not be avoided. Just as the creatures living in the universe could not prevent its annihilation, so too could they not stop this monster. Yes, this was the end of the universe. The captain thought this as he was exposed to the neutron cannon and completely disintegrated. Translator Note: I changed the name from Eugene to Yujin, since it will fit the story better. I will update the previous chapter and the following accordingly. (Same announcement with chapter 25) Chapter 46: Coup d’état Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 46 It seemed that the emergence of an adversary wasn¡¯t as simple as I thought. It didn¡¯t appear immediately. Well, if it were that easy, it wouldn¡¯t be the will of the universe but rather the interference of an Outer Gody. For now, I¡¯ll leave that side as it is and take a look at the situation in the original universe. [Alright, let¡¯s go.] Oh, it seems Yujin has finished gathering his companions. The group consists of four members in total. The protagonist, Yujin. Kon Arche, a fellow Teran and an adventurer who traveled the universe enjoying his freedom. ¡­? Why did that guy join the group? Maybe he had some dissatisfaction with the Galactic Union¡¯s methods? [Hehe, traveling with you is full of exciting adventures. It¡¯s a real thrill!] Hmm, it seems he joined simply because he liked Yujin. He doesn¡¯t seem to have any particular thoughts about the Galactic Union or the Lubaran tribe. It looks like he doesn¡¯t care whether they fall or not, as long as he¡¯s having fun. Well, he was the type to approach a supernova explosion just to watch it up close. He even documented his encounters with Outer God that would drive others insane. I remember chasing him away when he came near the Elf planet before. Another member is a rough-looking woman dressed in revealing clothes¡ªhot pants and a tank top. Her slightly pink skin and green eyes suggest she might be a descendant of the Lorian tribe. The Lorian tribe, which refused to join the Galactic Union and was subsequently targeted and annihilated by the Lubaran tribe. Judging by her rough appearance and the skull tattoo on her arm, symbolizing piracy, she seemed to be a space pirate. Yujin, this guy, even recruited a space pirate. Or perhaps, since he¡¯s planning to overthrow the Galactic Union and take down the Lubaran tribe, it makes sense to ally with a space pirate. Especially if that pirate is a victim of the Lubaran tribe¡¯s genocide, the setup is perfect. [Are you sure about this, young master?] [Stop calling me young master. I¡¯m a discarded son anyway.] The last member of the group was surprisingly a Lubaran. He was one of the sons of a Lubaran elder, almost like a prince. However, due to his father¡¯s numerous illegal activities and suspicious behavior, he became disillusioned. While wandering after leaving home, he met Yujin and decided to betray his father and withdraw from the Galactic Union. A famous adventurer interested in the protagonist, a heroine with a painful past, and a young master who betrayed the villain. Wow, the composition of the companions is straight out of a classic shonen manga. It¡¯s refreshing to see such a classic setup after being used to protagonists who are either solo powerhouses or have comedic sidekicks. Though, ability-wise, it still feels like the protagonist is the main powerhouse. In any case, with Elder Jupiter and his followers, along with the forces gathered separately, it seemed like a sizable group was forming. Is this the real beginning? Overthrowing the Galactic Union¡­! Damn, I originally planned to raise the elves for this. But that would have taken at least 500 to 1,000 years. I was thinking too much from my own perspective. For ordinary life forms, that¡¯s an unimaginably long time. Maybe it¡¯s because I¡¯ve become a being for whom time has no meaning, but my sense of time has become blurred. After all, it¡¯s been several years since I transformed from a human to an Outer God, even by Galactic Union standards. Several years? How many years has it been? ¡­Hmm, I don¡¯t know. Strangely, while everything else is perfectly stored in my mind, my memories of my past life are oddly hazy. Now, I only remember that I was once human. I wonder if, eventually, my personality and everything else will disappear, and I¡¯ll become a complete Outer God. ¡°Grandpa Jupiter!¡± ¡°Welcome back, Yujin.¡± About a year had passed. Yujin had been diligently gathering companions to support his cause, and Elder Jupiter had been making various preparations during that time. When they reunited, both seemed quite pleased with the results, meeting each other with joyful faces. ¡°Kon Arche. I didn¡¯t expect to see you again like this.¡± ¡°Long time no see, Elder Jupiter. Ah, though we¡¯ve often met through communications, so perhaps it¡¯s not that long?¡± ¡°Hahaha, I enjoyed your book. ¡®Things I Encountered in the Universe,¡¯ right?¡± Yujin¡¯s interview at the Magic Tournament and several previous meetings had already brought Kon Arche and Elder Jupiter together. Nevertheless, it had been quite a while since they met in person, so they greeted each other warmly. ¡°Is this the first time we¡¯re meeting in person? Well, nice to meet you.¡± ¡°Yes, nice to meet you, Celine. I never thought I¡¯d see a living Lorian again.¡± Celine of the Lorian tribe greeted him awkwardly. Initially, she disliked Elder Jupiter simply because he was an elder of the Union. However, through Yujin¡¯s persuasion and conversations with Elder Jupiter, she realized he was a good person. Despite this, her past resentment towards Union elders made the interaction slightly uncomfortable. Elder Jupiter, aware of her feelings, treated her gently to ease her awkwardness and tension. ¡°Elder Jupiter.¡± ¡°Kotritas. I suppose I don¡¯t need to call you ¡®young master¡¯ anymore.¡± ¡°Hahaha¡­¡± Kotritas, the youngest of the three sons of Lubaran elder ¡®Ocatalo,¡¯ also felt awkward. Even Elder Jupiter seemed a bit uneasy around him, his voice slightly trembling. With the arrival of Elder Jupiter¡¯s apprentice, Lowie Hendrick, the entire group was finally assembled. ¡°I¡¯ll explain once more. Currently, the Lubaran tribe has created a secret laboratory beneath the Galactic Union headquarters. There, they capture and dissect numerous species to understand their structures and conduct various human experiments.¡± The Lubaran tribe¡¯s secret laboratory. Under the guise of protection, they managed various life forms, including those they had driven to extinction like the Lorian tribe. They even captured members of thriving species within the Galactic Union, such as the Teran and Meias tribes. ¡°They aim to discover the unique traits and knowledge of these species, assimilate them, and achieve greater advancements.¡± As he spoke, Elder Jupiter played a hard-to-obtain CCTV footage of the laboratory. [Groooan¡­] [Gasp, gasp¡­] The footage showed various intelligent life forms, including Terans, Meias, Lorians, and other protected species, captured and twisted into grotesque forms, writhing in immense pain. In front of them, Lubaran researchers casually observed and took notes on their tablets. ¡°¡­These scum.¡± Elder Jupiter, recognizing the scene, ground his teeth in anger. ¡°Though I heard about it through communications, seeing the actual footage is horrifying.¡± ¡°My father did this¡­?¡± ¡°Ugh¡­!¡± ¡°Celine! Are you okay?¡± Though they had heard about it, seeing the footage in person left them speechless. Kon Arche seemed quite shocked, and Kotritas, unable to believe his father was involved in such atrocities, turned pale. Celine, recalling painful memories, even retched. ¡°We don¡¯t need to see any more. This will convince the other elders and the species of the Union.¡± Yujin said as he turned off the footage. Though he had gathered his companions for a purpose, he had grown fond of them and didn¡¯t want them to suffer by watching such painful scenes. ¡°Now we have a clear justification and a solid plan. When the general Lubaran population sees this, public opinion will turn against the elders, and we¡¯ll only need to deal with the elders and a few soldiers.¡± ¡°But they won¡¯t acknowledge it.¡± At Elder Jupiter¡¯s words, Yujin smiled faintly. ¡°That¡¯s why we gathered our allies with the intention of using force. And we also told Grandpa Jupiter to gather his forces well.¡± S~ea??h the nov§×lF~ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. Once this is over, the elders of the Meias tribe are set to oust the Lubaran tribe and take control. This is because Yujin and his companions lack the reputation and justification to become the leaders of the Union. Yujin, at least, has the title of the magic tournament winner and the reputation of being a rare magical genius from the Teran tribe. However, he doesn¡¯t have the fame or justification to suddenly push out the Lubaran tribe and take their place. Kon Arche, although famous throughout the universe, is just a Teran adventurer. Celine is a former space pirate. The only one with some justification is Kotritas, the son of a Lubaran elder, but no one in their right mind would give the position to a relative of an elder who conducted such horrific experiments and committed numerous corrupt acts. Thus, the only ones with both fame and justification are the elders of the Meias tribe, including Elder Jupiter. That¡¯s why Yujin decided to put them forward. Of course, the ultimate power will lie with Elder Jupiter as the chairman of the council of elders. His decisions will essentially be influenced by Yujin, making Yujin the de facto leader of the Galactic Union. This was their plan¡­ Yujin¡¯s plan. Chapter 47: Adversary Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 47 S§×ar?h the N?vel?ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. Ah, so Yujin¡¯s rebellion is finally starting. Has it been ten years since Yujin was created? That¡¯s quite a long time in human terms. From now on, it¡¯s the kind of scene you often see in movies or comics. The companions Yujin has gathered will shine, with Yujin himself taking the lead, causing chaos at the Union headquarters. In the end, they¡¯ll capture the Lubaran elders, and that Lubaran young master will kill his father, adding an emotional twist! They¡¯ll expose the existence of the laboratory, revealing the Lubaran elders¡¯ atrocities and completely ousting them. Finally, as per Yujin¡¯s plan, the Meias race will be established as the representative species of the Union, with Yujin pulling the strings from behind. Essentially, the Galactic Union will fall into Yujin¡¯s hands. Well, it hasn¡¯t progressed that far yet, but honestly, it¡¯s predictable. With Yujin¡¯s current abilities, no matter how much the Lubaran tribe struggles, they can¡¯t win. In a fleet war, maybe, but on an individual level, no one can surpass Yujin. Even if the plot is predictable, the visual spectacle of the battle between the Lubaran tribe, armed with advanced SF technology, and Yujin, who has honed his special abilities to the extreme, will be highly enjoyable. So, don¡¯t miss the highlights. By the way, how are things going on the elf side? Thanks to the overly generous care of the great elf god Rios, they were developing at an incredible speed. The last time I checked, they were creating steam engines. Of course, that was based on the most scientifically advanced village, Lumolasi. But since scientific knowledge has been spread to everyone, it shouldn¡¯t be much different. It¡¯s just a matter of how each village develops it according to their tendencies. [The train connecting the scattered mines and villages has been completed! Now we can transport large quantities of ore at once!] [Hooray!] Unbelievable. How long has it been since they invented the steam engine, and now they¡¯ve built a steam locomotive? Is that part of Rios¡¯s knowledge, or did they come up with it themselves? Given the elves¡¯ desire for progress and their exceptional intelligence, it¡¯s not far-fetched to think they devised it on their own. Although the steam locomotive is slower than the running speed of elves with their powerful physical abilities, its significant advantage lies in its ability to transport vast amounts of ore without any issues. Moreover, it requires less physical effort and manpower, allowing the surplus workforce to engage in other tasks. The ability to travel long distances without much effort is highly significant in the context of the industrial revolution. It means they can now transport large quantities of ore and other resources at once, move large populations efficiently, and easily bring in goods from specific regions. The invention of the steam locomotive is a cornerstone for substantial advancements in productivity, culture, and military capabilities. Currently, the elves are experiencing tremendous territorial expansion due to the industrial revolution. They have mines for extracting necessary ores, factories for producing goods, and residential areas. Some powerful factions have absorbed surrounding villages, and the territory has grown so vast that even the physically strong and fast elves find it challenging to traverse it on foot. They now possess enormous territories comparable to small nations, far beyond mere villages or cities. Naturally, their population surpassed the ten-thousand mark long ago, and the children born are growing rapidly. The first generation born after settlement is already toddling around energetically. By elf planetary standards, they are now about 2-3 years old, roughly equivalent to 9-10 years in human age, with physical growth to match. The religious factions of Lumolasi and Rodri are notable, but the most active in territorial expansion is the faction of Muwan. Located in one of the four large continents in the southern hemisphere, they control an enormous territory, nearly one-fifth of the continent. If we think in terms of the Earth I originally lived on, Muwan¡¯s faction has taken control of an area larger than one-fifth of the continent of Oceania. This is a species that has only existed for ten years. During this time, they either killed or absorbed all the elf factions they encountered. Their population is incomparable to others, reaching 100,000¡ªequivalent to the initial 100 elf groups created in the early days. [There is another continent beyond this vast body of water. I want to go there.] Not stopping there, Muwan expanded his territory to the coastline and began preparing to venture across the sea to a new continent. To properly navigate their vastly expanded territory, they needed a means of transportation. Muwan focused more on developing ships than on land transportation. His ambition for domination was greater than anticipated. This is getting quite interesting. I¡¯m curious to see how Muwan¡¯s empire will fare as it starts to extend its influence across the sea. However, their population is still woefully inadequate. Despite their vast territory and advanced technology, they haven¡¯t had enough time to increase their population. No matter how advanced a society becomes, manpower remains the most crucial resource. They will need some time to grow their population. Elf god Rios seemed to understand this, advising the elves to focus on increasing their population and strengthening their internal foundation rather than expanding too rapidly. [It is the word of the god! Great Rios!] [Great Rios!] [The spirits are right. We lack the manpower to match our capabilities. Let¡¯s take some time to think, even if it means a temporary slowdown.] [Understood. We will convey this.] [Hmph, I don¡¯t care about that. We can grow our population by conquering and absorbing others.] [We will follow you, Muwan.] While their approaches differed, everyone except Muwan accepted this advice and entered a period of relative calm. Hmm¡­ Muwan, having ambition is good, but charging ahead without solidifying your base is risky. Without a strong foundation, it¡¯s like an apartment without steel reinforcement¡ªeasily shattered by small cracks or external shocks. While he has the qualities of a ruler, he may not be a good leader. As always, I find myself leaning more towards Lasi or Rodri. It¡¯s a shame, really. But wait, since when did Rodri become strong enough to compete with Lasi or Muwan? Why did I take that for granted?! Is this the gaslighting effect of a cult? Rodri, you are terrifying¡­! # Meanwhile, in the cloned universe where the great demon king capable of destroying the universe was unleashed, interesting events were unfolding. The Lubaran fleet, the grand armada of space pirates, ordinary planets with life, and shining stars¡ªall were being destroyed and devoured by a gigantic monster. Its sheer size and overwhelming power forced everyone into submission, causing some in the Galactic Union to flee as far as possible into space. ¡°Don¡¯t worry! We can win.¡± The elders of the Lubaran tribe still boasted confidently about their chances. However, they knew the truth. The fact that one of their fleets was annihilated without leaving a scratch on the monster meant that no matter how many fleets they had, the result would be the same. ¡®We need to escape while we buy time.¡¯ ¡®Honestly, if the fleet can¡¯t handle it, what can we do?¡¯ The elders were filled with thoughts of fleeing while the Union¡¯s combined forces bought them time. It¡¯s quite pathetic for those who claim to be the universe¡¯s strongest warriors. But I understand. When a space fleet, akin to a floating armed planet firing neutron beams, is swept away without doing anything, it¡¯s hard to blame them. No matter how strong an individual¡¯s power is, what¡¯s the use? Honestly, even Yujin would have fled from this. But quite some time has passed, and there¡¯s no sign of anything appearing. It¡¯s about time the will of the universe or whatever creates an adversary. If this keeps up, the Union will be completely destroyed first. [¡­?] At that moment, a special change was detected in a distant part of the universe. ¡°Ugh¡­?! What, what¡¯s happening all of a sudden?¡± A giant light. As the fabric of space twisted, some force of the universe was transmitted to the space adventurer Kon Arche. It was an immense power, on a different level from anything before. Of course, it was still a small force compared to the universe¡¯s vastness, weaker than even a lower-tier outer god. But by the standards of beings within the universe, it was an incredible power. It was an overwhelmingly powerful force for a single individual. It felt like the condensed power of a Rank A giant monster. Just by looking, it was clear that he was an adversary. So, Kon Arche was chosen as an adversary? In the original universe, he was Yujin¡¯s companion. Both in the original and the cloned universe, he played a significant role. If I hadn¡¯t created Yujin, perhaps Kon Arche would have been the protagonist of this universe¡¯s story. ¡°This, this is¡­¡± The immense power that had come to him. Surprisingly, this phenomenon was happening in other parts of the universe as well. Including Kon Arche, there were four locations in total. Four adversaries had been born. Chapter 48: Subjugation of the Demon King Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 48 Swoosh©¤ ¡°Aaaah! Get out of the way!¡± ¡°Turn to starboard! Quickly!¡± Tentacles, larger and thicker than the ships themselves, reached out. Despite the frantic barrage of bullets and shells, they continued to approach undeterred. Naturally, there was no damage. Even when concentrated fire caused slight scratches, they healed instantly. It was nearly impossible to inflict wounds, and even if they managed, it was meaningless. This realization drove the soldiers to despair. ¡°Headquarters! Headquarters, respond! Respond, you bastards!!¡± ¡°Damn it¡­ we¡¯re finished.¡± ¡°Aaaah!¡± Crunch! A massive tentacle wrapped around a ship, crushing it under immense pressure until it shattered. The colossal ship, made from the strongest artificial metal combining tungsten, titanium, and special minerals, and costing astronomical amounts to build, was destroyed in an instant. Plasma lasers, neutron beams, hydrogen bombs, even planet-destroying penetration missiles¡ªnothing worked. They even tried graviton bombs and space-warping cannons, modeled after the infinite gravity of black holes, but to no avail. At best, they managed to sever a single tentacle, but even that regenerated within minutes. It was the epitome of despair. A terrifying despair that they could do nothing awaited them. To make matters worse, there was no contact with the headquarters¡¯ elders. ¡°They used us as shields to escape, those trash.¡± ¡°Damn it all!!¡± Realizing they had been used as fodder, rage consumed them. But rage was meaningless. From the moment they faced the monster, there was no option to flee. No option for victory. They could only struggle futilely until they were either crushed by the massive tentacles or swallowed whole into the gaping maw to be digested as prey. One might think, why not just run away? But the monster seemed intent on not letting anything in its sight escape. Whether it possessed the intelligence to judge or not, it swiftly captured and destroyed any ship or spacecraft attempting to flee. That was why they stood still, unable to fight or run¡ªinstinctively hoping to cling to life for even a second longer. All that remained for them was to await death. Many soldiers, succumbing to despair, took their own lives. [¡­¡­] As the end of the Union seemed imminent, suddenly, the monster¡¯s massive tentacles stopped their slaughter and became still. ¡°¡­?¡± ¡°What¡¯s happening?¡± The soldiers, momentarily confused by the abrupt halt, watched as four small silhouettes appeared before them. ¡°Are those¡­ people?¡± Amazingly, the four silhouettes belonged to individuals of various tribes. # In the universe, there are four fundamental forces: Gravity, arising from the interaction between masses. Electromagnetic force, governing the interactions between charges. Strong nuclear force, the source of fusion energy, binding protons and neutrons. Weak nuclear force, causing radioactive decay and being the source of fission energy. These four forces are the foundation, the truth, and the essence of the universe. All matter and phenomena in the universe stem from these forces. If a person could directly manipulate these forces, the possibilities would be unimaginable. They could potentially destroy and create the universe, playing the role of a cosmic creator. This immense power was divided among four beings, making them adversaries to the gigantic monster: Celine, A Lorrian woman wielding the power of gravity. Kotritas, The son of a Lubaran elder, possessing the power of weak nuclear force. Lowie Hendrik, A Meias tribe candidate for the next elder, wielding the power of electromagnetic force. Kon Arche, A Terra tribe space adventurer, wielding the power of strong nuclear force. S§×ar?h the N?vel(F)ire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. ¡­This combination feels very familiar. They¡¯re Yujin¡¯s companions. It seems they weren¡¯t just randomly gathered around Yujin. These individuals are protagonist-level characters, playing significant and pivotal roles in this universe. Indeed, their backstories are perfect. The sole survivor of a destroyed tribe. The abandoned child of a corrupt elder. The apprentice of the greatest magician. An adventurer from a minor tribe traveling the universe. It¡¯s the perfect backstory for a shonen manga protagonist. Ah, so they became the adversaries. It¡¯s fascinating. The will of the universe directly selected them and divided the cosmic forces among them. There are cases where an entire tribe is born as adversaries, or a god-like being emerges. But here, the power is lent to create heroes. That power is indeed formidable. The others are on par with lower-tier outer gods, and Kon Arche, with the strongest power, isn¡¯t jokingly comparable to a lower-tier outer god in terms of influence and might within the universe. At this rate, my gigantic monster might lose. But then again, it¡¯s only natural since the adversaries are created to be able to win. What happens if the opponent is beyond their capacity to handle? If I think about when I or another outer god suddenly intrudes, it seems they do nothing in the face of overwhelming power. They struggle against winnable foes, but otherwise, they just hope the threat passes quietly. Interesting. There¡¯s a lot to explore. For instance, if the same adversary appears in identical environments within identical cloned universes facing the same enemy, would the adversary be the same, or would it vary? What if the environment is slightly different? Can the type of adversary be influenced? It seems no outer god has directly cloned a universe for such experiments, and there are no similar reference materials. In other words, there¡¯s much I won¡¯t know unless I experiment myself. It appears that such tedious domestic experiments aren¡¯t a hobby for outer gods. Anyway, since I¡¯m having fun, maybe I¡¯ll try some experiments after this is over? [Oh.] While I was lost in thought, the battle between the gigantic monster and the four adversaries began. They unleashed nuclear fission energy, manipulated gravity, electrocuted with electromagnetic force, and blew off tentacles with nuclear fusion energy. In fact, the Union¡¯s latest weapons operated on similar principles¡ªrailguns, graviton bombs, neutron beams, hydrogen bombs. However, the difference was that these adversaries wielded the raw, natural forces of the universe itself. Naturally, their power was incomparable. Even if one tries to mimic a black hole or a neutron star, it¡¯s infinitely weaker than the real thing. That¡¯s exactly what it felt like. They hurled black holes, threw neutron stars to explode, and compressed cosmic radiation storms into high-density blasts. It was a battle beyond the imagination of ordinary mortals. ¡°¡­My God.¡± ¡°Where did those people come from¡­?¡± People couldn¡¯t help but marvel. But to me, it looked like ants fighting each other. If I were still human, I¡¯d be terrified, but now, as a top-tier outer god who orchestrates such battles, it¡¯s just amusing. It¡¯s like watching ants pick up grains of sand and throw them at each other¡ªfascinating in its own way. ¡­Wait, isn¡¯t that incredibly cool? If I posted a video of this, it would easily hit a million views. Unfortunately, most outer gods aren¡¯t interested in such things, so even if I recorded it, it wouldn¡¯t get much attention. Anyway, after an intense battle filled with immense power and exploding tentacles, the four adversaries emerged victorious. [Groooar¡­] ¡°Wow, we won! Those people defeated the gigantic monster!¡± ¡°My God¡­¡± Though they were battered and on the brink of death, the adversaries had won. The 100,000 km-long tentacle mass was now so thoroughly destroyed that its original form was unrecognizable, completely immobilized. The colossal space monster shattered and dispersed into the cosmos. So, this is how it ends. What a spectacle. The birth of adversaries, the subjugation of the demon king. I saw what I wanted to see. Now that it¡¯s over¡­ I should clean this up. Leaving it unattended might cause problems in other universes, especially our original universe. Natural cosmic collisions are one thing, but this is an artificial creation¡ªessentially a man-made disaster. Or rather, a god-made disaster since I¡¯m an outer god? Hmm? That would just be a natural disaster then¡­ Anyway, leaving an artificial cloned universe unattended could cause issues, and if it¡¯s because of me, it would leave a bad taste. So, I¡¯ll erase it. After all, it¡¯s a universe I cloned, so it shouldn¡¯t matter. It¡¯s not like I¡¯m destroying naturally occurring, well-functioning universes. I¡¯m just erasing cloned existences that never originally existed. Compared to other outer gods who go around wrecking perfectly fine universes, I¡¯m much kinder. I¡¯m not crossing any lines, right? ¡­Or am I? Chapter 49: Emptiness Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 49 ¡°Huff, huff¡­¡± The terrifying fragments of the colossal monster shattered and scattered into space. Kon Arche and the other three adversaries panted as they watched. They had been given the mission by the will of the universe, ¡°I will grant you power, so confront the great evil.¡± Following the pull of this power, they had come here and, quite literally, fought and defeated the giant monster. It was a battle for the survival of the universe. They had emerged victorious. ¡°We won.¡± ¡°¡­Phew.¡± Kon Arche, Lowie Hendrik, Celine, and Kotritas¡ªthese four adversaries were overjoyed that they had prevented the universe¡¯s destruction with their newfound powers. ¡°Whew! That was incredible!¡± ¡°You¡¯re the best! Where did you come from?!¡± ¡°Thank you for saving us!¡± The surviving Union soldiers also expressed their immense gratitude and joy to the adversaries. Of course, since this was space, their voices didn¡¯t carry, but the overwhelming emotions reached the four adversaries clearly. ¡°Kon Arche, that was an incredible ability.¡± ¡°Hey, you¡¯re the Meias elder¡¯s disciple, right? I think I¡¯ve seen you before.¡± ¡°¡­Good job.¡± ¡°Hmph, I don¡¯t talk to the likes of Lubarans.¡± ¡°¡­¡± ¡°Well, maybe you¡¯re not so bad after all.¡± The four adversaries, though newly acquainted and somewhat mismatched, seemed to be in good spirits. Despite not knowing each other well, they had fought back-to-back, risking their lives as comrades. ¡°Ah! Those filthy elder bastards! Let¡¯s drive them out of the Union! They used us as shields and ran away when things got dangerous.¡± ¡°Yeah, if anyone should lead the Union, it should be heroes like those four.¡± ¡°Right, right!¡± Among the Union soldiers, there was a gLowieng consensus to oust the elders who had abandoned them. It seemed the wartime situation had completely ended. But then¡ª Swoosh©¤ ¡°¡­Huh.¡± A soldier noticed something and pointed above his head. ¡°Huh? What is it?¡± ¡°What¡¯s wrong?¡± Following his gaze, the other soldiers looked up and saw it. ¡°¡­¡­¡± ¡°What¡­ is that?¡± A massive, blood-red eye was staring down at them. S~ea??h the N?velFire(.)net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. ¡°Ah¡­¡± ¡°Oh no¡­¡± It was strange. The eye wasn¡¯t within the universe. It was as if they were fish in a bowl, looking out at a person beyond the glass. The eye seemed to be observing them from outside the vast aquarium that was their universe. The moment they faced it, everyone froze. No, they couldn¡¯t move. It felt as if all control over their bodies had been stripped away. What was causing this? Paralysis? Fatigue? Or perhaps¡­ fear. When faced with an indescribable terror, living beings become unable to move, as if their bodies had already given up on life. It was as if they were being told to abandon hope because escape was impossible. The others felt the same. No one could move upon seeing the massive, blood-red eye above them. Astonishingly, this wasn¡¯t limited to just them. Across the entire universe, every living being was looking up at the enormous, red eye floating above. In the universe, there is no inherent up or down. There are only directions where gravity acts and where it doesn¡¯t. Yet, regardless of the direction of gravity, the eye looked down upon every living being, as if it existed in a dimension beyond the universe, in a place that was ¡°above¡± everything. The terror was beyond description. Just facing it caused their bodies to freeze. Many realized what it was. They had come to an understanding. ¡°¡­Ah.¡± An outer god. One that looked down upon the entire universe as if it were a toy. A top-tier outer god. Or perhaps something even beyond that¡­ In any case, the moment Kon Arche saw that eye, a realization struck him. For some reason, a passage from a book he had never read came to mind. The moment he faced its massive eye, an unbearable terror arrived. Just by facing it, the fear exceeded the tolerable limit of his body. It seemed impossible to confront it. Even though they had just annihilated an absurdly powerful outer god-level monster, it wasn¡¯t because their strength had waned. Even if the four adversaries were in perfect condition, they could never stand against it. No, they wouldn¡¯t even be able to reach it. It existed somewhere beyond this universe, somewhere mortals could not even touch. But why? Why had it appeared in our universe? Why did it suddenly look down upon everyone, bringing all things in the universe to a halt? The answer was simple. It had been watching all along. It was just that it hadn¡¯t revealed its presence until now. Why? That too could be roughly guessed. A lower-tier outer god-level colossal monster had suddenly appeared without warning. And as soon as it was barely defeated, a top-tier outer god seemed to lean in as if it had business to attend to. Everything had been a mere amusement for it. It was a bet to see whether its creation would win or the will of the universe would prevail. ¡®Then there¡¯s only one thing left for us to do.¡¯ It had its fun. And when the fun was over, it would discard everything. But it didn¡¯t just leave, it revealed its presence and looked down upon all beings in the universe. What could that mean? It meant that since its business was finished, it was now time to clean up. This universe was nothing more than a simple playground for it. After having so much fun, isn¡¯t it only polite to clean up thoroughly? ¡®Ah¡­ We were nothing but their toys.¡¯ ¡°Ha, hahaha.¡± What did everything they had done amount to? They had worked hard to gain strength, embarked on adventures, and written books. Some had earned money to buy homes, met someone special, and had children¡­ Each person had a life full of meaning, both to themselves and to those around them. But in front of that being, such things held no significance. No matter how they had lived or what they had left behind, everything could be erased with a mere gesture from it. It wasn¡¯t just about dying; the entire world where their lives were recorded would vanish as if it had never existed. ¡®What was the point of it all?¡¯ They had gained power from the universe and fought fiercely to finally bring down the colossal monster. But the conclusion they faced was merely the whim of an incomprehensibly powerful being. ¡®Everything is decided by its whim. The fact that we are still alive, and that we will soon disappear¡­ all of it.¡¯ Emptiness. All emotions¡ªfear, anger, sadness¡ªdisappeared, leaving only a profound sense of emptiness. There was nothing they could do. Nothing they wanted to do. They could only wait for their annihilation. The red eye blinked, as if acknowledging their understanding. And then, immediately after that. Everything vanished completely, as if it had never existed from the beginning. # ¡­Oh, did I go too far? Even if they were clones, those were beings with personalities. No, no. Most outer gods don¡¯t even bother creating clone universes, they just crush, slice, and burn whatever they want. Compared to them, I¡¯m quite considerate. Yes, that¡¯s right. Anyway, it was quite enjoyable to witness and experience adversaries created by the will of the universe. Mortals wielding the four types of cosmic power¡ªbeings capable of causing supernova explosions with a mere gesture. Even though I made it somewhat feasible to defeat them, they still managed to take down a lower-tier outer god-level monster. The will of the universe is stronger than I thought. ¡­So where¡¯s the limit? They couldn¡¯t withstand my annihilation beam, but what about a mid-tier outer god? And I¡¯m curious about the hypothesis I had earlier, ¡°Would the same adversaries emerge under identical conditions?¡± If I were to create different adversaries, how would that process work? Ah, I want to create multiple clone universes in a separate space and conduct various experiments. Should I set up a dedicated lab space like Nyarlathotep? That way, I wouldn¡¯t have to worry about interference from other cosmic bubbles. But if I go to a completely separate space with no connection to the original universe, I can¡¯t link back to it at all. Ugh, why are there limitations even for an outer god? Shouldn¡¯t I be omnipotent? Even if it¡¯s a completely separate and isolated space, I should be able to connect it with my ultimate outer god powers. ¡­Hmm, that might be a bit too unprincipled. Ah! What if I did this instead? What if I copied the current original universe exactly as it is and moved it to an isolated dimension? Dalos seems to be just observing after completing Metalian, so it shouldn¡¯t take long to make a perfect copy. Even if there might be slight differences in incidents and accidents between the original and the clone, the environment would be identical, so events should unfold similarly. Oh, it would be interesting to compare the outcomes between the real original and the cloned original later on. Great, let¡¯s do that. As an outer god, playing on this scale should be more entertaining. Honestly, after spending ten years inside the universe with dramas and simulations, I was starting to get a bit restless. ¡­Hmm, but I should still consider the concept of ¡°copyright¡± (?). I should ask Dalos for permission before cloning Metalian. While the Lubarans were abandoned by Ubbo-Sathla and don¡¯t matter, Metalian is different since Dalos is actively observing it in real-time. Chapter 50: The Creator and the Destroyer Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 50 ¡°Yujin¡­!! What on earth are you thinking?! This is a blatant attack on the Galactic Union!¡± Elder Edgar, one of the elders of the Lubaran tribe, shouted as he looked at a man with dark hair who was extending a hand brimming with dense mana energy. The man was a member of the Terra tribe. Despite being a Terra, he possessed exceptional magical prowess, which had led him to cause several incidents. Recently, there had been rumors that he was gathering unsavory individuals and plotting something, prompting caution. However, no one had imagined he would brazenly storm into the Union headquarters and attack them. There was another unexpected factor. Yujin was far stronger than anticipated. They had thought he would be on par with the elders of the Meias tribe at best, but that was not the case. Even with the Lubaran tribe¡¯s top-tier serum and the latest nano-suit equipment, they were no match for him. Elder Edgar, along with the other elders, had all been defeated. Some fell to other rebels, including Elder Jupiter, but more than half¡ªsix elders¡ªdied at Yujin¡¯s hands. They had no choice but to acknowledge it. Yujin and the rebels were strong enough to overthrow them. But why? Why suddenly resort to such actions? Was it just for power? Even if they used force, the Galactic Union wouldn¡¯t fall into their hands. While the Lubaran tribe held the most power as the highest-ranking species, the other species wouldn¡¯t accept such brute-force rule without some justification. ¡°Ask the underground researchers about that. I¡¯m just doing what I want,¡± Yujin replied nonchalantly. ¡°¡­?!¡± Underground researchers. The moment Elder Edgar heard those words, he realized they were finished. They knew about the underground laboratory. Once that was exposed, the elders of the Lubaran tribe would be done for. They wouldn¡¯t just lose their positions as leaders of the Union, they would likely be expelled from the Union itself. It was that serious. They had conducted biological experiments on the intelligent beings within the Union, dissecting and analyzing their structures. The rebels had a clear justification. They also had the power to eliminate the elders. This was a fight they couldn¡¯t win, no matter how they looked at it. ¡®Damn it¡­ We could have kept it hidden. Where did they find out? Why do I have to die at the hands of this insignificant Terra?¡¯ What followed was a surge of anger¡ªanger at why a great elder of the Lubaran tribe had to suffer such a fate. He channeled that fury and shouted at Yujin. ¡°You wretched Terra scum©¤!¡± ¡°Shock Wave.¡± Thud©¤! Splat! That was the end of Elder Edgar. The immense shockwave emanating from Yujin¡¯s overwhelming mana pierced through his sturdy nano-suit and exploded his body. Neither his superior physical abilities nor his advanced scientific equipment were of any use. In the face of overwhelming power, he was just another piece of meat. ¡°Phew¡­ Is it over?¡± He had personally dealt with seven elders, including Edgar. The remaining three elders and the Union soldiers were being held off by his comrades, including Elder Jupiter and the mages of the Meias tribe. It was essentially over. Most of the Lubaran tribe¡¯s elders were dead, and those still alive would soon meet the same fate. ¡®Time to head to the underground lab.¡¯ With the upper levels cleared, the next step was to secure evidence from the laboratory to stabilize the chaotic situation within the Galactic Union. When the attack began, the elders likely issued orders to erase records and flee. Anticipating this, Yujin had already sent people there. Kon Arche led the way, accompanied by rebels and some mercenary adventurers. By now, they should have reached the underground lab and begun securing it. Given the heavy security likely present there, it seemed wise to go and assist them. ¡°Heading underground? I¡¯ll come with you.¡± ¡°¡­Kotritas.¡± At that moment, Kotritas appeared behind Yujin. His expression was far from pleasant, and understandably so. From his perspective, they were killing his fellow elders. Even though he had steeled himself for this, it couldn¡¯t have been easy to witness. Moreover, the person he had just killed was¡­ ¡°I handled my father. In his final moments, he finally called me his son. ¡®Son, please spare me¡­¡¯ he said.¡± A bitter laugh escaped him. Yujin knew he couldn¡¯t fathom the emotions Kotritas felt in that moment, so he remained silent. ¡°It¡¯s fine. I was prepared for this. I had to kill my father with my own hands. Only then could I stand tall before others.¡± Kotritas was a member of the Lubaran tribe, the very tribe targeted by the coup. He was also the son of one of the elders directly involved. Even if he was branded a parricide, it was something he had to do. That way, he wouldn¡¯t be condemned simply for being a Lubaran or the son of an elder. That¡¯s why Yujin had intentionally left his father to him. Though he was somewhat concerned about Kotritas¡¯s mental state, he believed it was the right decision. ¡°Let¡¯s go to the underground lab.¡± ¡°Alright.¡± With that, the two descended into the chaotic Union headquarters¡¯ underground levels. # S§×arch* The N?vel(F)ire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. They completely subdued the underground lab, exposing its secrets to the entire Union and thoroughly ousting the Lubaran tribe. Finally, they had seized control of the Galactic Union. Ah, my doppelganger has done well. As expected of an outer god¡¯s doppelganger, taking over the Galactic Union is just the beginning. Having witnessed the key highlights¡ªYujin¡¯s battle with the Lubaran elders and the Union¡¯s takeover¡ªit¡¯s time to wrap things up here. I surveyed my surroundings. Unlike the ¡®gap¡¯ with no material concept, this space had a slightly blue hue, which I found calming. This was none other than my laboratory. In this vast space, I could create clone universes or experiment with various creations. It was a place to satisfy my curiosity, gain knowledge, and pass the time. [Well done.] [Thank you.] Standing beside me was not a grotesque mass of tentacles, but Nyarlathotep. Since this was my first time creating such a space, I had enlisted her help. Ah, it¡¯s tricky since outer gods don¡¯t have genders. Anyway, Nyarlathotep was a seasoned expert, having created several isolated dimensions for her laboratories. Her experience was invaluable. Knowing something in theory and actually creating it are two different things. [By the way, that elf species is quite intriguing. Could you provide me with some samples¡­] Oh, here we go again. Why don¡¯t you just create them yourself? [Create them yourself and experiment.] [That¡¯s not fun.] Fun, huh? Are you like Ubbo-Sathla, who insists on wild-caught versus farm-raised? [In any case, I have no intention of sharing my creations.] [That¡¯s unfortunate. How about a trade? My experimental subjects for¡­] Oh no, you¡¯re not going to torment my cute little elves. Back off! [What about that elf god¡­ the Spirit of Light, was it?] [No means no.] They¡¯re off-limits too. I promised them a comfortable existence if they behaved. If they ever cause trouble, then maybe I¡¯d consider it. Few things are as torturous as becoming one of Nyarlathotep¡¯s experimental subjects. [Can¡¯t you just clone them? Give me the clones.] [¡­¡­] Clones, huh? Since I¡¯m planning to do various things with the cloned universe anyway, I might consider cloning the elves for experiments in the future. So, in the end, am I no different from Nyarlathotep? [Take your time to think about it. Talk to me whenever you want.] With those words, Nyarlathotep left. Cloning, huh. Does it matter if it¡¯s something I created, as long as it¡¯s a clone? Whether they suffer or perish, does it make a difference? I created this laboratory to experiment and erase clone universes without any emotional attachment. I do have affection for my creations like the elves and Yujin, but it¡¯s not to the extent that I feel compelled to protect them or keep them exclusively mine. It feels like my mindset is gradually becoming more like that of an outer god. Guilt, empathy, and affection are all fading. All that remains is curiosity and boredom. The only thing keeping me from crossing the line is the lingering memories of my human past. But this leaves me feeling caught between two worlds, inconsistent and indecisive. What am I, really? # The Deep Abyss. The beginning and end of everything. The ultimate origin, yet without origin¡­ such a thing. To the residents of the gap, commonly known as outer gods, it imparts its knowledge of everything and shares a fragment of its omnipotence. A god that is both non-existent and the genesis of all existence. Those who know of its existence call it thus: ¡®The Beginning and the End of Chaos.¡¯ ¡®The Amorphous Evil.¡¯ ¡®The Creator and Destroyer of All Things.¡¯ They named it: ¡®Azathoth.¡¯ Surpassing even the gods, it stands at the pinnacle of everything in this world. Truly, the creator, mother, and destroyer of all things. Today, it quietly gazed down at something directly connected to itself. A dimension isolated by a blue light. There stood an outer god, a colossal giant with a single red eye. Chapter 51: The Laboratory Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 51 Ten years had passed by the Galactic Union¡¯s standards. A short time for some, a long time for others. For me, the concept of time doesn¡¯t exist, so I can¡¯t say if it was long or short. Regardless, many things had happened during that period. Yujin had taken control of the Galactic Union. Those who were disgusted by the atrocities of the Lubaran elders and those who opposed the coup regime left the Union in droves. The Union¡¯s size shrank by about 30% compared to before. However, Yujin saw this as an opportunity. He began to provide generous support and share various technologies with those who remained in the Union. As a result, the superior technology of the Lubaran tribe and the secretive magical techniques of the Meias tribe, among others, were released en masse, rapidly raising the average capabilities of the Union¡¯s species. Since magic couldn¡¯t be used without innate talent, the Meias tribe didn¡¯t have much to say. But the Lubaran tribe, which was at the forefront of scientific advancement, strongly opposed this. [Why should we share our technology?!] [If everyone reaches our level, what was the point of all our hard work and research?!] While their arguments weren¡¯t entirely wrong, they were framed as the main culprits of the recent events. Thus, their objections were dismissed. There was no other choice. [The quickest way to unite people is to create a common enemy.] Moreover, if you take the enemy¡¯s assets and distribute them to everyone, support will naturally increase. [And when the species within the Union see rapid development, those who left will start to reconsider. ¡®Should we go back?¡¯ they¡¯ll think.] As Yujin spoke with a smile, Elder Jupiter nodded in admiration. [Yujin, I knew you were formidable, but you¡¯re even more terrifying than I thought.] [Oh, come on, what¡¯s so scary about this? It¡¯s not like I wiped out an entire species or secretly conducted human experiments.] [Hahaha¡­.] Wow¡­ So, the Galactic Union has reached a new level. The elves will have to step up their game. The elves had also undergone significant changes. The most important one: they finally met. [Pleased to meet you. I am Lasi.] sea??h th§× NovelFire.net* website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. [Oh, Lasi. Servant of the god. This too is the guidance of Rios.] The meeting of Rodri and Lasi¡­! Wow, I never thought I¡¯d see this scene in just about ten years. The elves had gradually expanded their territory, establishing a realm and system that was practically a nation. Most elves had been absorbed into larger factions, leaving only a few independent groups. Their numbers had dwindled to about one-hundredth of their original size. Among them, three factions had grown and developed the fastest. Lumolasi Rodri¡¯s Rios Religion Muwan Empire As expected, the three individuals who initially caught my eye have risen to the top three. The elves had advanced their scientific technology to the point where they had discovered electricity and begun applying it, akin to the period of the modern industrial revolution when numerous machines were invented. Lumolasi was preparing to transition from steam power, which used coal, to electric power, which had better transmission efficiency and versatility. Rodri¡¯s Rios Religion focused less on scientific technology and more on honing the power to control the Spirit of Light, granted by their god. They had developed abilities almost akin to those of wizards, using the Spirit of Light to hunt and perform tasks that were difficult for ordinary people. Muwan Empire had rapidly advanced their weaponry. In addition to firearms, they were currently developing small steam-powered vehicles armored with heavy plating. The front of the small steam-powered vehicle was equipped with a massive, manually operated, traditional machine gun. Impressive¡­ and terrifying. Could Muwan end up conquering everything? Just as I pondered this, Lasi and Rodri met. Both now leaders of groups that were practically nations, they held a very serious meeting. They discussed their perceptions of each other, their future directions, and the potential impacts they could have on one another. After extensive discussions, they reached a conclusion. [Let¡¯s form an alliance.] [Let¡¯s form an alliance.] An alliance was formed. From the perspective of the Rios Religion, all elves were blessed by the god Rios. Increasing the number of devout followers who actively worshipped the god was a good thing. Lumolasi was well-developed and rapidly growing in population, so the influx of new believers would be swift. From Lumolasi¡¯s perspective, the god Rios was a benevolent deity who had bestowed knowledge and power upon them. They already praised and followed him, so a few additional rituals and prayer times wouldn¡¯t be met with resistance. They did take some crops and meat as offerings to the god, but with an abundance of food, it wasn¡¯t an issue. More importantly, the abilities of the Rios Religion¡¯s followers were a significant asset to them. They likely believed that the military strength of the Rios Religion would be useful someday. Additionally, they thought that by believing more fervently and following the Rios Religion, their own powers from the Spirit of Light would grow stronger, similar to the Rios Religion¡¯s followers. And they weren¡¯t wrong. It¡¯s natural for a god to favor those who offer more. If it were a god indifferent to such things, it might be different, but Rios seemed to absorb the energy from offerings and use it to strengthen himself. Lasi had good instincts. Soon, Muwan would land in the northern hemisphere. Coincidentally, Muwan was set to land on the largest continent, where Rodri and Lasi resided. Would there be war? Or would Muwan, like Rodri and Lasi, surprisingly form a friendly relationship with them? Knowing Muwan¡¯s nature, that seemed highly unlikely. Ah, of course, there have been many changes in my laboratory as well. The universe I¡¯m currently observing isn¡¯t the original universe but a perfectly replicated original clone universe. It was copied with such precision that even the positions of the quarks were identical, leaving almost no room for variables. Events and phenomena occurring in the original universe would hardly differ here. Even if minor discrepancies arose, comparing them with the original would be enjoyable later. Anyway, this is just one aspect. My laboratory now has floating universe bubbles everywhere, much like the gap. There are about 3,000 of them. Some were created under identical conditions to serve as various control groups. Others were made with slightly different environments. That¡¯s just the 3,000; there are others created separately. These aren¡¯t cloned universes but ones I created myself. Think of them as the cosmic version of an elf civilization simulation. I started creating various worlds for fun, and now there are over ten of them. Some are exact replicas of the universe I originally lived in. Others have a sci-fi vibe similar to the universe with the elves and Yujin. There are fantasy worlds where magic is as common as it is for the Meias tribe. I¡¯ve even created a multiverse bubble where multiple universes are interconnected, resembling Norse mythology. I thought linking entirely different universes would be challenging, but it turned out to be easier than expected. I just created an environment similar to the gap between the universes and established a connection pathway. Surprisingly, there were no issues with physical laws interfering and causing collapses. It¡¯s quite entertaining to occasionally peek into these created universes. Creating worlds based on the comics and novels I read as a human and observing how they play out in reality is also possible. Although it¡¯s been less than ten years since I created them, making them relatively undeveloped, they still offer some entertainment value. The hunter world connected to the fantasy world has been in chaos for ten years since the gates opened. The pure fantasy world is still in its early stages, with only ten years since the Demon King appeared, so the hero¡¯s emergence seems far off. By the way, I created this Demon King. I thought it would be better to leave the creation of the hero to the will of the universe rather than making one myself. I made the Demon King a significant enough threat to the world to warrant the rise of an adversary. The sci-fi world isn¡¯t like the Galactic Union; it¡¯s more of a setting where various aliens live their lives, with different events occurring in the universe. As for the Earth I originally lived on, I created a zombie apocalypse scenario. Naturally, an enormous number of people died over the past ten years. I didn¡¯t make it an exact replica; I just recreated the environment, so it feels different, and I don¡¯t feel much guilt about it. Or maybe not. Even if I had replicated my original Earth exactly, I might not have felt any guilt. Lately, it feels like my humanity is gradually fading. No, rather than fading, it feels like it was never there to begin with. Anyway, ten years isn¡¯t a long time in the grand scheme of the universe. There haven¡¯t been any significant changes. In reality, I could fast-forward time if I wanted to. With a snap of my fingers, I could advance a thousand years and instantly review all the information. But that lacks a certain charm. Besides, it would leave me with nothing to do afterward. There¡¯s nothing quite like this to pass the time. Chapter 52: The Constellation of the Abyss Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 52 Unlike anime or movies, this has a certain immersive quality. These are real, living beings thinking and acting on their own, without any scripts or predetermined stories. It¡¯s like combining the thrill of a real variety show with the special narratives you¡¯d only find in anime or movies. Even after observing for quite some time, I find it neither boring nor tiresome; it¡¯s quite enjoyable. What¡¯s more, the ability to directly intervene and change things adds to the fun. If I interfered too much, it would just follow my thoughts and become boring, but subtly nudging things in the desired direction is quite satisfying. I can skip unnecessarily dull parts or alter the flow to something I want to see. For example¡­ let¡¯s take a look over there. A universe with an environment very similar to the Earth I originally lived on, but with a slight twist, it has what is commonly referred to in novels as a ¡°hunter world.¡± It¡¯s a world connected to a fantasy-like dimension where bizarre and powerful monsters come through gates. I¡¯ve also linked it to the divine realm, adding a touch of the ¡°constellation¡± trope. Gods choose their avatars, bestowing power upon them and making them hunters. Although I created it, the structure and overall setting are based on an existing universe. After all, in the infinite expanse of universe bubbles within the gap, every possible scenario exists somewhere. Whatever I create will inevitably feel similar to something else. Anyway, let¡¯s use this as an example. Since we¡¯re talking about gods choosing avatars, I can take the role of selecting the ¡°protagonist¡± of this world. Calling them a protagonist might sound grandiose, but there¡¯s no need to overthink it. In a world like this, the strongest one is naturally the protagonist. All I need to do is grant him more power than the other hunters. Let¡¯s see¡­ how about that guy over there? Park Yujin. Coincidentally, his name is also Yujin. A 25-year-old young man living a lowly life, drifting from one convenience store job to another. He dreams of becoming a hunter but has given up, believing no constellation would ever choose him. ¡­What is this? Did I subconsciously create him? He¡¯s the epitome of a hunter story protagonist clich¨¦. The only difference is that, in reality, no god has chosen him. Judging by the state of the constellations, he doesn¡¯t even seem to be on their radar. But by choosing him myself, Park Yujin could become the strongest in this world. Of course, I won¡¯t give him absurd power from the start. There¡¯s no need to create an adversary by mistake. Still, I¡¯m curious about what an adversary would look like in this universe. With three worlds intertwined, would an adversary arise only in the world where the threat appears, or could one emerge in any of the three worlds, given their integration into a single universe? I¡¯ll have to replicate this and experiment later. For now, let¡¯s take on the role of a constellation. I¡¯ll gift this unfortunate young man a new life, just like a protagonist in a novel. It brings back memories of my own past. When I was human, I lived a similarly desperate life, always hoping to become someone extraordinary someday. sea??h th§× N?velFire(.)net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. But I ended up becoming something far more extraordinary than I ever imagined. It¡¯s quite astonishing. Anyway, let¡¯s proceed. I bestow the power of the constellation upon Park Yujin. Let¡¯s see¡­ it seems like the power is granted in the form of a status window. Something like this, perhaps? # Twenty years ago, ¡°gates¡± connecting to other dimensions appeared. Strange, monstrous creatures emerged from these gates, plunging the world into chaos. Amidst the turmoil, beings known as ¡°hunters,¡± chosen by constellations, appeared to combat the monsters. They ventured into the gates, exterminated the monsters within, and closed the gates completely. Remarkably, it was discovered that the stones found within these monsters, known as ¡°magic stones,¡± contained immense energy. The world was astounded. The appearance of gates and hunters, initially thought to herald the end of the world, turned out to be a transformative event that provided a new energy source. People cheered, welcoming the change. Thus began the era of the great hunters. The world revolved around hunters, who became more famous than celebrities and earned astronomical sums of money. Corporations known as ¡°guilds¡± managed hunters and grew to surpass even the largest companies. ¡°Haa¡­ What¡¯s the point? I¡¯m just working part-time at a convenience store.¡± Of course, not everything in the world revolved around hunters. Ordinary citizens continued to live their lives as they always had. Among these ordinary citizens, living a lowly life, was the man slumped over the convenience store counter with disheveled hair: Park Yujin, 25 years old. ¡°I want to be a hunter too. I want to make tons of money. I want to be popular with women¡­ Ahem!¡± Average in appearance and ability, Park Yujin was an ordinary young man. If there was anything unusual about him, it was that he was an orphan with no one to rely on. As he lay there, his phone buzzed with a message. (Manager Bastard: Hey, don¡¯t slack off during work hours. I¡¯ll fire you.) ¡°Damn it¡­ What the hell is his problem? There aren¡¯t even any customers.¡± He wanted to curse out the manager who constantly picked fights with him and quit, but doing so would cut off his living expenses. So he endured. Ding! [A being from the Deep Abyss has taken an interest in you.] [A being from the Deep Abyss wishes to grant you power.] [Do you accept the power?] ¡°¡­What?¡± A translucent window suddenly appeared before his eyes. Park Yujin knew exactly what it was. ¡°Holy¡­! A constellation, it¡¯s a constellation!¡± A message from a constellation. A status window, awakening, hunter! ¡°Damn, a day like this has finally come for me!!¡± Quickly processing the situation in his mind, Park Yujin nodded immediately. ¡°Of course, I accept!¡± Deep Abyss, Outer Being¡ªthese were suspicious-sounding titles, but so what? It was still a constellation offering him power. It wasn¡¯t like it was the Great Demon who would destroy the world or the King of Flies who devoured everything. In fact, there were hunters who had received power from constellations known as evil gods. They, too, were legitimate hunters who fought monsters and closed gates for the sake of the world, their own honor, or money. [The Being from the Deep Abyss accepts your will.] [Awakening the power of the Abyss.] [Name: Park Yujin] [Age: 25] [Gender: Male] [Title: Avatar of the Abyss] [Strength: 10(+10)] [Agility: 10(+10)] [Endurance: 10(+10)] [Magic: 10(+10)] ////////// [Passive: Blessing of the Abyss (LV.1)] [Increases stats and skill effects according to the level of the blessing.] [10 stat points per level.] [Skill enhancement varies by skill effect.] [The Blessing of the Abyss skill grows each time you absorb the power of the Abyss from monsters.] [Attribute: Abyss (LV.1)] [The Abyss attribute penetrates everything and reaches the essence.] [Ignores 10% of defense.] [Fear of the Abyss (LV.1)] [Instills fundamental fear in those who face you.] [Causes Fear status effect LV.1] ¡°¡­Wow, what is this?¡± The appearance of a status window upon awakening was common to all hunters. The initial stats of 10 were the same for everyone. These stats could be increased through rare elixirs sometimes found within gates or through rigorous training and effort. However, since there was a limit to how much one could increase their stats directly, skills were actually more important. A hunter¡¯s rank is often determined by the type of overpowered skills they possess. That¡¯s how it should be. But¡­ ¡°A skill that increases stats¡­?¡± An absurd skill had appeared. A skill that raised stats based on its level¡ªessentially breaking through the stat limits in a ridiculous manner. ¡°This is insane¡­ What is this?¡± And that wasn¡¯t all. There was a skill that ignored defense, crucial for dealing with powerful enemies who typically had high defense. Additionally, there was a status effect skill that could induce fear, which was incredibly useful in combat. Even having a skill that caused a simple slow effect could get one called to higher-level gates. It was a comprehensive set of rare abilities. Any one of these skills could make someone a top-tier hunter, and Park Yujin had awakened three of them. He realized he had hit the jackpot with this constellation. (Me: I quit. Bye.) He immediately texted his convenience store manager. With these skills, he could easily earn tens of millions a month. What meaning did a part-time job at a convenience store have now? Although he felt like cursing out his manager, he refrained because he was in such a good mood. ¡°Hahaha! I¡¯m a hunter, a freaking awesome hunter! Thank you, God of the Abyss! I worship you!¡± [The Being from the Deep Abyss is pleased to see your joy.] Imagining the bright future ahead, Park Yujin smiled contentedly. Chapter 53: When You Gaze into the Abyss Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 53 Park Yujin, filled with joy, registered as a hunter and entered a gate. Naturally, he started at the lowest rank, F-rank, and entered an F-rank gate with other novice hunters in similar situations. Although a D-rank hunter accompanied them as a safety measure, the rest were a ragtag group. Inside the gate, they encountered goblins. For the inexperienced novices, these goblins were a somewhat challenging opponent. ¡°Keeek!¡± ¡°Kieeek?!¡± It was clear that the Fear of the Abyss skill I had given him was working well. The goblins were confused and unable to act properly due to the fear. Fear of the Abyss. Although the effect was minimal compared to facing me directly, even at level 1, it was enough to mentally disrupt goblins. As the skill level increases, it will eventually affect even top-tier monsters like vampires or dragons, which are typically immune to fear. After all, the mental corruption caused by seeing an ¡°Outer God¡± like me cannot be blocked by mere immunities created by the laws of the universe. Unless there are special measures against mental corruption by Outer Gods, like in the original SF universe I was born in, it cannot be stopped. ¡°What¡¯s going on? The goblins seem off.¡± Among the F-rank hunters, one with some gate experience noticed the unusual behavior of the goblins and tilted his head in confusion. ¡°What is this? This has never happened before¡­.¡± The D-rank hunter leading the group was equally puzzled. This was something they had never encountered before, leaving them bewildered. ¡°It seems to be thanks to my skill. I have a fear status effect skill,¡± Park Yujin said proudly, attributing the goblins¡¯ behavior to his ability. He didn¡¯t seem to have any intention of hiding his abilities. In most novels, characters would typically conceal their skills in such situations, but thinking about it, that¡¯s quite strange. In a structured modern society, no one would suddenly capture and kill him. If someone had a special ability, wouldn¡¯t they want to reveal it quickly to gain fame and earn money? Assassination attempts by those envious of his abilities? Oppression and tyranny from large corporate guilds? Realistically, a major guild would prioritize recruiting him. Joining one would make it easier to earn money and preemptively prevent assassination attempts by jealous individuals. The notion of wanting to roam alone or disliking restrictions imposed by belonging to an organization is merely an excuse to drive the plot forward in protagonist-centric novels. Park Yujin¡¯s decision to reveal his abilities early and actively appeal to a major guild was a very smart choice in reality. ¡°Yes, yes¡­ I¡¯m serious. The goblins are running away¡­ Yes, understood. Ahem! Mr. Park Yujin, could we have a word?¡± As expected, the D-rank hunter who was leading the group quickly contacted his guild and then called Park Yujin aside. Naturally, the intention was to recruit him into the guild. The fear status effect was not just a simple debuff; it was a top-tier crowd control ability that could render enemies completely unable to fight, making it highly coveted by major guilds. Having discovered such a valuable ability early on, it was only natural for them to want to recruit him. However, Park Yujin was smarter and more thorough than they anticipated. ¡°Sorry, but I think I can aim for a higher place with my abilities.¡± ¡°Oh¡­¡± While the D-rank hunter might have felt slighted by the rejection, he understood. Park Yujin¡¯s reasoning was sound. Confident in his abilities, Park Yujin boldly headed towards a major guild. In this world, the guild that prides itself as the best in Korea is the ¡°Awakening Guild.¡± ¡°¡­Hoo. This is where my life turns around.¡± Park Yujin¡¯s story was just beginning here. For now, everything seemed fine. However, since I had directly granted him power from beyond the universe, there were signs of gradual erosion. They say, ¡°When you gaze into the abyss, the abyss gazes back at you,¡± right? In simpler terms, this meant that due to mental corruption, his personality could gradually disappear, and he might go insane. Perhaps it wasn¡¯t wise to recklessly bestow the power of an Outer God upon a fragile being. Moreover, he was just an ordinary human from Earth. The power I granted might have been too overwhelming for him to handle. Although there might not be any immediate issues, it¡¯s better to make some adjustments just in case. Tweaking the settings slightly to prevent mental corruption should be understandable even to the will of the universe. Okay, done. This should ensure that even with a weak mental fortitude, he can withstand it. Now, I need to check on other matters for a bit. # ¡°Rising Star, Park Yujin!¡± ¡°The ¡®Fear of Monsters¡¯ Park Yujin, growing at an incredible speed. Who is he?¡± ¡°Defense Penetration, Fear Status Effect, Stat Increase. All in one? The world is watching this hunter.¡± A year had passed since Park Yujin debuted as a hunter. With his incredible skills, he directly contracted with Korea¡¯s top guild, ¡°Awakening,¡± and received their enthusiastic support to grow stronger. In just one year, he had become an incredible star hunter, not only in Korea but also globally. With his stat-increasing skill, he achieved A-rank in just one year. Park Yujin brought immense fear to monsters, causing chaos, and crushed enemies with overwhelming destructive power that penetrated defenses. He received numerous offers from top guilds worldwide. There were even rumors that China¡¯s number one guild, ¡°Xiao,¡± had offered a contract worth 100 billion won. Despite these offers, Park Yujin remained with the Awakening Guild, staying as a Korean hunter, which made Koreans even more enthusiastic. ¡°He¡¯s a patriot, a true patriot.¡± ¡°What is the government doing? They should be giving him a reward.¡± ¡°That¡¯s how you bring honor to the nation.¡± Other hunters also envied his incredible status and praised him. ¡°I¡¯m so jealous. I should have had at least one crowd control skill.¡± ¡°Even if I have one, it¡¯s just a slow.¡± ¡°Having one at all is something.¡± ¡°And defense penetration? That¡¯s a top-tier skill for a damage dealer.¡± Park Yujin¡¯s life seemed to be on a continuous upward trajectory, with nothing but a path of roses ahead. ¡­Or so it seemed. ¡°Ugh, haah, haah¡­!¡± Everyone envied and praised Park Yujin. But now, he was writhing in pain in the penthouse of the luxurious apartment provided by the guild. The reason for his agony was the relentless headaches and dizziness. When his abilities were weaker, he was fine. But as his skill levels increased, his physical condition began to deteriorate. It wasn¡¯t that he was sick or weakened. His abilities had indeed grown stronger. However, he started experiencing unexplained headaches and nightmares featuring horrific, unidentifiable shapes. S§×arch* The NovelFire.net* website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. And that wasn¡¯t all. It wasn¡¯t just his body that was in pain; Park Yujin could feel his mind gradually transforming. Recently, he found himself getting angry over trivial matters. People who once seemed ordinary now appeared insignificant, and he had an overwhelming urge to crush them all. ¡°Ugh¡­ Why is this happening?¡± He had visited the hospital multiple times. The doctors attributed it to fatigue from the numerous changes and events he had recently experienced. So he tried resting. He took complete breaks, doing nothing but resting, yet the symptoms showed no signs of improvement. It was an obviously strange situation. Rumors began to spread within the guild. People whispered that Park Yujin¡¯s condition seemed to be deteriorating. They speculated whether he had contracted some sort of illness. ¡°Damn it¡­ Why is this happening? Answer me, damn constellation.¡± The root cause was undoubtedly his abilities. The stronger his powers became, the worse his condition grew. Park Yujin questioned the Being from the Deep Abyss that had granted him his powers. Why was this happening? But there was no response. In fact, the more he tried to communicate with the entity, the stronger his symptoms seemed to become. It felt as though he was being increasingly consumed by the abyss. ¡®Why is this happening? Is it because the god who granted me power is evil?¡¯ However, he had never heard of people being corrupted simply because the deity was malevolent. Even evil gods aimed to protect Earth from external dimensions, so they wouldn¡¯t deliberately torment humans. Despite being labeled as evil gods, they needed humans to live normally and transmit energy to exist. This was something different. The Being from the Deep Abyss that granted him power was something alien. ¡°Ugh¡­ haah, haah¡­!¡± As he tried to think about it, another headache surged. Simultaneously, fear began to creep in. Each time the headache struck, it felt as if something was being chipped away, leaving him with a chilling sensation. It was as though the persona of Park Yujin was gradually crumbling, being replaced by the power of the abyss¡ªan indescribable terror. ¡®I¡¯m being consumed. I¡¯m being eroded.¡¯ The horrifying fear of losing himself while still alive overwhelmed Park Yujin. ¡°Damn it¡­ stop. Please stop¡­ I don¡¯t need this power anymore, please. Please take it back. I was wrong¡­¡± Had he erred by desiring power? Had he sold his soul to the devil for a chance to turn his life around? Tears began to stream down his face at the thought. He was being consumed by fear. The tears that flowed turned black. ¡°¡­Huh?¡± And then, in that moment of terror, when Park Yujin realized that black tears were streaming from his eyes¡ª Click¡ª Everything went dark, as if someone had turned off a TV. Chapter 54: Destruction and Regression Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 54 ¡­What happened while I was away? [Aaah! Run away!] [Park Yujin¡­ It¡¯s the Abyssal Demon, Park Yujin!] [Crash! Boom!] Why was Park Yujin killing people and destroying the world, being called the Abyssal Demon? While I was observing other universes, what transpired here? A quick glance at the logs revealed that the fragile human mind couldn¡¯t withstand my power and was ultimately consumed. As a result, his rationality vanished, leaving behind only a destructive instinct, turning him into a lower-tier Outer God-like entity. The more severe issue was that no one possessed the strength to stop this rampaging being consumed by the power of an Outer God. That made sense. In a universe where so-called gods were merely powerful interdimensional beings, I had bestowed genuine Outer God power. Now it was running amok, and there was nothing they could do. People were being crushed by overwhelming power, and just meeting his pitch-black eyes caused them to lose their will to fight or go insane with fear. Wow, this is a real disaster. Initially, he was a regular being in this universe, not particularly strong, but he suddenly grew and became a world-destroyer. This meant that the universe¡¯s will couldn¡¯t even create a counterbalance. In other words, this universe was doomed. Interdimensional monsters were out of the question, and the so-called gods in the divine realm couldn¡¯t interfere. On Earth, there was no one who could stop the rampaging Park Yujin. The conclusion was the destruction of the world. Oh no¡­ What was I thinking when I directly gave him power? I should have created an avatar similar to myself, like the Elf God Rios did, and made it a constellation. This was a mistake driven by my curiosity and excitement, without deep consideration. Of course, I could simply reverse the world¡¯s time or erase Park Yujin¡¯s existence to resolve everything. The reason why gods are said to never make mistakes is that even if they do, they can perfectly cover it up as if it never happened. Just as I was about to turn back the universe¡¯s time to before Park Yujin¡¯s awakening¡ª [Wait a minute.] An incredible idea suddenly struck me. [A constellation story, world destruction, final boss¡­ Isn¡¯t this the perfect setup for a regression story?] A demon that destroys the world. A regressor who knows the future struggles to prevent it¡­ Absolutely possible! Alright, let¡¯s choose someone to be the regressor. This time, I¡¯ll create an avatar in the divine realm to prevent them from being consumed by power. The avatar will use up all its power and disappear, sending the regressor¡¯s memories back to the past. Oh, there¡¯s a character in the perfect situation for this. I¡¯ll make him the regressor. # ¡°Huff, huff¡­¡± C-rank hunter Lee Junhyun. With his detection skill, he barely managed to survive Park Yujin¡¯s attacks. But now, it was the end. Six months had passed since Park Yujin went berserk and became the Abyssal Demon. He had swept across the world at an incredible speed and returned to his homeland, Korea, to finish everything off. This was the end. Korea, which had a few surviving hunters during the early stages of his rampage, was now doomed with his return. Even the world¡¯s strongest hunters had gathered to face him, but none could withstand his terrifying power and fear. ¡®Is this really the end?¡¯ Lee Junhyun had managed to survive by evading with his exceptional detection abilities, but now he had reached his limit. All the hunters were dead, and countless civilians had been massacred. There were no hunters left. He might be the last one. If that were the case, the monster that had slaughtered all the hunters would come for him next. He was certain of it. ¡°¡­Damn, he¡¯s here.¡± His detection skill sensed an overwhelmingly ominous presence. In this world, there was only one being capable of emitting such an aura, both in the past and the future. ¡°The Abyssal Demon.¡± The Abyssal Demon, Park Yujin, had approached Lee Junhyun, staring down at him with those characteristic pitch-black eyes. ¡°Huff, huff, huff!¡± The moment their eyes met, an indescribable fear began to consume Lee Junhyun¡¯s mind. It felt as though an invisible force was crawling all over his body, binding him tightly and rendering him immobile. His entire body froze. He couldn¡¯t make a sound. He couldn¡¯t even swallow. It felt like making the slightest noise would result in his immediate death. Even if that weren¡¯t the case, he was as good as dead already. Swoosh¡ª Just as Park Yujin reached out to kill him¡ª [My avatar.] ¡°¡­Huh?¡± Suddenly, a voice echoed in Lee Junhyun¡¯s mind, and he felt the fear and headache dissipate. It was as if someone was protecting him, giving him a warm and soothing sensation. ¡®What is this¡­?¡¯ Just as he was bewildered by the sudden change, something even more startling happened. ¡°Kieeeek!¡± Park Yujin suddenly opened his mouth wide and let out an enormous scream. ¡°H-Huh?!¡± Startled, Lee Junhyun recoiled, watching as Park Yujin continued his bizarre behavior. ¡°Keeek! The Great One! The Great One is coming! Welcome Him! Welcome Him! Welcome Him!¡± For the first time since his rampage as the Abyssal Demon, Park Yujin¡¯s mouth opened, and the first words that came out were, ¡°The Great One is coming. Welcome Him.¡± Immediately after, Lee Junhyun felt his consciousness slipping away, as if being gently put to sleep by someone. ¡°The Great One!¡± In his fading consciousness, he could still hear Park Yujin¡¯s eerie screams. # Lee Junhyun slowly opened his eyes. ¡°Ugh¡­ Huh?! Where am I?¡± As soon as he regained his senses, he frantically looked around. But the Abyssal Demon Park Yujin, who had been in front of him moments ago, was nowhere to be seen. The ruined cityscape destroyed by Park Yujin was also gone. All he could see was an endless white landscape. No, there was one thing. In the midst of the white expanse, something else stood out. It was¡­ ¡°My avatar.¡± ¡°You are¡­¡± A Western old man with a bushy beard and a friendly appearance stood before him. Instinctively, Lee Junhyun knew that this was his constellation, ¡®The Legendary Prophet Who Even Sensed the Future.¡¯ Despite the grandiose title, it was a bit disappointing that he had only granted Lee Junhyun a moderate detection ability. Still, this being had made him a C-rank hunter and enabled him to survive until the very end against the Abyssal Demon. ¡°How¡­?¡± How was he able to meet his constellation directly? Where was this place? What was happening now? He had countless questions. But the constellation shook his head as if there was no time and said, ¡°You have perished. Just as I prophesied.¡± In a calm tone, he declared that the world had been destroyed by the Abyssal Demon, as if confirming his words. ¡°¡­You could have told me if you knew in advance.¡± ¡°Excessive interference is forbidden. I¡¯m sorry. But that¡¯s not the issue. Listen to my explanation.¡± The constellation began to explain to Lee Junhyun, who still couldn¡¯t fully grasp the situation. He revealed that he had foreseen the future of destruction and had prepared to change it by turning back time and sending someone back to alter this fate. He had sacrificed his own existence to make this possible. And Lee Junhyun was the chosen one. He also mentioned that he would infuse as much of his power as possible into Lee Junhyun during the regression. The sudden rush of information left Lee Junhyun greatly bewildered. ¡°Wait, so you¡¯re saying¡­ I have to go back to the past and stop that monster?¡± ¡°Yes. But there are limits. I can¡¯t turn back time to before he awakened his powers. Even my strength has its limits.¡± He must track him down and stop him after he has already gained his powers. It will not be easy. The Abyssal Demon was an exceptionally talented individual even when he was just a regular hunter. ¡°But if you accept all of my power¡­ it might be possible.¡± ¡°Wait, hold on. I don¡¯t understand any of this¡­¡± ¡°I¡¯m sorry, there¡¯s no time. You must go now.¡± Lee Junhyun was still confused, but the constellation, with a sense of urgency, extended his hand towards him. ¡°Wait, just a moment¡­!¡± Lee Junhyun waved his hands frantically, but his body had already begun to fade away. Moments later¡ª ¡°¡­Huh.¡± Lee Junhyun found himself waking up in his old officetel room from the past. ¡°¡­¡­¡± It wasn¡¯t a dream. Everything that had happened¡ªthe rampage of the Abyssal Demon, his death, and meeting his constellation¡ªwas real. It was too vivid to be a dream. This meant he had truly returned to the past to prevent the Abyssal Demon¡¯s rampage. ¡°Damn it. Sending me back without any explanation¡­¡± Of course, he didn¡¯t have a clear plan. He felt nothing but resentment towards the constellation who had sent him back without any further instructions. ¡°Hey, this isn¡¯t fair. This is too much.¡± There was no response. Of course, there wouldn¡¯t be. The constellation had said he was sacrificing his existence to make this happen. This meant that the constellation¡¯s existence had completely vanished¡ªpast, present, and future. ¡°¡­Sigh. Fine, let¡¯s see what kind of power I¡¯ve been given.¡± Sear?h the N??elFir§×.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. Lee Junhyun decided that there was no point in blaming anyone for what had already happened. The constellation had done this to save him and Earth, so he decided to understand and move on. The spilled milk couldn¡¯t be gathered back; what mattered now was understanding his abilities and devising a plan to stop the Abyssal Demon. ¡°Status window.¡± In this timeline, Lee Junhyun had only recently gained his abilities, but he was well-versed in calling up the status window from his previous life. The familiar semi-transparent window appeared before his eyes. Chapter 55: Hierarchy Establishment Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 55 [The Legendary Prophet Who Even Sensed the Future has exhausted all his power and has vanished.] [Although the constellation has disappeared, the power remains with you.] [Name: Lee Junhyun] [Age: 24] [Gender: Male] [Title: Avatar of Prophecy] [Strength: 16(+10)] [Agility: 17(+10)] [Stamina: 13(+10)] [Mana: 11(+10)] ////////// [Passive: Blessing of the Constellation (LV.1)] [Ability stats and skill effects increase according to the level of the blessing.] [10 points per level.] [Skill enhancement varies depending on the skill effect.] [The Blessing of the Constellation skill grows when monsters are defeated.] [Detection skill evolves into Future Prediction.] [Future Prediction (LV.1)] [Beyond sensing the present, you can see a bit into the future.] [Abyss Resistance (LV.1)] [Resistance to the fundamental fear instilled by the Abyssal Terror.] [The higher the level, the greater the chance of overcoming stronger fears.] Despite the stats window showing that he had trained somewhat as a hunter, the numbers were still at a novice level. However, the additional 10 points attached to his stats elevated his novice-level attributes to at least the entry level of a D-rank hunter. Not only that, but he also had three skills. A growth skill similar to Park Yujin¡¯s, a skill that allowed him to see slightly into the future beyond ordinary detection, and a skill essential for facing Park Yujin, which provided resistance to the Abyssal Terror. The sacrifice of his constellation had indeed paid off. ¡°¡­Alright. Since it¡¯s come to this, let¡¯s give it a shot.¡± Lee Junhyun decided that, having returned to the past and received new powers, he needed to find and stop Park Yujin as soon as possible. If he didn¡¯t, the only things awaiting him were the destruction of the world and his own death. He had been given a chance to change that dreadful future. Wasn¡¯t that a good thing? ¡®But it¡¯s difficult right now. Park Yujin revealed his power early on and quickly grew under the protection of a major guild.¡¯ It was too much for Lee Junhyun to handle on his own. Would it even make sense to stop Park Yujin before he went on his rampage? Even if he killed him, Lee Junhyun would just become a criminal who killed a promising hunter. ¡®It¡¯s better than the world ending and dying, but¡­ honestly, it¡¯s not very appealing.¡¯ Was there another way? A method to stop him without killing him before his rampage? Or perhaps¡­ ¡°Or become strong enough to kill him even after his rampage.¡± Both options seemed incredibly difficult. But he needed to decide quickly. Even at this moment, Park Yujin was laying the groundwork to become stronger, and once he hit his stride, he would reach A-rank within a year. ¡®I can¡¯t win right now anyway. I need to break through the protection of the major guild and grow strong enough to face him directly.¡¯ For now, worrying was pointless. He needed to become stronger. Even a little bit stronger, and he believed he could do anything. With this conclusion, Lee Junhyun came up with a clever plan. ¡®I¡¯ll hinder his growth as much as possible while using my knowledge from the previous timeline to gather as many resources as I can.¡¯ For example, legendary weapons or elixirs that appear in gates. He would block Park Yujin¡¯s growth while accelerating his own using his knowledge as a regressor. All the famous items had been documented in articles, so he roughly knew when and where they would be found. ¡®The only way I can grow faster and stronger than him is by doing this.¡¯ With this in mind, Lee Junhyun began to move quickly. Every second wasted felt like a loss. # [Ah, indeed. The charm of regression stories lies in using regression knowledge to gather resources.] sea??h th§× N?vel?ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. Lee Junhyun, this guy knows what he¡¯s doing. As expected of a hunter who survived until the end, he¡¯s quick-witted and sharp. This is interesting. Instead of the will of the universe, I¡¯m creating the adversary myself. The Abyssal Demon who will destroy the world is my power, and although I didn¡¯t directly give it, the hero protagonist who regresses to oppose him is also my creation. It¡¯s like pitting animated characters against each other to see who¡¯s stronger. I¡¯m quite looking forward to seeing who will win. If he can¡¯t win, I could turn it into an infinite loop story where the protagonist becomes more and more desolate. After he wins, I could reveal that there was another mastermind all along and introduce the Abyssal Constellation I created. Would that be too bleak? Hmm, lately, my sense of guilt about these things has been fading. Am I truly becoming an Outer God in my heart as well? But even such worries and fears don¡¯t seem to affect me anymore. I just thought, ¡°Well, it is what it is.¡± Isn¡¯t that the truly scary part? Am I, like Park Yujin, gradually being consumed by the abyss, losing my own personality? But I¡¯m perfectly fine. Rather than my personality collapsing, it seems to be becoming clearer and more distinct. The things I want to do, the things that pique my curiosity, the things that are fun¡ªthey¡¯re all becoming more vivid. Is it because I have the power to realize them? Whatever the reason, one thing is certain, I am thoroughly enjoying my current situation and abilities. As long as it¡¯s fun, isn¡¯t that enough? After all, I created this universe, so it¡¯s essentially my possession. I can do whatever I want with it. Anyway, I¡¯ll leave the fight between the regressor and the demon for later. It seems to be growth time now. Watching the regressor quickly grow by finding and utilizing the knowledge he has is fun in its own way. But the problem is, I¡¯ve already seen what happens once. There¡¯s a certain enjoyment in knowing what¡¯s coming, but a story where the protagonist knows every action from start to finish isn¡¯t very entertaining. So, what should I do today? Maybe I¡¯ll take a look at my beloved home, the SF universe! Yujin¡­ Ah, not Park Yujin, but Yujin from the SF universe, the Terra race. Anyway, Yujin is still busy solidifying the Union¡¯s internal affairs, which is a bit dull. But interesting things are happening on the Elf planet. The Elves have started to cross the seas and lands with steamships and steam vehicles, beginning to extend into different regions. Rather than expanding and unifying their territories, they acknowledge each other¡¯s independence and only accept those who wish to join their collective. The Elves began to develop concepts of ¡®nation,¡¯ ¡®territory,¡¯ and ¡®borders.¡¯ Following this, Rodri declared the establishment of a Holy Nation, having learned about the concept of a nation from Rios¡¯s knowledge. Simultaneously, Lasi declared a democratic nation. Consequently, various other nations began to form, influencing and growing alongside each other. ¡­But then, a discordant note emerged. [Muwan.] I couldn¡¯t help but grin as I called out that name. The Overlord who brought tension among the peaceful Elves. His presence made the growth of the Elves even more interesting. [BOOM!] [What, what is that?!] [It¡¯s an attack! Everyone, get up!!] The first strike began in the outskirts of Lasi¡¯s nation, the Republic of Lumolasi. Located not far from the sea, this area became Muwan¡¯s first target, having crossed the ocean from the southern hemisphere. In this lawless land, devoid of war laws or the Geneva Convention, sudden night raids without declaration of war were entirely possible. Even if the target was not a military force but a civilian village. [Thud-thud-thud©¤] [Swoosh©¤ BOOM!] [Aaaargh!] [Run, run away¡­!] Bombs flew and modern firearms were fired indiscriminately. These were terrifying weapons capable of killing people effortlessly. The Elves, with their superior physical abilities, didn¡¯t die as quickly as humans, but they were still massacred by the overwhelming firepower. [Hold them back! Hold them back!] [Break through everything. This land is ours now!] Muwan¡¯s direct subordinate commander led the Elves in attacking the villagers. Of course, they didn¡¯t kill everyone indiscriminately. The initial attack was meant to break their spirit through a ruthless assault, but those who survived were generally captured. After all, while territory was important, so were the workers needed to cultivate that territory. However¡­ it was clear that the fight was one-sided. If it were the main forces of the Republic of Lumolasi, it might be different, but an ordinary village stood no chance against Muwan¡¯s overwhelming troops and firepower. If this continued, half of Lumolasi would soon be devoured. Something needed to be done. [¡­¡­] The Elf god Rios was observing. It seemed he had decided not to intervene in a fight between fellow Elves. A wise choice. If the master intervenes in a fight between dogs and takes one side, things are bound to go awry. In such cases, unless both sides are gravely injured, it¡¯s best to let them sort out their hierarchy on their own. One of the surviving Elf soldiers was already running towards Lasi¡¯s village, the capital of Lumolasi. Once Lasi received the news, the main forces would be deployed immediately. Recognizing the threat, they might even request support from Rodri¡¯s Holy Nation. Let¡¯s see¡­ which side will succeed in establishing their hierarchy? I¡¯m quite looking forward to it. Chapter 56: Blocking Variables Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 56 Codename ¡®Baoht Z¡¯uqqa-Mogg.¡¯ Also known as the God of Plague, this Outer God is classified as a mid-level Outer God. It has the grotesque and horrifying appearance of a creature that seems to be a fusion of a centipede and a scorpion, with a long centipede-like body, a sharp stinger on its tail, and massive pincers on its head. This monstrous entity, with its terrifying form, spans several hundred kilometers in size. It constantly emits a deadly poison that rots any living being in its vicinity. As an Outer God, its powers transcend the universe, causing eyes and noses to decay just by looking at it. Those who encounter its otherworldly poison suffer agonizing deaths. In addition, it can summon billions of absurdly gigantic poisonous insects, each spanning several kilometers, to swarm around it. Those who attempt to escape it often end up as food for these insects. Such is the cruel and horrifying nature of Baoht Z¡¯uqqa-Mogg. Currently, it resides in the deep, dark ¡®Void,¡¯ a place where no stars or galaxies are visible. In this universe, where direction and flow are indiscernible, the only guiding lights and gravitational forces are absent, making it the loneliest and most empty space. The Void spans a diameter of 3 billion light-years, and the stars¡¯ light is so distant that even if one tries to navigate by them, they end up lost and returning to the Void. In simple terms, it is a cosmic castaway. Initially, Baoht Z¡¯uqqa-Mogg tried to use its power to tear through the space and return. However, as a mid-level Outer God, it had already expended a significant amount of energy 30 years ago to rip through the space and enter this universe. It would likely take another 100 years to gather enough strength to open a rift and escape. [I want to kill. I want to kill life.] More than anything, it did not want to remain in this state. Baoht Z¡¯uqqa-Mogg, known as the God of Plague, harbored an extreme hatred for living beings, taking immense pleasure in killing and causing them pain. The sight of creatures writhing in agony as their bodies burned from his poison fueled him with negative energy, which he used as his power source. Whether to return to the rift or simply for his own satisfaction, he desperately wanted to kill living beings. Driven by this singular desire, Baoht Z¡¯uqqa-Mogg wandered the Void for 30 years. Finally, he succeeded in escaping the Void. [I will kill. Anything I see, I will kill.] Outside the Void lay the territory beyond what was commonly referred to in this universe as the ¡®Galactic Union.¡¯ It was a space several times larger than the 20 billion light-year diameter managed by the Galactic Union. This vast expanse was teeming with life forms¡ªcreatures that would fuel Baoht Z¡¯uqqa-Mogg¡¯s energy. [I see them. I feel them. Beings that will writhe in pain.] Baoht Z¡¯uqqa-Mogg smiled with joy and began to move to claim his prey. But just then¡ª [It seems wise to reduce variables even in the original.] [¡­?] Suddenly, a voice from somewhere beyond reached him. Who? As he pondered this question, the space above him began to tear open massively. [?!] Caught off guard by the sudden event, Baoht Z¡¯uqqa-Mogg saw a gigantic, tentacle-like hand extend from the rift and grab him. The hand was absurdly large, capable of gripping his 500-kilometer-long body with ease. If the hand alone was that immense, the scale of the entity it belonged to was unfathomable. [Gulp?!] An overwhelming force. Irresistible. Despite being a mid-level Outer God, it was inconceivable that he would be unable to overcome such a simple physical phenomenon. Yet, he could not escape. It was as if a much greater power was suppressing his divine abilities. With a swift motion, Baoht Z¡¯uqqa-Mogg was dragged through the rift by that hand. Like pulling an object out of a pocket, he was sucked in without any chance to resist. [What is this! What in the world is this?!] He shouted in confusion, but no answer came back. The torn space closed silently. And just like that, the gigantic hand and Baoht Z¡¯uqqa-Mogg vanished from the universe as if they had never existed. # ¡°¡­¡­¡± ¡°Yujin, what¡¯s the matter?¡± Yujin was staring blankly outside the Galactic Union base when Jupiter, puzzled, inquired. Yujin then smiled wryly, as if it was nothing of concern, and replied. ¡°No, it¡¯s nothing. I just had a feeling that my original body was up to something.¡± ¡°What?! Isn¡¯t that a serious matter!¡± ¡°Should we gather the elders?¡± At Yujin¡¯s words, Lowie Hendrick and Jupiter were taken aback, but Yujin shook his head. ¡°No, it won¡¯t harm us. It¡¯s something my original body is doing.¡± Yujin knew the personality of his original body well, a personality similar to his own. Of course, he was unaware that his original body was gradually becoming accustomed to the senses of an Outer God. Nevertheless, this time, as Yujin said, it was something that would greatly benefit the Union rather than harm it. To prevent significant variables from causing major deviations in the timeline between the replica universe and the original universe, the process of eliminating the biggest variable factors¡ªOuter Gods within the universe¡ªwas undertaken. Dalos had also gone outside and was merely observing the Metallian, and several other mid-to-low-level Outer Gods had been eradicated. A protective barrier had even been placed around the cosmic bubble to prevent Outer Gods from approaching recklessly. Thus, this universe was virtually free from threats due to external interference. From Yujin¡¯s perspective, who wanted to solidify the Union¡¯s internal stability, this was the best possible assistance. ¡°The Radline tribe has switched from the opposition to our side.¡± S~ea??h the novel(F~)ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. ¡°That¡¯s good. Zone C is almost finished.¡± ¡°Yes, but there is still considerable opposition.¡± Since the regime change, the Galactic Union had been in a state of internal turmoil. The Lubaran race, which held the highest position, had stepped down, and the Meias tribe, backed by Yujin, had taken their place. Many races expressed dissatisfaction with this. While the Lubaran elders deserved condemnation for their inhumane actions, there was confusion about why the Meias tribe should take the highest position. ¡°Ten positions should be distributed fairly among different races.¡± ¡°That¡¯s why we took only five and released the remaining five for races with merit or influence.¡± ¡°Why does the Meias tribe get to hold ten positions like the Lubaran race? There¡¯s no guarantee they won¡¯t seize power and conduct inhumane experiments like the Lubaran elders!¡± For about three years, such disputes continued. However, thanks to the efforts of Yujin and his colleagues, the opposition had been largely subdued. Through persuasion, threats, deals, and proposals¡­ In the end, even extermination was employed. Although it was not much different from what the Lubaran race had done, the fundamental policy of the Galactic Union was that those with power seized greater authority, so there was little room for complaint. ¡®They couldn¡¯t say anything when the Lubaran race did it, so they know it would be hypocritical to nitpick now.¡¯ Yujin was well aware of this and skillfully utilized it. He publicized and condemned the atrocities committed by the Lubaran elders, and wielded the implicit agreement of other races¡¯ silence regarding the Lubaran race¡¯s actions without hesitation. This allowed him to resolve many internal issues within three years. Now, the races of the Galactic Union did not fear the Meias tribe. They feared Yujin and his colleagues, who stood behind the Meias tribe and acted decisively. Those who complied were promised prosperity beyond what they had before, but those who resisted were inevitably confronted. If persuasion, threats, or deals failed, they were utterly crushed. Who wouldn¡¯t fear them? ¡°Still, if you conform to the Union, you¡¯re promised a prosperous life.¡± ¡°Unlike the Lubaran race, they share a lot of technology.¡± ¡°Thanks to that, food and resource issues have been resolved.¡± While some harbored fear, most had positive opinions. Thus, Yujin naturally established himself as the de facto ruler of the Galactic Union. # [Don¡¯t ever come back.] [I¡¯m sorry, I¡¯m sorry, I¡¯m sorry.] [I will never come near again.] Phew, thankfully, a bit of a beating made them listen. There were some Outer Gods pulled from the SF universe who were doing well but got angry about being dragged out. After dealing with a few as examples, they quickly learned their manners. Especially that centipede-scorpion creature with the codename Baoht Z¡¯uqqa-Mogg, who, despite being a mid-level Outer God, threw all sorts of tantrums. I cut its centipede segments into 32 pieces. Even then, it resisted fiercely, so I remembered torturing the insect-like Kapteri race before and applied extreme cold torture. Unlike the Kapteri race, this one was an Outer God, so I didn¡¯t have to worry about it perishing. I tortured it with the lowest possible temperature I could muster. It seemed to be in considerable pain, trembling and becoming a well-behaved friend. [I will never speak out of turn again. I¡¯m sorry, I¡¯m sorry, I¡¯m sorry.] Yes, yes. How nice it is to see you so polite. Chapter 57: The Great Elf War Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 57 The Great Elf War. It was a name that perfectly encapsulated the magnitude of the conflict. It was a colossal war involving the ruler of the southern hemisphere, Muwan, and the alliance of Lasi, the representative of Lumolasi, and Rodri, the priest of the Holy Nation. The battle between these two forces lasted for a staggering five years. Considering that their population was relatively small, numbering in the millions despite their vast territories, and that the number of warriors capable of fighting was just under 100,000, the war¡¯s duration was remarkable. The reason was simple: the elves¡¯ bodies were incredibly strong and resilient. Additionally, they possessed the power of spirits bestowed by Rios, allowing them to quickly recover from most wounds and continue fighting. With both sides engaged in a war of attrition without actually depleting their forces, it was inevitable that the conflict would drag on. ¡°This won¡¯t end at this rate.¡± ¡°Moreover, we are on an expedition. Although we are rotating our troops through supply lines due to our numerical advantage, there are limits to this approach.¡± ¡°Hmm¡­¡± Muwan¡¯s side was in a state of emergency. The longer the war dragged on, the more disadvantageous it became for them. Being on a distant expedition, they had to rely on supplies from their far-off main base. Initially, they managed through looting and hunting, but as the war extended, even that became difficult. Fortunately, their larger number of combatants allowed them to rotate troops through supply lines, but the fundamental issue was that resupply took a very long time due to the distance. The further they were from their base, the longer it took for supplies to reach them. Additionally, if their supply lines were ever cut off, it would be catastrophic. Naturally, the supply units were heavily guarded, but that also consumed manpower. They couldn¡¯t continue like this indefinitely. ¡°If this goes on, we¡¯ll eventually be worn out.¡± ¡°We need to break through, no matter what.¡± Under the pressure from his officers, Muwan clicked his tongue. He knew it too. If they stayed like this, they would lose. But launching a full-scale frontal assault was also risky. While they had the numerical advantage, it was common knowledge that the besieging side needed more troops. Considering this, their advantage wasn¡¯t overwhelming. Their armament wasn¡¯t significantly different either. Unlike at the beginning, the enemy had made substantial advancements in weaponry over the five years of conflict. Moreover, the Holy Nation¡¯s Sacred Army, with their superior ability to wield the power of light spirits, made their armament even more formidable. ¡®If only it were like when we first arrived¡­¡¯ When the war first broke out, Muwan¡¯s forces had a clear advantage. That was until Rodri¡¯s Holy Nation intervened, using the power of light spirits to repel them. Even then, they still had the upper hand. But the sudden appearance of the Holy Nation¡¯s reinforcements caused them to act cautiously, dragging the conflict out to this point. ¡®Damn it¡­ If only we had ignored them and pushed through when we first arrived.¡¯ Had they done so, they would have suffered significant losses, but they would have likely secured victory. Their unnecessary caution had brought about this prolonged struggle. ¡°¡­Alright, we advance. All troops, advance and sweep them away. Before it¡¯s too late.¡± ¡°Understood.¡± ¡°We obey your command, my lord.¡± In the end, Muwan ordered the charge. Muwan decided to take a gamble before it was too late. More precisely, he thought¡­ ¡®We¡¯ve lost this time anyway. So, I¡¯ll inflict as much damage as possible to delay their recovery, then return to prepare for the next battle.¡¯ He planned to use the soldiers participating in this war as pawns, sacrificing them while he retreated to his homeland to prepare for the next conflict. If they won, that would be great; if not, inflicting significant damage on the enemy would force them to spend time and resources on recovery. ¡®Soldiers can be replenished. Weapons can be remade.¡¯ To Muwan, soldiers were mere expendables, like bullets in his gun. Once they served their purpose, they were discarded. Even in discarding them, he aimed to maximize their utility. Thus, the next night, Muwan¡¯s army launched their assault. # ¡°Uwaaaaaa!¡± ¡°Kill! Kill them all!¡± Bang! Bang! Shuuuu¡ªBoom! Predictably, Muwan¡¯s army began to falter. Despite their numbers, their armament was now on par with the enemy, and the Holy Nation¡¯s Sacred Army was present on the opposing side. The power to wield light spirits was a significant advantage for the enemy. ¡°There is no retreat! Just break through! If we break through, we can win!¡± ¡°Uwaaaaaa!¡± Despite this, they did not stop their charge. They appeared fearless in the face of death. And that was accurate. Muwan¡¯s soldiers charged relentlessly, as if they had no fear of death. They were driven by the belief that breaking through was their only path to victory, even if it meant sacrificing themselves. At that moment, they did not fear death. Euphoria, numbness to fear, and excitement coursed through them. This was due to the extract of the ¡®Aslo Fruit,¡¯ known for its potent effects, which Muwan had secretly mixed into their meals to ensure they wouldn¡¯t retreat even if the battle turned unfavorable. ¡°Heh heh, yes. Fight like that. Die gloriously as my stepping stones.¡± Watching this, Muwan began to slowly retreat, aiming to escape the battlefield. ¡°Hahaha! We will be victorious!¡± ¡°Charge! Charge! Chaaaaarge!¡± The soldiers and officers, intoxicated by the Aslo Fruit extract, did not notice Muwan and a few high-ranking officers slipping away. They enthusiastically charged towards their deaths. ¡°What, what are these crazy bastards!¡± ¡°This is¡­ could it be¡­!¡± However, Lasi, understanding the current situation, quickly realized that the soldiers were in a frenzied state due to the Aslo Fruit extract. ¡°Priest Rodri! Use the power of the light spirits to dispel their drug-induced state!¡± ¡°Hmm? Drug-induced state? Understood.¡± Although Rodri didn¡¯t fully grasp Lasi¡¯s instructions, he trusted her judgment, which had never been wrong. Rodri summoned the highest-ranking light spirit and spread a vast power of light across the battlefield. ¡°Purify everything. Oh, spirit of light!¡± Fwaaaah©¤! ¡°¡­Huh?¡± ¡°Wha-what?¡± The purifying light dispelled the effects of the Aslo Fruit extract from Muwan¡¯s army. With the effects gone, they could now calmly assess their surroundings. They realized they had been recklessly charging towards certain death. And then, another realization struck. ¡°He¡¯s gone. Lord Muwan is gone.¡± ¡°What¡­ he made us charge and then ran away?¡± sea??h th§× Nov§×l?ire.n(e)t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. ¡°He even drugged us so we couldn¡¯t tell what was happening.¡± The soldiers, realizing what Muwan had done to them and that he had fled, were left in a state of shock. A commander who drugged his troops and sent them to their deaths while he escaped¡ªsuch a despicable elf being hailed as a conqueror now seemed utterly foolish. ¡°We surrender.¡± ¡°¡­We surrender. Please spare our lives.¡± Naturally, they all surrendered, and thus, the Great Elf War, which had lasted for five years, came to an unexpectedly anticlimactic end. # ¡°The soldiers are doing well, right?¡± ¡°Don¡¯t worry. The effects of the Aslo Fruit last quite a while.¡± Muwan, grinning as he led his soldiers to their doom, was a pitiful sight. Yet, he rationalized it as a necessary step to achieve his ambitions. ¡®Yes, this was unavoidable. The soldiers would be happy to die as stepping stones for a conqueror like me.¡¯ With such thoughts, Muwan continued his march. Just a bit further, and he would reach the dock where the supply unit¡¯s ship awaited. But then¡­ [You despicable scum.] ¡°¡­?! What, what is this?¡± Suddenly, a voice directly echoed in the minds of Muwan and his high-ranking officers. This sensation was familiar. ¡®Rios, the god¡­?¡¯ The voice of Rios, the god of elves and light spirits, was unmistakable. It was the same voice that had granted them knowledge and power. ¡®Has he come to aid me?¡¯ Initially, Muwan thought so. In his arrogance, he believed that the god had come to save him from this humiliating defeat and retreat. But, of course, that was not the case. [I tolerated the war among kin. But this¡­ this crosses the line. How dare you abandon your loyal followers and flee alone? The war you started, the soldiers who risked their lives for you?!] ¡°Argh?!¡± At Rios¡¯s rebuke, Muwan and his high-ranking officers felt an excruciating headache, causing them to collapse on the spot. The pain was as if their heads were about to split open. Muwan, in disbelief, questioned Rios. ¡°Why¡­ why are you doing this? Am I not your servant? I¡¯m only acting to fulfill my ambitions. What¡¯s wrong with that¡­! Is it because they have a priest? Are gods supposed to play favorites?¡± Crackle! Despite overcoming the headache and growling in defiance, all he received was even greater pain. ¡°Aaaaargh¡­!¡± [You have crossed the line. Your existence is no longer necessary. You are a detriment to the future of the elves.] ¡°¡­What?¡± Muwan tried to ask what he meant, but he couldn¡¯t. Because right after hearing that voice¡­ Pop! His head exploded, and he died instantly. Muwan, the conqueror who ruled the southern hemisphere of the elf planet and harbored ambitions to dominate the entire world, met a lonely and unremarkable death in a quiet forest, known to no one. Chapter 58: End and Beginning Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 58 Wow, Rios was really furious. He didn¡¯t seem to care much during the war, but abandoning his loyal followers without any remorse clearly enraged him. Well, it¡¯s understandable. While infighting and battles might be tolerated as a means of establishing hierarchy, from the perspective of Rios, who was once a commander of the Kapteri race known for their strong sense of unity, Muwan¡¯s actions were utterly inhumane. S§×arch* The Nov§×l?ire.n(e)t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. Rios must have thought Muwan had crossed a severe line, leading to his immediate execution. It¡¯s a good thing, really. While war can spur rapid technological advancement, it also consumes manpower and resources, drastically lowering the quality of life. If it drags on too long, it benefits no one. So, Muwan met a miserable end as a traitor. Most of his forces were absorbed by Lumolasi and the Holy Nation. The two factions were so closely knit that they were practically a single community, making it fair to say that the elves were now unified. The combination of Lumolasi Republic¡¯s advanced technology and democratic tendencies with the Holy Nation¡¯s devout religious practices created a formidable alliance. Although a few factions remained, none were as large or powerful as this unified entity. Eventually, they would either be absorbed or willingly seek protection under this powerful alliance. Despite knowing their moderate stance, the overwhelming technology and military power were still a source of fear. Now is the time. From this point of unity, the true progress of the elves would begin. From the modern era to the SF era. The day when the elves would venture into space was drawing near. It had been about 20 years since the birth of the elves, and five cycles had passed according to the elven planet¡¯s calendar. The children born in the early days had now grown into adults, becoming a significant workforce. Simultaneously, they were now capable of having children, laying the foundation for a population explosion. With territories, food, and resources capable of supporting a population in the hundreds of millions, the elves actively encouraged childbirth. Those who had children received ample food support and large houses to live in with their families. Interestingly, despite such advancements, there was still no concept of ¡®currency.¡¯ Transactions did occur, but they were mostly barter-based. Workers were compensated with food and necessary resources instead of money. Thanks to the elves¡¯ strong sense of unity, this system worked without major issues, but the lack of currency was somewhat inconvenient. Lasi seemed to recognize this and was discussing potential reforms. Currency reform, population explosion, the end of war, and the unification of the elves¡ªall these changes began to unfold simultaneously after the war with Muwan. It was truly a golden age. And then, there was one more significant event. Pssshhh¡ª {Multiple lifeforms detected.} {They are different from us. They are made of soft materials.} {The scent and sound of machinery are also present.} {Could it be that these soft lifeforms coexist with machines?} Visitors had arrived from space. They were the Metallians, creations of Dalos, beings made of machinery. They were the inhabitants of a neighboring planet. With the arrival of the Metallians, it seemed like the future was set. In my estimation, within the next 30 years, the elves would develop modern vehicles like cars, tanks, and fighter jets. Within 50 years, they would venture into space. They would make contact with the Galactic Union, join it, and in about 100 years, the elves might even rise to the highest ranks within the Union. That¡¯s roughly my prediction. # While observing the elves¡¯ progress, various events were unfolding in other parts of the universe. All were interesting in their own right, but one stood out in particular. It was the ¡®Constellation Hunter¡¯ universe I had previously meddled with. This unique universe connected three dimensions: a fantasy world, a divine realm, and Earth. I had once granted power to a human there as a constellation, causing quite the upheaval. Initially, I considered resetting or deleting the failed experiment, but instead, I decided to introduce a regression twist. This caused the flow of time to become somewhat tangled, with time passing 100 times faster there than in other places. Adjusting it back would be simple¡ªjust a click¡ªbut since the universe was self-correcting to align its flow, I didn¡¯t feel the need to intervene. So, I left it as it was for about 5 years, during which 500 years passed in that world. The amusing part was that despite the passage of time, the ¡®Constellation Hunter¡¯ universe remained largely unchanged from when I first interfered. The timeline, characters, and events all remained unchanged. Why did this happen? [¡­How many times has it been now? Around 400¡­?] Unbelievable. Lee Junhyun wasn¡¯t just experiencing a regression; he was caught in an endless loop due to the tangled flow of time. The world was supposed to end on the date and time when he was first killed by Park Yujin. At that moment, the world would end, and he would die. However, something had gone terribly wrong. Instead of disappearing, Lee Junhyun was continuously sent back to the time and place of his initial regression. Not only did he return to the same point after being killed by Park Yujin, but even suicide would result in the same regression. The entire universe had aligned itself with the existence of the regressor, Lee Junhyun. If he ceased to exist, the universe would also end, so the universe¡¯s will kept returning him to his original state. Due to my interference, the universe was already set to end at the date and time of Lee Junhyun¡¯s first death. This contradiction created an infinite loop for Lee Junhyun. This is quite fascinating. The universe¡¯s very existence is tied to a single human, and its will is to maintain that human¡¯s existence at all costs. Creating adversaries and ensuring its own survival¡ªthis is worth a closer look. Let¡¯s watch it closer. # A total of 397 times. 489 years, 73 days, 15 hours, and 33 minutes. That¡¯s how many times Lee Junhyun had regressed and the duration he had been trapped in the loop since his first regression. ¡°¡­Here again.¡± He always found himself back at the starting point, his officetel. The clock, as always, showed 10:00 AM on July 17, 2024. It was the start of the 398th loop. ¡°¡­¡­¡± Lee Junhyun stared at his phone¡¯s clock, lost in thoughts of the distant past. It all began with his murder at the hands of Park Yujin. Despite his efforts to grow and prepare, he was no match for the rampaging abyssal demon, Park Yujin. Lee Junhyun was killed by him for the first time. ¡®Damn it¡­ I couldn¡¯t save them after all. I prepared so hard. But I have no regrets. I did everything I could. Now, I can just rest¡­¡¯ As he thought this, he suddenly found himself back in his officetel. [July 17, 2024, 10:00 AM] ¡°I-I¡¯m back?¡± During his second regression, he concluded that he had to kill Park Yujin and save the world to end the loop. Determined, he sought out Park Yujin before his rampage and killed him, even if it meant becoming a criminal. But then¡­ ¡°What? Why¡­?¡± From Park Yujin¡¯s corpse, the power of the abyss erupted, creating an indescribably monstrous form. An abyssal creature. This being was even more destructive than the awakened abyssal demon, Park Yujin, and it shattered the world even more catastrophically. Naturally, Lee Junhyun, who confronted it before he had grown stronger, was brutally torn apart by the abyssal monster. In his third regression, he reflected on his previous failures and prepared even more meticulously. He trained rigorously to not only defeat the abyssal demon but also to vanquish the true boss that emerged from his death. But he lost. He lost and regressed, died and regressed, was torn apart and regressed. Throughout this cycle, he felt his emotions and senses dulling. ¡®¡­I can¡¯t taste anything while eating.¡¯ Perhaps it was the result of experiencing countless horrific deaths. He was gradually falling apart. However, to end all of this, he had to eliminate the abyssal demon, and the monster that was the abyss itself within it. Fixated on this singular goal, Lee Junhyun continued to push forward. ¡°Huff, huff¡­.¡± After roughly 30 regressions, Lee Junhyun finally managed to defeat the abyssal demon Park Yujin and the abyssal monster that emerged from her. ¡°I did it. Finally.¡± His emotions had dulled to the point where he felt no great joy. Yet, the relief of finally being liberated was palpable, seeping into his very bones. ¡°It¡¯s finally over. Finally. Finally, it¡¯s over¡­.¡± [July 31, 2026, 6:28 PM] Drip¡ª It was over. Everything was. And then¡­. [July 17, 2024, 10:00 AM] ¡°¡­What?¡± It began. Everything. Chapter 59: Next Plan Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 59 Despite having defeated the Abyssal Monster, Lee Junhyun found himself back at the same time and place. This realization threw him into great confusion. ¡®Why? Did I miss something? Did it not actually die? Was there a third form?¡¯ No, there was nothing like that. So why? Was there some condition he needed to fulfill? He hadn¡¯t given up hope yet. He believed there had to be a way to break free from this horrific loop. ¡­At least, until the 150th cycle. ¡°¡­Ha, hahaha. Ahahahahaha!¡± The 151st officetel. The 151st July 17, 2024, 10:00 AM. His mental state was completely shattered. He realized that no matter what he did, he couldn¡¯t escape this loop. Whether he killed the Abyssal Monster, let it destroy the world, or killed it the moment he woke up, the world would eternally repeat. He understood now. This world had no intention of letting him go. It was as if the moment this loop ended and he was freed would be the end of this world. ¡°Damn it. Just end. End already.¡± He felt resentment. He resented the Abyssal Demon Park Yujin, the constellation that had regressed him, and the world that held him captive. No, none of that mattered anymore. All he cared about was ending this disgusting loop. Drowning, suffocation, explosion, exsanguination, falling, radiation poisoning¡­ He had tried dying in every conceivable way, hoping he wouldn¡¯t come back. But as always, after dying, he would wake up in the same place, at the same time. The 397th loop. July 17, 2024, 10:00 AM. Waking up, Lee Junhyun desperately prayed again and again. Please, please end this world. End me. He had been trapped in the loop for nearly 500 years. His mind was worn out, his senses long gone. He didn¡¯t even know what kept him moving anymore. He just prayed inwardly, begging for this horrific life to end. And then. [Do you wish to disappear?] From somewhere, a voice responded to his plea. The moment he heard it, he felt a sensation he thought he had lost long ago¡ªpain. A sharp headache. The feeling of pain, something he hadn¡¯t felt in ages, was both agonizing and oddly comforting. ¡°Who¡­?¡± He asked who was speaking to him. Was it a constellation? But his constellation had disappeared. Then, was it another constellation? He wasn¡¯t sure. It felt different. Lee Junhyun, feeling a throbbing headache, waited for the answer. Soon, it responded gently. [I am the one who will bring you an end.] ¡°¡­¡­¡± At that moment, he felt his heartbeat. It must have been beating all along, but he hadn¡¯t felt it. Now, he felt it, filled with excitement and anticipation. The words of an unknown entity: the one who would bring him an end. But why? Why did he feel such deep trust in this being¡¯s words? It felt like this entity could effortlessly make this world disappear. It exuded an omnipotence that made him think it might be a true god, not just a constellation. ¡®Have you come to pity me and offer salvation?¡¯ No, what did that matter now? All he wanted was to die, to end everything. ¡°Please, end it all. Erase me. Grant me complete death.¡± He desperately wished for it. He pleaded for an end to himself and this world. And then, it came. [I have heard your wish. Since it¡¯s the last, may you have a pleasant dream.] With those words, Lee Junhyun gently fell asleep. Since the loop began, he had hardly ever slept properly, but this time, he fell into a deep, peaceful slumber. And then. [July 31, 2026, 6:28 PM] . . . [July 31, 2026, 6:29 PM] [July 31, 2026, 6:30 PM] ¡®Ah¡­ it¡¯s over. The loop is over.¡¯ In his dream, the nearly 500-year-long loop had ended. He dreamed of lying peacefully in a world that had become tranquil. In that dream, he was hailed as a hero who saved the world, living a rich and splendid life without envy. At the end of a happy life, he quietly passed away at the age of 93, surrounded by his children and grandchildren. Tears streamed down his face as he smiled gently, experiencing all his life¡¯s goals, even if only in a dream. As he slept happily, dreaming of such a life. With a soft rustle¡ª The universe met its end. # [Hmm, a universe choosing a loop to maintain its existence¡­ I¡¯ve gathered good data. Indeed, this is data that couldn¡¯t be obtained without creating and experimenting with various worldviews.] By the way, that dream at the end¡­ Maybe I should have let him achieve it in reality and then erased him after 70 years. It was quite pitiful. No, that wouldn¡¯t have worked. He could only be that happy in a dream. In reality, he would have likely just wished for death, loop or no loop. His senses had dulled, and his emotions and mind were almost entirely eroded. He would be satisfied knowing he was happy, even if only in a dream. Besides, there was no need to keep the constellation-based world around any longer. I had gathered all the data I needed. Wow, saying it like this makes me sound like a psychopathic scientist from a movie. ¡°I don¡¯t care what happens to this world as long as I get my data!¡± You see that in movies sometimes. Oh, speaking of which, I had created a zombie apocalypse world with a similar vibe. It¡¯s been seven years since I made it, and it seemed to be reaching its climax. You know, the part where they discover the scientist who created the zombie virus and the vaccine subplot comes into play. It might be fun to binge-watch that later. But what¡¯s important now is this, my original universe. Well, it¡¯s a replica, but still. It¡¯s been 15 years since Yujin took control of the Galactic Union. Finally, the Union was completely stabilized, and they were preparing for the next phase. [We plan to expand the management area of the Galactic Union.] [Expand the management area?] Sear?h the N?vel(F)ire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. The next step Yujin envisioned was¡­ the conquest of the entire universe. ¡°The current diameter of the Galactic Union¡¯s controlled territory is about 20 billion light-years. That¡¯s only about one-fifth of the observable universe.¡± The elders of the Meias tribe nodded in agreement. Indeed, while the Galactic Union boasted the largest scale within the observable universe, it only managed a fraction of it, controlling just one-fifth of the diameter. However, Yujin had plans to expand this territory further, envisioning a future where the Galactic Union¡ªor rather, he himself¡ªwould govern the entire universe. ¡°But Yujin, there are still many areas within our current territory that we haven¡¯t managed to control.¡± Jupiter raised his hand in objection. He argued that it was premature to expand the territory when there were still many uncharted regions within their existing domain. ¡°I understand. That¡¯s why we will start by organizing our current territory as a preparatory step.¡± Yujin responded nonchalantly, causing the Meias elders to waver. It sounded too far-fetched. If it were that easy, they would have done it long ago. The fact that they hadn¡¯t expanded further or fully controlled their existing territory indicated the difficulty of the task. ¡°In fact, we have enough manpower and technology. It was only impossible because the Lubaran race monopolized it.¡± Yujin said with a sly smile, causing the Meias elders to be greatly astonished. ¡®Is that so? We do have enough manpower for exploration. The number of intelligent life forms in the Galactic Union is immense.¡¯ ¡®It was just a lack of technology. The latest scientific advancements were almost entirely monopolized by the Lubaran race.¡¯ ¡®But now, with Yujin having released that technology, the conditions are essentially met!¡¯ From the beginning, Yujin had aimed for this. He hadn¡¯t released the technology merely to attract races into the Galactic Union. He had a grander vision, considering both the reinforcement and expansion of their territory. ¡®What a terrifying man.¡¯ ¡®To think he planned this far ahead.¡¯ The elders of the Meias tribe were in awe of Yujin¡¯s broad vision. Initially, they had many concerns about a Terra race member becoming their de facto leader, despite his prowess in magic. But witnessing his expansive vision and exceptional handling of affairs, they shuddered to think what might have happened if they hadn¡¯t entrusted him with leadership. ¡°Then let¡¯s make this the agenda for this council meeting. I look forward to your cooperation, elders.¡± Everyone knew he was the true ruler, yet he never stepped forward, maintaining a meticulous approach to avoid giving anyone leverage against him. ¡°Let¡¯s adjourn.¡± With that, the meeting ended, and Yujin left the conference room. Jupiter followed after organizing the meeting materials. The remaining elders finally relaxed, letting out deep sighs of relief. ¡°Phew¡­ I get tense every time we have a meeting.¡± ¡°Indeed. He doesn¡¯t do anything special, yet there¡¯s this overwhelming pressure.¡± Their conversation naturally revolved around Yujin. A member of the Terra race, yet the ruler of the Galactic Union. He had stabilized the chaotic Union within 15 years and was now building towards even greater goals. Honestly, he was worthy of respect. But then, a thought struck them. ¡¯15 years¡­ That¡¯s a long time for a Terra race member. Even with physical enhancements, he should have aged somewhat.¡¯ ¡®¡­Why hasn¡¯t he aged at all?¡¯ Yujin¡¯s unchanged face over 15 years seemed odd to the elders. ¡®Is he just incredibly youthful?¡¯ ¡®Maybe he has excellent skincare. Should I ask for his dermatologist¡¯s contact?¡¯ Of course, none of them deeply suspected anything beyond that. Chapter 60: Encounter Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 60 After Yujin solidified his position within the Galactic Union, his next goal was to expand the Union¡¯s territory. To do this, he aimed to first explore and develop the uncharted regions within the current domain. But wait, this could pose a risk of the elves being discovered. Although the elves were rapidly advancing through their alliance with the Metallians, this might lead to an early discovery. Even with a diameter of 20 billion light-years, if the Galactic Union invested in scientific advancements comparable to the Lubaran race, internal exploration could be swift. At the latest, it would take 20 years. Twenty years. Would the elves be able to grow enough to accept the Galactic Union within that time frame? Yujin, you troublesome variable creator. [Hmm¡­] Wait a minute. This might actually be a good thing. With Yujin at the helm, the intelligent life forms within the Galactic Union would receive significant benefits. They would share advanced technology and provide support for any deficiencies. In that case, wouldn¡¯t it be faster for the elves to grow by joining the Galactic Union and receiving shared technology rather than developing on their own? As intelligent beings, they wouldn¡¯t be attacked or captured under the guise of protection upon first contact. The issue here is whether Yujin would preemptively eliminate the elves upon recognizing their potential. With intelligence on par with the Lubaran race, exceptional physical abilities, and light spirit magic akin to the Meias race, it wouldn¡¯t take long for the elves to rise to a position similar to the former Lubaran race within the Union. Given Yujin¡¯s desire for power, he might decide to eliminate them preemptively. [Yujin might consider persuading them to be manageable from above¡­ but the simplest method is to wipe them out before they can develop.] So, the answer is clear. [Make them so attractive or threatening that wiping them out isn¡¯t an option.] If the elves have an irresistible allure that Yujin can¡¯t ignore, or if eliminating them would result in significant losses, making an alliance would be the more beneficial choice. The existence of Rios, a real god, could be one such allure. As my avatar, Yujin would naturally be intrigued. He might also see it as a threat, but that¡¯s even better. It means we can leverage both allure and threat. Therefore, if we elevate the elves¡¯ scientific and technological prowess to a sufficiently threatening level, it would be perfect. If the Galactic Union anticipates considerable casualties in a conflict, they would have no reason to fight. There¡¯s a risk that the Meias race could suffer critical damage, or in the worst case, Yujin himself could be incapacitated. This would provide an opportunity for other Union races, always eyeing the next regime, to make their move. [Ugh. This is annoying. Should I just hide them so they can¡¯t be found?] Honestly, whether it¡¯s strategy, allure, or threat, I could end it all with a single display of my power. Being an omnipotent god has its perks. However, the downside is that it makes everything go exactly as I predict, which isn¡¯t very fun. Unexpected variables, unintended events, and risky gambles¡ªthese are what make games and life interesting. If everything went according to plan, where¡¯s the fun in that? So, let¡¯s see what happens when Yujin and the elves meet for the first time. Let¡¯s see what kind of outcome this encounter will bring. # Sear?h the n?vel_Fire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. Five years had passed since the war with Muwan. The third generation of elves had grown up, becoming adults capable of working and having children. The population of the Lumolasi and Holy Nation alliance had surpassed the initial 30 million elves. Their territory now spanned an entire continent. With the cooperation of the Metallians, they had ventured beyond the seas using modern motorized ships. Roads were paved, cars sped along them, electric trains ran on tracks, and flying machines soared in the skies. All of this progress had been achieved in just five years. Despite steamships and steam locomotives still being in active use, they had leaped several generations to build a modern civilization. Due to the relatively small population compared to their vast territory, transportation technology had advanced rapidly. ¡°Impressive. At this rate, we can rely on Metallian technology for medical treatments and body transfers,¡± said Lasi, the leader of the elves. ¡°Indeed, the elves¡¯ technological prowess is remarkable,¡± replied Sprine, the leader of the Metallians. Sprine was a massive 5-meter-tall robot that could transform into a fighter jet, possessing immense combat capabilities. He could single-handedly take on dozens of Metallians if he wished. However, for now, he was focused on advancing civilization in collaboration with the elves. ¡°It would be wonderful if we could advance to the point of space travel soon,¡± Sprine remarked. ¡°We¡¯ve made significant progress with rockets. Now that we¡¯ve solidified our foundation, it¡¯s time to prepare for external exploration,¡± Lasi said with a smile, leading Sprine to the research lab. The lab was filled with advanced devices and computers based on Metallian technology. The enormous computers were modeled after Metallian brains and neural networks, boasting incredible computational power. These supercomputers were used to design intricate rocket components and perform various calculations. Once the rockets were built, they would also calculate launch trajectories and orbits. ¡°A few years ago, this would have been unimaginable. It¡¯s truly fascinating.¡± ¡°When I arrived, you had already developed steam engines, so I can¡¯t quite grasp the extent of your progress.¡± ¡°Until recently, we were using wooden and stone spears and bows.¡± Sprine chuckled in disbelief at Lasi¡¯s words. It was hard to fathom that a genius race, which had advanced so rapidly with just a bit of shared knowledge, had been fighting with stone and wood until recently. Considering that the elves had only recently come into existence and their planet showed little signs of development or desolation, it seemed plausible. ¡®Even with our help and the assistance of Rios, this is unbelievable.¡¯ Of course, the Metallians led by Sprine were also a relatively new race, having been born even later than the elves. However, Dalos had meticulously crafted their history, leading them to believe they had existed for centuries. Regardless, Sprine thought the elves were truly remarkable. ¡®It¡¯s as if a god created them with the intention of dominating the universe.¡¯ However, this god was not the ¡®Rios¡¯ that the elves worshipped. It was something higher, a truly omnipotent being capable of creating life and controlling most aspects of the universe. Much like the great being that the Metallians believed had created them centuries ago. ¡°¡­?¡± At that moment, Sprine sensed something unusual and looked up. ¡®The sky? No¡­ space.¡¯ There was something above the planet. Higher than the sky, someone was observing from space. ¡°It seems something has arrived in space. I¡¯ll go check it out.¡± ¡°What? Space? But Rios is there¡­¡± ¡°Something is scanning the planet. It doesn¡¯t feel entirely friendly.¡± With that, Sprine transformed into his fighter jet form and shot up into the sky. He pierced through the atmosphere and entered the black void of space. What he found was¡­ ¡°¡­a spaceship.¡± This was no ordinary spaceship. It was an impossibly colossal galleon, with a length that seemed to stretch at least 500 kilometers. Its origins were a mystery. Then, a revelation. ¡®Rios¡­!¡¯ A gigantic elf-like figure with six arms, resembling a satellite floating in space, began to approach the massive galleon. This was the elf god Rios, inspecting the elf planet from space. The two titanic entities faced each other in the silence of the cosmos. # ¡°This is quite the predicament.¡± The giant galleon was, of course, a vessel from the Galactic Union. To be precise, it was the main fleet prepared to investigate this region, following an initial exploration by a scout ship. More accurately, it was the main fleet poised for potential combat operations. The presence of an intelligent life form with a significant level of civilization had already been detected, and the main fleet had arrived for a more thorough scan. It was confirmed: this planet was inhabited by a race on the cusp of spacefaring modernity. It was astonishing that this place had remained undiscovered until now, but considering the recent supernova explosion nearby, which emitted tremendous radiation and debris, it made sense that it had been overlooked. ¡®How could life survive here?¡¯ As they pondered this question, something massive approached them. A titanic creature of comparable size to the Galactic Union¡¯s 600-kilometer-long galleon, but this being resembled the detected life forms and, curiously, had six arms. This entity had enveloped the planet with a powerful magnetic field, shielding it from the violent radiation storms and material onslaught. ¡®An outer god?¡¯ The immense power and colossal size were indicative of a lower-tier outer god. But an outer god protecting a planet? Moreover, it bore a striking resemblance to the inhabitants, almost as if it were an idol. ¡®¡­Pointed ears, alabaster skin, beautiful appearance.¡¯ There were many peculiarities. Yujin recognized the familiar appearance of the intelligent life forms inhabiting this place, something only he and his creator would know. Based on these inexplicable oddities, he quickly reached a conclusion. ¡®This is the work of the Creator.¡¯ All of this, he realized, was orchestrated by the being who had created his. Chapter 61: Elves and the Union Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 61 Despite its incredibly beautiful appearance, its size matched that of the colossal galleon they were aboard. The six arms it possessed added an eerie quality, instilling an inexplicable mix of fear and awe in those who beheld it. This was different from the overwhelming danger felt when facing a giant monster. It was also distinct from the immense pain and indescribable terror experienced when encountering an outer god. While elements of those feelings were present, the primary emotion was awe rather than fear, coupled with a merciful presence that did not inflict pain on the observer. It was an entity truly befitting the title of ¡®god.¡¯ [Return. Otherwise, I will attack.] The god¡¯s warning was directly transmitted into the minds of all the Union members aboard the galleon. Despite being a state-of-the-art, heavily armed vessel, the warning had a profound effect. ¡°Isn¡¯t this dangerous?¡± ¡°An outer god¡­ or at least something equivalent.¡± ¡°We should retreat for now¡­.¡± The Union members on the galleon were terrified at the prospect of confronting the entity. However, their leader, Yujin, had no intention of retreating. Knowing that the entity was a creation of the same being who had created him, he felt no fear. In fact, Yujin was immune to the mental corruption of outer gods, so even if he had faced a true outer god, he would not have been afraid. Using an electronic loudspeaker that transmitted sound via electromagnetic waves, Yujin addressed the entity. ¡°I request a dialogue. We have not come to attack the inhabitants of this planet. We seek to include them as members of the Union through peaceful discussion¡­.¡± [Otherwise, you intend to attack.] ¡°¡­¡­¡± Yujin had hoped to resolve the situation peacefully, but the god¡¯s pointed remark left him speechless. After all, that had been the original plan. The divine entity seemed to have an intimate understanding of the Union, openly displaying hostility. However, knowing that this planet and its inhabitants were creations of him own creator, Yujin had no intention of becoming their enemy. A misstep could provoke the creator to erase him and everything else in a fit of rage. The god-like entity before him was not what he feared. Yujin feared the creator, who could erase him with a mere thought. ¡®That must be the same for this entity.¡¯ Yujin believed that revealing their shared creator and expressing a desire for cooperation rather than conflict would turn the god-like entity friendly. ¡°¡­I will withdraw the galleon and speak with you alone. This way, there will be no concern of an attack.¡± ¡°W-Wait¡­! Yujin?!¡± ¡°Yujin, what are you saying?!¡± The Union members were shocked by Yujin¡¯s bold statement. Yujin, despite being on the front lines, was the de facto ruler of the Union, having unified all the elders of the Meias race. Everyone in the Union knew this. The idea of him risking his life to speak with the god-like entity alone was astonishing. ¡°Do not worry. That entity cannot kill me.¡± Yujin reassured the Union members. ¡°That being seems to understand the Union quite well. It knows that if it attacks us, reinforcements numbering in the tens of thousands will arrive to obliterate the planet. That¡¯s why, despite its hostility, it hasn¡¯t attacked us first.¡± Yujin believed that as a creation of the same creator, there was no risk of being attacked. However, he couldn¡¯t share this reasoning with the Union members. Nonetheless, his logic was sound. The entity had issued a verbal warning instead of attacking outright, indicating its reluctance to engage in immediate conflict. ¡°Therefore, do not worry.¡± With these words, Yujin ordered the galleon to retreat while he approached the six-armed entity in a personal pod. [I understand that you do not intend to attack immediately. However, your presence is not welcome here, filthy invaders.] ¡°¡­¡­¡± The response was sharp and hostile. Yujin remained calm and spoke softly. ¡°Hey, elf god.¡± [¡­? How do you know that name?] The term ¡®elf¡¯ was known only to the elf race, their god Rios, and their creator, the Absolute God. How did Yujin know it without being told? ¡°Of course, I know. With that appearance, it would be more surprising if you weren¡¯t an elf.¡± [You¡­ could it be¡­?] Rios quickly understood Yujin¡¯s identity. They were both creations of the same being, inheritors of the Absolute God¡¯s knowledge. ¡°Now you understand, don¡¯t you? Why I can¡¯t attack you¡­ and why you can¡¯t attack me.¡± [¡­I see. We cannot go against the will of the Great One.] They were creations with specific purposes and intentions. If they started fighting among themselves, it would displease their creator. To avoid unnecessary conflict and potential disaster, it was best to avoid disputes. ¡°I know that the elves are creations of the Creator, so I won¡¯t treat them like ordinary Union members. While others are subordinates, I want to accept them as equal partners.¡± Yujin spoke his mind without hesitation. Being creations of the Creator, the elves were undoubtedly extraordinary, possessing remarkable abilities. Drawing them in as allies would greatly aid his goal of ¡®conquering the universe.¡¯ Treating them as equals rather than subordinates would benefit both him and the elves. ¡®Creations of the Great One. Are they part of the Union? No, rather than being part of it¡­.¡¯ Rios looked at the colossal galleon that had retreated. The fact that Yujin could command such a vessel indicated his high rank, at least equivalent to a Union elder. He seemed more like a ruler of the Union than a mere member. Despite his lingering resentment towards the Union due to his memories as a member of the Kapteri race, Rios concluded that aligning with the Union was the best choice for the future of the elves. ¡®There¡¯s no need to be hostile. The Lubaran race is a bit concerning, but¡­ this guy should handle it well enough.¡¯ Unaware of the Lubaran race¡¯s downfall, Rios was understandably cautious. If he knew that the Lubaran race had already fallen and were now more like slaves providing technology rather than rulers, he would have eagerly ensured the elves joined the Union. [Very well. Remember, if anything happens to the elves, you will not be spared.] ¡°Of course.¡± With this dramatic resolution, the elves welcomed a new outsider¡ªthe vast entity known as the Galactic Union. # ¡°Greetings, I am Yujin of the Galactic Union.¡± ¡°I am Lasi, representative of the elves.¡± Thanks to the elf god Rios, who facilitated automatic translation of their languages, they could converse comfortably. sea??h th§× N?vel(F)ire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. Naturally, the representative of the Metallians, Sprine, was also present at the meeting. ¡®TransforX¡­¡¯ Seeing the Metallian, Yujin recalled a movie from the Creator¡¯s memories. Robots that transformed into vehicles. Mechanical lifeforms living on a planet made of machines. It was clear to anyone that they resembled the species from that movie. ¡®Elves and TransforX. What on earth is the Creator up to?¡¯ At this point, Yujin wondered if the Creator had any purpose at all, or if he was simply amusing himself with whatever came to mind at the moment. ¡®Perhaps this is the closest to the truth.¡¯ ¡°Yujin?¡± ¡°Oh, yes. I was just lost in thought for a moment.¡± Regardless, the important task was to understand the elf race. From the outset, they had shown characteristics quite different from typical elves. They possessed highly advanced technology and even raised livestock for meat consumption. However, there were still traits that hinted at their elven nature. Despite their technological advancements, they maintained harmony with nature, building low structures and preserving trees and grass wherever possible, creating a city that felt like a modern metropolis nestled within a forest¡ªa surreal and dreamlike atmosphere. ¡®It feels like I¡¯ve truly stepped into another world.¡¯ Elves, a modern city, harmony with the forest, advanced technology¡ªelements that seemed incompatible were perfectly balanced on this unique planet. Yujin found himself quite fond of this place. But it wasn¡¯t just the aesthetics that appealed to him. ¡®To think they achieved this level of civilization in just 20 to 30 years. Even with the help of the god Rios created by the Creator, their development speed surpasses that of the Lubaran race.¡¯ Moreover, their desire for progress and curiosity were exceptionally strong. Left unchecked, they could match or even surpass the Lubaran race¡¯s technology within a few decades. ¡®I must bring them into the fold as allies.¡¯ Otherwise, they would have to be exterminated immediately. If not, they would pose a tremendous threat to the Galactic Union. Naturally, extermination was not an option. Yujin resolved to offer any terms necessary to make them allies of the Union. Chapter 62: Idra Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 62 While conducting various experiments, I received a message from Nyarlathotep. She wanted to meet and discuss intellectual matters. Although both of us were top-tier outer gods unrestricted by space, making it possible to converse from afar, meeting in person had a different feel. It was akin to the difference between daily phone calls and face-to-face conversations. Nyarlathotep also expressed a desire to meet in person. ¡­What a pity. It would have been nice if the one eager to meet me was a stunning beauty rather than a grotesque mass of tentacles. Although Nyarlathotep¡¯s human form was quite beautiful, the true form left much to be desired. Regardless, this led me to visit Nyarlathotep¡¯s laboratory space after a long time. Shhhh¡ª Having visited several times before, I was familiar with tearing through space to enter. [Hmm?] Apart from Nyarlathotep, I sensed another presence. Was there another visitor besides me? As I pondered this, a sharp, feminine voice filled with indignation rang out. [How could you torment these lovely beings so much! How many times have I told you to stop!] The voice belonged to a distinctly otherworldly entity. Unlike the grotesquely twisted forms of other outer gods, this entity, though equally colossal, took the form of an incredibly beautiful woman. She was not just any ordinary woman; she wore a flowing, revealing outfit, exuding an erotic charm. Compared to the usual grotesque tentacle masses, star-sized amoebas, or geometrically shaped metal lumps, her human-like beauty felt strikingly out of place. She¡­ yes, she was worthy of being referred to as ¡®she.¡¯ In other universes, she was known as ¡®Idra.¡¯ Unlike other outer gods who either had no interest in the creatures of the universe or saw them merely as amusing toys, Idra genuinely loved and cherished them. She was like the gods of myth, who cared deeply for humans and other life forms, using her powers to enrich their lives. This earned her titles such as the ¡®Goddess of Abundance¡¯ and the ¡®Mother of All Things.¡¯ Her power level was top-tier. Although she was weaker compared to Nyarlathotep or Ubbo-Sathla, she was definitely stronger than Dalos. The reason for her visit to Nyarlathotep was immediately clear. [Stop being a nuisance and get lost.] [Not until you dismantle this horrific laboratory!] [This is my space.] S§×arch* The N?vel?ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. [But these creatures have personalities and lives! Stop this at once!] Nyarlathotep, who found amusement in experimenting on and tormenting living beings, was the polar opposite of Idra, who loved and cherished them. They were the epitome of opposites. ¡­No, Nyarlathotep didn¡¯t get along with Ubbo-Sathla either. Nor with Idra. Did she have any friendly outer gods? ¡­Ah, she was friendly with me? Well, anyway. It seemed like a bad time to be here, so it was best to leave. Although I tried to keep within certain boundaries, I engaged in similar activities to Nyarlathotep, so Idra would undoubtedly shower me with all sorts of scolding. That would be annoying, so I should just slip away¡­. [You¡¯ve arrived.] [Oh, and who might you be?] Damn it, that foolish Nyarlathotep! She should have just pretended not to notice! She definitely did that on purpose. She must think that sharing the scolding would make it less bothersome! [I know about you too! And about your laboratory!] Ah, I was caught after all. She looked furious at me. Sure, I had wished for a beautiful woman to cling to me instead of Nyarlathotep, but not like this. [At first, I thought you were a good entity who cared about the universe, but what is this! Just because it¡¯s a replica universe doesn¡¯t mean it¡¯s okay. They can¡¯t even tell if they¡¯re replicas or not. They are just another set of living beings. For the sake of their rights¡­] Ugh¡­. This type was definitely uncomfortable. I needed to come up with an excuse and get out of here. [I understand. While some things don¡¯t always go as planned, I generally try not to cross the line. And I don¡¯t disregard life entirely. For example¡­ I created something like this.] With that, I showed her footage of the elves. The elves living in harmony with nature. Recently, they had joined forces with the Galactic Union and were accelerating their development. Heh, it made me proud just watching them. The collaboration between Yujin and the elves was indeed a sight to behold. Watching my creations join forces to dominate the Galactic Union and conquer the universe was quite satisfying. [Th-This is¡­!] Upon seeing the elves, Idra¡¯s expression changed. As the symbol of abundance and the Mother of All Things, Idra, who loved life and its prosperity, saw the elves living in harmony with nature as a utopia. In fact, the origin of the elves in the universe was Idra¡¯s own creation. She had crafted a beautiful race that loved nature and valued abundance, modeled after herself. Her love for them was special. [Elves¡­ and to see them created as such a prosperous, harmonious, and powerful race¡­.] Idra continued to watch the footage with great interest. Seeing her beloved creations thriving and growing strong in another place was fascinating. From a copyright holder¡¯s perspective, she might have been upset that her creations were used without permission. However, from our omnipotent standpoint, copyrights were meaningless. As long as her creations were not tarnished, it was a good thing. Seeing them developed beyond her own efforts would likely make her feel proud. Phew¡­ what a relief. Honestly, I had created the elves on a whim, but who knew it would help in this situation? This should help dispel the image that I, like Nyarlathotep, disregard life and destroy everything. [Elves who have achieved development while maintaining harmony. This is very intriguing. May I observe them further?] [Well¡­ if you wish.] [I¡¯d like to see them in person. May I visit that place directly?] [¡­!?] No, that wouldn¡¯t be ideal. Given the various inhumane experiments happening in the universe I created¡­. Well, my laboratory might be less horrifying than Nyarlathotep¡¯s, but there were still plenty of things that would be quite shocking from Idra¡¯s perspective. [I¡¯ve realized that you are better than this merciless tentacle mass. If it¡¯s just minor experiments, I won¡¯t interfere further. Instead, I¡¯d appreciate it if you let me observe the elves more closely and perhaps assist in their prosperity.] Oh¡­ this was an appealing offer. I had anticipated that an immortal being constantly nagging me to stop my experiments would be incredibly annoying. But a declaration of non-interference and even assistance with the elves? I usually refrain from using my powers directly because it¡¯s boring when things go exactly as I intend. But if another entity¡¯s intentions are involved, it becomes a different story. It introduces variables that I can¡¯t predict, making things more interesting. Why refuse when she¡¯s offering to create those variables for me without any effort on my part? This is what they call turning a crisis into an opportunity. The elves would become an even more fascinating race, and I¡¯d preemptively avoid any annoying interference. [Then leave me alone as well. You¡¯re too bothersome.] [No, you are irredeemable! You trample on cosmic life forms mercilessly for your own amusement!] [Whatever. And besides, you also¡­] Nyarlathotep started to say something about me but then fell silent. This guy! She almost said something more. Was she trying to say, ¡°Since things have come to this, you deal with this annoying woman instead of me¡±? Quite loyal, isn¡¯t she? [Shall we go then?] [Ah, yes.] So, I headed to my laboratory with Idra. The most beneficial aspect of this was that the most beautiful female entity among all beings, including the gaps and the universe, would be near me in my dreary, bubble-filled laboratory dimension. The elves were pretty, but as creations and not equals, they didn¡¯t provide the same visual pleasure. It was like admiring a sleek and beautiful ant. Having Idra around would be a feast for the eyes. Chapter 63: Zombie Apocalypse Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 63 [Hehehe. Such lovely creatures. Hehe, hehehe.] [¡­¡­.] I had brought her along, but it seemed she wasn¡¯t entirely normal either. She gazed at my elves with a sinister smile. Although her beauty made even that look somewhat glorified, it was honestly a bit frightening. I had thought she might be more normal since she passionately spoke to Nyarlathotep about the importance of life. But then again, I was the crazy one for thinking any outer god could be normal. Still, she didn¡¯t seem like she would cause any trouble, so I decided to leave her be. More importantly, I had other matters to attend to. sea??h th§× N?velFire(.)net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. Zombie Apocalypse. The previous world I created had zombies that were too overpowered. Within just ten years, the world had completely collapsed without any significant resistance. While the ten years leading to the apocalypse were quite entertaining, the story ended with everyone struggling in vain and ultimately dying. So, I decided to reduce the power of the zombies and recreate the Earth setting with a new zombie virus. Realistically, such a virus is nearly impossible, but the powers of an outer god can make anything possible. The concept is a staple not only in novels but also in dramas, movies, and comics. A zombie virus spreads, plunging the world into chaos, and people desperately struggle to survive. The sight of them resisting inevitable doom and trying to survive is both tragic and, at the same time, the moment when life shines the brightest. The story of individuals who once lived as mere cogs in the modern societal machine, now becoming autonomous survivors, is something I quite enjoy. Of course, if I were in that situation, I doubt I¡¯d find any beauty in the struggle for survival. Perhaps my empathy has dulled over time, as I no longer feel guilt or remorse over these scenarios. Have I truly become an outer god in both mind and spirit? Well¡­ considering I now live as an eternal, immortal outer god, perhaps it¡¯s not something I need to worry about. However, the human heart¡ªlosing it completely might make it difficult to enjoy various things as I do now. To live a more enjoyable eternal life, it might be best to maintain some semblance of it. Is there a way to achieve this? [Ah, there¡¯s a way.] It¡¯s simple. To restore the human heart, I need to experience being human. Yes, I will become a human dropped into the apocalypse. I will become a being whose existence ends upon death. Well¡­ it would still be a clone like Yujin, but the significance lies in experiencing the situation firsthand. Let¡¯s see¡­ what kind of human should I become? Should I create one from scratch? Or should I possess an existing person? Either way, it sounds fun. # ¡°Huff, huff¡­! Quickly, come this way!¡± ¡°Arghhh!¡± ¡°Close the door! Close it now!¡± Creaaak¡ªthud! ¡°Gwaaaah!¡± ¡°Gyaaaah!¡± Thud! Thud thud thud! As they shut the door and pushed a desk against it as a barricade, the furious growls of zombies, unable to get in, echoed from outside. ¡°Phew¡­ we almost died.¡± ¡°I¡¯m never going out again¡­.¡± ¡°Damn, if we had closed it a second later, they would have gotten in.¡± Two men and two women. They were in a multipurpose meeting room in the university library, where they had been studying before the sudden zombie outbreak. After the chaos ensued, they had turned this room into their base. The four survivors had decided to band together to make it out alive. As part of their survival plan, they had ventured to the convenience store to secure food, but they barely managed to escape with their lives after being spotted by zombies. ¡°Phew¡­ considering we almost died, we didn¡¯t get much.¡± Woo Sungjun, a senior in the Economics Department, was the oldest and the de facto leader of the group. It was his idea to secure food. ¡°At least we¡¯re alive. If we had been caught, we would have ended up like those things.¡± Park Hyunmin, a sophomore in the Department of Physical Education, was a sturdy man with a strong build. As a member of the Physical Education Department, he was very respectful and obedient to his senior, Woo Sungjun. ¡°Thank goodness you made it back safely.¡± Lee Minyoung, a freshman in the Department of Food and Nutrition, expressed her relief. Lee Minyoung had a very timid personality. Despite her pretty appearance, her shyness meant she had few friends. Even within the group of four survivors, she was the quietest. She never volunteered to do anything but couldn¡¯t refuse when asked. ¡°If it looked like you were going to be late, you should have just left it and come back. Damn it, we almost all died.¡± The last member was Son Yoojung, a sophomore in the Department of Physical Therapy. She had a typical villainous personality, always complaining and refusing to do anything dangerous. Her appearance was flashy, but without makeup, she was quite ordinary. ¡°Hey. Sungjun and I risked our lives to get this food, and that¡¯s what you have to say?¡± ¡°Damn it, you barely got any food, and you¡¯re acting all high and mighty. What if we all died because of that?¡± ¡°What? I let it slide when you said you wouldn¡¯t do anything dangerous because you¡¯re a girl, but that attitude towards people who risked their lives to get food is unacceptable!¡± As Son Yoojung and Park Hyunmin started to growl at each other, Woo Sungjun stepped in between them. ¡°Come on, let¡¯s not fight. This isn¡¯t the time for us to be fighting among ourselves. Let¡¯s eat first. Everyone¡¯s probably on edge because they¡¯re hungry.¡± ¡°Tch.¡± ¡°Hmph.¡± With Woo Sungjun mediating, the two finally calmed down and began to eat the snacks they had brought back from the convenience store. ¡°Ugh, even the stuff we brought back is just junk food.¡± ¡°That damn girl¡­¡± Just as the two were about to start fighting again, a loud crash interrupted them. Crash! ¡°Uwooooh!¡± ¡°Graaah!¡± ¡°Gyaaah!¡± ¡°?!¡± The sudden noise of something collapsing and the excited growls of zombies rushing in filled the air. The group tensed up immediately, their brief moment of calm shattered. Suddenly, a voice came from outside the door. ¡°The zombies have all been lured to the other side. Please open the door quickly.¡± ¡°¡­??¡± It was a human voice, seemingly male. ¡°Who are you?¡± Given the situation, Woo Sungjun didn¡¯t open the door immediately and asked cautiously. There was a chance that the person might be trying to steal the little food they had managed to gather. ¡°My name is Kim Jiwoong. I have no intention of harming you. I¡¯ve brought a lot of food with me.¡± As he spoke, a man showed his face through the glass window of the multipurpose meeting room, along with a bag full of food. ¡°With this much food, you don¡¯t have to worry about me trying to steal yours, right?¡± ¡°¡­¡­.¡± Seeing this, Woo Sungjun glanced at the others, seeking their opinions. ¡°If he seems suspicious, I¡¯ll take him down.¡± ¡°With that much food, why would he try to steal ours? If that was his intention, it would have been better for him to hide alone with all that food.¡± ¡°I-I think it¡¯s okay.¡± Everyone was hungry and their food supply was running low, so they unanimously agreed to let him in. They probably also thought that, as a fellow student, he wouldn¡¯t harm them. ¡°Alright.¡± As the door opened, they saw the zombies outside, drawn to the collapsed bookshelf that Kim Jiwoong had used to divert their attention. Bringing so much food and managing to lure the zombies away showed that he had excellent survival skills. ¡®If he joins us, he¡¯ll be a great asset.¡¯ ¡°Nice to meet you. I¡¯m Woo Sungjun, a senior in the Economics Department.¡± Woo Sungjun thought this as he greeted Kim Jiwoong. ¡°Yes, nice to meet you. I¡¯m Kim Jiwoong, a junior in the Department of Chemical Engineering.¡± ¡°This is Park Hyunmin, Lee Minyoung, and Son Yoojung.¡± ¡°Nice to meet you.¡± After the brief introductions, Woo Sungjun asked Kim Jiwoong why he had sought them out. ¡°With that much food, you could have survived alone for quite a while. Why did you come to find us? And how did you know we were here?¡± ¡°Oh, that¡¯s¡­.¡± Kim Jiwoong explained the situation. He had been nearby when Woo Sungjun and Park Hyunmin went to the convenience store for food. Thanks to them drawing the zombies¡¯ attention, he was able to gather a lot of food. Feeling guilty about keeping it all to himself, he decided to join them. ¡°Well, I also didn¡¯t want to be alone in such a dangerous situation.¡± ¡°I see.¡± The group found his explanation reasonable. They were pleased that he wanted to join them rather than just share the food. Woo Sungjun assessed that Kim Jiwoong had high survival skills. ¡°So, that means we have a share in that food too.¡± ¡°Hey, Son Yoojung!¡± ¡°What? Am I wrong?¡± Once again, Son Yoojung¡¯s rude remark almost led to a fight with Park Hyunmin. ¡°Haha, everyone seems on edge because they¡¯re hungry. Let¡¯s eat first and then talk.¡± Kim Jiwoong smoothly mediated between the two, calming the situation. ¡®I like him more and more.¡¯ ¡®He seems like a good person.¡¯ Everyone thought this as they accepted Kim Jiwoong into their group. Meanwhile, amidst the group¡¯s acceptance, ¡®Hehehe.¡¯ Kim Jiwoong had a mysterious, subtle smile on his face. Chapter 64: To the Front Gate Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 64 With Kim Jiwoong joining, the library party now consisted of five members. They survived for several days on the food Kim Jiwoong had brought, all the while waiting for rescue. But¡­. ¡°¡­It¡¯s been a week, and no one has come.¡± ¡°It¡¯s so quiet outside. Maybe the military and police are already¡­.¡± ¡°Hey! Don¡¯t say such unlucky things! That only happens in movies and comics.¡± ¡°Yeah, there¡¯s no way the military would fall to something like zombies.¡± They still held onto the belief that the police or military would come and sweep away the zombies, rescuing them. However, after a week with no news and the number of zombies increasing, their hope began to wane. ¡°¡­Whatever the case, we need to move.¡± Finally, Woo Sungjun made a decision. ¡°What? You want us to leave when the rescue team might come? You want us to go out there, where it¡¯s dangerous?¡± Son Yoojung shook her head in disbelief. Indeed, going outside was extremely risky. But they had no other choice. ¡°The convenience store¡¯s food is running out. There¡¯s barely anything left, either because other survivors took it, or it was looted during the chaos. If we stay here, we might starve to death.¡± ¡°But the rescue team could come before that¡­.¡± ¡°How long are we supposed to wait for a rescue team that might never come? We need to move while we still have the strength. At the very least, we need to go out and find more food.¡± As Woo Sungjun pointed out, there was no certainty about when¡ªor if¡ªthe rescue team would arrive. They couldn¡¯t just sit around and wait indefinitely. ¡°Alright, let¡¯s gather our things and prepare to move. We¡¯ll head towards the front gate and see if we can find a safer place or more supplies.¡± The group nodded, understanding the gravity of their situation. They began to pack their belongings, ready to face the unknown dangers outside. They had to move to a safer place or at least go outside to find more food. ¡°Then the guys can go out and get the food! Why do I have to risk my life too?¡± Son Yoojung¡¯s absurd remark finally pushed Park Hyunmin over the edge. ¡°You selfish bitch! If you want to stay here and starve, then fine! Senior, let¡¯s leave her behind. We don¡¯t need someone who complains and doesn¡¯t help at all.¡± ¡°What did you just say?! You bastard!¡± Son Yoojung screamed back, standing up abruptly. At that moment, Kim Jiwoong glared at them and spoke in a low, menacing tone. ¡°Both of you, be quiet. Do you want to attract the zombies and get us all killed?¡± ¡°¡­¡­.¡± ¡°¡­¡­.¡± The two fell silent, cowed by Kim Jiwoong¡¯s intimidating presence. There was something about his words that carried an undeniable charisma, compelling them to obey. ¡®Damn it¡­ he started yelling first, so why am I getting blamed too?¡¯ Son Yoojung thought to herself, grumbling internally. Ignoring her, Kim Jiwoong voiced his opinion. ¡°I agree with Senior Sungjun. We can¡¯t be sure if the rescue team will come¡­ We should secure a safer location and find a radio or walkie-talkie to get updates on the outside world.¡± He then glanced at Son Yoojung and continued. ¡°Those who want to go can go, and the rest can stay here. I can¡¯t force my decisions on others.¡± It was clear he was addressing Son Yoojung and the silent Lee Minyoung. At that moment, ¡°I-I¡¯ll go.¡± ¡°¡­!¡± Lee Minyoung, who had been quiet and observant until now, raised her hand slightly and spoke up. She expressed her willingness to follow Kim Jiwoong¡¯s suggestion and go with him. ¡°Alright. So, everyone except Yoojung is going, right?¡± Everyone nodded in agreement to Kim Jiwoong¡¯s question. ¡°W-What! I never said I wouldn¡¯t go!¡± Afraid of being left alone, Son Yoojung hastily declared her intention to join them. ¡°We don¡¯t need you, so just stay here.¡± ¡°S-Shut up!¡± For once, Son Yoojung had no retort to Park Hyunmin¡¯s sarcastic comment. # Finally, the five college students left the multipurpose meeting room. Thanks to Kim Jiwoong and Woo Sungjun drawing the zombies¡¯ attention elsewhere, they managed to exit the library without much trouble. There was a moment of danger when Lee Minyoung made a mistake, attracting zombies, but they managed to escape safely. ¡°Pant, pant¡­ That damn girl! Isn¡¯t she more of a burden? We should leave her behind!¡± Son Yoojung yelled angrily, pointing at Lee Minyoung, who bowed her head in shock. ¡°I-I¡¯m sorry¡­.¡± ¡°We almost died, and you think an apology is enough¡­¡± ¡°That¡¯s enough, okay? We¡¯re alive, aren¡¯t we? Let¡¯s not dwell on it.¡± ¡°Minyoung, please be more careful next time. It¡¯s not just your life at stake, but everyone else¡¯s too.¡± With Park Hyunmin and Kim Jiwoong defending Lee Minyoung, Son Yoojung had nothing more to say. ¡°Damn it¡­.¡± She felt increasingly isolated. It was her own doing, but she didn¡¯t like the atmosphere at all. Regardless, the group quickly scanned their surroundings. Just because they were outside didn¡¯t mean they were safe. In fact, there were likely more zombies lurking around. The open space made it seem like there were fewer zombies, but they knew better. As they ventured outside, Woo Sungjun couldn¡¯t help but express his surprise at the lack of zombies. ¡°Zombies dislike sunlight,¡± Kim Jiwoong explained. ¡°It doesn¡¯t harm them or weaken their abilities, but they seem to prefer staying out of it. That¡¯s why you don¡¯t see many around during the day. Of course, if we make too much noise, they will still come after us.¡± The group noticed that indeed, where sunlight was strongest, zombies were absent, but some lingered in the shadows, seemingly avoiding the light. ¡°But how do you know so much about this, Jiwoong? The zombie outbreak only started a few days ago.¡± ¡°¡­!¡± Woo Sungjun asked as if something was strange. Sear?h the NovelFire.net* website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. It definitely was strange. It had been about 10 days since the zombie incident happened. He had been locked in the multipurpose conference room with them for a week. But in just 3 days, in that chaos, he knew the characteristics of the zombies so accurately? ¡°Ah, I might have just noticed it while looking outside, I guess.¡± His answer was vague, and although Woo Sungjun found it suspicious, he decided not to press further. It was hard to believe that a regular chemical engineering student could be involved in the zombie crisis. Besides, Kim Jiwoong was actively helping the group survive, and Woo Sungjun didn¡¯t want to cause discord based on mere suspicions. ¡®Whew¡­ This is a big deal. They¡¯ll probably find it quite suspicious.¡¯ Kim Jiwoong made a slightly anxious expression and sighed deeply. But soon he smiled as if it was okay. ¡®No matter, the plan is still on track. Now that I¡¯ve got them outside¡­¡¯ His gaze sharpened, predatory as he looked at the other students, his mind calculating the next move. # ¡°Outside, you say?¡± ¡°Yes. Open areas are relatively safer during the day. At night, they¡¯re also easier to keep watch over. But inside the university grounds, there are too many buildings, and the surrounding mountains don¡¯t help either.¡± Kim Jiwoong suggested that they should head outside and find a wide-open plain. Woo Sungjun agreed with his reasoning. Given the zombies¡¯ aversion to sunlight, a vast, sunlit plain would be ideal during the day. At night, it would be easier to monitor any approaching zombies or people from all directions. Of course, they would need enough people to maintain a proper watch, but that was a concern for later. However, Woo Sungjun couldn¡¯t shake off a slight unease about Kim Jiwoong. There was something suspicious about him, though he couldn¡¯t pinpoint what it was. Kim Jiwoong¡¯s extensive knowledge about zombies and his calm, quick actions in such a terrifying situation were unusual for a third-year college student. Yet, these traits were also beneficial to the group, making it hard to justify any suspicion. ¡°¡­Alright. Let¡¯s head outside the university. We should move before the sun sets.¡± ¡°Yes, let¡¯s do that. We¡¯ll avoid the buildings and head straight for the main gate. It should be the least infested with zombies right now.¡± Following Kim Jiwoong¡¯s suggestion, the group stayed away from the buildings and walked along the main road. As he had predicted, the zombies were avoiding the sunlight and sticking to the shadows, making their journey relatively safe. Although some zombies did notice them and give chase, the group was able to spot them from a distance and escape easily due to the open space. They reached the main gate with less difficulty than anticipated. However, what awaited them there was something they had not expected at all. Chapter 65: Trap Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 65 ¡°Huff, huff¡­ I can see the main gate!¡± ¡°We¡¯re finally outside.¡± After somehow shaking off the pursuing zombies, the students sighed in relief as they saw the entrance to the university¡¯s main gate. The thought of finally leaving the school grounds filled them with a sense of relief. Although the outside world wasn¡¯t necessarily safe, it felt like they had overcome a significant hurdle. Outside, they could see a few low-rise commercial buildings and some one-room apartments. However, ¡°¡­Huh?¡± Woo Sungjun suddenly stopped, having noticed something. ¡°What¡¯s that?¡± ¡°Huh? What is it?¡± Son Yoojung also tilted her head, having spotted something unusual. What they saw were two vehicles parked in front of the main gate. It wasn¡¯t strange to see cars parked at the entrance, but the type of vehicles made them pause. These were heavily armored vehicles in camouflage colors, the kind you¡¯d only see in the military. Mounted on the lead vehicle was a machine gun, the sort you¡¯d expect to see in a mechanized infantry division. Surrounding the vehicles were soldiers, armed with personal firearms and wearing bulletproof helmets. ¡®Soldiers? Is this the rescue team?¡¯ ¡®But why are they outside the gate and not coming in¡­?¡¯ The students felt a mix of relief and curiosity upon seeing the soldiers. They were glad to see what appeared to be a rescue team, but at the same time, they wondered why the soldiers hadn¡¯t entered the campus. The arrival of the military seemed like a beacon of hope. Despite the chaos unleashed by the zombie outbreak, it was reassuring to think that the military hadn¡¯t fallen and that a rescue team had finally arrived. However, questions immediately surfaced. Why were they waiting outside the gate instead of entering the school? Was it because of the zombies inside? That seemed unlikely, considering the number of zombies already taken down near the gate, indicating they had sufficient firepower to handle them. More importantly, there was an unsettling feeling about these soldiers. It was hard to pinpoint, but there was a certain thuggish aura about them, even from a distance. As the students hesitated in confusion, ¡°¡­Oh!¡± The soldiers noticed the approaching group of students and started moving toward them. ¡°You¡¯re late, aren¡¯t you?¡± ¡°We thought our necks would stretch out waiting for you.¡± ¡°¡­?¡± The greeting was odd, as if they had been expecting the students. Did they know the students were coming? Was that why they were waiting at the gate? But why? How? A myriad of questions raced through Woo Sungjun and his companions¡¯ minds. Soon, those questions began to find their answers. ¡°Ah~ Damn.¡± From behind them, in a tone and voice unlike anything they had heard before, someone muttered. Kim Jiwoong stepped forward. ¡°It was a good idea to bring food to appear friendly, but you took so much that it lasted a week. I didn¡¯t expect you to eat so slowly.¡± ¡°Hahaha! You can¡¯t compare to how much Corporal Kim Jiwoong eats. Regular people eat about a third of that.¡± ¡°Hey, you little bastard, do you want to die?¡± He bantered with the soldiers as if they were old friends. The use of the term ¡°Corporal¡± and the familiarity in their conversation suggested a prior relationship. Was he also a soldier? But why was he in civilian clothes? Why did he introduce himself as a third-year chemical engineering student? Was he on leave? But the conversation didn¡¯t fit that scenario. It felt like they had been working together all along. ¡°©¤Ah, you seem confused.¡± Kim Jiwoong turned to them with a sly smile. ¡°Did I say I was a third-year chemical engineering student? That was a lie. These clothes? I took them from a guy nearby.¡± A lie. Kim Jiwoong had lied. He wasn¡¯t a student. He was Corporal Kim Jiwoong, the squad leader of the 2nd squad in a mechanized infantry battalion. That was his true identity. ¡°Hey, my rifle.¡± ¡°Yes, I kept it safe for you.¡± One of the soldiers handed him a K2 rifle. It belonged to Corporal Kim Jiwoong. Corporal Kim Jiwoong, now armed, aimed his rifle alongside the soldiers and spoke. ¡°Alright~ If you value your lives, the men should leave, and only the women should get in. We¡¯ll make good use of them.¡± At that moment, the students realized the truth. These soldiers weren¡¯t here to rescue anyone. They were a dangerous, uncontrolled group. Kim Jiwoong had infiltrated the group under false pretenses to capture young women and fulfill their vile desires. ¡°Confused, aren¡¯t you? Why the military? Weren¡¯t they supposed to rescue us?¡± Kim Jiwoong grinned at their bewilderment. ¡°Rescue team, rescue team¡­ You idiots. The military has already fallen, you morons.¡± When the zombie outbreak began, the military had mobilized to respond. However, the sheer number of zombies and the sudden spread of the virus among the soldiers caused complete chaos. The higher-ups, seeking to save themselves, fled, leaving the troops without leadership, which only accelerated the collapse. In the ensuing chaos, Corporal Kim Jiwoong, his 2nd squad, and a few other soldiers escaped with two armored vehicles, weapons, and a large supply of ammunition. Thus, these heavily armed, uncontrollable forces were now loose in the area. ¡°No way¡­.¡± ¡°This can¡¯t be happening.¡± ¡°Damn it, soldiers, my ass¡­!¡± Woo Sungjun and Park Hyunmin were in shock, while Son Yoojung growled angrily. ¡°Ah, I¡¯ll take that bitch first. She¡¯s been so mouthy, I¡¯ll break her completely.¡± ¡°Heh, then we¡¯ll take the short one. She¡¯s quite the catch.¡± ¡°Man, you guys are such perverts. Always going for the pretty ones.¡± ¡°He, heek¡­.¡± The students recoiled in horror at the soldiers¡¯ lewd conversation and predatory gazes. Lee Minyoung, receiving the same looks, quickly hid behind Park Hyunmin, perhaps hoping he could protect her in this dire situation. ¡°Hey, don¡¯t move. Unless you want a bullet hole.¡± Click! As the group tried to back away, Corporal Kim Jiwoong and the soldiers aimed their rifles, warning them to stay put. ¡°¡­If you fire, the noise might attract zombies.¡± Woo Sungjun tried one last desperate attempt to use the zombies as a threat. ¡°Do we look like we care about that?¡± They pointed to the soldier manning the machine gun on the armored vehicle and smirked. They had enough ammunition to shoot for hours. If they ever ran low, they could simply raid another fallen unit for supplies. Zombies swarming in didn¡¯t concern them at all. ¡°Ugh¡­ I¡¯m sorry.¡± Not wanting to get shot, Woo Sungjun and Park Hyunmin reluctantly stepped back. Only Son Yoojung and Lee Minyoung were left to be forcibly dragged into the armored vehicle by the soldiers. ¡°Hey, hey! Don¡¯t touch me, you bastards!!¡± Son Yoojung¡¯s defiant screams were quickly silenced as they bound her hands and feet with tape and gagged her. Lee Minyoung, although not as resistant, was similarly restrained as a precaution. ¡°Ha ha. It¡¯s been so long since we had women.¡± ¡°Let¡¯s head back to our base. It¡¯s uncomfortable in the vehicle.¡± ¡°Yeah, yeah. Hold on until we get there. We¡¯ll have plenty of time to enjoy them.¡± ¡°Two women won¡¯t last long, will they?¡± ¡°Then, we can just play with them until they break and bring more.¡± Listening to the soldiers¡¯ filthy and disgusting conversation, Son Yoojung and Lee Minyoung shivered as if they had sensed their terrible fate. S§×arch* The NovelFire.net* website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. ¡®Damn, damn¡­! To think I¡¯d become a sex slave for these military bastards. Is this how my life ends?¡¯ Son Yoojung thought as she shed tears. ¡°Hey, this bitch is crying?¡± ¡°Wow, damn. Crying is such a turn-on. I can¡¯t hold back, can I go first?¡± ¡°Hey, no. I said I¡¯d go first with that bitch.¡± Corporal Kim Jiwoong restrained a soldier who couldn¡¯t hold back and was flaring his nostrils. ¡°If you have to do it, do it with this bitch.¡± He pointed at Lee Minyoung. ¡°Ah, she¡¯s not crying, so it¡¯s no fun¡­ but I guess I have no choice.¡± The soldier said as he slowly approached her. Although the armored vehicle shook a bit while moving, the space was so narrow that he quickly grabbed her head. But at that moment. [ This is quite unpleasant. ] Bzzz©¤!! ¡°Ugh?!¡± ¡°Argh!¡± ¡°Gasp¡­!¡± Suddenly, a voice echoed in their heads, causing not only the soldier but also Son Yoojung to suffer from a severe headache. Everyone present began to writhe in pain from the excruciating headache. [ Tsk, I was just going to watch to see how far you¡¯d go. But I can¡¯t tolerate you touching me. ] The voice echoed again. The headache intensified, pounding their heads harder. The people suffered even more. Some even had nosebleeds streaming down their faces. [ As expected, doing this in a woman¡¯s body is a bit unpleasant. No, I was getting tired of it anyway. ] Swoosh©¤ And among them, there was one person. Lee Minyoung, who had been almost silent and seemed timid, quietly observing her surroundings, slowly stood up. The tape that had bound her hands and feet disintegrated as if something had broken it down, and she was instantly freed. She¡­ no, the unknown entity. Quietly looked down at those suffering from the headache. [ I¡¯m tired of this. I¡¯m in a bad mood now. I need to go see something else. ] As she said that, her body disintegrated like the tape that had bound her and disappeared. Chapter 66: A Mere Insect Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 66 ¡°What, what the¡­ ugh!¡± Even though an incredible event had occurred, where a person disappeared entirely, no one could pay attention to it. They were now suffering from an excruciating headache, as if their heads were about to be torn apart. No, they would rather have their heads torn apart. ¡°Argh¡­!¡± ¡°Save me¡­!¡± But this was not just their problem. ¡°Argh! My, my head¡­!¡± The driver of the armored vehicle. He, too, was struck by the same headache. Due to the immense pain, the driver naturally could not drive properly. The armored vehicle, which had been speeding forward with the accelerator fully pressed, began to veer off course and crashed into a building on the side of the road. Boom! Crash! Since it was a heavily armored vehicle, the building was demolished and collapsed, but the people inside the armored vehicle were not unharmed. Hearing another crash from the side, it was clear that the vehicle following behind was in the same situation. They were the same. ¡°Ugh¡­¡± ¡°Ugh¡­¡± Due to the impact shaking the interior, all the passengers in both vehicles were completely twisted and crushed. Those who had been wearing seat belts survived, but Son Yoojung, who had been left unrestrained, was completely crushed and died instantly. Naturally, the driver and the front passenger, who took the brunt of the impact, also died instantly. It was a catastrophe where only a few of those in the back managed to survive. ¡®Damn¡­ what the hell is this¡­¡¯ Corporal Kim Jiwoong, who had only broken an arm, struggled to get up inside the armored vehicle. ¡°Hey, hey¡­!¡± He shook Private Lee Jinsoo, his closest friend, but his neck was broken, and he was dead. The others were either dead or severely injured to the point of dying if left unattended. The situation in the other vehicle was likely similar. ¡°Huff, huff¡­ what is this. What happened.¡± In such a sudden situation, Corporal Kim Jiwoong felt like his mind couldn¡¯t keep up. Having already killed several people, seeing corpses wasn¡¯t that strange to him. In the unit, he had already seen his comrades being torn apart by zombies in real-time, so the death of his comrades didn¡¯t feel new. But the reason he was confused was because of what had just happened. The woman had disappeared, and the headache gradually faded until it was no longer felt. He only felt the pain of his broken arm. So he had time to think. ¡®What was that woman?¡¯ She had suddenly disappeared. Was it a dream? No, the other woman was still there. She was dead, her body completely crushed, but she was there nonetheless. So the woman from before wasn¡¯t a dream. But how did she disappear like that? Was the headache that felt like his head was going to explode also because of that woman? Was it some kind of special ability? In a world with zombies, such things might not be so strange. He was confused. But there was no time to sort it out. Everyone except for a few had died in the accident. Those few seemed like they would die soon as well. In reality, Kim Jiwoong was the only one left alive. However. Thud! Thud thud! There were banging sounds from outside. The zombies had heard the commotion and were gathering. They must have smelled the blood soaking the inside. ¡°Grrraaah!¡± ¡°Gyaaaah!¡± They were frantically banging on the vehicle to get inside. ¡®Is this how I die?¡¯ He sighed deeply, thinking it was a rather futile death. But then. ¡®No, damn it.¡¯ He felt that this wasn¡¯t right. He was going to be the protagonist of this world. So he couldn¡¯t die in a place like this. This was just a small trial. He had to overcome it somehow. ¡®I will survive no matter what. Even if I have to eat the flesh of the dead¡­ I will survive.¡¯ And that damn woman. He vowed to find and punish the woman who had put him in this situation. Kim Jiwoong gritted his teeth as he made this resolution. Then, as he got back up and started thinking about how to deal with the zombies outside, he noticed something strange. Rustle©¤ ¡°¡­Huh?¡± He began to see something unusual. Through the window of the armored vehicle, he could see the outside. Although it was hard to see clearly because of the zombies, in the distance. The ground and the sky¡­ ¡°¡­are disappearing.¡± Just like that woman earlier, just like the tape that had bound her body. They were turning into dust and disintegrating. The ground, and even the sky, which shouldn¡¯t have a tangible form. ¡®What is this? What the hell is this?¡¯ It was an incomprehensible sight. He could have thought that the woman had some kind of superpower. But this¡­ this was beyond explanation. The world was crumbling into dust and disappearing. The ground, the sky, the buildings, the trees, everything. It was as if this world was being erased by someone¡¯s hand. And the zombies were no exception. The zombies were also disappearing. ¡°Argh!¡± ¡°Run!¡± People who seemed to have been hiding in nearby buildings screamed and tried to run, only to turn into dust and vanish. It wasn¡¯t a dream. It was reality. It was something happening in real life. ¡°Ha, haha.¡± At that moment, Kim Jiwoong realized. He realized that understanding and thinking about the situation meant nothing. There was nothing he could do but wait for his own disappearance in this place. He couldn¡¯t do anything. When he first fled with the armored vehicle, he thought he would become the protagonist of this zombie apocalypse. Even until just a moment ago, he thought so. He believed he was the protagonist of this story and that he could survive and achieve everything he wanted. He had the weapons and firepower, the determination and ability. But none of that mattered. In the end, they were all mere insects, disappearing at the whim of someone¡¯s interference, at a mere change of mood. And he was no different. He was a feeble human who could do nothing in this situation but wait for his own disappearance. ¡®Ah¡­ this is the end.¡¯ That woman. The severe headache and her disappearing figure. Was she the god of death? Or something beyond that¡­ something that created this world? Had she come to deliver the death sentence of this world to insignificant beings like them? He didn¡¯t know. He just didn¡¯t know anything. He couldn¡¯t do anything, and he couldn¡¯t know anything. A mere human, in the end, was just that. All the passengers died in a single accident. Living in a trivial world that could be erased at a mere whim. Feeling omnipotent just because he had two armored vehicles. He was nothing more than a speck of dust in a tiny universe. ¡®It¡¯s futile.¡¯ What he felt was just futility, emptiness, and helplessness. And so, Army Corporal Kim Jiwoong disappeared along with the world. Rustle©¤ # [ Hmm, as expected, a typical zombie apocalypse isn¡¯t very fun. I just had an unpleasant experience by possessing a woman for no reason. ] If I had known, it might have been more interesting to possess a man or a soldier¡­ but honestly, the soldier side is unpleasant. I don¡¯t think the male side would have been that fun either. It seems better to erase it and create a new one. Maybe it¡¯s better to recreate it with a superpowered theme in an apocalypse setting. [ You¡¯ve erased another world. ] [ ¡­? ] Before I knew it, Idra was beside me, looking at me with eyes full of melancholy. Oh¡­ that startled me. Having a woman of such blinding beauty right next to me was quite surprising and refreshing. But perhaps because her presence and appearance felt so grand and divine, even if I had any sexual desire, I wouldn¡¯t have been aroused. She truly embodied the term ¡®goddess.¡¯ It wasn¡¯t an exciting or lovely kind of beauty, but a divine and worship-worthy kind of beauty. Anyway, she looked at me for a moment, then quietly watched the spot where the apocalypse world had disappeared, and slowly closed her eyes. [ A prayer for the lost and unfortunate lives¡­. ] How can her heart be so kind? She seems to care and worry about the creatures of the universe more than I, who was originally human. Maybe that¡¯s why the guilt that had disappeared¡­ is not coming back at all. A boring world deserves to be erased. After all, I created it. These beings wouldn¡¯t have existed in the first place, so it¡¯s up to me what I do with them. ¡­Wow, my mindset is really trash. It¡¯s truly the mindset of an outsider. But why did she come to me instead of watching the elves she was so fond of? It doesn¡¯t seem like she came just to pray for the vanished universe. [ What is it? ] [ Ah, could you come over here for a moment? ] As if she had just remembered what she needed to do, she stopped praying and led me to where the replica of the original universe was. Oh, she held my hand. ¡­But can that even be called a hand for me? Sear?h the n?vel_Fire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. Well, if you consider my form as a giant, then it¡¯s the part where a hand would be. It might be more accurate to call it a part of my tentacles. [ Look at this. I gave my beloved ones some special abilities. ] Anyway, she proudly showed me the state of the original replica universe. Specifically, she was showing the current situation of the elves living within it. Chapter 67: Special Abilities Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 67 The superior physical abilities and intelligence granted by the Creator. The ability to control the spirits of light given by Rios, the six-handed elf god. Following that, the ability given to them by Idra, the god of abundance, was the ability to grow plants on any land. It was literally an ability befitting the name of abundance. [I gave them the ability so that they would never starve wherever they go and always see the plants they love.] [Oh¡­.] Even if Idra gave that ability with pure intentions, the ability itself was truly absurd. Think about it. The ability to grow plants as long as there is land for them to take root, without needing oxygen, water, or anything else. Of course, there would be differences in abilities depending on the elf individual, but if a group of elves with excellent abilities gathered, they could turn a barren planet into a plant planet with an incredible terraforming ability. As long as they could grow, they could create an atmosphere and secure food. In other words, even a barren planet with nothing. Even a planet full of death. Even an asteroid where nothing could exist could be turned into a planet where life could live. Originally, terraforming required an enormous amount of time and cost. Creating a base where people could live, first focusing on microorganisms and hardy ferns that could produce oxygen in the atmosphere, and gradually turning it green. It was a task that required hundreds, maybe even thousands of years. But to finish it all in one go with just this ability. To understand the significance of this, one only needs to look at the terraforming processes of other planets. For instance, the Lubaran race, which has terraformed dozens of planets, most of which already have environments suitable for life. However, some of them were still in the process of being terraformed, and in fact, the Lubaran race was living in sealed research bases. In the case of the Meias race, they created barriers with magic, and there were even magicians dedicated to producing oxygen and maintaining those barriers. ??????????£Â?? But the elves could create a habitable planet within a few decades, or even a few years, without going through such cumbersome and labor-intensive processes. As a result, the importance of the elves to the Galactic Union increased significantly. Previously, they were considered a smart and rapidly developing race, similar to the Lubaran race, and were quite helpful to the development of the Galactic Union. Now, they had become essential for the terraforming of planets to expand the Galactic Union¡¯s influence and accommodate the growing population. If Idra had known this and given them the ability, one might think, ¡°He intended to make the elves the rulers of the universe by giving them such an overpowered ability.¡± [Hehe, now they can see their beloved plants wherever they go. Elves love dense forests.] [¡­.] Hmm, it seemed like she didn¡¯t have any grand plans. She just really liked elves. It was said that she gave the same ability to the original universe outside the laboratory. S§×arch* The N?vel(F)ire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. So, there wouldn¡¯t be much difference between the two worlds. So far, things seemed to be progressing almost identically, with only minor differences in small incidents and accidents. These minor incidents didn¡¯t seem to affect the entire universe, so it didn¡¯t matter much. While there is a saying about the butterfly effect, it only applies to specific events. Truly trivial incidents have no impact on the entire universe. Only significant events can change the course of the universe. A butterfly¡¯s flap might need to be as powerful as a cosmic storm or a black hole on a universal scale. The new terraforming ability given to the elves? This was an event significant enough to completely change the dynamics of the universe. It was not just a butterfly¡¯s flap but a massive cyclone shaking the entire world. This could be said to have completely altered the flow of this universe. ¡­So, what now? Are we screwed? [Haha. It¡¯s a good ability.] Well, I don¡¯t know either. Let¡¯s just see how it goes. # ¡°The god has bestowed upon us a new ability!¡± ¡°Ooooooh!¡± The new ability was conveyed to all the elves, and a detailed explanation was delivered as an oracle to Rodri, the highest religious authority and priest of the elves. The power of abundance. An ability to grow plants anywhere, securing food and vegetation no matter where they fell. ¡°Rios, the elf god, has bestowed upon us a special power with his hand of abundance! He said you could make flowers bloom even on barren land!¡± ¡°Ooooooh! Rios! Rios!¡± At the words of Priest Rodri, the elves cheered and prostrated themselves before the giant statue of Rios. Of course, the ability was not given by Rios but by the foreign god, Idra. For convenience, they credited Rios, the god they worshipped. Moreover, it was believed that one of Rios¡¯s six hands, the ¡®hand of abundance,¡¯ had the power to grow crops, so it made sense. [¡­.] Rios, watching this, had mixed feelings, but since Idra had already informed him separately, he said nothing. After all, from his perspective, it was good if the elves, entrusted to him by the great Creator, were doing well. ¡°Is it really true¡­?¡± Yujin and the members of the Galactic Union, who had come to the elf planet to negotiate cooperation and union membership, were taken aback by the news and asked Lasi for confirmation. ¡°Yes. We have developed the ability to grow plants. We can grow plants on any barren land, even places without oxygen or water.¡± While there is individual variation among elves, even the weakest can grow plants over an area of 2 to 3 square meters. Lasi and Rodri, who had particularly strong abilities, were able to fill hundreds of square meters with shrubbery, as experiments showed. Even experiments conducted on planets without oxygen or water through spaceships demonstrated that plants could grow on any soil, even on iron ore, without any other conditions. These plants survived for days without water, oxygen, or light, and are still thriving. The experimenters¡¯ last words were that they needed to observe how long the plants could survive without any conditions. ¡°¡­This is unbelievable.¡± Yujin and the members of the Galactic Union knew what this meant and were dumbfounded. It was something not even the most mysterious and special ability of the Meias race, ¡®magic,¡¯ could achieve. While it was possible to create barriers and produce oxygen to sustain life within them, growing plants from nothing and maintaining them in a verdant state for days was impossible with Lubaran technology or Meias magic. A special ability that allows for easy and rapid terraforming. Did the elves realize how special, dangerous, and precious this ability was? ¡°With this ability, it will greatly assist in the stabilization and territorial expansion of the Galactic Union that you mentioned, Mr. Yujin. We could build bases wherever we want, significantly reducing the need for manpower, resources, and time.¡± ¡°¡­Indeed. It¡¯s the kind of ability we¡¯ve been wanting to the point of desperation.¡± At least Lasi was very aware of the importance of this ability. She understood how essential it was for Yujin and the Galactic Union¡¯s future direction. ¡®Our elves can secure a more definite position.¡¯ Lasi had no intention of generously sharing this ability like a fool. She intended to ensure that the elves received treatment and returns commensurate with their newfound abilities. ¡°We need to start by revising the contract terms.¡± ¡°¡­Yes.¡± Yujin sighed inwardly, feeling resigned. ¡®Haa¡­ What on earth is the main body thinking? Giving such an absurdly overpowered ability to the elves? Is he favoring the elves over me?¡¯ He had never particularly desired the main body¡¯s help or affection, but now he felt a sense of injustice. Of course, this ability was given by Idra on her own accord, not by the main body. The main body had only given the elves and Yujin their inherent abilities and wasn¡¯t paying attention at all. In fact, in terms of individual abilities, what was given to Yujin was far more preferential. Nevertheless, Yujin, unaware of these inner workings, felt increasingly resentful towards the main body. [What do you expect me to do? That woman did it on her own. I can¡¯t just take it away, can I?] The main body felt wronged. Chapter 68: Joining the Union Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 68 The conditions Lasi set forth were as follows: First, to guarantee at least seven elder seats for the elves. This meant that the elves wanted power and authority within the Galactic Union equal to or comparable to the Meias tribe, which currently held ten seats. With the Meias tribe holding ten seats and other tribes having at most five, even if the minimum of seven seats was granted, the elves would hold the second most power after the Meias tribe. And by stating a minimum of seven seats, it also implied that Yujin¡¯s allocation of more seats would reflect how important he considered the elves. Second, the elves would handle most of the terraforming for the newly developed lands within the Union. In return, they wanted a percentage of the development rights for the energy and resources obtained from those planets and stars. Typically, when new lands were developed, those with the appropriate abilities would pioneer them, and the resources extracted would be developed by companies from various tribes through fair competition. Of course, ¡°fair competition¡± often meant that the tribes with the most abilities and power would dominate. To prevent this, the Union had policies to provide equal opportunities to weaker tribes, and the Galactic Union generally aimed to be as fair as possible to its members. Especially with Yujin¡¯s policy of sharing technology to raise the average capabilities of all Union members, fairness was a significant concern. However, granting special development rights to the elves alone could undoubtedly spark controversy over favoritism. Yet, this was something Yujin and the Union¡¯s central authorities had to manage. ¡°Just keep in mind that we can¡¯t guarantee too much,¡± Yujin said. ¡°Of course. We don¡¯t intend to take too much,¡± Lasi replied. Thus, they promised a portion of the rights to develop and use the most critical energy and resources. In addition to these two main demands, there were minor conditions like non-aggression pacts and protection treaties. These were not as crucial and were addressed more straightforwardly. Thus, the elves officially entered the Galactic Union. Their elder seats were decided to be the same as the Meias tribe, with ten seats. # ¡°This is outrageous! A tribe that just joined the Union gets ten seats?¡± ¡°No matter how important they are to the Union, there¡¯s a history to consider. This is too much, no matter how you look at it¡­.¡± Unsurprisingly, there was a massive outcry against granting the elves ten elder seats. Even if they were to play a crucial role in the Galactic Union, giving them ten seats right upon entry was seen as excessive. The significance of ten seats was substantial. Originally, only the Lubaran tribe enjoyed such a privilege, and now the Meias tribe had taken over that position. In other words, ten seats were a kind of ¡®crown¡¯ allowed only to the most powerful tribes within the Galactic Union. Giving the same crown to a newcomer was bound to provoke strong opposition. ¡°However, considering their importance, this level of investment is unavoidable for the future.¡± ¡°Besides, with the Lubaran tribe and their supporters leaving, there are still plenty of elder seats available. While new tribes are joining, we are still far from filling all 500 seats.¡± Not everyone opposed the decision. Some tribes, including the Meias and Terra tribes, which were heavily influenced by Yujin, supported it. They argued that considering the future investment value of the elves, this was a necessary step. Moreover, with many elder seats still vacant, filling ten seats shouldn¡¯t be an issue. ¡°It¡¯s not about filling the seats just because there are vacancies.¡± ¡°Traditionally, new tribes start with just one seat¡­.¡± That damned tradition. Yujin was fed up. ¡®Since when did they care so much about history? Damn hypocrites.¡¯ Yujin wanted to retort immediately, but he kept silent since it was an official setting. ¡°And asking for a portion of the resource development rights? Aren¡¯t they being too greedy?¡± ¡°No matter how powerful they are, this is too much!¡± The second condition faced similar opposition. They questioned why the resource and energy development rights, which were supposed to be obtained through fair competition among the tribes¡¯ companies, were being arbitrarily given to the elves. ¡°This is tyranny.¡± ¡°Lord Yujin, it¡¯s problematic to run the Union this way.¡± ¡°¡­¡± Yujin looked at them and spoke. ¡°Then, if we offer the same compensation, can any of you do what the elves are doing?¡± ¡°What?¡± ¡°¡­¡± Everyone fell silent at Yujin¡¯s question. It was obvious. The elves¡¯ special abilities, superior intelligence, and physical conditions, along with their technological application skills, were unmatched. The only ones who could come close were the Lubaran tribe, the Meias tribe, and Yujin himself. The other tribes couldn¡¯t even compare. ¡°If there is a tribe that can perfectly perform the tasks the elves are doing, I will offer them the same, or even more, compensation. Who will step up?¡± ¡°¡­¡± No one responded to Yujin¡¯s proposal. It meant no one could do it. ¡°Then, this matter is settled. Anyone who has objections will be understood as volunteering to take over the elves¡¯ tasks.¡± Yujin applied a bit of forceful pressure to the elders, instilling a sense of determination. Faced with both persuasion and strong pressure, they could do nothing but nod in agreement. ¡°After all, the resource development rights are only a small portion, and what we can gain through them will be much greater. Without needing to compete, everyone can peacefully extract resources from their own planet.¡± Having applied enough pressure, Yujin then softened his tone. It was a mix of stick and carrot. ¡°The Galactic Union will fully organize and expand its uncharted territories. You will be able to choose planets and stars as you wish. With advanced technology, you can freely conduct energy experiments or development using the gravitational energy of neutron stars or black holes, and the massive material emissions of supernovae.¡± These were originally the privileges of advanced tribes. But now, as long as they were part of the Union, even weaker tribes could achieve much. Currently, many celestial bodies were already developed or occupied by other tribes, making competition fierce. However, if the elves could accelerate planetary terraforming and the Union¡¯s management area expanded rapidly, they could share these celestial bodies without competition. ¡°I promise you. Within the next 100 years, your tribes will achieve such tremendous development that the current Lubaran tribe will seem insignificant.¡± ¡°¡­¡± ¡°¡­¡± The elders, intrigued by Yujin¡¯s final words, felt their hearts tribe with excitement. The prospect of their tribes becoming that powerful and advanced was exhilarating. It would be strange not to feel excited. ¡°Then, today¡¯s meeting is adjourned.¡± After Yujin declared the meeting over, even the elders who had opposed the elves¡¯ conditions left the meeting room, now in agreement and filled with high expectations. # Oh¡­ presenting an unavoidable choice and then applying strong pressure. Using psychological pressure to force them into making the desired choice, and then gently persuading them afterward. By making them feel compelled to choose, he reduced their resistance to the decision. Then, by highlighting the benefits they would gain, he elevated their mood, eliminating any regrets and instilling anticipation. Yujin, that guy, has quite the knack for handling people. Is it because he¡¯s been the head of the Galactic Union for nearly 20 years? His fundamental personality should be almost identical to my human self, yet he seems quite different now. They say a position shapes a person. Well, looking at myself, that¡¯s evident. I¡¯m becoming more and more like a true outsider. A being that can discard the existence of the universe and its living creatures without a second thought, just to satisfy my curiosity and amusement. Still, I limit myself to what I create. sea??h th§× n??el Fire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. I don¡¯t interfere with naturally formed universes. It¡¯s a line I¡¯ve drawn for myself. Crossing it would mean the end. ¡­Though, I feel like I¡¯ve already crossed that line quite a bit. In that sense, should I explore another universe? It seems things are well-settled between Yujin and the elves. Where should I go next? Chapter 69: The Demon King and the Hero Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 69 The Demon King. Every 500 years, an absolute being from the Demon Realm descends upon this world, threatening and destroying it. The Hero. The only one capable of opposing the Demon King, created by the will of this world as the adversary to the Demon King and the hope of humanity. Yes, this is a story as old as time. The Demon King descends, leading an army of demons to threaten the world. A boy from a certain village is chosen and awakens as the Hero to stop them. Such a predictable story. ¡°Hero, won¡¯t you join hands with me?¡± ¡­Or so it was supposed to be. Up until just a moment ago. ¡°What did you say?¡± ¡°Did you not hear me? I¡¯ll say it again. Hero, won¡¯t you join hands with me¡­?¡± ¡°I heard you perfectly! I asked again because it¡¯s absurd!¡± At the Demon King Tureglo¡¯s proposal, the Hero Rain shouted in disbelief. The terrifying Demon King, with massive horns protruding from his head and glowing crimson eyes. And opposing him, a 17-year-old boy, the last bastion of humanity who had defeated countless demons over the past three years¡ªthe Hero. Their confrontation was supposed to be a fierce battle for the fate of this world. However, the Demon King Tureglo seemed uninterested in fighting the Hero. No, it wasn¡¯t just that he didn¡¯t want to fight. He was proposing an alliance to the Hero. ¡°So you¡¯re trying to catch me off guard and attack!¡± Naturally, Hero Rain did not trust the Demon King. The Demon King was a being that led an army from the Demon Realm to threaten this world. He was the enemy of humanity. And Rain was humanity¡¯s last bastion and protector. The being before him was someone he could never compromise with. Thus, he refused. In fact, he didn¡¯t even believe the proposal was genuine. He thought it was a ploy to deceive him. ¡°I am sincere, Hero. I have no intention of fighting you.¡± ¡°Hmph! And you expect me to believe that when you¡¯re fully armed!¡± As Rain pointed out, Demon King Tureglo was fully armed, contrary to his words. He wore armor and wielded a cursed demonic sword. ¡°This is to defend myself should you reject my proposal and attack. I have no intention of attacking you.¡± Saying this, Demon King Tureglo even threw his sword to the ground. Clang! ¡°¡­!!¡± When the cursed demonic sword, a symbol of the Demon King, hit the ground, Hero Rain hesitated for a moment. Could he be sincere? Did he genuinely want to talk? ¡°¡­Ha, it¡¯s useless. Your proposal is probably to join forces and split the world in half, right? I won¡¯t fall for that trick!¡± Hero Rain had learned about the Demon King¡¯s evil schemes from ancient history. One of those schemes was the proposal to split the world in half. When the Demon King couldn¡¯t defeat the Hero or would suffer too much loss even if he won, he made such a proposal. But one must never accept that offer. If half the world fell into the hands of the Demon King and the other half into the hands of the Hero, the conflict between the Demon King, the Hero, and humanity would only reignite, prolonging the war indefinitely. ? It was a proposal that fundamentally solved nothing. ¡°No, that¡¯s not it. Hero, listen to me.¡± But Demon King Tureglo shook his head. His proposal was different. Demon King Tureglo¡¯s proposal was: ¡°¡­Would you consider changing the very foundation of this world with me?¡± ¡°What¡­?¡± It was something Hero Rain had never expected. # Every 500 years, the Demon King descends from the Demon Realm, sparking a war between demons and humans. And as the adversary to the Demon King, a Hero is born among humanity to defeat him. It¡¯s a story as old as myth. And it was the reality currently unfolding. The protagonists of this real story were Demon King Tureglo and Hero Rain. But this wasn¡¯t just a predetermined rule of the world. ¡°This world¡¯s battles are merely a chess game for a distant, higher being. A being you might call ¡®God¡¯.¡± ¡°Chess game?¡± Hero Rain frowned at Tureglo¡¯s words. ¡°That¡¯s nonsense. The will of this world created the Hero to protect humanity¡­ created me to defeat you! It wasn¡¯t just for some amusement¡­¡± ¡°I¡¯m not talking about the will of the world. I¡¯m talking about something higher. An absolute being that controls this world.¡± When Hero Rain tried to refute, Demon King Tureglo cut him off. ¡°A being that created this world and can manipulate even the will of the world at its whim. For its amusement, we fight, kill each other, and devastate the land every time.¡± ¡°¡­¡± A being that could manipulate even the will of the world at its whim. Hero Rain was bewildered by the enormity of the story. ¡°I am a being created by it. And you were intentionally created by it, using the will of the world, to oppose me. Our battle is nothing more than a puppet show to alleviate its boredom!¡± ¡°Trying to confuse me with such tales is useless! I¡¯ll destroy you and save humanity!¡± Hero Rain shook his head vigorously, refusing to listen any further, and readied his sword. ¡°¡­Ha. Is that so? So, this Hero ends up the same way too.¡± Demon King Tureglo sighed deeply, wearing a desolate expression as if he had experienced this conversation countless times before. ¡°Fine, come. Hero. Follow through with your will. Even if it¡¯s wrong, it will be your truth.¡± Saying this, the Demon King closed his eyes, as if accepting his fate. ¡°Ugh¡­!¡± Hero Rain felt even more confused by this sight. But he didn¡¯t stop; he raised his holy sword and charged at the Demon King. ¡°Ahhh!¡± Just before the holy sword pierced the Demon King¡¯s heart. Hesitation! The Hero¡¯s holy sword stopped in its tracks. ¡°¡­Tell me more.¡± The Hero stopped himself from killing the Demon King. The guardian of humanity, created to destroy the Demon King, halted his duty of his own accord. ¡°Hoho, so you are finally willing to listen.¡± Seeing this, the Demon King looked as if he had finally overcome a significant hurdle. The Demon King wore a benevolent smile. A smile that seemed completely out of place on the face of a fearsome Demon King. ¡°¡­Who exactly are you? Who am I? What is happening to this world?¡± Hero Rain was utterly confused by the unexpected benevolent smile of the Demon King. Seeing Rain¡¯s bewilderment, Demon King Tureglo began to explain everything he had discovered about this world. # ¡°¡­So, you¡¯re saying this world isn¡¯t the only one, and there are countless others outside of it? And there¡¯s a transcendent being that creates these worlds?¡± ¡°That¡¯s right. To be precise, it¡¯s not that there are multiple versions of this world, but rather countless different worlds exist outside this one.¡± The Demon King¡¯s words were hard to believe. The world is not singular. Outside this world, there are countless dimensions and worlds different from this one. And there is a creator of these worlds, a being that creates them to alleviate its boredom and satisfy its curiosity. This being orchestrates events, creating the Demon King and intentionally birthing the Hero as an adversary, watching their fierce battles as if it were a simulation. These were hard truths to accept. Yet, perhaps because of the Demon King¡¯s position or his earnest expression, Hero Rain found a certain credibility in his words. Of course, he remained on guard, ready to respond to any attack. The Demon King, aware of this, had disarmed himself and kept his distance to make the Hero feel at ease. When Rain asked what the Demon King would do if he attacked, Tureglo replied that Rain was the first to listen this far, and he wouldn¡¯t resent dying by his hand. In this state, the two continued their conversation. Then, suddenly, the Hero asked a curious question. ¡°But how did you come to know these truths about the world?¡± ¡°That is¡­¡± Instead of answering, the Demon King handed over a crystal orb. ¡°You are an existence equal to mine. If so, you should be able to withstand the power of this.¡± It was a crystal orb that emanated a foreboding aura, something that felt extremely uninviting to touch. Could it be an attack? Or a trap? It didn¡¯t seem like it. ¡°If you wish to know the truth, grasp this crystal orb. It may be slightly painful, but if you are truly an equal existence to me, it will not harm you.¡± ¡°¡­¡± Hero Rain hesitated but eventually reached out his hand. ¡®Damn it, fine. I¡¯ve come this far. If he intended to kill me, he had plenty of opportunities. Now that it¡¯s come to this, I¡¯ll see it through to the end.¡¯ He had already deviated from the predetermined path. From now on, he would carve out an entirely new story, not one that followed the set narrative. sea??h th§× nov§×lF~ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. Thus, Hero Rain found himself doing something he would never have done under normal circumstances, without hesitation. Grasp! He reached out and grabbed the ominously glowing crystal. Whoosh©¤! At that moment, a pitch-black darkness extended from the crystal orb and engulfed Hero Rain. Translator Note: literally plot from Maoyuu Maou Yuusha Lol Chapter 70: The Truth of the World Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe ¨C 70 ¡®A trap? No, there was no intent to attack. If there had been, the Holy Sword would have reacted first¡­¡¯ Hero Rain, startled by the sudden darkness that engulfed him, looked around. Nothing but pitch-black darkness. He wondered if it was a surprise attack by the Demon King. But seeing that the Holy Sword remained still, it didn¡¯t seem to be the case. The Holy Sword. The sacred sword used by the Hero to vanquish demons, simply known as the Holy Sword. It had no other name. Just the Holy Sword. The Holy Sword had a special ability; it would flash with light and create a powerful holy barrier whenever it sensed its owner¡¯s danger. The fact that the Holy Sword did not react meant that this darkness was not dangerous. So, what was this darkness? As the Hero pondered, someone revealed their presence and approached. ¡°Hello, Hero Rain.¡± ¡°¡­! Who are you?¡± In the deep darkness where even up and down were indistinguishable, a man appeared, dressed in ordinary attire that seemed out of place. A man with a plain appearance and ordinary clothes. At a glance, he looked like an unremarkable villager. ¡°As expected, you are a Hero with power equal to the Demon King. You seem fine even in this space.¡± The man smiled faintly. Rain instinctively knew that this man was the master of this space and the bearer of the ¡®truth¡¯ that the Demon King intended to reveal through the crystal orb. ? ¡°Who are you? Where is this place? And what exactly is happening to this world?¡± The Hero bombarded him with questions. The man shrugged with a faint smile still on his face. ¡°Don¡¯t worry. There¡¯s no concept of time here. Even if I explain slowly, the time in your world will remain unaffected, so let¡¯s take it easy.¡± He gestured behind him. ¡°Shall we walk a bit?¡± As soon as he said that, the pitch-black space vanished. Suddenly, they found themselves standing on a serene and beautiful path flanked by wide fields and blooming flowers. ¡®¡­The power of creation.¡¯ Could this person be the ¡®Creator¡¯ that the Demon King mentioned? But if so, why was he being so kind to him? Or was he another entity altogether? Rain was utterly confused by everything. ¡°Let¡¯s walk. Listening to the story while walking might help clear your confusion.¡± ¡°¡­¡± Rain nodded at the man¡¯s suggestion. Whatever the case, listening to this man¡¯s story seemed like the best way to get closer to the truth. Step by step, they walked down the beautiful path, and the man began to introduce himself. ¡°I am not the ¡®Creator¡¯ that you refer to¡­ but a similar entity, you could say.¡± ¡°A similar entity?¡± A similar entity? Could there really be more than one being like the Creator? ¡°Yes, beings from other worlds are called ¡®Outer Gods,¡¯ ¡®Creator Gods,¡¯ ¡®Cosmic Gods,¡¯ and so on. There are countless beings like your Creator outside this world.¡± ¡°¡­¡± Hero Rain wore an expression of disbelief. What kind of place could exist outside the world? It was beyond his comprehension. Just hearing about it made him feel overwhelmed. ¡°Well, your Creator is an exceptionally powerful being among them¡­ Anyway, I am also one of those outer beings. You can call me¡­ Yad-Thaddag.¡± ¡°Yad-Thaddag¡­¡± The man who introduced himself as Yad-Thaddag began to explain various things to Rain. Not only that he was an outer being but also how powerful the Creator was. And that he had come to help the creatures of this world, created by such a powerful being. ¡°Demon King Tureglo was the first being I contacted. The only being capable of withstanding meeting me was a Demon King directly created by the Creator.¡± Thus, he revealed to Tureglo the truth of this world and how insignificant and futile the existence of the Demon King and Hero was. Tureglo, after hearing Yad-Thaddag¡¯s words, made countless attempts to persuade the Heroes. ¡°The adversary created by the universe. A creature made to oppose the world-destroying Demon King. I thought that if a Hero, created by the Creator, could withstand hearing the truth from me like the Demon King, then together they could change this world.¡± But all those attempts failed, and the Demon King was always defeated and resurrected repeatedly by the Hero. For thousands of years. Finally, he succeeded in persuading Hero Rain, bringing them to this very moment. ¡°¡­Hahaha.¡± Rain had heard it from the Demon King. But hearing all these facts from a being akin to the Creator made the weight of the truth feel different. Of course, all of this could be a ploy by the Demon King to deceive him. But the land, the pathway, the scent of the flowers¡­ It was all real. Not an illusion meant to deceive, but something genuinely created just now. The being before him, though appearing as an ordinary man, was undoubtedly a ¡®Creator¡¯ who could make worlds. As the owner of the Holy Sword, which could see through all illusions and deceptions to sense its master¡¯s danger, Hero Rain was even more certain of this. Yes, he understood. How insignificant this world was. How absurd and futile their reasons for existence were. He realized it to a horrifying degree. To the point where his head hurt. But one thing was also clear. No matter how insignificant or futile it was. They could change it with their power. If the Hero and the Demon King, who were meant to fight, cooperated to change the world. If demons and humans united to create a world without war. ¡®There is hope. Even if the Creator tries to meddle again, if the world becomes uninteresting, they might withdraw their hand.¡¯ It could definitely change. Hero Rain thought so. ¡°But why are you helping us? You are an entity like the Creator.¡± It was a valid question. Why would such a powerful being help insignificant creatures? To the beings outside, they must seem endlessly small and insignificant. At Rain¡¯s question, the man paused as if in thought, then chuckled. ¡°Tureglo asked the same thing. Why would I help them? He couldn¡¯t understand.¡± Recalling his first meeting with Tureglo, Yad-Thaddag gave the same answer as he did back then. ¡°This world is caught in an endless cycle of war for the Creator¡¯s amusement, causing countless beings to die over and over. I couldn¡¯t just stand by and watch that.¡± He couldn¡¯t simply ignore those in distress. It was a very simple and natural reason. Just because the Creator was a malevolent being didn¡¯t mean all outer beings were evil. If there were benevolent beings, it was only natural for them to help those in need. ¡°¡­¡± Hero Rain couldn¡¯t say anything in response. Why did the Hero exist? To save humanity. To help those in distress and bring peace to the world. A very simple and natural reason. ¡°It was foolish of me to ask.¡± Hero Rain shook his head as he spoke. ¡°Thank you. Thanks to you, I¡¯ve decided what I need to do.¡± Helping those in distress. The reason for a benevolent being¡¯s existence. Thus, Hero Rain¡¯s course of action was clear. He would join forces with the Demon King to help the countless dying beings. He would save them and bring peace to the world. That was the reason for the Hero¡¯s existence. ¡°Well, since our conversation went well, I¡¯ll send you back.¡± Yad-Thaddag extended his hand as he spoke. sea??h th§× Nov§×l?ire.n(e)t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. At that moment, Rain, suddenly curious about something, spoke to him. ¡°¡­Could you show me your true form? I want to feel just how overwhelming your presence is.¡± The Creator. Rain was curious about the power of an outer being. Just how high was their level? Could he ever reach it? He wanted to see it with his own eyes. ¡°Hahaha. You and Tureglo are truly alike. How can you both have the same final curiosity?¡± Yad-Thaddag laughed, seemingly amused, and nodded. ¡°Alright, Tureglo endured it. He almost lost his mind, but he endured. You too¡­ if you can withstand it, try to endure.¡± Ssssk¡ª As he spoke, the man¡¯s body began to change. He grew immensely, transforming into an unimaginably colossal figure. ¡°¡­Huh?!¡± The form was like that of a gigantic giant. An indescribable entity with writhing tentacles, a giant with a form that defied description. And at the top, where one might think the head would be, was a single, enormous eye. The moment Rain met that eye. ¡°Gah?!¡± Hero Rain felt an overwhelming headache unlike anything he had ever experienced. Biiiiii¡ª At the same time, a ringing sound echoed in his ears, and everything in front of him began to split into multiple images. It felt like his mind was about to break. Just facing it caused this much distress. He couldn¡¯t even control his body. ¡®Is this the extent¡­ of the outer beings¡­!¡¯ Reach it? The very thought seemed absurd. That was not something one could reach. A higher level? No, it wasn¡¯t that. It was simply¡­ a different dimension. A completely higher dimension. Something that could never be breached, no matter what one did. [ This is dangerous. I will send you back. ] The colossal being extended what appeared to be a hand. [ Do not despair. Demon King Tureglo also endured this much before I sent him back. ] With a final word of encouragement, he used his power to send Hero Rain out of his realm. Chapter 71: Conditions for Peace Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe¡°¡­Ugh!¡± ¡°You¡¯re back.¡± Hero Rain emerged from Yad-Thaddag¡¯s space. S§×ar?h the n?velFire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. He collapsed immediately due to the intense headache and dizziness he felt just moments ago upon seeing Yad-Thaddag¡¯s true form. ¡°Huh?¡± But he suddenly realized that the overwhelming headache and dizziness that had been pressing down on him were gone. ¡°Th-This place¡­ I see. I¡¯m back.¡± The flow of air, the movement of Demon Lord Tureglo¡¯s hand and muscles as he held out the crystal orb. Even the flow of magical power emanating from him. It was exactly the same as just before being swallowed by the darkness that burst forth from the crystal orb. ¡®So it was true that time doesn¡¯t pass.¡¯ No time had passed at all. He had returned to that exact moment. If someone had been watching from the side, it would have looked like he suddenly grabbed his head and collapsed right as the Demon Lord held out the crystal orb. ¡°How was it?¡± However, the Demon Lord looked down at Rain and asked, as if knowing he had already seen and heard everything. He was probably asking about meeting the outside entity, the being called Yad-Thaddag. ¡°It¡¯s absurd. But¡­ I had no choice but to believe it.¡± An unbelievable being that exuded an overwhelming presence just by appearing. Even the holy sword that shines and creates a barrier when it senses its master¡¯s crisis couldn¡¯t defend against it. In other words, it far surpassed the level of danger that the holy sword could protect against. Just revealing its true form was enough to cause that much impact. ¡®Was I able to endure that much thanks to the holy sword¡¯s protection?¡¯ Rain thought as he fiddled with the hilt of the holy sword. ¡°That¡¯s good. It seems you had a good conversation. But judging by your appearance¡­ I guess you asked to see its true form and power, like I did.¡± Rain frowned and stood up, his pride slightly hurt by the fact that he had the same thoughts and actions as the Demon Lord. ¡°Hmph, I just wanted to know my limits.¡± ¡°Hahaha, I felt the same way. I wanted to test how far I could reach. You and I might be more compatible than we thought.¡± As he said this with a grin, Rain felt goosebumps all over his body. ¡°Ugh, don¡¯t say things like that, you bastard. We can always continue what we were doing before.¡± Rain grabbed the hilt of his holy sword. Seeing this, the Demon Lord tilted his head in confusion. ¡°Hm? Bastard? Ah.¡± Then, as if realizing something, he nodded and said, ¡°I suppose you could misunderstand with this appearance. I guess I made it look too dignified¡­ I¡¯m sorry for causing the misunderstanding.¡± Swoosh©¤ As he said this, Demon Lord Tureglo dispelled the transformation magic cast on himself. And then. ¡°Wh-What?¡± There appeared an incredibly beautiful girl with two brown horns protruding from long, shiny black hair that was like black silk. Round, dark eyes filled with melancholy as if hiding some story, a straight nose, and lips as red as cherries. It felt like a masterpiece meticulously crafted by the god of beauty. And below, enormous breasts several times larger than those of an average woman, a slender waist, and smooth, well-shaped arms and legs. Even her clothes were quite revealing, like a swimsuit, which emphasized her voluptuous figure. Her skin was so fair, it looked as if milk had been poured over it. ¡°I am a female demon, hero. Don¡¯t misunderstand.¡± The most beautiful woman Hero Rain had ever met. The woman who was practically his ideal type that he¡¯d only dreamed of, Demon Lord Tureglo, said with a slight smile. ¡°S-S¡­¡± And upon seeing this, Hero Rain. ¡°Shit, no way!!¡± ¡°Oh?! Hero, where are you going?!¡± With a bright red face, he spat out curses and ran towards the exit of the Demon Lord¡¯s castle. # ¡°You surprised me by suddenly running off. Are you feeling unwell somewhere?¡± ¡°¡­No, I¡¯m fine.¡± Rain shook his head and answered Tureglo¡¯s question. Earlier, he was so flustered that he tried to run out of the Demon Lord¡¯s castle, but then he came to his senses and eventually returned to face the Demon Lord again. ? He¡­ no, she still had a lot to discuss with him. ¡°Let¡¯s go for now. It¡¯s not ideal to keep talking in such a gloomy place.¡± ¡°¡­Alright.¡± With that, the two moved to the Demon Lord¡¯s office. The office was surprisingly ordinary. Seeing the menacing appearance of the Demon Lord¡¯s castle and throne, he had thought the Demon Lord¡¯s office would be equally gloomy. But it wasn¡¯t like that at all. ¡°Don¡¯t look at me like that. Surprisingly, my aesthetic sense is quite normal. The castle¡¯s design and the throne were arbitrarily made by my subordinates who insisted they should look dignified.¡± Tureglo said this with a slightly embarrassed expression. Rain thought that look was quite cute. ¡®Ugh?! What, what am I thinking? About the Demon Lord of all people¡­.¡¯ But as he hastily tried to shake off that thought, realizing his counterpart was the Demon Lord. Suddenly, a thought occurred to him. ¡®But if we¡¯re going to live in harmony from now on¡­ is it okay to treat her like a normal woman?¡¯ Of course, as the ruler of a race and the king of demons, she couldn¡¯t be treated completely normally. But isn¡¯t it unnecessary to get hung up on labels like Demon Lord or demon race anymore? From now on, they¡¯re going to work towards peace in harmony, right? ¡®Th-Then¡­ normal dating or marriage might even be¡­.¡¯ While he was having such outrageous thoughts. ¡°Hey, hero.¡± ¡°Eek?! Y-Yes, what?!¡± Hero Rain was startled by Demon Lord Tureglo¡¯s call. He looked quite silly. ¡°Hehe, I always thought heroes were tough and rough. But you have some unexpectedly cute sides too.¡± Seeing this, Demon Lord Tureglo seemed quite pleased, slightly blushing as she smiled gently. ¡°¡­Uh, um.¡± The hero froze at the sight. An awkward atmosphere began to flow between the two. It was a soft and sweet atmosphere that made it hard to believe they were trying to kill each other with swords just moments ago. ¡°Ahem! Let¡¯s sit down. We should discuss how demons and humans can live in harmony from now on.¡± ¡°Y-Yes, let¡¯s do that!¡± Hastily breaking the strange atmosphere, the Demon Lord took her seat. Rain sat on the sofa in the office. ¡°First of all, there¡¯s no problem with the demon race. There might be some resistance, but basically, they¡¯ll follow my words for the most part.¡± Tureglo was the first to speak up. As she said, the demon race isn¡¯t really a problem. They strictly follow the law of the jungle, and are loyal and devoted to the Demon Lord, the most powerful absolute ruler. Of course, that doesn¡¯t mean there won¡¯t be any resistance at all. There will probably be some rebels who go against the Demon Lord¡¯s will to live peacefully with humans, or even try to overthrow the Demon Lord outright. ¡°I can sweep away those elements myself. If there are too many rebels, I could even get help from the hero.¡± ¡°¡­Help, you say.¡± Never having imagined the day would come when the Demon Lord would ask for help. Hero Rain felt somewhat conflicted. ¡°Hehehe, getting help from the hero¡­ what a strange thing to say.¡± Of course, it was the same for Demon Lord Tureglo. But it didn¡¯t feel so bad. Anyway, for these reasons, the demon side isn¡¯t a big problem. Even if problems arise, they can be resolved by force anyway. So the real problem is¡­ ¡°The human side.¡± Hero Rain said seriously. Indeed, the human side is the biggest problem. They are not fundamentally unified. Right now, they¡¯re working together because there¡¯s a common enemy for all of humanity ¨C the Demon Lord. But as soon as this situation ends, they¡¯ll split up again and be at each other¡¯s throats. It¡¯s basically unreasonable to ask such people to reconcile with demons with a unified opinion. No, to begin with, would there even be any human countries willing to sign a peace treaty with demons if proposed? Demons are inherently stronger than humans. That¡¯s why they can invade even with small numbers, and why all of humanity has to join forces to face the demon army. But how many would readily agree if told to live in harmony with a powerful race that might attack them at any time? And the war. In reality, apart from the frontlines against demons, there¡¯s little sense of being at war. Rather, through the war, demons, and the magical beasts that emerged due to demonic influence, humans engage in more active economic activities. Adventurers make money by subjugating magical beasts, and various items are made from the byproducts and magic stones obtained from these beasts. And once you move away from the frontlines, the outskirts of various countries become more peaceful due to the absence of small-scale battles between nations. Thanks to this, the production of various crops and resources has increased enormously. One might think this only disadvantages the countries on the frontlines, but. ¡®That¡¯s not exactly the case.¡¯ The demons¡¯ invasion point is in the north. The frontline countries are the northern nations. Northern countries basically depend on imports for most of their crops because their land is barren. But under the pretext of being on the frontlines in the war against the Demon Lord, they can receive various supplies, including crops, from neighboring countries for free or at low prices. From the perspective of neighboring countries, the peace in their outskirts has significantly increased the production of various crops and resources, so supporting some northern countries doesn¡¯t have a big impact. In this way, the northern countries are exposed to the frontlines of the war against demons, but in return, they¡¯re solving their food shortages almost for free. ¡°All of this is possible because of the war with demons. But the moment peace is established with demons and the war ends, everything will go back to how it was before.¡± Small-scale battles will constantly occur in border regions. Northern countries will have to buy food at high prices. And the human world will be filled with dirty fights among their own kind. For their own safety and from the perspective of national interests, peace with demons was unnecessary. Chapter 72: Dream Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe¡°Oh, Hero Rain. You have returned.¡± Rain first sought out the king of the As Kingdom, the human he found easiest to communicate with and to whose kingdom he belonged. The one who always believed in him and supported him. A father figure to Rain, who grew up as an orphan. He decided to first tell him about what happened with the Demon Lord and seek his counsel. Of course, he didn¡¯t tell him everything. After all, the king wouldn¡¯t believe in the existence of outer beings and such. He simply said that the Demon Lord wanted peace and wished to fight no more. ¡°If that¡¯s the case, they could just return to the demon realm. Why don¡¯t they?¡± A natural question. In fact, Rain had harbored the same doubt and asked the Demon Lord before. But the answer he received was: ¡®The demon realm is barren. With the current demon population, there¡¯s an absolute shortage of food. That¡¯s why we need the bountiful lands of the surface. This part is unavoidable¡­ In exchange, we¡¯ll give whatever we can.¡¯ Even the barren lands of the north are said to be bountiful compared to the demon realm for the demon race. Just having crops that can be eaten and beasts that can be hunted is extremely rare in the demon realm, they say. To begin with, because their required intake is extremely low compared to humans, even the food produced in the north is said to be sufficient. ¡®If even demons with such low needs suffer from food shortages, what kind of place must the demon realm be?¡¯ Anyway, when he spoke about this, the king thought for a moment and then shook his head. ¡°Even if I were to agree, the rulers of other countries wouldn¡¯t stand idly by. Especially those in the north who would have to share borders with the demon race.¡± When the war ends, support from other countries will also stop. Yet, they still have to maintain borders with the demon race, so the tension remains. Although manpower won¡¯t be consumed as much as during wartime, the situation can¡¯t be said to have improved from now. And it¡¯s the same for other countries too. When the human-demon war, where humanity is united in fighting, ends, they will once again turn their swords on each other. The war that was mostly left to the northern countries could become their own problem as soon as tomorrow. The only ones who would welcome this are probably the arms merchants. ¡°I don¡¯t think I can help with this matter. I¡¯m sorry, Hero.¡± The king of As sincerely apologized and even bowed his head. ¡°Ah, no, Your Majesty. I knew it wouldn¡¯t be possible. I just mentioned it on the off chance.¡± It seems difficult after all. The hero thought so. But he didn¡¯t give up hope. He decided to use his position as the hero to try and persuade other rulers directly. ¡°Don¡¯t speak such nonsense!!¡± ¡°Well, well, we sent him as a hero, but it seems he¡¯s been bewitched by the Demon Lord!¡± ¡°Are you saying you¡¯ll betray humanity now?!¡± Of course, the reactions of the human rulers were intense. Some even went as far as to say that Hero Rain, who brought this story, should be branded a traitor and executed. At least the king of As Kingdom, due to his close relationship with Rain, listened to the story seriously. But the rulers of other countries didn¡¯t even try to listen in detail. They just heard the word ¡®reconciliation with the demon race¡¯ and went into fits, shouting that it was impossible. There are probably political and economic reasons too. But it¡¯s also likely due to the deeply ingrained image of the demon race itself. S§×ar?h the n?velFire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. After saying all that, they probably think that these beings, far more powerful than humanity, might attack again at any time. They want to nip it in the bud, that¡¯s probably their thinking. ¡°Sigh¡­¡± Hero Rain let out a deep sigh. If only there was a way to change the image of the demon race somehow. Then they might at least listen. Then he could explain what benefits could come from reconciliation with the demon race. It seemed he had no choice but to return to the Demon Lord with this disappointing news. # ¡°I see. It¡¯s difficult after all, isn¡¯t it?¡± ¡°It seems there¡¯s a deep-rooted resentment and distrust towards the demon race.¡± Demon Lord Tureglo lowered her head regretfully at the news Hero Rain brought. But it was as she had expected. She had sent the hero hoping that maybe things would work out easily. ¡°Is there no way to change the image of the demon race?¡± ¡°There¡¯s nothing else but to end the war and return¡­¡± ¡°Then the human nations would fall into chaos.¡± A sudden end to the war. Now that many people make their living from the war, they can¡¯t carelessly end it for fear that humanity might become even more destitute due to the winds of change it would bring. ¡°For now, we need to reach a stalemate, and somehow show them that the demon race can be beneficial to them.¡± ¡°If there¡¯s anything I can do to help, I will. Anything.¡± Hero Rain said this with a serious expression, and Demon Lord Tureglo smiled gently upon seeing it. ¡°Thank you. I¡¯m so glad you¡¯re cooperating. If I were alone, I wouldn¡¯t have even thought about it and would have just returned to the demon realm.¡± The beautiful Demon Lord smiling gently. Hero Rain unknowingly blushed and turned his head away. ¡°¡­Ahem.¡± And seeing this, the Demon Lord also became somewhat embarrassed, blushing and averting her gaze here and there. Just as the atmosphere was about to become awkward. ¡°Demon Lord, I have something to report¡­¡± ¡°Oh, oh! Yes. Let¡¯s go quickly.¡± A subordinate demon came, and Tureglo used it as an excuse to hastily leave the awkward situation. ¡®W-why am I like this? Surely I¡¯m not developing feelings for the hero who¡¯s helping me as an ally¡­.¡¯ ¡®Oh really¡­ Why is he so handsome and all?¡¯ Both of them trying hard to hide their embarrassed feelings, and so that day passed. # For now, the hero had declared that he would go to defeat the Demon Lord again, so he decided to stay in the Demon Lord¡¯s castle. After all, he had been branded a traitor, so he had no choice but to say that. He felt a bit uncomfortable thinking that he had lied. ¡®But I have to endure it. This is all for the true peace of this world.¡¯ The creator of this world. The being that moves the chess pieces called himself and the Demon Lord. To escape from its grasp, one must make it impossible to play the chess game itself. ¡®Black and white pieces. But if they all turn gray, even if you want to play the game, you can¡¯t.¡¯ However, the process of turning them gray is not easy. Pure white can be easily stained gray just by painting it, but black that has already been dyed pitch-dark must have that paint stripped off to become gray. It¡¯s easy to paint, but hard to strip off. ¡®How ironic. The humans who believe themselves to be good were actually the impure black.¡¯ Politics, economy, personal interests, prejudices¡­. It was humans, not demons, who had been painted countless times with such things and turned pitch-black. Rather, it is the demons who are pure white, starting wars to secure their food, purely believing in strength and unconditionally following the Demon Lord as the one absolute being they gather around. Of course, they may not be completely pure white, but they are close to it. ¡®It would be nice if humans could purely believe in and follow just one thing like demons do.¡¯ They do believe and move only for what benefits them, but prejudices and political reasons get in the way and hinder them. Humans are beings full of such impurities. ¡®¡­When one war ends, they start another. For true peace, perhaps humanity itself needs to disappear?¡¯ For a moment he had such a thought, but Rain quickly shook his head. ¡°What am I thinking¡­¡± To think that he, the protector of humanity, was considering the extinction of humanity. Realizing how absurd it was, he hit his own head once. ¡°I must be crazy, really. Is it because I¡¯m in the Demon Lord¡¯s castle?¡± He tried hard to erase that thought from his mind, but once started, the thought wouldn¡¯t stop. He even began to think that maybe it was the most efficient and sure way. As he tossed and turned with these disrespectful thoughts, he fell asleep. And he dreamed. In the dream, there was the massive figure he had seen before. Yad-Thaddag. The outside being that had revealed the truth of this world to them. Maybe because it was a dream this time, he didn¡¯t feel the throbbing headache when looking at it. Was it because it was an imaginary being in a dream? Or¡­ Anyway, it spoke to the hero. [ Carry out your will. You are the ¡®Guardian of Peace¡¯ created by the will of the universe. The peace you envision is the peace the world desires. ] ¡°¡­¡­¡±To those words, the hero asked back. ¡°But I¡¯m wondering if the things I¡¯m supposed to protect might actually be unnecessary, if it might be right to eliminate them. Is that really the peace the world wants?¡± At his question, the giant¡¯s red eyes flashed brightly. Though it clearly only had eyes and couldn¡¯t possibly have an expression. For some reason, it seemed to be grinning. [ Your will is the will of the universe. Go in the direction you think is most right. If it¡¯s difficult to decide alone, it wouldn¡¯t be bad to seek advice from someone you trust. ] ¡°¡­Someone I trust.¡± At those words, for some reason, the hero thought of Demon Lord Tureglo. A being who shares the same truth about the world and sincerely desires peace for the world. And, a beautiful and lovely woman. ¡®That¡¯s right, I don¡¯t need to decide alone. She, who desires peace, will judge whether my thoughts are truly right.¡¯ Hero Rain thought this in his dream, and then woke up. Chapter 73: The Fallen Hero Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi UniverseAfter waking from his dream, the hero seemed to ponder for a moment before heading towards the Demon Lord. The Demon Lord was in her office, discussing matters with her subordinate demon executives. ¡°Oh, the hero has come. Perfect timing. We were just talking about how to win over the humans in the northern countries¡­¡± ¡°¡­Demon Lord. I have something to say too.¡± When Rain spoke with a serious expression, she immediately sensed that it was a grave matter. The Demon Lord signaled with her eyes for her subordinates to leave. ¡°¡­¡­¡± The executives weren¡¯t pleased with the fact that the human hero was on close terms with the Demon Lord, so they gave the two a somewhat displeased look, but unable to resist the Demon Lord¡¯s pressure, they left the office. ¡°What¡¯s the matter? I don¡¯t think you¡¯ve come to ask about the breakfast menu.¡± ¡°Demon Lord, what I¡¯m about to say is really, really just asking about a possibility.¡± Tureglo tried to lighten the mood a bit with a joke, but Rain continued with a serious expression. ¡°What if, just what if. If we were to eliminate all of humanity that opposes peace, would this world become peaceful?¡± Hero Rain¡¯s question was completely unexpected. To think that the protector of humanity would speak of humanity¡¯s extinction. Of course, it¡¯s not about killing everyone, just those humans who oppose making peace and forming an alliance with the demon race. Well, that would probably be most of humanity, though. Anyway, it was definitely not something the hero, humanity¡¯s last bastion, should ever suggest. ¡°¡­Hero.¡± Demon Lord Tureglo had also considered this idea before. The thought that if they eliminated all those who opposed them, peace might follow afterwards¡­ But it¡¯s far too contradictory. Breaking peace for the sake of peace. Even if they were to crush everyone and rule through fear, it would eventually rot from within. The demon race might somehow manage through forced submission, but if humans remained, there would surely be those who would continually rise up in rebellion against the tyranny. Then, small-scale conflicts would be unavoidable, and peace would be out of reach. And above all, wouldn¡¯t the extinction of humanity be exactly what the Creator wants? ¡°That would just be doing what the Creator wants.¡± ¡°¡­No, that¡¯s not it.¡± But Hero Rain shook his head. ¡°What it wants is for us to keep fighting forever. But if one side completely disappears, that becomes impossible too. If the world¡¯s destroyer and its nemesis team up to completely eliminate one side, extinguishing the very spark of conflict¡­¡± ¡°Hmm.¡± The hero¡¯s words had a point. What the Creator wants is the recurring battle between humans and demons every few hundred years. The Demon Lord retreating due to the nemesis, then regaining strength and invading again¡­ Repeating that cycle over and over. But if one side were to be completely destroyed, the very concept of a battle would cease to exist. War would disappear. ¡°If the remaining side were humans, they would continue to cause conflicts. But what if it¡¯s the demon race?¡± The conclusion, ultimately, is the extinction of humanity. That alone is the only way to achieve eternal peace. ¡°Oh, hero¡­¡± The protector of humanity, uttering this with his own mouth. Demon Lord Tureglo couldn¡¯t even begin to imagine how torn his heart must be. However, he seemed to have already made his decision. ¡°Humanity must perish. Submitting to the demon race and living under them¡­ No, not even that. Total annihilation.¡± Hero Rain¡¯s eyes changed. The annihilation of all humanity. For the peace of this world. He was prepared to abandon everything he had been protecting. ¡®Instead, the demon race and the Demon Lord will be able to live in peace.¡¯ It¡¯s a being he had only come to know well a few days ago. No, until then, they had been mortal enemies seeking each other¡¯s lives. But for the sake of the ¡®world peace¡¯ he desires, it seems to be an unavoidable choice. The moment he made up his mind. Rustle¡ª The holy sword began to turn black. # ¡°Aaaaargh!¡± ¡°R-Run away!¡± ¡°The hero has betrayed us!¡± The Demon Lord and the hero. When these two transcendent beings joined forces, humanity naturally had no chance to withstand them. The northern countries, which were at the forefront of the war, were completely annihilated, and then it was the turn of the central countries. The hero and the demon race advanced, destroying everything in sight. They began to move forward, killing all humans in sight as if trying to erase the existence of humanity from this world. ¡°P-Please spare me¡­ Please spare my life!¡± Even the soldiers who surrendered, trembling in fear. ¡°Hehehe, death has finally come for me.¡± Even the sick elderly who couldn¡¯t get out of bed. ¡°Oh, the child! Please spare the child!¡± Even the mother shielding her child. ¡°Waaaaaah! Mommy!¡± Even the child who lost their mother. They killed them all. Thoroughly and miserably, to a heartbreaking degree. Like the corrupted holy sword that had lost its defensive abilities and instead gained powerful offensive capabilities that destroyed everything it touched, A dark shadow had fallen over the face of the hero, Rain. The things he had been protecting. Someone¡¯s happiness, someone¡¯s dream, someone¡¯s family. He was destroying it all. With his own hands. His hands were still trembling. It had been a month already, but there hadn¡¯t been a single day when his hands didn¡¯t shake. ¡®I killed them. People. With my own hands.¡¯ Of course, he had killed people before. As a hero, he had eliminated bandits and beheaded nobles who had betrayed humanity and sided with the demon race. But. But. But¡­ ¡°You traitor!!¡± ¡°Kill him, kill him! Damn it, I¡¯ll curse you even as a ghost!¡± ¡°Aaaaargh! M-My child!¡± Isn¡¯t this, isn¡¯t this too cruel? Even if it¡¯s for peace, is this really the right path? Killing all of humanity? Not even leaving a single seed? Whenever such thoughts arose, the hero straightened his mental state. Yes, there is no other way. Humanity has always created a history of conflict, a race that can never be peaceful. Their very existence is war. This is right. This is what I must do. This is unavoidable. He kept thinking and affirming this in his heart. ¡°H-Hero¡­ why¡­¡± And so he cut down the soldier who had fought alongside him on the battlefield. ¡°Kuhek¡­! Please spa¡­ Khek!¡± He cut down the innkeeper who had made him warm soup when he was exhausted from battle. ¡°R-Rain! Rain, please come to your senses!!¡± He cut down the childhood friend he used to play with. ¡°Ah, aah¡­ Waaaaaah¡­!¡± He cut down the village girl who had made him a flower crown to thank him for saving the village. Squelch. When Rain saw the flower crown the girl was holding, now soaked in bright red blood, He trampled on it nonchalantly and began walking towards his next target. He had now crossed a river from which there was absolutely no return. If he had time to look back on the past, he should have killed even one more human. And so, the hero Rain¡­ ¡°¡­Hero Rain. So you¡¯ve finally come this far.¡± Like a father to him. He reached the King of the As Kingdom, who had always believed in and supported him. ¡°Your Majesty, please understand me. Everything is for peace. This is unavoidable.¡± Swish¡ª Rain said this as he slowly pointed his corrupted black holy sword at the king. Usually at this point, people would try to persuade him or beg for their lives. But the King of As did not do that. He showed the same kind smile he always had when Rain visited, and said, ¡°I see. If that¡¯s the conclusion you¡¯ve come to, then it must be so. You¡¯re trying to shoulder everything alone, it must be very hard.¡± The moment he heard that gentle smile and those encouraging words, It felt as if some of the pitch-black shadow that had fallen over his face had been lifted slightly. And then. Drip¡­ Tears began to flow. He thought he had already thrown everything away. He thought he had discarded all emotions, sympathy, affection, everything. But in the end, even the hero was just a human. Rain, called the hero, humanity¡¯s guardian, the fallen traitor, the cold-hearted slaughterer. But all of this was too much to bear, and he had been forcibly suppressing everything. He was just an ordinary human after all. S§×ar?h the ¦Çov§×lFire .net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. ¡°Aah¡­ Aaaaaaaaaah!!¡± His face covered in tears. His hands visibly shaking. Without any semblance of a hero¡¯s sword stance, he rushed forward as if thrashing about. He swung his sword like a child would. As if a child throwing a tantrum to their father. As if begging to be held, saying it¡¯s too hard. Slash¡ª! The King of As didn¡¯t even try to dodge the wildly swung sword, allowing himself to be cut. Blood splattered everywhere, and his upper body began to soak in the gushing blood. ¡°Kuhuk¡­¡± The power of the black holy sword destroyed everything it touched, his internal organs were completely mangled, and blood gushed from his mouth. Even so, the King of As didn¡¯t utter a single word of resentment to Rain standing before him. Just one phrase. ¡°I¡¯m¡­ And with that, the King of As passed away. At that moment, the fallen hero Rain Finally lost everything. Chapter 74: Worthless Toy Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi UniverseThe desolate land of humanity. No, should we call it the land of the past now? Humanity has vanished from this world. The Demon Lord, the demon race, and¡­ the fallen hero made it so. On that land where everything had crumbled, the fallen hero Rain looked up at the sky. Clear. The sky was so clear, indifferent to everything. It would have been better if it were cloudy or dark. Rain thought to himself. Chirp chirp! Chirp! Beyond the ruined city, grass was growing, and peaceful bird sounds could be heard from the surroundings. A gentle breeze blew pleasantly, and warm sunlight shone down on this peaceful afternoon. The world is so peaceful. Despite having gone through a tremendous war that wiped out all of humanity. No, perhaps because of that war. Whatever the case, hero Rain¡¯s goal had been achieved. Now the demon race had become the rulers of this world. The demon race knelt before the massive being known as the Demon Lord, pledging eternal peace and prosperity. ¡®With this, with this it¡¯s done, right?¡¯ He had confidence. The confidence that peace would come with the extinction of humanity. That belief did not waver. What wavered was merely his heart. ¡®It¡¯s already too late. Everything is over.¡¯ Of course, thinking such thoughts was already too late, but still. ¡°Hero.¡± At that moment, a familiar voice called out to him from behind. ¡°Demon Lord.¡± It was the Demon Lord. The one who had worked together with Rain to achieve peace. The very one who had led him down this path. ¡°Are you alright?¡± Rain couldn¡¯t easily answer her question. His mental state was such that he couldn¡¯t even lie and say he was fine. But in the end, he had to overcome it. sea??h th§× novel(F~)ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. And after overcoming it, he had to do the last remaining task. ¡°I¡¯m fine. I still have enough strength left to do the final task.¡± The hero said so, with a faint smile. And then he raised his blackened holy sword high. ¡°¡­?!¡± Before the Demon Lord, startled by the hero¡¯s sudden action, could stop him. The hero immediately reversed his grip on the sword and plunged it into his own stomach. Squelch©¤!! ¡°Ra¡­ The shocked Demon Lord rushed over in a panic. As she tried to grab the hilt to quickly pull out the holy sword. Zap!! As if refusing to be touched by anyone but its master, the holy sword emitted powerful magic, repelling Tureglo¡¯s hand. ¡°Kyaa!¡± Though thrown back, Tureglo continued to attempt to pull out the sword nonetheless. She tried using healing magic, and even attacked the sword directly with offensive magic. But she couldn¡¯t pull out the sword. The hero was firmly gripping the sword, pushing it deep enough to pierce through his stomach. Splurt! ¡°Cough!!¡± Blood gushed out from Rain¡¯s mouth and his pierced stomach. And then, due to the special ability of the black holy sword, his body began to crumble gradually starting from the pierced area. Crumble©¤ ¡°Ra, Rain! Rain!! Why, why did you do this!!¡± Demon Lord Tureglo screamed, tears streaming down her beautiful face. An emotion beyond just lamenting his death. It was clearly ¡®love¡¯. ¡°Hehe¡­.¡± Of course, Rain knew this fact as well. That she loved him, and that he loved her too. That¡¯s why, to keep his promise with her. For the perfect peace of the world, he did this now. ¡°Humanity, cough! All of it¡­ must be eliminated. That was, the condition¡­ hack! The condition.¡± The last remaining human. Himself, the fallen hero Rain. He thought that his existence would eventually disrupt the peace. The demon race that followed strength. And the fallen hero with power equal to the Demon Lord. Moreover, in this war to exterminate humanity, he had played the most active role. As the war dragged on, there were even those among the demon race who trusted and followed Rain more than the Demon Lord. Two massive suns inevitably create conflict. One sun had to be extinguished. And the sun to be extinguished had to be himself, the last remaining human. He knew this better than anyone else. ¡°No, that¡¯s not true! There must be another way! Even now, if we pull out the sword and heal¡­¡± Tureglo, unable to accept reality, spoke of finding another way. But Rain shook his head. This is the best way now. It¡¯s the surest method. He told her so with eyes moist with tears. If it were possible, he too wanted to be with her forever. Though they were of different races, he wanted to nurture their love beautifully and live peacefully. But that dream was, as the saying goes, just a dream. He knew it was an unattainable goal. ¡°S Crumble©¤ Hero Rain, just like King As whom he regarded as a father. Apologized one last time and vanished into dust. Clang! The holy sword that fell to the ground. As if to say its job was done now that its master had departed, the blackness that had tainted it disappeared, and it returned to its original pure white form. ¡°Ah, aah¡­ Uwaaaaah!¡± And the Demon Lord Tureglo left behind, no¡­ the mere woman who had lost the man she loved. Wept loudly enough to shake the world. # There¡¯s no pain. It¡¯s peaceful. That¡¯s how Rain felt. He couldn¡¯t feel the pain of the sword wound that had pierced his stomach, nor the pain of his entire body that had been slowly crumbling away. ¡®Am I dead?¡¯ The afterlife. He thought he had become a soul. As he was thinking that, [ So the finale is completed by killing oneself. It was quite an interesting ending. ] Someone¡¯s voice was heard. A familiar voice resonating directly in his head. ¡®Yad-Thaddag?¡¯ He could easily remember that it was Yad-Thaddag, the outside entity who had offered to help them and revealed the truth of this world. ¡°Then is this the outside world? Have I come to the outside after dying?¡± To Rain¡¯s question, Yad-Thaddag¡¯s voice answered. [ No, this is my void space, same as before. I¡¯ve revived you here. I became a bit curious about how you¡¯d react if I told you the real truth. ] ¡°Re-revived, you say?¡± Hearing those words, Rain hurriedly felt his own body. It was real. He had substance. ¡®I¡¯m sure I died¡­ Can an outer god so casually resurrect humans like this?¡¯ With what resolve and thoughts he had chosen to end his life. Being brought back so easily made him feel a bit empty. Anyway, that aside. ¡°The real truth, you say. Are there more things hidden behind it?¡± To his question, Yad-Thaddag laughed. [ Kukukuk. You still don¡¯t understand? The creator, outer god, beings of equal status, the dream you had, sudden changes in your state of mind, corruption of the psyche¡­ Really, you don¡¯t get it? ] Rain, who had been staring blankly as if he couldn¡¯t make sense of it at all. Suddenly, a strange thought occurred to him. ¡®Huh? Come to think of it, why¡­ why did I think of exterminating humanity? Surely there must have been other ways. Even if it took more time, a peaceful method¡­¡¯ At that moment, he remembered. The dream he had then. Yad-Thaddag who appeared there. ¡®Carry out your will. You are the ¡®Guardian of Peace¡¯ created by the will of the universe. The peace you envision is the peace the world desires.¡¯ That¡¯s what he had said. At the moment when he thought that eliminating humanity might be the easiest way. As if encouraging that very idea. As if that was the right choice. And he had also said. ¡®Your will is the will of the universe. Move in the direction you believe is most right. If it¡¯s difficult to decide alone, it wouldn¡¯t be bad to seek advice from someone you trust around you.¡¯ Ask the Demon Lord. But thinking about it, the existence known as the Demon Lord is ultimately created by the creator. An existence meant to destroy humanity and the world. Of course, there¡¯s no way they would refuse a proposal to push away humanity for peace and take peace for themselves. ¡®Was everything¡­ guided?¡¯ That thought suddenly struck him. What if everything had been guided? Revealing the truth of the world to the Demon Lord. Making them draw in the hero. After making them cooperate like that, making the hero exterminate humanity and destroy the world once for the sake of peace. If all of it¡­ had been made to flow according to intention? ¡°Why on earth¡­?¡± Rain asks. Why did you do it, he asks. No, he already knew the answer to that. The creator, outer god, beings of equal status, the dream you had, sudden changes in your state of mind, corruption of the psyche¡­ In other words, Yad-Thaddag wasn¡¯t an entity that suddenly intervened to help them. He was just the creator of this world who made everything flow according to his intentions¡­ It was him all along. [ You¡¯ve finally realized it. The ¡®real truth¡¯. ] He said, as if intrigued. He was observing Rain¡¯s reaction. Would he despair? Go insane? Or unexpectedly remain calm? An air of expectation could be felt even by Rain. ¡°¡­Why?¡± His first action upon learning the truth was a question. Why did you do such a thing? Why, after creating a cruel world full of nothing but war, did you go to such lengths? He couldn¡¯t understand at all. To that question, the creator answered. [ I was curious. I wondered if it was possible to guide the mind of an adversary in a certain direction to make them destroy their own universe. That kind of curiosity. ] It was mere curiosity, he said. It was just to satisfy his own trivial intellectual desire, he said. [ I didn¡¯t think you¡¯d go as far as to kill yourself at the end, you know. I thought you¡¯d have a happy ending living well with that Demon Lord. That¡¯s why I revived you. I became a bit curious about how someone like you would react when learning the real truth. ] ¡°Ha, hahaha.¡± A toy. It¡¯s truly just a toy. Something that can be played with anytime, fixed anytime, and bought anew anytime. Such a trivial and small toy. Himself, the Demon Lord, and all the people who died. In front of this absurd existence called an outer god, that¡¯s all the value they amount to. ¡°Uahahahaha! Ahahahaha!¡± The moment he realized this, Hero Rain burst into laughter as if he had gone insane. Chapter 75: Azathoth Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi UniverseOh, they¡¯ve completely lost their mind. This reaction is getting a bit boring. [ How truly evil. ] As I was thinking that, Idra approached from the side. Such an incredibly beautiful appearance. I created this Demon Lord based on her looks, but there¡¯s certainly a beauty and atmosphere that no created being could ever match. So, evil, huh? It does seem like it might have been a bit excessive. Making a being born as an adversary destroy the very things they were meant to protect, and then resurrecting someone who committed suicide only to completely shatter their mental state. Even if it was to satisfy my curiosity, it was undeniably a wicked act. Of course, that doesn¡¯t mean I feel any guilt about it. Perhaps it¡¯s because I¡¯ve already come too far. Well, this test was quite interesting, nonetheless. An experiment to corrupt the adversary and guide them to bring about the destruction of the world they were meant to protect. It didn¡¯t go as planned, so I had to try it several times. If I directly brainwashed or controlled the adversary, it would be easy, but that would be ambiguous to say the adversary attacked the universe. I tried all sorts of methods to deliberately guide them. Using a beautiful Demon Lord modeled after Idra to seduce them. Guiding their subconscious to think that the extinction of humanity was the easiest path to peace. Appearing in their dreams to add a bit of mental corruption and cloud their judgment. In the end, by pulling all of that together, I was able to see the adversary truly destroy the world and eradicate humanity. To think that a being created by the will of the universe could be made to act against that will. Even though there was some interference, the fact that it could be guided like that with just that much was incredibly interesting. I could use this to conduct various other experiments. For example, an experiment to see if another adversary appears when we turn the original adversary into a destroyer bent on annihilating the world¡­ Oh, now that I mention it, I¡¯m curious. Should we try it right now? [ How about we take a break from that for a while? ] [ Hm? ] Idra looks at me with desperate, pleading eyes. [ I know I can¡¯t stop you. You¡¯re that kind of being, after all. But¡­ even so, couldn¡¯t you pause these terrible acts for just a little while? If you need something interesting, couldn¡¯t you observe the elves? ] ? Well, when a pretty lady asks like that, even I can¡¯t refuse. The fact that I want to grant a beautiful person¡¯s request even without any sexual desire shows that beautiful beings have a power that makes you want to listen to them, regardless of lust. Well, I am an eternal being without the concept of time anyway. It¡¯s not like anything will happen just because I postpone the order a bit. Then, for now, shall we observe Eugene and the elves¡¯ SF world with Idra? We¡¯ll do the adversary experiment later. [ ¡­? ] As I was thinking that, I suddenly felt like someone was watching me, so I turned around. But there was nothing there except the countless universe bubbles that usually occupy my laboratory. What¡¯s this? Could there be a being that found me among all these universes? It¡¯s impossible for a conceptual being capable of perceiving outside the universe to spontaneously arise within a universe. Or¡­ is it from the outside? Maybe it¡¯s a top-tier outer god like me. I thought that, but I don¡¯t sense any such presence either. I don¡¯t know what it is. An illusion? No, was I even capable of having ¡®illusions¡¯ to begin with? As I was pondering this. Swoosh©¤ [ ¡­!? ] My surroundings changed. I was definitely in the laboratory space just a moment ago. Nothing can be felt. No color, no space, no concept¡­ nothing exists. It¡¯s truly ¡®void¡¯. What on earth is this? It¡¯s not any universe, nor is it an interstice. What in the world is this place? As I was thinking that. [ Dangerous element. Eliminate. ] A voice came from somewhere. An outer god? Is it an outer god? An outer god that can move me somewhere else without me noticing? Was there ever a being with such an absurd power? Even the one called ¡®Yog-Sothoth¡¯, considered the pinnacle of outer gods, shouldn¡¯t be able to do this? Moreover, it doesn¡¯t feel like an outer god at all. Even I can¡¯t sense anything in this void and existence. What¡­ exactly is happening here? # I felt a gaze. The gaze that was looking at me. The Origin noticed it. How? No being should be able to sense its gaze, which both exists and doesn¡¯t exist. So how did that one notice and realize it? Is it because it¡¯s an avatar created by itself? Is it because it possesses a part of the most fundamental power? No, if that were the case, it should have noticed much earlier. The fact that it didn¡¯t before means something has changed. [ Experiment. Knowledge. ] Creating universes and gaining new knowledge through various experiments. Those must be increasing its power without a doubt. With that power, it has been gradually growing the strength that was given to it, the strength within itself. It has nurtured enough power to even notice its gaze, which shouldn¡¯t exist. [ Dangerous element. Elimination required. ] That is dangerous. Among the fragments of origin it has scattered, that one is particularly dangerous. A fragment of origin that grows on its own. If left alone, it might grow even more powerful and approach the true Origin. The answer is to eliminate it preemptively. Having reached this conclusion, the Origin drew it into its cradle. [ Dangerous element. Eliminating. ] The red-eyed form, seeming to understand its words, quickly tries to sense its surroundings. Of course, that¡¯s impossible. This place, the origin of the world and the void itself, is none other than itself. It was already as good as being in its stomach. Now it¡¯s just a matter of digesting it properly. Just as it thought that and was about to extend the power of Origin to it, Crack©¤ [ ? ] Suddenly, as if blocked by some force, the power of Origin approaching it was repelled. The power of Origin being repelled? That¡¯s impossible. Literally, Origin is the source. The beginning of everything, the inevitable endpoint, and the unknown that nothing can reach. That which absolutely exists yet doesn¡¯t exist, a contradiction that is not a contradiction. It cannot miss or fail to reach anything. [ Why? ] It doesn¡¯t make sense. Why. Even though it understood the meaning of that question, it never imagined it would have something like doubt. The Origin, known as ¡®Azathoth¡¯, felt the emotions of ¡®doubt¡¯ and ¡®confusion¡¯ for the first time. And immediately, it was able to deduce the reason. [ The power of Origin. Only the same power can oppose it. ] There¡¯s only one thing that can resist the irresistible power of Origin. The same power of Origin. Of course, that one is its avatar and one of its direct creations, so it possesses a fragment of Origin. But that¡¯s just a tiny fragment. No matter how much knowledge it accumulates and power it grows, it can¡¯t stand against the real Origin. It¡¯s on a different level entirely. There¡¯s only one conclusion. Another Origin has sprouted. Something that absolutely cannot exist in this world in twos, other than itself. It has become two. [ Interference impossible. Interference impossible. ] If that¡¯s the case, Azathoth can do nothing. It is the closest to Origin and is Origin itself. At the same time, it is also a being without origin, a being that doesn¡¯t exist. If there¡¯s another being of equal Origin, they absolutely cannot interfere with each other. The moment it was moved here, exposed to the power of Origin, the fragment became a seed. And then it grew into a sprout. At that moment, they become separate entities that can no longer interfere with each other. [ Exile, independence is the best option. ] The only fortunate point is that its power is still just a sprout. If it weren¡¯t for that, the order of this world would have already started to split in two and collapse. Up and down would become the same, right would become left, the distinction between hot and cold would disappear, heads would become feet and feet would become heads. Before that happens, it must become a separate Origin. It must build its own world and become an Origin like itself there. It¡¯s like a multiverse. Two parallel Origins that cannot interfere with each other come into being. To explain this and convey its intention, it needed to have a conversation with that sprout. [ Conversation required. ] It requested a conversation like that, but. [ Why should I? Shit, why would I talk to some bastard who suddenly brought me to a weird place and is trying to do weird things? ] After saying that, it disappeared from the Origin with a poof. [ ¡­¡­. Confused. ] And so Azathoth, while existing, felt the emotion of confusion for the second time. sea??h th§× Novel?ire(.)ne*t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. Chapter 76: Interview Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi UniverseWhoa, that startled me. Somehow, I was suddenly able to escape from there and return to my laboratory. [ Hm? You suddenly went somewhere, and now you¡¯re back. ] Seeing Idra, who I was just talking to, it seems I¡¯ve returned to the right place. Wow, that really scared me. This is the first time I¡¯ve encountered an unexpected crisis since becoming an Outer God. Sear?h the N??elFir§×.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. That was really dangerous. At least when I entered that space, it felt like I gained some new power? That¡¯s how I managed to escape. What could that have been? I couldn¡¯t even perceive its existence. [ Conversation requested. ] Just as I was thinking that. Suddenly, that voice spoke to me again. [ What are you? ] It was behind me. Surprisingly, its form was that of a tentacled giant with red eyes, just like me. Seeing the immeasurably large tentacled giant, I realize how grotesque my own appearance must be¡­ No, that¡¯s not what¡¯s important right now. What matters is that this being followed me here. Moreover, this isn¡¯t just some gap that can be easily traversed; it¡¯s a laboratory dimension I created independently. It¡¯s not a place that even beings like Idra or Nyarlathotep can casually break into without my permission. Yet it appeared beside me as if it had come along without any effort. [ Huh? Why are there two of you? ] Idra is confused beside me. It seems it¡¯s not just visible to me¡­ [ Conversation? You want to talk with me? ] When I asked that, the other tentacled giant nodded affirmatively. A conversation, suddenly. What happened to kidnapping me at will and trying to kill me for being a dangerous element? As I glared at it with that thought, it moved its arm and suddenly transported me and itself to a different space. ¡°Is this more comfortable for conversation?¡± [ ¡­.. ] I¡¯ve seen this scene before. It was when I had a conversation with Nyarlathotep. It changed into a human form to make me comfortable. This time was the same. The difference is, while Nyarlathotep changed into a beautiful young woman. This other giant, amusingly, took on the exact appearance of my human self. What¡¯s this? Is it deliberately imitating me? As I started to feel a bit annoyed at that thought, it spoke. ¡°I apologize. In my haste to transform, I synchronized with you, the one I¡¯m most strongly connected to at the moment. I hope you¡¯re not offended.¡± Strongly connected? Synchronized? Why is it taking on my appearance? I suppose I¡¯ll find out all of that when I talk with it. ¡°Alright, let¡¯s talk.¡± I also change into a human form for easier conversation. However, wanting to differentiate myself from it a bit, I take on Yujin¡¯s appearance. We look basically similar, but there are some differences between Yujin and my true form. ¡­Saying it like this makes me feel a bit annoyed again. My human self was good-looking too, you know? Really! So, me and that¡­ ugh, what should I call it? ¡°Well, if it¡¯s a name in your information¡­ How about calling me ¡®Azathoth¡¯?¡± How is it answering as if it¡¯s reading my thoughts? Can it read minds? That thing¡¯s name is Azathoth, Aza¡­ what? Wait a minute. Azathoth? The Azathoth I know is the being at the pinnacle of the Outer Gods in the Cthulhu Mythos, isn¡¯t it? No, it¡¯s not just about Outer Gods. It¡¯s the absolute being in the mythology. The creator of this world and a being unbound by anything. It¡¯s truly the being most deserving of the name ¡®god¡¯ in the Cthulhu Mythos, the very Origin of everything. And at that moment, I felt like all the puzzle pieces were falling into place. The most fundamental being, yet one without an origin. The reason why I could only obtain information about the universe without any reaction when I connected with it. How the being I¡¯m now calling Azathoth could move me with overwhelming power. And why I could resist its power. Everything made sense in my mind. ¡°Azathoth¡­ I see. I was your ¡®Yujin¡¯, the Yujin of you who are the Origin of this world.¡± Finally, everything made sense. The highest-ranking Outer Gods are the beings that come into existence from the primordial Origin. But I suddenly appeared out of nowhere, as if I had dropped from thin air. The reason is that Azathoth created me by breaking off a piece of himself. Because I am his avatar and alter ego. What about being human? Why do I have memories? I¡¯m not sure about that. Is it because Azathoth created me that way? Or¡­ did some unexpected problem occur that even he didn¡¯t anticipate? Considering he said things like ¡°dangerous element¡± and ¡°must be eliminated,¡± I think it¡¯s more likely the latter. I have many questions. Well, that¡¯s okay. There¡¯s plenty of time. That Azathoth fellow probably has plenty of time too. No, I suppose the concept of time is meaningless for both of us. Then I¡¯ll ask the first thing I need to ask. ¡°Why did you create me?¡± Above all else, that¡¯s what I wanted to know most. After understanding this fundamental aspect, I needed to think about the rest. ¡°For the same reason you created Yujin.¡± Yujin. The first alter ego I created. I created him to communicate with the beings of the universe because I couldn¡¯t approach them directly. Of course, now it feels more like he¡¯s the protagonist of a story for my amusement. Then, the Outer Gods born from the most fundamental Origin¡­ Did he create me to communicate with them and the creatures they created? Or to watch and enjoy it? Considering the gaze I felt earlier, it¡¯s probably the latter. Is he saying he created me for his own amusement? ¡­This feels a bit unpleasant. I¡¯m starting to feel a little sorry for Yujin and the elves. More than that, I see. So I¡¯m a being created by Azathoth. To think that after creating and playing with creatures, I turn out to be the creation of an even higher being. It couldn¡¯t be more ironic. But putting that aside, why was I human? Was that some kind of disguise too? Or did he want to experience something by creating an alter ego that was an ordinary human? But then why make me an Outer God? No, let¡¯s think about this carefully. Considering all the experiments I¡¯ve done on various creatures, I might never have been human at all. Perhaps, as part of curiosity or testing, memories of having been human were simply overlaid onto me. That might be why the personality of my human self is gradually fading, and my sense as an Outer God is growing stronger. I want to ask about this aspect too. Just as I was about to ask the next question¡­ ¡°Wait, let me speak first.¡± It interrupted and said to me. ¡°I¡¯ve come to warn you.¡± A warning. Is this about being a dangerous element? Why am I considered a dangerous element? I¡¯ve done plenty of things that could be considered threatening, but¡­ Still, those were just things I did in a few small universe bubbles. I don¡¯t think that level of activity poses a danger to the entire Origin. ¡°The fragment of the Origin within you has sprouted.¡± ¡°¡­?¡± What¡¯s that supposed to mean all of a sudden? What does it mean to sprout¡­? ¡°You are no longer a fragment. It means you are now an ¡®Origin¡¯ like me.¡± ¡°What¡­?¡± The same as Azathoth? What does that mean? I understood that I was born from a fragment of Azathoth¡¯s power. But are you saying that fragment has sprouted and become like Azathoth¡­ an Outer God above Outer Gods, an ¡®Origin¡¯? Could it be that I was suddenly able to escape from the Origin¡¯s space earlier because¡­ I gained this power? But wait, this is strange. I don¡¯t possess such an absurdly omnipotent power. Of course, the power of a top-tier Outer God could be considered omnipotent, but it¡¯s not the same as the inconceivable omnipotence of Azathoth, who exists on a level above all Outer Gods and is practically the Origin of this world. That would be an absolute power that¡¯s impossible to even describe. He just said it sprouted. Does that mean it¡¯s the beginning of growth? So eventually, I¡¯ll become an ¡®Origin being¡¯ like him? ¡­How should I take this? I¡¯m confused. I haven¡¯t even clearly understood what kind of being I am yet, and now I have to worry about how I¡¯ll change in the future. This is too difficult. Even as an omnipotent top-tier Outer God, this seemed like too complex a problem. ¡°If you have questions, ask. If you don¡¯t know what to do, ask. But remember one thing.¡± Azathoth said, pointing at both himself and me. ¡°Two Origins cannot exist in this world. Either you or I must disappear from here.¡± ¡°¡­!!¡± Well, I suppose that makes sense in a way. To put it simply, it¡¯s like how two sets of physical laws can¡¯t overlap in the universe. A law stating that gravity acts downward and another stating that it acts to the right. What would happen if both existed simultaneously? The universe would become a complete mess, all jumbled up and in chaos. Of course, those two might combine to create a new physical law, but imagine if every single law in the world overlapped like that. The universe would struggle to maintain its very existence. ¡­It¡¯s sudden, but I¡¯m feeling a bit curious to experiment with this. Anyway. In other words, Azathoth is the ¡®law¡¯ of this entire world where Outer Gods live and multiple universe bubbles exist. And I am the sprout that will become that. If two Origins overlap, it¡¯s obvious what would happen to this world in the cracks, where far more laws are intertwined than in the ordinary laws of physics. Which means someone has to leave this place. Literally disappear, or if that¡¯s not possible, create a separate world with a different Origin. Chapter 77: Permission Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi UniverseOf course, Azathoth won¡¯t be leaving this place. That¡¯s to be expected. Why would he leave his own world in the first place? So that means I have to leave here and create a new world, but I don¡¯t even know how to do that¡­ Will it just create itself if I stay still? But honestly, I¡¯m interested. If I¡¯m going to become an immortal being anyway, wouldn¡¯t it be more fun to manage a world like a gap encompassing the entire multiverse and experiment with various things, rather than just messing around with a few universes? Or not? Maybe it won¡¯t be much different since I can only create one. Being able to change the laws of the gap as I please, perhaps? But there are still so many things I want to do here¡­ ¡°You can do that in the place you¡¯ll create in the future.¡± Reading my innermost thoughts again. I can¡¯t even think in peace. Well, Azathoth¡¯s words are certainly right. I guess it doesn¡¯t really matter if I do it in the gap I¡¯ll create in the future. But as he said, I¡¯m still a seedling. Will I be able to create a proper world? Shouldn¡¯t I get some kind of tutoring? ¡°As your power grows, it will naturally happen around you. That¡¯s how it was for me too.¡± I¡¯m curious. If I¡¯m a seedling, it means Azathoth also had such a period. Then where was he born, how was he created, and who created him? Outer Gods creating universes, Azathoth giving birth to Outer Gods, and something creating Azathoth¡­ hmm, does it keep going up in levels like the multiverse? ???? ¡°I exist as myself. I¡¯ve been that way since the beginning. I don¡¯t know if someone created me.¡± It¡¯s a difficult question. In fact, even the Outer Gods would say they¡¯ve existed since the beginning, not thinking they were created by a source like Azathoth or created by his power. I was the same. I¡¯m a bit different since I¡¯m a special creation made from a part of Azathoth¡¯s power¡­ well, anyway. By the way, I still have something I¡¯m curious about. ¡°Why was I human? Or did you implant the memory of being human?¡± Sear?h the N?velFire(.)net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. I was human and then reincarnated to become an Outer God. Why do I have this memory? Why are the parts that could be called my ¡®personality¡¯ still remaining? That¡¯s what I was curious about. ¡°It was just out of interest.¡± The answer that came back was, unfortunately, disappointing. ¡°I just thought about what it would be like if you had memories of being a smaller creature. I wanted to see what would happen if I made a slight difference from the other fragments.¡± Just out of curiosity. Moreover, this memory is fabricated. I¡­ was never human. From birth, I was already an Outer God, merely a plaything to satisfy Azathoth¡¯s curiosity. Well, I¡¯m not particularly upset. Maybe because it¡¯s what I¡¯ve done to countless beings in many universes. Or maybe the feeling of being upset has already worn off and become dull. Whatever it is, I feel like my curiosity has been satisfied. ¡°That might have been the difference. The reason you were able to grow your power and germinate the seed.¡± The other fragments couldn¡¯t do that? Only in me, who was given this difference, did a source like Azathoth awaken? That might be kind of nice. But other fragments, huh. Does that mean there are several beings who have fragments of Azathoth like me? Of course, they¡¯d be among the Outer Gods, right? I wonder who they are? Yog-Sothoth would definitely be included¡­ but from what I¡¯ve heard, it doesn¡¯t seem like all the top-tier Outer Gods are like that. ¡°Including the being you mentioned, there are about 25 entities. Most of them are not as high-ranking as you might think.¡± The ones commonly referred to as ¡®top-tier¡¯ are said to be me, Yog-Sothoth, and a being called Nodens. Speaking of Nodens, I¡¯ve heard Nyarlathotep talk about him directly before. I already knew from Azathoth¡¯s knowledge, but she said Nodens was a being who went around killing Nyarlathotep¡¯s carefully created experimental subjects like crushing ants. That¡¯s why she said she hated him extremely. ¡­Come to think of it, Nyarlathotep has a lot of enemies. ¡°Well, I guess that¡¯s all for our talk. It¡¯s time to decide.¡± Is he telling me to leave now? But I¡¯m still weak. I don¡¯t know if I can create a proper world. ¡°How about we watch a bit longer?¡± ¡°What?¡± I¡¯m still a seedling. I¡¯m not at the level where I can interfere with the laws of the world Azathoth created. Then wouldn¡¯t it be okay to stay until I grow enough to be able to interfere? Honestly, I¡¯ve become quite close with some Outer Gods, and while they say it¡¯s fine to move and do various experiments¡­ won¡¯t it take an enormous amount of time just to settle in after moving? Thinking about that, wouldn¡¯t it be okay to stay here a bit longer? If we think in terms of time, it would probably take tens or hundreds of trillions of years. Azathoth started to ponder. Pondering whether it¡¯s okay to leave things as they are. As if he had reached a conclusion, he nodded. ¡°Alright, a little while should be fine. It won¡¯t take that long anyway.¡± I guess even hundreds of trillions of years isn¡¯t that long for Azathoth. Well¡­ he¡¯s probably existed for billions of times that amount of time. ¡°I want to watch a bit more, and I¡¯m a little worried too.¡± Oh, so he¡¯s worried about me as my creator, huh. I didn¡¯t think a being who is the source of this world would have such emotions.Well, seeing how even things like the will of the universe create adversaries out of concern for the world, maybe emotions are natural even for higher conceptual beings. # Despite various events, I¡¯ve decided to stay here after all. The conclusion is that I¡¯ll continue living as usual for the time being. Of course, I¡¯ll have to move out after some time passes, but by then, my power as a source will have grown significantly, so there¡¯s no need to worry. Once I have the abilities, everything will sort itself out anyway. Isn¡¯t that what an Outer God is? An omnipotent being that can resolve anything it desires. So there¡¯s no need to worry. More importantly, I¡¯ve been missing out on observing the SF universe due to all this back and forth. Quite some time must have passed while Azathoth and I were talking. [ You¡¯re finally here. What on earth happened? ] Idra rushes over with a worried expression. Oh¡­ a beauty is worried about me. This feels kind of nice, doesn¡¯t it? But wait, she called me an evil being, and now she¡¯s worried about me? What an odd one. [ It¡¯s nothing. I just had a conversation, that¡¯s all. ] [ ¡­I see. Understood. ] She must have felt Azathoth¡¯s absurd presence as well. That¡¯s why she probably has many questions. But with my dismissive answer, she didn¡¯t pry further. Since I said it was just a conversation and didn¡¯t explain further, she seemed to decide not to inquire anymore. [ More importantly, hurry up. The elves are currently exploring the universe. ] Ah, right. What¡¯s important now is the current state of the SF universe. I should quickly go and check it out! I swiftly fly over to examine the original SF universe (replica). [ Thank you, Elder Lasi. Thanks to you, the internal organization of the galaxy has been completely finished. ] [ It¡¯s nothing, I¡¯m just doing the job I¡¯m paid for. ] It starts with a conversation scene between Yujin and Lasi. I couldn¡¯t tell because neither of them had changed in appearance at all, but apparently, it¡¯s been 20 years since I last saw them. The last time I saw them was 15 years after creating Yujin, wasn¡¯t it? For the elves, it was about 10 years? I don¡¯t remember clearly. Well, anyway, it¡¯s a story from a whole 20 years after that point. Yujin, despite being of the Terra race, hasn¡¯t aged at all due to being my avatar and thus having no lifespan, while the elves originally had an average lifespan of 400 years by Galactic Union standards, which has been extended to 600 years thanks to tremendous medical advancements. Because of that, it¡¯s natural that they haven¡¯t aged in just 20 years. Of course, it¡¯s also partly thanks to me creating the elf race to maintain their prime appearance until death. By the way, Elder Lasi, is it? It certainly feels like the elf race has officially joined the Galactic Union. They have as many as 10 seats. That¡¯s the same level of power as the Meias tribe, who are the de facto ruling species. Currently, those seats are occupied by 10 executives who have achieved the highest positions in elf society, including Clan Leader Lasi and High Priest Rodri. Of course, since most of them, except for Rodri, are subordinates of Lasi and Rodri, it¡¯s essentially a dual leadership system between Lasi and Rodri. For reference, the Metalians have also been granted 3 seats in recognition of their abilities created through outstanding technology. Since they also essentially share the same intentions as the elves, the elves effectively have 13 elder seats. Well, considering Yujin¡¯s existence and the seats of other races friendly to the Meias tribe, the tribe is still superior to them, but¡­ it seems that the structure has started to change bit by bit as the elf race has been making tremendous contributions to the Union recently. Chapter 78: The Development of the Elves Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe¡°Have you heard? The elves have cleared out the monsters in the unexplored territories again.¡± ¡°My, that¡¯s impressive!¡± ¡°I¡¯ve heard they¡¯ve even started manufacturing their own spaceships now.¡± Recently, the Galactic Union has been abuzz with stories about the elves. How much the elves have accomplished, how much they have developed. It was filled with praise for their greatness. When the elves first joined the Galactic Union, most were worried. No matter how special their abilities or how long-lived their tribe, their level of development was low, and for a newly discovered tribe to be promised 10 seats upon joining the Union naturally raised many concerns. But the elves proved those voices wrong with their abilities. First, they showed that it wasn¡¯t that their level of development was low, but that they had lacked the speed for development. With technological support from the Union, they quickly began to surpass other tribes, and now they stand at the forefront, creating the most advanced technologies as a leading tribe. On top of that, they possessed special abilities comparable to the Meias tribe, and their physical abilities were also exceptional. With advancements in medicine and biotechnology, they created incredible physical enhancements based on their already superior physical abilities, and as a result, their lifespans began to increase exponentially. It was truly the era of the elves. Many were saying that it wouldn¡¯t be long before they pushed out the Meias tribe and took the position of the Union¡¯s most powerful tribe. No, some were already saying they had taken that position. This was because the elves were solely responsible for terraforming unexplored territories. As a result, the elves¡¯ territories and population were exploding at an incredible rate, and in terms of owned territories alone, they had long since surpassed the Meias tribe. In terms of resource development rights, they had far more rights than the Meias tribe, and in just 20 years, they had become the tribe with the most assets among the Galactic Union tribes. This was a much faster rate of development than the Lubaran tribe, and it was more resources and assets than the Lubaran tribe had at the height of their golden age. ¡°The pace of development is smooth.¡± Although only four generations had passed, the elven population had exploded and was now well into the hundreds of millions. Compared to the populations of other tribes, which were at least in the tens of billions, it was an absurdly small number, but considering their influence, it was clear that as their population grew, they would dominate the Union at an incredible speed. At this, Lasi smiled with pleasure. Then Rakus, one of the Union elders and Lasi¡¯s direct subordinate ¡®Production Chief¡¯, nodded. ¡°Yes. The development of the space mothership is also progressing smoothly. Until recently, we were borrowing the Union¡¯s ships, but now we¡¯ve switched to our own production system and can move independently.¡± ?? Due to lack of resources and development time, they had been using Union-owned space motherships until now. But now, through their own production, they could move on their own without having to rely on others. Of course, they would still need to report to the Union when exploring uncharted territories, but it was a significant development in that they could now move much more freely in space than before. ¡°Moreover, the functions are superior to those owned by the Union. Using an alloy of beryllium and titanium with radiation countermeasures, it¡¯s so sturdy that it not only doesn¡¯t break when directly colliding with space monsters, but can even crush the monster¡¯s body, and the wormhole function has been improved beyond the Union¡¯s technology¡­¡± ¡°Rakus, you¡¯re getting too excited.¡± As Rakus, who had started talking excitedly, showed no signs of stopping, Lasi gestured for him to calm down. ¡°Ah, I¡¯m sorry. I got too excited¡­¡± As the leader of the research team at the forefront of technological development, it was clear how proud Rakus was of the technology they were developing. If he was this excited about talking about what he was making, it was expected that this time too, they would show quite an advanced development. ¡°If we¡¯re putting them on advanced motherships, we should strengthen the warriors¡¯ armaments as well.¡± Elma, also one of the elders and the Warrior Chief, was smiling from ear to ear. It was understandable that he was in a good mood, as the armaments of the elven soldiers were getting better and better as technology advanced. After all, armament is the life and combat power of warriors. Currently, they are using ultra-lightweight arrows with matter transmission and vacuum functions. The transmission function uses technology to molecularize the arrow when fired and then reconstitute it at a certain distance, making it undetectable up to a specific range. And the vacuum function creates a vacuum around the arrow as it flies, minimizing the friction on the arrow. Add to that a propulsion device to increase the speed to supersonic levels, and you have an arrow with tremendous destructive power. If you attach the recently developed miniature neutron bomb as an arrowhead, it¡¯s essentially the same effect as firing a scaled-down version of the neutron cannon mounted on battleships. An unbelievable destructive power that could destroy an entire planet if scaled up. S§×ar?h the ¦Çov§×lFire .net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. To compare it to the magic of the Meias tribe, it¡¯s comparable to the destructive power of the Atomic Explosion spell used by top-tier magicians, which causes a miniature nuclear explosion. Of course, not all elven warriors can possess miniature neutron bombs, so it¡¯s more like a trump card for higher-ranking warriors. Even without that, just attaching ordinary explosives still boasts considerable destructive power, so the combat power of the elves was truly formidable. ¡°The urbanization of the recently allocated planets is also progressing smoothly. Since terraforming was completed long ago on these planets, we¡¯re building cities without much difficulty.¡± Construction Chief Dro also looked pleased. He was a stern man with a blunt personality and rarely showed any change in expression, but recently he seemed to be in a very good mood. Presumably, this was because as the elves¡¯ territories expanded enormously, there were now many more places that needed buildings constructed and urbanization. Some tribes might not understand being happy about increased work. But for the elves, a very industrious tribe, an increase in work was almost as joyful as an increase in money. Construction, too, with newly developed technology, allowed 100-story buildings to rise in just a few months. Urbanization was also happening so quickly that it was taking longer to find elves to relocate to the developed planets than to build the cities themselves. To begin with, their population had just broken into the hundreds of millions. It¡¯s still a very small population, not even enough to fill a single elven planet. It would probably take about 100 years for the population to grow enough to fully spread to other planets. Someone seemed to be lamenting that they should have started with 300 million instead of 30 million at the beginning. # The elves¡¯ development at an astonishing pace. While many considered this remarkable and simply envied them, There were still quite a few who viewed it negatively. ¡°Isn¡¯t their power becoming too great?¡± ¡°Exactly. Why did Lord Yujin sign such a contract¡­¡± The rights to develop resources on discovered planets and stars. Originally obtained through a balanced bidding process, the elves had gained priority as compensation for terraforming, reaping considerable profits. Boosted by the enormous energy and resources they had acquired this way, they were now rising to a level that no one else could match. Some tribes saw this as a crisis. Typically, when a force develops too excessively, friction is bound to occur. Of course, Yujin was at least sharing the technology developed by the elves with Union members through Union rules. But for most other tribes, inevitably lacking in resources and abilities compared to the elves, it was a struggle to keep up. This made them even more worried. An incredible pace of development that others couldn¡¯t match even when given the technology. They feared the elves might completely take over the entire Union. While Yujin was currently maintaining stability in the Union through good governance, no one knew what would happen if the elves seized that power. They might take everything for themselves and control the rest. It was possible they would try to use all the tribes in the Union as their pawns. And this concern was shared by the Meias tribe, who could communicate directly with Yujin outside of meetings. ¡°The growth of the elves seems unsettling. We should take some measures.¡± The Meias elders were anxious. Having taken this position after driving out the Lubaran tribe, they were plagued by the fear that another powerful tribe or a formidable being like Yujin might appear and snatch their position away. Of course, Yujin had no worries. ¡®Well, if the elves do well, I can always abandon the Meias and switch to the elves.¡¯ While he had such ruthless thoughts, Yujin fundamentally believed that the elves wouldn¡¯t cause such discord. They are inherently a gentle tribe. Although their desire for development is immense, they don¡¯t obsess over it to the point of stealing from others to grow. They¡¯re developing by fairly receiving rewards commensurate with their work. Rather, if unnecessary concerns lead to creating problems, it might actually break down the cooperative relationship with them and bring about the very situation they¡¯re worried about. So, ¡°Stay put. There¡¯s no time to turn our attention to internal matters of the Galactic Union anyway.¡± Soon, they would embark on expanding the managed territories of the Galactic Union together with the elves. When that happens, there won¡¯t be time to squabble with other tribes struggling within the Galactic Union. Chapter 79: Region Pioneering Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi UniverseThe diameter of the cosmic space controlled by the Galactic Union is about 20 billion light-years. Given that the currently observable universe has a diameter of 100 billion light-years, it¡¯s quite small for an organization claiming to be the largest in the universe. But that¡¯s about to change. ¡°The Galactic Union has now completed all internal pioneering. There are no longer any ¡®unexplored territories¡¯ within our management area.¡± Jupiter, an elder of the Meias tribe, announced publicly on the Union-wide channel. All unexplored territories within the Union had been pioneered, resulting in the entire cosmic space spanning 20 billion light-years. Coming under their complete management. In the process, numerous tribe were discovered and protected, a total of 8 intelligent life form tribe were added to the Galactic Union, and. Countless planets, stars, and celestial bodies became resources for the Union. This was achieved in just 30 years since Yujin took power, and merely 20 years since the Elf tribe joined the Galactic Union. ¡°That¡¯s incredible.¡± ¡°As expected of Lord Yujin.¡± ¡°I heard the Elves¡¯ contributions were also tremendous.¡± ¡°They say the Elves did almost everything, don¡¯t they?¡± ¡°Beautiful and capable. That¡¯s awesome.¡± Thanks to the tremendous achievements of Yujin and the Elves, those belonging to the Galactic Union had made unbelievable progress and were living lives of unprecedented abundance. Well, of course. Not only had they discovered and developed an enormous amount of resources and energy in a short period, but a tribe showing remarkable technological advancement had also been added, sharing their technology. While people were talking about how amazing it all was. Jupiter made an astounding declaration. ¡°From now on, the Galactic Union will turn its eyes outward.¡± ¡°Huh?¡± ¡°Outward?¡± People showed various reactions to those words. Those who understood what it meant and were surprised. S~ea??h the nov§×lF~ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. Those who didn¡¯t know what it meant and tilted their heads in confusion. Those who didn¡¯t understand but were happy because it seemed good. And those who, beyond understanding, were simultaneously worried and excited about what was to come. To all of them, Jupiter drove the point home once more. ¡°The Galactic Union¡¯s management area is currently about 20 billion light-years. That¡¯s quite old now. Now that we¡¯ve completely mastered the interior, how about we expand that territory?¡± ¡°¡­!!¡± ¡°My, my goodness. You mean to pioneer even further from here?¡± At Jupiter¡¯s statement, everyone in the Union was surprised. The Union¡¯s current territory has existed for nearly 100 years. This is the first territorial expansion since the Lubaran tribe expanded it to 20 billion light-years. In fact, even the Lubaran tribe could have expanded their territory further after mastering the interior, but they didn¡¯t expand beyond that to keep other tribe in check. Of course, no one knew these inside details, and they were just bubbling with hope that they could now advance far beyond the era of the Lubaran tribe. ¡°Wow, that¡¯s insane. Does that mean we can visit places that have only been observed?¡± ¡°I¡¯m curious. Even the largest black hole in the universe is tens of billions of light-years away, right?¡± ¡°Hey, we can¡¯t even leave our own galaxy because we¡¯re broke, what are you talking about?¡± ¡°But with technological advancements, the cost of intergalactic travel has decreased tremendously.¡± People with expectations. ¡°But we don¡¯t know what¡¯s out there¡­¡± ¡°That¡¯s what I¡¯m saying. What if there are things like the Capteri tribe outside our territory?¡± ¡°They might invade us.¡± ¡°There might be all sorts of alien things out there too.¡± And people with concerns. The opinions were split roughly half and half. But even those who were worried didn¡¯t fundamentally oppose the territorial expansion. They were just worried about what might happen when they expanded and said they should prepare in advance. Almost everyone seemed to agree with the territorial expansion. # ¡°Public opinion is extremely favorable for now.¡± ¡°I see.¡± Yujin nodded while looking at the article posted on the Union¡¯s network. Public opinion is important. Although individual citizens may have little power on their own, when they unite their intentions, it can rival the power of most elders. That¡¯s why even the most powerful and mighty beings always had to be mindful of public opinion. ¡®Well, the main body probably wouldn¡¯t care about such things.¡¯ Of course, for an overwhelmingly powerful being that could be called omnipotent, such things would be meaningless. Anyway, public opinion is good. All preparations are complete. The future contract with the Elves has also been updated to match the risks of pioneering completely unknown territories. Their technology had also advanced tremendously. ¡°Our first target is here.¡± The Galactic Union Elders¡¯ Council, where elders of all tribe gathered, though there were a few empty seats. Yujin stood in the center and displayed holographic documents and maps that the Lubaran clan chiefs had possessed. Woong©¤ Inside the hologram, a map of the observable universe was spread out. In the vast cosmic space, the area managed by the Galactic Union was marked in red. But next to it, there was a space uniquely marked in blue. A space with a diameter of about 3 billion light-years¡­ similar in size to the sectors of the universe typically divided from A to X. There were two of these attached on both sides. ¡°This is the ¡®Sector YZ Project¡¯ that the Lubaran tribe had been planning to secretly send personnel to pioneer and make 100% their own territory.¡± ¡°¡­!!¡± ¡°YZ, you say?¡± At those words, the elders were startled and began to murmur. A sector that the Lubaran tribe had secretly planned to pioneer on their own. It was the first time they had heard of this. ¡°The Lubaran tribe were conducting various activities under the surface besides illegal experiments. This project was one of them. They were probably after the energy and resources that would come from it.¡± The Galactic Union¡¯s management area only has sectors from A to X. Sectors Y and Z, which shouldn¡¯t exist. It was a sneaky plan to secretly pioneer these for themselves and use them exclusively. ¡°Those Lubaran bastards¡­¡± ¡°If we had left them alone, they would have developed further on their own with this.¡± The elders cursed the Lubaran tribe. Yujin smiled with satisfaction at the sight. This was also why he had deliberately kept this project hidden until now. Just as the anger over the Lubaran tribe¡¯ illegal laboratories was beginning to subside, it was a strategy to remind them once again of the Lubaran tribe¡¯ trashy actions while simultaneously increasing trust and loyalty towards himself for not hiding this project and revealing it for joint development, unlike the Lubaran tribe. ¡°Anyway, since there¡¯s already a pioneering plan set up by the Lubaran tribe, we don¡¯t need to worry about planning separately. So we¡¯re going to start with the pioneering of these ¡®Sector Y¡¯ and ¡®Sector Z¡¯ first.¡± And for the rest, it was concluded that they would hold meetings as they proceed with the pioneering of Sectors Y and Z. ¡°I agree. If there¡¯s already a plan, there¡¯s no reason to object.¡± ¡°Looking at the data, it seems the Lubaran tribe had already done all the preliminary investigations.¡± ¡°So we just need to go there and comfortably reap the benefits?¡± Naturally, the pioneering of Sectors Y and Z was decided by unanimous agreement of all the elders. # [ Oh¡­ this is getting interesting. ] Pioneering unknown parts of the universe. This is exactly the kind of story that fits a sci-fi space opera. [ Hehe, now the Elves will take the lead. Their abilities will become even more crucial in these uncharted territories. ] Idra is right. As already revealed during the internal pioneering, the Elves¡¯ ability to ¡®grow plants anywhere there¡¯s land¡¯ was an absurdly overpowered skill. They can complete terraforming, which usually takes hundreds of years and astronomical costs, in just a few years. Moreover, it requires almost no money or manpower. If only there were more Elves, they probably would have finished the internal pioneering in 10 years instead of 20, and would have started exploring outside the sectors long ago. Ah¡­ what a shame. I should have created about 300 million Elves instead of just 30 million. It¡¯s too late to regret it now, I suppose. Well, it¡¯s only delayed by 10 years anyway. From now on, with the increased number of active Elves and greatly advanced technology, we should see faster pioneering. [ Ah, I¡¯m so proud. I can¡¯t wait to see when these children will have the entire universe in their hands. ] [ ¡­.. ] Hmm, I feel the same way. But how should I put it¡­ Isn¡¯t it too easy? The internal consolidation and pioneering went too smoothly. Without any twists and turns. The only thing that could be called a twist was the encounter with the Elves, and even that ended comfortably with forming an alliance. Even those who were initially against it are now happy because the Elves are doing so well. Hmm¡­ this isn¡¯t very interesting. I wonder if we should create some kind of trial that would shake things up in the story. It doesn¡¯t have to be as extreme as the god-level giant monster that almost led to extinction before, but wouldn¡¯t it be more interesting to create a crisis situation at least on the level of the Kapterians? No, the Kapterians would be too weak for their current abilities. Hmm¡­ then should we create something like enhanced Kapterians? We could scatter them in Sector Y or Z to create a sense of trial. That would be fun. Let¡¯s do it right away. Chapter 80: The Intruder Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe¡°According to the investigation results, it shouldn¡¯t be too difficult. The report states that no particularly dangerous energy was detected.¡± The first target for expanding the Galactic Union¡¯s territory was set as Sector Y. They had considered going for both Sectors Y and Z simultaneously. However, due to the possibility of unforeseen variables, they decided to play it safe and concentrate their forces on one side instead of dividing them into two. Given that this was their first operation, the impact of failure would be significant, so it was an unavoidable choice. Of course, that¡¯s not to say that any danger factors were found in either sector. No energy emissions from giant monsters or highly advanced civilizations were detected, nor were there any traces of foreign entities. At most, Sector Y contained the largest black hole ever observed, but that could be avoided by simply going around it. There wasn¡¯t much difficulty to speak of. They would simply go in, secure the major galaxies as strongholds first, and then expand outward from there, terraforming suitable planets to secure the surrounding cosmic space. Repeating this process, considering their current technology and the available Elven workforce, They estimated that with about 20 years of intense effort, they could claim one entire Y sector. Of course, terraforming wouldn¡¯t be completely finished, but at least the foundations would be laid. That should be enough. After all, from that point on, they just needed to spread out and wait. Having finished these calculations, Eugene and the elders proceeded with the plan. ¡°I have been given overall command. I look forward to working with you all.¡± Lowie Hendrick, who was now a full-fledged elder rather than an elder-in-waiting. He had been entrusted with the role of chief executive for this Y sector pioneering mission. Based on the assessment that it wouldn¡¯t be too difficult, this was the Meias elders¡¯ gesture of goodwill, allowing the young new elder to achieve the great feat of successfully completing the first expansion. Of course, it was also Eugene¡¯s consideration. ¡°I will ensure its success without fail.¡± Lowie Hendrick, well aware of this fact, was determined to make it succeed no matter what. Even though there were said to be no difficult obstacles, this was still their first external sector expansion. Since anything could happen, he planned to proceed with the utmost caution. ¡°The total number of available Elves is 20 million. Most of them are not warriors but ordinary Elves skilled in terraforming, so their protection is our top priority.¡± ¡°Understood.¡± Lowie Hendrick nodded at Lasi¡¯s words. A total of 20 million Elves. With them, they should be able to securely establish key footholds in each galaxy within the vast 30 billion light-year sector. Now the preparations were complete. All that remained was to wait for an easy success. ¡­At least up until this moment, that¡¯s what everyone thought. # ¡°Space mothership ¡®Rios¡¯. We are now departing.¡± The Elves¡¯ planet. There, massive spaceships carrying Elves to pioneer Sector Y were now holding a departure ceremony. And leading this massive spaceship fleet was the space mothership ¡®Rios¡¯. Built with the Elves¡¯ own technology, this state-of-the-art mothership boasted 1.5 times the durability of regular Alliance motherships while being even lighter in weight. With anti-gravity propulsion systems capable of free directional movement even in the vacuum of space, and the latest neutron cannon arrays. It was truly the epitome of cutting-edge technology. The total capacity was 5 million. It was not an exaggeration to say it was on the scale of a large city. Including all the fleet it commanded, the total capacity reached up to 30 million. It boasted a truly enormous scale, comparable to that of an entire nation. To commemorate this incredible scale and power, as well as the estimated initial Elven population of 30 million, it was named after their god ¡®Rios¡¯. sea??h th§× N?velFire(.)net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. ¡°Ooooh!¡± ¡°Wow!¡± As the massive space fleet rose, the Elves erupted in cheers. They were rejoicing at the thought of this state-of-the-art mothership and its fleet traversing space and achieving countless feats. ¡°Well then, shall we depart?¡± The overall commander was Elma, an Alliance elder and the Elven warrior chief. Woooong©¤ They rise beyond the atmosphere into space. The blue Elven planet could be seen below. ¡°Enter the wormhole. Move to the designated location.¡± ¡°Yes! Opening wormhole!¡± ¡°Opening wormhole!¡± ¡°Opening wormhole!¡± Woooooong©¤ Upon entering space, they quickly move to the designated location by opening a wormhole at the specified coordinates near the Elven planet. Fwoop! The massive mothership and fleet disappear in an instant. After several wormhole jumps, they reappeared on the outskirts of Sector U, near Sector Y. [Welcome, Elder Elma.] Upon arriving at the designated location, a message came from Lowie Hendrick¡¯s main force, which had arrived earlier. ¡°I leave the mission command in your capable hands, Elder Lowie.¡± [Of course.] A warm atmosphere. Up until this point, no one doubted that the mission would succeed easily. They were only thinking about living out the rest of their lives receiving excellent treatment as members of the fleet that succeeded in the first external pioneering mission. ¡­ ¡°Retreat! Retreat!¡± ¡°Aaaah!¡± ¡°Damn it! What is that!¡± They encounter a tremendous obstacle and fall into crisis. A few days before that happened. There was no particular difficulty at the first point. They just arrived, checked the planet¡¯s condition, and went down for terraforming. A planet full of only plants, with no dynamic life forms. Perhaps because of this, the air was extremely clear and clean. In addition, it seemed like it would be extremely useful as the planet was filled with various minerals embedded in the ground. ¡°Terraforming isn¡¯t necessary.¡± ¡°There¡¯s also enough water that can be used as drinking water¡­ It seems optimal to use as a temporary base.¡± Following the orders of the overall commander, Lowie Hendrick, they decided to use this place as a temporary base and quickly began to build a provisional facility. After confirming that there were no risk factors on the planet, they left only the personnel needed to build the base and the fleet returned to space. The second point they arrived at. It was a place with a main sequence star of suitable size for use as an energy source, along with resources suitable for creating a Dyson sphere scattered on the surrounding planets. ¡°We can start terraforming from here.¡± Although there were no planets with life, there was one planet that could meet the requirements for life if it had an oxygen layer, allowing for the creation of water. Just as they were about to settle there and start terraforming. Beep beep beep beep©¤ Suddenly, an emergency alarm started ringing on one of the Elven ships. It¡¯s something that rings in case of a sudden external attack or intrusion. Since there were clearly no life form reactions in the vicinity, everyone thought it was just a small rock or something flying and hitting the ship. But. [E-emergency! Intruder! There¡¯s an intruder! Everyone, quickly come here¡­ Aaaagh!] The Elf who went to check the scene left this radio message before the signal was cut off. ¡°What? An intruder?¡± ¡°But there were no life form reactions in the vicinity. And even at the location where we¡¯re supposedly under attack, there¡¯s no life form reaction¡­¡± The reporter stopped mid-sentence, startled. Isn¡¯t it strange? No life form reactions? They sent five Elves to check the scene. Does this mean all five, including the Elf who just radioed, are dead? From what? There was external damage, but the ship is equipped with an automatic repair function, so repairs were completed immediately. This means there¡¯s no possibility of oxygen deficiency or being sucked into space. ¡°It¡¯s an intruder. There might be some kind of stealth robot. Warriors, prepare yourselves.¡± Of course, they have radar technology that can detect even the most advanced stealth. But thinking there might be a machine with stealth capabilities that can evade even that, the ship¡¯s captain quickly prepared the warriors. ¡°Report to Elder Elma at the main force. The current situation as is.¡± ¡°Y-yes! Understood.¡± And after informing the main force of this fact, they headed to the scene with the warriors. 30 warriors including the captain. To prepare for any unforeseen situations, they had more warriors on standby behind them, and the regular crew members moved to safety bunkers. ¡°Is this the place?¡± [Yes. This is where the motion detection sensor last detected something.] About 200M away from the accident site. Since life detection, temperature detection, and energy emission detection all failed, they checked the old-fashioned motion detection sensor they used to use, just in case. And it had momentarily detected and transmitted movement from this location. The fact that movement was detected from such a distance means that there must be some kind of life form or machine somewhere. The captain and warriors began to look around tensely. Then. ¡°Captain. This.¡± One of the Elven warriors discovered something and called the captain. ¡°¡­Huh.¡± And what he discovered was that one of the doors of the food storage, made of strong titanium alloy, was smashed as if it had been torn off by something. ¡®It tore through titanium alloy like paper?¡¯ At that moment, he could guess how the intruder was able to penetrate the outer hull. Although the outer hull material is harder than the interior, if it can tear through the interior material like paper, the outer hull probably wouldn¡¯t have held out for long either. Unless it was the radiation-removing beryllium alloy used in the mothership ¡®Rios¡¯. ¡®Is it inside the storage?¡¯ Thinking this, he slowly entered the storage. And there. ¡°Kieeeeek!!¡± They came face to face with it. Chapter 81: Alien Life Form Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi UniverseSize is approximately 3M. With jet-black and smooth skin, it has a grotesque appearance similar to the Kapterians, yet with a different feel. The most prominent feature is its elongated head with no eyes and an unnaturally large mouth. ¡°Kieeeek!¡± Whoosh©¤! The creature, which had been voraciously devouring food in the food storage, immediately began charging at the warriors upon spotting the elves. ¡°Uwaah!¡± As the massive black monster with a horrifying appearance lunged at them, the elf warrior let out a startled scream and swung their sword. A sword made with high-frequency plasma laser technology, capable of slicing through metal as if it were tofu. Normally, it should have been split in two the moment it made contact, but. Clang! ¡°Keeek?!¡± When the plasma cutter collided with the creature¡¯s body, it bounced off with a metallic sound as if two ordinary swords had clashed. ¡°W-What the¡­¡± It wasn¡¯t completely unscathed. Blood was trickling from a wound left by the sword on its exoskeleton-like skin. However, it shouldn¡¯t have ended with just that. The hardness was absurdly high to only be scratched by a plasma cutter. It was beyond even the latest titanium alloy technology. ¡°Grrrr¡­¡± Tremendous strength capable of tearing apart the interior metal of a battleship. And on top of that, an unbelievable defense. Stealthiness that evades detection by any sensor, be it temperature, energy, or life signs. ¡°¡­This is dangerous.¡± The captain realized that this creature¡¯s existence was an undiscovered new species and. Recognizing how extremely dangerous it was, he immediately ordered the warriors to retreat. ¡°Everyone, fall back. Do not engage in close combat. Attack from a distance.¡± For now, they would intercept it here. Approaching an unidentified opponent is something only a fool would do. The elves retreated as far as possible and nocked their arrows. They couldn¡¯t use small neutron bombs or highly destructive arrowheads as they might cause problems with the machinery. Instead, they used arrows with plasma technology like the sword, which were extremely sharp and had powerful penetrating force. Whoosh©¤! Thud! Thwack! ¡°Keeeek!¡± The accelerating arrows, approaching the speed of sound, pierced through the creature¡¯s body. The monster was pierced without a chance to dodge. Earlier, the hastily swung sword had only left a scratch, but the accelerated arrows managed to penetrate the creature¡¯s terrifying barrier. Of course, even then, the arrows lost their momentum piercing the creature¡¯s tough exoskeleton and remained lodged instead of passing through. However, this ironically led to an unfavorable outcome for the creature. The high-frequency vibrating plasma cutter began to devour and mangle its flesh from the inside. The creature started writhing in pain, experiencing it for the first time. ¡®A creature that tough probably rarely experiences pain. That¡¯s why it has very little immunity to pain.¡¯ They hoped it would die from excessive bleeding or shock as it suffered. But even with its body pierced in various places, the creature didn¡¯t die and continued to struggle, charging at the elves. ¡°Kieeek!¡± Incredible vitality. However, the elf warriors calmly and persistently aimed for its head. Crunch! Thwack! Splat! And so, the creature finally met its demise after being hit by dozens of arrows. ¡°Phew¡­¡± The captain let out a deep sigh at the sight. It wasn¡¯t a sigh of relief. It was a sigh born from worry about what might happen next. Isn¡¯t that right? There¡¯s no way a life form like this exists as just a single individual. There are no beings in this world born as a single entity. Unless it¡¯s a species on the brink of extinction. Anyway, that means there are more of these creatures nearby. The fact that they suddenly appeared upon entering this galaxy clearly indicates that this is their habitat. They seemed to have gone undetected until now due to their ability to evade sensors. ¡®It felt like seeing a Kapterian species that had evolved into a higher being.¡¯ Although there were some differences, that was the impression it gave. If their reproductive ability is also similar to the Kapterians¡­ ¡®It¡¯s terrifying just to think about it.¡¯ First, this incident must be reported to the higher-ups. And then, countermeasures for this¡­ Just as he was thinking that. Boom! Beep beep beep©¤ The emergency alarm started blaring again. And explosive sounds began to echo from various locations. Bang! Boom! ¡°¡­Shit.¡± This sound, a familiar pattern. The captain realized that the situation he had been worrying about was now unfolding. ¡­That monstrous species they had just barely defeated. They had begun invading the ship in swarms. No, not just this ship. The entire fleet, including the mothership ¡®Rios¡¯. ¡°Retreat! Retreat!¡± ¡°Aaaaah!¡± ¡°Fuck! What are those things!¡± The entire fleet was in a state of emergency. Due to the monstrous life forms tearing through the outer hull, not only the elves but also the alliance side was in complete chaos. Their numbers were roughly 30,000. For the entire fleet, it amounted to about a dozen creatures sneaking into each ship, but even that number was enough to pose a tremendous threat given how powerful they were. R They clashed with the creatures inside the ships and retreated, or were ambushed by hidden ones. The most horrifying thing was. ¡°Fuck, these bastards¡­¡± Someone from the alliance discovered that the creatures had gorged themselves and laid eggs in one of the storage areas. They were reproducing. Right here inside. ¡°Report this immediately. We must exterminate these fuckers, including their eggs..!!¡± And so, they found themselves having to wage a sudden war against an alien life form. # ¡°What? An unknown life form?¡± ¡°Yes. From what we¡¯ve heard, it can¡¯t be detected by any sensors, it¡¯s strong enough to tear through alloys, and its carapace is so tough that even plasma cutters have difficulty penetrating it. Moreover, it¡¯s incredibly resilient and won¡¯t die unless you blow its head off.¡± ¡°¡­No way, that¡¯s insane.¡± Just hearing about its specs, it sounds like some planetary-level giant monster. Yujin spoke with a look of disbelief. ¡°There¡¯s definitely no record of such a life form being detected in the Lubaran reports. Even when we conducted our own independent investigation, there was nothing. It¡¯s hard to believe that such a ferocious and powerful species hasn¡¯t been discovered yet, just because it can¡¯t be detected by sensors¡­¡± Suddenly, as if something had occurred to him, Yujin frowned and said, ¡°¡­Do we have any photos or sketches of it?¡± ¡°Ah, yes. Here¡¯s a photo sent by the expedition team.¡± Yujin¡¯s expression worsened as he looked at the photo handed to him by his subordinate. ¡°Hah¡­ shit.¡± He even sighed while rubbing his forehead. ¡°What the hell is it this time?¡± Yujin gritted his teeth and looked up at the sky. He recognized the appearance of this monstrous life form. ¡®AlienX¡¯. The protagonist of a sci-fi thriller movie about extraterrestrial life forms, from the memories of his human days in the original body. The alien monster that appeared in that movie was exactly what was in this photo. Of course, there were differences. First, the size. The size was excessively large. And it didn¡¯t have acidic body fluids. Instead, it seemed its physical abilities had been tremendously enhanced. From this fact, Yujin immediately knew that this was also a creation of his original body. It was the same as himself or the elves. The problem was that this time, the intention behind it was extremely unfavorable to him and the alliance. He had created himself just for communication and then let him live as an independent entity. The elves were originally created as a highly capable and cooperative race to harmonize with the alliance. But this AlienX was completely different, wasn¡¯t it? It was a life form created specifically to attack the alliance. ¡®Damn, no wonder it wasn¡¯t discovered.¡¯ Of course it wouldn¡¯t have been found in preliminary surveys since it was a newly created life form that didn¡¯t exist before. Sear?h the ¦ÇovelFire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. ¡®Is this¡­ just for entertainment?¡¯ Yujin thought to himself. Although his original body hadn¡¯t taken any hostile actions against the alliance or its member species until now, he was in fact an outer god. An outer god who could easily erase and recreate this universe if he so desired. It means he can do anything, whether it¡¯s making the alliance stronger or threatening it, all for his own amusement. Perhaps the very concepts of hostility and friendliness are meaningless to him. ¡®This time, he probably thought it would be more interesting if we faced some difficulties because we¡¯ve become too strong.¡¯ His intentions were obvious. And the consequences would be borne entirely by the Galactic Alliance and himself. ¡®This bastard. Why can¡¯t he just leave us alone and go play with some other universe instead of messing with me?¡¯ Yujin cursed his original body in every way possible in his mind. But what could he do? The situation had already unfolded, and there was no sign of it being reversed. If that¡¯s the case, there¡¯s only one answer. ¡®He¡¯s given us a trial, so we just need to overcome it and achieve our goal. If we overcome it too easily and it becomes boring, he might not interfere next time.¡¯ Cut off his interest. Then, his interventions in this universe should decrease. With this in mind, Yujin prepared to go out himself. ¡°Y-Yujin, sir?¡± ¡°I¡¯m going personally. I¡¯ll gather an elite team to deal with these creatures. Elder Jupiter, let¡¯s go.¡± ¡°Yes, yes.¡± There wasn¡¯t much they could do by staying at the alliance headquarters anyway. They would only be receiving reports from the expedition team in Zone Y. That¡¯s why he planned to go with the strongest forces and confront the AlienXs directly to eliminate them all. ¡®Watch closely, original body. No matter how much you try to use us for your amusement, we¡¯ll do our best not to give you any enjoyment. So give it up.¡¯ Chapter 82: Securing Y Zone Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe[ Hmm, I guess this level was still too weak. ] Those creatures from the AlienX movies. They have a separate species name, Xenomorph, but that¡¯s not really important. Anyway, I modeled a threatening alien species like the Kapteri after them. After all, expanding into space without any trials wouldn¡¯t be very interesting. Of course, considering the current power, technology, and combat capabilities of the Galactic Union, I knew that the movie-level threats wouldn¡¯t even be a challenge, so I made several adjustments. I removed the acidic body fluids since they¡¯re already a basic countermeasure against alien life forms, and it would just unnecessarily inflate their species value. Instead, I made their exoskeletons so hard that even plasma technology couldn¡¯t easily penetrate them. At least as hard as needing a supersonic arrow made with a plasma cutter to pierce through. And to match that, tremendous physical strength. I gave them incredible strength that could easily tear through most alloys. They should at least be able to break through a spaceship¡¯s hull. But even at that level, when Yujin, the Meias elders, and the Elf elders personally intervened, they were easily dealt with. Hmm¡­ Should I have increased their numbers or made them even stronger? No, but if I put in too many high-value species or increased their species value any further, it would create an antagonist. Oh, by the way, the species value is a numerical measure based on data I¡¯ve obtained through various experiments. It determines at what level an antagonist emerges, and what values result from giving certain species characteristics. I figured all this out through direct experimentation. Heh, I wonder how many universes I¡¯ve wasted to obtain this data. Anyway, the threshold for that value is around 700. If it exceeds this value, an antagonist is generated. 700 species is indeed hard to handle. Anyway, the current AlienX creatures¡¯ total species value, combining their numbers and characteristics, is about 600. Seeing how easily this level was dealt with, it¡¯s clear just how ridiculously overpowered characters Yujin and the Elves are. Yujin¡¯s strength alone should be enough to warrant an antagonist, but his initial species value was set low at 500. It¡¯s like he¡¯s a 500 species that got stronger by cheating. Well, having a 500 species value for a single individual is already as broken as an A-rank space monster. The same goes for the Elf species. Considering their maximum abilities and population limit, they¡¯re about 600 species, but their growth based on technological prowess has brought them to a value rivaling 700 species. ? Whew¡­ I did a good job creating at least one species or avatar. No wonder even Ubbo-Sathla is desperate for help. Anyway, this level isn¡¯t much of a threat, is it? Then I have a solution too. Instead of creating alien life forms with just high numerical values, I¡¯ll have to prepare ones like the Elves, with high base specs that grow stronger over time. Hehehe, this time it¡¯s going to take a while. You¡¯d better look forward to it, Yujin. This time, it won¡¯t be so easy. # Although they faced a major obstacle due to the alien life form attack, the main force of the Union was deployed and resolved the situation. There were no significant crises after that. The remaining alien life forms occasionally launched attacks, but they were already familiar opponents. Thanks to the considerable reinforcements from the main force this time, they were able to repel them without much difficulty. S§×arch* The nov§×lF~ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. Thus, the exploration of Zone Y began to progress without major challenges. ¡°I¡¯m sorry, you entrusted this to me, and yet¡­¡± Lowie Hendrick gritted his teeth and bowed his head to Yujin. They had empowered him, a young new elder, to create a good achievement, but the main force had to be deployed because of just one alien life form. This meant that Lowie Hendrick¡¯s achievements were as good as gone, and the efforts of Yujin and the other Meias elders to support him had been in vain. ¡°No, Lowie, you must be the most disappointed. It was a sudden, unexpected attack, so it couldn¡¯t be helped.¡± Of course, Yujin had no intention of blaming Lowie Hendrick for this. It was an unavoidable situation from the start. Since it was caused by his main body¡¯s whim, he even felt apologetic about it. ¡°What¡¯s done is done. Let¡¯s continue the expansion of Zone Y with the main force for now. We¡¯ll look for another opportunity in Zone Z.¡± It seemed they would need to distribute their forces more carefully next time. They couldn¡¯t guarantee that something like this wouldn¡¯t happen again. ¡®Still, it doesn¡¯t seem like anything special has been happening since then.¡¯ Things were going smoothly. Although he hoped it would continue like this, Yujin never let his guard down. ¡®Who knows what kind of mischief is being planned now.¡¯ Even the Elves¡¯ existence had been unknown for nearly 20-30 years. Similarly, strange things might be brewing somewhere again. Yujin was determined to remain vigilant until the end. ¡°By the way, about the exoskeletons of those monsters.¡± ¡°Yes, I¡¯ve heard. They¡¯re incredibly tough.¡± Of course, it wasn¡¯t as if they gained nothing from this. The alien life forms that attacked the fleet. Their exoskeletons were tough enough to withstand plasma cutter technology. There are very few non-metallic substances with such high hardness. Among them, organic substances at this level are practically non-existent. Therefore, their exoskeletons seemed likely to become very important research material. ¡°If we uncover the secret of the exoskeleton, we might be able to create organic armor using it, or even develop a serum that enhances the hardness of skin and leather.¡± ¡°That would certainly increase our inherent defensive capabilities.¡± As they say, crisis is opportunity. Whether or not the main body intended this as well was unclear, but one thing was certain. This incident could make the Union even stronger. ¡®Overcoming trials makes you stronger, huh¡­ It¡¯s not all bad after all.¡¯ However, he had absolutely no intention of continually accepting trials from the main body. # 15 years. It took a bit longer than expected, but finally, the expansion of Zone Y was complete. We secured all the major strongholds in the last galaxy designated as Zone Y and various cosmic structures. Although the pioneering is still in its early stages, that too will naturally resolve itself as time passes. In fact, it would be fair to say that we had completely dominated Zone Y. ¡°In reality, there were no threatening elements other than that alien life form¡­ the so-called ¡®Xenomorph¡¯.¡± ¡°I see.¡± Now the pioneering of Zone Y was over. The combat and survey personnel for pioneering were withdrawing, and now it was time for the development personnel to be deployed. Unless a Outer God suddenly appeared, there were no more elements that could pose a threat in this zone. We could be certain of this because we had proceeded with thorough checks for any possible gaps due to the existence of the code-named Xenomorph. Although this delayed the pioneering by 5 years, we thought it was a good choice to invest that much time for the safety of the Union. ¡°Next is Zone Z, right?¡± ¡°Shall we proceed immediately?¡± To Lowie Hendrick¡¯s question, Yujin shook his head. ¡°No. Let¡¯s take a rest period first. We need to regroup to be able to work hard again next time. Besides, it must have been an incredibly long time for the short-lived races.¡± ¡°I see.¡± Lowie Hendrick nodded, seeming a bit disappointed. He had really wanted to thoroughly prepare and achieve merit in Zone Z, but since they were regrouping first, there was nothing he could do. After all, resting was also important for work efficiency. ¡°By the way, we finally succeeded.¡± ¡°Indeed.¡± A vast cosmic space of 20 billion light-years. A total of 24 zones. With the addition of another zone, the territory of the Galactic Union had finally expanded after about 100 years. This held tremendous significance. While organizing and pioneering the interior was just doing work that had been postponed, this was creating something entirely new. New land, new resources, new energy, new possibilities. Of course, most of the plans had already been laid out by the Lubaran race, but what mattered was that we had actually carried them out and obtained them. ¡°This is just the beginning. The Galactic Union will soon have this entire universe in its grasp.¡± ¡°I look forward to it.¡± At Yujin¡¯s grand ambition, Lowie Hendrick nodded with a slight smile. If someone else had said such things, he would have scoffed, but the person saying it was none other than Yujin. At first, he had feared and served him simply because he was an avatar of the highest-ranking Outer God. But now it was different. He had already become a being separate from the Outer God, and had become someone worthy of respect solely based on his individual abilities, ambitions, and execution. ¡®I think that if it¡¯s him, it will surely be possible.¡¯ And if he followed him, he was sure he could keep up with at least some part of that grand plan. Whether he died from reaching the end of his lifespan, or died fighting alongside him, or was discarded after outliving his usefulness. He thought that if he spent the rest of his life with Yujin, it would never be boring. ¡®With him, I¡¯m not afraid even of his main body, the Outer God.¡¯ Lowie Hendrick looked at Yujin with sparkling eyes full of respect. His feelings were sincere. Chapter 83: Elftenium Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi UniverseA part of the universe, a space about 2.5 billion light-years in diameter, designated as ¡®Zone Z¡¯ by the Galactic Union. There, at present, some kind of change was about to occur. ¡°Gather according to the will of the Transcendent Being.¡± ¡°This is our new home¡­¡± ¡°Kieek, it¡¯s a bountiful place.¡± In a distant part of the universe, different from the Galactic Union. A massive collective connected as a single species came here to establish a new home. They were the same species, yet their forms varied wildly due to evolution. Some were wolf-like monsters with a bizarre structure: huge blade-like forelegs, two middle legs, and hind legs with extremely developed thighs like those of insects for jumping. Others were monsters with elongated heads extending backwards, long serrated jaws in front, and bodies long and segmented like centipedes. There were also strange tentacled monsters with gas-filled bodies floating and flying around, with enormous forms reaching tens of kilometers in size. While their appearances were all different, they were all of the same species. If there was one common trait, it might be that they all possessed indescribably bizarre and horrific appearances. It¡¯s unknown why they traversed hundreds of billions of light-years of distant space to come here. They simply came here as if drawn to it. S~ea??h the Novel?ire(.)ne*t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. Their ruler, the massive being called the ¡®Transcendent Being,¡¯ came here as if entranced, seemingly having received some great will. [ Our power grows stronger here. In a short while, we will gain influence incomparable to before. ] He was full of hope. The reason was that the Transcendent Being had made contact with a great entity existing outside this world. By contacting that great entity, it received power. Power and knowledge truly befitting the name ¡®Transcendent Being¡¯! It received fragments of cosmic truth. Now it could propagate its species on a scale incomparable to before. Previously, they could barely manage a single galaxy, but now they had the potential to dominate cosmic structures spanning hundreds of millions of light-years. ? [ Great entity, we shall propagate our species throughout this universe according to your will. ] They had been chosen. By the great entity outside this universe that held its fate! Now, only success lay ahead. That¡¯s what the Transcendent Being thought. ¡°Great Transcendent One, bestow your orders upon us.¡± ¡°Kiieek, orders! Orders!¡± A vast species system connected mentally and spiritually to the enormous Transcendent Being. The species¡¯ executives, known as ¡®Elites,¡¯ awaited the Transcendent Being¡¯s orders. [ Propagate the species. And if there are intruders, kill them all. ] Simple and clear. But it was an order that precisely dictated all their future actions. ¡°As commanded.¡± ¡°Kikikik! Kill! Kill them!¡± ¡°Intruders, could there be such things?¡± The bizarrely-shaped Elites, following the Transcendent Being¡¯s orders, began to spread out to numerous planets to propagate their species. In 20 years. In just 20 years, they would spread to become an enormously vast power, dominating over 20% of Zone Z. And the Galactic Union had scheduled their exploration of Zone Z for 10 years from now. # This time, I took inspiration from a race called the Zerg that appears in StarXraft. Well, it¡¯s obvious when you look at it. To be honest, it¡¯s a bit ambiguous to say I created them, as there was already a similar alien race living in a different part of the universe, somewhat distant from where the Galactic Union is. They were weaker than the Kapteri race, which has a similar concept, with only enough power to consume a single galaxy. But like the Zerg, their potential was very strong. Their evolution is very rapid, and the form of the species changes dramatically depending on the method of evolution. From small insects of 10cm to giant monsters tens of kilometers tall. This level of variation couldn¡¯t be seen even in the Kapteri race. Moreover, the fact that a huge psychic brain called the Transcendent Being commands all the species as their leader was exactly like the Zerg. Of course, their species value is very low at around 300, and in their current state, they¡¯d be wiped out in 3 seconds if they encountered the Galactic Union. But I have the ability to strengthen them. I made contact with the Transcendent Being, the head of the species, and enhanced their abilities. It wasn¡¯t anything too special, just boosting their ability scores. In terms of potential alone, they were far superior to the Kapteri race, so I thought they¡¯d do well on their own if I just boosted their abilities and moved them to Zone Z. Of course, it¡¯s not just a simple boost. [ I raised them from a 300-level species to a 670-level species, so their abilities have been multiplied several times. ] Without giving any special abilities, just by enhancing their capabilities, their species value more than doubled. I couldn¡¯t even gauge how much stronger they¡¯d become without taking a proper look. I¡¯ll be able to gather more data depending on how much stronger they become in this experiment. Hehehe, 10 years, is it? That¡¯s how long it will take to reach Zone Z. How much will the Zerg be able to expand their influence by then? I wonder how the battle with the Galactic Union will unfold with that expanded influence. All-out war? Or will Eugene and friends step in again to quickly resolve it? It won¡¯t be that easy this time. It¡¯s going to be quite tough. Of course, the Galactic Union side has also gained quite a bit this time. They discovered a new metal called Elftenium while occupying Zone Y. How should I explain this¡­ I guess you could think of it as something like mithril from fantasy novels? It has extremely high energy conductivity, is very light, and has strength surpassing tungsten alloys. It¡¯s very difficult to process, but if it can be processed, it¡¯s such an excellent metal that it wouldn¡¯t be an exaggeration to call it a dream material. It seems the elves discovered it and named it ¡®Elftenium¡¯. I¡¯d prefer if they just called it mithril for easier understanding, you know. They¡¯ve just made the name unnecessarily complicated. Anyway, if they research Elftenium and use it to create ships and various weapons¡­ they might be able to win more easily than expected? Just how strong have these guys become? At this rate, we might need to bring in a low-level outer god to make it a real trial, don¡¯t you think? Did I mess up the balance settings¡­ Who¡¯s in charge of balance? Oh, right, it¡¯s me. Well, anyway. Shall we wait and see for now? If it looks too difficult, I could create another similar species and make them form an alliance. One 700-level species would be a worthy opponent, but they won¡¯t react to two 670-level species. Come to think of it, the balance on this side is a mess too. # ¡°How is it going? The research.¡± ¡°Well, we¡¯re still in the research phase, but¡­ even what we¡¯ve discovered so far is incredible.¡± Elftenium. It¡¯s a new metal discovered by the elves during the development of Zone Y. Who would have thought we¡¯d still discover a new metal in this universe? It just goes to show how vast space truly is. Moreover, experiments have revealed that this metal is an extraordinary substance. First, its strength. It¡¯s harder than any metal that has existed until now. Yet it¡¯s also flexible and doesn¡¯t break easily, making it arguably the ultimate in durability. And it¡¯s lightweight too. Remember when plastic was first developed, and it was called a dream material for being hard and light? It¡¯s exactly like that. What¡¯s more, since this metal is also heat-resistant, it¡¯s truly the best material for space industry. But that¡¯s not all. ¡°The energy conductivity is also very high. It¡¯s much higher than silver for electricity, and similarly surpasses most metals for other types of energy as well.¡± The energy conductivity is also high. Thermal energy, electrical energy, and so on. It has an incredibly high conductivity for energy transmitted through various media. And the energy loss is almost negligible. It¡¯s no exaggeration to call it a dream material. ¡®Surely this isn¡¯t another of the entity¡¯s tricks?¡¯ Eugene momentarily wondered if this might be a reward for overcoming a trial. Following the Xenomorph¡¯s outer shell, could this incredible metal be another gift? Without thinking along those lines, the existence of such a perfect metal was almost unbelievable. ¡®Whatever it is, this is an opportunity.¡¯ There are still many who doubt the need for zone expansion. They question whether it¡¯s really necessary to expand. Including the Xenomorph¡¯s outer shell, there¡¯s no better material to convince such skeptics. Look, in this vast universe, there are still substances we haven¡¯t discovered. This time it¡¯s a metal, but it could be a new type of energy, or organic resources from life forms. That¡¯s why we need to expand the Galactic Union¡¯s management zone. This argument would be met with almost universal approval, and negative opinions would disappear. ¡®Of course, the advancements from the metal will naturally follow.¡¯ The discovery of a new metal. And one with such incredible properties? It was only natural that various fields utilizing metals would advance. Moreover, with its excellent energy conductivity, we could expect significant progress in the energy industry as well. ¡®Good. Everything is going well. We¡¯ll finish this development and start exploring Zone Z in about 10 years.¡¯ Of course, he hadn¡¯t forgotten about the entity¡¯s existence. This time, he intended to make thorough preparations before venturing into Zone Z. ¡®This time, you won¡¯t have your way. I don¡¯t know what trials you¡¯ve prepared, but we¡¯ll be ready.¡¯ Chapter 84: The Tower’s Choice Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi UniverseHehehe, Yujin is such a cute one. Perhaps because he¡¯s my avatar, I like how he¡¯s not afraid of me and burns with a competitive spirit. I guess he can think that way because he¡¯s not really a threat anyway. If he were a real threat, I would have already erased the universe. Hmm, but I wonder how the original universe is progressing? Come to think of it, I haven¡¯t been paying attention since the middle, so it¡¯s probably developing into a completely different worldview by now. I¡¯m curious, should I take a look? [ We¡¯ve resolved all the internal issues of the Galactic Union. Now we must expand outward! ] [ Outward? ] [ Yes, just like the newly arrived Elves and Metallians, there must be new races out there, along with new energy sources or resources¡­ ] Ah, this side is flowing almost the same way too. I guess the timeline is just a bit slower? Of course, without my intervention there, the expansion itself might be a bit faster. Still, it¡¯s a bit boring. Anyway, that side is progressing similarly, and this side is set to be peaceful without any incidents for 10 years¡­ Should I go check out some other universes for a change? I¡¯ve created plenty anyway, and if I don¡¯t like any of them, I can always make one from scratch myself. Oh, this one¡¯s not bad. It¡¯s a tower climbing story. To be precise, it¡¯s a world where people are kidnapped into an otherworldly tower and made to climb it. Each floor has trials, and as they break through and climb up, they become stronger and challenge the next floor¡­ that kind of feel. Since they can¡¯t return to their original world until they clear the entire tower, people strive desperately to clear the tower and return to their original world. ? Of course, that¡¯s not all. When they clear the tower and reach the very top, a reward awaits that can grant any wish. Some climb the tower for that purpose. Of course, among them, there are those who hit their limits and stop climbing, or those who don¡¯t climb because they¡¯re afraid to die¡­ they become what¡¯s known as ¡®Tower Residents¡¯. They make a living on certain floors of the tower, trading with those who periodically enter the tower using a currency they¡¯ve created among themselves. It¡¯s been about 20 years since it started. Should I take a look at this? It seems like it could be quite interesting. Well then, shall we select a protagonist this time too? This time, I want to move away from Yujin a bit. # [Next news. Another disappearance case that¡¯s causing a global sensation has occurred. This time, about 30 cases have been reported worldwide, and the current scale of damage is¡­] The news about the disappearance cases flows from the TV. One might wonder why there¡¯s such a fuss on TV about disappearances which happen all the time, but this isn¡¯t just an ordinary disappearance case. To put it simply¡­ it¡¯s causing an uproar because it¡¯s a disappearance case where people literally vanish. Sear?h the novel(F~)ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. You might think that disappearance cases are always about people vanishing, but¡­ This is a bit different. [ ¡­As you can see in the video, a man who was walking normally suddenly disappears. He vanished without any warning signs. Surprisingly, this video is not a composite or manipulation, but actual footage. ] The video plays. A white man walking calmly on the street suddenly vanishes without any warning. He literally disappears. As if, God himself is actually abducting people. [Currently, about 16 cases have been confirmed in Korea, and the number of confirmed cases worldwide has exceeded 5,000. Particularly, the authorities in China and the United States, where the damage is significant, have stated that they will thoroughly investigate the incident. Regarding this¡­] Beep©¤ The man watching TV, Lee Hyunsoo, turned it off with an indifferent expression. ¡°So what? It has nothing to do with me.¡± He had no interest in the disappearance cases causing a global uproar. He thought it had nothing to do with him anyway. ¡°Fuck, I just want to disappear somewhere too. What¡¯s the point of living in this shitty world.¡± Saying that, Hyunsoo stares blankly at the ceiling of his shabby studio apartment. At the young age of 20, he had made a name for himself as a prodigy in kendo, but after an accident that severely injured his shoulder, he was forced to retire suddenly. After about 2 years of rehabilitation, he recovered enough to manage daily life, but a huge gap had formed in the meantime. Moreover, he had to decide to retire because the doctor said that if he got injured again, even daily life would be impossible. Since the only thing he knew how to do at that age was wielding a sword, he had been living a bottom-tier life for 5 years after retirement, moving from one part-time job to another. ¡®Rather than living like this, I¡¯d rather just disappear.¡¯ As he was thinking that and letting out a deep sigh¡­ [ You have been chosen by the Tower. ] ¡°¡­Huh?¡± Suddenly, a strange notification-like thing appeared in front of his eyes, and his body vanished from the studio apartment. # Pop©¤! When Lee Hyunsoo, who had disappeared, opened his eyes, he found himself on a cold stone floor. ¡°What? Where am I?¡± His confusion didn¡¯t last long. Soon, something like a notification window appeared before his eyes. [ Congratulations. You have been chosen by the Tower. Climb to the top of the Tower and fulfill your wish. ] ¡°W-what does this mean?¡± Climb the Tower? What¡¯s this all about, all of a sudden? As if in a scene straight out of a novel, Hyunsoo looked around in confusion. It was a massive dome surrounded by hard stone floors and what seemed like artificially created cave walls. It felt like a Colosseum made of stone, he thought. That¡¯s what he thought. As he was thinking this, another notification window appeared before Hyunsoo. [ This is a tutorial to explain the Tower to you. Would you like to proceed? ] [ Note: You may die during the tutorial, so please make sure you¡¯re fully prepared before choosing. ] [ YES / NO ] The brutal phrase about possibly dying made it impossible for him to focus on anything, let alone the tutorial. ¡°W-what is this! Send me back home! Shit, what the hell is going on?!¡± Hyunsoo shouted angrily. He thought that whoever had kidnapped him must be listening or watching. Not wanting to die, he screamed for help. But there was no response. After 20 minutes passed like this. ¡°¡­Shit.¡± Hyunsoo realized that all he could do¡­ was to select the semi-transparent options in front of him and proceed with the potentially fatal tutorial. ¡®Why is this¡­ Is it a dream? It must be a dream, right? No, it¡¯s not a dream.¡¯ He was confused. Why had this happened to him? Could it be related to the disappearance cases happening worldwide? Was it because he had wished to disappear from the world rather than live like this? All sorts of thoughts swirled in his mind. ¡°Haaah¡­¡± With trembling hands, he finally decided to select YES and proceed with the tutorial. [ Starting the tutorial. ] [ First, let me explain about the Tower. ] This Tower exists in a dimension completely different from Earth, and you cannot return to your original world until you reach the very top of the Tower. Each floor of the Tower has trials waiting, and you could lose your life in these trials. However, if you manage to climb all the way to the top of the Tower, you¡¯ll be able to return to your original world and have any wish granted. ¡®A wish¡­ huh.¡¯ Of course, even without that, he had to climb this Tower anyway. Whatever the reward, whatever it might be, the result was the same. [ Now that the explanation is over, we will proceed with the selection of weapon to overcome the upcoming trials. ] [ Please select the weapon you wish to use. ] ¡°W-weapon?¡± That word implied there would be fighting. Could it be that these trials were related to combat? As he was thinking this, options appeared before his eyes. The categories were weapons and armor. For armor, there was cloth, leather, light armor, and heavy armor. Just these four types. As for weapons, there were so many types it was hard to count them all. From the most basic swords, bows, and axes to flails, polearms, tridents, bolas, and so on. There were even weapons that seemed unlikely to be used. ¡®Among these¡­¡¯ Though he didn¡¯t know much about armor, he was certain about his weapon choice. After all, the only thing he could handle was a sword. ¡®But¡­ is this the right choice?¡¯ He didn¡¯t know who or what he¡¯d be fighting against. Was it right to choose a sword just because he knew how to use it? Shouldn¡¯t he think about this more carefully? Above all, he was worried if he could handle a sword well again after all this time. It had been 7 years since he last held one. He wouldn¡¯t have the same prodigious sword skills as before. ¡®But still.¡¯ Still. He thought about the life he had lived until now. What kind of life had he lived since putting down the sword? A bottom-of-the-barrel life, barely surviving. Both his finances and his spirit were at rock bottom. ¡®That¡¯s right, everything fell apart when I put down the sword. If I pick it up again¡­ this is giving me another chance.¡¯ This is an opportunity. That¡¯s what he thought. If so, he wouldn¡¯t miss this chance. Even if his shoulder gets shattered here and he can never wield a sword again. Even if that leads to his death. He would never regret it. He would face his end with a sword in hand. That¡¯s what he decided. ¡°I¡¯ll take a sword as my weapon.¡± Swoosh©¤ With that, he reached for the sword in the weapon category and grasped the handle of an iron longsword. Chapter 85: Tutorial Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi UniverseThe armor is made of easy-to-move cloth or leather. Among them, I chose leather, thinking that it might have slightly better defense than cloth. [ Your weapon is a sword, and your armor is leather. When you equip the chosen gear, your stats will increase. When you equip other types of gear, you will receive penalties. ] ¡°¡­Stats?¡± At the mention of stats, Lee Hyunsoo tilted his head. When they say stats, do they mean the ones that appear in games and frequently in novels these days? [ Name: Lee Hyunsoo ] [ Weapon: Sword ] [ Armor: Leather ] [ Strength: 10(+2) ] [ Agility: 10(+2) ] [ Stamina: 10(+2) ] [ Magic Power: 10(+2) ] [ Skills ] [ Leather Mastery (Level 1) ] [ When wearing leather armor, all stats increase by 1. When wearing armor of a material other than leather, all stats decrease by 1. ] [ Sword Mastery (Level 1) ] [ When equipped with a sword-type weapon, all stats increase by 1. When equipped with a weapon that is not a sword-type, all stats decrease by 1. ] ¡°Oh¡­¡± As the stat window and skill window really appeared before his eyes, he forgot about being tense and marveled at them curiously. [ Then we will move on to the next step. ] Perhaps there was no need for a special explanation about stats, as the tutorial moved right on to the next part. Well, it didn¡¯t seem to matter anyway. The names of the stats themselves were very familiar and intuitive. Strength would be related to pure muscle power and physical attack power, while agility would be about dexterity and reflexes. Stamina would be about stamina and defense. Lastly, magic power would be used for special skills or casting magic. As for skills, everything was written in the descriptions anyway. [ Next is a mock battle. Be careful. You may lose your life. ] A mock battle. This must be why they said earlier that you could die while going through the tutorial. Most of the trials that appear in the tower would probably be related to combat. So it felt natural to have a life-threatening real battle in the tutorial. Those who would die here would die as soon as they went up anyway. [ Defeat the goblin. ] ¡°Keeeeek!¡± As soon as the tutorial¡¯s guidance ended, a grotesque monster with dull grayish-green skin appeared before his eyes. Its height was around 130cm, looking about the size of an elementary school student. But its nose and ears were grotesquely large and twisted, and its bright yellow eyes were horizontally slit, glistening as they stared at Lee Hyunsoo like prey. Its drooling teeth were sharp triangles, and in its hand was a worn dagger meant to kill humans. A goblin. It was a monster that was always treated as a mere mob in novels and games. But seeing this small monster full of killing intent right before his eyes, trying to kill him, sent chills down his spine. ¡®This is supposed to be a tutorial mob¡­?¡¯ The moment their eyes met, his body trembled as if he had encountered a wild beast. He felt like he couldn¡¯t move. It seemed like he would lose his life to that thing. ¡°Huff, huff¡­¡± His breathing quickened. It¡¯s dangerous. I need to run away. ¡®No.¡¯ Lee Hyunsoo shook his head. He shouldn¡¯t run away here. He must defeat it and move forward. Otherwise, he would lose his life to that small green monster before he could even escape this place. ¡®I have to face it and fight.¡¯ Gritting his teeth, he somehow managed to calm his trembling. Fortunately, the creature was observing him. Perhaps it judged it dangerous to rush in recklessly since he was holding a weapon. He thought it was truly fortunate. As he calmed his mind, he recalled his past memories. Kendo. He had used a real sword before. Just once, when he cut straw for a performance. He remembered that even then, the sword felt much heavier than its actual weight, with the thought that it could kill a person. This time, it was a sword to cut a real life, not straw. It felt even heavier. But he lifted it. ¡®If I don¡¯t kill, I¡¯ll be killed.¡¯ He steeled his resolve. The resolve to take a life. The resolve to face and fight the creature. The trembling stopped. He pointed the sword forward. ¡°Huuuu¡­¡± He steadied his breathing and slowly distributed strength throughout his body. ¡°Kieek?¡± sea??h th§× N?velFire(.)net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. The goblin, seeming to realize something was off, visibly flinched. But then, perhaps thinking that he was still just its prey after all. ¡°Keeeeek!¡± It began to charge with its worn dagger. ¡°Hup¡­!¡± At that moment, Lee Hyunsoo, who had been concentrating all his nerves, advanced towards the charging goblin and swung his sword. Thwack! ¡°Guk!¡± The sword accurately struck the goblin¡¯s head, and with a short death cry, the goblin collapsed to the ground with its head split in half. Splat! Brain matter oozed out of the split head. The sword Lee Hyunsoo held dripped with the goblin¡¯s copious blood and brain matter. ¡°Huff, huff¡­!¡± He had taken a life. There was no guilt or fear about it. Instead, what settled in his heart was relief at having survived. He gasped for breath that had stopped. [ You have completed the mock battle. ] [ You have achieved an accomplishment. ] [ Victorious against the tutorial goblin without being attacked once. ] [ All stats increase by 1. ] [ You have achieved an accomplishment. ] [ Defeated the tutorial goblin with one attack. ] [ Strength stat increases by 2. ] [ You have completed the tutorial and will receive the tutorial reward. ] [ All stats increase by 1. ] [ You permanently acquire the weapon and armor currently equipped. ] [ Tutorial Sword ] [ It¡¯s an ordinary iron sword. ] [ Durability: 50/50 ] [ Special Ability ] [ None ] [ Tutorial Leather Armor Set ] [ It¡¯s an ordinary leather armor. It consists of upper and lower garments and wrist guards. ] [ Durability: 30/30 ] [ Special Ability ] [ None ] [ Name: Lee Hyunsoo ] [ Weapon: Sword ] [ Armor: Leather ] [ Strength: 14(+2) ] [ Agility: 12(+2) ] [ Stamina: 12(+2) ] [ Magic Power: 12(+2) ] ¡°I even got additional rewards.¡± He gained an additional 1 in all stats and 2 in strength stat for achieving the accomplishments. He had only desperately done what he could, yet he received additional rewards. Lee Hyunsoo was able to finish the tutorial in quite a good mood. [ Now the tutorial is complete. You will be teleported to the first floor of the tower shortly. We wish you good luck. ] Now he leaves this dreary stone room and finally enters the first floor. What terrible trials await him there? ¡®Whatever it is, it doesn¡¯t matter. I will definitely survive.¡¯ He had lost kendo and lived a trashy life. Now he grips a sword again, and this time he¡¯s determined to survive and climb the tower. A wish? He¡¯ll think about that as he climbs. Right now, he was more full of vitality than ever before. ¡®Maybe I¡¯m a battle maniac.¡¯ He recalled the past when he lived fiercely competing and fighting while learning swordsmanship. He feels more energetic and motivated now than back then. Perhaps he had chosen the wrong era to be born in. His sword master used to say that if he had been born in the old days, he would have become a great general of the age. He had that much talent, and his fighting spirit and desire for improvement were tremendous. This tower was the perfect place to fulfill that. It even showed numerically how much stronger he was becoming. Lee Hyunsoo was starting to quite like this place. ¡®I wonder what¡¯s waiting next.¡¯ With a mind half expectant and half worried. His body disappeared from the cave room. Whoosh©¤! # The place where he reappeared was in the middle of a forest. A dense forest where the trees were so thick that the surroundings were barely visible. This must be the first floor of the tower. As he was cautiously surveying his surroundings, not knowing what trials awaited him, [ The trial of the first floor has not yet begun as not all participants have gathered. Please wait a moment. ] ¡°Hm?¡± Such a message appeared before his eyes. ¡®Come to think of it, it feels like the surroundings are enclosed by a transparent membrane.¡¯ After seeing that message and thinking about it, he had a strange feeling that there was some kind of barrier around. He moved a bit forward and reached out his hand. Thud©¤ ¡°As I thought, it¡¯s blocked.¡± All around was blocked by transparent walls. It seemed to mean that he should wait here and not leave until everyone had gathered. ¡®Everyone gathering¡­ Come to think of it, didn¡¯t they say that 20-30 disappearances occur simultaneously worldwide?¡¯ About 30 disappearances occur periodically. Perhaps all of them had to go through the same tutorial as him and wait until they reached the first floor. ¡®Then it shouldn¡¯t take long.¡¯ After all, the tutorial was just listening to explanations and fighting a goblin. He thought it wouldn¡¯t take that long. However, an hour passed after that. ¡°¡­What¡¯s going on? Why hasn¡¯t it started yet?¡± Lee Hyunsoo was dumbfounded. What kind of explanation could possibly take this long? Or were they fighting goblins for over an hour? ¡®Is most of the time spent on people unable to decide what to do and just pondering?¡¯ Ordinary people would naturally spend a long time deliberating when told their lives were at stake. He understood that. But waiting without doing anything was unbearably boring. ¡®Kendo.¡¯ During that time, he tries to focus for a moment, recalling the kendo he had learned before. A 7-year gap. But the head strike he had used when fighting the goblin came from a level of concentration that more than made up for that long gap. ¡®But it¡¯s not enough.¡¯ Considering it was a real sword, if it had been in the past, he could have moved more sharply and quickly. ¡®I¡¯m still lacking. I need to get back to my peak form to have any chance.¡¯ Thinking this, he spent a moment trying to raise his concentration. [ All participants have gathered. ] [ The trial for the 25th round of selected individuals will now begin. ] At last, the bell of commencement rang. Chapter 86: Trial of the First Floor Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi UniverseAs the trial began, the transparent wall disappeared. Now, they could enter the forest. And at the same time, the clear condition for the first floor appeared. [ 1st Floor Clear Condition: Defeat the Goblin Shaman existing in the forest. ] [ Note: It will only be recognized as a kill if you deliver the final blow. ] The clear condition was to defeat the Goblin Shaman. As the name suggests, it was clear that this was a goblin that used magic, or rather, sorcery. ¡®A Goblin Shaman, huh. Will it appear if I search the forest? Or is it in a specific location that I need to find¡­.¡¯ Lee Hyunsoo didn¡¯t move rashly at first, organizing his thoughts on the spot. ¡®The fact that I waited for people to come means that there are other people in this forest.¡¯ It¡¯s only recognized as a kill if you deliver the final blow. This part probably means that even if you hide and only aim for the last hit, it will be acknowledged. He thought he should consider the possibility of aiming for this from the start, hiding after discovering the Goblin Shaman. ¡®This is a competition. Who knows how many Goblin Shamans there are. If we can¡¯t defeat them, we might be eliminated from the first floor and die.¡¯ Maybe there¡¯s only one, so only one person can clear it. But what if this Goblin Shaman is stronger than expected? What if there are so many goblins that people need to cooperate to fight? ¡®When I meet people, should I compete or cooperate?¡¯ He was torn about which choice to make. ¡®Let¡¯s think about that when we encounter people. There¡¯s no point in just standing here.¡¯ With that, he moves forward. And not long after. ¡°Keeeeek!¡± ¡°¡­!!¡± He encountered a group of goblins. There were a total of 3 goblins. Swoosh©¤! ¡°Kieeeeek!¡± Fortunately, there didn¡¯t seem to be much difference in specs compared to the tutorial goblins. He killed one by slicing its body in a single breath. Slash! Then he quickly dealt with the others, and the battle was over. ¡°Phew¡­ Indeed, the first time is hard, but it gets easier after that.¡± In fact, goblins themselves are weak. It¡¯s just a matter of whether you can cut down a life similar to a human walking on two legs or not. Even an ordinary person with a sword could easily defeat about 3 of them. For Lee Hyunsoo, once called a sword genius, it was naturally much easier to win, even if he had picked up a sword after 7 years. ¡°Hm? Something dropped.¡± After the battle, Hyunsoo noticed something near the goblin corpses and picked it up. [ Goblin Essence ] [ Can be synthesized into a Powerful Goblin Essence by collecting 10. ] ¡°¡­Synthesis?¡± So something happens when you synthesize 10 of them. Not sure what it means, but since he¡¯d collect them anyway while defeating goblins, he picked up all 3 and put them in his pocket. A moment later. [ You have synthesized 10 Goblin Essences to create a Powerful Goblin Essence. ] [ Powerful Goblin Essence ] [ Increases 1 random stat when used. (Max 15) ] [ When possessed, guides to the location of the nearest Goblin Shaman. ] ¡°I see. So I can increase my stats with this, and then after that, I should find and defeat the Goblin Shaman.¡± Hyunsoo nodded, immediately understanding the structure of the first floor trial. Holding the powerful essence, he could faintly see something like a navigation arrow pointing somewhere. It probably means he can meet the Goblin Shaman if he goes in the direction it¡¯s pointing. ¡®Come to think of it, it says the nearest shaman. Are there multiple?¡¯ If so, it seemed that cooperating when encountering people might not be a bad method. Of course, the catch was that he hadn¡¯t met a single person so far. ¡®Let¡¯s start by increasing my stats.¡¯ There¡¯s no need to rush if there are multiple shamans and he¡¯s even given guidance. It seemed best to increase all the stats he could before going. ¡®With things like this, you should maximize them when you can.¡¯ # That¡¯s what he thought. Until just a moment ago. [ Goblin Shaman ] ¡°Keeeeek!¡± ¡°Oh shit.¡± While hunting goblins to farm essences, he finally encountered it. He had only managed to kill about 30 so far and raised only 3 stats, but suddenly he was face to face with the boss. ¡®Just my luck.¡¯ The fact that stats could be raised up to 15 meant that was the recommended level for fighting the Goblin Shaman. But Lee Hyunsoo¡¯s current stats were¡­. [ Name: Lee Hyunsoo ] [ Weapon: Sword ] [ Armor: Leather ] [ Strength: 14(+2) ] [ Agility: 13(+2) ] [ Stamina: 14(+2) ] [ Magic Power: 12(+2) ] S§×arch* The N?vel?ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. His stats had risen a bit more from farming essences, and he had quite a few stats increased from the tutorial earlier, so the numbers were high, but still, none had reached 15 yet. ? But there was no choice. If he encountered it, he had to fight. ¡®First, I¡¯ll deal with the surrounding goblins.¡¯ There were 4 goblins. Not a particularly difficult number. Of course, it was worrying not knowing what the Goblin Shaman would do from behind. ¡°Keeek! Kieek!¡± [ You are afflicted with the Slow status effect. ] [ Agility decreases by 2. ] ¡®Oh shit!¡¯ No sooner had the thought finished than the Goblin Shaman was already doing something. And right after that, 4 goblins rushed at him. ¡®It¡¯s okay. If it were strength, it¡¯d be a problem, but agility I can still manage.¡¯ It wasn¡¯t that his physical strength had decreased, but his reaction speed. As long as he had the strength, he could deal with them in one blow, so there was no difficulty. ¡°Huaaah!¡± Swoosh! Slash! Slice! He sliced the necks of two charging goblins. Thanks to his increased stats and the experience he had gained, his peak form was returning, allowing him to cut them down very cleanly. ¡®Next¡­!¡¯ Just as he was about to cut down the remaining goblins with a follow-up attack. Whoosh©¤! ¡°Argh! It¡¯s hot!¡± Suddenly, a fireball flew from somewhere and scorched his body. He hurriedly shook his body to shake off the fireball, but as a result, his arm was burned and started to sting. His body stiffened, allowing the goblins¡¯ attacks to land. Thud! His stomach and left shoulder. Fortunately, if you could call it that, they were wielding wooden clubs instead of blades, so he didn¡¯t suffer major injuries. A pain like his bones were about to break washed over him, but it seemed his bones weren¡¯t actually broken. It just ached, but there was no problem moving his body. ¡®Good thing my Stamina increased.¡¯ It must be thanks to the increased Stamina that his body¡¯s defense itself had risen. ¡°Uaaaah!¡± Somehow enduring the pain, he sliced the goblins¡¯ necks. Next was the shaman. ¡°Keeeeek!¡± Without any shield to protect it, he instantly severed the shaman¡¯s neck, killing it on the spot. Ding! [ You have defeated the Goblin Shaman. ] [ You have acquired the Goblin Shaman¡¯s essence. ] [ You have achieved the clear condition for the first floor. ] [ Number of Goblin Shamans defeated: 1 ] With burns and bruises, his body wasn¡¯t in great shape, but he managed to defeat the Goblin Shaman without major injuries. ¡°Phew.¡± Now that the battle was over, it was time to check the rewards. # The essence of the Goblin Shaman, when used, increases one stat and has a maximum of 20, or teleports to the second floor. I set it up as an item that allows you to choose between these two options. Hehehe, this way, given Hyunsoo¡¯s strong desire for improvement, he¡¯ll naturally raise his stats to the maximum of 20 before moving on. Actually, there are up to 100 Goblin Shamans prepared, far more than the number of participants. [ Ah, this is fun. With even a status window, it really feels like I¡¯m making a game. A tower-climbing RPG game. ] I wonder how far Hyunsoo, whom I¡¯ve set as the protagonist this time, will be able to climb. At the current pace, it looks like he¡¯ll easily climb up to about the 20th floor. I¡¯ve set the tower to have a total of 100 floors. Well, most climbers are still unable to surpass the 40th floor, and even the most advanced vanguard is stuck around the 50th floor¡­ I wonder how quickly Hyunsoo will climb? I¡¯m really looking forward to it. Of course, since I¡¯ve set Hyunsoo as the protagonist of this world, I plan to support him diligently so he can reach the 100th floor at the top. He¡¯ll probably make it to the very top no matter what. Hmm, a wish, huh. What wish will he make? To become the richest person in the world? To be able to practice kendo again? To keep the tower¡¯s abilities in the real world? He might even ask to become a god. Whatever he wants, I can grant it all. I am, literally, the omnipotent god of the outside world. I have the power to even recreate the world if he asks for it. Come on, hurry up and climb. Oh protagonist of this world. Hmm, saying it like this makes me sound like an evil mastermind. But it¡¯s not wrong since I created everything, right? Chapter 87: The Truth of the Tower Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi UniverseLee Hyunsoo¡¯s tower climb progressed smoothly. He cleared floors quickly with exceptional skill, barely needing my support. Wow, I guess I have a good eye for people. I picked a character that¡¯s just like a protagonist. He joined the advance team in no time, clearing up to the 50th floor. From that point on, the name Lee Hyunsoo was already widely known throughout the tower. Hyunsoo the Sword Demon. A nickname given to him for his outstanding swordsmanship and his merciless slashing of anyone or anything he considered an enemy, be it human or monster. Hmm, Sword Demon, huh. It¡¯s a bit chuunibyou-esque, but it¡¯s definitely cool. Of course, it¡¯s not like my help was completely unnecessary. As he climbed the tower, there were several times he nearly died, and he faced various crises, both mental and otherwise. Each time, I helped him by appropriately granting skills or providing a bit of assistance to keep him from breaking. Without such help, he might have remained an ordinary person, settling for the 20th floor or dying midway. Well, given Hyunsoo¡¯s personality, as long as he didn¡¯t die, he might have overcome the crises and moved forward again even if he had faltered. [ At this rate, he¡¯ll reach the 100th floor in no time. ] It¡¯s going more smoothly than expected. With my help on top of that, it¡¯s so smooth it¡¯s almost boring. No, it is fun, you know? I like tower climbing stories too. I enjoy content where the protagonist faces trials floor by floor and overcomes them. But how should I put it¡­ I wish there was something more dramatic. [ When he reaches it, we¡¯ll have to grant his wish. What kind of wish do you think he¡¯ll make? ] [ Well¡­ ] Idra is watching with interest from the side. This woman, despite all her talk about precious life forms, seems to be starting to enjoy this too. I guess the fundamental nature of an outer god, driven only by interest and curiosity, doesn¡¯t really change. Speaking of wishes, though. That part is certainly interesting. What kind of wish will Hyunsoo make? If I looked into his heart, I could quickly find out what kind of wish he wants to make right now. But there¡¯s no reason to do that. I don¡¯t want to spoil the ending for myself, and anyway, his current wish might not be the same as the one he¡¯ll make when he reaches the 100th floor. For now, I¡¯ll just watch him desperately climb floor by floor. # 99th floor. Finally, just one step left. How many things have happened until now. He met countless people, and all those people either died or had to be killed by his own hands. They were those who climbed the tower to fulfill their wishes and return to their original world, those who settled in their places out of fear of death, friends, lovers¡­ they were ¡®people¡¯ alive just like him. After facing countless trials and witnessing their deaths, he thought. ¡®Why am I climbing the tower?¡¯ Why? To return to the original world? Because there¡¯s a wish I desperately want to make? At first, it was just a proof of himself. A reenactment of his life living by the sword, and its proof. And he proved it. That his sword is strong. That walking the path of the sword wasn¡¯t wrong. In other words, for him, the concept of a wish was meaningless. Because reaching the top floor of the tower by himself was as good as fulfilling his wish. In front of the portal leading to the 100th floor. Based on the information obtained on the 84th floor, he knows that the top of this tower is the 100th floor. In other words, the end. Standing before the end, Hyunsoo thought. ¡®Why am I climbing the tower? When I reach the 100th floor, what should I do?¡¯ If I return to the original world, what¡¯s waiting for me there? Is it just a rock-bottom life where everything is over again? What wish should I make? To become rich? I¡¯m not sure if money would have such meaning. To let me wield a sword again? He has already seen the end of the sword. It¡¯s meaningless to wish for something that has already been fulfilled. ¡®Why am I climbing the tower? What is the tower? Why does it draw us in and make us like this?¡¯ As he pondered, Hyunsoo arrived at a fundamental question. What exactly is the tower? Why does it exist, and why does it gather people? It was a truth he didn¡¯t necessarily need to know, but nothing else came to mind. ¡°¡­I¡¯ve decided.¡± As if he had made some decision, he nodded and stepped onto the portal leading to the 100th floor. Whoosh©¤ His figure disappeared, and when he reappeared, it was on the long-awaited 100th floor. The top of the tower. The 100th floor looked just like the 0th floor, the tutorial floor that existed right before entering the 1st floor. A wide space surrounded by stone walls on all sides. Inside, there was nothing but a bright light shining. ¡®A nostalgic sight.¡¯ He recalled the time when he first entered the 1st floor. Was that already 10 years ago? He was surprised that it took 10 years to climb up to the 100th floor. Perhaps because he had lived so intensely, it felt like not much time had passed. [ Finally, someone has reached this place. ] As he was slightly lost in reminiscence, a voice was heard. A voice that seemed to resonate directly in his head. It wasn¡¯t hard to guess. That this voice belonged to the owner of the tower, the one who created it. [ O first one to reach here, speak your wish. As promised, I shall grant any wish of yours. ] Hearing those words, Hyunsoo paused for a moment, then nodded and spoke. ¡°Right, you said you¡¯d grant any wish. Then¡­¡± He took a deep breath and spoke to the owner of the tower. ¡°I want to know everything about the tower. Why it was created, why it draws us in. What is the identity of the tower and you. Everything.¡± [ ¡­¡­. ] Perhaps it was an unexpected wish, as the owner of the tower didn¡¯t answer immediately. But soon, with a voice full of amusement as if very interested, he asked. [ Kukuku, won¡¯t you regret it? Even if you learn everything? ] A tone as if he would definitely regret it. At those words, Hyunsoo felt a bit uneasy. What could it be? What truth could be hidden in this tower to make him speak like that? It made him even more curious. ¡°I might regret it. I don¡¯t know what I¡¯ll learn, and my mental state might break. But¡­¡± Still, he wanted to know. He couldn¡¯t think of any other wish. [ Huhu, good. Very interesting. I¡¯ll show you the ¡®truth¡¯. ] Swoosh©¤ As he said that, the space turned black. No, should I say black? The expression ¡®colorless¡¯ might be more appropriate. A space that seemed to lack the concept of color. In that empty space, Hyunsoo¡¯s body floated up. ¡®What is this place?¡¯ It¡¯s confusing. Could this be the ¡®outside of the tower¡¯ he had only heard about? That place where no concepts exist, just a gap between dimensions? As he was feeling confused, someone appeared before his eyes. Boom©¤ ¡°?!¡± It was enormous. No other words came to mind to describe it. There were no words to describe it other than that. Bizarre? Horrific? Evil? Awe-inspiring? Terror? S~ea??h the n?vel_Fire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. How could one explain that with any of these? The moment he saw it, a new kind of emotion he had never felt before began to surge. Of course, it was certain that this emotion was not a good one. Ah, just one thing. There was one more thing to express. Red eyes. Enormous and red eyes. The moment he faced them, he felt his head growing hot. ¡®Kuhek¡­! Kheuk!¡¯ He¡¯s suffocating. He wants to scream, but no sound comes out. What could it be? Is this the truth of the tower? Is this the owner of the tower? His thoughts aren¡¯t connecting. It felt bizarre and unfamiliar, as if his consciousness was being jumbled up at random. [ I will show you. The truth. ] The enormous red eyes conveyed the words. And along with the words, it conveyed a certain ¡®fact¡¯. It was. ¡®This can¡¯t be. Why? Why on earth¡­ such a thing¡­¡¯ The truth of this world. The truth of the tower. The owner of the tower, in other words, the creator who made this world. That it was a game-like world created just to fulfill his pleasure. That he was merely a chess piece for his interest, living in this trivial and small world that was created like that. Even the fact that he was arbitrarily designated as the protagonist of this world, and arbitrarily helped to climb up to the 100th floor. ¡°Ah, uah¡­¡± His voice, which had been blocked by the utterly futile and incredible fact, flowed out. Futility, emptiness, despondency. At that emotion settling deep in his heart, tears streamed down his face. The fact that he was such a trivial and small existence. The fact that his life until now was just created and controlled. The fact that all of this was consumed just for a moment of pleasure for that being. It was a truth too horrific and hard to accept. [ How is it? I told you you¡¯d regret it, didn¡¯t I? This is the truth of your world and yourself. ] He couldn¡¯t say anything. Except for glaring at it with resentful eyes. But even that had no meaning. Because to it, this was nothing more than an interesting moment. [ Thanks to you, it was fun at the end. As a special reward for entertaining me, I¡¯ve prevented your mind from collapsing, so be grateful. Ah, and I¡¯ll grant you one more special wish. What wish do you want to make? ] Asking for a wish at this timing? How ironic, Hyunsoo thought. And he answered without any hesitation or delay. ¡°¡­Erase the memories I saw here.¡± [ Alright. I¡¯ll do that. ] As if even that wish pleased him, the owner of the tower seemed to smile slightly. Chapter 88: Reincarnated as a Slave in the Academy Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi UniverseAs per his wish, I erased his memories and sent him back to his original world. As a bonus, I left him with the abilities he gained from the tower, so¡­ well, the rest will unfold on its own. Oh, by the way, that wish was quite unexpected. Who would have thought he¡¯d ask to know the truth of this world? sea??h th§× nov§×lF~ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. Honestly, I thought he¡¯d ask for something like seeing the pinnacle of swordsmanship or something along those lines. I guess it was a good thing he held back his curiosity and avoided spoilers. It¡¯s these little pleasures that make eternal life worth living, don¡¯t you think? [ Well, at least he¡¯ll live happily without his memories. I¡¯m glad it ended on a good note this time. ] It seems even Idra is satisfied this time. Well, it has been quite a while since I interfered outside the SF universe without killing or destroying anything. Speaking of which, you say it ended well this time. It¡¯s a bit disheartening when you talk as if I always do bad things. [ ¡­¡­. ] Well, I mean, I can¡¯t exactly claim innocence with a straight face, but still. B-but there are quite a few cases where things end well, like this tower climbing story! In the SF universe, things have been going pretty well in the long term. Of course, the seeds I¡¯ve planted in Zone Z are starting to sprout, but¡­ once they cross the wall, they¡¯ll grow magnificently! [ Honestly, you¡¯ve got nothing to say for yourself. ] Is that what you¡¯re saying? Well then, I¡¯ve got a plan. [ This time, let¡¯s make it end with an absolute happy ending. No mental breakdowns from learning the truth and having memories erased or anything like that. A perfectly happy ending, you know. ] Now I¡¯m fired up. How dare you challenge me, who still retains memories from my human days! Laughable! Even if it never actually happened and it¡¯s just implanted memories. Well, anyway. Let me show you. What happens when I set my mind to creating a happy ending for a story. First, let¡¯s decide on the setting. What would be good? We¡¯ve done fantasy, hunter stories, tower climbing, apocalypse¡­ What¡¯s left? Wuxia or romance fantasy? Or maybe an academy setting? If we get into specifics, there are plenty of genres. Yeah, let¡¯s go with an academy setting. It¡¯s mostly light-hearted, and bad endings, world truths, or final bosses don¡¯t usually interfere. Just make the protagonist happy and that¡¯s the end of it. Heh, who would have thought I¡¯d end up playing the role of a goddess in an isekai story? Well then, shall we see what I can do? # At the age of 30, with nothing accomplished, just scraping by with part-time jobs ¨C a rock-bottom existence. An orphan with no parents, let alone anything to inherit. There¡¯s no point in talking about my unfortunate background. After all, I¡¯m just one of countless life¡¯s losers. The kind of loser whose only joy in life is reading manga or novels. Today is no different. After finishing work, I returned to my run-down studio apartment and fell asleep while reading a recently completed academy novel. The ending where the protagonist succeeds and lives a happy life. A common ending, indeed. ¡°Boring.¡± ¡­I¡¯m envious. Though I say that, deep down I¡¯m filled with envy. A prosperous and happy life, thriving at the academy, surrounded by girls and countless connections. Something I don¡¯t have. With these thoughts, I slowly drift off to sleep. Hoping that even in my dreams, I could go to such a happy world. ¡­¡­ ¡°Ah, that dream again.¡± I wake up. Sigh, I¡¯ve lost count of how many times I¡¯ve had this dream. It¡¯s been about a year since I came to ¡®this world¡¯. I still often dream of the times when I was in my previous world. Where is this world, you ask? Surprisingly, I¡¯ve been transmigrated into the world of the novel I was reading last in my original world. A novel called ¡®The Academy Headmaster¡¯s Youngest Son¡¯. A story where the protagonist, the son of the academy headmaster¡¯s hidden mistress, enters the academy hiding his identity, eventually sheds his illegitimate status, and achieves great success, completely turning his life around. That¡¯s the world I¡¯ve been transmigrated into. How do I know this? Well, because the place I¡¯m in right now is the academy from that novel. The ¡®National Strath Academy¡¯. I was extremely confused at first, too. It took quite a while to realize this fact. To be honest, at first I hoped that maybe I had transmigrated as the protagonist. But that wasn¡¯t the case. Because I am¡­ ¡°Work time! Everyone to your positions!¡± ¡°To your positions!¡± One of the public slaves, a kind of ¡®government-owned slave¡¯, belonging to the National Academy. ¡°Hey, Number 15! Stop daydreaming and get to your position!¡± ¡°¡­Yes, understood.¡± I don¡¯t even have a name. Number 15. That¡¯s what I¡¯m called here. My age seems to have decreased significantly, probably around 16 or 17 years old. I¡¯m not sure of my exact age. After all, I suddenly transmigrated into this body a year ago. Isn¡¯t it quite tragic? I thought I had a rock-bottom life as an orphan in my previous life, but who would have thought there was an even lower bottom than that? A public slave without even a name, allowed nothing but to work at set times. Well, what can I do? I have to think that this is my fate. At least if I work, I get food and a place to sleep¡­ If there¡¯s one complaint, it¡¯s that I can¡¯t read manga or novels even during break time. There is hope. Based on the year and date I¡¯ve figured out, there¡¯s about a year and a half left until the protagonist¡¯s enrollment. In a year and a half, the protagonist will enroll and work with the crown prince to abolish the public slave system, so everyone working with me is scheduled to be liberated. It¡¯s best to think ahead about what to do from that point on. Sticking with the protagonist would be the best option. That¡¯s probably the easiest way to live comfortably in this world. After all, the protagonist is an incredible person who conquers the academy, becomes friends with the crown prince who later ascends to emperor, and even subdues dragons. I¡¯ve already laid some groundwork. Of course, there are women among the public slaves, and one of them is one of the ¡®heroines¡¯ who becomes the main reason the protagonist moves to abolish the public slave system. I¡¯ve been trying my best to become friends with her. She didn¡¯t open up easily, just like in the original story with the protagonist, but it seems my half-year of effort has paid off, and nowadays we can at least have some conversation. Though it¡¯s only during the short breaks, lunch time, and dinner time we¡¯re given. Even then, I tried my best to approach her and become friends. ¡°Hello, the weather¡¯s nice today, isn¡¯t it?¡± ¡°¡­Number 15.¡± Though matted and dirty from not being able to wash properly, her hair is still a beautiful dark blue color. Unlike the other slaves, her blue eyes haven¡¯t lost their luster. Though now stained black with dirt, the description says she has skin as fair and white as white jade. She¡¯s quite pretty even in her dirty state. At the young age of 16, she looks a bit worn out, having gone through so much hardship. Well, I suppose being a public slave is a bit better off. It¡¯s far better than being sold as a sex slave to a perverted noble or being used as a tool in a brothel. As public slaves, we¡¯re quite thoroughly managed and well cared for. Of course, that¡¯s relative among slaves, and normally we¡¯re strictly monitored to prevent any mischief, and even when we sleep, men and women are separated, so no one has suffered any foul play. With her looks, if she were just called a slave, you¡¯d think she¡¯d be subjected to that kind of thing first. That¡¯s a small relief, at least. ¡°Has Number 47 eaten?¡± ¡°¡­I¡¯ve finished eating.¡± She still doesn¡¯t have a name. Like me, she¡¯s called by a number, 47. Later, the protagonist will give her the name ¡®Erin¡¯, which is more familiar to me, but I have to be careful not to suddenly call her by that name. ¡°So then I did this¡­¡± Most of our conversations consist of me talking one-sidedly, with her just listening. Still, I tried my best. I need to become friends with her so that it¡¯ll be easier to stick with the protagonist after we¡¯re liberated from slavery. Surely that sucker¡­ I mean, that kind protagonist wouldn¡¯t ignore or push me away if I¡¯m friends with the heroine, right? ¡°¡­It¡¯s strange.¡± ¡°Huh? What is?¡± But today is different somehow. She¡¯s spoken up after quite a while. ¡°Everyone¡¯s afraid of me. They say blue eyes are the mark of a demon. But you¡¯re not like that.¡± Ah, right. There was that setting. That¡¯s why she was abandoned by her parents and has lived as a government-owned slave since childhood. It was a setting that appeared so early on that I had completely forgotten about it. Come to think of it, wasn¡¯t the reason she developed feelings for the protagonist because he said her blue eyes were pretty? ¡°They¡¯re not scary at all.¡± If I say they¡¯re pretty, it would be like stealing the protagonist¡¯s line, so I just give a vague response. She seems to like that quite a bit, as Erin¡­ no, Number 47 smiles slightly and bows her head deeply. That sight is quite cute. Damn, you protagonist. I¡¯m envious. Chapter 89: The One Blessed by God Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi UniverseEnvy aside, I¡¯ve managed to get on Erin¡¯s good side, which should improve my chances of securing a better future. Surely, being friends with the heroine means I won¡¯t be callously thrown into the cold, harsh society. If possible, I¡¯d like to get closer to other characters too, like the senior student who¡¯s another heroine, or the teacher who¡¯s friendly with the protagonist. But as a public slave, it¡¯s difficult to even get near them. As I was living each day, trying my best to become friends with Erin, one day¡­ [ At 17 years old, your latent potential awakens. ] [ One Blessed by God ] [ All ability growth tripled ] [ All skill proficiency growth tripled ] [ Abilities ] [ Strength: 10 ] [ Agility: 10 ] [ Stamina: 10 ] [ Magic: 10 ] ¡°¡­?!¡± As I lay down to sleep after finishing my daily tasks, suddenly game-like notification windows appeared before my eyes. W-what? What¡¯s going on all of a sudden? I was greatly surprised by this sudden event, but I couldn¡¯t make a loud noise since other slaves were sleeping around me and the guard was watching. Thanks to that, I was able to calm down quickly and carefully assess the current situation. So, it¡¯s past midnight, my 17th birthday, and at this point, I¡¯ve awakened some kind of special ability? One Blessed by God, huh¡­ Ability and skill proficiency growth tripled? But wait, what¡¯s with these sudden abilities and skills? Was this a world with status windows and such? No, it wasn¡¯t. I read the entire story to its conclusion, and nothing like this existed. Then what is this? A hallucination? Or someone¡¯s magic? Or maybe¡­ a special privilege granted to me, the one who¡¯s possessed this body? Right, let¡¯s think positively. I¡¯m a slave anyway. Until the protagonist liberates me, I¡¯m destined to stay here and just keep working. Even if I escape that fate, what awaits me is just the bitter taste of this cold fantasy society. Things can¡¯t get much worse than this. At worst, I might die a bit earlier. So I decided to think of it in a good way. This is a special privilege granted by God to me, the one who¡¯s possessed this body. Perhaps it¡¯s been given in the form of a status window, suitable for me as a modern person. It¡¯s certainly easy to see and nice. If that¡¯s the case, I need to check it out in more detail. Even if the abilities are as they appear, I felt I needed to observe the effects of that passive skill, ¡°One Blessed by God,¡± more closely. ¡°Hey you! What are you doing not sleeping?¡± ¡°I¡¯m sorry.¡± Just then, the guard suddenly yelled at me. For now, since there¡¯s no way to check, let¡¯s just go to sleep. S§×arch* The n?vel_Fire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. I have plenty of time anyway. Let¡¯s check it out slowly. # The next day, I immediately understood the ability of the passive skill while working. [ You have achieved a certain level of proficiency and acquired a skill. ] [ Pickaxe (Level 1) ] [ Increases proficiency in handling pickaxes. Increases pickaxe attack power. ] While preparing the ground for developing a training area, I instantly acquired a skill. I hadn¡¯t even been using the pickaxe for a few hours before the skill appeared, and I could immediately see its effectiveness. Clang! Kang! Kang! ¡°Oh, Number 15. The sound is quite different today, isn¡¯t it?¡± The sound of the pickaxe striking was different with and without the skill. My posture seemed more comfortable, and I felt like I was using less stamina. Ooh¡­ So this is what a skill is! It¡¯s a bit sad that the first skill I got after getting a status window is pickaxe wielding, but usually, once you acquire something like this, it¡¯ll come in handy someday. ? You never know. Maybe someday I¡¯ll end up working in a mine. Clang! Kang! As I was excitedly breaking rocks on the ground with my pickaxe, having just acquired the skill. Ding! [ Proficiency increases 3 times due to the effect of One Blessed by God. ] [ You have achieved a certain level of proficiency and your skill level has increased. ] [ Pickaxe (Level 2) ] [ Increases proficiency in handling pickaxes. Increases pickaxe attack power. ] [ As a bonus for skill level increase, Strength increases by 1. ] [ The stat increase is tripled due to the effect of One Blessed by God. ] [ Abilities ] [ Strength: 13 ] [ Agility: 10 ] [ Stamina: 10 ] [ Magic: 10 ] Whoa~! This proficiency increase is insane. And a stat bonus on top of that! Thanks to the One Blessed by God effect, my Strength increased by a whopping 3. Flex! For some reason, I feel like my muscles are tensing up? Clang! Kang! Kang! Of course, that wasn¡¯t just my imagination. The force of my strikes was clearly much stronger than before my Strength increased. The rocks broke much more easily than before, and the muscle strain I felt when swinging was noticeably reduced. Wow¡­ This is fun! ¡°Number 15. That¡¯s enough. Thanks to you, we can finish today¡¯s work quickly.¡± ¡°Ah, yes.¡± I was so excited and working so hard that the supervisor came to stop me. What, it¡¯s over already? Ah, if I could just do a little more, I think I could reach Pickaxe Wielding level 3. As I made a disappointed expression, the supervisor started looking at me like I was some kind of weirdo. Well, I guess even for a slave, someone who enjoys unpaid labor this much would look crazy. Having finished the morning¡¯s work by about 10 o¡¯clock, the ground preparation team was able to take a long break for the first time in a while. ¡°Haha, thanks to Number 15, we get to rest properly for once.¡± ¡°Here, have some water.¡± ¡°Ah, thank you.¡± Since the work finished quickly thanks to me, the other slave workers were very happy and praised me. Hehe, this doesn¡¯t feel too bad either. As I was resting like that, suddenly the supervisor approached me with a hesitant expression. ¡°Number 15. Can I see you for a moment?¡± ¡°Yes?¡± Suddenly asking to see me separately? Could it be that I did such a good job that they want to give me some kind of bonus? Thinking that, I followed him, but what I heard was like a bolt from the blue. ¡°Well, the general manager saw you earlier. There¡¯s talk of moving you to the mining team.¡± ¡°What?!¡± What kind of crazy talk is this? The mining team? If I go there, won¡¯t I be far away from the academy?! No! That can¡¯t happen. If that happens, I¡¯ll be separated from the protagonist¡¯s group, and naturally, my liberation will be delayed, and my future life will become uncertain! I may have gotten good at using a pickaxe, but if I go there, I¡¯ll obviously end up spending the rest of my life as an otherworld miner uncle. That can¡¯t happen. Now that things have come to this, shouldn¡¯t I stick close to the protagonist¡¯s group, learn magic and swordsmanship, become an awesome powerhouse, and fully enjoy this fantasy world? ¡°That, that can¡¯t happen! I like it here!¡± It seems this supervisor doesn¡¯t want to send me, a good worker, to another team either, so I need to show my firm resolve. ¡°I absolutely want to work here, under you, supervisor¡­!¡± ¡°Y-You¡­! Alright, I¡¯ll talk to the higher-ups. You¡¯ll stay at the academy!¡± Great, what a relief! As I was thinking that. ¡°Why? Even though the work in the mining team is harder, if you¡¯re lucky, you might be formally hired by the mining team and escape your slave status.¡± Someone approached me with a puzzled tone. ¡°Huh?! V-Vice Principal?!¡± The person who spoke to me was none other than the second most powerful and capable person in this academy after the principal. It was Vice Principal Erna. With skin so fair and smooth that it belied her 40 years, and beauty so breathtaking it could stop your heart. When I had only read the novel¡¯s description, I didn¡¯t realize, but she truly boasted such incredible beauty that I momentarily forgot to breathe. Wow, she¡¯s 40? Totally doable. That thought came to me involuntarily. Ah, that¡¯s not the issue here. She asked why I¡¯m not going to the mine, right? As she said, the miners will accept even those of slave origin as their team members if they have good skills. Due to the nature of the mining profession, which is extremely demanding, tough, and severely understaffed, even the state acknowledges this and sometimes grants freedom to slaves on the condition that they never leave the mining profession, if there¡¯s a petition from the mining team. In other words, it means you can escape your slave status, albeit in a limited way. It means you can proudly hold the profession of a miner and receive all the rights of an ordinary citizen. That¡¯s why going to the mining team was like a life goal for other slaves. That¡¯s probably why the supervisor earlier was so moved when I said I didn¡¯t want to go. Ah, but what should I say? I can¡¯t tell the truth that I¡¯m not going because there¡¯s a possibility that the protagonist will soon free me and help me rebuild my life. ¡°¡­I enjoy watching the students at this academy. Unlike me, they have outstanding talents and potential, living with bright futures ahead of them. Just watching them makes me happy. I want to continue observing them here.¡± Oh shit¡­ I made something up for now, but it really sounds strange. What am I talking about watching them? I¡¯m just a slave. ¡°Hmm¡­¡± But it seems to have pleased the Vice Principal, as she nodded with a slight smile before leaving. ¡°Hehe, interesting. I¡¯ll see you around.¡± ¡°¡­?¡± She left with those somewhat meaningful words. Chapter 90: Protagonist Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi UniverseThe one blessed by the gods, huh. Even I think it¡¯s a laughable title. Especially when you consider what happened to those who received my blessings before. Well, this time I¡¯m planning to make it a perfect happy ending. In a way, you could say this time they¡¯re truly receiving my blessing. Although he starts as a slave, he has incredible talent. He¡¯ll quickly shed his slave status and become an extraordinary talent surpassing the protagonist in no time. That¡¯s why I arranged for him to meet the a teacher in the first place. The teacher has a special ability to sense the potential of others to some extent. This is something that appears in the novel that No. 15 read within this world setting. He probably knows about it too. Anyway, using that ability, she recognizes No. 15¡¯s immense potential and, despite his slave status, allows him to study magic and swordsmanship at the academy. Of course, he¡¯s still a slave, so he does labor until evening and then secretly goes to the teacher for lessons at night. After some time, the teacher completes various procedures to transfer No. 15 as her own slave. And then she orders him to attend the academy. [ What? But I¡¯m a slave¡­? ] [ There¡¯s no rule that slaves can¡¯t enroll in the academy. It¡¯s just that no one ever enrolls them. ] Instead, No. 15 expressed his intention to train and enroll next year, saying he¡¯s too weak now. He must be planning to enroll together with the novel¡¯s protagonist. Well, we could just dissolve the slave contract and free No. 15 from his slave status, and everything would be fine¡­ but that would leave the story without identity or excitement. So I¡¯ve added a twist where the teacher, in a somewhat villainous way, tries to cultivate No. 15 to make him her own. Of course, it¡¯s not something as extreme as grooming him to steal the academy headmaster¡¯s position or dreaming of world domination. She¡¯s not married and obviously has no children. Despite having abilities second only to the headmaster, she doesn¡¯t even have a single disciple. Because of her ability to see potential, she couldn¡¯t find anyone with potential that satisfied her. So she wants to take No. 15, who has tremendous potential, as her disciple, and keeps him bound as a slave in case he might try to leave her¡­ That¡¯s the setting I¡¯ve come up with. It might seem a bit forced, but what do you think? As long as it¡¯s entertaining, it¡¯s fine. Anyway, that¡¯s how No. 15 gets a new name, ¡®Dane¡¯, and experiences various things as the teacher¡¯s slave. If this world setting were a novel and an adult one at that, it would have described in detail all sorts of things happening with the teacher, who, despite being 40, has a much younger and more beautiful appearance than most people in their 20s. Ahem! Well, anyway. A year passes like that. Finally, the day the novel¡¯s protagonist enrolls. [ Dane, you¡¯ve become strong. ] [ Well, yes. I¡¯ve been training hard for a year. ] Dane has become surprisingly strong. [ One Blessed by the Gods ] [ All ability growth tripled ] [ All skill proficiency growth tripled ] [ Abilities ] [ Strength: 220 ] [ Agility: 214 ] [ Stamina: 211 ] [ Magic: 196 ] [ Pickaxe Skill (Level 2) ] [ Increases proficiency in handling pickaxes. Increases pickaxe attack power. ] [ Swordsmanship (Level 7) ] [ Increases proficiency in handling swords. Increases sword attack power. ] [ Magic Control (Level 9) ] [ Increases proficiency in controlling Magic. Increases magic attack power. ] [ Level 3 ¨C Can use low-level magic. ] [ Level 7 ¨C Can use mid-level magic. ] [ Elemental Affinity (Level 6) ] S§×arch* The n?vel_Fire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. [ Increases sensitivity to various elements. Increases resistance and affinity. ] [ Currently attuned elements: Fire, Water, Earth ] His abilities have surpassed an average of 200. Just in terms of physical abilities, he¡¯s on par with a decent apprentice knight, and his magic rivals that of an active mid-level mage. The same goes for his skills. His swordsmanship is about to reach level 10, which allows for Aura use, and his magic has already reached a certain proficiency in mid-level spells. Since he primarily learned magic under the teacher, his growth in magic was a bit more pronounced. He can already handle three elements: water, fire, and earth. If you include wind, it¡¯s fair to say he¡¯s attuned to all four major elements. The teacher can only use those three elements, but Dane can learn not only wind but also other non-mainstream elements. In history, only one legendary magician, known as the strongest elementalist, was attuned to all four major elements, but Dane is beyond that. Well, of course, he is blessed by the gods after all. Of course, the teacher doesn¡¯t know this for certain yet. She suspects he might be a monster among monsters who can learn the four elements and beyond, but she¡¯s not completely sure yet. Well, that¡¯s understandable. Honestly, who would think that someone they brought in for their good potential would surpass them and even exceed the strongest magician in history with such unbelievable talent? Moreover, his swordsmanship proficiency is increasing at an incredible rate, and she thinks he might reach the level of an Aura user in just a few more years of training. A genius in both magic and swordsmanship? Honestly, if I were in the teacher¡¯s position, I¡¯d find it hard to believe and accept too. Anyway, Dane, who has already far surpassed the level of academy students, is waiting for the day to enroll along with the novel¡¯s protagonist. Hehehe, I¡¯ve prepared a little gift, so look forward to it. # What is this? What on earth is this? ¡°So you¡¯re the special admission student. Nice to meet you, I¡¯m Ellen, the top-ranking freshman.¡± The being in front of me introduced herself. Top-ranking freshman Ellen. That¡¯s right, the novel¡¯s protagonist. Born with incredible talent, Ellen, despite being the headmaster¡¯s hidden child, achieves the remarkable feat of entElleng as the top-ranking freshman. I know that as the top-ranking freshman, she¡¯s supposed to give the freshman representative oath and start with tremendous attention. She¡¯s certainly the top-ranking freshman, and that brilliant golden hair and red eyes resembling the headmaster are correct too. Her name is even Ellen. But¡­ but why? ¡°Is there something on my face?¡± ¡°Ah, no. It¡¯s not that¡­¡± Why is she a woman? And why is she pretty? TS? Or did something twist when I possessed this body? I¡¯m confused. What is this? Am I seeing things wrong right now? Or did the protagonist Ellen fail to enroll due to some unavoidable circumstances? Did some other woman with the same name and almost identical appearance coincidentally become the top-ranking freshman? No, that can¡¯t be. It¡¯s more likely that when I possessed this body, some distortion occurred in the world, resulting in the protagonist Ellen becoming a woman. ¡­Well, actually, it¡¯s fine. After all, the story¡¯s protagonist I need to befriend is now a pretty female student. But the problem is, is this the only thing that has changed? If the protagonist¡¯s gender has changed¡­ other elements that make up the main flow of the story could have changed significantly as well. Damn, that shouldn¡¯t happen. The flow I know shouldn¡¯t be destroyed. If it does, the advantages I have as someone who¡¯s possessed a body in this world would be practically nonexistent. ¡°Is something wrong? You look serious.¡± Ellen looks at me with a worried expression. Fortunately, her kind and gentle nature seems to be the same. Maybe it¡¯s because she¡¯s become a woman, but she even seems to have become more gentle. ¡­Or is that just what I want to think? Well, anyway. Worrying and pondElleng now won¡¯t solve anything. Right now, I need to get through this moment where I¡¯m standing next to the top-ranking freshman to take the oath as a special admission student. The teacher promoted and created this special admission that allows even slaves to enroll. And I, recognized for my outstanding talent, passed the special admission and became a symbol as the first slave student, set to take the representative oath alongside the top-ranking freshman. It¡¯s clearly the teacher¡¯s evil plan to put me in the spotlight. Ugh, that woman¡­ But should I consider it fortunate that thanks to this, I got to meet Ellen so quickly and even got time to talk with her separately? Even though she¡¯s become a woman, the fact that she¡¯s still the top-ranking freshman means she¡¯s undoubtedly the story¡¯s protagonist. So it would be best to get as close to her as possible. ¡°You¡¯re amazing, Ellen. Top-ranking freshman, wow.¡± ¡°Not at all. I heard that if there hadn¡¯t been a special admission, you would have been the top-ranking student, Dane. They say you have incredible talent.¡± ¡°Hahaha, not at all. After all, I¡¯m just a slave.¡± Honestly, right now I might be a bit better since I¡¯ve been training intensively under the teacher for a year, but as the story progresses, it¡¯s obvious that she¡¯ll become stronger than me due to protagonist buffs. There¡¯s nothing to gain by acting superior just because I might be stronger now. ¡°¡­A slave. What a terrible and barbaric system.¡± Her expression frowns at the mention of slavery. Even her frowning face in anger is beautiful. There were descriptions of how incredibly handsome she was when she was a man in the original setting, so I can understand why women were so attracted to her. Honestly, even now, her appearance is dazzling enough to attract any man. The teacher was unbelievably beautiful too, but¡­ this girl has a different kind of charm, you could say. By the way, her extremely negative view of the slave system is the same as before. If things continue like this, she¡¯ll surely become friends with the crown prince and try to abolish the slave system, and I¡¯ll eventually be freed. Of course, even after being freed, I¡¯ll still attend the academy and be with Ellen, the protagonist. ¡­Oh, but then, doesn¡¯t that mean she¡¯ll marry the crown prince? The two of them were supposed to become very close in the original story. For a moment, I felt a choking sensation in my heart, as if something didn¡¯t sit right with me. Chapter 91: Departure Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe sea??h th§× Nov§×l?ire.n(e)t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. Nope~ I changed the crown prince into a princess too~ Hehehe, did you think I¡¯d leave any elements of uncertainty when crafting a story where the protagonist becomes happy? Of course I changed the crown prince into a princess. And the gender-swapped original novel protagonist and the princess immediately joined Dane¡¯s harem. From there, the protagonist grows stronger and more successful, ending up with a massive harem including the princess, the original novel protagonist, the original heroines, and even an original heroine with a psychic connection. Hehehe, it¡¯s perfect. Could there be a happier ending than this? [ How¡¯s that? When I put my mind to it, this level is child¡¯s play. ] [ It¡¯s overflowing with love and happiness. It¡¯s so beautiful! ] Even Idra seems satisfied, her eyes sparkling as she gazes at the happy ending I created. It¡¯s a simple task for me, who still has a human heart. Hehehe. [ ¡­¡­. ] But what¡¯s this strangely empty feeling? Like something important is missing? Ah, that¡¯s it. Interest. It¡¯s not fun. Originally, I created and manipulated other universes purely for my own enjoyment or to satisfy my curiosity. But this time, I crafted a story and setting solely to please a character within the universe. Although it was to show Idra, it feels like I made it without any real purpose? [ Hmm¡­. ] Something doesn¡¯t sit right with me. A boring world created by external influence, how distasteful. Should I just erase it? My body moved the moment I thought it. While Idra was still satisfied and grinning, I quietly erased the world. Swoosh©¤ A universe disappears into nothingness. The beings within probably didn¡¯t even realize they were vanishing. Disappearing as if they never existed in the first place, there¡¯s not even a trace left to understand. Perfect annihilation. Now that this uninteresting world, created not by my will but by external influence, has vanished, I feel somewhat refreshed. Hehe, indeed, it¡¯s best for an Outer God to do as they please. Ah, enough of that. Isn¡¯t it about time to start exploring Zone Z? It¡¯s been roughly 20 years, I think. Well, let¡¯s see how our Yujin and the elves deal with a whopping 670 Zerg races. That¡¯s just the racial value, and if you factor in 20 years of reproduction and evolution speed. It¡¯s enough to push the entire former Galactic Union ruled by the Lubaran race to the brink of extinction. Yujin has settled in and developed, and with the elves joining, their combat power has increased dramatically. After exploring Zone Y, killing the Xenomorph and obtaining its exoskeleton, and acquiring new minerals, how much can the Galactic Union, which has developed much further over 20 years, struggle? ?¨¤??????¨§? It¡¯s quite an exciting prospect. # The discovery of Elftenium led to significant advancements for the Galactic Union. With superior properties to any metal discovered so far, it can be used in almost all applications where metals are employed. It even shows much higher efficiency compared to other metals. The energy loss rate during transmission drops to about 1%, it¡¯s very light so there¡¯s no weight concern even when used in large quantities, and its strength is at the highest level among metals, so there¡¯s no worry about durability. It was truly an indispensable metal for the space industry. Moreover, there were several galaxies in Zone Y where special cosmic radiation produced Elftenium, so with enough time, it could be replenished almost infinitely, allowing for the mining of enormous quantities. ¡®It¡¯s truly like an artificial mineral deliberately created for our use.¡¯ Yujin believed that the discovery of Elftenium was also the work of his main body. How else could a resource so perfectly suited to upgrade themselves be conveniently prepared in Zone Y? This was half right and half wrong. In fact, Elftenium did actually exist in Zone Y. But the quantity was so minute that it could only cover one or two planets. This was because the emission of the special cosmic radiation energy that enables the creation of Elftenium was extremely low. Yujin¡¯s main body, that is, the highest-grade Outer God codenamed ¡®Yad-Tatagg¡¯, had only slightly adjusted that amount. Just enough for the Galactic Union to be able to use plenty of Elftenium. Anyway, thanks to this, they were able to apply Elftenium in numerous places, and now, 20 years later. There were as many as 2,000 existing space motherships with various parts replaced with Elftenium. 30 latest model space motherships and 15,000 combat ships made of 100% Elftenium were completed. This was the result of the technologically advanced races in the Galactic Union coming together to develop the motherships. Originally, if they had invested maximum manpower, they could have built a super-massive fleet of 100,000 ships, but they had to be content with this level as technicians needed to be deployed in other industries and various fields. No, in fact, even this number was enormous for something built over 20 years. For reference, among the Elftenium ships built this time, about 800 motherships and 10,000 combat ships, Along with the existing ships, about 30,000 ships were planning to set out to explore Zone Z. With an average capacity of about 3 million per mothership, A rough calculation shows that over 20 billion personnel would be deployed. This was an absurdly increased number compared to the previous Zone Y exploration. This was due to Yujin¡¯s concerns. ¡®Surely, they must have prepared a fitting trial this time too. Given the Elftenium and the time that has passed, it must be a much stronger race than the previous Xenomorph. Or perhaps they¡¯ve prepared something on the level of an Outer God.¡¯ Whatever it is, it certainly won¡¯t be easy. That¡¯s why they deployed far more personnel than before. On the surface, based on the results of the Zone Y exploration, the goal was to explore Zone Z much faster and more efficiently, and to find new resources. Although there was a crisis with the Xenomorph in Zone Y, there wasn¡¯t much opposition because they had made the historic discovery of Elftenium. After all, even though hundreds of motherships, tens of thousands of spaceships, and billions of people were being deployed, It was a drop in the bucket compared to the full strength of the Galactic Union. During the Zone Y exploration, it was their first attempt, and they didn¡¯t know what risks and returns awaited them, so they had no choice but to deploy personnel very conservatively. But now, having tasted the tremendous innovation of Elftenium, it was a very suitable time to inflate the number of personnel deployed. Anyway, as the personnel were assigned, the departure of the Zone Z exploration force was approaching. Yujin himself took charge as the leader of this expedition. When it was said that he would personally lead the exploration team, there was quite a bit of opposition from the elders, as he was the de facto leader of the Galactic Union and its most important figure. But no one could argue against the fact that Yujin himself was the one who could respond most quickly and decisively if a situation like before were to occur. Honestly, his words were completely correct. ¡°It¡¯s alright. No matter what happens, I will surely succeed and return.¡± Yujin made a bold declaration. This is the work of the main body. Surely, it wouldn¡¯t have prepared a trial that was impossible to overcome. And if they surpassed it, he believed that an even greater reward would surely be prepared. ¡°We¡¯re counting on you, Sir Yujin.¡± Rowy Hendrick took the position of vice-captain. When he was in charge of the Zone Y exploration, his achievements were somewhat ambiguous, so he was appointed as vice-captain this time to establish more definite merits. ¡°Well then, shall we depart?¡± ¡°Yes.¡± Waaah©¤! Amidst the cheers of the Galactic Union people, the Zone Z exploration team finally set out. # Hehehe, I wonder if they can handle the ultra-enhanced Zerg race with that scale of force? Well, since Yujin is participating directly and many elder-level Elves are joining, perhaps we¡¯ll see quite a decent battle? The enhanced Zerg have quite a few giant monsters capable of going toe-to-toe with spaceships, so we might get to see a proper ship-to-ship space war. [ ¡­? ] As I was happily observing the SF universe like that, suddenly I felt someone approaching the original universe in my mind. The original SF universe that exists in the crevice, before replication. As soon as I felt someone approaching there, I immediately left the laboratory and moved to the crevice. Just in case they try to annihilate the universe like Cthugha who approached before. An enormous power. At least a top-tier Outer God. The reason I say ¡®at least¡¯ is because I felt a power far stronger and more intense than top-tier Outer Gods like Ubbo-Sathla or Nyarlathotep. It¡¯s an overwhelming sensation on par with Yog-Sothoth or myself. Could it be, one of the same kind as me? [ I¡¯ve finally found you. Is it you? ] The being I encountered in front of the original universe bubble where I was born was riding a chariot pulled by a horse larger than the universe. It was an incredibly enormous old man. Commonly known as ¡®Nodens¡¯. One of the few Outer Gods who hunts Nyarlathotep¡¯s creations for fun and is friendly to the life forms called the last hope of the world. And among the Outer Gods, described as one of the most powerful beings, an absolute god. And, like me and Yog-Sothoth, a ¡®fragment of Azathoth¡¯. [ I followed your traces to meet you. I knew you¡¯d be here. ] I wonder why that angry-looking old man came looking for me? Chapter 92: Nodens Transformed into Cosmic Horror in a Sci-Fi Universe[ Apologies for the late introduction. My name is Nodens. I am the hope that has descended upon this land to punish the wicked gods. ] [ ¡­. ] Wow, this is quite shocking. It¡¯s the first time I¡¯ve seen an outer god who gives himself a name. And what¡¯s more? Punishing wicked gods? Hope that has descended upon this land? To be able to say such embarrassing things without a hint of shame. With his appearance of an old man with a bushy beard, riding a chariot pulled by horses larger than the universe, his presence is undeniably grand. Certainly, to those of lower rank, his words would sound quite convincing. Well¡­ to me, honestly, he just looks like a senile old man trying to act majestic, but still. But according to the oral tradition, he¡¯s supposed to appear riding a shell pulled by sea creatures. Was that too lowly, so they changed it to majestic horses? [ Ho ho ho. Seeing you speechless, it seems my name has quite startled you. As well it should. To wicked and foolish gods like you, my name is nothing short of a nightmare! ] His booming voice resonates in my head. Really, I can hear just fine without you speaking so loudly. And it¡¯s not that I¡¯m too startled to speak. I¡¯m at a loss for words because what you¡¯re saying is so ridiculous. I mean, isn¡¯t it funny when you think about it? After all, all of this, including that entity called Nodens and even myself, We¡¯re just fragments of Azathoth, mere figments of his dream. We¡¯re insignificant beings that could vanish with a single gesture if he were to have a slight whim. So isn¡¯t it laughable to talk about wicked gods, hope descending upon this land, and nightmares? At least I, once my seed germinates, will somehow manage to climb up to a position equal to Azathoth before I depart. But that old man probably only vaguely recognizes Azathoth¡¯s existence, just like other outer gods. It¡¯s hard to believe he¡¯s one of Azathoth¡¯s largest fragments, like me. I wonder if Yog-Sothoth feels the same way? In the past, I might have been quite intimidated when something like Nodens appeared, but now, no matter what shows up, I just feel indifferent. [ So, what brings you here? ] To my question, Nodens replied with all sorts of posturing: [ As I said, I am the nightmare that punishes wicked gods like you! I shall punish the trash who dare to defy providence, meddle with the universe, and pretend to be creators by making their own worlds! ] Hah, would you look at that. I can see why Nyarlathotep hates this old man so much. If he just destroyed her creations, it wouldn¡¯t be something to get so angry about. It would be annoying, sure, but just to that extent. But her feelings towards Nodens are at the level of hatred. I can see why now. He¡¯s the type Nyarlathotep absolutely despises. The kind that blocks the curiosity she wants to resolve, and prevents her from doing what she wants because he thinks he¡¯s right. He¡¯s the worst opponent for an extreme researcher type like Nyarlathotep. And I don¡¯t particularly like him either. At least Idra tries to persuade you not to do something, rather than taking such extreme actions. She just sticks around and annoys you a bit. But acting like some kind of judge and calling others trash while claiming to punish them is crossing the line. [ What right do you have to stop me? It¡¯s not like there are any set laws for beings like us, unlike for the created beings. ] [ I am the law. You have crossed the line. You have defied providence far too much. ] [ ¡­. ] There¡¯s no reasoning with him. In this case, there¡¯s no choice. [ Don¡¯t say I didn¡¯t warn you. ] I¡¯ll have to teach him a harsh lesson. We¡¯re both immortal anyway. We¡¯ll just fight until one side surrenders. To be honest, it¡¯s my first proper fight between outer gods, so I¡¯m a bit worried, but there¡¯s no helping it. I¡¯ll give him a good thrashing. Just as I thought that, Snap¡ª The world stopped. Nodens, the moving universe bubbles, everything. Everything came to a halt. Only I was moving normally in this frozen world. [ ¡­? ] I was startled for a moment, but then I calmed down as I realized there¡¯s only one being capable of doing this. [ Wait. ] As I thought. It¡¯s Azathoth. His voice was heard. [ What¡¯s going on? ] He suddenly stopped the world and spoke to me. Did something urgent come up? Oh, could it be that the seed inside me is growing faster than expected, so I need to step down sooner than anticipated? I was a bit worried for a moment, but fortunately, that doesn¡¯t seem to be the case. [ Stop. Fight, dangerous. ] Seeing that Nodens and I were about to fight, he came to stop us. Is this like parents breaking up a fight between siblings? [ ¡­Wait. ] After saying that, he came to me in human form as before. I guess he thought this would be more convenient for conversation. I found it more comfortable too, so I changed into Eugene¡¯s form and entered his space. ¡°You must not fight. It¡¯s dangerous.¡± ¡°¡­? What do you mean?¡± Suddenly telling me it¡¯s dangerous and not to fight. Does he mean I would lose? Is an outer god who makes up his own name really that powerful? He doesn¡¯t seem that way to me. He¡¯s about the same as me, or maybe slightly below. As I thought this, Azathoth shook his head. ¡°That¡¯s not it. The danger is to the other side.¡± It seems I had it backwards. But why is it dangerous? Wouldn¡¯t we just scuffle until one side surrenders? As I tilted my head in confusion, Azathoth spoke with an expression that seemed like he was sighing: S~ea??h the nov§×lF~ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. ¡°Have you forgotten? You are like me. You carry the same power as me within you. Do you not understand what this means?¡± ¡°¡­¡­¡± At that moment, I felt a chill run down my spine. Is it because I¡¯m in a human body? Anyway, that¡¯s what those words mean. I¡­ if I wanted to, I could annihilate even outer gods. Just like Azathoth does. Of course, I probably can¡¯t just erase them with a wave of my hand like Azathoth, but it means that if we scuffle and fight, I might accidentally fire an annihilation beam if I don¡¯t control my power properly. Even if it¡¯s a fragment of Azathoth. Wow, so I was about to completely erase a top-tier outer god named Nodens? That¡¯s a bit scary. Is this how it feels when you hand a gun to someone who¡¯s never fired one before? It feels like my hand is trembling, holding a weapon too powerful to handle. ¡°There¡¯s no need to be afraid. It¡¯s only natural.¡± Well, sure, it might be natural for you. Think about it. Even though it¡¯s just implanted memories, I still remember being human until not too long ago. Well, it¡¯s probably been well over a hundred years since then, but anyway. But to have gained the power to annihilate even immortal outer gods, not long after realizing the immense power of an outer god. How could that not be frightening? I can¡¯t help but become cautious, just like when I first realized I was an outer god. Like that time when thousands of people nearly died from mental collapse just from the sound of my voice. ¡°Don¡¯t worry. It¡¯s not that easy to annihilate them, so as long as you don¡¯t overdo it, it¡¯s fine. For now.¡± For now? So later on, I¡¯ll really be able to just erase cracks and top-tier outer gods with a wave of my hand, like Azathoth? Well, I guess becoming an entity on par with Azathoth means that¡¯s entirely possible. What in the world is going on here? In other novels, the protagonist at most uses magic and swings a sword, and that¡¯s where their incredible power ends. Why are the stages I¡¯m skipping so extreme? From a cosmic nobody to a top-tier outer god creating universes, and then to an absolute creator making worlds where those top-tier outer gods roam? ¡°¡­¡­¡± Sigh. Well, whatever. What¡¯s the point in worrying about it? Nothing¡¯s really changing anyway. It¡¯s just that what I¡¯ve been doing¡ªcreating and erasing¡ªhas expanded from the scale of created beings and universes to the scale of outer gods and cracks. What I¡¯m doing is the same. I just need to be a bit more careful, that¡¯s all. ¡°I¡¯ll send that one back. Don¡¯t worry about it.¡± ¡°¡­Alright.¡± By the way, did he come out because he was worried his fragment might be annihilated? Seems like even Azathoth has a bit of a soft side. # After the chaos subsided, I thought I¡¯d take a look at the original universe while I was here, since it had been a while. After all, the storyline had completely diverged from that clone SF universe midway through. Let¡¯s see, when I last checked, wasn¡¯t it the same up until meeting the elves and joining the Galactic Union? In the clone universe, they went on to reorganize the Galactic Union internally and even extended their reach externally. They got their hands on Zone Y, and now they¡¯re setting out for Zone Z. I wonder how the original universe is doing? [ I believe we should now venture outward. ] [ Outward? Do you mean to expand the Galactic Union¡¯s territory? ] Oh ho, this side seems to be flowing in a similar direction as well. But I suppose stories in different universes are bound to unfold differently. [ Isn¡¯t that still too premature? ] [ Indeed. Now that we¡¯ve reorganized the Galactic Union internally, I believe it¡¯s time to focus on strengthening our domestic affairs. ] It seems Eugene¡¯s influence is weaker than expected here, as the elders strongly opposed Eugene¡¯s opinion. I get the feeling things will progress more slowly on this side. How fascinating. There shouldn¡¯t be any major differences up to this point, though. Chapter 93: Psionic Energy Still, how should I put it, even though it¡¯s called the original, I¡¯ve seen the replicated universe so much more that I feel more attached to that side now.This is supposed to be my hometown, you know. Is it because the other side feels like home too, since it¡¯s exactly the same? Well, even if I call it my hometown, the time I spent there was just a fleeting moment. Other than that, I¡¯ve been watching over the replicated universe for decades, so it¡¯s only natural that I¡¯m more familiar with that side. I don¡¯t think I need to pay much attention to this place anymore. I¡¯ll just have to prevent external interference to keep it from collapsing occasionally, and come by once in a while to check how much the progress differs from the replicated universe. Well then, now that I¡¯m done here, shall I return to the original universe? Swoosh©¤ I naturally return to my laboratory. Since the concept of space is meaningless in this world anyway, I can just enter as if opening the door to the next room. [ Oh my, you¡¯ve come back at just the right time. We¡¯ve arrived at Zone Z. ] Idra greeted me with a beautiful smile. It seems she was watching over the SF universe alone. This woman¡­ Could it be that she¡¯s actually enjoying this? I guess she really is an Outer God after all. Anyway, we¡¯ve finally arrived at Zone Z, huh. Some time must have passed since I left and came back, it took quite a while, probably because it¡¯s so far away. [ I¡¯m worried. Don¡¯t you think that species you created is too strong? ] Idra speaks with a concerned tone. She¡¯s probably worried that the elf species she¡¯s taken a liking to might be in danger. Looking at this, she really has changed a lot. She used to nag at me, saying that manipulating life forms like this was unacceptable and that I should stop. Is it because she finds it quite interesting now that she¡¯s actually seeing it happen? Or is it just because she likes the elves? Whatever the reason, I think she¡¯s better than that strange old man called Nodens. At least she doesn¡¯t pick a fight directly, claiming to be hope and threatening to punish us. Well, anyway. Honestly, I¡¯m not that worried. It¡¯s not that my emotions have plummeted to the point where I don¡¯t even worry anymore, but honestly, I wonder if they really can¡¯t handle even this much. ??¦­O?????§§???? Of course, they¡¯ll suffer quite a bit of damage, but by now, these beings are opponents on par with lower-level Outer Gods, so the 670 species isn¡¯t that dangerous to them. You never know. I just scattered those Zerg-like creatures without checking, so they might have evolved beyond imagination and become an enormous threat. From my perspective, that would actually be more interesting. Of course, if I say that, Idra would probably burst into anger again. # ¡°It¡¯s quiet.¡± ¡°Well, that¡¯s how space usually is.¡± Yujin and Lowie Hendrick arrived in Zone Z leading an enormous fleet. They were looking at the quiet space of Zone Z with stern expressions. This was because they knew all too well that in space, quietness was never a sign of peace. ¡®I¡¯d feel more at ease if a space storm hit us or something.¡¯ There were no common gamma-ray bursts, no space magnetic storms. They knew that this was actually a more dangerous sign. The calm before the storm, as they say. It¡¯s always this quiet before something massive strikes. ¡°The data we¡¯ve gathered on Zone Z¡­¡± ¡°Forget it. It¡¯s meaningless to look at it anyway.¡± Yujin stops Lowie Hendrick, who was about to bring up the data on Zone Z. He knows. Whatever his original self had done, any data gathered beforehand would be meaningless. ¡°From here on, it¡¯s completely uncharted territory. Stay sharp.¡± ¡°¡­¡­¡± ¡°¡­¡­¡± At Yujin¡¯s instruction, everyone began to tense up. They all knew what had happened in Zone Y from the reports. It¡¯s true that they had been somewhat relieved and relaxed due to Yujin¡¯s presence. That¡¯s how significant his presence was. But even Yujin himself was tense now. This was certainly not a situation where they could feel at ease. Just as they were thinking this. ¡°Commander, something¡¯s been detected on the sensors.¡± ¡°Life forms? Or an asteroid?¡± ¡°It¡¯s a life energy reaction. Energy level is medium. Scale is also medium. It¡¯s coming from that planet.¡± Life energy was detected on the sensors. It meant that life forms were living somewhere. Yujin tensed up. Could it be that something his original self had planted was already appearing from the start? With a tense heart, he first sent out an unmanned scout to survey the planet¡¯s situation. ¡°¡­¡­¡± Everyone watches the unmanned scout¡¯s screen with tense hearts. If it turns out to be hostile life forms. And if they¡¯re threatening beings like the previous xenomorphs, a battle will break out. There might even be terrifying monsters beyond that. The fear of the unknown. It was the greatest fear for living beings. ¡°Ah.¡± ¡°Phew¡­¡± Fortunately, nothing like that happened. The life forms shown on the unmanned scout¡¯s screen were, thankfully, herbivorous animals peacefully drinking water and grazing on grass on the planet. The species itself didn¡¯t look particularly threatening, and they seemed more like wild animals than a civilization. ¡°They¡¯re not that big, and they look kind of like cows.¡± ¡°They do.¡± They had a similar feel to cows, one of the Terra species¡¯ livestock. Just as they were feeling relieved that these weren¡¯t threatening life forms. Bzzt! ¡°¡­?!¡± ¡°What the?!¡± Suddenly, the signal from the unmanned scout was cut off. ¡°Is there a possibility of communication interference?¡± ¡°No. It¡¯s operating normally. It¡¯s a problem with the unmanned scout itself.¡± ¡°Did it perhaps collide with something?¡± ¡°No way. Even though it¡¯s unmanned, it¡¯s made with the Galactic Alliance¡¯s technology. It¡¯s not clumsy enough to collide with anything.¡± It¡¯s not a communication issue, nor is it a device malfunction. This means that something intentionally took action against the scout. ¡°Report as soon as you figure it out.¡± If it was due to physical impact, it might have been the doing of those cow-like life forms. But the technology isn¡¯t so crude that it couldn¡¯t avoid even that. It may be called unmanned, but it¡¯s a state-of-the-art drone that operates with perfect AI and can handle most threats on its own. ¡°¡­¡­¡± As they waited tensely, the results soon came in. ¡°It¡¯s a localized EMP. We found traces of signal interference near the unmanned scout.¡± ¡°An EMP?¡± That¡¯s impossible. Are those cow-like creatures actually a highly advanced civilization capable of emitting interference waves? No, to begin with, this is an unmanned scout using the latest technology with Elftenium. There¡¯s no way its signal could be cut off by a simple EMP. Just as they were wondering what on earth had happened. Boom! ¡°W-what¡¯s going on suddenly!¡± ¡°What¡¯s happening?!¡± Suddenly, an impact strong enough to shake the massive space mothership occurred, causing the power to flicker on and off repeatedly. It was clear that they were under some kind of attack. ¡°Everyone calm down and deploy the energy shields!¡± ¡°Deploying defensive barriers!¡± Although basic defensive barriers were already in place, this attack had already penetrated through them. They had to use the shields that consumed a lot of energy to deploy. ¡°Have you figured out what kind of attack it was?¡± ¡°Yes. It¡¯s a kind of energy storm. The type of energy¡­ I¡¯m not sure. But it¡¯s taking the form of an incredibly powerful lightning.¡± ¡°Lightning?¡± A new form of energy of unknown origin. It¡¯s taking the form of lightning? Lightning powerful enough to penetrate and shake the defensive barriers of a massive space mothership hundreds of kilometers long, and affect the power of the Elftenium hull? Could such a thing exist in this world? Such doubts arose. Just as they were gritting their teeth in confusion. { It¡¯s possible with psionic energy. } Someone¡¯s voice began to resound in all of their minds. ¡®Psionic energy?¡¯ And upon recognizing the content, Yujin let out a short, exasperated sigh. ¡®So this time, you¡¯ve really brought StarXraft, huh?¡¯ Of course, he understood in less than a second. That this was something his original self had prepared. # [ What the hell? ] I couldn¡¯t help but blurt that out. No, I¡¯m at a loss for words too. I just created a race similar to the Zerg, I didn¡¯t expect the Zerg to be recreated exactly like this. I couldn¡¯t even imagine that a female character, a protagonist-level figure with absolute psychic powers capable of using level 12 psionic energy, would be recreated just like that. I just left it alone, not thinking about it or even looking at it, but to think it would achieve this kind of evolution. Of course, it¡¯s not a female character like in the original, but a grotesque-looking giant monster that has acquired that power. It was an entity on par with their leader, the Transcendent, and one that led the entire race from the front. If the Transcendent is the commander, this one is like a general leading from the very front. Wow, how should I put this? It feels a bit off to give that monster a name like Kerrigan or Queen of Blades. Blade Monster? sea??h th§× Nov§×l?ire.n(e)t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. Anyway, this is really an unexpected outcome. To think a god-tier monster using level 12 psionic energy would actually be created. Now, numbers like 670th race or whatever have lost all meaning. At this rate, you¡¯ll really have to fight for your lives, Yujin and Elf friends, won¡¯t you? Chapter 94: Blade Monster A species created in Zone Z.I roughly refer to them as Zerg, but they named their own species ¡®Warden¡¯. It means ¡®ruler¡¯ in their language, apparently. To think they¡¯d attach the name ¡®ruler¡¯ to their own species name. While it seems quite arrogant, their abilities were certainly worthy of such a claim. Not only are their basic specs higher than the Lubaran race, but considering their continuous evolution and growth, they possess enough power to potentially dominate the universe. And after numerous evolutions, they finally gained the ability to use ¡®psionic energy¡¯, just like the races in StarXraft. They say they¡¯ve acquired the power to manipulate the powerful cosmic magnetic fields drifting in space, but well¡­ let¡¯s just accept it since we¡¯re already in a sci-fi universe, physics be damned. With that, they can create psionic lightning storms, directly transmit their thoughts into others¡¯ minds like the Outer Gods, and apparently do many other things as well. It¡¯s called psionic energy, but it¡¯s easier to think of it as a power that can do pretty much anything you want, like the magic of the Meias race. But now imagine that expanded to a cosmic scale. Wow¡­ I just left them alone, but who would have thought they¡¯d develop such power. Evolution is truly terrifying. In the original Star universe, wasn¡¯t it a concept like superpowers where special individuals were born with the ability to handle this power? Something like being a god if you¡¯re above level 12, that sort of thing. [ My power is godlike. You will die by divine punishment. ] I wonder if that monster, obviously playing the role of Kerrigan, could be considered as having level 12 psionic energy by that standard. Since it¡¯s said to have reached the power of a god. How powerful must it be to penetrate Elftenium, the strongest material in this universe, and affect the ship¡¯s hull? If it weren¡¯t for Eugene¡¯s Galactic Union, and if they hadn¡¯t discovered the new material called Elftenium, the universe would surely have belonged to these beings. ?¨¤??????¨§? [ It seems you¡¯re protecting yourselves with some strange material, but that¡¯s just buying time. ] The Blade Monster once again exerted its tremendous power, which had reached the level of a lower-ranking Outer God. Massive energy moved, and once more, intense lightning struck towards the cosmic mothership and various other vessels. Kwa-zizizik! Pueong! Some of the ships that hadn¡¯t been replaced with Elftenium even had parts exploding off. [ Everyone, get a grip!! Don¡¯t be shaken by talk of gods or whatever. Even if the enemy is an Outer God, our fleet has the power to defeat even that! ] Eugene quickly gives orders, holding together the mental state of those who were becoming confused. [ I authorize the use of neutron cannons. Deploy double shields! Have we identified the type of energy? ] [ Yes, yes! It shows a pattern similar to a cosmic magnetic storm. Although it¡¯s much more powerful¡­ ] [ Then deploy plasma shields strong against magnetic storms. Increase our defense power even a little! ] [ Yes, yes! Understood! ] As the commander issued orders calmly without losing composure, those who had been confused quickly regained their calm. As expected of my avatar. I¡¯m quite proud. After giving those orders, he looked at the vice-commander, Lowie Hendrick, and said, [ Lowie. We¡¯re using the magic amplification device. ] [ ¡­?! ] Lowie Hendrick¡¯s eyes widened in surprise at his words. sea??h th§× ¦ÇovelFire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. The magic amplification device. This is a device developed by the Meias race, elves, and various scientists. As the name suggests, it¡¯s a device that greatly amplifies and emits magical power. For convenience, it¡¯s called a magic amplification device, but it can actually amplify most types of energy. However, since magic is the most efficient, it¡¯s best used for magic amplification as its name implies. But this isn¡¯t just a simple amplification. The output increases by¡­ about 100 times? To that extent. Even I was surprised, I tell you. Of course, it comes with an enormous cost. First, the one emitting magic for amplification will have their magic depleted to the point of near death. With a 100-fold amplification, it¡¯s inevitable that it would drain an enormous amount of magic. Not only that, but this device is, in fact, single-use. Due to its extremely high output, it¡¯s inevitably destroyed after one use. Because of these flaws that make it virtually incomplete, they were going to discard it, saying it was too risky to use in actual combat. But Eugene added it to the mothership¡¯s weapons, feeling it could be used as a secret weapon of last resort. And now he¡¯s going to use it right away? It certainly is that level of threat. Literally an ¡®Outer God-class¡¯ tremendous enemy has appeared. And that¡¯s not even the end of it. Behind it, countless Warden species that have achieved various evolutionary paths are swarming in. Their numbers are at least tens of billions. There are also numerous absurd monsters at the level of A-class giant beasts mixed in, and even the weakest individuals possess combat power equivalent to that of a fairly strong bare-handed elf. Eugene probably doesn¡¯t grasp and prepare for all of this perfectly, but he seems to have recognized that this crisis is serious enough to risk his life. The quicker the judgment, the better. Dragging things out while consuming power and testing the waters is something that only happens in movies or comics. If possible, ending the war quickly with the most powerful single strike is the optimal move. However, there¡¯s a problem. [ It¡¯s too dangerous! Haven¡¯t you heard? The caster will dry up and die from magical power depletion! ] Right, it means the user of the device dies due to the overwhelmingly powerful output. And the person trying to use that device now is none other than Eugene, the leader of the expedition team and the de facto head of the Galactic Union. [ It¡¯s okay. I won¡¯t die. ] I think I know why Eugene has that confidence. It might be because of his enormous magical power that¡¯s incomparable to others, but he probably thinks he won¡¯t die because he¡¯s my avatar. Well¡­ unfortunately, that¡¯s a mistaken belief. No matter how powerful Eugene is, if he¡¯s put in a state where he would die, he has no choice but to die. [ If by any chance I die, you become the leader and guide them. Anyway, if we just get through this one, there won¡¯t be any major threats. ] Oh dear¡­ There¡¯s more than one or two points I want to object to. First of all, if you die, not just the expedition team but the entire Galactic Union will fall into chaos. It¡¯s not the time to be doing something like exploration, you know. And even if we continue to lead the expedition team, Lowie Hendrick doesn¡¯t have the capacity to lead the expedition team. Lastly, you think everything will be fine if we just get through this? Unfortunately, that¡¯s not the case at all. They have beings that are on par with or even superior to that Blade Beast. The existence of the ¡®Transcendent Being¡¯ that controls all Warden is exactly that. We need to figure out how to deal with that too before we can say we¡¯ve completely overcome this crisis. Do you really think that one Blade Beast is the end of it? [ Sigh¡­. ] He pretends to know everything, but in the end, Eugene is just a creation made by me. He¡¯s just an ordinary mortal who can¡¯t see even an inch ahead. He mounted the magic amplification device and used the most destructive magic he could cast. [ Eraser. ] Flash! An incredible disintegration beam that literally erases everything, worthy of being called an eraser, passes by the side of the neutron cannons being fired at the enemies. 100 times the normal Eraser magic. Moreover, the caster of this magic is Eugene, the strongest magician. The destructive power that could erase an entire planet with a single spell has been strengthened 100 times. It was fired precisely at the Blade Beast and the Warden species. { ?! } Recognizing the danger, the Blade Beast immediately moved its body to avoid it. Hmm¡­ at this rate, we might not be able to kill it completely. Eugene even risked his life, but it¡¯s turning out to be a bit disappointing. [ ¡­Ah, damn it. ] Can¡¯t be helped. Maybe I¡¯ll help out just this once. It¡¯s absolutely not because he¡¯s my avatar that I¡¯m giving him special treatment. It¡¯s just that if Eugene retires like this and loses pathetically to the Warden species, it won¡¯t be interesting. Swish©¤ Using my power slightly, I prevented the Blade Beast from moving. { Wh-What?! } The Blade Beast was startled as it suddenly realized its body was caught by something and couldn¡¯t move. { ¡­Are you abandoning us? } And looking up at the universe dejectedly, the Blade Beast speaks. Is it talking to me, the creator? Wait, did these guys know that they were creatures created by me? Hmm¡­ no, it¡¯s not that surprising, is it? It¡¯s not unusual for intelligent life forms to believe they are creations of a god and worship that god. It¡¯s always been that way, but it can¡¯t be said that they¡¯re aware of my existence. Well, anyway, exposed to the Eraser magic like that, the Blade Beast gradually disintegrated and disappeared. It tried its best to endure by creating a barrier with 12th-grade psionic energy, but it couldn¡¯t withstand Eugene¡¯s maximum output magic amplified 100 times. Does this mean that with the help of the amplification device, Eugene can produce output beyond 12th-grade psionic energy? Come to think of it, even in the Star universe, there was psionic energy above 12th grade. Although 12th grade is praised as god-level, that¡¯s just among mortals. The true gods are said to possess 13th or 14th-grade psionic energy. Well, anyway. We¡¯ve won for now. Without the Blade Beast, the others are defenseless. They¡¯re nothing more than prey for the fleet. Chapter 95: Transcendent Being Ah, come to think of it, I should save Yujin too.If left like that, he¡¯ll die. Confident that he wouldn¡¯t die, he¡¯s now dying as a result of using his highest output magic with a 100x mana amplification device. If left alone, he¡¯ll wither away and die from mana depletion. [ S-Sir Yujin!! Are you alright, sir Yujin?! Medic! Medic, quickly, over here! ] Lowie Hendrick shouts frantically, seeing Yujin collapsed and gaunt from mana depletion. At his call, the medic was hurriedly rushing over. Foolish fellow. He overlooked the fact that even though he¡¯s an avatar, he¡¯s now nothing more than a separate, independent mortal. Until now, he hasn¡¯t faced any major crises, and even when he did, he could resolve everything with his own abilities, so he¡¯s fallen into arrogance. Thinking that because he¡¯s the avatar of a top-tier outer god, he won¡¯t die no matter what happens. Believing that no matter what happens, he¡¯s destined to overcome it, and when he does, he¡¯ll be rewarded accordingly. What a foolish thought. Gods, as always, are capricious. They can dispose of anything at any time if they get bored or displeased. Well, I¡¯m saving him because it still seems interesting¡­ So I guess Yujin¡¯s prediction was right so far? Saving his life isn¡¯t a difficult task. I just need to infuse a bit of life force to keep him from dying. Saving the life of one insignificant mortal is such an easy and simple task that I could do it while yawning. Swoosh©¤ [ Ugh¡­ I told him it was dangerous, I warned him so many times¡­! ] As Lowie Hendrick was blaming himself for not stopping Yujin more forcefully, tears streaming down his face. [ Don¡¯t worry, I said¡­ ] Yujin slowly opened his eyes. [ S-Sir Yujin !! ] Lowie Hendrick startled in shock. Of course he would. The person he thought was about to die had just opened his eyes. Moreover, though he doesn¡¯t seem to have any strength, he¡¯s even speaking. Naturally, he can¡¯t help but be surprised. [ I told you. I won¡¯t die. ] In contrast, Yujin seemed unfazed. He exuded a sense of composure, as if he had known all along that this would happen. This guy, he predicted that I wouldn¡¯t lose interest in him yet. He thought that even if he faced a life-threatening situation, I would save him. It couldn¡¯t be a more arrogant thought, but I could understand why he did it. He must have known that if my interest in this world had waned to the point of not saving him, this universe would be doomed anyway. He figured that dying now or having his existence erased later would be the same. It¡¯s a gamble where he has nothing to lose either way. He thought it through. But there¡¯s one thing he overlooked. I saved his life, but I didn¡¯t fully restore his energy and mana. In other words, Yujin will need time to recover. The voyage without him. I wonder what will happen to the fleet? # Although Yujin somehow survived the mana depletion, the enormous amount of mana he consumed was not restored. As a result, the significantly weakened Yujin entered a healing pod for recovery, and it was decided that the temporary command would be taken by the vice-commander, Lowie Hendrick. ?§Ñ?§°??? ¡°Vice-commander. I would like to research the psionic energy from the captured life forms.¡± The first person to rush to him after he assumed temporary command was none other than Lasi, the leader of the elves. She had intended to request Yujin to allow the elven researchers to study psionic energy. However, since Yujin was recuperating, she came to Lowie Hendrick, who had taken temporary command. ¡°The discovery of a new form of energy. Naturally, from the Union¡¯s perspective, we want to uncover and utilize it effectively. Let¡¯s research it together with the Union researchers.¡± ¡°Of course. When we joined the Union, we abandoned the idea of monopolizing research data or progress. After all, everyone¡¯s advancement is the path to becoming stronger.¡± In response to Elder Lowie Hendrick¡¯s words, which seemed to worry about the elves monopolizing the psionic energy research results, Lasi smiled and replied. Realizing that he had spoken as if he was suspicious, Lowie Hendrick shook his head. ¡°I didn¡¯t mean it that way. If I¡¯ve caused a misunderstanding, I apologize.¡± ¡°Not at all. I understand your position as an Union elder.¡± Lasi, also being an Union elder and the representative of the elves, understood his concern. Although the Union has united under Yujin¡¯s name, the power and influence of the elves are steadily growing. Moreover, Yujin is currently absent due to recuperation. It was a situation that could understandably cause worry. ¡°If we can utilize psionic energy that uses cosmic magnetic fields, the Union will be able to develop further. With the Elftenium and Xenomorphs from Zone Y as well¡­ As we progress, the forces opposing the exploration of uncharted territories will disappear.¡± S§×ar?h the NovelFire.net* website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. ¡°I look forward to working with you.¡± Although he spoke of the Union as a whole, in the end, no one could match the elves in terms of technology and intelligence. Almost everything would end up being entrusted to the elves. Knowing this fact, Lasi probably came as a representative to discuss it. Anyway, after assigning the research on psionic energy to the researchers, Lowie Hendrick quickly issued orders. ¡°We¡¯ve almost defeated the enemies! Don¡¯t bother chasing those who are fleeing, just leave them be. Without a leader of the caliber we¡¯ve already killed, they pose no threat anyway.¡± It was an order to leave the fleeing enemies alone and for them to resume their journey towards their designated destination. ¡°Yes, understood!¡± Everyone responded energetically, knowing that in the current situation, Lowie Hendrick¡¯s orders were equivalent to Yujin¡¯s orders and the Union¡¯s commands. # A massive star located at the center of Zone Z. The light and heat it emitted were so faint that at first glance, it almost looked like a giant planet rather than a star. The reason for this was a massive life form perched atop the star. This enormous creature, about one-tenth the size of the star, was absorbing the star¡¯s vast nuclear fusion energy as its own nourishment. It had absorbed so much energy that the light and heat originally emitted by the star had dropped to almost nothing. This life form was none other than the supreme ruler of the ¡®Warden¡¯ race that dominated Zone Z. It was a being known as the ¡®Transcendent¡¯. { ¡­The ¡®Agent¡¯ is dead. } He sensed that the connection with the most powerful being linked to him, the one Yujin called the Blade Monster, the ¡®Agent¡¯, had been severed. The severed connection meant one of two things. Either the Agent had found a way to sever the connection with the Transcendent. In this case, it would be right to consider it a betrayal. But that couldn¡¯t be the case. If so, there would have been some kind of precursor symptoms. Without any of that, it was suddenly cut off during battle. Then, the probability of the second possibility was very high. That the Agent had died in battle. But this was also hard to believe. Because, apart from himself, the Transcendent, the Agent possessed the most powerful physical abilities and psionic energy. He was given the name ¡®Agent¡¯ because he could exert power almost on par with himself. And yet, he had fallen? And so quickly that it was hard to even perceive? { The power of the invaders is beyond what I imagined. } The life forms that had invaded the area they controlled. Invaders who flew through space riding steel vehicles. Their strength was far greater than expected. Enough to instantly defeat the Agent and drive out hundreds of billions of the Warden race. { I need to handle this more carefully. } With that thought, the Transcendent ordered all the Warden race within its reach to return to its nest. All except for those supplying some resources and food. { First, I should start by restoring the Agent. } And he intended to consume some of them to restore the lost Agent. No, more precisely¡­ he intended to create a new Agent. { No matter how many inferior ones there are, it¡¯s useless. Then, should I make a few more? } That wasn¡¯t all. He was planning to create a few more monsters like the Agent, which had posed a significant threat to the Union¡¯s massive fleet and which Yujin had risked his life to defeat. { But if I do that, I¡¯ll lose a lot of power. I¡¯ll need sufficient rest time. } That¡¯s not all. The energy of the star he currently occupied had been largely consumed to create the original Agent that was now gone. In other words, a new energy source was needed. { Oh my, I just told them to gather here¡­ I¡¯ll need to move the nest. } The Transcendent issued a new order to the returning Warden race. To find a new nest with suitable conditions for him to occupy. Receiving this order, the Warden race began to roam the universe in search of stars with sufficient energy. Chapter 96: Psionic Energy Oh, this is getting interesting, isn¡¯t it?The Galactic Union has started researching psionic energy, while the Warden has begun creating multiple elite blade monsters. Certainly, this puts the Warden species at an advantage. After all, they¡¯re creating multiple beings that Yujin had to risk his life to kill. Of course, ¡°multiple¡± probably means three or four at most, but even that is tremendous. Imagine four god-level monsters appearing and attacking simultaneously. If I were Yujin, just the thought of it makes me dizzy. It all depends on how quickly the research on psionic energy progresses. But can they really use it just by doing research? The Warden species was able to use psionic energy by drawing on the cosmic magnetic field because they had evolved themselves in that direction from the start. In other words, it stems from genetic factors. If that¡¯s the case, no matter how much research they do, wouldn¡¯t it be impossible for the Elves or Yujin to use psionic energy? Hmm, I guess this makes things too disadvantageous for the Union. I didn¡¯t expect them to evolve this far. Let¡¯s allow the other side to use psionic energy too. If they¡¯re at the same level 12, the Union side would be too strong, so let¡¯s make it about level 10¡­ Yeah, this much should make for a fair fight. A scenario like ¡°they did some research and found it suits them well, so they can use it¡± should work fine. Then, the period for in-depth research and practice can be covered by the time it takes for the Transcendent Being to create three or four proxies. Okay, good. This should be enough to bring them up to a level where an equal fight is possible. Sheesh, I originally planned to just sit back and watch. Why did they suddenly evolve so brilliantly? If Ubbo-Sathla saw this, he¡¯d go crazy and demand to have it for himself. # ¡°This psionic energy seems to be based on life energy, just like magic. It feels like it draws power by synchronizing life energy with the cosmic magnetic field.¡± ????£Á£Î??§¦???? ¡°¡­My goodness. If it can create energy for that lightning storm, how powerful must the life energy be?¡± ¡°I¡¯m not sure, but¡­ I estimate it might be at a level similar to Lord Yujin¡¯s magical power.¡± ¡°That means it¡¯s an unbelievable monster.¡± Lasi and Lowie Hendrick are discussing psionic energy. As a result of diligent research during the time the Union researchers, including Elves, explored Zone Z, they discovered that it¡¯s an ability to synchronize life energy with the cosmic magnetic field. The Blade Monster used that synchronized magnetic field to create an enormous electromagnetic storm that could threaten the Elftenium mothership. Sear?h the ¦ÇovelFire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. ¡°But if that¡¯s the case, it can¡¯t be used unless one is born with that life energy, right?¡± It¡¯s like magic. Unless you¡¯re born with life energy, you can¡¯t use it. Moreover, since its structure is fundamentally different from magic, even if you have magical life energy, you can¡¯t use it. It was an entirely separate energy from the start. ¡°Well, it seems it¡¯s not entirely impossible.¡± ¡°What?¡± But the answer from Lasi was unexpected. ¡°According to the researchers, it¡¯s been discovered that the energy¡¯s compatibility with magic and other forms of life energy is better than expected.¡± In other words, if one has magic or other forms of life energy, they might be able to use psionic energy somehow. ¡°If that¡¯s the case, perhaps¡­¡± As if knowing what question Lowie Hendrick was about to ask, Lasi nodded. ¡°The test preparations are already complete.¡± They now understood the structure of psionic energy and knew it had good compatibility with other energies. All that remained was to try using it directly. ¡°We have volunteers among the Elves and are extracting the structure. As soon as it¡¯s digitized, we plan to directly inject the information and try using it.¡± They extract and digitize information about the usage and application of psionic energy from the brain of a captured Warden species. Then, by directly injecting that data into those who want to learn, they can master the use of psionic energy without much effort. This was originally a forbidden technology that digitized and transferred memories. However, due to its advantage of being able to quickly and reliably extract completely unknown new forms of energy or technology, Yujin had adopted it limitedly for pioneering research. ¡°Please inform me as soon as the results are out.¡± ¡°Yes, of course.¡± As Lasi left, Lowie Hendrick thought. ¡°Psionic energy, huh.¡± Psionic energy. It¡¯s an incredible ability that can directly manipulate the cosmic magnetic field. An incredible ability that surpasses magic. Of course, it was possible because of the incredibly powerful life energy, but conversely, it also meant that beings with such tremendous life energy could do similar things. ¡®What if Lord Yujin uses it?¡¯ Yujin, the strongest being with the most powerful life energy in the Union. If he acquires psionic energy as well, perhaps even more incredible things than what the Blade Monster did might happen. ¡®Lord Yujin becoming stronger means the Galactic Union becomes stronger too.¡¯ That¡¯s not all. Now that it¡¯s been discovered that psionic energy has good compatibility, beings with other forms of life energy like magic or Elven spirits might all be able to utilize this power. This will once again spark a tremendous energy revolution and greatly advance the Union. ¡®Elftenium in Zone Y, psionic energy in Zone Z.¡¯ As these occurrences increase, Yujin¡¯s opinion to focus on external exploration gains more support. There weren¡¯t that many opponents to begin with, but they weren¡¯t entirely absent either. However, their numbers drastically decreased after the Elftenium discovery. Having found such an excellent new material, they naturally had to keep quiet. But there are still some who are satisfied with this level and want to just observe the situation. This time, even those guys will have to completely shut their mouths. Because we¡¯ve discovered another incredible thing that will spark an energy revolution. Thus, the opinion for external exploration will gain even more support, and Yujin will advance until he gets his hands on the entire universe as planned. Along with the Galactic Union that develops and gains more as it advances. ¡®I¡¯m so glad I followed Lord Yujin. Who would have thought I¡¯d see the Galactic Union grow and strengthen this much.¡¯ It was unbelievable that this was still ongoing. It can expand even more. It can become even stronger. The same goes for Lowie Hendrick himself. From just a magic-using future elder, to someone who can create powerful devices with new materials and exert even more powerful force with new energy. ¡°I should go see Lord Yujin.¡± He couldn¡¯t bear it anymore. Although it was better to minimize external contact as he was recuperating, he wanted to report this matter to Yujin. # ¡°Hmm, I see. Psionic energy.¡± Yujin¡¯s reaction to Lowie Hendrick¡¯s report was calmer than expected. It was as if he already knew about it. ¡°Could it be that you already knew, sir?¡± ¡°Hmm? No, that¡¯s not the case.¡± However, he was certain that he would receive some kind of reward. ¡­Yujin chose not to voice this latter thought. ¡®So this time, the reward is energy.¡¯ An impossibly powerful enemy. The reward obtained by risking his life to defeat it was none other than a new form of life energy. Similar to the magic of the Meias tribe or the light spirits of the Elves. It¡¯s an energy source based on a person¡¯s inherent energy. However, such energies cannot be used without the innate genes. The magic of the Meias tribe is relatively compatible, so anyone with innate talent can manifest magical power, but the light spirits of the Elves are completely different. Because it¡¯s a power directly bestowed by their guardian deity, no one other than the Elven tribe can use that power. In fact, psionic energy was likely to be the same. The compatibility of magic is unique, but life-based energies are often inherited in most cases. However, this time, the compatibility is so good that anyone with strong life energy can learn it without much difficulty. Research results have revealed this. Yujin realized that this was the reward his main body had planted. ¡®Well, I suppose this is worth risking my life for.¡¯ Yujin was very satisfied. Just like Elftenium, psionic energy was also a great reward that could be used very effectively. It was certainly worth risking his life to kill the enemy commander. ¡®Well, I thought I wouldn¡¯t die anyway.¡¯ In any case, he wanted to finish his recovery quickly and learn to use this new power himself. Psionic energy, huh. A psionic storm! How could he contain his excitement, knowing StarXraft? While Yujin was so excited, he probably didn¡¯t know. The reason for giving him the power of psionic energy wasn¡¯t a reward for overcoming the trials of Zone Z, but rather for the incredible trials that were yet to come. Chapter 97: Laboratory ¡°Phew, this much rest should be sufficient.¡±Yujin checked the magical power that had returned to his body, clenching and unclenching his fist. Although he wasn¡¯t fully 100% recovered, it wasn¡¯t to the extent that he had problems moving around. While his magical power itself was absurdly abundant, it also recovered at a faster rate, allowing him to get up even quicker than others. ¡°Alright, then¡­¡± As soon as he got up, he headed straight for the research lab within the mothership. It would have been better to rest a bit more since he had just gotten up from his sickbed, but he couldn¡¯t wait any longer and moved quickly. The reason he got up so fast wasn¡¯t for any other reason, but because he wanted to try out the psionic energy currently being tested in the lab as soon as possible. ¡®If I can just get my hands on that power, I might be able to use the psionic storm that the Blade Monster showed, with my own hands.¡¯ Yujin grinned at the thought of creating a powerful cosmic magnetic storm with his own hands. He could do something similar with magic, but it would consume an enormous amount of magical power. It would be possible to achieve something similar by using a magical amplification device to tremendously increase the output of lightning magic. While magic has good versatility, its power is ultimately limited to the life energy within an individual¡¯s body, making it somewhat lacking in scale. There are magical amplification devices, but using them puts one¡¯s life at risk, so they¡¯re practically nonexistent. In contrast, psionic energy can manipulate the cosmic magnetic field to enormously amplify its power. Although it has fewer methods of utilization compared to magic, there¡¯s no power that can be used more powerfully in space than this. ¡®Psionic storm, psionic storm~¡¯ Sear?h the N?velFire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. ¡°Mr. Yujin?! You shouldn¡¯t be up already!¡± At that moment, someone hurriedly tried to stop Yujin as he was about to leave the treatment room. It was the guard stationed in front of Yujin¡¯s treatment room. Being of Meias descent, he had been earnestly entreated by Lowie Hendrick, an elder of the Meias tribe, to prevent Yujin from wandering around until he was completely fine. However, the time for recovery was still far too short. If Lowie Hendrick were to see Yujin wandering around before fully recovering, his own head would be on the chopping block. ¡°I got up because I¡¯m fine. You don¡¯t need to worry.¡± ¡°Already? There wasn¡¯t enough time. You should rest more¡­¡± ¡°Hmm¡­¡± Seeing the troubled soldier, Yujin chuckled, guessing that Lowie Hendrick must have made an earnest request, and said, ¡°I¡¯ll explain it well to Lowie. Don¡¯t worry.¡± ¡°Pardon?¡± ¡°Well then, I¡¯ll be going.¡± Leaving the bewildered guard behind, Yujin quickly left the place and headed towards the research lab. ¡°M-Mr. Yujin?!¡± He thought he heard the guard calling out urgently from behind, but he deliberately ignored it. # ¡°Mr. Yujin? Is it really alright for you to be up already?¡± Upon arriving at the laboratory, Yujin saw Lasi, one of the Elven elders who held the high position of Director of the Galactic Union Research Institute. ????????¦­?¦¢????? It¡¯s worth noting that she was Rasul¡¯s daughter and was said to be the next leader of the Elven tribe. Taking after her mother Rasul, she had been exceptionally intelligent from a young age and became engrossed in researching cosmic phenomena and numerous aspects of physics and chemistry early on. As a result, she currently held the role of Research Director for the Elven tribe and simultaneously served as the Director of the Galactic Union Research Institute. Naturally, she was also overseeing the current research on psionic energy. ¡°I¡¯ve already heard that question at least 50 times on my way here. I¡¯m fine now. I recover quickly, you know.¡± ¡°I see. Then what brings you here?¡± Seeing Yujin¡¯s slightly exasperated smile, Lasi tilted her head with a gentle smile. Yujin grinned and said, ¡°I¡¯ve heard about the psionic energy research currently being conducted in the lab.¡± ¡°Ah, that! Yes, it¡¯s an incredible energy. Despite causing a highly unique phenomenon that can manipulate the cosmic magnetic field, it¡¯s extremely compatible with various life energies. Even those with magical power or other life energies are currently well-compatible, and if they just master the handling method, they could immediately¡­¡± As soon as she started talking about psionic energy, Lasi¡¯s eyes lit up and she began chattering non-stop. Completely excited, she seemed unaware of how long she had been talking, expounding on the greatness of psionic energy for over 10 minutes. ¡°So¡­ yes, that¡¯s how it is!¡± ¡°I see.¡± Lasi gave Yujin a sparkling look filled with gratitude for listening to her explanation without interruption until the end. Most people, even her mother Rasul, would have interrupted her if she talked this much. ¡®As expected, Mr. Yujin is a good person.¡¯ It was a moment that made one question Lasi¡¯s standards for a good person. Anyway, after hearing everything, Yujin asked with a very interested expression, ¡°So, can that be applied to me right now?¡± ¡°Huh? Right now?¡± Lasi seemed to think for a moment before saying, ¡°We¡¯re still in the experimental stage. We need to observe more about the side effects¡­ Just because it¡¯s compatible doesn¡¯t mean it suits everyone unconditionally.¡± ¡°Is that so.¡± Yujin let out a short sigh, seeming a bit disappointed. Even though it was still in the experimental stage, it would probably suit everyone anyway. Because this power was given as a reward by the main body. There probably wouldn¡¯t be any side effects either. But it didn¡¯t feel right to mention this and insist on skipping the experimental stage. It would be unfair to the researchers, including Lasi, who were enthusiastically and happily conducting their research. ¡°However¡­¡± At that moment, a hopeful statement came from Lasi¡¯s lips. ¡°We¡¯re almost at the final stage, and someone like you, Mr. Yujin, probably wouldn¡¯t be much affected by minor side effects anyway¡­¡± A positive response to the injection of psionic energy. Yujin¡¯s eyes lit up. Lasi, too, wished for more experimental samples. Not mediocre samples, but much larger and more powerful ones like Yujin. ¡°Then may I request it?¡± ¡°Are you sure? There might be side effects we haven¡¯t discovered yet.¡± ¡°If they¡¯re side effects that haven¡¯t been discovered yet, they probably won¡¯t affect me anyway.¡± Yujin volunteered himself as a test subject. He wanted to get his hands on psionic energy and try it out as soon as possible. After all, he didn¡¯t need to worry about side effects or his body rejecting it. It was beneficial for Lasi as well. She had needed a sample with powerful life energy, and to think such a big fish would volunteer himself as a test subject. ¡°Alright. Then let¡¯s go to the lab.¡± ¡°Okay.¡± It was a win-win deal, beneficial for both parties. # Yujin will obtain psionic energy. He might be a bit disappointed. After all, I¡¯ll give him a power slightly weaker than the Blade Monster¡¯s. A 10th grade should still be enough for him to hold his own. ¡­Or should I just remove all limitations? Truly leaving it up to Yujin¡¯s potential. Let¡¯s see how powerful his psionic grade turns out to be. If it¡¯s too strong, we can always adjust the balance later. [ Hmm¡­. ] Come to think of it, since when did I start interfering this much? Originally, I just let them loose and watched them play on their own. It used to feel like I was just watching pieces move on a game board, but now it¡¯s like I¡¯ve become the game developer directly adjusting the board. Hmm, this doesn¡¯t feel right. I want to be the one enjoying the game, not the person creating and adjusting it. Even a hobby becomes less fun when it turns into work. I need to be careful not to let this fun hobby turn into work. If I keep interfering with every little thing, eventually everything will only flow as I¡¯ve dictated, and there¡¯s nothing more boring than that. Right, I¡¯ve decided! From this moment on, I¡¯m hands-off. I¡¯ll just occasionally create and scatter things like the Warden species or xenomorphs. It¡¯s fun to control how things flow sometimes, but it shouldn¡¯t become an obligation. Let¡¯s just leave things be unless it¡¯s absolutely necessary. Well¡­ what can you do. If Yujin dies, he dies. If the Galactic Union falls, it falls. I have plenty of alternatives now anyway. I can play with something else. Thinking this, I watch as Yujin enters the lab and receives the psionic energy injection into his brain. ¡­Hmm, I hope his body doesn¡¯t reject it and he suddenly drops dead. I¡¯m starting to feel a bit uneasy. That would really be the end of it. How would they win without Yujin? No, no. I¡¯ve decided to be tough about this. There¡¯s no reason to be obsessed with the original SF universe anymore anyway. And what¡¯s wrong with a little destruction? If I want to see it again, I can always rewind to before the destruction and watch it again. Mm-hmm, there¡¯s nothing to worry about. Chapter 98: A Disappointing Test ¡°Hmm, so this is psionic energy.¡±Yujin felt the new energy that had settled in his body, separate from his magical power. It¡¯s similar to magical power, but still a bit weak for now. He wondered if he could produce a similar level of power to the blade monster he had seen earlier with this. ¡®Can I grow it further from here?¡¯ Yujin headed to the training room to run some tests. A spacious training ground with walls, ceiling, and floor covered in a 1-meter thick layer of Elftenium, the strongest metal. Here, attacks powerful enough to destroy an average spaceship are possible. ¡°Lightning Storm!¡± Yujin first drew upon his magical power to use a spell similar to the psionic storm. Crash! Lightning struck with tremendous force, scorching the Elftenium black. There were even parts that had slightly melted or been destroyed and fallen off. An attack powerful enough to destroy Elftenium in an instant is truly formidable. But this level is still not enough to make a state-of-the-art space battleship, completely covered in Elftenium, even flinch. ¡®With a magic amplification device, it might be possible, but¡­¡¯ That should be saved as a last resort. Once used, even if you survive, you¡¯d be completely immobilized for about 1-2 weeks. ¡°Alright, next¡­¡± This time, he decided to test the use of the psionic energy injected into his mind. ¡®The basic operation method is the same as magical power.¡¯ The difference, however, is that it needs to be connected to the cosmic magnetic field spread throughout the universe to amplify its power. ¡®This is difficult.¡¯ He managed to move the psionic energy without much difficulty. But perhaps due to the plasma shield surrounding the ship, the influence of the cosmic magnetic field inside was too faint. ¡®Still, there was a gain.¡¯ If there was something he gained, it¡¯s that when he tries to draw upon and use psionic energy, he can see the movement of the cosmic magnetic field. The cosmic magnetic field isn¡¯t just a simple magnetic field. It means he can see the flow of electromagnetic force, one of the four forces spread throughout this universe. This would be good for finding direction when lost in space. It also means being able to predict unseen anomalous space environments in advance. ¡®It¡¯s not just an increase in power. This is an incredible discovery that can accelerate space navigation and cosmic research.¡¯ He wanted to immediately order this power to be injected into all talented personnel, but the research results were still insufficient for that. ¡°Then we¡¯ll have to create them, the research results.¡± Yujin grinned and informed the exploration crew. ¡°Open the hatch. I need to go outside for a moment.¡± He meant to go out into space. # ¡°It¡¯s too dangerous! And what¡¯s this? You just accepted an unverified power?!¡± ¡°There haven¡¯t been any side effects so far. Don¡¯t worry.¡± ¡°They might appear later!¡± Lowie Hendrick shouted angrily, but Yujin paid no attention. He was simply looking forward to going out into space and testing the cosmic magnetic field with his own hands. Like his original self, he too had a personality that greatly enjoyed exploring the unknown. ¡°Don¡¯t worry. I¡¯ll be careful and come back. Just make sure to keep the shields up in case there¡¯s any impact.¡± ¡°¡­Sigh, how can I stop you?¡± In the end, Lowie Hendrick gave up and raised his hands. He knew he couldn¡¯t stop Yujin¡¯s exploratory spirit. So Yujin put on a mana energy space suit that looked like a thin membrane and went out into space. The mana suit, which can essentially recover infinitely as long as magical power is supplied, and its strength varies depending on the wearer¡¯s magical power. ?????????¨°?¨§¡ì Since Yujin was wearing it, there was no need to worry about external impacts as it could be considered to have the defense capability of a decent spaceship. The only concern was the psionic energy. Would he be hurt by the effects of that energy? Lowie Hendrick and the exploration crew watched the space outside with anxious hearts. And then. Flash! There was no sound because it was in space. A silently flashing light. sea??h th§× N??eFire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. But everyone could tell that this light was not ordinary. The tremendous light of cosmic lightning caused by an intense electromagnetic storm. It was a success. Anyone could see it was the psionic storm that the blade monster had shown. ¡°Wow¡­.¡± ¡°That madman¡­ he really did it.¡± ¡°B-but he just gained that power.¡± ¡°As expected of Master Yujin.¡± Words of admiration flowed from people¡¯s mouths. An output similar to that of the blade monster who had honed its skills for a lifetime, despite just having acquired the power. It was a perfect debut of psionic energy. Whoosh©¤ While people were exclaiming in admiration, Yujin, who had finished testing his power, opened the hatch and came in. ¡°Congratulations, Master Yujin. You¡¯ve succeeded in the test.¡± ¡°That was amazing.¡± ¡°As expected of Master Yujin!¡± People applauded and cheered, saying it was incredible. But Yujin himself wore a slightly dissatisfied expression. ¡°¡­? What¡¯s wrong?¡± When Lowie Hendrick asked, puzzled, Yujin sighed deeply and answered. ¡°It¡¯s weaker than I thought. I can¡¯t produce the same level of performance that guy showed.¡± Yujin was disappointed. His power was certainly strong. But compared to the blade monster, it felt slightly lacking. If the blade monster was grade 12, he would be around grade 10-11. He was disappointed that the performance didn¡¯t meet his expectations. ¡°¡­¡­¡± ¡°¡­¡­¡± People were either dumbfounded by this sight or impressed by his attitude of continually striving for greater heights. They thought that this level of ambition might be necessary to occupy the highest position in the Galactic Union. ¡®No, let¡¯s not give up hope. Maybe I can grow it like magical power.¡¯ Yujin thought this way, trying to shake off his disappointment. # [ What a crazy bastard. ] Seeing Yujin¡¯s dissatisfied expression, I couldn¡¯t help but curse under my breath. What the hell is there to be dissatisfied about? Since I didn¡¯t put any restrictions on Yujin¡¯s abilities, he naturally acquired grade 12 psionic energy. However, right now he¡¯s just awakened his power, so it¡¯s not fully activated yet. In other words, this guy expected 100% output right after waking up and being told to work. And on top of that, because he can¡¯t perform at 100%, he¡¯s lamenting that his ability is only this much! Well, fine. Whether he thinks of gradually awakening his abilities as growth or not, that¡¯s Yujin¡¯s business. As expected, it¡¯s grade 12, huh. Was it unnecessary to say I wouldn¡¯t put any restrictions? No, no. This level is needed to stand a chance. The Galactic Union¡¯s forces with commercialized psionic energy, and Yujin, the strongest life form with grade 12 psionic energy. Even if the Transcendent creates five grade 12 blade monsters at a time, with this power, we have quite a good chance. If Yujin takes on two of them, and the rest push forward with the mothership, gradually wearing them down¡­ it¡¯s quite doable, isn¡¯t it? [ Hmm¡­. Things are getting interesting again. ] It was good that I didn¡¯t interfere after all. I almost couldn¡¯t stop myself from unnecessarily meddling, trying to balance patch things. Now all that¡¯s left is to enjoy watching the fight. Ah, but there¡¯s still a lot of time left for that. The Transcendent has gone into hiding to build up strength, and the Galactic Union is still researching psionic energy. Then I should go play somewhere else for a while. I feel like seeing a different world setting after a long time. Let¡¯s see, which world setting should I look at this time? Creating a completely new one might be good too. Fantasy, hunter stories, apocalypse, academy¡­ I feel like I¡¯ve done most of them. Wuxia? Should I try wuxia once? Ah, but I¡¯m a bit weak in wuxia¡­ Of course, there are many wuxia-like world settings in the countless universes. No, it would be more accurate to say there are infinitely many. Anyway, that¡¯s why I have a lot of knowledge. But that¡¯s knowledge gained from becoming an outer god, not memories from when I was human. Although that¡¯s also ultimately created memories, anyway, since there are no injected memories of reading with human emotions, I might end up viewing the wuxia world from an extremely objective and outer god-like perspective. That¡¯s why I¡¯ve kind of intentionally avoided it¡­ but honestly, I¡¯ve tried most things, so I can¡¯t not try wuxia, right? Let¡¯s try to create one by pulling knowledge from here and there! The world setting, protagonist, and overall story flow won¡¯t be that different from fantasy anyway. Wouldn¡¯t it be enough to just have cool martial arts technique names and a Heavenly Demon¡­? Yeah, if there¡¯s a Heavenly Demon, it¡¯s wuxia. Alright, alright. # A hundred years ago, there was a being who brought a terrible bloodstorm to the Central Plains. His name was Baek Hwi. However, he was even more famous for his alias than his real name. ¡°Heavenly Demon¡­.¡± The leader of the righteous faction standing before him called out that alias with sharp eyes. Blood of the Central Plains¡¯ masters dripping from the red robe soaked with enemies¡¯ blood and the blackened long sword. The owners of that blood lay scattered in pieces all around. A lake of blood. With that much blood, it should have stained even the horse-tail hair tied back, Yet his hair was flowing cleanly as if just seen for the first time. And beneath that hair was the face of a man so fair and beautiful that it was hard to believe he was the one who caused this catastrophe. A visage that could make countless women weep. But his eyes were filled with a madness hungry for blood, and his mouth was twisted into a smile. A demon descended from heaven. A demon king so vast as to cover the sky. The god of the demonic cult. Everyone called him by this name: the Heavenly Demon. Chapter 99: Heavenly Demon [ Of course, a Heavenly Demon is essential in martial arts stories. Whether as a villain or protagonist! ]But this isn¡¯t quite traditional martial arts fiction. Nowadays, shouldn¡¯t a Heavenly Demon be a woman to really hit the spot? I¡¯ve learned that¡¯s what passes for traditional martial arts fiction these days. I¡¯ve seen quite a few of those in the newly emerging universes. First, the Heavenly Demon killed countless martial arts masters in a war 100 years ago, and in the end, was sealed away along with the Martial Alliance Leader¡¯s ultimate technique. Barely surviving by separating their soul with a soul-splitting technique, they had to spend 100 years recovering their inner energy. After 100 years, having regained enough strength to create a new body, the Heavenly Demon is resurrected. [ Kuhehe, finally. Finally, this day has come. Now that I¡¯ve returned, this martial world is finished! ] But something went wrong, and all the accumulated inner energy disappeared? Even worse, the body became that of a beautiful woman. [ Huh? Uhhh??? ] Realizing something was amiss, the Heavenly Demon examines their body. [ W-What in the world is this! Where has my decades¡¯ worth of inner energy gone! And this body? This voice? Anyone can see it¡¯s that of a woman! ] Of course, the Heavenly Demon was originally quite pretty, so in their powerless days, they were often mistaken for a woman and even suffered abuse from martial artists who enjoyed male companionship. That¡¯s the kind of backstory explaining why they hate the world and want to destroy the martial arts world. Now they¡¯ve become a true woman, undeniably beautiful with brown ponytailed hair, perky breasts, and a slender waist. [ T-This can¡¯t be! Did the resurrection technique fail?! ] Hehehe, let¡¯s see how this Heavenly Demon, now turned into a woman, will survive. # Whether due to a malfunction in the resurrection technique, all inner energy had disappeared and the body had transformed into that of a woman. However, the Heavenly Demon Baek Hui was not flustered¡­ ¡°Ah, no!! My inner energy! My crotch! Aaaargh!¡± He was extremely flustered. ¡°Ugh! There¡¯s no choice now. I¡¯ll have to build it up from scratch. With a woman¡¯s body, there will inevitably be limitations¡­ but I should still be able to recover to about 80% of my original efficiency.¡± Of course, befitting a Heavenly Demon, he quickly regained his composure and formulated a plan. First, breathing. The Heavenly Demon¡¯s core technique, the Demon Absorption Breathing Method, is a demonic art from the Evil Sect that steals life force from surrounding living beings and converts it into inner energy. ?£Á??¦¢?? It was a terrifying technique befitting the Heavenly Demon of the Evil Sect, causing surrounding life forms to wither and die just by breathing. After building up basic inner energy with this, the next step would be to use the Heavenly Demon Absorption Technique to completely drain the life force from any living being touched, causing them to wither and die while accumulating inner energy. With these demonic arts, the Heavenly Demon was able to gather decades¡¯ worth of inner energy in just over ten years. This time would be the same. The only difference was that there was no foundational inner energy to start with, and being in a woman¡¯s body meant less inner energy could be accumulated compared to when he was a man. ¡®It¡¯s frustrating, but what can I do? The resurrection technique is a one-time skill that can¡¯t be used twice. I must see this through to the end.¡¯ Still, he wasn¡¯t worried. Although the efficiency was about 80% compared to a male body, the inner energy that could be accumulated through the Demon Absorption Breathing Method and the Heavenly Demon Absorption Technique was limitless. In exchange for only being able to use life-devouring demonic arts forever, that vitality would be absorbed from surrounding life forms. In other words, as long as living beings existed, the Heavenly Demon¡¯s inner energy was virtually infinite. Even though efficiency was reduced in a woman¡¯s body, the infinite inner energy remained unchanged. It would just take a bit more time. Thinking this, he closed his eyes and inhaled. He could feel the surrounding life force being drawn in along with the air. It naturally circulated through the body once, beginning to open up blocked meridians. Fssssss©¤ There was a burning sensation as if the life force was scorching the blood vessels as it passed through. But the Heavenly Demon, seemingly accustomed to it, continued to inhale and exhale, channeling the life force through the blood vessels. The impurities inside the body began to burn away from the life force and were expelled through the skin. Black, congealed sweat-like substances flowed out of her body. Being naked, the black sweat trickled down her perky breasts and slender waist, dripping onto the ground. The life force that had circulated through the entire body then opened the closed gate of the dantian and entered, becoming inner energy. A tiny amount. A truly minuscule amount of inner energy had accumulated. ¡°Inhale. Exhale¡­¡± After circulating and opening the meridians and dantian, the Heavenly Demon looked down at her naked body covered in sticky impurities. ¡°Oh my, I need to wash up.¡± As a foul odor rose, the Heavenly Demon frowned and surveyed the surroundings. Then, she took a step towards where she smelled water. Thud. Suddenly stopping, she looked around blankly. ¡°¡­¡­¡± And after a moment, she realized. ¡°Ah, I can¡¯t use the Heavenly Demon Step right now. How inconvenient¡­¡± Heavenly Demon Step. The highest level of lightness skill that allows one to move dozens of li in a single step. But now, with insufficient inner energy, such a feat was impossible. Realizing she had become an inconvenient body, the Heavenly Demon clicked her tongue and walked towards where there was water. Although her body felt sticky, unpleasant, and smelled bad, as the Heavenly Demon, she couldn¡¯t stoop to running around vulgarly, so she walked slowly. After walking for about 20 minutes, she finally arrived at a pond in the forest where water had collected. ¡°Tsk, to think I have to wash directly without being able to move the water.¡± Originally, she would have used martial arts to move the water and wash directly. No, after accumulating a certain level of inner energy, there wouldn¡¯t even be waste products in the body, so there would be no need to wash at all. It had been an extremely long time since the Heavenly Demon had performed the act of washing her body. Moreover, since it was a woman¡¯s body, the awkwardness was doubled. ¡°Tch, what an inconvenient body. At least it¡¯s more flexible compared to a man¡¯s body. This could be useful.¡± While washing, she tried moving her body in various ways, and as a result, she learned that although the overall physical abilities were weaker compared to a man¡¯s body, the flexibility was remarkably high. This felt like something that could be well utilized in martial arts. ¡°Well, that Sword Princess also used her body¡¯s flexibility and elasticity incredibly well. Though I killed her.¡± The Heavenly Demon smirked, recalling the past. But then. ¡°Whoa, what the hell is this?¡± ¡°Wow, isn¡¯t this something?¡± A group appeared at the pond where she was washing. ¡°We came to check who was making water sounds in our territory, and look what we found? This is a real catch!¡± They were a group of bandits who had claimed this area as their territory. Four in total. A big guy wielding a huge axe, another of similar build holding a flail. A slightly smaller one with a greatsword. Lastly, the smallest one holding a thin rapier. ¡®That one is the strongest.¡¯ She could tell without even sensing their inner energy. The Heavenly Demon¡¯s instinct for combat was telling her. The shortest one with the rapier was the strongest among them. ¡°Hehehe, hey miss. Since we¡¯ve met like this, why don¡¯t we have some fun?¡± ¡°Being naked here means that, right? You¡¯re trying to seduce us, aren¡¯t you?¡± The bandits approached the Heavenly Demon with lecherous expressions. Seeing this, the Heavenly Demon made a disgusted face and said, ¡°Be on your way. If you knew who I am, your hearts would stop from shock.¡± Still, these were the first humans she had met since her resurrection. Thinking she might show a bit of mercy this time, the Heavenly Demon kindly gave them a warning. Even if she caught them, she couldn¡¯t use the Heavenly Demon Absorption Technique yet, so she could only slowly absorb their vitality, and there wasn¡¯t enough time for that. ¡°Hahaha! This woman¡¯s got some spirit that could pierce the heavens. Come on, tell us who you are, pretty one.¡± But starting with the biggest guy wielding the axe, the rest of them didn¡¯t back down either. It was natural. What stood before them was a delicate and, moreover, beautiful naked woman. ¡°Sigh¡­ To ignore this one¡¯s warning, truly foolish beings.¡± Saying this, the Heavenly Demon looked around and picked up a fallen branch. ¡°Huh? Puhahaha! Don¡¯t tell me you¡¯re going to face us with that?¡± ¡°Has she gone mad from fear?¡± ¡°It¡¯s probably just for self-defense.¡± The bandits sneered. But there was one who couldn¡¯t laugh. ¡°¡­Her stance is perfect.¡± It was the smallest bandit with the rapier. ¡°Everyone, don¡¯t let your guard down. She might be more skilled than we think.¡± ¡°Huh? Brother, she¡¯s just a woman. We can just have some fun after a long time¡­¡± ¡°Hey, wait!¡± As the big man with the axe said this and stepped forward towards the Heavenly Demon, just as the bandit with the rapier was about to stop him, ¡°Hehehe. I¡¯ll show you a sword technique too good for the likes of you. This is the Sword Princess¡¯s sword.¡± Whoosh©¤ The Heavenly Demon¡¯s body twisted with incredible elasticity. And then her body sprang forward, propelled by that elasticity. At its end was the branch she had picked up earlier. Thwack! The tip of the rotating branch made contact with the approaching axe-wielding bandit. Whump!! ¡°Ugh?!¡± The axe bandit staggered back two or three steps and fell to his knees. ¡°W-What?!¡± At this situation, not only the axe bandit but everyone was greatly shocked. S§×arch* The N??elFir§×.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. Chapter 100: Future Plans A martial artist¡¯s body is both firm and flexible.As such, there are many techniques that utilize the elasticity generated through flexibility. A prime example is the Bow-String Snap technique, which involves bending the body like a bow and then springing forward with the recoil. One hundred years ago, Sword Princess, one of the martial arts masters who faced the Heavenly Demon, had honed that flexibility to the extreme. Believing she could never surpass men in strength, she chose a completely different approach, developing a body that could twist like a pretzel. And based on the powerful elasticity stemming from that incredible flexibility, she created a destructive power that was not inferior to other male martial artists who had trained rigid bodies. No, it was far more powerful. Even the Heavenly Demon Baek Hwi had to nod in acknowledgment of that incredible flexibility and destructive power. Of course. ¡°Is this how it¡¯s done?¡± The Heavenly Demon perfectly replicated Sword Princess¡¯s body and technique just by seeing it once, the very technique she had created after extreme effort. Perfectly identical. It was possible because of her innate physique and talent. And that innate physique and talent were still being inherited even now after her resurrection. ¡°You bitch¡­! W-What the hell did you just do!¡± The bandits, caught off guard by the unexpected attack, tensed up and drew their weapons. They had thought she was just a beautiful, delicate woman, but her movements suggested she was no ordinary person. Of course, the Heavenly Demon¡¯s current physical abilities aren¡¯t that exceptional. She was nothing more than a slightly strong woman who had just grasped a handful of qi. But even with these physical conditions, if it was Sword Princess¡¯s destructive sword technique utilizing elasticity, it wasn¡¯t difficult to send a hefty man flying. ¡°Being able to recreate that with this body is only possible because it¡¯s me, though.¡± Thinking it was quite a successful attempt, the Heavenly Demon smiled with satisfaction. But soon she glared at the bandits with an extremely annoyed expression. ¡°To think I had to use more than one move on small fry like you. What an extremely unpleasant experience.¡± ¡°¡­¡­¡± ¡°¡­¡­¡± It was an incredibly arrogant statement, but given what she had just demonstrated, the bandits silently tensed up and glared at her. But in the end, perhaps because they were men. ¡°Gulp.¡± Their eyes couldn¡¯t help but be drawn to the two enormous mounds on her chest that shook slightly every time she spoke. In that moment of distraction. Whoosh! The Heavenly Demon bent her body backward and then sprang forward quickly like a released bowstring. Bow-String Snap. Originally, since taking the name Heavenly Demon, she had never used any movement technique other than the Heavenly Demon Step. So even while using Bow-String Snap now, she felt quite humiliated. Compared to the Heavenly Demon Step, which was practically teleportation, this speed was like that of a toddler¡¯s first steps. But even so, the bandits¡¯ reactions were slow. ¡°Ugh, urk!¡± No, they thought they were slow. Clang! The Heavenly Demon¡¯s wooden stick, aiming to send one of them flying using the recoil of the Bow-String Snap. But that wooden stick was blocked by an even thinner sword. ¡°Everyone, step back. I¡¯ll handle this.¡± The owner of the thin sword was the very bandit the Heavenly Demon had said was the strongest among them. ¡°Well, well, what a feisty little lady we have here. Looks like I¡¯ll have to teach you some manners, won¡¯t I?¡± ¡°Hmph, you think you can defeat me just because you blocked one attack?¡± The Heavenly Demon snorted and quickly bent backward. Then, using that momentum, she executed an upward kick, smashing the man¡¯s chin. Whack! ¡°Ugh¡­!¡± But it was an ordinary kick without internal energy behind it. No matter how much momentum she put into it, it wasn¡¯t enough to break his jaw. ¡°Heheh, quite a strong kick¡­ Urk?!¡± But the impact to the chin meant his brain had been shaken. No matter how much he protected his body with internal energy, if the brain was properly shaken, it would be difficult to move properly. Crack! ¡°Gah¡­!¡± Not missing the moment he staggered, the Heavenly Demon struck the back of his head, knocking him unconscious. After subduing the remaining one as well, she looked at the four fallen men with a cold smile. ¡°Hehehe, what a lovely sight. This will be a good boost for my initial internal energy.¡± Of course, even her face wearing that cold smile was breathtakingly beautiful. # After breaking all the bandits¡¯ limbs, she held them captive and continuously absorbed their life force from the side. In this way, she was able to accumulate a much larger amount of internal energy compared to when she first broke through, and now she had built up enough internal energy to be considered a third-rate martial artist. ?????????? Of course, since all the martial arts she had seen and experienced in her previous life were stored in her head, just considering the potential applications, even a decent second-rate martial artist would hardly dare to compare. ¡°Still a long way to go.¡± That level is not enough. Her name is the Heavenly Demon. She was once called the great demon king who covered the sky. To overturn this world and establish the demonic cult¡¯s dominion once again, she needs even greater power. Power at her peak¡­ no, beyond her peak. ¡°There¡¯s also the method of slowly building internal energy through the Demon Absorption Technique¡­ but that takes too long. I need to quickly build up enough internal energy to use the Heavenly Demon Qi Absorption Technique.¡± Thanks to her innate physique and the cheating breathing method called the Demon Absorption Technique, her internal energy accumulates at a rate others can¡¯t even imagine, even when she¡¯s standing still. Moreover, if she becomes able to use the Heavenly Demon Qi Absorption Technique, depending on the opponent, she could fill up more than half a year of internal energy in a single breath. But to use that incredible Heavenly Demon Qi Absorption Technique requires more than 1 year of internal energy. To recover to that point, even with an innate physique and genius techniques, it takes more time than one might think. The key is to shorten that time as much as possible. The best method is to consume spirit pills. Excellent spirit pills that increase a large amount of internal energy in a short time. However, spirit pills are basically very difficult to obtain, or they are managed in utmost secrecy by orthodox sects, making them hard to acquire. ¡®Or receive it from someone.¡¯ She remembered hearing that in some orthodox martial arts sects, elders nearing retirement would pass on their internal energy to young experts. Of course, doing so is extremely inefficient. Even for an elder who has accumulated an enormous 3 year of internal energy, due to the massive loss during the transfer process, only less than half a year of power remains. ¡®But still, half a year of internal energy.¡¯ It didn¡¯t seem like a bad idea to disguise her identity, enter a sect, and inherit the internal energy of old elders. ¡®Someone of my caliber could easily become the top young talent of that sect within 5 years anyway.¡¯ Even out of those 5 years, 3 years would be just for building trust, and she thought she could reach the top of any sect in just 2 years. ¡®In that time, I¡¯d accumulate some internal energy, and if I receive an elder¡¯s internal energy too¡­ reaching it in 5 years wouldn¡¯t be difficult.¡¯ This seemed more feasible than obtaining spirit pills. ¡°No, wait. Come to think of it, wouldn¡¯t the most prestigious sects have stockpiles of spirit pills? If I become a recognized expert, I could freely consume those pills!¡± The Heavenly Demon laughed heartily, thinking her plan was absolutely brilliant even by her own standards. It was quite an odd sight to see a young, beautiful woman laughing like an old man. Of course, there was no one around to see it. # Among the loot the bandits had, there happened to be small clothes that fit her body, so she put them on. The Heavenly Demon could have worn women¡¯s clothes, but feeling somewhat awkward, she chose to wear what appeared to be a young boy¡¯s clothes. Following the traces left by the bandits, she was able to discover a path frequented by people. ¡°A broken carriage and dead people¡­ I see, no wonder the weapons seemed to have blood and clothes on them.¡± It was clear at a glance that the bandits had attacked a carriage of ordinary people who were traveling. She made an expression of extreme disgust. Heavenly Demon Baek Hwi. S§×ar?h the NovelFire.net* website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. Although she had been called things like Demon King and Devil, she never laid a hand on anyone who wasn¡¯t a martial artist from the Central Plains. Partly because they weren¡¯t worth killing, and also because she was someone who pursued the absolute ¡®martial¡¯. She was a martial artist to the bone. That¡¯s why she felt such disgust towards bandits who preyed on worthless ordinary people who hadn¡¯t learned martial arts. ¡°I did well to kill them slowly.¡± The Heavenly Demon nodded, very satisfied with having drained their life force gradually to kill them. At that moment, the sound of other carriages rattling in the distance reached her ears. And there were quite a few of them. It seemed like several were coming in a line. ¡®A merchant caravan?¡¯ As she had expected, she could see several carts and carriages of a merchant group approaching from afar. Upon confirming this, the Heavenly Demon hurriedly ran to the corpses of the dead people and began smearing blood all over her body. She also disheveled her clothes here and there, making herself look like someone who had just been assaulted. After that, with an extremely sorrowful and urgent expression, she ran towards the merchant caravan, shouting: ¡°P-please save me! My family was all killed, and I barely escaped from being violated by the bandits¡­!!¡± ¡°Oh, my goodness?! There¡¯s a blood-covered woman over there¡­!¡± ¡°There¡¯s also a carriage that looks like it¡¯s been attacked! It seems they were ambushed by bandits!¡± Heavenly Demon Baek Hwi. He¡­ no, she was. A true talent who could even act if necessary. Chapter 101: Mannerism Baek Hwi, the Heavenly Demon, pretending to be a weak woman to blend in with the merchant group and flow into the city.And the various connections and sects she meets there. Her gradually recovering inner power¡­. Well, from here on, it¡¯s all predictable content. Is there anything different about martial arts stories? The only slightly different things are the happenings that occur because the Heavenly Demon is a woman. Or wait, are even the happenings caused by TS ultimately just worn-out clich¨¦s? Hmm, thinking about it that way, it¡¯s all predictable content. Just a change in genre. Well, it¡¯s strange that a nearly omniscient outer god can¡¯t predict it, but still. Maybe I¡¯m getting a bit tired of creating worlds. How about taking a short break? Right, even in games, if you keep playing, you fall into mannerism due to repetitive quest-like tasks. At times like that, the best solution is to just take a break from the game and come back later. But then, in the case of online games, as time keeps flowing, I¡¯d be at a disadvantage for the amount I didn¡¯t play. I really hate that kind of thing. In other words, I don¡¯t like the idea of time in the world I created flowing on its own while I¡¯m away, with everything progressing neatly without my knowledge. Well, there¡¯s also the option of letting time continue to flow while doing other things and just checking occasionally. After all, my computational power and memory are infinite. Or I could rewind time later to check. I used to do that originally. But now, the worlds I¡¯m watching have become too numerous. It¡¯s bothersome to rewind time for each one, so wouldn¡¯t it be more convenient to just pause everything and restart all at once later? Anyway, since there¡¯s no concept of time in the gaps, if I just pause it, the universes¡¯ time won¡¯t flow again unless something major happens. Well, to be honest, it¡¯s also because it¡¯s troublesome. They say multitasking can cause dementia, you know. Anyway, I don¡¯t like it, so I decided to just stop it. All universes stop. Pause state. It won¡¯t be released until I release it. [ Hmm? What¡¯s the matter? ] Idra, who had been watching intently, tilts her head and asks me. Ah, come to think of it, this woman was here too. [ I¡¯m bored. I¡¯m going to pause for a while and try something else. ] [ Oh? Then what about me? I was enjoying watching our lovely elves. ] Hmm¡­ it¡¯s hard to say there¡¯s no contribution from this side, so¡­ Should I ask for Idra¡¯s opinion on the sci-fi universe side? But the main reason I¡¯m pausing and leaving this time is because of the sci-fi universe. [ Do you want to come along? ] I do have some interesting things in mind right now. How about just taking Idra along with me? [ What are you going to do? ] [ Well, to put it simply¡­ experiencing a different job? ] [ ¡­? ] Idra doesn¡¯t seem to understand my words well. But it doesn¡¯t matter. She¡¯ll understand what I mean once we get there anyway. # [ ¡­So, you¡¯re saying you want to enter the universe I created. ] Nyarlathotep¡¯s response comes back as if in disbelief. Well, I suppose that¡¯s understandable. If you suddenly make such a proposal, that¡¯s the only way to react. What I want to do after pausing the universes is none other than entering the universal worldviews created by other outer gods. They say that when you get bored with your original hobby, it¡¯s best to try a different hobby, and when you get bored with a game, it¡¯s best to try a different game. ?????¦­O?£Â¨§? So, I¡¯m going to directly experience what the games created by other outer gods feel like. During that time, mannerism might be resolved, and who knows, I might come up with ideas for a new worldview? [ What?! If it¡¯s about entering the universe of that barbaric being, I¡¯ll have to decline! They only treat living beings as toys anyway! ] [ Huh, you mean that woman too? This is absurd. ] Nyarlathotep and Idra started glaring at each other, growling. A giant mass of tentacles monster and a beautiful goddess with a fantastic appearance fighting each other. It¡¯s quite a transcendent sight, indeed. Come to think of it, these two didn¡¯t get along very well, did they? To be precise, Idra is in the position of trying to persuade Nyarlathotep to stop what he¡¯s doing, while Nyarlathotep considers Idra to be a very annoying existence. ¡­When you think about it that way, maybe they¡¯re not on bad terms? Well, anyway. [ Don¡¯t you need to take a closer look at what kind of experiment you¡¯re trying so hard to stop? It was the same with my laboratory. You took a closer look and quite liked it, didn¡¯t you? ] [ W-well, I didn¡¯t really like it that much¡­. ] Despite saying that, she seemed to be contemplating a bit, perhaps because there was a precedent with me. [ And I¡¯m thinking of creating avatar bodies for her and me to experience it, rather than entering directly. There might be new ideas coming from a new perspective. ] [ A new perspective¡­ ] Nyarlathotep also seemed to have become a bit interested in my words. [ Well, that woman is annoying, but there¡¯s nothing I can¡¯t do if it¡¯s your request. ] [ If you insist that much, well¡­ I have nothing else to do anyway, so shall we give it a try? ] In the end, they both agreed to my opinion. Heheh, I knew it. [ Then, since there¡¯s a universe I¡¯m currently experimenting on, shall we enter there? ] [ What kind of experiment is it? ] To my question, Nyarlathotep spoke with a writhing that felt like a smile. [ I¡¯m creating a universe with only extreme environments where life forms created through my experiments can survive, and I¡¯m observing the beings born there. What kind of life forms are born, and how they evolve. ] He says he has already conducted experiments hundreds of millions of times and accumulated data. He plans to do it a little more and then use the completed data for other experiments. [ There are common points and points that keep changing. I found it fascinating how they evolve differently even in the same environment, so I¡¯ve created a separate storage universe to keep various cases. ] A preservation universe storing numerous evolution cases! I¡¯d like to visit there too sometime. But for now, I¡¯m more curious about this extreme environment he mentioned, so we decided to enter there. Extreme environments where life forms can survive. Permafrost at absolute zero level, going below minus 240 degrees without a single starlight. Ultra-high temperature stars reaching hundreds of millions of degrees. Quark stars, further split from neutron stars, shrunk to the size of a ping pong ball. The edge of black holes where even light is distorted and disappears beyond the event horizon. Stars with extreme radiation that maintain supernova state indefinitely, and so on. Many extreme environments possible in the category of ¡®universe¡¯ bound by the chains of physical laws appeared. It was amazing just to think that life forms could live in such places. Moreover, they¡¯re not artificially created, but life forms that can be born naturally and evolve. Basically, he says life is born once in every 10,000 universes. S§×ar?h the ¦Çov§×lFire .net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. In other words, despite experimenting hundreds of millions of times so far, life has only been born a few thousand times. Moreover, there were rampant cases where life was born in some environments and not in others. I couldn¡¯t even fathom how long this experiment alone had been going on. Well¡­ the concept of time doesn¡¯t mean much to us in the first place. We can just snap our fingers and fast-forward a universe from birth to destruction in an instant. Anyway, even that finger snap gets tiring after hundreds of millions of times. The fact that he recorded and stored the common parts and differences amidst all that. It was a part that showed how persistent his personality was. Indeed, the king of curiosity. Anyway, the place Idra and I are going to is a universe being newly tested this time. Since it¡¯s an extreme environment, he showed us samples of life forms that have appeared in experiments so far, so we can adapt there. Microorganisms living in permanent frost, active even when their body temperature drops below zero. Flatworms evolved from those microorganisms, with a base body temperature of minus 200 degrees. Spirit-like life forms made of plasma living in ultra-high temperature stars. Ultra-microorganisms the size of protons living in quark stars, unaffected by gravity, and so on. I skimmed through a list of life forms that would be unimaginable in a normal universe. Well, to be honest, this is just a part of the knowledge I already have. In the infinitely repeating natural universes, of course, there are countless universes with environments like what Nyarlathotep created. And there are countless universes where life forms are born in those places. Naturally, Nyarlathotep would have that knowledge too. But she is also like me. She¡¯s the type who thinks that just knowing something as knowledge and seeing it directly with her own eyes are clearly different. That¡¯s probably why she¡¯s going through all this trouble to conduct these tests. I knew there were life forms living in such environments, but I never thought I¡¯d get to see their birth with my own eyes like this. I was feeling a bit excited. Chapter 102 First, I created small human-like forms for myself and Idra.This was to minimize our impact on the potential birth of life forms. The first place we visited was an extremely cold planet. While there were many planets in the universe, Nyarlathotep informed us about this one, which had the highest possibility for the birth of life forms at present, so we headed there. I gave our avatar bodies resistance to withstand the extreme cold. This wasn¡¯t particularly difficult for me or Idra. After all, extreme cold is just about -250 degrees Celsius, isn¡¯t it? The universe operates on different physical laws, and there are universes with even lower temperatures. But this place is what¡¯s commonly called a ¡®standard¡¯ type of universe. It¡¯s a universe with the most commonly distributed form of physical laws. It¡¯s easier to think of it as the universe I remember from when I was human, or the universe in SF settings. There are universes with lower temperatures than this, but they¡¯re considered ¡®aberrant¡¯ universes, not standard, so they¡¯re excluded from experiments. Life forms born there are subject to entirely different physical laws. Basically, universes for tests or experiments often follow the form of this standard universe. Just as I¡¯ve been doing until now. Anyway, we arrived at a surprisingly massive planet. S§×arch* The n?vel_Fire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. It was located in a ¡®void¡¯ where the distance between galaxies was so vast that tens of billions of light-years seemed almost empty. Not only were the galaxies far apart, but within the galaxy, the distances between stars were extremely vast. It was what¡¯s commonly called a ¡®lonely planet¡¯. With barely any light reaching it, the sky was pitch black. Naturally, no heat reached it either. The surrounding temperature was close to absolute zero, about -250 degrees Celsius. Even the atmospheric gases were frozen solid, leaving no atmosphere, and the surface was covered with layers of ice made of nitrogen, oxygen, and hydrogen. ?????¦­??¨º¡ì You might wonder how fragile life forms could possibly survive in a place where ice never melts. Surprisingly, there are quite a lot of life forms that can withstand low temperatures. Fundamentally, the universe is a very low-temperature environment. While planets where ordinary life forms live are warm, and areas close to stars are unimaginably hot, Most of the empty space in the universe is cold. Life forms that traverse such a universe are basically designed to withstand temperatures below -100 degrees Celsius. To give examples from SF universe settings¡­ Xenomorphs, the Kapterians, and the Warden species are typical examples. Come to think of it, I once subjected the Kapterians to extreme cold torture. At that time, the temperature was beyond the physical laws of the universe, so they completely froze and shattered. After several decades, even that has become a memory. Anyway, life forms designed to withstand such low temperatures are widespread in the universe. However, it¡¯s safe to say that life forms rarely originate in temperatures close to absolute zero, around -230 to -250 degrees Celsius. Unless, of course, they¡¯re born elsewhere and evolve over time to withstand such conditions. ¡°Oh, look over there.¡± Life forms are basically organic entities created by the fusion of proteins. However, proteins typically can¡¯t fuse or even decompose in extremely cold or hot environments. Of course, that¡¯s just common sense for Terrans¡­ that is, humans. In the universe¡­ Especially in universes with different physical laws, countless things happen, many of which are incomprehensible by human common sense. ¡°Oh¡­ the first microorganism.¡± Proteins synthesize to create organic entities that can move on their own. A protein mass that can move on its own even at -230 degrees Celsius. That was the first life form born in this environment. Apart from the low temperature, it¡¯s a process similar to how life forms are born on Earth or other planets. An organic entity capable of activity in extreme cold. This seems like it could be a good idea. # The next place we headed to was the one I was most curious about. The first extremely cold planet was a place Nyarlathotep had dropped us off at, but this place was an ultra-high temperature star. It¡¯s a monstrous star with a core temperature exceeding 300 million degrees Celsius and a mass millions of times that of the Sun. Everyone would probably think that life forms couldn¡¯t possibly appear in such a place. After all, it¡¯s an environment far more extreme than the extreme cold. But surprisingly, life forms exist here too. If we define life forms as entities that move on their own and breathe, then they are certainly life forms. ¡°Plasma life forms. Commonly called ¡®elementals¡¯.¡± These are life forms made of plasma, the fourth state of matter. Of course, there are life forms made of solids. If you search through various worldviews, you¡¯ll naturally find life forms made of liquids and gases too. Similarly, life forms in the form of plasma, also called the fourth state of matter, naturally exist as well. Elementals, ghosts, spirits, and so on. These are the very things referred to by various occult elements. Because they¡¯re not in a common form, they¡¯re usually not visible, and they¡¯re born in these special environments. Or they can also be created when some components inside a life form partially turn into plasma after death. The life forms living in this ultra-high temperature star are also of this form, where flames generated from the tremendous heat energy emitted by nuclear fusion have gained will and life activities. In simple terms, they¡¯re what you might call fire elementals. I¡¯ve had experience creating these too. Or rather, I should say I¡¯ve seen what something I created made. The light elementals created by the Elf God are exactly that. I wasn¡¯t really thinking about it, but seeing what the Elf God Rios created piqued my interest. So I wanted to see the appearance of naturally occurring elementals for myself. That opportunity has finally come. An incredibly hot flame burning white. A tiny ball of flame popped out from there. That mass, about the size of a normal person¡¯s fist. Even that small flame contained enough thermal energy to completely incinerate an entire planet. It flickered like an ordinary flame at first, but then it detached from the surface and began to move independently. A movement with will, clearly different from the flickering of flames. Life had taken root in the burning plasma energy. ¡°So, an elemental.¡± ¡°It¡¯s beautiful.¡± After finishing our observation of other life forms like that, Idra and I dispelled our avatar bodies and returned to Nyarlathotep¡¯s laboratory. [ How was it? I¡¯d like to hear your detailed impressions. ] As soon as we arrived, without even a chance to rest, we were subjected to an interview bordering on interrogation by Nyarlathotep. I told her about my impressions and various points that I thought could be improved. Of course, it¡¯s just my opinion, so she¡¯ll filter it as she sees fit. Idra also seemed to have realized that Nyarlathotep wasn¡¯t just a being conducting sadistic experiments, seeing the beautiful and exotic forms of life that were more impressive than she had imagined. [ It would be nice if you only did good experiments like this. ] [ No, I¡¯m just doing this out of curiosity. I¡¯m going to experiment to see how much these things evolve and how extreme environments the evolved life forms can withstand. ] Of course, Nyarlathotep snorted and blurted out words that Idra would dislike. [ Oh my! I wish you¡¯d understand the preciousness of life forms. But I¡¯ll give you credit this time. It was beautiful. ] [ ¡­¡­. ] It seemed like she wanted to say that it¡¯s because she knows how important and precious life forms are that she¡¯s curious and conducts various experiments. But Nyarlathotep didn¡¯t bother to say it, probably finding it troublesome. [ Would you like to experience some other places? ] [ No, I was thinking of going somewhere else this time. ] Although I was extremely interested in Nyarlathotep¡¯s universe for preserving life forms, since we mentioned elementals, I decided to save that visit for another opportunity as I had a place I wanted to go. [ Hmm, I¡¯m interested too. May I come along? ] Huh? Suddenly? [ What about the laboratory? ] [ I can pause it for a while. ] Saying that, Nyarlathotep instantly stopped everything, just as I had done. What¡¯s this, why is she suddenly saying she wants to come along? Well, I guess Outer Gods are known to act on their own whims when curiosity strikes, but it¡¯s still quite sudden. I don¡¯t really have a reason to refuse. After all, I brought Idra along, so it would be a bit awkward to say Nyarlathotep can¡¯t come. But there¡¯s one problem. [ Um¡­ the place I¡¯m planning to go now is Cthugha¡¯s universe, is that okay? ] [ ¡­Cthugha? ] At those words, Nyarlathotep¡¯s tentacles suddenly stood on end. Chapter 103 Cthugha.Known as the great spirit god who reigns over all fire spirits and lightning spirits. An Outer God that constantly burns with hot flames, to the extent of being called the King of Fire. Though grandly titled, in reality, it¡¯s an arsonist that goes around burning universes, and it even tried to burn my SF universe before. At that time, for some reason, it got properly scared of me and ran away. I haven¡¯t seen it since then. But this time, I¡¯m planning to go meet it. More precisely, I¡¯ve had the thought of visiting the universe of spirits that Cthugha created. To be exact, it didn¡¯t create it. Among the universes Cthugha destroyed as it passed by, there¡¯s a case where the universe itself became Cthugha¡¯s avatar due to its influence. That universe, which became the reason it gained the name of spirit god, became filled with spirit life forms that separated from Cthugha¡¯s avatar. It¡¯s no different from the world that became the origin of spirit life forms, literally. Considering that, should we view spirit life forms as no different from Cthugha¡¯s offspring? Even Rios¡¯s light spirits? Well anyway, I¡¯m now going to a universe that¡¯s no different from Cthugha¡¯s avatar. Of course, I plan to get permission from it first so that Cthugha doesn¡¯t get confused or angry at the sudden situation. In other words, I¡¯m going to meet Cthugha. However, Cthugha and Nyarlathotep are on extremely bad terms. It¡¯s because Cthugha frequently burns down Nyarlathotep¡¯s laboratories, the universes he created, his creations, and so on. [ ¡­Cthugha? ] The moment it hears that name, Nyarlathotep¡¯s tentacles stand on end, probably for that reason. [ I¡¯ve heard that name before. It was certainly a code name for calling ¡ö¡ö¡ö¡ö ¡ö¡ö. ] Nyarlathotep remembers it, even mentioning the names used among Outer Gods. Though the expression of the tentacle mass wasn¡¯t visible, it felt like if it had an expression, it would have been deeply frowning. [ I¡¯m worried they might have a big fight if they meet. ] When I expressed my honest concern, Nyarlathotep scoffed. [ Huh. It¡¯s true that I dislike that guy, but I¡¯m not barbaric or stupid enough to fight recklessly. ] [ ¡­.. ] Says the one who tried to fight Ubbo-Sathla the moment they met before. [ Anyway, that guy doesn¡¯t have any personal grudge against me. It¡¯s just that my laboratories and creations happened to be mixed in with everything else it was burning. ] ????????£Î?£Â????? In other words, Cthugha has no grudge against Nyarlathotep. Nyarlathotep also knows that Cthugha has no personal feelings towards him, so he has no intention of fighting the moment they meet. [ Alright, then will you continue to accompany me? ] [ Yes. Let¡¯s do that. ] And so, Nyarlathotep also became a companion. # [ Gasp! You, encountering again. ] When I went to where Cthugha was, I could see Cthugha looking at me in shock. No, I haven¡¯t done anything, why is it so surprised? Anyone watching would think I had been bullying it. Well, it seems like it will be submissive to me, so it should be easy to talk to. [ About the spirit realm universe you rule¡­. ] [ You filthy ball of fire. ] At that moment, Nyarlathotep suddenly growled and extended his tentacles. Huh, what! Didn¡¯t you say you weren¡¯t going to fight?! [ That ball of fire is the root cause of destruction! We must eliminate it immediately! ] Even Idra started shouting like that and cheering on Nyarlathotep. [ Wh-what. Tentacle mass. You. Suddenly what! ] No, Cthugha, you. Just how much have you harmed them? [ Now, now, let¡¯s all calm down. ] I step in to calm things down before a fight breaks out. A giant tentacled being with red eyes, trying to stop a massive ball of fire monster and a bizarre tentacle monster. And even a beautiful giant goddess watching the scene and cheering. It¡¯s truly chaotic chaos. I wonder if such a scene exists anywhere else in this world? Anyway, after barely calming them down, I was able to talk with Cthugha. [ I want to enter and look around the spirit realm universe you rule. ] [ My universe, look around? Why? ] [ What do you mean why, you filthy ball of fire. You should know why. ] Nyarlathotep picked a fight again at Cthugha¡¯s question, but I ignored it and spoke. [ I want to see and experience the spirits directly. I know that your universe is the origin of spirits. ] [ Ah, understood. I agree. ] Fortunately, Cthugha listened to me very well, as expected. It was so submissive that it really felt like it had become my subordinate, no joke. I wonder what kind of change of heart it had when it encountered me back then to act like this. Could it have seen the seed of Azathoth inside me? Anyway, I got its permission. This means there¡¯s no chance of Cthugha coming after us, considering it a sudden invasion of the universe. [ Then shall we go? ] [ You filthy ball of fire. Next time, surely¡­. ] [ ¡­.. ] I glare at Nyarlathotep, who¡¯s trying to pick a fight again. I give him a look that reproaches him for not keeping his promise. At that, Nyarlathotep said nothing more and quietly shut his mouth. # We arrived at Cthugha¡¯s avatar and the spirit realm universe. Well, saying we ¡°arrived¡± is just a figure of speech, since it¡¯s a gap without the concept of space, so we can move there instantly just by thinking about it. Anyway, the spirit realm was larger than I expected. It seemed to be almost 10 times the size of a typical universe bubble. I wonder if it¡¯s different because it¡¯s a universe that became an avatar that separated from the body of a top-tier outer god? By the way, to think that an avatar could become a universe. Seeing it directly, it feels amazing. In reality, there are several universes created like this in the gap. The universe of corrupted things that broke off from Tulzscha¡¯s flames. The universe of bubbling monsters derived from Abhoth¡¯s body. The universe of metal chunks that separated from Daoloth, and so on. I knew about it in my head, but seeing a place that had separated from an outer god¡¯s body and become a world of its own, I felt a sense of wonder. Would I be able to do it too? Artificially creating a universe from an avatar. Sear?h the Novel?ire(.)ne*t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. It¡¯s possible. In fact, there are records of Nyarlathotep having done such experiments. I could probably do it if I wanted to¡­ but I¡¯m a bit worried. After all, I¡¯ve now become a being like Azathoth. I was worried that if I carelessly created a piece of myself, something might go wrong. Eugene? Well, Eugene was created before all this, and¡­ Since he¡¯s now a completely independent entity, there shouldn¡¯t be any problems, right? Or not? Maybe Eugene might awaken and become a being like me from Azathoth¡¯s perspective? Well, he¡¯s just a being trapped in the scale of a single universe at best, so his influence probably won¡¯t grow that much¡­ but if Eugene awakens and becomes an outer god-like being, that could be quite interesting in its own way. Oh, I¡¯ve been rambling. Let¡¯s enter this spirit realm universe first. Of course, I¡¯ll create an avatar so as not to have a big impact on the interior, like before. Hmm, but if I¡¯m making an avatar, what kind of spirit would be good? Since it¡¯s the spirit realm, I¡¯ll have to make it a spirit when I enter, no matter what. [ I¡¯d like to be a water spirit. Water is the source of life, after all. ] That¡¯s a choice typical of Idra. If she becomes a water spirit, I imagine she¡¯d look like a very beautiful undine. [ Well. Anything is fine. If there¡¯s something interesting, it would be a fire spirit. I wonder if I could get ideas on how to annihilate that filthy ball of fire. ] ¡­Really, where did the person who said they wouldn¡¯t pick fights and wouldn¡¯t fight go? They¡¯re just a ball of hatred and anger now. Anyway, a water spirit and a fire spirit, huh. It feels like they unexpectedly match well. What should I be? Lightning? Wind? Earth? While pondering what would be the most fun, I started to wonder if there was really a need to choose spirits that are commonly found. Even if it¡¯s a bit niche, as long as you attach the name ¡°spirit¡± to it, it feels like even conceptual beings are given life. Isn¡¯t that what a spirit life is? If so, I¡¯d like to choose something more signature-like. I am an outer god. Cosmic horror. Hmm¡­ how about a spirit of fear? A spirit of fear. I like it. It sounds powerful somehow. I confirmed with my knowledge that such spirits do exist in the spirit realm, albeit in extremely small numbers. Since they¡¯re not completely non-existent, it shouldn¡¯t be impossible. [ Alright, if everyone has decided, let¡¯s create avatars inside the spirit realm. ] [ Let¡¯s do it. ] [ Yes, understood. ] Creating the avatar itself wasn¡¯t difficult. And transferring my consciousness there as well. In fact, it was something I was used to doing very often. It seemed the same for Idra and Nyarlathotep, as they smoothly transferred their consciousness to their avatars. A water spirit. A fire spirit. A spirit of fear. And so, three new spirits were born inside the spirit realm. Chapter 104 The spirit realm of Cthugha.Countless spirits live there. The spirits of fire and lightning, also called the descendants of the creator. The water spirits living in a world opposite to theirs. The wind spirits endlessly drifting through the spirit realm, and so on. Their types are very diverse. And those who rule this world are none other than the fire spirits and lightning spirits, also called the descendants of Cthugha. They were always in a relationship of fighting over territorial dominion. Among them, the fire spirits who claim that they are the only offspring of the creator, and that the lightning spirits are merely derivatives. They were about to welcome the newly born fire spirits of this cycle. ¡°Great Spirit King, new fire spirits have just been born.¡± ¡°I see. The fifteenth in this generation?¡± Spirits cycle. To elaborate, they are born, grow, and when they age, they become part of the spirit realm and are born again. One such cycle is usually called ¡®one generation¡¯. One generation is typically based on 500 years, and that timing is determined by the Spirit King, a being that exists eternally for each attribute. The territory of fire ruled by the Fire Spirit King, who prides himself as the greatest among the Spirit Kings. There, about 80 years have passed since the start of this generation, and the 15th children have been reborn. To be more precise, rather than rebirth, new spirits are born through the magical power left behind by the previous spirits as they perish. In this case, the number varies depending on what kind of spirits are born. Sometimes countless lower spirits are born, and sometimes only a few higher spirits are born in extremely small numbers. But this time, it was a bit unusual. ¡°The number of spirits born this time is¡­ eight.¡± ¡°Higher spirits, then. Good.¡± Only 8 spirits. At those words, the Fire Spirit King thought that higher spirits had been born. That was natural. If the number of spirits born at once was that small, it meant that the concentrated magical power was that much greater. Since having more higher spirits greatly reinforces their forces, he nodded in satisfaction. But the subordinate spirit shook his head. ¡°No, six lower spirits, one intermediate, and one supreme.¡± ¡°¡­!¡± At those words, the Spirit King¡¯s fiery eyes widened. A supreme spirit! Spirits have lower, intermediate, higher, and supreme ranks. Lastly, there is the Spirit King, but that¡¯s excluded as only one can exist. Anyway, as the rank increases, spirits become exponentially stronger. That¡¯s because the magical power they contain becomes several times stronger. That¡¯s why the number of those who are higher spirits from birth is small. Because that much magical power is concentrated. Some of those born this way amplify their magical power even more as they grow, eventually growing into supreme spirits. The rank just below the Spirit King. There¡¯s no need for a lengthy explanation of how strong they are. But usually, supreme spirits are not born. Higher spirits might grow to become supreme, but cases of being supreme from birth are virtually non-existent. It was almost impossible to concentrate that much magical power from birth. No, just once. It had happened before. ¡°¡­That can¡¯t be.¡± It was when the Spirit King first appeared in this world. The Spirit King had magical power at the level of a supreme spirit from the moment of birth, absorbed the surrounding magical power, and amplified his own magical power to eventually become the strongest spirit, the Spirit King. ??????§°????¨º???? And now, the same thing was happening. A supreme spirit was born. ¡°Bring them to me immediately.¡± The Fire Spirit King felt anxiety and anticipation rising simultaneously. Anxiety about possibly threatening his position and taking the Spirit King¡¯s seat¡­ And anticipation of gaining a tremendous force similar to his own level. Feeling these two seemingly incompatible emotions swirling together, the Fire Spirit King waited for the newly born supreme spirit to come before him. # ¡°¡­What is this?¡± The newly born supreme spirit showed an attitude so insolent it was hard to believe she was in front of the Spirit King. Spirits instinctively recognize the existence of the Spirit King who rules over them when they are born, and they submit to them. But she¡­ no, she did not do that. ¡°A female form, I see.¡± Judging by the slender lines of her flaming body, it was a female form. Moreover, the burning flames and her curved body were displaying the utmost beauty. ¡®A female spirit of the same origin as me.¡¯ He thought such beings only existed as the Wind Spirit King and the Water Spirit King, but to think such a being would be born among the fire spirits. The Spirit King¡¯s emotions leaned sharply towards anticipation rather than anxiety. Of course, unlike before, it wasn¡¯t anticipation about her power¡­ ¡®This should be more than enough to be my companion.¡¯ It was the anticipation of a lifelong single who had never found a companion to stand beside him. Being so powerful and great, he simply couldn¡¯t find a suitable companion. There were plenty of female fire spirits who had risen to the supreme level, but they were ultimately not on par with the Spirit King and their lifespan never exceeded 500 years. Above all, they weren¡¯t attracted to the Fire Spirit King. ¡°What shall I call you by name? Usually, I name the fire spirits¡­ but you seem like you might have a name you¡¯d like to be called.¡± Was it coming from such feelings? Or was it because he truly recognized her as an equal being? Far from scolding her insolent attitude, he even gave her the chance to name herself. A spirit¡¯s name is like its soul. That¡¯s why it¡¯s natural custom for the Spirit King, who holds their souls, to name them directly. But he gave her the right to name herself. It was also a sign of how much he respected her soul. ¡°¡­Nial. Call me Nial.¡± After seeming to ponder for a moment, she named herself. Nial. Hearing that name, the Fire Spirit King nodded. ¡°Nial, is it? A good name. It feels like a name with burning heat.¡± The Fire Spirit King nodded, seemingly satisfied. Seeing this, Nial turned her body as if annoyed and said, ¡°Can I go now? I think I¡¯ve paid my respects to the king.¡± ¡°Wh-what! How dare you¡­!¡± When she tried to leave without permission, showing her back, one of the subordinate supreme spirits finally burst out in anger, but¡­ ¡°It¡¯s fine. Let her go.¡± The Fire Spirit King stopped his subordinate. And so Nial left the fire palace with haughty steps, and the Fire Spirit King quietly watched her retreating figure. ¡°I like that she¡¯s feisty.¡± He grinned, thinking how enjoyable it would be when such a haughty woman became his and whispered words of love. # ¡°How dare such a lowly creature.¡± Nial frowned as she recalled the Fire Spirit King¡¯s gaze. The unpleasant look in his eyes as he scanned her up and down. The blatant desire to make her his woman. Everything about it disgusted her. Although she was currently in the form of a fire spirit avatar, she was utterly repulsed by the fact that such a lowly creature dared to harbor lustful thoughts towards her. ¡®If it were him, perhaps. But how dare such a lowly creature.¡¯ As she thought this, she recalled an outer god who would have been born into this spirit realm like herself. Like her, he would have become a spirit as an avatar and would have been born into this world by now. She didn¡¯t know his name yet. But she was certain that he would recognize her. ¡®Nial, is it.¡¯ There was a moment when he had once told her his code name. [ Nyarlathotep. Ah, but is it okay to call you by the creatures¡¯ code name? Would it be better to use your true name? ] [ Call me whatever you like. ] Nyarlathotep. A name given by creatures she hardly cared about. But for some reason, when he called her by that name, it stuck deeply in her mind. ¡®What a strange feeling. To want to see him as soon as possible.¡¯ An emotion she had never felt before. Curiosity about this thing called emotion began to stir. S§×ar?h the N?vel(F)ire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. ¡®There¡¯s a need to study this. And to study it, I need him.¡¯ Thinking this, she let out a deep sigh, as if slightly disappointed. ¡®Perhaps I should have created an avatar of the same type of spirit as him.¡¯ But then she shook her head. ¡®No, I can meet him soon anyway. His purpose is to explore, enjoy, and savor the spirit realm. It¡¯s better to create avatars of various spirits for that purpose.¡¯ That also aligns well with the goal of researching the spirit realm. Suddenly, she also recalled the other outer god who had come with her. ¡®¡­That troublesome woman. I¡¯d rather die than let her meet him first.¡¯ For some reason, Nial found herself disliking the idea of that woman meeting his avatar before she did. Chapter 105 Idra.A newly born water spirit, and an existence that brought about a massive anomaly by being born as a top-tier spirit. She was currently getting along very well with the water spirits. ¡°Hohoho, I see.¡± ¡°Yes, that¡¯s right. Isn¡¯t it fascinating?¡± She had become especially close with the Water Spirit King, becoming such good friends in just a few days that they were now at a level where they could converse casually. The reason they could become this close, even though she might potentially threaten the Spirit King¡¯s position, was because¡­ ¡°Hehe, perhaps it¡¯s time for me to step down.¡± The Water Spirit King had no great attachment to her position. Or rather, she was a bit tired of the position she had held for such a long time. So she had come to think about passing her position to Idra, a spirit who was also born as a top-tier and with whom she could converse well. Of course, Idra had no intention of inheriting that position, but she decided to actively use this to her advantage as she needed to become close to the Water Spirit King for her own purposes. ¡°Hehe, I¡¯m still just a newly born spirit lacking in both power and experience. I haven¡¯t even been anywhere outside the water territory yet.¡± Her purpose was none other than to leave the water territory. Spirits with an affiliated attribute can only leave their territory with the permission of the Spirit King who rules that attribute. Usually, the principle is not to let them out unless there¡¯s a special reason. This is partly because of the uncertainty of what might happen to them outside, and also because of the possibility of betrayal by going to another territory. Idra planned to become close to the Water Spirit King and gain the right to leave the territory. The reason for this was, of course, to go and find her partner who was born with a different attribute. ¡®Fear. It was fear, wasn¡¯t it? A spirit of fear would be a very rare attribute and a free spirit not belonging to any affiliation.¡¯ If it had been a minority attribute spirit under the water territory¡¯s jurisdiction, like a blood spirit or a lake spirit, it would have been convenient, but a fear spirit is a free attribute that doesn¡¯t belong anywhere. That¡¯s why it¡¯s impossible to know where it was born or where it is now. It¡¯s certainly not in the water territory. If it had been, she should have found it when she searched the entire territory following the water energy. ¡®It¡¯s a bit of cheating, but¡­ this much should be fine.¡¯ In fact, it¡¯s impossible for even a top-tier spirit to detect the entire territory. Such a feat is not possible without power at the level of a Spirit King. But Idra used a slight cheat. She slightly awakened only the ability to detect by using her authority very slightly. Just to find him, her partner who was born as a spirit of fear. Originally, she had tried to minimize the use of her authority to avoid affecting the spirit world as much as possible, but she rationalized that this much would be okay. ?????¦­¨®????§§? Anyway, now that she had confirmed he wasn¡¯t in the water territory, she needed to leave the water territory quickly. Even now, he would be wandering here and there to explore and study the spirit world. That¡¯s why she needed to leave the water territory and find him as soon as possible. ¡°As you say, you are still a spirit that was born not long ago. No matter how strong you are, the outside of the territory is dangerous for such a being.¡± Of course, she wouldn¡¯t easily grant permission. Especially since it would be a big problem if the being she considered as her successor got hurt or disappeared somewhere. ¡®It seems it will take some time.¡¯ Unfortunately, it seemed she wouldn¡¯t be able to depart right away. Still, Idra thought leisurely. After all, a spirit¡¯s lifetime is 500 years. It might be a meaningless time for outer gods to whom the concept of time is meaningless, but in terms of the time of ordinary living beings, 500 years is quite a long time. And the three avatar spirits, including herself, were like newborn babies not even a month old. In other words, there¡¯s plenty of time. Perhaps because they had been together for so long, this time apart from him felt somewhat awkward. But still, there was plenty of time left as a spirit, and even if they couldn¡¯t meet while they were spirits, they could be together again as outer gods once their time in the spirit world ended. ¡®But it¡¯s a bit strange. Why do I want to be with him?¡¯ A question that suddenly occurred to her. Had there ever been a being she thought of like this before? The inferior creatures were lovable, but she never felt the desire to be with them to this extent. But when she thought of him, she felt love, comfort, and reassurance at the same time. She felt the desire to be by his side. It had been so long since she came into existence in this world as an outer god, but this was a strange feeling she was experiencing for the first time. ¡®Hehe, by the standards of living beings¡­ I might be in love with him.¡¯ Of course, Idra didn¡¯t question this emotion. It¡¯s not that outer gods don¡¯t have emotions. No, rather, being higher-dimensional beings, they harbored more and diverse emotions. There was nothing strange about having affection among those emotions. # ¡°Achoo!¡± I sneezed. So spirits can sneeze too, huh. It¡¯s something you wouldn¡¯t know unless you actually became a spirit yourself. Well, I suppose if I searched through the knowledge of the crevices, I¡¯d find out what kinds of spirits sneeze and even what their sneezes sound like. Anyway, I wiped my nose and examined my body. How should I put it? I had high expectations for being a spirit of fear, but¡­ I look just like an ordinary humanoid spirit. Just pitch-black in color, that¡¯s all? Of course, it wasn¡¯t just a simple black color. It was definitely a darkness befitting the name of a spirit of fear, ominous and gloomy. sea??h th§× n??el Fire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. It was something like a shadowy form with a blackness so deep it was hard to describe as simply ¡®black¡¯, rippling like shadows. You could say it was a color and form that embodied the fear of the unknown. ¡°I like it.¡± Naturally, I was quite pleased with it. So, this is Cthugha¡¯s spirit realm, huh. What should I do here now? I came in wanting to learn about spirits, but I didn¡¯t really think about how to go about it. To be honest, it feels like I came in without much of a plan. Let¡¯s start by figuring out where I am and what my current position is. I understood the general situation of the spirit realm as I entered this world. Fire, Water, Wind, Earth, Lightning. There are five major factions in the spirit realm that occupy these five vast territories. Below them are the minor spirits affiliated with these factions. And then there are the free spirits who don¡¯t belong to any faction. I am a spirit of fear. I¡¯m a free spirit that doesn¡¯t belong to any faction. And this place is called the Barren Ravine, located between the territories of Fire and Wind. It¡¯s an extremely harsh land where knife-like winds blow fiercely over a ravine that looks like a pile of ashes, as if everything has been burned. Of course, it¡¯s only a harsh land for some life forms that need water or nutrients. For spirits that live on magical power, this kind of environment is no problem at all. In fact, since it becomes the main battlefield when wind spirits and fire spirits fight, it could be considered a very fertile land by spirit standards due to the magical power released during battles. ¡°Indeed, the magical power I breathe in with every breath is abundant. It¡¯s good land.¡± It feels strange to call this desolate ravine ¡®good land¡¯ while having human memories. So this is what a good landscape looks like to spirits. Let¡¯s take a look around this barren ravine for now. It would be nice to meet other free spirits like me, or maybe even venture into the Wind or Fire territories. Oh, I wonder if they¡¯ll treat me as an intruder if I enter? Well¡­ I¡¯ll think about that later. For now, it would be good to meet another spirit of fear. I want to know exactly what level my power is at. In terms of general magical power, I¡¯m at the level of a top-tier spirit, but is it okay to apply the same standards used by the five major factions to free spirits? As I was thinking about this while walking¡­ ¡°Eek?!¡± I finally met my first spirit. But it wasn¡¯t a free spirit. ¡®A wind spirit?¡¯ A white body with a semi-transparent form that looked like it was made of condensed air currents. It was a wind spirit. Why is a wind spirit here? I wondered as I tried to approach. ¡°D-don¡¯t come closer¡­!¡± The wind spirit trembled and started backing away. I wondered why it was acting like that, but then¡­ Ah, right, I¡¯m a spirit of fear, aren¡¯t I? Of course, all beings feel the emotion of fear. Even Outer Gods, including the highest-ranking ones, know the emotion of fear. Just like how Cthugha is terrified when it sees me. It¡¯s also the emotion I felt when I first encountered Azathoth. In other words, no matter how much of a mental life form a spirit is, they all have the emotion of fear. No, because they are mental life forms, the effect seems even more pronounced. Its semi-transparent form began to waver and shake. It was having difficulty maintaining its physical form due to fear. Oh no, is it going to disappear at this rate? It¡¯s too scared! I¡¯ll back off a bit for now. It seems too frightened. And at that moment, the wind spirit literally fled like the wind, in a flash. ¡°¡­¡­¡± Wow¡­ to think I¡¯d be avoided to this extent. For a moment, I was overcome by a strange feeling, as if memories from a non-existent outcast student life had resurfaced. Chapter 106 EP.106 A Dangerous EntityDalpo, the high-ranking wind spirit. He was originally a spirit with a noble-like presence, occupying a high position in the wind territory. However, he committed a grave sin, and as a result, was banished from the wind territory, becoming a wandering spirit in the barren ravine. ¡®I may be living like this now, but I will return there again.¡¯ Of course, he had no intention of spending the rest of his life like this. He was determined to return to the wind territory and reclaim his former glory. That¡¯s also why he stayed in the barren ravine instead of going far away. The fire spirits who cause the most wars. This place that becomes their battlefield. He would intervene in the wars that occur here, achieve merits, and return to the wind territory. That was his plan. So he was spending his time in the barren ravine, waiting for a war to break out with the fire spirits. But then one day. ¡°¡­What an ominous magical power.¡± He felt an extremely sticky and unsettling magical power spreading from somewhere. An unknown magical power, neither wind nor fire. This unknown magical power gave him a feeling of anxiety and unease rather than discomfort. This is the barren ravine. A land of freedom that no one rules. That¡¯s why spirits of freedom are born here. This magical wave was clearly the kind that emerges when a powerful spirit is born. But for it to be such an ominous and unsettling magical power. ¡®What on earth has been born?¡¯ The magical power, which even evoked a strange sense of fear, was enough to make the low-level spirits floating around shudder and flee far away. But Dalpo was a high-ranking wind spirit after all. He wouldn¡¯t do something as cowardly as fleeing in terror. Rather, he thought it might be an opportunity. ¡®If it¡¯s the birth of a dangerous spirit, if I can investigate it first. Moreover, if it¡¯s a dangerous element and I can prevent it.¡¯ Detecting and preventing a danger occurring in the barren ravine right next to the wind territory. This would be quite a significant achievement. ¡®I might be able to return even without a war breaking out.¡¯ Thinking this, Dalpo moved towards the source of the ominous magical power. ¡°¡­¡­¡± But something was strange. Judging by the concentration of magical power, he thought it had occurred quite nearby. Yet as he went on, the concentration of the ominous magical power only grew stronger, but he couldn¡¯t reach its source. ¡®What is it? What on earth was born?¡¯ As he went on, he started to feel uneasy. He had thought it was just a moderately high-ranking spirit, but that wasn¡¯t the case. At this concentration, it must be high-ranking¡­ no, perhaps even¡­ Just as he was about to retreat, thinking this might be beyond his ability to handle, Thud©¤ It revealed itself. Black. No, a deep, deep jet-black that was beyond mere description as black. It felt as if the space where it existed had been carved out with a knife. A jet-black shadow creeping up. It started to move slowly on two feet. Swoosh©¤ The upper part, presumed to be the face, moves. And then. Flash. Despite being a flickering shadow, he had the illusion of seeing blood-red eyes flashing within it. Though nothing was visible, it was clearly¡­ looking at Dalpo. ¡°Eeeek¡­!¡± The moment he encountered it, he involuntarily let out a scream. Dalpo immediately regretted this action. Because right after he screamed, it slowly started to approach him. Was it interested in the spirit it saw for the first time since its birth? Or was it angered by his scream upon seeing it? Either way, it clearly wasn¡¯t a good sign. Just its approach was enough to bring a dense fear that made his soul tremble. ¡°D-Don¡¯t come¡­!¡± He steps back. Dalpo wanted to praise himself greatly for the fact that he managed to move at all. There wouldn¡¯t be many beings who could move when directly facing such terrible fear. As he shouted and stepped back, it also seemed surprised and hesitated, retreating slightly. At the same time, the cruel fear that had been constricting Dalpo loosened slightly. Not missing this opportunity, Dalpo fled like mad. He didn¡¯t do anything as stupid as looking back. He just ran away. Praying that it wouldn¡¯t chase after him. Wind spirits possess a speed second only to lightning spirits, so he could flee at an incredibly fast pace. After running and running for a long time, after arriving at a place where he couldn¡¯t feel even a bit of that magical power¡¯s influence. Dalpo was finally able to calm his mind. ¡®What on earth was that?¡¯ No, he couldn¡¯t calm down. Because as soon as he recalled it, the feeling of fear started to constrict him again. Spirit of fear. He knew about them. The story of those dirty and ugly minority spirits that live by giving fear to others and feeding on the emotion of terror that arises from it. But they were just startling, equivalent to ghost stories for humans. He had never heard of a being that could raise the fear of the unknown to the extreme and make one¡¯s soul tremble just by encountering it like that. ¡®Something, something was born. Something terribly dangerous.¡¯ He had to report it. He had to enter the wind territory and report it. Even though he didn¡¯t know what it was, or whether it would be a threat. It was dangerous just by existing. ¡®It must be eliminated.¡¯ A being that shouldn¡¯t exist in the spirit world. That¡¯s what Dalpo thought. Of course, this wasn¡¯t something he could handle on his own. It was a matter that would require at least a top-ranking spirit¡­ perhaps even the Spirit King to intervene directly. Although he was an exile, he still had to report it no matter what. He turned his head from the barren ravine towards the wind territory. It was time to return to his homeland after a long time. # He ran away. Well, I guess that¡¯s because he¡¯s a wind spirit. He¡¯s incredibly fast. Sear?h the ¦Çov§×lFire .net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. Anyway, I¡¯m worried about what¡¯s to come. Even though I¡¯m a spirit of fear, if every spirit I encounter gets so scared and runs away like that, how am I supposed to conduct an in-depth study of spirits? ??????????¦¢¨º???? I wonder if there¡¯s a way to suppress my power. ¡°¡­¡­¡± Unfortunately, it seemed that such an ability wasn¡¯t built into this body. Perhaps because I¡¯m a newly born spirit, I haven¡¯t yet realized how to control my power¡­ moreover, the power is so strong that it feels like it would take quite a long time to get used to properly controlling it. ¡°This won¡¯t do.¡± I guess I¡¯ll need to use my authority a bit here. Originally, I was trying not to use my authority to live as much like a spirit as possible¡­ but in this case, I have no choice. No matter what, if I keep being avoided like this, I might go the entire 500 years without even being able to properly converse with spirits, let alone research them. Swish©¤ Using the authority of an outer god very slightly, I learned how to suppress my power. Now I can control the magical power that was uselessly leaking out around me, and those I encounter won¡¯t be exposed to my ability and fall into fear. ¡°Hmm, perfect.¡± Alright, now I can finally start properly. I feel a bit sorry for the wind spirit I just encountered¡­ Still, I¡¯d like to thank him for letting me know how I appear to other spirits right now. Well, I can¡¯t really tell him since he ran away. ¡°Where should I go?¡± Should I explore the barren ravine a bit more? I might encounter other spirits. I¡¯m curious about how spirits will react to me in my current state. That seems like a good idea. Step, step©¤ Walking along this desolate ash path gives me a strange feeling. It¡¯s like I¡¯m wandering alone in a world that has met its end. Oh ho, that¡¯s not bad either? A survival story of a protagonist who survived alone in a world that met its end. I should jot that down in my world-building idea notebook. Just then. ¡°¡­Oh, a spirit of fear?¡± ¡°It¡¯s my first time seeing one. How interesting.¡± I encountered new spirits. Three in total. Two of them are spirits with a bright red energy flickering about them, and one is a spirit that looks like gray powder. If I were to use the knowledge of my main body, I could immediately know what kind of beings they are, but I decided to minimize that for this spirit world life. Let¡¯s try to judge for myself, shall we? A form made of gray powder that seems to crumble. That¡¯s probably a spirit of ash, isn¡¯t it? And next to it, although the body is flickering red, it doesn¡¯t seem to be burning, so it¡¯s probably not a fire spirit. ¡°Why are you so pitch-black and crazy! Argh!¡± ¡°You¡¯re making me angry! Aargh!¡± Ah, I get it now. Spirits of anger, or something like that. The magical power I sense from them is definitely weaker than the wind spirit I saw earlier. If that wind spirit felt like a high-rank, these would be mid-rank? Maybe a bit stronger among the mid-ranks. Seeing that they¡¯re not afraid and running away like that wind spirit earlier when facing me, it seems my power adjustment was successful. I feel proud. ¡°Kahaha! A spirit of fear, yet I don¡¯t feel any fear looking at you.¡± ¡°Not living up to your name! It¡¯s so infuriating!¡± ¡°Hehe, calm down, you two.¡± Every time they speak like that, it¡¯s not just for show, they seem to genuinely get angry, jumping up and down in place as their red energy violently flickers. Wow, is this what it looks like when anger is maximized? The ash spirit trying to calm them down beside them looks a bit pitiful. ¡°I was already angry, and now you¡¯re going to have to help us vent our anger.¡± ¡°Maybe if we beat someone up, our anger will subside a bit!¡± ¡°Hehehe. Oh my, oh my, the brothers are really angry. You¡¯re in big trouble, aren¡¯t you?¡± Hmm? The conversation suddenly turned this way? Is this what they call provocation? Well¡­ they don¡¯t seem like much, so I¡¯ll teach them a lesson and get rid of them. Chapter 107 EP.107 Three Factions I casually release a bit of my power without any particular purpose. The scent of dense magical energy. I guide it not to leak elsewhere, but to flow towards them. That alone was enough. ¡°Huk?!¡± ¡°Hiek?!¡± To extinguish their flickering anger. No, not just extinguishing their anger. They fainted on the spot. ¡°¡­¡­¡± They¡¯re too weak, aren¡¯t they? I didn¡¯t even release my power that strongly¡­ Or am I just too strong? Come to think of it, that wind spirit I saw before must have been pretty resilient. When I think about it that way, it¡¯s quite impressive. I guess when you reach the level of a high-ranking spirit, you have more magical energy, so your soul becomes stronger too? Well, anyway, this incident was about to end as a minor happening¡­ ¡°B-Big bro! We¡¯ll serve you as our leader!¡± ¡°Urgh! You¡¯re too strong!¡± ¡°P-Please spare us!¡± ¡°¡­¡­¡± I wish it had ended as a minor incident. These weird guys are clinging to me. No, get angry. Get angry that I made you faint! Aren¡¯t you wasting your title as spirits of wrath? Why are you suddenly bowing and making a fuss about serving me as your leader? Geez, this is ridiculous. ¡°I don¡¯t keep pets like you.¡± As I was about to leave after saying that. ¡°B-Big bro! Please take us in!¡± ¡°We¡¯ll follow you for life~!¡± As they shouted and followed me, a thought suddenly occurred to me. Well, come to think of it, isn¡¯t it a good thing that I can hear stories from rare spirits like the spirits of wrath and ash? Besides, since I was born here not long ago, wouldn¡¯t it be good to have a guide? ¡°Alright, fine. I have various things I¡¯m curious about, so tell me.¡± When I said I¡¯d accept them, they nodded with bright expressions. ¡°Th-Thank you, big bro!¡± ¡°Ask us anything, we¡¯ll answer even if we don¡¯t know!¡± How are you going to answer things you don¡¯t know¡­? They seem a bit overzealous, but they¡¯re quite useful fellows. Because they knew quite a lot of information. Especially ¡®Oldi¡¯, the spirit of ash, who used to be a subordinate of the fire spirits in the fire territory. Perhaps because of that, he knew quite a bit of information related to the fire territory. Where to go, what are the characteristics of the fire spirits, and even that they often start wars and are planning to go to war with the wind spirits again soon. R?????N??¨º? ¡°But why are you here?¡± When I asked why someone who served the fire spirits was here, he said he was kicked out for being too cowardly. He didn¡¯t have the courage to live alone here either, so he clung to the two spirits of wrath. Hmm¡­ I see. The twin spirits of wrath, ¡®Lupi¡¯ and ¡®Rats¡¯, were long-time residents of the Barren Ravine, so they had quite a lot of information about the ravine. How the current power distribution in the ravine is, and that they¡¯re in the midst of chaos due to the power structure being disrupted by a recent war. There were many stories that could be quite helpful. ¡°Oh, the power structure has been disrupted?¡± That¡¯s an interesting story. I thought that war was just good news for the spirits living in the Barren Ravine because it spreads a lot of magical energy. It seems it¡¯s not all good things. Well¡­ There¡¯s no way there could only be good things when causing fights and conflicts in this land. I guess villages and factions that were carefully built up get wiped out when caught up in it. ¡°Yes. Originally, there were 3 factions in this Barren Ravine. But due to the war 20 years ago, the factions were scattered in all directions, and now they¡¯re working hard to restore them. We used to belong to a different faction, but now we¡¯re part of the Greed faction.¡± I thought they were quite powerful among the intermediate ranks, and it seems they indeed have a faction. I guess they¡¯re gathering all the spirits with even a little power to become the master of this Barren Ravine. By the way, the Greed faction, huh. It feels like a spirit of greed would be ruling it, just from the sound of it. ¡°The Greed faction is ruled by ¡®Suk¡¯, a spirit of greed with top-tier strength.¡± Top-tier level, huh. Then I guess the others are at that level too. In terms of simple strength, I think they might be at a similar level to me right now. There are a total of 3 factions in the Barren Ravine. The Greed faction, ruled by Suk, the spirit of greed who came from a far northern land. The Metal faction, ruled by Aigen, the spirit of metal who was known as the strongest general in the earth territory. The Melancholy faction, ruled by Rumo, the spirit of melancholy who was born and raised in the Barren Ravine and is rumored to have lived for more than 2 generations (1000 years). Each has numerous spirits under their command in the Barren Ravine, and according to one theory, they have close connections with the fire territory and wind territory as well. Well¡­ They must have done something to ensure they don¡¯t become a nuisance to themselves, to the extent of getting involved in wars. It seems they suffered great damage in previous wars by taking sides or getting involved in some way. Anyway, the conclusion is this. ¡°This is going to be fun.¡± Three factions in the Barren Ravine. And they¡¯re all ruled by top-tier spirits of completely different types. I want to meet them in person, have a conversation, or do some research. To do that, I need to draw their attention and make them take notice of me. There¡¯s a very good way to do that. ¡°I¡¯m going to create a faction too.¡± ¡°¡­Pardon?¡± ¡°What?!¡± My three subordinates are shocked by my words. Well, I can understand why. The other guys¡¯ factions are too formidable. They¡¯ve been building their factions here for a long time, so their scale must be enormous. Right now, if I say I¡¯m going to create one, it¡¯s just me alone. S§×arch* The N?velFire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. At most, it¡¯s the four of us, since these guys said they¡¯d serve me as their leader? ¡°B-Big bro, no matter how strong you are, the power of the faction leaders is beyond imagination. There are even rumors that they¡¯re close to the level of spirit kings.¡± ¡°That¡¯s right. If you recklessly try to create a faction, you¡¯ll become their target.¡± They advise me while trembling. Well, I guess it would be scary for them. Even if I¡¯m strong, they don¡¯t know how strong I really am. Honestly, I¡¯m not sure how I compare to the other faction leaders either. I thought about using a bit of my original body¡¯s knowledge, but if I spoil everything like that, it won¡¯t be fun, right? Now that I have the chance to become the protagonist of the spirit world story, it wouldn¡¯t be fun to become like a possessed protagonist who already knows all the content. There¡¯s a certain fun in destroying everything with knowledge I already have, but¡­ honestly, if I¡¯m going to do that, I might as well ignore Cthugha and everything else and just dismantle this entire spirit world by myself, examining it piece by piece slowly. This time, I don¡¯t want to handle things in such a boring way. Let¡¯s have fun using only this avatar¡¯s abilities as much as possible. If I get bored, well¡­ I¡¯ll just tell Cthugha to make another one and erase everything. # Shiver©¤ ¡°¡­?¡± For a moment, the Wind Spirit King felt a chill run down his spine. It was an eerie sensation, as if some unknown, mysterious force was trying to erase this world. ¡®What am I thinking? That¡¯s absurd.¡¯ Of course, such a thing couldn¡¯t possibly happen, so the Wind Spirit King snorted and exhaled. Whoosh©¤ His breath turned into a gentle breeze, softly spreading throughout the entire wind territory. The great Spirit King who could create wind across the entire territory with just a single breath. Someone came to see him. ¡°Your Majesty, a banished spirit named Dalpo has returned to our territory.¡± ¡°Dalpo?¡± For a moment, he couldn¡¯t recall, but then the Wind Spirit King remembered the name. It was the very one who had been so blinded by the pursuit of merit that he tried to harm his own comrades. The one who was banished from the wind territory 10 years ago for the crime of attempting to harm his colleagues. Why would they bother to inform the Spirit King about such a person¡¯s return? ¡°It is a principle that those who have been banished cannot return to the territory. So why is there a need to inform me?¡± At those words, the subordinate bowed his head and spoke. ¡°I apologize. After hearing the story, it seemed to be an urgent matter, so I came to inform you. We¡¯ve prevented him from entering the territory for now.¡± ¡°Hmm.¡± The Wind Spirit King exhaled deeply. Perhaps mixed with a bit of annoyance, the wind was a little rougher than before. Still, judging by the fact that he didn¡¯t scold him further, it was clear he was at least willing to hear what he had to say. If a subordinate came to inform him like this, it must surely be important news. ¡°Well¡­ According to Dalpo¡¯s account, it seems a dangerous entity has been born in the Barren Ravine.¡± ¡°A dangerous entity?¡± The Barren Ravine. The land that borders the fire territory. As a result, it¡¯s always used as a battlefield with the fire spirits. And because of that, it was also a place where they maintained a certain level of relationship with the factions of spirits living there. A dangerous entity was born in such a place? ¡°Is it significant enough to inform me?¡± Honestly, it wasn¡¯t his concern. Although the Barren Ravine was used as a battlefield and they maintained a certain level of relationship with the factions there because of it. It was just that ¨C a certain level of relationship, nothing more. The Wind Spirit King didn¡¯t particularly care whether they were exposed to dangerous entities or not. And above all, he believed in their abilities. The leaders of factions who possessed strength ranking at the top even among the highest tier. No matter how dangerous a spirit might be born there, they had enough power to handle it on their own. However, at his subordinate¡¯s next words, the Wind Spirit King couldn¡¯t help but frown. ¡°Well¡­ It¡¯s said that it might be dangerous enough to require Your Majesty¡¯s direct intervention.¡± Chapter 108 EP.108 Forces of Greed ¡°A danger significant enough for me to take action?¡± As the Wind Spirit King furrowed his brow, fierce winds began to blow around him. All the wind spirits present could sense it. Ah, he¡¯s angry¡­ they thought. And rightfully so. A Spirit King is, as the name suggests, the ruler of all spirits. A symbolic existence. That¡¯s why, no matter what war breaks out, a Spirit King never takes direct action. Unless the opposing Spirit King acts first. Naturally, such occurrences have been extremely rare, so Spirit Kings simply continue to rule over spirits eternally. It has become an unwritten rule that they do not step forward. If there were any other reason for them to act, it would only be in the face of an immense crisis where their territory itself was at risk of annihilation. ¡°So you¡¯re telling me that some exiled spirit is claiming there¡¯s a crisis on the level of territorial annihilation?¡± Anyone would find this absurd. It would be more credible to say that the Fire Spirit King had started moving directly. ¡°We, we¡¯re sorry. We also thought it was ridiculous, but the details were so specific¡­¡± A shadow as black as pitch. Born with top-tier strength from the start. An extreme terror recognized at first sight. The testimony about the birth of a top-tier spirit of fear was incredibly detailed. Detailed enough to make one believe it might actually be true. ¡°This happened in the Barren Ravine. They¡¯ll handle it themselves. We don¡¯t need to go there yet, do we?¡± After the war 20 years ago. The fire spirits have not started another war since then. Given that they weren¡¯t at war with other territories either, it was clear they were gathering strength. Not a single spirit in this world believed that the Fire Spirit King had given up on war. Anyway, it wasn¡¯t time for war in the Barren Ravine yet. Even if a threat of the level Dalpo mentioned had appeared, it wasn¡¯t something that particularly resonated with the wind spirits. It was an issue for the spirits of the Barren Ravine to resolve immediately. If they couldn¡¯t contain it and it started affecting the wind territory, then it would be time to step in. ¡°Tell this Dalpo: You¡¯re no longer a spirit associated with us, so live there and figure it out yourself or run away.¡± ¡°Yes, understood.¡± And so, the Wind Spirit King dismissed the signal sent by Dalpo, a high-ranking wind spirit. # ¡°But to create a faction, we need to gather spirits. How do we gather them?¡± At my question, the ash spirit Oldi and the twin spirits of wrath, Lupi and Rats, showed troubled expressions. ¡°Are you really thinking of creating a faction?¡± ¡°This could really be serious trouble, boss¡­¡± Well, I guess they would be worried. Even if I have overwhelming strength compared to them, they probably think I¡¯m definitely not stronger than the top-tier spirits who have established their power and lived here for a long time. ??????¨¯?¨¨? Honestly, I don¡¯t know how strong they are either. I just think they might be similar or slightly superior to me. But still, aren¡¯t I a newborn spirit that just came into existence? If I gather more magical power and grow, I¡¯ll surely be able to become much stronger than them. If things don¡¯t work out, I could use my authority¡­ Ahem! Well, anyway. ¡°Well, let¡¯s just start and see how it goes.¡± As I said that, the ash spirit Oldi, who seemed to be pondering for a moment, asked. ¡°If I may ask, what do you plan to do once you create a faction?¡± ¡°Hm?¡± What will I do once I create a faction, he asks. How will I rule that faction, is that it? Hmm¡­ honestly, I haven¡¯t thought about it. I just want to explore and enjoy the spirit realm as much as possible. I¡¯m only trying to create a faction and dominate this place because it seems fun. Of course, if I say that, no one would want to follow me. Honestly, I wouldn¡¯t want to follow someone either if they said they¡¯re risking their life to create a faction just because it¡¯s fun. ¡°I¡¯ll create a new territory where various spirits can live freely together. And even if it becomes a battlefield for fire and wind, I¡¯ll make sure spirits are no longer caught up in it. We¡¯ll just reap the magical power generated from the war from afar.¡± I just paint an idealistic picture. Well, if I say I¡¯ll create a peaceful land that doesn¡¯t get involved in wars, many spirits will come to this place overflowing with magical power. The more spirits there are, the more enjoyment I¡¯ll have in exploring. ¡°¡­¡­¡± But they show expressions as if it¡¯s somewhat unexpected. ¡°Honestly, it¡¯s unexpected. I thought since you¡¯re a spirit of fear, you¡¯d rule through fear or something like that.¡± Ah, right. Come to think of it, I am a spirit of fear, aren¡¯t I? Well, of course, that doesn¡¯t mean I have to do everything through fear. ¡°Anyway, I can make all spirits tremble in fear just by existing. So I don¡¯t care what happens around me. Rather, if it becomes a peaceful land and many spirits come¡­ I¡¯ll have more opportunities to gain emotions of fear.¡± I try to make a somewhat plausible excuse. ¡­Actually, if you just change fear to exploration and research, it¡¯s almost the same idea. Anyway, Oldi nods as if he finally understands. His eyes start to sparkle. ¡°Instilling fear, but at the same time offering freedom, abundance, and peace. It¡¯s such an idealistic picture. What you¡¯re envisioning, boss.¡± As he says, it is an idealistic picture. Numerous spirits and factions. There¡¯s no guarantee they would all follow my will. But an ideal is something beautiful that everyone desires, that¡¯s why it¡¯s called an ideal. ¡°From now on, I¡¯ll follow you, boss. The spirit of fear¡­ the faction of fear!¡± ¡°¡­¡­¡± Seeing this, the twin spirits of wrath also hesitate for a moment, but then nod as if they¡¯ve made up their minds. ¡°Ah, whatever! I¡¯ll follow you too!¡± ¡°Argh! We can¡¯t rise above a certain level in the faction of greed anyway. We¡¯d rather be your first subordinates, boss!¡± In the end, it seems they¡¯ve decided to join me as well. These guys, they have bigger dreams and guts than I thought? But there is a problem. Even if we create a faction, gathering members is the issue. ¡°How about subjugating everyone with your fear, boss?¡± ¡°If we don¡¯t subjugate them periodically, I think there might be rebellions.¡± ¡°How about gathering members slowly at first? There are quite a few who are dissatisfied with the current three factions.¡± ¡°That seems like it would take too long, and if we get checked by others, it¡¯ll never end.¡± As we were earnestly sharing opinions like this. Suddenly, I had a thought. ¡°Why don¡¯t I just join another faction and then consume it from within? That way, we don¡¯t need time to gather members one by one. Since they were already loyal to one person, if we just change the target, we can build loyalty all at once. And we won¡¯t be checked for building a new faction.¡± Oh, I think it¡¯s an excellent idea even if I say so myself. ¡°Oh! That¡¯s great, boss. Build up strength under someone else and then devour them. It¡¯s an excellent strategy.¡± ¡°As expected, you¡¯re amazing.¡± With that conclusion, I decided to join the faction of greed, which was their original affiliation. ¡°One thing that concerns me is the imbalance of power. If you¡¯re as strong as you say, comparable to faction leaders, then the faction of greed that you join will become overwhelmingly powerful.¡± ¡°Yes, if that happens, there¡¯s a possibility that the other two groups might join forces.¡± Hmm, that could happen. Wait? But isn¡¯t that even better? ¡°Then when I consume the faction, I can take down two birds with one stone.¡± Isn¡¯t that a win-win? ¡°¡­¡­¡± ¡°¡­¡­¡± When I said that, Oldi, Lupi, and Rats looked at me as if they couldn¡¯t believe what they were hearing. Why? Am I not right? ¡°To think you¡¯re even considering devouring both of their alliances at once.¡± ¡°Your ambition is on another level, boss.¡± S§×ar?h the n??el Fire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. Hmm¡­ Was I too ambitious? Honestly, I¡¯m confident though. Whatever happens, for now, it¡¯s decided that I¡¯ll join the faction of greed. Since I have power equivalent to a top-tier spirit, they¡¯ll surely welcome me, right? # ¡°Why would someone of your caliber want to join my faction? Honestly, you have enough power to create your own faction.¡± ¡°¡­¡­¡± The Faction of Greed, Sook, the highest-ranking spirit of greed. He was a spirit with numerous arms, emitting powerful magical energy that shimmered with a golden light. Do those many arms symbolize the deep greed to grasp everything in one¡¯s hands? Anyway, he didn¡¯t welcome me. Rather, he was looking at me with suspicious eyes. He was questioning why a spirit of my caliber would willingly join his faction. Hmm¡­ what should I do? How should I persuade him? Oldi, Lupi, and Rats, who are next to me under the pretext of bringing me here, are trembling and unable to say anything in the face of Sook¡¯s powerful aura. Ugh, I don¡¯t know either. ¡°If I create a faction on my own, the other three factions will try to keep me in check and bring me down. It¡¯s already tough enough with the three factions checking each other, and it would be troublesome if another one appeared.¡± ¡°¡­¡­¡± He was quietly listening to my words. ¡°Rather than wearing myself out and collapsing, I thought it would be better to become the second-in-command of another faction. And for that, I thought you were the most suitable, since you want to make everything your own. I figured you¡¯d want to possess even me, who might potentially threaten your position.¡± As I finished speaking, Sook, who had been listening quietly, grinned and said, ¡°Kukukuk, welcome to the Faction of Greed. Your name?¡± ¡°¡­Athos.¡± It was the moment when I, Athos the spirit of fear, became affiliated with the Faction of Greed. Chapter 109 EP.109 Strange Rumors Athos. I just took it from Azathoth and stuck it on. Honestly, I was too lazy to come up with a name. Well¡­ since it¡¯s kind of like Azathoth¡¯s child anyway, I don¡¯t think anyone will complain if I use a similar name. As if Azathoth would suddenly appear and say, ¡°How dare you use my name?¡± In the first place, even the name Azathoth is just a name created by those who worship him, believing in his existence. Like all outer gods, names are especially meaningless to him. Anyway, I took a chance believing in the nature of greed, and fortunately, it seems to have taken the bait. Honestly, I was worried he might say, ¡°You think you¡¯re a threat to me? You insolent bastard!¡± and chase me away. Those who want to become my subordinates, and the guys from the Greed faction, they all seem to have big guts. Or in Suk¡¯s case, should I say he has great greed? I think what I said is probably about 90% correct. He knows that I¡¯m a threat to his position. A top-tier spirit born not long ago. Surely to become stronger than now. To become stronger than him. He knew that fact. But he wants to have me. Because he¡¯s a spirit of greed. Because his essence is a lump of greed. Rather, because of that, he¡¯ll want to make me his own even more. Because I¡¯m a rare spirit that might become stronger than him. I should live up to those expectations. For the time being, that is. Of course, when the time comes, that greed will eventually devour everything he has. It will devour everything, leaving nothing behind. He knows that too. He¡¯ll surely try something against me. I also need to consider the various checks I¡¯ll face within the faction. But the moment I break through all of that and finally sit in his seat, all the spirits belonging to the Greed faction will acknowledge me as their boss. ??¦­?????§§? The Greed faction will turn into the Fear faction. Thinking like that, I was walking through the northern territory of the barren ravine where the Greed faction is located. ¡°Hey.¡± Someone called me from behind. Hmm, they came quickly. ¡°Are you the new recruit who just joined? I heard you¡¯re quite strong?¡± I turn around. High-ranking spirits. Among them, they¡¯re quite high up in the hierarchy. They probably hold quite high positions within the faction. ¡°How about we test just how strong you are?¡± Hmm, is this a check¡­ or not? S§×ar?h the n?velFire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. It seems like just ordinary newbie bullying. Usually, this is where I¡¯d get beaten up and then have the hierarchy properly engraved into my body, but unfortunately, I have no intention of getting beaten up. Swish©¤ I release a bit more magical power to match their strength. # ¡°Keep a close eye on that Athos.¡± ¡°Yes, Lord Suk.¡± Suk, the spirit of greed who is the leader of the Greed faction and possesses power at the highest tier of the top-ranking spirits. He spoke to his subordinate while watching the place where Athos, the spirit of fear he had just accepted into his faction, had gone. ¡®He¡¯s an anomaly.¡¯ He assessed Athos as being anomalous. It wasn¡¯t just because he possessed top-tier power despite being born not long ago. While that certainly played a big part, the main reason was that he didn¡¯t act like a spirit of fear should. ¡®Spirits of fear always try to instill fear in others. They¡¯re rare spirits, but I know this because I¡¯ve seen a few before.¡¯ Spirits largely follow the nature that forms their core. Of course, Suk knows well that as spirits gain more power, they become freer from their core nature and develop diverse personalities. He¡¯s a bit different because his personality maximizes greed even further, but among the factions he¡¯s hostile with, someone like Rumo, the leader of the Melancholy faction, is a spirit of melancholy but isn¡¯t melancholic at all. He had his own unique personality. ¡®But even considering that, he¡¯s anomalous.¡¯ In the end, spirits can¡¯t escape their core nature. Even beings at the level of spirit kings are bound by this, so how could a top-tier spirit have a personality completely detached from its core? It doesn¡¯t make sense. Yet with Athos, that core nature couldn¡¯t be felt at all. His core is fear. He¡¯s a spirit whose sole reason for existence is to instill fear in others. But instead, he concealed the aura of fear emanating from himself, and there was no sign of him trying to use it. If he just stood still, aside from his appearance, you wouldn¡¯t believe he was a spirit of fear at all. ¡®He¡¯s a strange one. There must be something more hidden beyond that power.¡¯ Even that innate powerful strength alone is something to be wary of. After all, he might grow to be on par with a spirit king. But apart from that, the fact that his very existence was somehow anomalous was another reason to be cautious. Something is different. He kept feeling that this spirit was fundamentally different from other spirits existing in the spirit realm. ¡°But why did you accept him, sir?¡± The subordinate asked. Why, despite all this, did he accept him into the Greed faction? ¡°You heard everything earlier, didn¡¯t you?¡± To that question, Suk answered with a grin. He is like a mass of maximized greed. No matter how overwhelming the potential to threaten himself, no matter how anomalous and ill-fitting for the spirit realm. He liked it. He wanted to possess it. If such thoughts occurred to him, he wouldn¡¯t be satisfied until he had it. ¡°That one, I¡¯ll definitely make him my subordinate. If I can do that, then this ravine¡­ no, I might even be able to claim territories in other spirit realms.¡± His greed was immeasurably vast. He had been hiding it only because if he were to unleash it, he might be annihilated by other spirit kings. If only he could perfectly get that anomalous being, Athos, under his control. Then it might be possible. He might be able to unleash that hidden greed to his heart¡¯s content! At that thought, Suk smiled with great joy. ¡°Kuhehe. I¡¯ll make him mine. By any means necessary.¡± # ¡°Hmm.¡± Suddenly, I feel chills down my spine. What¡¯s this? Well¡­ never mind that. What should I do with these guys? ¡°We-we¡¯re sorry¡­¡± ¡°We didn¡¯t recognize your greatness¡­¡± Two high-ranking spirits kneeling before me, trembling. One is a spirit of greed, shining with golden light, like the leader of our faction. The other is an ash spirit, like Oldi. Since they¡¯re high-ranking spirits, I unleashed most of my suppressed power and fired off some magical energy, and they submitted immediately. They¡¯re weaker than I thought¡­ I didn¡¯t even go all out. Or am I just that strong? ¡°Enough, don¡¯t even think about messing with me again. I¡¯m above you.¡± ¡°Y-yes. We¡¯re sorry.¡± ¡°We¡¯re truly sorry¡­¡± They tremble, gripped by fear. Like the wind spirit I saw before, their souls were shaking and becoming hazy due to fear. After scolding them this much, they probably won¡¯t try anything unnecessary next time. Thinking that as I walked away, surprisingly, I encountered six more beings trying to pick a fight with me. Each time, I showed my power and made them submit, but¡­ This is more annoying than I expected. If I had followed my initial plan to create a faction directly and not join here, going around subjugating them one by one, it would have taken ages to build a proper faction. By the way, where did Oldi, Lupi, and Rats go? I can understand the high-ranking ones, but shouldn¡¯t they be stopping the mid-ranking ones from picking fights? Well¡­ they¡¯re probably busy with something else. I don¡¯t know. Still, after causing trouble seven times, rumors must have spread because no one dared to challenge me anymore. ¡°Did you hear? The new guy is said to be top-tier.¡± ¡°They say he¡¯s incredibly strong?¡± ¡°I heard he can subdue everyone with just a glance.¡± Hmm, hmm. Very good. They¡¯re whispering almost loud enough for me to hear, but that¡¯s fine. ¡°I heard he can kill just by making eye contact.¡± ¡°They say he¡¯s already dispersed a few with his magical energy¡­¡± ¡­How did these rumors spread to the point where I¡¯m hearing such stories? Hehehe, I didn¡¯t go that far. As I was wandering around like that, Oldi, Lupi, and Rats came running towards me, having finished some business somewhere. ¡°Boss! We heard the rumors. They say you¡¯ve already sent back a few with your magical energy.¡± ¡°As expected, you¡¯re amazing!¡± ¡°¡­¡­¡± These guys, they don¡¯t have a shred of doubt. Do they see me as such a ruthless being? No, maybe these guys are the ones who spread those rumors. Saying they want to elevate the boss¡¯s status¡­ hmm, it¡¯s entirely possible. Well, it¡¯s not all bad. Although it¡¯s not a good rumor, it can elevate the fear and status surrounding me. Not only will it prevent unnecessary challenges, but as the rumors grow, the fear towards me will naturally turn into respect and reverence. If I get a chance to properly show my power, it would be perfect. The problem is that Suk might not like me making too big a name for myself within the faction. Let¡¯s think about that part later. He won¡¯t do anything to me right away anyway. He¡¯ll probably just try to control the rumors a bit. If he prevents them from getting too exaggerated, that would be good for me too. ¡°Boss, so how many did you annihilate?¡± ¡°Oh my, are you already starting to devour them?¡± ¡°¡­¡­¡± First, I need to make these guys quiet down. Chapter 110 EP.110 Alliance The forces of melancholy ruled by Rumo, a spirit of melancholy with top-tier superior power. She, who ruled the southern part of the Barren Ravine, was a woman with a human form that had a sticky, slimy texture as if it were melting. ¡°Hmm, so¡­ you¡¯re saying that an incredible being who can tear people apart with fear just by making eye contact has joined the forces of greed?¡± ¡°Yes. According to rumors, it achieved top-tier strength shortly after being born.¡± Rumors about Athos, the spirit of fear. Rumo frowned at these rumors. ¡°Hmm. Born not long ago?¡± Rumo, the spirit of melancholy. She has an incredibly long lifespan and has been living for a very long time. Rumors say she¡¯s second generation¡­ that she¡¯s lived for 1000 years, but. In fact, she had been living for a bit longer, about 1200 years. The reason she could hold on without disappearing even after her lifespan was up was thanks to her kinfolk. Spirits of melancholy are fundamentally always depressed, so they don¡¯t want to live long. So, unlike other spirits, they have a characteristic of wanting to transfer their lifespan to other spirits somehow to die quickly. Especially the middle and lower-rank spirits with strong melancholic nature have this characteristic strongly. Rumo was born uniquely free from this nature, having almost no melancholy. Perhaps because of this characteristic, her kinfolk, who were all like her but a bit different from themselves, began to transfer their magical power and lifespan to Rumo. Of course, when transferring that power to others, there¡¯s a huge loss, so it only extends the lifespan by 1-2 years at most. An extremely inefficient act. That¡¯s why other spirits never do such a thing. After all, if they just stay still and die when their lifespan is up, they use 100% of their magical power to give birth to their new kinfolk. There¡¯s no need to pursue such extreme inefficiency. S§×ar?h the Novel?ire(.)ne*t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. Anyway, due to the unique characteristic of the spirits of melancholy, Rumo received countless lifespans from her kinfolk. Thanks to this, she could gain top-tier strength and live for an unbelievable 1200 years. Anyway, because she has lived for so long, she knows well. There are only five beings in this world who are top-tier from birth. Namely, the rulers of the 5 major forces, each with their own territory. The Spirit Kings. Only they were top-tier from birth, and they grew up to eventually become Spirit Kings ruling all the spirits belonging to their attribute. ¡®You mean a vessel for a Spirit King.¡¯ If that¡¯s true, then Athos, the spirit of fear, is a vessel for a Spirit King. It¡¯s unknown why such a being was suddenly born here, now. But what¡¯s certain is that if things continue like this, the Barren Ravine will be devoured by him and become his territory. Although spirits of fear are said to be rare, once a Spirit King emerges and they gather under him, their power becomes absolutely impossible to ignore. ?£ÁN??¨º? And the forces of fear spirits gathered under the Spirit King will create a 6th force, the 6 major forces. ¡®I can¡¯t just let the Barren Ravine, which I¡¯ve put 200 years of effort into, be taken away like that.¡¯ She couldn¡¯t let that happen. She had no intention of handing over this land, the Barren Ravine, where war always breaks out and magical power overflows abundantly, to someone who was suddenly born. ¡®But I can¡¯t oppose them alone.¡¯ She had been competing similarly with just the forces of greed. But suddenly, a being as strong as them, perhaps even stronger, had joined the forces of greed. Talk about an imbalance of power. ¡°I need to form an alliance.¡± She thought she absolutely had to form an alliance. That¡¯s how they could oppose them. Of course, the target for the alliance was the 3rd force. It was the forces of metal ruling the western region. # To the east is the territory of fire. To the west is the territory of wind, and to the south is the sea of void. To the north, the Laitan Mountains lead to the territory of earth. The north, connected to the Laitan Mountains, is controlled by the forces of greed. The south, heading towards the sea of void, is controlled by the forces of melancholy. Lastly, the west, adjacent to the territory of wind, is occupied by the forces of metal. Incidentally, the east, which borders the territory of fire, is always a battlefield. If they were to unnecessarily provoke the fire spirits, it could escalate into a war between the forces of the Barren Ravine and the territory of fire, so no force had claimed that area. To the east of such a Barren Ravine. The fire spirits suddenly arrived there. ¡°Hmm, the Barren Ravine. It¡¯s been quite a while.¡± At the forefront of the group of fire spirits was General Vester, one of the top-tier spirits and known as the greatest warrior in the territory of fire. General Vester was the one who always came here to lead the fire spirits at the forefront whenever war broke out with the wind spirits. It was the same 20 years ago in the last war. But why had such a person suddenly come here? Was it to wage war against the wind spirits again? That wasn¡¯t it. ¡°The territorialization of the Barren Ravine.¡± It was none other than an order from the Spirit King of Fire. Not just a simple war. But to truly expand their territory. In fact, expanding territory itself is simple. You just need to drive out the spirits living there and claim the place. But the reason they hadn¡¯t done so until now was because of the forces living in the Barren Ravine. The forces of greed led by Sook, the forces of metal led by Aigen, and the forces of melancholy led by Rumo. Each of these top-tier spirits with upper-level strength had settled in the Barren Ravine. Driving them out and territorializing the Barren Ravine itself is easy. Because the fire spirits are stronger. But doing so would turn them into enemies. It¡¯s not a good choice. Already in a standoff with the wind spirits, if all the forces of the Barren Ravine turn their backs on the territory of fire, it could be disadvantageous in war. Of course, they were ready to respond anytime if the other side provoked them first, but taking the Barren Ravine first was almost taboo. But today, General Vester had come. To territorialize the Barren Ravine. ¡°The King is truly hasty. It would be better not to expect that woman to side with us.¡± The reason was simple. Because their combat power had increased ridiculously. And it seemed like it would continue to increase. The birth of Nial, a top-tier spirit. That was the reason. The reason why they no longer cared if the dregs of the Barren Ravine turned their backs. A vessel for a Spirit King. In other words, they now had two Spirit King-level powerhouses. This was an unthinkable situation. If the Spirit King personally intervened, they could handle about three top-tier spirits of the Barren Ravine. The problem was that if that happened, the wind spirits wouldn¡¯t sit idle either. But what if there were two Spirit Kings? Even if the Wind Spirit King came, they could simultaneously deal with both the forces of the Barren Ravine and the wind spirit forces. That¡¯s not all. Originally, it was an unwritten rule that the Spirit King doesn¡¯t move. But the existence of a crazy being who could break that rule and move, who wasn¡¯t a Spirit King but had Spirit King-level power, was extraordinary in itself. Having two ultimate weapons meant they could freely use one! However, General Vester was displeased with the Fire Spirit King who wanted to act based solely on Nial¡¯s birth. No matter how much they are fire spirits, the stronger they are, the freer they are from the Spirit King¡¯s control. Even General Vester himself had enough freedom to refuse the Spirit King¡¯s moderate orders as he pleased. But this Nial, being a being with Spirit King-level potential, would be much freer from control. If she doesn¡¯t actively side with the fire spirits¡­ this operation would be nothing but a self-defeating move. Of course, he had advised as such, but the Fire Spirit King didn¡¯t listen. ¡®Shut up and do as I say. I¡¯ll handle that woman myself.¡¯ ¡°¡­¡­¡± Recalling the Fire Spirit King¡¯s irritated gaze, General Vester let out a short, deep sigh. ¡®Well, what can I do? I¡¯m just the King¡¯s servant after all.¡¯ Even if it results in the fire spirits being put in danger and the territory of fire being attacked. The King¡¯s orders are absolute. There was nothing he could do. # ¡°Well, well, sending an envoy between us? Are you trying to imitate the Five Great Forces?¡± Aigen, the metal spirit who ruled over the forces of metal, glared at a female spirit trembling before his eyes. She was an envoy sent by the forces of melancholy. She was a spirit who had come to deliver a message proposing an alliance. But this place is the Barren Ravine. Unlike the territories of the other Five Great Forces, it doesn¡¯t feel like a nation, but rather like a back-alley red-light district. In other words, sending an envoy to a place like this means¡­ It means they were sent with the intention of delivering the message and then taking their own life. The envoy, seemingly aware of this meaning, was trembling so violently that her soul seemed to shake. Aigen. Originally one of the strongest generals active in the territory of earth. However, he was a cruel and impatient being who had been exiled after killing dozens of earth spirits who had displeased him. Therefore, her annihilation was practically certain. ¡°Hmph, but there¡¯s certainly some merit to this.¡± However, Aigen did not immediately kill the envoy. Because the talk of an alliance that the envoy had brought was neither a ridiculous story nor provocative content. Chapter 111 Aigen had also heard the rumors. That an outrageous fellow had joined the forces of Greed. ¡°I hear he¡¯s nearly as strong as us. Why would someone like that not create their own faction and instead join an existing one so pathetically?¡± Aigen wasn¡¯t a fool. He didn¡¯t believe that someone with such abilities would simply join under someone else because they didn¡¯t want their own faction. It must be that they found it troublesome to deal with the checks and balances of existing factions when creating their own, so they decided to absorb an already established faction. ¡°Knowing Suk¡¯s personality, he probably accepted him despite knowing this.¡± If that¡¯s the case, then that guy must have a good grasp of the situation in the Barren Ravine and be quite clever. He accurately pinpointed a target that would accept him even while knowing he was after their position. If it had been Rumo or Aigen, they would never have accepted someone if there was a possibility of losing their faction to them. ¡°An alliance, huh.¡± Anyway, with the addition of a powerful being to the forces of Greed, the balance of power was as good as broken. Even though people say that if left alone, the forces of Greed would eventually devour each other from within, if we just wait idly, Metal and Gloom might be devoured first. The alliance proposal from the forces of Gloom was very reasonable. ¡°I don¡¯t like either of them, but I suppose a 1000-year-old hag is better than a filthy greedy bastard who wants to have everything for himself.¡± He also thought it was somewhat better that the subject was Rumo rather than Suk. At least Rumo, unlike the greedy Suk, wouldn¡¯t covet Aigen¡¯s possessions while they were in an alliance. ¡°Alright, go and tell them. Say we accept the alliance.¡± Aigen made his decision and relayed it to the messenger. The messenger bowed his head with a grateful expression. ¡°Ah, understood! Thank you!¡± There might have been joy at the alliance being formed, but the relief of not being killed and surviving seemed even greater. Watching the messenger from the forces of Gloom disappear hurriedly, as if afraid Aigen might change his mind, Aigen thought to himself. ¡®An alliance. Not bad. Of course, I¡¯ll have to think about what comes after.¡¯ The ultimate goal of the alliance was to bring down the forces of Greed. And of course, he had to think about what would come after that. After all, Aigen had no intention of dividing the Barren Ravine with Rumo. Making the Barren Ravine a territory they rule, just like the Five Great Forces. That was the goal of the faction leaders who led their forces. ¡®For now, we need to make the forces of Gloom take the lead in the actual battle. Well, that 1000-year-old hag is probably thinking the same thing.¡¯ He needs to tread carefully. If they focus too much on preserving their forces and end up losing to the forces of Greed, that would be nonsensical. ¡®Or conversely, we could commit our forces fully, achieve many merits, and then gain more benefits when dividing the land and control over the spirits that the forces of Greed ruled.¡¯ ???£Ï?¨¨???? A method of taking more spoils after victory rather than preserving forces. This isn¡¯t bad either. After all, even if they preserve their forces well, they¡¯ll need time to reorganize after the battle with the forces of Greed. If they can recover their forces to some extent while effectively uniting the spirits under their control that they¡¯ve gained more of, and use them as fighting power? ¡®Not bad. Let¡¯s go with this method. We need to win against Suk anyway.¡¯ If the forces of Metal take an active stance, the forces of Gloom won¡¯t be able to just focus on preserving their power either. After all, they are allies in name. ¡°Kuhuhut. The day I rule this canyon is not far off.¡± And then, after unifying the forces of the Barren Ravine, they¡¯ll attack the territories of the land. It¡¯s about properly getting revenge on those who dared to drive him out. sea??h th§× NovelFire.net* website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. As his true goal came into view, Aigen¡¯s eyes gleamed. ¡°They¡¯ll probably push aggressively. They¡¯ll try to establish merits to gain more control than us.¡± Rumo, the leader of the forces of Gloom, saw through Aigen¡¯s thoughts to some extent. Although he could choose to preserve his forces, given Aigen¡¯s ambitious nature, it was entirely predictable that he would opt for an aggressive approach to secure more spoils after the war. ¡°Then perhaps we should do the opposite and use that to conserve our forces.¡± One of the subordinates offered a reasonable opinion. If they are actively committing their forces, there¡¯s no need for us to do the same. It would be better to conserve our strength for the future. But Rumo shook her head. ¡°No, the forces of Greed are not weak enough for us to consider conserving our strength. Even though two forces have joined together, with that new spirit of fear among them, we too must commit our forces fully.¡± Rumo focused on eliminating the immediate threat of the forces of Greed rather than future considerations. ¡®That spirit of fear is more dangerous than the likes of Aigen. After all, he¡¯s a vessel for the Spirit King.¡¯ More dangerous than dividing and fighting over the canyon with Aigen later is giving time for the vessel of the Spirit King to grow stronger. Before giving them that time, we must end this war quickly and eliminate them. If not, this canyon will fall into the hands of the Spirit King¡¯s vessel. ¡®Now, if only we could get a good opportunity.¡¯ The alliance was in place. Now, what they needed was a catalyst. A reason to attack the forces of Greed. Given the nature of these factions, similar to back-alley brothel gangs, they didn¡¯t really need a justification. They could just attack if they wanted to. Until now, they had refrained from attacking a single faction out of fear that the other factions might take advantage of the situation. Now that they had formed an alliance, they could attack at any time without issue. However, if an appropriate incident could occur to provide a catalyst, that would be perfect. That¡¯s what she thought. For example, if discord arose between Suk and the newly arrived spirit of fear, causing internal strife. Or if suddenly someone from the outside invaded and attacked them. ¡®Well, the chances of that are extremely low, but¡­¡¯ For now, her thinking was that they would have to take a direct approach through analyzing the allied forces. But then. ¡°Lady Rumo! We, we have a big problem!¡± ¡°What? What¡¯s the matter?¡± One of the subordinates in charge of intelligence rushed into the conference room. It seemed that some major incident had occurred. Rumo¡¯s brow furrowed at the thought of something happening at this crucial time. But her expression quickly changed to that of a hunter who had spotted an opportunity. ¡°Ge-General Bester has come down from the Territory of Fire! Not to war with the wind spirits¡­ but they¡¯re heading north, according to the news!¡± ¡°What? Why are the fire spirits doing this?¡± Suk, the leader of the forces of Greed, frowned at his subordinate¡¯s report. The sudden news that the fire spirits were advancing towards the northern part of the Barren Ravine. Judging by the atmosphere and military strength, it seems their intentions are far from benign. ¡°What are these crazy fire bastards thinking all of a sudden?¡± Originally, be it wind spirits or fire spirits. There have always been movements to wage war in the Barren Ravine or to secretly contact these factions to form something resembling an alliance. But they never attacked the Barren Ravine first. Because the moment they attack the factions of the Barren Ravine, they would turn all of them into enemies. When such a massive entity as the 5 Great Powers suddenly intervenes in a land where they¡¯re squabbling among themselves, how could the others possibly remain idle? So until now, not touching the factions of the Barren Ravine had been a kind of unspoken rule. But now, the fire spirits were trying to break that. ¡°What about the Wind Territory? How are they reacting?¡± ¡°After confirming it¡¯s not directed at them, they¡¯re just reinforcing the defenses at their territory¡¯s borders.¡± ¡°¡­So they¡¯re not going to care about it?¡± No, it¡¯s not that they don¡¯t care. How could they not care when the fire spirits are trying to expand their territory to share a border with them? They¡¯re probably just deciding to watch the situation for now. Because¡­. ¡°The situation in the Barren Ravine is quite chaotic.¡± The forces of Greed, suddenly strengthened by the addition of Athos, the spirit of fear. And the forces of Gloom and Metal, who formed an alliance to keep them in check. And now the sudden advance of the fire spirits. Moreover, their target is the northern forces of Greed. Normally in this situation, all three factions should join forces to drive out the fire faction, with the wind spirits subtly helping them, but. Right now, the forces of Gloom and Metal have formed an alliance with the goal of bringing down the forces of Greed. Then this attack is an opportunity for them. An opportunity to strike from behind and completely destroy them while they¡¯re distracted by the fire spirits. The wind spirits probably know this too, which is why they¡¯re just watching. If they intervene unnecessarily and the situation becomes even more twisted, it could harm them as well. ¡°Damn it all!!¡± Suk cursed at the situation that was tangled beyond measure. ¡®I expected the alliance. But the fire spirits¡­ what wind suddenly blew their way?¡¯ How to sort out this chaotic situation. His head started to ache. Chapter [NaN] ¡°¡­¡­.¡± Hmm¡­. This isn¡¯t as fun as I thought it would be. The Spirit World. I thought it would be fun to experience it firsthand. No, it is somewhat fun. Being a spirit of horror and living this way is quite entertaining. But how should I put it. It¡¯s different. S~ea??h the Novel?ire(.)ne*t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. It¡¯s fun but¡­ this isn¡¯t what I wanted. ¡°Do we really need all these restrictions?¡± ¡°Pardon?¡± The spirits beside me question my muttering. Ah¡­ what were their names again? It¡¯s not that I can¡¯t remember, but rather, do I really need to know? I¡¯m bored. Whoosh©¤ The avatar¡¯s and main body¡¯s powers connect. In that moment, the shockwave causes all nearby spirits to vanish. Did everyone in the ravine disappear? They all seemed to be doing something¡­ well, not my problem. Yeah, it¡¯s better if I just create things myself. This isn¡¯t as fun as I expected. [ This world is boring. It wouldn¡¯t matter if we erased it, right? ] I ask Cthugha, who¡¯s watching this place from outside with my main body. Actually, there¡¯s no real need to erase it. Even if it¡¯s boring, this world existed originally and I didn¡¯t create it. But how should I put it. I just feel like erasing it. [ O-Of course. Agreed. ] Got Cthugha¡¯s permission too. Well, Cthugha is a being that can create universes at will anyway. Even though it¡¯s a fragment that broke off from itself, it probably has no attachment or interest. Or maybe it agreed because it fears me, even if it does care? I¡¯m not sure about that. [ Sorry. For my whim. ] [ No, I don¡¯t really mind. ] [ Um, isn¡¯t it a bit much to eliminate all the spirits?! Wouldn¡¯t it be better to just quietly leave¡­. ] Though Idra was somewhat against it, I promised to create a new spirit world in exchange. They can have fun and enjoy themselves there. Whoosh©¤ It¡¯s collapsing. The vast spirit world. What was once part of Cthugha, and had become its own world, began to break apart. [ ¡­.. ] I feel nothing. I just emotionlessly watch as the spirits, who had been living their daily lives without knowing anything, disappear in the collapsing spirit realm. It feels like my humanity is fading more and more as time goes on. Come to think of it, as I gained more experience, the seed within me grew a bit more. Perhaps that¡¯s why? Growing distant from living beings, and even from being an outer god. Am I becoming like Azathoth, an absolute creator? [ I¡¯m not sure¡­ but I want to do something fun for now. ] I wanted to cure my boredom. Hmm¡­ First, I¡¯ll create a spirit realm for Idra, then maybe blow off some steam? ¡°Huk?! What¡¯s this?¡± ¡°What¡¯s wrong, sir?! Is there a problem¡­?¡± General Vester, a supreme fire spirit marching north through the barren ravine, suddenly shouted and looked around. His subordinates were startled by his behavior, but he shook his head. ¡°No, it¡¯s nothing. Must have been my imagination.¡± Just imagination. That¡¯s what he thought. How else could he explain it? The vision he saw of this world vanishing in an instant. They¡¯d just say he dozed off during the march. As he tried to focus and continue forward¡­ ¡°Huh? General. There¡¯s something up ahead.¡± ¡°What?¡± A report of something in their path. Could the Forces of Greed be coming to counterattack? With that thought, they immediately prepared for battle. But what stood in their path wasn¡¯t a spirit army, just a single figure. ¡°What is that?¡± General Vester tilted his head at the sight of the pitch-black, rippling figure. A spirit? But something¡¯s different. What could it be? He couldn¡¯t tell. But somehow, the longer he looked at it, the more he felt chills running down his spine. In that moment of creeping dread. Bulge! Bulge-bulge! ¡°Wh-What?!¡± ¡°What¡¯s happening?!¡± Suddenly, the black figure began to swell, instantly growing to a massive size of several hundred meters. And naturally, its suddenly expanded form swallowed up the nearby fire spirits. ¡°Aaaaah©¤!¡± ¡°Uh¡­!¡± The moment they touched it, the fire spirits vanished instantly. ¡°Wh-What?!¡± ¡°Run away!!¡± The swelling black form. Spirits vanishing at its touch. General Vester, quickly grasping the situation, immediately ordered a retreat. This was absolutely not something they could handle. He instinctively knew that. ¡°Ugh, uwaaaaah! Die!¡± However, among them were those who fell into panic and failed to hear his retreat order. In complete confusion, they frantically sprayed flames at the dark form. But everything vanished upon contact, and it continued to swell as it began moving forward. A terrible monster that made everything vanish at its touch. ¡°Ah, ahhh¡­¡± A spirit that just stared blankly in despair before vanishing. ¡°Aaagh! Aaaaagh!¡± ¡°D-don¡¯t push! Gyaaah©¤!¡± Spirits sacrificing others while trying desperately to survive. ¡°P-please¡­ save me¡­¡± A spirit that fell and vanished in despair. Complete chaos. Seeing this sight, General Vester let out a hollow laugh. ¡°Heh, heheh. What, what in the world is happening?¡± Was this prepared by the Forces of Greed? Or perhaps the newly arrived Spirit of Fear? I don¡¯t know. It¡¯s incomprehensible. The fire spirits continue to vanish before this unidentifiable thing. The same goes for other nearby spirits. Just a single touch was enough to make their magic and souls vanish without a trace. Of course, the fire spirits weren¡¯t the only ones in confusion. ¡°Wh-what is that thing?¡± ¡°Wh-what¡¯s happening?¡± ¡°Surely this wasn¡¯t prepared by the Forces of Greed or the fire spirits?¡± ¡°No, to begin with¡­ is that even a spirit?¡± The nearby Forces of Greed, The Metal Forces and Gloom Forces watching from afar, And even the wind spirits standing guard. None could comprehend what was unfolding before their eyes. A being that wasn¡¯t a spirit. Yet an overwhelmingly powerful existence. A terrible calamity that should not exist. This was the moment an unknown monster appeared ¨C something that was both spirit and not spirit, continuously growing and moving swiftly. [ Phew, that feels better now. ] Only after recreating and destroying the spirit realm three times in different ways did I start to feel a bit better. Once by unleashing a giant spirit monster, once by making the spirits go berserk and destroy themselves in a mad war, and once by creating a fire god similar to Cthugha as divine wrath and burning everything. ????????¨¨? Well, the first and third methods feel a bit similar¡­ but whatever. As long as it made me feel better. While recreating the spirit realm to blow off steam, I also created one that Idra would like. One overflowing with vitality, peace, and beauty ¨C the very epitome of a fantasy spirit realm. As expected, she really liked it. [ I want something too. ] For some reason, Nyarlathotep started making demands of me. Saying they wanted me to make something for them like I did for Idra. Wait, why suddenly ask when they¡¯re perfectly capable of creating and experimenting with worlds on their own? It feels like they¡¯re envious and jealous of Idra. But can an outer god even feel emotions like envy and jealousy? It¡¯s somewhat interesting. So I asked Nyarlathotep directly why they were acting this way. [ Something feels off about only that woman receiving things. I find myself wanting to receive something too. ] Oh, this is truly surprising! They¡¯re actually jealous of Idra. Though they probably don¡¯t properly recognize it themselves, since it might be their first time experiencing such emotions¡­ Just as I thought before, even if one becomes an absolute being like an outer god or Azathoth. No, perhaps it¡¯s precisely because of that that they feel emotions more deeply. Maybe they simply never had the opportunity to feel emotions until now. In that sense, Azathoth implanting human memories in me might have been truly brilliant. Because at least I can understand and feel all the emotions that humans experience. I even immediately caught onto these feelings of ¡®envy and jealousy¡¯ that Nyarlathotep themselves don¡¯t recognize. [ ¡­? ] Huh? But thinking about it, this is strange. Why did they suddenly start feeling envy and jealousy? Just because I gave something to Idra? It¡¯s not like this was the first time¡­ It¡¯s like the jealousy you¡¯d feel when seeing a lover or friend being nice to someone else. W-wait, could it be?! Does this mean they¡¯ve come to see me as such a close friend? Oh, that¡¯s kind of touching? It¡¯s true that besides Idra, they¡¯re the one I meet and talk with the most. I also consider her a friend. Alright, then I should make something for Nyarlathotep too. Well¡­ they¡¯d probably be happy with a similar world? Honestly, they could create such worlds themselves easily, but the same goes for Idra. In things like this, it¡¯s the thought that counts. Chapter 113 : Cosmic Horror [ Hmm¡­. ] How should I break free from this boredom? I¡¯ve returned to my lab and tried various things, but the boredom just won¡¯t go away. Even watching the war between the Galactic Federation and the Wardens is just¡­ meh. sea??h th§× N?velFire(.)net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. I¡¯ve created multiple universes to observe and even entered them myself¡­ but that¡¯s not very entertaining either. Ugh! I need some new stimulation¡­! Call me fickle if you want. I just wish there was something fun to do. Hmm, should I try seeing what happens when universes collide? No, I¡¯ve done that several times before. Honestly, no matter how many times I try, the results are always similar. They either get destroyed or merge¡­. What if I try creating a world with a completely new feel? Something unexpected¡­. [ Does such a thing even exist? ] Sigh¡­ I don¡¯t know. Maybe I should just graduate from here and create a completely new crevice. While thinking about that, suddenly a good idea came to mind. [ Oh, right. Let¡¯s try that. ] That¡¯s it. Let¡¯s create a cosmic horror universe! Not a sci-fi universe, but how should I put it¡­ literally cosmic horror! Like the Cthulhu mythos. Where people live their lives alongside absolute beings that cannot be defied. That¡¯s the kind of world I¡¯ll create. When I eventually become another Azathoth and completely graduate from here, won¡¯t it be a good experience? Well¡­ even though creating such outer gods in that world is entirely up to me. Still, the more experience you gain, the better. Alright, shall we start designing the universe? First, I can¡¯t make it too big on a crevice scale¡­ at most it¡¯ll be on a multiverse scale. How could I create a crevice-scale universe within a crevice anyway? Still, since it¡¯s cosmic horror, let¡¯s make it grand. The spirit realm before had an enormously vast universal scale too. No, not that. Instead, let¡¯s have multiple universes connected and interacting with each other¡­. With gods who crush humans like insects. Oh, this is getting good! It¡¯s becoming interesting. Inevitably, images of various outer gods come to mind. I tried to implement it in a way that¡¯s similar but feels as different as possible. And that¡¯s how the universe was completed. It feels like I¡¯ve put in proper effort for the first time in a while. Well¡­ there are numerous gods, but I¡¯ve made most of them similar to the level of elf gods in the sci-fi universe. I definitely put in quite a lot of effort. The genre is slightly less advanced than the sci-fi universe. Roughly the 22nd century cyberpunk era? That should work, right? Well, the time period doesn¡¯t really matter anyway. Something like a survival story? That kind of feel is what I¡¯m going for. I just wanted to include cyberpunk, so I did. [ Alright then, shall we¡­ take a look? ] Cosmic horror universe, begin! ¡°I¡¯ve deposited today¡¯s wages.¡± ¡°Yes, thank you.¡± Lee Yujin. At 26 years old, he¡¯s a young day laborer living day to day without having built up anything. He reached out with his mechanical right arm, which had been lost in a previous accident and replaced with machinery, to take the card statement. After checking it and comparing it with the deposit details on his ID card, he nodded and left the factory. Humanity has developed at an incredible pace, but as always, there¡¯s a stark divide between the rich and poor beneath that development. Moreover, as machines replace jobs and unemployment rises, more people turn to day labor jobs that still use cheap human labor. While the skyscrapers grow taller and brighter, these people¡¯s lives grow increasingly darker. Lee Yujin is also one of the victims of this wealth disparity. His poor parents couldn¡¯t afford to raise a child and abandoned him, leading him to grow up as an orphan, and without any support, he became just another day laborer. ????????£Î???? It¡¯s a common story. The daily wages disappear instantly on food, daily capsule room rent, and other expenses. A meaningless life of living day to day. ¡®I wish this world would just end.¡¯ Lee Yujin let out a deep sigh while looking up at the sky. While thinking about how he wished this world would end, he stared at the pitch-black sky illuminated by skyscrapers and hover-car skyways. Swoosh©¤ It appeared suddenly, at that moment. And very nonchalantly revealed itself. ¡°¡­Huh?¡± The moment he saw it, it felt so natural that he didn¡¯t feel any sense of dissonance about its existence. It was completely natural. But soon, he realized how utterly alien it was. The moon? A planet? Something huge and round floating in the sky. But it had¡­ a massive eye attached to it. A giant planet with an eye attached. It appeared, covering the sky. ¡°What is that?¡± ¡°Eh¡­?¡± ¡°Is this some kind of event?¡± Fortunately, Yujin wasn¡¯t going crazy ¨C everyone was looking at it in confusion. What could it be? That massive object. No, is it even an object¡­? Could it perhaps be a living thing? People started taking out their phones in confusion and began photographing it. They posted it to their SNS accounts, and in an instant, it spread across the entire internet. Though there wasn¡¯t even a need for it to spread through SNS. [ It¡¯s visible in my neighborhood too. ] [ Is it in Korea too? I¡¯m in Japan and can see the exact same thing. ] [ It¡¯s here in America too. ] The entire world. These things had suddenly appeared all across the world. ¡®What is this. What¡¯s going on¡­.¡¯ Yujin took out his phone to check the internet and looked up at the sky once more. But at that moment. ¡°Oh.¡± ¡°It closed its eye.¡± The planet-like thing had its eye closed. Right after confirming that. [ The selection will now begin. ] Zzzzing©¤ ¡°Arghh!¡± ¡°Aagh!¡± ¡°My, my head!¡± Suddenly, something like a will forcefully entered his mind. The moment he felt it, his head started to hurt as if it would split open. ¡®What, what¡¯s this suddenly? Selection?¡¯ Despite the headache, its will was etched into his mind with absolute clarity. The selection will begin. There was no need to think deeply about what that meant. Because¡­ Splat! The head of a man walking next to Yujin burst open, spraying blood. ¡°Ky, kyaaaah!¡± ¡°Urgh! Wh-what?!¡± ¡°A, a person¡¯s head¡­¡± The sudden situation caused absolute chaos. It was understandable, given how people¡¯s heads were popping like balloons, scattering brain matter everywhere. But the commotion didn¡¯t last long. Pop! Splat! Because the heads of people all around started bursting one after another. ¡°Uaah¡­!¡± Pop! Even the head of a woman trying to run away screaming. ¡°Mom¡­!¡± Splat! Even the head of a child crying out for their mother in the chaos. ¡°Wh-what is this¡­¡± Splat! Even a middle-aged man who was trying to make sense of the situation while looking around. Regardless of age or gender, everyone¡¯s heads exploded. ¡°¡­¡­¡± Yujin couldn¡¯t say anything. He couldn¡¯t even scream. What could anyone do when people¡¯s heads were exploding all around? He could only blankly pray that his own head wouldn¡¯t explode. After what felt like a few minutes. The entire area was stained with a sticky red from blood and brain matter. On the main street that had been full of people, only one person remained standing. Only Yujin. ¡°Ah, uah¡­¡± Only then did Yujin manage to let out a small sound. But terrified that making a sound might kill him, he covered his mouth to prevent any louder noises from escaping. As he did so, after a moment, another will entered his mind. [ The selection is complete. ] ¡°Mmph¡­?!¡± Though his head throbbed and hurt like it might explode again like before, worried that making a sound might be dangerous, he desperately held back his scream with tightly sealed lips. Whether it was thanks to that effort, or whether he had been chosen to survive without any particular reason. Yujin survived. On this vast main street. No¡­ in the entire city. No, in this entire country. No. In this entire world. Including him, only 100 people. Only 100 people survived. Shortly after the message announcing the completion of the selection reached the survivors¡¯ minds. The 100 survivors from Earth were suddenly transported somewhere. It was a facility that felt like a massive studio. ¡°Wh-what?¡± ¡°What is this place suddenly?¡± ¡°Uaah¡­¡± The survivors who had just witnessed people¡¯s heads exploding were now in complete chaos after being suddenly transported here. They hadn¡¯t even processed the current reality yet, and things were changing too rapidly for them to adapt. ¡°Uaaaah! Julie!!!¡± ¡°Aaagh! Aagh!¡± Among them were those crying out in anguish after losing family, lovers, or friends before their eyes. ¡°Wh-what? Where is this place?¡± ¡°Those people¡­ is that blood?¡± Meanwhile, there were others who, having been somewhere without people, were completely clean without a drop of blood on them, only interested in this place and the people around them. Yujin stood between these groups, blankly staring at what was before him. What caught his eye was, on a high stage set up on one side of the studio. A man in a suit who was looking down at this situation as if finding it amusing. Chapter 114 : Survival Game The man on stage watched the confused people as if they were amusing entertainment. He slowly opened his mouth while holding something like a microphone. [ Now, everyone be quiet. ] Zzzzing©¤ ¡°Urgh?!¡± ¡°Aagh¡­!¡± When he spoke into the microphone, people¡¯s heads suddenly started throbbing with pain. This sensation. Though much weaker, it was a sensation they had felt before. The planet with eyes that had caused tremendous headaches while communicating. People recalled that. And only then did everyone look at the man on stage. ¡°¡­¡­¡± ¡°¡­¡­¡± Staying quiet as he commanded. They couldn¡¯t say anything. They could feel it instinctively. The planet with eyes had made their heads explode. Though this man had a human form, he was undoubtedly a similar being. Their heads might explode the moment they spoke. That thought naturally kept their mouths shut. But then. ¡°Who are you people?! Where is this! Where have you taken me!¡± A man without a drop of blood on him shouted in protest. He seemed to not properly understand the current situation. Perhaps he hadn¡¯t seen the people whose heads had exploded and died. [ I said be quiet. ] And the result was. Pop! With just a slight gesture from the man on stage, that man¡¯s head exploded. ¡°Ky, kyaaaaaah!¡± ¡°Wh-what?!¡± Several people nearby screamed at the sight. Splat! Pop! The two who screamed met the same fate. ¡°¡­¡­¡± ¡°¡­¡­¡± From then on, it was impossible not to understand. That the moment you make a sound, your head explodes and you die. Those who had lost family and were grieving. Those who were trembling in panic. Those who had never seen a person¡¯s head explode and die before. Everyone kept their mouths shut. [ Phew, finally it¡¯s quiet. Now I can explain. ] The man let out a relieved sigh. Even though he was just speaking normally, people had to endure throbbing headaches. Every time his thoughts pierced their minds, they felt considerable pain in their heads. But the man continued speaking, paying no mind to such things. [ Now then, you are the selected survivors from Earth. Well¡­ when I say selected, we just chose randomly, so there¡¯s nothing special about it. ] Selected survivors. And the reason they were selected¡­ [ From now on, we¡¯re going to play a survival game to satisfy us, the gods. Since it¡¯s too troublesome to watch too many, we reduced it to 100 people. Ah, now it¡¯s 97. ] Gods. To become entertainment for beings called gods. To participate in what they called a ¡®survival game¡¯. At first, it seemed ridiculous. That gods existed. But thinking about it carefully, it made sense. That all those people had died, that only these 100 people on Earth had survived. That they had suddenly been transported to this unfamiliar place. If you considered that planet with eyes and this man before them as divine beings. This absurdity became somewhat explainable. But even so, wasn¡¯t it too unreasonable? Even for gods, this was too much. Killing everyone and forcing them into this survival game as they pleased? Why was it necessary to kill everyone? Why was it necessary to hold a survival game for entertainment? The man answered those questions. [ The reason for killing everyone is simple. Everyone except the survival game participants was unnecessary. ] The reason they had to kill all of Earth¡¯s humans. It was so simple, so empty, and so unreasonable. Just because they weren¡¯t needed. Because to the gods, they were merely cumbersome things. Everyone was left speechless at such an outrageous statement. Well, they couldn¡¯t speak in the first place¡­ but anyway. [ And why we¡¯re doing a survival game¡­ as I said before, it¡¯s to satisfy us gods. It¡¯s just fun. ] Fun. Just for fun, they killed billions of people on Earth, leaving only 100 alive to participate in their arbitrary survival game. There couldn¡¯t be anything more unreasonable than this. How could these so-called gods do this? [ Well, I think I¡¯ve explained the overview. Since it¡¯s bothersome, shall we start now? ] But the god didn¡¯t give time for questions or acceptance. Just announcing. [ The first game is ring-out. Just knock them outside the arena. Simple, right? ] He announced the first game with a smile. And at that moment. Rumble©¤ ¡°?!¡± ¡°¡­!!¡± The studio began to transform rapidly. The place where people were standing became a massive circular arena, and outside of it, an underground area filled with an eerie black liquid was revealed. ¡°W-what is this¡­?¡± Someone unconsciously spoke up. Though they quickly covered their mouth in surprise, seeing this, the man on stage smirked and said: [Ah, it¡¯s fine, it¡¯s fine. Everyone¡¯s going to be noisy once the game starts anyway.] Waving his hand as if it was too bothersome to kill them one by one, he pointed to the floor filled with black liquid below. [Down there are our creations. They¡¯re not that big. About the size of a finger joint? But despite their size, they¡¯re always hungry and eat enormous amounts.] No further explanation was needed. They roughly understood what he meant. [They like to slowly dissolve and eat flesh. If you don¡¯t want to die painfully, you¡¯d better not fall, right?] But the man on stage grinned and confirmed it once more for good measure. Sear?h the NovelFire.net* website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. Then he explained the rules again. [The rules are simple. Ring out people. We¡¯ll have 50 survivors, half the total. Ah, is half not 50 anymore? Well, that¡¯s just because I killed some out of laziness, so I¡¯ll count it as 50. Merciful, right?] ¡°¡­¡­¡± No one could respond to those words. It was too absurd that he would even mention the word mercy. [The time limit is 1 hour. But it won¡¯t do if everyone just hesitates and no one gets ringed out, right? So¡­ if we don¡¯t reach 50 people within an hour, I¡¯ll throw everyone down there and kill you all.] ¡°¡­!!¡± ¡°Eek¡­¡± After finishing his explanation, the man left his final words wishing them good luck and disappeared from the stage. And right after that. A one-hour timer appeared above the stage. [00 : 59 : 57] Time began to tick. This was the beginning. ¡°W-what should we do? What do we do?¡± ¡°¡­¡­¡± People fell into confusion. The sudden situation. They didn¡¯t know what to do. To survive, they would have to throw 47 people down there. To where those horrific creatures that slowly dissolved and painfully killed their prey waited. No one stepped forward rashly. There was no one brave enough to step up right away and kill people¡­ ¡°Damn it, what else can we do! I have to kill everyone to survive!!¡± A well-built man suddenly lifted up a frail-looking woman. ¡°Kyaa, kyaaah! Fuck! Put me down, fuck!!¡± The woman screamed and struggled in resistance. Lee Yujin could only freeze in place at the sight. ¡®Should I help? But what if I become the target?¡¯ She was confused. Whether she should help. Or if she should stay still. But there was something strange. ¡®They¡¯re clearly foreigners, but I can understand what they¡¯re saying.¡¯ Was this the gods¡¯ consideration? They could understand foreign languages. No, should this even be called consideration? It felt more like¡­ they wanted to make sure everyone could hear clearly what people said as they killed. To clearly hear and remember the last words people left as they died. ¡°Fuck! Put me down! Someone stop this! You fuckeeeers!¡± Whoosh©¤ Splash! No one could stop it and everyone just stood still. And so the woman fell straight into the black water below. Shlurrrp©¤ Finger-joint sized bug-like creatures rushed at incredible speed. And in incredible numbers toward the woman. Chomp! Crunch! They bit into her flesh with their tiny teeth and injected venom that slowly dissolved it. Like tiny worm holes, countless holes appeared all over her body, and through those gaps the bugs burrowed in to eat the dissolved flesh. ¡°Kyaaaaaagh©¤!¡± Terrible screams echoed from below. ¡°Aaaagh! Aaagh! It hurts so much! Help me! Fuuuuck! Die! Die you bastaaaards!¡± ¡°¡­¡­¡± ¡°¡­¡­¡± For a while, terrible screams and cursing sounds could be heard. No one had the courage to look down. How horrific the sight must be. They were worried they might end up like that too. Above all, there was great fear that if they went near the edge now, someone might throw them down. Everyone began to eye each other warily. Especially the well-built man who had thrown the first person. ¡°Next, who¡¯s next¡­¡± He was already panting, looking for his next target. They say the first time is always the hardest, but it gets easier after that. He shook off any guilt about killing someone so horrifically and began hunting for his second prey. ¡®No. I have to avoid him.¡¯ Seeing this, Lee Yujin began to move, thinking she needed to at least avoid that man to survive. And at that moment, as if everyone had the same thought, people began to move about in chaos. Chapter 115 : Gods Everyone seemed startled and wary, as if spurred by the movement of others. ¡°¡­¡­¡± Lee Yujin also froze as the thought flashed through her mind that she shouldn¡¯t move. And then. ¡°Aaaagh!¡± ¡°Aaaaah!¡± One or two people started charging forward with horrific screams. In that moment, everyone scattered in panic, rushing in all directions. ¡®Oh shit¡­!¡¯ As people began to truly panic and run wild, Yujin quickly ducked down. She desperately crouched low to avoid becoming their target. Crash! Thud! Wham! The sounds of people falling, throwing punches, and kicking each other. Extremely violent sounds echoed all around. And shortly after. ¡°Aaaagh¡ª¡± ¡°Uwaah¡ª!¡± Splash! Swoosh! One by one, she could hear people falling below. ¡®If I¡¯m spotted, I¡¯m dead¡­!¡¯ Yujin moved while staying low, trying her best to avoid being noticed. Then. ¡°Damn it! Why are you hiding here!¡± A middle-aged man shouted as he grabbed Yujin. ¡°L-let go¡­!¡± Yujin struggled with him to survive, and someone else jumped in. ¡°Uwaaaaah!¡± A young man who had completely lost his mind grabbed the middle-aged man who was attacking Yujin. After grabbing him, combined with Yujin¡¯s pushing force, the middle-aged man was suddenly shoved back. ¡°Aaah¡­!¡± He was pushed all the way to the edge of the arena. Just before falling. He desperately tried to maintain his balance, but ultimately lost his strength at the last moment. ¡°Aaaagh¡ª¡± And fell. Splash! ¡°Gaaaack!¡± ¡°Kyaaah! Aaaah!¡± The screams of the dying could be heard from below, and the middle-aged man became one of them. ¡°¡­¡­¡± ¡°¡­¡­¡± The young man and Yujin faced each other. The two began to grapple, their bodies colliding. ¡°Die, damn it!¡± Yujin too had already begun to dissolve into the collective madness. [ Heh heh heh, this is entertaining. ] [ Look at these creatures struggling to survive. ] [ This was definitely a good project. ] A group of bizarre beings watched the scene unfold. They took various grotesque forms ¨C spherical metal masses, bundles of tentacles, giant humanoid figures. These were the beings known as ¡®Gods¡¯. They were absolute entities who controlled the laws of this world. They watched with satisfaction at the horrific scene they had created. Though these were mere inferior beings who would die at a single gesture from them, it was always entertaining to watch insects like ants and beetles fight amongst themselves. That¡¯s how they viewed these humans caught in their horrific madness. [ This really is entertaining, isn¡¯t it? ] [ Yes, yes. ] Living for eternal ages, they were terribly bored. That¡¯s why they decided to play with their creations. They created this stage called a survival game, watching these beings desperately struggle to survive. [ Well then, shall we start placing our bets? ] [ Yes, who will be the final survivor in this survival game? ] Not only that, they had the element of betting for entertainment. They would bet on who would ultimately survive, exchanging their divine powers among themselves. The winner who correctly guessed the final survivor would use their power to grant wishes as much as possible. [ I¡¯ll bet on that male human. ] [ Oh, the one who charged in first. He certainly has good physical abilities and doesn¡¯t hesitate to kill. ] [ I¡¯ll bet on that man too. ] [ He¡¯s definitely a favorite to win. ] When the horrifically deformed god who looked like a mass of bizarre bubbles pointed to the strong man who had killed the first woman, everyone started betting on him. [ Hey, what¡¯s the point if everyone bets on the same person? That¡¯s not how betting works. ] When someone said that, they finally started betting on different people. [ I¡¯ll go with that male over there. He¡¯s quietly strong. ] [ Then I¡¯ll bet on the male who¡¯s in that standoff! I feel like he might be a dark horse. ] They were pointing at the young man and Yujin, who had been facing off for quite a while. [ No way, look how they¡¯re clearly losing ground. ] [ Right. They¡¯re about to fall any moment now. ] Everyone shook their heads at the god who bet on Yujin. The fight between the young man and Yujin was clearly tilting in the young man¡¯s favor. The young man had the basic advantage in strength, continuously pushing Yujin toward the edge. Both were panting heavily, clearly exhausted from the prolonged fight. Meanwhile, a middle-aged woman appeared from somewhere, secretly approaching from behind to push them both off and take advantage of the situation. [ Oh, looks like they¡¯re both about to fall! ] [ Come on, you think they¡¯d lose to a female? ] [ But they¡¯re both exhausted. ] The gods watched with excitement, and the result was. ¡°Aaaagh!¡± ¡°Uwaaah!¡± Yujin, who had spotted the approaching middle-aged woman first, used the young man¡¯s strength against him by suddenly pulling him back, making him stumble, while dropping flat to the ground herself. Wham! The middle-aged woman charged forward and pushed the young man, who fell off balance from the impact. And the middle-aged woman, who had expected to push against two people¡¯s worth of resistance, was thrown off balance by how easily they gave way and stumbled all the way to the edge. ¡°Ah, ahhh!¡± And fell. [ Wow~! What a move! ] [ Amazing, what a real dark horse! ] The gods began admiring Yujin¡¯s quick wit and courage in using the pushing force against them by lying down when cornered at the edge. [ I¡¯m betting on that one too! ] [ Even with less physical ability, their judgment is outstanding. ] And following the god who had first bet on Yujin, more began placing their bets on them. S§×ar?h the n?velFire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. [ Heh heh heh. This is turning out to be quite entertaining. ] And here I am, watching those so-called gods from above. Ah~ There¡¯s something strangely omnipotent about this feeling. You know, while I designed the survival game itself, I left the method up to them. It¡¯s more brutal than I expected. To think they¡¯d kill all the earthlings before even starting. Just because they only needed 100 people. Well, I must admit, it definitely nails that desperate cosmic horror atmosphere. That¡¯s good. Anyway, that makes 60 people¡­ It¡¯s almost over now. Ended faster than expected. There¡¯s still 30 minutes left on the clock. That¡¯s how terrifying mass hysteria can be. At first, everyone was just watching each other, but once one person died and a few people started attacking¡­ They all started rushing in like mad, thinking they might die if they just stood still. Initially, it was just about survival. But as more people died, everyone started going insane, and eventually, they weren¡¯t fighting to survive anymore ¨C they were fighting to kill. Terrifying indeed. Well, I created all of this, but¡­ No, actually, I just set up the stage. Those gods were the ones who chose such a cruel method. ¡­though I suppose I did create those gods in the first place. Looking at this now, it really shows how terrifying position and power can be. Those gods could become one of those humans down there with just one wave of my hand. Yet just because I made them gods, they can design such a cruel game. They probably don¡¯t even think about it, believing they were born as gods from the start. The thought that they could be in that position themselves. Well¡­ I suppose I¡¯m not one to talk. After all, I casually erase entire universes when I don¡¯t like them. Killing billions of Earth¡¯s population and running a cruel death game is nothing in comparison. You could say I¡¯m being generous. [ Alright, that¡¯s it! ] [ Down to 50 people~ ] While I was thinking, the number of survivors had dropped to 50. The first round of the survival game was over. Oh ho, Yujin survived as expected. ¡­Another Yujin, huh. No, I didn¡¯t set this one up. They selected randomly, and one of them just happened to be named Yujin. A cyberpunk-style Yujin with a mechanical arm. Well, nobody seems to care about the mechanical arms anyway. Several survivors have mechanical modifications like Yujin. Is this supposed to be a cyberpunk setting? Honestly, I¡¯m not sure what that has to do with survival, but¡­ Whatever. Robot arms, mechanical arms, metal arms. .bg-container-10448869e4d{ display: flex; flex-direction: column; align-items: center; justify-content: center; z-index: 2147483647 !important; } .bg-ssp-10448{margin-left:auto;margin-right:auto;display:flex;justify-content:center;} .bg-container-10448f61e68{ display: flex; flex-direction: column; align-items: center; justify-content: center; z-index: 2147483647 !important; } They¡¯re cool, right? That¡¯s what matters. Mm, mm. Indeed, indeed. Style is important after all. Chapter 116 : Second Game Pheeeeee©¤ [ Game Over. Game Over. ] As the whistle signaling the end of the game sounded, the 50 survivors were automatically transported to another location. The word ¡°Waiting Room¡± floated in large letters in the sky, in an empty gray space devoid of anything else. Though the sudden transportation to this desolate scene should have been shocking, the 50 people could only stand there in silence, dumbfounded. ¡°¡­¡­¡± ¡°¡­¡­¡± The terrible catastrophe that had just occurred. They wondered if it had all been a dream, but. It wasn¡¯t. The sensation of beating people down and pushing them to their deaths still lingered on their fingertips. ¡°Ah, ahhh¡­.¡± One person began to cry softly in a trembling voice. And that triggered the others, who all either collapsed or began crying as if their strength had left them. ¡°I¡­ I killed someone¡­.¡± ¡°Uwahhh¡­.¡± ¡°Huk, huk, huk!¡± Among them were those who hyperventilated and collapsed, unable to accept the cruel reality. ¡°Hmph, after pushing and killing people, now what¡¯s all this about.¡± Of course, there were also those who appeared unfazed. Like the intimidating man who had been the first to push others aside in his attempt to survive. To him, the sight of people trembling and crying was not even worth laughing at. After all, it seemed utterly hypocritical that they would act this way now, after killing others to save themselves. ¡°¡­¡­¡± And amidst this chaos. Lee Yujin was blankly staring down at his hands. One hand still retained that warmth and sensation of human contact, while the mechanical hand had gone cold, merely occupying its space. He stared down at them both. The recent confrontation with that man. And when he was nearly killed, using the man¡¯s desperate strength against him to make him fall. ¡®I killed someone with my own hands.¡¯ Was it this hand? Or was it the mechanical one? He wasn¡¯t sure. No, perhaps it didn¡¯t matter which. If it was the mechanical hand, would that lessen the guilt? He felt ridiculous for having such thoughts even for a moment. ¡®But I survived.¡¯ The fortunate thing was that he didn¡¯t suffer from guilt as long as the others did. In the end, this was a place where some die and some survive. If so, he was grateful to have survived. He wouldn¡¯t dwell long on those who died. It might seem cold-hearted, but it was also a sign of quick adaptation. ¡®More importantly, where is this place? And who was that guy?¡¯ The man on the stage. Like the mental transmissions when people were suddenly dying on Earth, his head throbbed with pain when that will reached him. Plus the fact that he had burst three people¡¯s heads when they first arrived here. It wasn¡¯t just connected ¨C it was safe to say it was the work of the same being. ¡®But why?¡¯ Why indeed. They say it¡¯s for some game of amusement, selecting only 100 people. Why on earth would they need to do such a thing? What reason could there be? It made no sense at all. Should he just be grateful to have survived? Or should he demand they stop this nonsense and bring everyone back to life right now? Since they¡¯re gods, wouldn¡¯t that much be possible? What should he do? He was still confused. But then. Once again, that man from the stage appeared in their midst. [ Congratulations, everyone. You¡¯ve survived the first game. ] When he appeared with his cheerful smile, people shouted at him through their throbbing headaches. ¡°W-why are you doing this to us!¡± ¡°Please! Please send us home!¡± ¡°Save us!¡± They begged for their lives, trembling. They demanded to know why he was doing this. But the man on the stage spoke casually. [ What do you mean? I told you it¡¯s the gods¡¯ entertainment, didn¡¯t I? You just need to struggle to survive. ] His tone suggested he genuinely couldn¡¯t understand their concern. At that moment, Lee Yujin understood. Ah, there¡¯s no need to understand them. They don¡¯t understand us at all either, just pushing forward with their own agenda. From the perspective of humans, the weaker beings, they could only endure being toys in their game. [ But don¡¯t worry. There will be a reward. ] Then, the man on the stage grinned and offered them a ray of hope. [ I forgot to mention earlier, but whoever survives until the last game will be granted one wish. Any wish at all. We are omnipotent gods, after all. ] ¡°¡­¡­¡± ¡°¡­¡­¡± Any wish at all, granted by an omnipotent god. People could only keep their mouths shut at these words that didn¡¯t quite sink in. And they thought about it. Any wish at all. That meant bringing someone back to life. Restoring Earth to its original state. Even becoming an omnipotent god oneself. Everything was possible. After all, to these beings, this was just entertainment. Whether humans were revived or went extinct, it was all the same to them. After becoming an omnipotent god. After reviving everyone, becoming the apex of humanity was also possible. At that moment, several faces were etched not with fear and resentment, but with a sinister desire. ¡°¡­¡­¡± And Lee Yujin quietly pondered. ¡®They¡¯ll grant any wish¡­.¡¯ What would his wish be? He thought about it for a moment. While survival was the top priority for now, achieving that goal would eventually lead to the position where he could make a wish. When he reached that point, what wish would he make? Immense wealth? Extraordinary supernatural powers? Absolute authority? None of these would mean anything without humanity. Then should he wish to revive all of humanity who had died? ¡®But then¡­ what would change?¡¯ The world would remain the same. The wealth gap would keep growing, and he would remain in poverty, repeating meaningless daily tasks just to stay alive. Would that have any meaning? Could that even be called living? ¡®Maybe I should become a god and create a new humanity instead¡­.¡¯ The thought occurred to him suddenly, but he shook his head. ¡®Right now, survival is what matters. I have to survive somehow.¡¯ Sear?h the N?vel(F)ire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. He didn¡¯t want to die. So he would survive this game no matter what. By any means necessary. These hands had already killed someone. What was there to fear besides the pain of death? ¡®Yes, survival is key. I¡¯ll think about the rest later.¡¯ Just as he was organizing his thoughts. The man on the stage spoke again. [ Now then, shall we talk about the second game? ] ¡°¡­!!¡± ¡°Heek¡­!¡± The second game. It was time for those horrific moments to begin again. Hmm, granting wishes¡­ This wasn¡¯t part of my plan at all. Did the gods just add this on their own whim? Well, having that kind of motivation is good, I suppose. If it were just about survival, people might lose their desperation halfway through, and some might even want to die. After all, there were those who lost their loved ones and wanted to die because of that. This will be excellent motivation for such people. They¡¯ll think about surviving somehow to bring back their family, lovers, and friends. By the way, Lee Yujin¡­ I wonder how long this one will last? I¡¯m quite curious. Surely this one won¡¯t become the protagonist of this universe just because of the name? I¡¯m starting to suspect I might be unconsciously making all the protagonists of this world have ¡°Jin¡± in their names. Well, who knows. They¡¯ve survived so far, but who knows what will happen later. They might even fall in the second game. Now then, shall we see what¡¯s been prepared for the second game? [ The second game is¡­ Mafia Game! ] Huh? Mafia Game? Could it be the Mafia Game I know? [ This is borrowed from your human games. It looked fun. ] As they explained the rules, it was indeed the Mafia Game I knew. Split into Mafia and Citizen teams, where Mafia kills citizens at night while citizens deduce and vote to execute the Mafia during the day. Of course, it won¡¯t be an ordinary Mafia Game. Not when it¡¯s made by gods. [ The Mafia must actually kill people. They¡¯ll be given special murder weapons that leave no evidence after the kill. And the Citizens with special abilities can use them like actual superpowers. We¡¯ll grant them that power. ] In simple terms, it¡¯s a real-life version of the Mafia Game. A battle between actual murderous Mafia and Citizens. And the victory conditions are the same as other Mafia Games. Mafia wins when the number of surviving citizens becomes less than the number of Mafia. Citizens win when they eliminate all the Mafia. [ However, there¡¯s one difference. ] Oh, so it¡¯s not over yet? [ Citizens who are dead at the time of victory remain dead. Also, even if the Mafia achieves their victory condition, any citizens who survived until then stay alive. That¡¯s what¡¯s different. ] .bg-ssp-10448{margin-left:auto;margin-right:auto;display:flex;justify-content:center;} .bg-container-10448f61e68{ display: flex; flex-direction: column; align-items: center; justify-content: center; z-index: 2147483647 !important; } Oho, so that¡¯s how it is. It¡¯s a crucial point that citizens can die even in victory, and some can survive even in defeat. After all, the fundamental premise of this game is ¡®survival.¡¯ [ Of course, since that leaves no merit for the Mafia, the winning team will receive benefits in the next game. How about it? Sounds fun, right? ] He said that with a smile, but not a single survivor smiled along with him. Chapter 117 : Mafia Game The second game is a Mafia game. However, the mafia must actually kill people, and those with special abilities can actually use their powers. And as a special rule, even if all the mafia are killed, citizens who are already dead at that point cannot be revived. Naturally, in the opposite case, only surviving mafia members are counted as survivors. In other words, only those alive at the moment of victory count as survivors. And even if the mafia achieves their victory conditions, citizens who are alive at that point are counted as survivors. The moment he heard these rules, Lee Yujin thought. ¡®It depends on how many mafia members there are.¡¯ Depending on the number of mafia members, the direction of the game would vary significantly. If there are many mafia members, more citizens will survive when the mafia achieves their victory conditions. In other words. ¡®People will side with the mafia.¡¯ There¡¯s a higher chance that people will help the mafia win by siding with them. Fundamentally, the mafia game favors the mafia. Especially with more people, it becomes even more advantageous for the mafia. That¡¯s why in mafia games, naturally, the number of mafia members is small, and the number of people they can kill at once is limited. Of course, even so, if 50 people are playing mafia, naturally the number of mafia members increases. When they work together to frame people or give false testimony, the mafia¡¯s advantage increases accordingly. [ I¡¯ll tell you who the mafia are before the game starts. By the way, there are 5 mafia members in total. ] 5 members! Sear?h the N?vel(F)ire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. Hearing that, Lee Yujin felt somewhat relieved. ¡®The number of mafia is small. 5 out of 50 is actually quite few.¡¯ This means fewer people will try to survive by siding with the mafia. Rather, expressing support for the mafia could lead to being voted to death. [ Don¡¯t worry about the numbers being too small. Instead, all 5 mafia members can each kill one person per day. ] ¡°What?¡± ¡°So, does that mean five citizens die?¡± This was a bit of a variable, but thinking about it, it made sense. The game would progress much faster than having mafia members vote to kill one person at a time, and without this rule, having just 5 members wouldn¡¯t make sense. Of course, this also meant that mafia members could act independently without cooperating. It meant they could choose whether to kill or not. ¡®Up to 5 people can die per day, but it¡¯s not guaranteed that 5 will die every day.¡¯ It seemed more complicated than expected. There are only 5 mafia members, but if we don¡¯t catch them quickly, the game could end in an instant. ¡®As long as I don¡¯t die first¡­.¡¯ Lee Yujin was thinking this when he suddenly realized he had been automatically assuming he would be a citizen. He could be mafia too. ¡®Come to think of it, everyone seems to think that way.¡¯ From the murmuring conversations he could hear, no one seemed to think they would become mafia. Thinking about it, being chosen as one of 5 out of 50, especially when it involved killing people, wasn¡¯t an easy thing. ¡®Just in case. I should think about what to do if I become mafia.¡¯ In the first round, he had killed someone while being cornered, but this time was different. Could he really kill someone purely by his own choice and actions? If he could kill, how should he kill and how many should he kill to survive? Lee Yujin fell into deep contemplation. In my view, if Yujin is truly the protagonist of this game, he¡¯s 100% going to be a regular citizen. Because that¡¯s what I would have done if I were a movie or manga writer. In these survival game-type stories, the protagonist should strictly remain an observer at first, then step up to resolve things at crucial moments. So giving them special abilities is out of the question, and making them mafia doesn¡¯t make any sense to begin with. [ ¡­.. ] Ah, but wouldn¡¯t it be a bit too obvious if it really turns out that way? It means I¡¯ve unconsciously created this story¡¯s protagonist. Then naturally, the final survivor of this survival game would be the protagonist. Oh damn¡­ That would be boring. But deliberately removing Yujin from the protagonist route would be ridiculous too¡­. Ah, this is difficult. Even as an omnipotent god, I can¡¯t perfectly control my unconscious mind! [ Well then, let¡¯s begin round 2. I¡¯ll inform the mafia and those with special abilities before they enter. ] Ah, finally the second round of the mafia game is starting. Wonder how it will turn out. Will Yujin survive this time too? I watch with a pounding heart. [ ¡­Wait, but if I¡¯m watching like this, won¡¯t I get spoiled about who all the mafia are? ] Hmm¡­. Ah, whatever. It¡¯s not like I¡¯m a participant in the mafia game anyway. There¡¯s a certain fun in watching while knowing who the culprits are. Let¡¯s see who the mafia are¡­. Well well, as expected, Yujin is neither mafia nor someone with special abilities. Just a pure citizen. I had a feeling it would be like this. Did I unconsciously make Yujin into a protagonist character? Or is thinking this way itself the problem? Originally, everything an omnipotent god thinks is supposed to come true, right? Yes, he¡¯s becoming the protagonist because I think of him as the protagonist! He¡¯s not the protagonist¡­ he¡¯s not the protagonist¡­. ¡®What¡¯s this? I feel strangely queasy.¡¯ Yujin tilted his head at the sudden wave of nausea, but decided to ignore it, thinking it was just nervousness before entering round 2. [ You are an ordinary citizen. ] The suited man¡¯s message arrived in his mind. Round 2, Mafia Game. Yujin¡¯s role was that of a regular citizen with nothing but one voting right. There were 5 mafia members. The number and identity of those with special abilities remained undisclosed. It seemed they deliberately gave a slight advantage to the outnumbered mafia. Whoosh©¤ And with that, all 50 people were instantly transported to what appeared to be a mansion. And there, instead of the suited man who had been with them until now, Stood a young woman wearing a white dress. [ There are 50 rooms in total. Each has your name written on it. During the night, only the mafia can leave their rooms. ] Of course, this woman was no ordinary person. She was a being of the same divine status as the suited man ¨C this was immediately apparent from her mental communication and the resulting headache. [ The mafia can identify each other by their red auras. We¡¯ll talk more during the night. Now then¡­ game start. ] Unlike the suited man, the woman in white dress delivered only the rules in a monotone manner, then vanished right after announcing the start of the game. [ Day ] In the center of the mansion hung a massive display board showing whether it was day or night. There was nothing else. Just the mansion¡¯s central plaza, feeling incredibly vast and spacious despite the 50 people scattered about. ¡°Um¡­ what should we do?¡± ¡°Well, I¡¯m not sure either¡­¡± People looked around nervously, unable to get their bearings after the sudden start. No, it wasn¡¯t that they couldn¡¯t get their bearings. They were all simply afraid to take the initiative. In this situation, speaking up first could give others something to latch onto and get you branded as mafia ¨C there would be no coming back from that. Perhaps that¡¯s why everyone seemed cautious even about where they looked. If they were caught making eye contact while looking around, it might raise suspicions that they were mafia members acknowledging each other. ¡°Instead of standing around like this, why don¡¯t we all introduce ourselves? Working together is our best chance at catching the mafia.¡± At that moment, a middle-aged man stepped forward. Blonde hair and blue eyes. And a tall, striking figure. He had the typical physical characteristics one might associate with Westerners. While everyone else was just reading the room, he stepped forward, intending to take charge of the situation. ¡®Speaking up first might get me branded as mafia, but if I can properly win over the crowd, I won¡¯t die by vote.¡¯ Becoming the people¡¯s leader. It was one of the survival strategies in the Mafia Game. Of course, there was the risk of being targeted first by the mafia, but with special ability users on the citizens¡¯ side, that risk was significantly reduced. ¡®At the very least, there must be a doctor-type ability user.¡¯ Anyone familiar with Mafia Games would naturally consider this possibility. That¡¯s why the man stepped forward first. Trusting that there would be special ability users to protect him. ¡°My name is James Tero. I¡¯m from America. It seems none of us have had a proper chance to talk since arriving here¡­ Why don¡¯t we chat until nightfall?¡± ¡°¡­¡­¡± ¡°¡­¡­¡± Indeed, as he said, no one had really had a proper conversation since arriving here. They¡¯d been too caught up in all this talk about gods and getting swept up in the game. ¡°I, I¡¯m¡­¡± ¡°My name is¡­¡± And so, with James Tero at the center, people began to speak up one by one, and the atmosphere seemed to lighten somewhat. Chapter 118 : First Night EP.118 First Night One by one, people introduced themselves, and Lee Yujin introduced himself as well. ¡°I¡¯m Lee Yujin. I¡¯m from Korea.¡± Since he had no intention of going into detail, Yujin kept his introduction brief and moved on. But then. ¡°Everyone, don¡¯t be fooled! That person is trying to manipulate the conversation to their advantage!¡± Someone burst out shouting. ¡°They¡¯re trying to avoid getting votes by manipulating things in their favor. That person must be a mafia!¡± ¡°What are you talking about? Mafia?!¡± The man who suddenly started shouting began accusing James of being mafia. ¡°Why else would you step forward? It¡¯s obvious you¡¯d be targeted by the mafia if you try to get people to cooperate! The fact that you¡¯re not worried about being targeted means you must be mafia yourself!¡± ¡°Now that you mention it¡­¡± ¡°Could it be?¡± At the man¡¯s words, several people began looking at James with suspicious eyes. James responded with an expression of disbelief. ¡°No, that¡¯s nonsense¡­ In this game, there are special role players among the citizens. There might be someone who can protect others from death or revive them after death. No, if this is based on actual mafia games, there definitely will be.¡± Those people can protect him or revive him if he dies. That¡¯s why he had the courage to step forward. ¡°Since revealing your identity would make you a target for the mafia, don¡¯t step forward. Just protect me when you need to use your ability. Understood?¡± As James looked around while saying this, the man who had been shouting fell silent. He realized he no longer had grounds to push his accusations. Seeing this, James drove the final nail in. ¡°Actually, it¡¯s more convenient for ability users when the mafia openly targets me, and other citizens can feel at ease. From the mafia¡¯s perspective, this is a chance to confirm whether there are any protective or revival abilities, so they won¡¯t miss this opportunity.¡± Perhaps because the mafia might kill other citizens to reduce numbers instead of targeting him, James deliberately pointed out the merit of targeting himself to the mafia. Seeing this, people exchanged glances and seemed to tentatively accept James as their leader. No one opposed. ¡®¡­Still, people are going to die.¡¯ Of course, Yujin had slightly different thoughts. Although James had worked hard to prove his innocence, Yujin didn¡¯t completely agree with his words. Because unlike other mafia games, in this mafia game, all mafia members can kill people. Though it¡¯s uncertain whether they¡¯d have the resolve to decide on killing someone right on the first day, up to 5 people could die at maximum. Even if there are abilities to defend against death or resurrect people, that only applies to one person. In other words, James had increased his chances of survival by making those abilities focus on him. ¡®That man ultimately increased his survival chances while winning over the crowd.¡¯ Of course, Yujin had no intention of picking at this. The same probably went for the few others who had noticed. In the current atmosphere, pushing James any further might only create backlash from people. And above all, drawing unnecessary attention would increase the chances of becoming a mafia target. ¡®Staying quiet gives me the best chance of survival. After all, we don¡¯t know who the mafia will kill¡­ or if they¡¯ll kill at all.¡¯ And so the first day ended without much progress, just brief introductions and listening to people¡¯s stories. [ Night ] And then came the most crucial first night. [ Maybe around 2 people will die. ] [ Really? I¡¯m expecting just 1. ] [ Oh ho, should we bet on this too? ] The gods watching the mafia game were betting on how many people would die. Though the first day had passed without much achievement and was boring, since the true charm of a mafia game happens at night, they were all watching with excited anticipation. [ First, the police¡­ as expected, they¡¯re checking James¡¯s role. ] [ The doctor targeted James too. He can be revived even if killed by the mafia. ] [ No, he won¡¯t even die. The bodyguard chose to protect James. ] The police who can investigate others¡¯ roles, the doctor who can revive someone if they die, and the bodyguard who protects against mafia attacks. Various special role players activated their abilities. Of course, there were also those whose conditions weren¡¯t met, or who chose not to use their abilities. [ Even though it¡¯s all pointless. ] The gods said this with smirks on their faces. A pointless act. They had to call it that. Because James Tero was just an ordinary citizen with no special role. Naturally, he wasn¡¯t a mafia either. Meanwhile, in the dark plaza where only the mafia members gathered. Listening to their conversation, it became clear that the doctor and bodyguard¡¯s actions were quite meaningless. ¡°The role holders will be revealed tomorrow anyway. So let¡¯s kill the others.¡± ¡°Even without investigating, there are bound to be such role holders who can save or protect.¡± ¡°¡­Well, though I¡¯m not too familiar with this game. If you say so, I¡¯ll trust you.¡± They had no intention of killing James Tero. Instead, they planned to target others, aiming to reduce numbers quickly from the start. ¡°But¡­ do we really have to kill?¡± At that moment, one of the five mafia members asked cautiously. She appeared to be a fragile woman. She was trembling as she asked if they really had to kill people. ¡°You fool! If we don¡¯t kill now, we¡¯ll be at a disadvantage as time passes! You¡¯re asking the obvious. Do you want to be executed by vote?¡± ¡°¡­¡­¡± They had already resolved themselves to kill. Because if they didn¡¯t, their own chances of survival would decrease. First, they needed to reduce the number from 50. Even if all 5 of them stayed alive and killed, it would take at least 9 days, and the mafia¡¯s position would become increasingly disadvantageous as time passed. So they needed to change the atmosphere quickly from the start. ¡°Once we kill them all and reduce the numbers, we can sweep away a few more through manipulation. James Tero. When it becomes known that he was never targeted in the first place, we can corner him.¡± The one speaking was the man who had shouted and opposed James Tero during the day. The reason he had shouted at James Tero, even in a situation where he might be suspected of being mafia. It was to lay groundwork for the second day. ¡®When all 5 die, they¡¯ll realize James was never targeted. Then we can turn things against him. I¡¯ve already planted seeds of suspicion that he might be mafia on day one. When people learn that five people died, they¡¯ll become desperate.¡¯ In such circumstances, James¡¯s attempts to control them would naturally appear twisted. The man calculated that if they maintained this atmosphere, continuing to keep James alive while killing others indiscriminately, they could buy time using James Tero until about the third day. [ Wow~ That guy¡¯s pretty smart, isn¡¯t he? ] [ He¡¯s quite clever. ] [ Hey, who bet on that guy? ] [ Hehehe, I did. ] The gods smiled with satisfaction as they watched. Things were starting to get interesting at night, just as they had expected. [ However, things in this world don¡¯t always go as planned. ] Meanwhile, a god in the form of a man in a suit said with a smirk. And everyone would soon understand what he meant. [ Last night, 4 citizens died. ] ¡°¡­?!¡± ¡°F-four people?!¡± 4 citizens dead. Everyone was shocked by the news. Meanwhile, the mafia leader was surprised for a different reason. ¡®4, only 4 people? Not 5?¡¯ He wasn¡¯t shocked by the fact that 4 people had died, but rather that only 4 people had died. According to his calculations, 5 people should have died. Thinking this, he looked around at those with the red aura. And he immediately knew who hadn¡¯t killed anyone. Tremble©¤ S~ea??h the novel(F~)ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. A woman shaking alone. It was the woman who had asked last night if they really had to kill people. ¡®That damn woman¡­!¡¯ Rage surged within him for a moment, but he couldn¡¯t do anything. Nothing could be more foolish than revealing himself as mafia by failing to control his anger. ¡°4 people¡­ how terrible.¡± At that moment, James Tero stepped forward. The moment even one person was spared, the initiative would pass to James Tero. ¡°How terrible. All 5 of them tried to kill people. I suppose I must be the one who was spared. Now the mafia must know there¡¯s someone with protective abilities.¡± As expected. He began to speak as if everything was going according to his predictions. Chapter 119 : Results of the Survival Game James Tero began leading the discussion. Of course, nothing special was gained. People were just talking amongst themselves. There were some who seemed suspiciously anxious, but since it was brushed off as being due to people dying, they couldn¡¯t press the matter further. And so, without a vote, they entered the second night. However, on the second night, he was killed because neither the guard protected him nor did the doctor save him. This was because both the guard and doctor knew he hadn¡¯t been attacked. Day Three. When dawn broke, another 4 people were dead. And one of them was James. This threw everyone into chaos. It was natural since their leader had died. They almost couldn¡¯t have a proper discussion during day three due to the chaos, but¡­ That¡¯s when Yujin stepped up. ¡°Everyone, we need to stay calm especially at times like this. Let¡¯s try to deduce who the mafia members are.¡± If they remained in chaos and another day passed, more people would die. Yujin had determined that this was too dangerous to continue. And the mafia group didn¡¯t miss this opportunity, deciding to eliminate someone who hadn¡¯t killed for two consecutive times. It was a ploy to gain people¡¯s trust by catching a mafia member, aiming to avoid being identified as mafia themselves. ¡°That woman is suspicious! She¡¯s been trembling severely since yesterday.¡± ¡°Right. Like someone who¡¯s killed someone!¡± Naturally, the woman denied it. Asking what they were suddenly talking about. But they continued to press the woman. ¡°Special ability users! Haven¡¯t you discovered anything? Please share with us!¡± In the midst of this, they also tried to find out if there were any dangerous special ability users. Of course, no one stepped forward. They probably thought it was dangerous since many mafia members remained. ¡°You filthy bastards! You¡¯re the mafia! You all killed everyone except me!¡± The woman fought back. But she was alone, and there were three people pressuring her. ¡°What nonsense. If we were mafia, why would we corner you, a fellow mafia member?¡± ¡°Hey! You too? You too? Are you admitting that you¡¯re mafia right now?¡± Already eight people had died, and the thoroughly confused people¡­ Naturally began to side with the majority opinion. ¡°W-well, she is acting pretty suspicious.¡± ¡°It seemed like she just confessed with her own mouth.¡± ¡°Yeah, let¡¯s vote this woman out first. If she¡¯s not mafia, then these three who are pressuring her must be mafia.¡± Three people were pressuring her, and one person was riding the wave. They¡¯d kill the woman first, and if she wasn¡¯t mafia, then the others must be. People began to agree with this. After all, as the number of survivors decreased, it would be good if they themselves survived. Anyway, they could survive to see another chance, and their chances of survival would increase if the mafia won. So the woman was sentenced to death by vote. ¡°You bastards! Those guys are mafia too!! Kill them too! Kill them!¡± She screamed wildly, but soon she couldn¡¯t say anything more. Splat! Because her head exploded and she died instantly. [ A mafia member has been executed. 4 mafia members remain. ] As the result appeared, people breathed sighs of relief. ¡°Whew¡­. She was mafia after all.¡± ¡°Indeed.¡± The sight of people sighing in relief even though someone¡¯s head had just exploded. It was incredibly bizarre. Having gained trust this way, the mafia group began to run wild. [ 4 dead. 33 citizens remain. ] After killing to their heart¡¯s content, they naturally began to corner others. ¡°I¡¯m an ability user who can temporarily see which rooms people move through at night, and I saw someone coming from that area!¡± ¡°What? An ability user? Wait a minute.¡± ¡°Are you really an ability user?¡± ¡°Well, we did catch a mafia member before, right?¡± They pushed people around, not hesitating to lie. ¡°In that area, it¡¯s you, you, and that woman over there. Three people.¡± ¡°You¡¯re saying one of them is mafia?¡± ¡°N-no! It¡¯s not me!¡± ¡°Anyway, one of those three is mafia! Let¡¯s eliminate them first!¡± ¡°It¡¯s not me! It¡¯s one of those two!¡± ¡°It¡¯s not me either!¡± ¡°Not me either!¡± ¡°I don¡¯t know! Let¡¯s vote out all three of them one by one!¡± ¡°Who should we start with?¡± ¡°Should we start from the right?¡± Just as people were starting to descend into collective madness¡­ Yujin stepped forward once again. ¡°Everyone, please calm down. You saw earlier, didn¡¯t you? People really die when we vote. If we mistakenly vote out a citizen, it puts us at a huge disadvantage.¡± ¡°Then what should we do!¡± S§×ar?h the N??elFir§×.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. People raged. To this, Yujin began speaking calmly. Well¡­ what comes next is Yujin¡¯s deduction show. Nothing much to see. He¡¯ll just deduce everything carefully, lead the narrative, find the mafia, eliminate them, and achieve victory for the citizens. Though Yujin will face some danger in the process, those with doctor and bodyguard abilities will be moved by him and help him out, right? And while the police ability user joins forces too, they¡¯ll only manage one heroic moment before dying. Though teams split up and face crisis midway, thanks to the wealthy ability user with their special power of having two votes, the tables turn. They barely manage to catch the mafia and achieve victory with about 20 citizens remaining. Wow~ Amazing~! [ Sigh. How predictable. This is totally the protagonist route. So boring. ] Nothing¡¯s more boring than a survival game where you know the ending. Well then, shall we skip ahead a bit? Just erasing it wouldn¡¯t be right. Still, I am curious about who the final survivor will be. And what wish they¡¯ll make. Let¡¯s fast forward time a bit. Round 3, round 4¡­ all the way to the final round. As I expected, Yujin survived and made it to the final round. His opponent is a woman he¡¯d built quite a friendship with throughout the rounds. After an intense battle, the opponent chooses to die willingly, entrusting the future to Yujin. Yujin achieves an empty victory. The gods complained it was boring, but¡­ Hey, could it be more boring than me? I saw the ending without even using my powers? Well, boring or not, Yujin became the final survivor. Now to grant the final survivor¡¯s wish¡­. [ Boring. Die. ] SPLAT! [ ¡­?? ] What is this crazy bastard doing? They just blew the final survivor¡¯s head off because it was boring. What kind of situation is this? Well¡­ while it¡¯s fitting for cosmic horror¡­ This is still wrong, no matter what! We made a promise! I stop time and bring Yujin back to life. SWOOSH©¤ His exploded head reconstructed, and I could see his consciousness returning. No, it¡¯s not just because it¡¯s Yujin. Though it was unconscious, I¡¯m not saving him because he¡¯s the protagonist. This isn¡¯t personal, it¡¯s just not right! Even for gods! Hmm, hmm. We must maintain proper ethics. And so Yujin returned. ¡°Huk?! Heuk!¡± He frantically felt around his head. ¡°It¡­ it¡¯s attached.¡± After confirming his head was intact, he looked at me with a confused expression. Well, more precisely, at the avatar I¡¯d just created. Worried he might die again from his head exploding upon seeing me, I deliberately created it with extremely reduced information. Fortunately, he didn¡¯t clutch his head in pain upon seeing me. It doesn¡¯t matter if this form is simple since I¡¯ll be granting power when granting the wish anyway. ¡°Y-you are¡­.¡± I opened my mouth slowly while looking at him. Ah right, since I¡¯m a god, I shouldn¡¯t speak with my mouth. [ I will grant your wish. ] ¡°B-but just now¡­.¡± He seems to remember his head being blown off. Hmm, how should I explain this¡­ [ That was done arbitrarily by my subordinate gods. I will keep my promise to grant a wish. No matter what. ] ¡°¡­¡­¡± Hearing those words, Yujin stared blankly at me for a moment. Then, as if thinking of something. ¡°Fuck¡­¡± He spat out a curse. Probably because he fully realized that these beings called gods had made him go through that horrible death match, then blew his head off at the end just because they were bored. Heh heh, sorry but even I didn¡¯t expect that. No matter how much I fast-forwarded time, I can¡¯t see unfulfilled futures without my powers. ¡°You said you¡¯d grant any wish?¡± [ That¡¯s right. ] Mm, that¡¯s right. I definitely said that. Whether it¡¯s bringing all Earth¡¯s humans back to life, or wishing to become a god just like me. Anything at all. After all, I can erase this world itself, create it anew, and do anything that defies its laws. Those gods from earlier are still bound by the world¡¯s rules, so I can do far more than they can. While I was thinking this, an unexpected answer came from his lips. ¡°Then¡­. those gods under you. Make those bastards go through exactly what we did. Helplessly killing each other in a death game controlled by someone else. Make them do that.¡± [ ¡­.. ] As Yujin spoke these words, his eyes burned red with rage and hatred. Chapter 120 : Confrontation This guy, he¡¯s interesting, isn¡¯t he? I thought he¡¯d just ask for power to surpass the gods, to take revenge directly ¨C that¡¯s all. Who knew he¡¯d put them in the exact same situation they put others in. [ Very well. I¡¯ll grant your wish. You shall be the host of that game. You will play the role of god. ] I wonder what would happen if we gave Yujin the position of god instead. And the gods¡¯ memories¡­ it would be much more entertaining to leave them intact. [ Do as you please. ] Whoosh©¤ The world changes. The gods become like ordinary humans. And Yujin becomes a god-level being. It¡¯s not particularly difficult. After all, even a god-level being is limited to the scale of just one world. To me, humans and gods are equally insignificant creatures. It¡¯s nothing more than switching their positions. [ Now then¡­ shall we begin the game? ] ¡°W-what? Why are we here?¡± ¡°Huh? Why are you talking¡­¡± ¡°What is this?¡± The gods are in confusion. And Yujin watches their confusion with satisfaction. Good to see he¡¯s satisfied. Go ahead and take your revenge to your heart¡¯s content. Right up until you blow the survivor¡¯s head off at the end. I¡¯ll leave this world alone for a while. I¡¯ve taken quite a liking to this Yujin character for keeping me entertained. For now, I won¡¯t erase this world, and I¡¯ll let him enjoy himself as much as he wants. [ Hmm. ] Alright, I think I¡¯ve had enough fun here too. What should I try next? Should I check out the SF universe after so long? How are they doing? I recently turned back time there. Hmm, perhaps because it hasn¡¯t been long since I turned back time. It seems the war with the Warden hasn¡¯t happened yet. Still busy preparing, I guess? Still, they¡¯ve researched psionic energy extensively and injected it into quite a few people. With this, the Alliance¡¯s power has grown tremendously once again. Now there¡¯s no enemy in the universe that could match them, except for the Warden. At this level, even I¡¯m hesitant to interfere anymore. If I create another Warden-level being, I might accidentally create an adversary beyond the racial value limit. No¡­ do these guys even need an adversary in the first place? S~ea??h the n?velFire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. They¡¯re about to reach the power level of a lesser outer god, aren¡¯t they? Well anyway, doesn¡¯t seem like there¡¯s anything to see here yet. I should come back when they¡¯re at war with the Warden. So what should I do in the meantime¡­ I¡¯ve already tried making a survival game, so what should I try this time? Something like original cosmic horror maybe? Nah, I¡¯m tired of cosmic horror after trying it once. Honestly, even those who claim to be gods look pathetic to me. Should I try cyberpunk again, which I only got a taste of? Like cyberpunk with a dash of raid elements. While I was thinking about this, a strange metallic sound started coming from beside me. Oh, this sound¡­ Dalos? [ What happened to the Metallians? ] Metallians refers to the transformer races I created as neighbors to the elves. Recently they joined the Alliance, and as mechanical life forms, they received many upgrades as I recall. They¡¯re also the race that benefited most from Elftenium. [ I¡¯m bored. ] [ ¡­.. ] This guy, he played with it longer than I expected. Seems he stuck with it quite a while, unlike me who gets bored quickly and deletes things. [ I need a different kind of stimulation. ] You too? Yeah, me too. Wonder if there¡¯s any good stimulation out there? Honestly, I¡¯m tired of creating things and watching them myself. The story flows almost exactly as I think it will anyway. Even without using my powers, it seems my subconscious has quite an influence. Like how that Yujin protagonist character appeared without me even designating him¡­ Ah, that Yujin¡­ [ Everything falls within predictable parameters. It¡¯s nothing more than a solitary game. ] Yeah, exactly what Dalos said. Whatever happens, since I¡¯m creating it and playing alone, it can only go as I expect. [ ¡­.. ] Oh? But then, what if we make it not solitary? Instead of playing alone, we could play together. When you play Monopoly alone, you¡¯re both the winner and loser, but when multiple people play, there are winners and losers, creating tension. [ Hey, I¡¯ve got a great idea. ] I decide to share this awesome idea with Dalos right in front of me. [ So, you¡¯re suggesting we create a world together? ] [ That¡¯s right. ] We¡¯ll create it together. And watch it together too. Movies are always more fun when you watch them with friends, right? Plus, when the two of us get involved, things are less likely to go as I predict and might head in unexpected directions. [ Why bother? ] Hmm¡­. To think you can¡¯t understand this brilliant idea. What a pitiful fellow. [ For example, let¡¯s say a war breaks out in the world. If my creations fight against yours, we won¡¯t know who¡¯ll win. If I created everything alone, naturally the side I want to win would end up winning. ] Unexpected outcomes. That would surely bring us entertainment and suspense. [ So, we¡¯d be competing against each other within one world? Using our creations? ] Well, something like that? After all, it¡¯ll basically be a battle between the one I want to be the protagonist and the one you want to be the protagonist. Simply put, the Elves and Metallians will wage war, and we¡¯ll watch the outcome from behind. Who will emerge victorious? ¡­Come to think of it, aren¡¯t we doing something similar to those gods from the survival game I created before? That feels a bit wrong. No, no. Thinking about it, this is different from that. In their case, they threw in completely clueless people from the start and made them kill each other. In our case, we¡¯re just fostering competition on a world scale, not forcing people to kill each other without knowing why. Yeah, it should be fine to start simple, like a proxy war. Our team versus Dalos¡¯s team. It might even have a bit of a constellation-story feel to it. This is good, isn¡¯t it? [ Sounds fun. Let¡¯s give it a try. ] [ Good. ] Dalos seems to like it too, nodding his head. Yes, this is it. After all, outer gods should play with other outer gods. There¡¯s no fun in playing with the creatures I create anyway. First, I decided on the basic framework of the world as a conflict between magic and machinery. Naturally, I¡¯m magic, and they¡¯re machinery. Actually, as someone from a sci-fi background, I¡¯d prefer to go with science vs. science. However, having distinct differences makes the conflict easier and more intuitive. In that sense, the conflict between magic and machinery is about as intuitive as it gets. In sci-fi terms, it could be compared to the conflict between the Meias race and the Lubaran race. Of course, the Lubarans were inherently stronger then, but this time I plan to ensure proper balance. If it becomes a contest of who can use more divine power, honestly, I wouldn¡¯t stand a chance against Dalos, a higher outer god. Naturally, I plan to set the racial values at exactly the same level. Since I¡¯ve created beings like the Warden race and Eugene before, I have no trouble creating beings that exceed racial value limitations. While this might give me an advantage, Dalos also has experience creating Metallians with me. Plus, compared to magic, the science and machinery side has more versatility, which is a merit. This might turn out to be a more interesting battle than expected. Shall we create it first? Our magic side. The racial value I¡¯ve set is around 400. I figured that¡¯s just right since too high would make it boring. The machinery side isn¡¯t quite at the level of Metallians or Lubarans, maybe more like the Terra race before Eugene¡¯s appearance. Roughly cyberpunk-level machine science? Hmm, this side should be similar. Not quite at the Meias race level where everyone is proficient in magic, but more like occasional births of those with magical talent. Basically, make them weak at birth to reduce racial values, but give them the potential to accumulate magical power and become proficient in magic as they learn. Think of it as something like a magic empire in a fantasy world. Ah, a battle between a fantasy world¡¯s magic empire and cyberpunk. I¡¯m looking forward to it. Of course, I don¡¯t plan to just create straightforward magicians. This is a battle of skills. So I should hide at least one hidden card. Magic is something where one or two overwhelming powers are stronger than many weak ones. So after creating the magic empire¡­ I¡¯ll invest all remaining racial values into creating a few genius magicians. Let¡¯s call them something like the Four Grand Magicians? Hehehe, good, good. This should be enough. Well then, shall we see who wins? Chapter 121 : Prelude to War The continent of Rohal has a very peculiar history. Namely, that the conflict between science and magic has persisted for hundreds of years. They refused to accept each other, remaining in constant opposition and waging numerous wars, both large and small, for about 300 years. However, their powers were always evenly matched, so time simply passed without either side achieving a decisive victory. Thus, the western part of the Rohal continent belonged to the Lakru Empire, a world of magic. The eastern part was controlled by the Dhala Republic, a world of science and machinery. Their long-standing opposition wasn¡¯t merely due to their different technologies. ¡°Those arrogant and foolish ones who don¡¯t believe in god.¡± ¡°The great magic god Lak will bring divine punishment upon them.¡± ¡°You speak as if you¡¯re gods. There are no gods in this world. Only science exists.¡± ¡°Your magic is nothing but a scientific phenomenon that can be explained through the manipulation of internal mana using formulas.¡± Their ideologies were fundamentally incompatible. The Lakru Empire worshipped the god of magic and believed magic was a divine gift, while the Dhala Republic maintained there were no gods and everything simply followed the laws of physics. They continued to fight, never mixing with each other. Today. They began preparing for the great war that would put an end to their long-standing conflict. ¡°Lak has given us divine revelation.¡± ¡°We shall sweep them all away.¡± It began with the Lakru Empire. The Lakru Empire dispatched their First Knight Order, said to be the strongest among all magic knight orders, with serious intentions of starting a war. ¡°They¡¯re invading again.¡± ¡°How many times is this now?¡± The border guards on duty sighed deeply as they watched the Lakru Empire¡¯s knight order advancing openly. Rather than tension about war, they only felt exasperation that it was starting again. The guard immediately picked up the radio to report the enemy invasion. ¡°This is Dorak City Guard Section 7. Enemy invasion confirmed.¡± [We¡¯ve confirmed it too. They¡¯re all showing up on our detection grid. Pretty bold, aren¡¯t they?] The superiors had already confirmed the radar detection, making the report unnecessary. They clicked their tongues. They¡¯re invading openly. This meant one of two things. Either they¡¯re confident they can win even with such an obvious approach, or it¡¯s merely a provocation. There had been cases where they would approach the border like this, not attacking but moving around to provoke. ¡°It seems like the former. Those are¡­ the First Knight Order¡­!¡± As they got close enough to be identified, the guard could determine who they were. The First Knight Order, considered the strongest magic knight order in the Lakru Empire. Their commander, Knight Commander Oreka, was visible. ¡°What? The First Knight Order?¡± At those words, the guard captain startled and hastily grabbed the guard¡¯s binoculars. After confirming it was indeed the First Knight Order, he gritted his teeth. ¡°Those bastards¡­ looks like they¡¯re serious this time.¡± The First Knight Order. Known as the Lakru Empire¡¯s strongest knight order, they were estimated to have combat power equivalent to one mechanized division of the Dhala Republic. This was certainly not a force to be deployed for typical small-scale skirmishes. Usually, when they sent knight orders, they would send lower-ranked ones or just a small portion of an order. ¡°Emergency situation! They¡¯ve really come to wage war this time!¡± ¡°¡­!!¡± ¡°Hmm.¡± At the guard captain¡¯s words, the entire guard unit began to tense up. A real, proper war. Though it had happened before, it had been quite a while since the last one. Most had been small-scale battles. And those were just minor provocations, not real attempts at war. ¡°Reporting in. Confirmed the invading enemy is the entire First Knight Order. I repeat, confirmed the presence of the entire First Knight Order.¡± The higher-ups naturally became tense upon hearing the report. This was truly the prelude to war. ¡°We¡¯ve issued a Level 1 alert to the 3rd Division at the border. We¡¯re ready to begin war operations at any moment.¡± In the conference room where the highest commanders of the Dhala Republic had gathered. They were discussing the impending war. ¡°How do you assess the situation?¡± ¡°This can¡¯t be seen as a mere provocation. They clearly intend to wage a full-scale war.¡± S~ea??h the n?vel_Fire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. ¡°Even if it were meant as a provocation or harassment, we cannot dare let this slide.¡± ¡°Indeed. I believe we must respond decisively.¡± They haven¡¯t attacked yet. They¡¯re just quietly stationed in the border surveillance zone. It was as if they were giving time to prepare for war. As if they intended to crush everything once preparations were complete. That intention was palpable. Even if this was merely for show, the Dhala Republic had no intention of letting it pass. A provocation of this scale warranted starting a war from their side, even if the other side hadn¡¯t intended it. That¡¯s why they had placed the entire 3rd Division on Level 1 alert, with other divisions standing by ready to provide support at any moment. ¡°We must consider the possibility of a trap.¡± ¡°The fact that only the First Knight Order is here concerns me.¡± Amidst all this, the possibility of a trap was being raised. No matter how powerful the First Knight Order was, equivalent to a full division¡¯s strength, it seemed suspicious that they only sent them to the surveillance zone. There was concern that they might be trying to draw attention here while launching a surprise attack elsewhere. ¡°Still, we can¡¯t ignore the First Knight Order. We don¡¯t know how many forces they have waiting in reserve.¡± It was a situation requiring attention on all fronts. They had no choice but to divide their forces. They couldn¡¯t focus too much on one area, but they couldn¡¯t leave things alone either. The Dhala Republic found itself in deep contemplation. ¡°As expected, they haven¡¯t concentrated their forces here.¡± ¡°Yes. They seem to be considering the possibility of a trap.¡± Through the First Knight Order¡¯s report, they confirmed that the 3rd Division had been put on alert. However, their report indicated there were no movements beyond that. The Supreme Commander of the Lakru Empire smiled slyly upon hearing this report and said, ¡°Shall we shake them up a bit more? Third Knight Order, prepare to deploy.¡± ¡°Third Knight Order preparing for deployment. I¡¯ll relay the orders.¡± They prepared the Third Knight Order, which, while not as strong as the First Knight Order, was the third strongest knight order. They planned to send them to the border region where the First Knight Order was stationed. Once the Third Knight Order showed up there as well, the other side would surely be more unsettled. That was what they were aiming for. ¡®Yes, become more unsettled. Move your forces. Move more forces to this side.¡¯ Draw their attention to this area. Then have the prepared secret special forces attack from another direction. It was a simple diversionary tactic. But it wasn¡¯t just simple. They would gradually deploy forces near where the First Knight Order was stationed, testing the waters. If the response was halfhearted, they were prepared to engage in a head-on battle. The Dhala Republic would have much to worry about. Whether to concentrate their forces for a proper response, or keep them dispersed in consideration of surprise attacks elsewhere. ¡®I can see right through your thoughts. You foolish ones who rely only on machines.¡¯ Humans can develop themselves further through the great power of mana bestowed by the gods. Yet from their perspective, they couldn¡¯t understand the Dhala Republic, which sought to rely on mere machines created by humans. That¡¯s why the people of the Lakru Empire thought of them as fools who had abandoned divine power. However, they weren¡¯t as foolish as the Lakru Empire thought. ¡°The Third Knight Order has been spotted.¡± ¡°Hah, are they playing games now?¡± The Dhala Republic saw through the Lakru Empire¡¯s intentions. They were probing them. Forcing them to choose between concentrating or dispersing their forces. ¡®They probably plan to attack wherever becomes vulnerable, whichever choice we make.¡¯ But that was underestimating the Dhala Republic¡¯s response capabilities. ¡°The war has already begun anyway. It doesn¡¯t matter who attacks first. They provoked us first.¡± The Dhala Republic had no intention of waiting. They planned to attack first. ¡°Where¡¯s the area with the weakest defenses, away from where the knight orders are gathered?¡± ¡°The border region under the Fifth Knight Order¡¯s control.¡± ¡°Good, we¡¯ll strike there. Deploy the 6th Division to the forces currently in standoff, and send everything else except the garrison forces there.¡± ¡°Yes, sir!¡± Following the commander¡¯s orders, commands were swiftly relayed and forces began to move. To avoid detection by the Lakru Empire, stealth forces capable of moving covertly moved first. They reached the other border region. ¡®As expected, they haven¡¯t anticipated this at all.¡¯ Seeing the relaxed guard forces despite the imminent possibility of war, the stealth forces who realized they had struck true began to move quickly. ¡®Commence attack.¡¯ BOOM!! A massive explosion erupted from one side of the Lakru Empire¡¯s walls. This was the true beginning of the war. Chapter 122 : Cosmic Horror Neck and neck. The war continued with such intensity that it was impossible to tell who had the upper hand. [ Yes, this is how it should be. It¡¯s no fun when one side is too dominant. ] S§×ar?h the ¦ÇovelFire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality. A deeply satisfied smile forms at the sight. Truth be told, it took longer than expected to reach this point. Sometimes one side would be overwhelmingly strong due to imbalance, or it would be obvious who would win. Such things happened frequently. Dalos and I had been making various adjustments to achieve this balance. And now we¡¯ve achieved the perfect balance. A battle where the victor is unknown! Yes, this is how war should be entertaining. [ ¡­¡­ ] While thinking this and looking down, a sudden thought occurs. ¡®But isn¡¯t this all going according to my intentions anyway?¡¯ Which side wins, and even the fact that it¡¯s an unpredictable neck-and-neck battle ¨C it¡¯s all according to my design. Everything flows according to plan. Upon realizing this fact, my interest in this war game instantly began to fade. [ How boring. ] Just moments after finding joy in the evenly matched battle, my interest vanishes in an instant. Ah¡­ this isn¡¯t good. Creating this war game in search of new entertainment, finally balancing it perfectly, only to lose interest immediately. This pattern is exactly the same as before. Is it inevitable that from the perspective of someone who creates and balances games, no matter how fun you make them, they¡¯ll always become tedious? Well, like a game developer. It¡¯s natural to get bored when you¡¯re a developer who can freely adjust any value at will. Because everything can be decided with a single click. If there¡¯s a result you don¡¯t like, just one click. Even when I created this perfectly balanced war game where the winner is uncertain because I disliked that aspect, in the end, even that was created with just one click. Regardless of the outcome, how could it possibly remain interesting? After all, no matter how many times they clash, we¡¯re just waiting for the inevitable 5-5 result. [ Sigh. ] Hearing my sigh, Dalos quietly approaches me. [ You¡¯ve lost interest. ] And as if feeling the same way, his metallic voice was filled with boredom. Indeed, this isn¡¯t enjoyable anymore. In the end, I too am living an eternal life, engaging in bizarre acts to alleviate eternal boredom. Am I becoming just like the other Outer Gods who commit all sorts of outrageous acts out of boredom? Well, in my case, there is something greater at stake, but. Still, won¡¯t the end result be the same? [ I¡¯m going to check on my universe. ] After quickly getting bored of the war game and tossing it aside, I go to check on the state of the sci-fi universe. After recently turning back time, it seems they¡¯re just starting to begin their war with the Warden. Well, since I planted the seeds, I should see how it turns out. I could see the result with just one click¡­ but I deliberately blocked information about the outcome. Though I know even that will quickly become boring, it was a measure taken for momentary enjoyment. Looking at things like this, I seem to have become no different from the other Outer Gods. [ Have you arrived? ] [ Yes, I have. So, was there any fun this time? ] When I went to the laboratory where my universes were waiting, Idra and Nyarlathotep were there. [ Hm? That appearance¡­ ] But something was strange about Nyarlathotep¡¯s appearance. Originally appearing as a grotesquely twisted mass of giant tentacles, suddenly she was in the form of a beautiful young woman I had seen before. Along with Idra, who had always taken the form of a beauty, it became quite a situation with two beings in the form of beautiful human women greeting me. [ ¡­Just thought you might prefer this form. ] [ ¡­¡­ ] Those words surprised me greatly. How could this be. That was unmistakably a shy expression, wasn¡¯t it? Like a girl in love wanting to appear at her most beautiful before the person she likes. That kind of desire was palpable. Love, shyness, desire for recognition. Could an Outer God feel such emotions? This was the most surprising thing since becoming an Outer God. Of course, I was even more surprised that I was the object of these feelings, and it was absolutely astounding that the shy one was Nyarlathotep. Indeed, a supreme Outer God. Truly an unpredictable being. [ ¡­!! ] At that moment, I realized something incredible. Yes, why hadn¡¯t I thought of it before? The Outer Gods. They aren¡¯t beings I can control with just one click, are they? Completely unpredictable beings. Perhaps they could provide me with new excitement and enjoyment? Just like right now. Honestly, who could have predicted that Nyarlathotep would develop such girlish feelings for me? [ ¡­Ahem. ] Nyarlathotep also seemed somewhat uncomfortable, perhaps unfamiliar with these feelings. Of course, she must understand very well what these emotions are. After all, she¡¯s an Outer God who knows much about created life forms. That¡¯s probably why it¡¯s more confusing. She probably never thought she¡¯d experience emotions typically felt by created beings. [ Hmm, well well. This is quite interesting. ] Both Nyarlathotep and I had noticed, and there was no way Idra, who was standing beside us, wouldn¡¯t have noticed too. After all, she was one of those rare Outer Gods filled with affection and love. She was most familiar with those emotions. [ W-What is it? ] [ Oh nothing. Just noting that you can make such expressions too. ] [ Hmph, what¡¯s wrong with my expression? ] As they bickered with each other, I had a strange sense of d¨¦j¨¤ vu. From the countless worlds I had created. And from the various worlds that had existed originally. It felt like watching female protagonists bickering over the main character. Wait, does that make me the protagonist in this situation? That thought made me chuckle. [ Heheh. ] Come to think of it, I didn¡¯t need to look far. There was no need to create countless worlds. With unpredictable beings right before my eyes, there was no reason to watch predictable stories even with blocked information. Yes, the Outer Gods. I just needed to observe the Outer Gods. That would bring me new stimulation. I guess I had been trapped in too narrow a perspective. Probably because of my memories of being human. Though those memories did provide many fun experiences. Those memories are probably why I find such fascination and interest in these Outer Gods¡¯ emotions. Well anyway. Still, let me check one last time where I was born¡­ well, I¡¯m not sure if ¡°born¡± is the right word. Anyway, let me see how the seeds I planted in the sci-fi universe will be harvested. After checking that, I¡¯ll go seek new horizons of enjoyment. Warden. The worst aliens ever created, modeled after the Zerg race from StarcXft, with their racial attributes pushed nearly to the maximum. However, in the end, their power ¨C psionic energy ¨C was also obtained by the Galactic Alliance. With this power as their foundation, they stood against the Warden race once again. Five ¡®Agents¡¯ appeared, born from the Transcendent Being who led the Warden, entities that had once struck fear into the Galactic Alliance fleet. [ Damn it¡­! That number is cheating! You crazy main body! ] Yujin finally couldn¡¯t hold back and exploded, going so far as to curse at me. Ah, well¡­ Though I created them that way, honestly, they seem like a rather overpowered race. Five blade monsters capable of unleashing level 12 psionic storms. Honestly, I worried this might be too intense even for the Galactic Alliance. But that worry was, of course, unnecessary. [ Ugh¡­ my grand plans¡­ ] Their war came to an end as the Transcendent Being collapsed, spouting childish cartoon-like dialogue about their childish cartoon-like plan for universal domination. ¡­Though it¡¯s chilling to think that unlike a childish cartoon, they actually had the specs to make it possible. Well anyway. The exploration of Zone Z, and the space war that was essentially fought for universal hegemony, ended in victory for the Galactic Alliance forces. They now possessed the tremendously powerful force of psionic energy, and with this as their foundation, they would expand their influence while exploring the entire universe. After all, there were no beings left in this universe who could stop them. [ Sigh, still worried about what¡¯s ahead. ] Yujin seems concerned that future exploration will be quite challenging, but there¡¯s no need to worry. Because I no longer intend to interfere with any of you. I have found new interests. And because of these interests, I have no time to concern myself with mere universes. Observing the Outer Gods, able to feel their everything. An even higher existence that only I can become. I must prepare to ascend to that place. [ ¡­¡­ ] With these thoughts, I gaze down at the sci-fi universe that was like my hometown. There were many events. The Outer Gods, the universe, and the cracks where countless universes unfold. Reincarnation as an Outer God. Even if those are implanted memories, such things don¡¯t matter much. Whether they¡¯re implanted memories or I was actually human. Because if Azathoth wishes it, anything can change. In the end, I too was Azathoth¡¯s ¡®Yujin,¡¯ created for the most enjoyable observation of Outer Gods. [ Well, I too must become such a being now. ] This guy was having all the fun observing Outer Gods by himself. I should join that line too, and enjoy an even more interesting show. A new Azathoth. A new origin. Becoming¡­ a new world. Beyond the universe, the world above. An omnipotent being watching even the world above from outside the screen. I became¡­ a cosmic horror even within the world of omnipotent cracks.